This is a reproduction of a library book that was digitized

by Google as part of an ongoing effort to preserve the

information in books and make it universally accessible.

http://books.google.com
1 -3^s-o-a$3-2tf-a

TM 9-2350-253-20-2
*

TECHNICAL MANUAL

ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE

MANUAL

TANK, COMBAT, FULL TRACKED:

105-MM GUN, M60A3

(2350-00-148-6548)

AND

(2350-01-061-2306) TTS

TURRET

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

April 1980

This copy is a reprint which includes current

pages from Changes i through 5 .

UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA LIBRARY

 WARNING

mm

laser light

The laser beam of the laser rangefinder can be dangerous and cause blindness
if it enters the eye, either directly or reflected from a shiny surface. To minimize
the possibility of any such incident, you must have had laser safety training prior to
operation of the laser.
The laser rangefinder will be used only on ranges approved for and designated
as laser firing ranges.
The blister cover for the laser receiver/transmitter must be locked closed at
all times except during actual lasing on approved ranges. Ensure blister cover is
locked in the open position when ranging.
The laser rangefinder cannot penetrate targets; however, it can cause
blindness if the beam from the laser enters the eye directly or is reflected into it.
The precautions required for direct-fire, line-of-sight weapons must be enforced
while operating the laser.
Laser operators will fire only at designated targets which are diffuse
reflectors (nonreflective) and will not fire at reflective surfaces, such as glass,
mirrors, windows, etc.
The laser will not be used in two-sided tactical exercises unless all personnel
are equipped with appropriate laser eye protection and the maneuver area has been
designated a laser firing range.
Laser protective eyewear must be worn by all personnel required to be down
range of the laser. (Laser safety goggles, NSN 4240-00-258-2054, meet safety
requirement.)
To prevent potential hazards to personnel without protective goggles from
diffuse reflections, the laser must not be fired at targets closer than 10 meters.
Optical instruments such as telescopes, periscopes, binoculars will not be
permitted to observe the target area during lasing unless all flat reflective surfaces
have been removed from the target area or unless appropriate laser safety filters
or goggles are used.
Laser filters are provided for the eyepieces of all target-viewing instruments.
The filters must be in position prior to lasing.
Note: TB MED 279 and AR 385-63 are the source documents for laser safety.
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

WARNING

CARBON MONOXIDE POISONING CAN BE DEADLY

Carbon monoxide is a colorless, odorless, deadly poisonous gas, which when

breathed deprives the body of oxygen and causes suffocation. Exposure to air
contaminated with carbon monoxide produces symptoms of headache, dizziness,
loss of muscular control, apparent drowsiness, and/or coma. Permanent brain
damage or death can result from severe exposure. Carbon monoxide occurs in the
exhaust fumes of fuel-burning heaters and internal-combustion engines and
becomes dangerously concentrated under conditions of inadequate ventilation. The
following precautions must be observed to ensure the safety of personnel whenever
the personnel heater, main, or auxiliary engine of any vehicle is operated for
maintenance purposes or tactical use.

1. DO NOT operate heater or engine of vehicle in an enclosed area unless it

is ADEQUATELY VENTILATED.

2. DO NOT idle engine for long periods without maintaining ADEQUATE

VENTILATION in personnel compartments.

3. DO NOT drive any vehicle with inspection plates, cover plates, or engine
compartment doors removed unless necessary for maintenance purposes.

4. BE ALERT at all times during vehicle operation for exhaust odors and
exposure symptoms. If either are present, IMMEDIATELY VENTILATE
personnel compartments. If symptoms persist, remove affected personnel
from vehicle and treat as follows: expose to fresh air; keep warm; DO
NOT PERMIT PHYSICAL EXERCISE; if necessary, administer artificial
respiration.

5. Neither the gas-particulate filter unit nor the M25A1 protective mask
protect you against carbon monoxide poisoning.

THE BEST DEFENSE AGAINST CARBON MONOXIDE POISONING IS ADEQUATE

VENTILATION.

a
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

WARNING

RADIATION HAZARD - TTS

The antireflective coating on all infrared optics contains thorium fluoride which is slightly
radioactive. The only potential hazard involves ingestion (swallowing or inhaling) of this coating
material. Dispose of broken lenses from the optical infrared portion of the head assembly in
accordance with AR 755-15.

WARNING

Handle charged fire extinguisher cylinder with care. Do not jar or subject cylinder to temperatures
above 140 °F.

WARNING

FRH fluid may contain Tricresyl Phosphate which may be absorbed through the skin and pro
duces paralysis if taken internally. Appropriate protective measures should be taken to avoid such
exposures.

b Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Technical Manual HEADQUARTERS

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
No. 9-2350-253-20-2 WASHINGTON, D.C., 15 APRIL 1980
ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 105-MM GUN, M60A3
(NSN 2350-00-148-6548) AND
fNSN 2350-01-061-2306) TTS (TURRET)

REPORTING OF ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS

You can help improve this manual. If you find any mistake or if you know
of a way to improve the procedures, please let us know. Mail your letter,
DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms), or
DA Form 2028-2 located in the back of this manual direct to: Commander,
U.S. Army Armament, Munitions and Chemical Command, Attn: AMSMC-MAS,
Rock Island, Illinois 61299-6000. A reply will be furnished to you.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph Page
CHAPTER I. INTRODUCTION
Section I. General 1-1 1-1
II. Description and tabulated data 1-8 1-3
CHAPTER 2. SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND SERVICES
Section I. Service upon receipt of materiel 2-1 2-1
II. Lubrication instructions 2-3 2-6
in. Preventive maintenance checks and services-
(PMCS) 2-5 2-6
IV. Turret hydraulic system services 2-8 2-18
V. Fire control and sighting system
Check and Purging 2-11 2-26
CHAPTER 3. TROUBLESHOOTING 3-1 3- 1
4. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 4-1 4- 1
5. MAINTENANCE OF TURRET ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
Section I. System description 5-1 5-1
n. Maintenance of turret radio interference
suppressors 5-2 5-1
HI. Maintenance of domelight 5-5 5-2
IV. Maintenance of turret electrical contact ring
assembly 5-10 5-6
V. Maintenance of slipring traverse safety
limit (interference) switch 5-13 5-9
VL Maintenance of gun elevation interference
switch 5-17 5-11
VII. Maintenance of turret ventilator blower
assembly 5-21 5-12
VIII. Maintenance of powerpack blower assembly. . . . 5-24 5-14
IX. Maintenance of gunner's control box assembly. . . 5-29 5-16
X. Maintenance of turret power relav and circuit
breaker box 5-37 5-20
XI. Maintenance of blasting machine 5-40 5-21
XII. Maintenance of stabilization control
selector 5-44 5-22
XIII. Maintenance of commander's control panel
assembly 5-48 5-23
XIV. Maintenance of networks box assembly 5-52 5-25

Change 2 i
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CHAPTER 5. MAINTENANCE OF TURRET ELECTRICAL

SYSTEM - Continued Paragraph

XV. Maintenance of Electronics Controller

Unit (ECU) 5-56
XVI. Maintenance of stabilization rate sensor assembly . . 5-61
XVII. Maintenance of loader's safety switch 5-65'
XVIII. Maintenance of loader's stabilization emergency
shut-off switch box assembly 5-73
XIX. Maintenance of gun firing relay assembly 5-77
XX. Maintenance of electromagnetic interference (EMI)
filter 5-80
XXI. Maintenance of commander's stabilization
emergency shut-off switch box assembly 5-83
XXIL Maintenance of turret ventilator blower
distribution box assembly 5-86
CHAPTER 6. MAINTENANCE OF TURRET PLATFORM
AND BASKET EQUIPMENT
Section I. Maintenance of commander's seat 6-1 6-1
II. Maintenance of commander's swing seat 6-7 6-7
III. Maintenance of gunner's seat and pedestal
assembly 6-13 6-9
IV. Maintenance of loader's seat 6-19 6-15
V. Maintenance of turret traverse lock assembly 6-25 6-18
VI. Maintenance of turret blisters 6-29 6-20
VII. Maintenance of turret platform battery access
door 6-36 6-21
CHAPTER 7. MAINTENANCE OF DOORS AND PORTS
Section I. Maintenance of loader's hatch assembly 7-1 7-1
II. Maintenance of cupola (commander's) hatch
assembly 7-13 7-7
CHAPTER 8. MAINTENANCE OF TURRET MANUAL
ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING COMPONENTS
Section I. System Description 8-1 8-1
II. Maintenance of turret hand traversing drive 8-2 8-1
III. Maintenance of turret hand elevating pump
assembly handle firing switch 8-8 8-4
IV. Maintenance of manual elevation accumulator 8-11 8-6
CHAPTER 9. MAINTENANCE OF CUPOLA MANUAL
ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING COMPONENTS
Section I. System description 9-1 9-1
II. Maintenance of cupola elevation screwjack
assembly 9-2 9-1
III. Maintenance of cupola azimuth gearbox 9-7 9-3
IV. Maintenance of cupola azimuth lock assembly 9-10 9-6
CHAPTER 10. MAINTENANCE OF POWER ELEVATING
AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM
Section I. System description 10-1 10-1
II. Maintenance of traverse backlash cylinder assembly 10-3 10-4
III. Maintenance of deck clearance valve 10-9
IV. Maintenance of traversing gearbox pinlock
assembly 10-9

Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CHAPTER 10. MAINTENANCE OF POWER ELEVATING

AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - Continued Paragraph Page

V. Maintenance of no-bak assembly 10-19 10-13

VI. Maintenance of main accumulator 10-28 10-18
VII. Maintenance of commander's control assembly
and linkage 10-33 10-20
VIII. Maintenance of gunner's control assembly 10-37 10-22
IX. Maintenance of superelevation actuator 10-42 10-30
X. Maintenance of superelevation actuator drive
shaft 10-46 10-31
XI. Maintenance of power pack reservoir 10-50 10-32
XII. Maintenance of power pack electric drive motor . . . 10-55 10-34
XIII. Maintenance of main gun elevating mechanism
assembly 10-58 10-38
XIV. Maintenance of elevation shut-off valve assembly . . 10-61 10-40
XV. Maintenance of miscellaneous hydraulic valves
and filters 10-65 10-41
CHAPTER 11. MAINTENANCE OF STOWAGE BOXES, RACKS,
PROTECTIVE PADS, MACHINE GUN
INTERRUPTER AND GUN SHIELD COVER
Section Maintenance of ammunition stowage boxes,
racks, and miscellaneous stowage boxes and
components 11-1 11-1
II. Maintenance of protection pads 11-5 11-10
III. Maintenance of turret exterior stowage brackets,
straps, machine gun interrupter and gun shield
cover 11-8 11-12
CHAPTER 12. MAINTENANCE OF TEST EQUIPMENT
Section I. Maintenance of cable test set 12-1 12- 1
II. Maintenance of turret electrical system test set ... 12-3 12-1
m. Maintenance of stabilization test set 12-9 12- 11
CHAPTER 13. MAINTENANCE OF TURRET ARMAMENT
Section I. Description 13-1 13- 1
n. Maintenance of breech operating mechanism 13-5 13-1
m. Repair of breech ring group 13-12 13-6
IV. Maintenance of main gun tube assembly 13-18 13-9
v. Maintenance of replenisher assembly 13-23 13-11
VI. Maintenance of 7.62-mm coaxial machine gun
mount and related parts 13-28 13-13
VII. Maintenance of M239 smoke grenade launcher 13-37 13-19
VIII. Maintenance of nylon ballistics shield 13-48 13- 29
CHAPTER 14. MAINTENANCE OF CUPOLA ARMAMENT
Section I. System description 14-1 14- 1
II. Maintenance of caliber .50 ammunition box
and feed system 14-3 14-1
IIL Maintenance of vision blocks 14-6 14-3
IV. Maintenance of cradle assembly and cover 14-10 14-5
CHAPTER 15. MAINTENANCE OF SIGHTING AND FIRE
CONTROL EQUIPMENT
Section I. Description 15-1 15-1
II. Maintenance of driver's M27 periscope seal 15-6 15-5

iii
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CHAPTER 15. MAINTENANCE OF SIGHTING AND FIRE

CONTROL EQUIPMENT - Continued Paragraph Page

III. Maintenance of loader's M37 periscope 15-9 15-5

IV. Maintenance of driver's night vision viewer
AN-VVS/2 15-12 15-5
V. Maintenance of fire control (elevation) quadrant
M13A3 and light source control 8620860 15-18 15-7
VI. Maintenance of M30 and M50 instrument lights 15-23 15-8
VII. Maintenance of commander's M36E1 periscope 15-26 15-8
VIII. Maintenance of commander's M119 periscope
mount 15-30 15-12.5
IX. Maintenance of gunner's M35 El periscope 15-37 15-15
X. Maintenance of gunner's M118E1 periscope mount .. 15-41 15-18
XI. Maintenance of M105D articulated telescope 15-46 15-19
XII. Maintenance of M10A3 ballistics drive and boot 15-60 15-25
XIII. Maintenance of azimuth indicator M28E2 15-66 15-27
XIV. Maintenance of XM21 ballistics computer system .. . 15-72 15-28
XV. Maintenance of laser rangefinder system 15-101 15-41
XVI. Maintenance of TTS (Tank Thermal Sight AN/VSG-2) 15-109 15-47
CHAPTER 16. MAINTENANCE OF SEARCHLIGHT
EQUIPMENT
Section I. Maintenance of searchlight master control unit,
dummy connectors, and mounting parts 16-1 16-1
II. Maintenance of searchlight remote control box,
dummy connector, external cable connector,
and mounting parts 16-4 16-4
CHAPTER 17. MAINTENANCE OF CBR EQUIPMENT 17-1 17-1
CHAPTER 18. PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER AND
MOUNTING BRACKET 18-1 18-1
APPENDIX A. REFERENCES A-l
B. MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART B-l
C. EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST .. C-l
D. DELETED
INDEX Index-1

iv Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Figure Title Page

1-1. Tank, combat, full-tracked, 105-mm gun M60A3 - left front view 1-1
1-2. Tank, combat, full-tracked, 105-mm gun M60A3 - right rear view 1-2
1-3. Gun elevation and turret traversing hydraulic schematic 1-5
1-4. Turret and gun control system, including stabilization 1-6
1-5. Torque transmission diagram - power traversing of turret 1-7
1-6. Torque transmission diagram - manual traversing of turret 1-7
1-7. Laser rangefinder (LRF) components 1-11
1-8. Fabricated tools 1-14
1-9. Power pack pump electric drive motor removal/installation tool 1-15
2- 1. Deprocessing vehicle and equipment 2-2
2-2. Installation of turret equipment 2-3
2-3. Hydraulic line fittings 2-19
2-4. Checking main accumulator for proper nitrogen pressure and
reservoir for hydraulic fluid level 2-21
2-5. Draining turret hydraulic system 2-22
2-6. Bleeding turret hydraulic system 2-23
2-7. Charging main accumulator or manual elevation accumulator 2-24
2-8. Error calibration of gunner's quadrant M1A1 2-26
2-9. Synchronization and alinement level vial and eccentric adjustments 2-29
2-10. Cant unit fixture, installed 2-38
2-11. Nitrogen purging kit 2-42
2-12. Periscope M35 El, purge fittings 2-44
2-13. Periscope M 36 El, purge fittings 2-45
2-14. Articulated telescope M105D, purge fittings 2-47
I 2-15. Reticle projector unit, purge fittings 2-47
2-16. Receiver-Transmitter purge fittings 2-48
2-17. Tank thermal sight Commander's display, purge fittings 2-48
2-18. Tank thermal sight Gunner's display, purge fittings 2-49
2-19. Tank thermal sight Head assembly, purge fittings 2-49
2-20. Deleted I
3- 1. Multimeters used in troubleshooting 3-4
3-2. Mechanically zeroing the multimeter 3-5
3-3. Electrically zeroing multimeter AN/URM-105 3-6
3-4. Electrically zeroing multimeter TS-352 B/U 3-7
3-5. Electrically zeroing multimeter Simpson 160 3-8
3-6. Continuity testing 3-9
3-7. Short circuit test 3-10
3-8. Resistance measurement 3-11
3-9 DC voltage measurement setup 3-12
3-10. DC voltage measurement 3-14
3-11. AC voltage measurement setup 3-15
3-12. AC voltage measurement 3-16
3-13. Cable test set configuration for test of computer system cable 3W1 3-24

Change 3 v
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)

Figure Title Page

3-14. Cable test set configuration for test of computer system cable 3W2. . . 3-25
3-15. Cable test set configuration for test of computer system cable 3 W3. . . 3-26
3-16. LRF system cable interconnection diagram 3-28
3-17. Cable test set configuration for test of LRF system cables 3W33 ....
and 3W34 3-29
3-18. TTS system cable interconnection diagram 3-33
3-18.1. Cable test set configuration for test of TTS system cable 3 W4 3-32
3-19. Turret-cupola power distribution electrical schematic 3-37
3-20. Stabilization system power distribution electrical schematic 3-38
3-21. Elevating and traversing power control (power and stabilized mode)
electrical schematic 3-39
3-22. Commander's override circuit electrical schematic 3-40
3-23. Rear deck clearance diagram electrical schematic 3-41
3-24. Stabilization system traverse and elevation channel diagram 3-42
3-25. Stabilization system-computer system interface 3-43
3-26. Main gun and machine gun electrical control electrical schematic 3-44
3-27. Cupola and .50 caliber machine gun control electrical schematic 3-45
3-28. Searchlight, turret blower, and CBR power control 3-46
3-29. Turret lighting control 3-46
3-30. LRF-computer control interface 3-47
3- 31. M239 smoke grenade launcher system 3-48
4- 1. Replacement of plugs and receptacles 4-4
4- 2. Replacement of cable connectors 4-5
5- 1. Radio interference suppression capacitors location 5-2
5-2. Removal and installation of domelight 5-3
5-3. Replacement of domelight components 5-3
5-4. Domelight - exploded view 5-5
5-5. Slipring removal and installation 5-7
5-6. Removal, installation, and adjustment of traverse safety limit
(interference) switch 5-9
5-7. Removal, installation, and adjustment of gun elevation interference
switch 5-10
5_g Removal and installation of turret ventilator blower 5-12
5.9 Removal and installation of blower assembly 5-14
5_10 Removal, installation, and repair of gunner's control box 5-16
5. 11 Gunner's control box disassembly and assembly 5-18
5-12. Gunner's control box wiring diagram 5-19
5-13. Removal and installation of turret power relay and circuit breaker box 5-20
5-14. Removal and installation of blasting machine 5-21
5-15. Removal, installation, and repair of stabilization control selector assembly 5-22
5-16. Removal and installation of commander's control panel assembly 5-24
5-17. Removal and installation of networks box assembly 5-25
I5.I8 Removal and installation of ECU 5-26
549] Adjustment of ECU 5-27
5-20. Removal and installation of stabilization rate sensor 5-28
5-21. Removal, installation and repair of loader's safety switch 5-29
5-22. Adjustment of loader's safety switch assembly 5-30
5-23. Loader's stabilization emergency shut-off switch 5-33
5-24. Removal and installation of gun firing relay box 5-34

vi Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)

Figure Title Page

5-25. Removal and installation of EMI filter 5-36

5-26. Removal and installation of commander's stabilization emergency
shutoff box assembly 5-37
5-27. Removal, installation, and repair of turret ventilator blower
distribution box assembly 5-38
6- 1. Removal and installation of commander's seat 6-1
6-2. Disassembly and assembly of commander's seat 6-2
6-3. Commander's seat - exploded view 6-6
6-4. Removal, disassembly, assembly, and installation of commander's swing
seat 6-8
6-5. Commander's swing seat—exploded view 6-9
6-6. Removal and installation of gunner's seat and pedestal 6-10
6-7. Disassembly and assembly of gunner's seat and pedestal 6-11
6-8. Gunner's seat pedestal - exploded view 6-14
6-9. Removal, disassembly, assembly, and installation of loader's seat 6-16
6-10. Loader's seat - exploded view 6-18
6-11. Removal and installation of turret traverse lock assembly 6-18
6-12. Turret traverse lock assembly repair 6-19
6-13. Right turret blister 6-20
6-14. Removal and installation of turret platform battery access door
hinge and catch 6-22
7-1. Replacement of loader's hatch seal 7-1
7-2. Removal and installation of loader's hatch assembly components 7-3
7-3. Removal and installation of cupola hatch assembly 7-8
7-4. Replacement of door open handle clip, bearings, and protection pad -
cupola hatch assembly 7-9
7-5. Replacement of hold-open and hold-closed mechanisms - cupola
hatch assembly 7-10
8-1. Removal and installation of hand traversing drive 8-2
8-2. Disassembly and assembly of hand traversing drive 8-3
8-3. Removal and installation of hand elevating pump handle firing switch 8-5
8-4. Removal, installation, and charging of manual elevation accumulator 8-6
8-5. Repair of manual elevation accumulator 8-7
9-1. Replacement of gun firing trigger switch assembly 9-2 |
9-2. Removal, adjustment, and installation of cupola azimuth gearbox. ... 9-4
9-3. Removal and installation of azimuth gearbox crank components .... 9-5
9-4. Removal and installation of azimuth lock assembly 9-6
9-5. Disassembly and assembly of azimuth lock assembly 9-7
10-1. Gun elevating and turret traversing components and hydraulic tubes . . 10-2
10-2. Removal and installation of traverse backlash cylinder assembly .... 10-5
10-2.1. Antibacklash mechanism leakage tests 10-6 I
10-3. Backlash cylinder assembly, disassembly and assembly 10-6
10-4. Adjustment of traversing mechanism gearbox backlash 10-7
10-5. Backlash cylinder floating shaft adjustment 10-8
10-6. Removal and installation of deck clearance valve solenoid 10-10
10-7. Removal and installation of traversing gearbox hydraulic pin lock
assembly and components 10-11
10-8. Removal and installation of turret traversing gearbox no-bak
i assembly 10-13

Change 2 vii
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)

Figure Title Page

10-9. Disassembly and assembly of turret traversing gearbox no-bak 10-14

10-10. Turret traversing gearbox no-bak - partial exploded view 10-16
10-11. Repair of main accumulator 10-19
10-12. Main accumulator removal and installation 10-19
10-13. Adjustment of commander's control linkage 10-21
10-14. Removal and installation of commander's control assembly 10-22
10-15. Gunner's control assembly 10-23
10-16. Removal and installation of gunner's control assembly 10-23
10-17. Removal, adjustment, and installation of adjustable resistor assembly 10-25
10-18. Removal and installation of gunner's control handle switches 10-27
10-19. Adjustment of gunner's control handle trigger switches and palm
switches 10-29
10-20. Removal, installation, and check of superelevation actuator 10-30
10-21. Removal, adjustment, and installation of superelevation actuator
drive shaft 10-31
10-22. Removal and installation of reservoir drain cock 10-33
10-23. Removal and installation of reservoir liquid level sight gage and oil strainer. 10-33
10-24. Power pack electric drive motor removal and installation 10-35
10-25. Elevating mechanism and front bracket removal and installation 10-39
10-26. Removal and installation of hydraulic pressure gage and elevation shutoff
valve 10-41
10-27. Removal and installation of elevation servovalve or pilot check valves 10-42
10-28. Removal and installation of hydraulic pressure switch 10-43
10-29. Removal and installation of commander's power solenoid valve and
override solenoid 10-44
10-30. Removal and installation of stabilization solenoid valve 10-45
10-31. Removal and installation of traverse stabilization valve covers 10-46
10-32. Servicing stabilization system filter assembly 10-47
I 10-32.1. Stabilization filters 10-49
10-33. Removal and installation of selector valve 10-50
11-1. Removal and installation of ammunition stowage boxes and racks . . . . 11-2
11-2. Removal and installation of periscope stowage boxes, miscellaneous
■ racks, brackets, trays, boxes, and guards 11-5
11-3. Removal and installation of driver's night viewer stowage box, rations
box, and oddment stowage box 11-6
11-4. Replacement of cushion inserts in driver's night viewer stowage box 11-7
11-5. Repair of driver's night viewer stowage box 11-8
11-6. Repair of rations box 11-9
11-7. Typical placement of personnel protection pads 11-11
11-8. Turret exterior stowage brackets, straps, machine gun interrupter,
and mounting parts 11-13
11-9. Removed and installation of gun shield cover and caliber
.50 machine gun interrupter 11-14
12-1. Cable test set 12-1
12-2. Turret electrical system test set 12-2
12-3. TESTS component location 12-2
12-4. Stabilization test set 12-12
12-5. Stabilization test set - front panel 12-12
13-1. Removal and installation of breech operating mechanism 13-2
13-2. Breech operating lever assembly - exploded view 13-4
13-3. Disassembly of breechblock closing mechanism assembly 13-5

viii Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)

Figure Title Page

13-4. Disassembly, assembly, and installation of breechring group 13-7

13-5. Breechring group - partial exploded view 13-8.1
13-5.1. Disassembly and assembly of firing pin 13-8.1
13-6. Removal and installation of rear thermal shroud 13-9
13-6.1. Shimming of front shroud 13-10
13-6.2. Positioning of cam assembly 13-10
13-7. Removal and installation of replenishes hose, and filling valve 13-12
13-8. Removal and installation of M240 7.62-mm coaxial machine gun mount
assembly with empty cartridge bag support and deflector assembly 13-14
13-9. M240 7.62-mm coaxial machine gun mount assembly - exploded view 13-15
13-10. M240 7.62-mm coaxial machine gun trigger adjustment 13-17
13-11. Deflector plate, removal and installation 13-18
13-12. 7.62-mm coaxial machine gun spare barrel stowage box removal and
installation 13-19
13-13. Smoke grenade discharger removal and installation 13-20
13-14. Grenade power box removal and installation 13-22
13-15. Smoke grenade pushbutton unit removal and installation 13-23
13-16. Discharger harness removal and installation 13-24
13-17. Smoke grenade harness assembly (6W1) removal and installation 13-26
13-18. Typical barrel measurement point for vehicle voltage 13-27
13-19. Left and right discharger barrel numbers 13-28
13-20. Smoke grenades stowage boxes removal and installation 13-29
13-21. Removal and installation of nylon ballistics shield 13-30
14- 1. Removal and installation of caliber .50 ammunition box and feed system. . . . 14-2
14-2. Removal and installation of cupola vision blocks 14-4
14-3. Removal and installation of cradle assembly 14-6
14-4. Disassembly and assembly of cradle assembly 14-9
15- 1. M21 ballistics computer system with cable interconnection diagram 15-3
15-2. Laser rangefinder system with cable interconnection diagram 15-4
15-3. Removal and installation of M27 periscope seal 15-5
15-4. Assembly and disassembly of driver's night viewer 15-6
15-5. Removal and installation of elevation quadrant M13A3 and light
source control 8620860 15-7
15-6. Removal and installation of M30 or M50 instrument lights (M50
shown, M30 similar) 15-8
15-7. Removal and installation of periscope M36E1 15-10
15-7.1 Removal and installation of periscope link assembly 15-12.2
15-7.2 Repair of periscope link assembly 15-12.3
15-7.3 Repair of periscope clamp assembly 15-12.3
15-7.4 Adjustment of periscope link assembly 15-12.4
15-7.5 Periscope reticle 15-12.5
15-8. Removal, inspection, repair, and installation of commander's
periscope headrests on M119 mount 15-13
15-9. Adjustment of gunner's periscope mount M118E1 or commander's
periscope mount M119 shield operating handle 15-13
15-10. Removal and installation of light source control from M119
commander's periscope mount 15-14
15-11. Removal and installation of periscope M35E1 15-16
15-12. Removal, inspection, repair, and installation of gunner's periscope
headrests on M118E1 mount 15-18
15-13. Removal and installation of articulated telescope M105D 15-20
15-14. Removal and installation of M105D articulated telescope headrest 15-22

Change 2 ix
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)

Figure Title Pag

15-15. Removal and installation of M105D articulated telescope filter box 15-22
15-16. Removal and installation of articulated telescope mount M114 15-23
15-17. Removal and installation of M105D articulated telescope light source
control 15-24
15-18. M10A3 ballistics drive 15-25
15-19. Removal and installation of M10A3 ballistics drive boot 15-26
15-20. Removal and installation of azimuth indicator, M28E2 15-27
15-21. Removal and installation of computer unit 15-30
15-22. Removal, installation, and repair of gunner's control unit 15-32
15-23. Removal, installation and checkout of ammo select unit 15-33
15-24. Removal and installation of rate tachometer unit 15-34
15-25. Removal and installation of cant unit 15-34
15-26. Removal and installation of crosswind sensor mast and EMI filter
connector 15-35
15-27. Removal and installation of crosswind sensor EMI filter 15-36
15-27.1. Removal and installation of wind sensor mast cap assembly 15-36
15-28. Removal and installation of output unit 15-38
15-29. Removal and installation of reticle projector unit 15-39
15-30. M21 ballistics computer system - cable interconnection diagram 15-40
15-31. Removal and installation of receiver-transmitter unit 15-42
15-32. Removal and installation of optical instrument lens and headrest
assembly 15-44
15-33. Removal and installation of electronics unit 15-45
15-34. Removal and installation of LRF system cables 15-46
15-35. Tank Thermal sight AN/VSG-2 15-48
15-36. Removal or installation of TTS commander's display 15-49
15-37. Removal or installation of TTS gunner's display 15-51
15-38. Replacement of TTS 8X and IR reticle lamps 15-52
15-39. Removal or installation of TTS head assembly 15-54
15-40. Removal or installation of TTS browpads 15-55
15-41. Removal or installation of TTS power converter 15-56
15-42. TTS mount assembly and ballistic shield 15-58
15-43. TTS mount latch bar assembly - exploded view 15-59
15-44. Removal or installation of ballistic shield control handle 15-60
15-45. Maintenance of ballistic shield control handle 15-61
15-46. Removal or installation of ballistic shield 15-62
16-1. Removal or installation of searchlight AN/VSS-3A
16-2. Removal and installation of searchlight master control unit, dummy
connectors, and mounting parts 16-3
16-3. Removal and installation of searchlight remote control box, dummy
connector, external cable connector, and mounting parts 16-5
17- 1. Removal and installation of 20 CFM gas particulate installation
components 17-1
17-2. Removal, disassembly, cleaning, inspection, assembly, and installation
of gas particulate orifice and hose assembly 17-5
18-1. Removal and installation of portable fire extinguisher and
mounting bracket 18-1
FO-1. Overall turret and cupola electrical schematic diagram
FO-2. Hydraulic system oil flow with gunner's and commander's control handles
in neutral position, power mode

x Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

LIST OF TABLES

Number Title Page

1-1 Special Tools, Test, and Support Equipment (including Fabricated Items) . . 1-12
2-1 Organizational Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services Schedule . . . 2-8
2-2 Ranging and Logic Table % 2-32
2-3 LRF Firing Test 2 66
2-4 Basic Solutions Test 2-35
2-5 Manual Wind/Altitude/Air Temperature Solutions Test 2-37
2-6 Cant Unit Solutions Test 2-37
2-7 Remaining Tube Life Solutions Test 2-37
3-1 Shorting connectors Used in Open Test of System Cables 3W1, 3W2, and
3W3 3-21
3-2 System Cables 3W1, 3W2, and 3W3 Checkout Procedure Indications 3-21
3-3 LRF System Cables 3W33 and 3W34 checkout 3-30
3-3.1. TTS System Cable 3 W4 checkout 3-32.3 |
3-4 Turret Cable and Connector Cross Reference 3-34
3-5 Malfunction Index 3-49
3-6 Troubleshooting 3-54
4-1 Broken Wire Strand Limits 4-5
10-1 Output Pinion Adjustment for Backlash Cylinder Assembly 10-8
12-1 Tank Electrical System Checks Using "TESTS" at Cable Connector 1W2J2 . . 12-3
12-2 Tank Electrical System Checks Using "TESTS" at Cable Connector 1A13J4 . 12-7
12-2 Tank Electrical System Checks Using "TESTS" at Cable Connector
1A13J4 12-7
12-3 "TESTS" Controls and Indicators 12-11

Change 2 xi/(xii blank)

 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

Section I. GENERAL

-1. Scope. 1-2. Maintenance Forms and Records.

This manual is for your use in performing Maintenance forms and records which you
irganizational maintenance of the turret and are required to use are listed and explained in
urret components of the 105-mm gun full- DA PAM 738-750.
racked combat tank M60A3 (figures 1-1 and
-2). Descriptions of, and procedures for,
emoval, disassembly, inspection, repair, 1-3. Administrative Storage.
issembly, and installation of components
illocated to organizational maintenance are Refer to TM 740-90-1 for information on
llustrated and described. Refer to TM 9- administrative storage.
5350-253-20-1 for organizational mainte-
lance procedures for hull and hull compo
nents.

AR702489

Figure 1-1. Tank, combat, full-tracked, 105-mm gun,M60A3 - left front vtew.

Change 2 1-1
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

A*702490

Figure 1-2. Tank, combat, full-tracked,105-mm gun,M60A3 - right rear view.

1-4. Destruction of Army Materiel to 1-6. Reporting Equipment Improvement

Prevent Enemy Use. Recommendations (EIR's).

Refer to TM 750-244-6 and TM 750-244-7 EIR's will be prepared on SF 368, Quality

for instructions on destruction of Army Deficiency Report. Instructions for preparing
materiel to prevent enemy use. EIR's are provided in DA PAM 738-750, The Ar
my Maintenance Management System. EIR's
1-5. Quality Assurance/Quality Control should be mailed directly to Commander, US Ar
(QA/QC). my Armament, Munitions and Chemical Com
a. No particular quality assurance or mand, Attn: AMSMC-QAD, Rock Island, IL
quality control manual pertains specifically 61299-6000. A reply will be furnished directly to
to the M60A3 turret. you.
b. Defective materiel received through the 1-7. Use of English and Metric System
supply system should be reported on a Quality Units.
Deficiency Report (QDR), SF 368. Instructions
for preparing QDR's are provided in AR 702-7, Torque values specified in this manual are
Reporting of Quality Deficiency Data. QDR's expressed in pound feet (lb-ft) or pound
should be mailed to Commander, US Army Ar inches (lb-in) followed by the metric equi
mament, Munitions, and Chemical Command, valent in parentheses. The metric equivalent
Attn: AMSMC-QAD, Rock Island, IL 61299- is expressed in international units Newton for
6000. A reply will be furnished to you. metric meters (N*m). Refer to inside of back
cover conversion table.

1-2 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section H. DESCRIPTION AND TABULATED DATA

1-8. Description.

A general description of the M60A3 tank nents which fall under organizational mainte
and its identification is given in TM 9-2350- nance requirements. Description of compo
253-10. The maintenance paragraphs of this nents not listed here can be found in TM 9-2350-
manual contain descriptions of its compo 253-10.

1-9. Tabulated Data.

a. Identification Plates. See TM 9-2350-

253-10 for description and location of identi
fication plates.
b. Gun Elevation and Turret Traversing
System Data (See Figs 1-3, 1-4, J-5, and 1-6).

Elevation of gun (power and manual control) 20 degrees (up) maximum for 6400
mils (360 degrees) of turret traverse.
Depression of gun (power control) 10 degrees (down) maximum; 1900
mils either side of vehicle's front
centerline (0-mil driver's hatch)
(1900-mil position, to right, to
4500-mil position, to left, at front
portion of tank).

0 degree (down) maximum; 1300 mils

either side of vehicle's rear center-
line (3200-mil gun travel lock) be
tween 1900-mil position, to right,
and 4500-mil position, to left, at
rear portion of tank,
Elevation speed (minimum) 0.5 mil per second
(maximum) 71 mils per second
Traverse speed (minimum) 0.5 mil per second
(maximum) 400 mils per second
Hand traversing drive
Weight 21 lb
Superelevation actuator
Weight (dry) 15 1b
Commander's control
Weight 15 lb
Traversing gearbox
Weight 298 lb
Elevating mechanism
Weight (dry) 69 lb
Gunner's control assembly
Weight 43.25 lb
Reservoir
Capacity (approx.) 11.25 qt
Weight (dry) 17 lb approximate

1-3
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Electric drive motor

Weight 77 lb
Rated speed (full load) 3,800 rpm
Rated power 10 hp
Rotation (as viewed from drive end) Clockwise
Main accumulator assembly
Weight (dry) 72 lb
Type Floating piston

c. Turret Electrical System Data.

Ventilator blower motor

Voltage 24 vdc
Amperage 58 amperes (nominal)
Power 1-1/2 horsepower
Speed 5800 rpm
Length 13 in.
Diameter 5-5/8 in.
Gun firing relay box
Operating voltage 24 vdc (nominal)

d. Cupola Data.

Height of cupola with periscope guard

(from turret mounting surface) 21.56 in.
Height of cupola without periscope guard
(from turret mounting surface) 16.57 in.
Diameter 52.25 in.
Length (with machine gun) 96 in.
Length (without machine gun) 64 in.
Maximum swing radius (including machine gun) . 66 in.
Weight 2,319 lb
Weight (with machine gun and ammunition) .... 2,439 lb
Ammunition capacity (with M15A2 links) 180 rounds (cal .50)
Armor cast homogeneous armor steel
Cupola traverse movement 360 degrees
Elevation (machine gun) +60 degrees
Depression (machine gun) -15 degrees
Cupola mounting diameter 34 in. ID
Power requirements 24 vdc
Communications radio and interphone
Machine gun cal .50 M85
Ammunition cal .50 with M15A2 link
Vision eight laminated vision blocks
Gun firing electrical and manual

1-4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

STABILIZATION TRAVERSE
TRAVERSE MANIFOLD [STABILIZATION
ASSEMBLY BACKLASH
ivei. SUPER TL TR R P CYLINDER
RET A cbPRtIS ELEVATION: 9" in?
"
STABILIZATION ACTUATOR
-al. ASSY
ELEVATION MANIFOLD
\ ASSEMBLY
ELEV \2
CYL
si m_i
LOCK VALVE
S2 PRESSURE
SWITCH
M2 PI P2 J2 STABILI
D A ZATION
POWER
T DECK
-ft ■ 'LKAIt- VALVE
ANCK
VALVE n or
KK Kll INv
i6*——1
llU
A Tl. Tl< SP STAB MAIN
1)1. KILTER ACCUMi
EK CUNNEICS HANDLES I.ATtlH
pXXVVALVE
SIIUTOKK
AEDCD KU
UUU EE
■aiMi)
RESERVOIR I KK hp DRAIN
KKMEKriO
VALVE M—I

AMC 833163

Figure 1-3. Gun elevation and turret traversing hydraulic schematic.

Change 2 1-5
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

TRAVERSE LEAD
THUMB SWITCH
COMMANDER'S
CONTROL
HANDLE
STABILIZATION
TRAVERSE TRAVERSE ELECTRONICS
MANIFOLD STABILIZATION CONTROLLER
BACKLASH UNIT
CYLINDER (ECU)
MANUAL
TRAVERSING TRAVERSING
DRIVE GEARBOX

STABILIZER CONTROL
SELECTOR BOX COMMANDER'S
GUNNER'S SELECTOR STABILIZATION
SWITCH BOX SHUT OFF
SUPERELEVATION
ACTUATOR
POWER SOLENOID
OVERRIDE GEARBOX
SOLENOID
PIN
LOCK
HYDRAULIC
GEARBOX LOADER'S
DECK CLEARANCE MOTOR STABILIZATION
VALVE SHUTOFF
MANUAL STABILIZATION
ELEVATION RATE SENSOR
accumulator! L*
STABILIZATION
POV.ER VALVE ^ /J
(SOLENOID VALVE) / \ \
STABILIZATION FILTER ELEVATION MECHANISM
PRESSURE GAGE STABILIZATION
ELEVATION SAFETY ELEVATION
SHUT OFF VALVE MANIFOLD

RESERVOIR DRAIN COCK

SELECTOR VALVE
PRESSURE SWITCH
POWER PACK
(RESERVOIR,
HYDRAULIC
PUMP AND
POWER PACK
DRIVE MOTOR)
RELIEF VALVE

Figure 1-4. Turret and gun control system, including stabilization.

1-6 Change 4
 TM 9-23S0-253-20-2

CLUTCH CLUTCH UPPER

UPPER BACKLASH GEAR
BACKLASH GEAR
RIGHT GEAR LEFT GEAR LEFT GEAR
\ND PINION AND PINION AND PINION
RIGHT GEAR
AND PINION

RIGHT PINION
SHAFT

INTERMEDIATE GEAR MAGNETIC

BRAKE
PIN LOCK SHAFT (ENGAGED)
OR
PISENGAGED)
BRAKE
MAGNETIC
(DISENGAGED) PIN LOCK
PIN LOCK PLUNGER
PLUNGER (ENGAGED)
(DISENGAGED) AR702493 OR
(DISENGAGED) AR702494
Figure 1-5. Torque transmission diagram
power traversing of turret. Figure 1-6. Torque transmission diagram -
manual traversing of turret.

Fire Control System.

(1) Laser Rangefinder AN/VVG-2 (see fig. 1-7)
(a) Physical Characteristic of Components

Length Width Height Weight

Item (in.) (in.) (in.) (lbs)

Receiver/Transmitter (R/T) 16 40 11 94
Electronics Unit (EU) 15 8 12 36
Center bearing support assembly 9 5 6 22
Outboard bearing support 10 2 7 8

4-7
TM 9-2350-353-20-2

(b) System Performance Characteristics

Range 200 to 4700 meters
Target resolution 20 meters
Range accuracy 10 meters
Maximum lasing recycle time 4 seconds
Maximum lasing rate 3 per minute (6 per minute for 2 minutes
with 3 minute cooling off period).
Power requirement 24+6 vdc, 3 amps standby, 12 amps
lasting
Field of view 10 degrees (low power), 5 degrees
(high power)
Telescope magnification 6X or 12X
Laser beam pointing:
Azimuth 10 degrees
Elevation +20, -10 degrees
(2) Ballistics Computer XM21
(a) Physical Characteristics of Components
Length Width Height Weight
Item (in.) (in.) (in.) (lbs)

Computer Unit 11.5 7.6 10.8 27

Gunner's Control Unit 6.5 11.9 10.4 23
Ammo Select Unit (2) 4.0 5.9 6.4 4
Rate Tachometer 7.6 7.7 8.2 10
Output Unit 11.0 7.6 7.6 13
Wind Sensor Mast 3.3 - 4.5 (dia) 7
Cant Angle Sensor 8.0 5.0 4.2 6
(b) System Performance Characteristics
Range 400 to 4700 meters
Air temperature correction -60 F to +125 F
Altitude correction -200 to +3000 meters
Ammunition correction 4 types
Crosswind correction 0 to 40 mph
Gun tube correction 0 to 100 percent EFC
Azimuth zeroing 3.5 mils for each ammo type
Elevation zeroing 3.5 mils for each ammo type
Azimuth zeroing offset 3.5 mils
Elevation zeroing offset 3.5 mils
(3) M10SD Telescope
Magnification 8X
Field of view 7 degrees
(4) M3SE1 Periscope
(on tanks equipped with M35E1
periscope see para 1-10)
(a) Daylight/Passive System
Magnification 8X
Field of view 8 degrees
(b) Unity Power System
Magnification IX
Horizontal field of view 30 degrees
Vertical field of view 5 degrees
(c) Weight (lbs)
Head assembly 24
Body assembly 5
Elbow assembly 23

1-8
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(5) Tank Thermal Sight (AN/VSG-2)(TTS)

(a) Physical Characteristic of Components

Length Width Height Weight

Item (in.) (in.) (in.) (lbs)

Head and Gunner's Display 16.50 16.75 27.83 95.0

Commander's Display 25.40 35.0
Power Converter 5.60 10.60 12.16 35.0
Ballistic Shield 14.68 7.44 8.50
Mount Flange 14.45 7.33

(b) Daylight Sights

Magnification 8X/1X
Field of View

(c) Day/Night Thermal Channel Sights

Type Passive IR
Amplification Electronic
Field of View Wide/Narrow
Gunner's Display CRT
Commander's Display Optical Relay
(6) M36E1 Periscope
(a) Daylight System
Magnification 7X
Field of view 10 degrees
(b) Passive System
Magnification 8X
Field of view 8 degrees
(c) Unity Power System
Magnification IX
Horizontal field of view 60 degrees
Vertical field of view 10 degrees
(d) Weight (lbs)
Head assembly 25
Body assembly 11
Elbow assembly 23
(7) Reticle Projector
(on tanks equipped with M35E1
periscope)
Weight 18 lb

f. Additional Data. Refer to TM 9-2350- a. Gunner's Periscope. The M35E1 ten

253-10 for additional data, including oper ner's (passive) periscope is installed in early
ating instructions. M60A3 tanks. The AN/VSG-2 Tank Thermal
Sight (TTS) is installed in later tanks.
1-10. Differences Between Models.
b. Gunner's Control Assembly. Some
The M60A3 tank will have two types of gunner's control assemblies will have an
gunner's periscopes, gunner's control assem electronic (logic) module. The module will
blies, power pack hydraulic reservoirs, and
gun front thermal shrouds.

1-9
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

allow the gunner to depress either the right tools and TMDE equipment designed for
or left control handle thumb switch and have organizational maintenance, repair, and
proper LASE and LEAD sequence. general use with the materiel are listed in
table 1-1. Fabrication drawings are shown in
c. Power Pack Hydraulic Reservoir Some figures 1-8 and 1-9. Table 1-1 also contains
hydraulic reservoirs will have a sight gage. references to paragraphs in the manual which
The sight gage will allow the gunner to describe the use of the tools and equipment.
visually check hydraulic fluid level without Table 1-1 is not to be used for requisitioning
removing the dip stick. replacements. Special tools and TMDE for
organizational maintenance are listed and
d. Gun Thermal Stroud. There are two illustrated in TM 9-2350-253-20P-2, which is
configurations of gun front thermal shrouds. the sole authority for requisitioning replace
The later version has a square shoulder in ments.
front of the bore evacuator chamber.
b. Spares and Repair Parts. Spares and
1-11. Spares, Repair Parts and Special Tools; repair parts are listed and illustrated in TM
Special Test, Maintenance, and Diag 9-2350-253-20P-2, the Repair Parts and
nostic Equipment (TMDE); and Other Special Tools List covering organizational
Special Support Equipment. maintenance of this equipment. This manual
is the only authority for requisitioning spares
a. Special Tools and Equipment. Special and repair parts.

1-10
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

IDENTIFICATION
PLATE
Kl
o
A30J3 A30J2
CENTER BEARING W34P2 W33P2
SUPPORT ASSEMBLY A30JI
o W36P2

COMMANDERS
CONTROL
PANEL

LASER
ELECTRONICS
UNIT (EU)

IDENTIFICATION
PLATE

CABLE
ASSEMBLY
3W36

DANGER
WARNING
PLATE
(HIDDEN)

Figure 1-7. Laser rangefinder (LRF) components.

1-11
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 1-1. Special Tools, Test and Support Equipment

(Including Fabricated Items)

Reference
NSN or Fig Para
Item Reference No. No. No. Use
| 1. Deleted

2. BAR, HEX Table Used to tighten cupola

2-1 mounting screws that
are in difficult access
area over rangefinder.
3. BAR, HEX 6-30 Used to remove or
6-34 install rangefinder
blister mounting
screws.
| 4. Deleted

5. CLAMP, V-BLOCKS 8762133 104 10-9 Used to adjust travers

5120-00-672-2609 ing mechanism output
pinion backlash.
| 6. Deleted

7. FIXTURE, TEST: 11747415 . 2-10 2-22 Used to position cant

| cant angle sensor 4931-01-051-0839 angle sensor during
testing.
I 8. KEY, HEXAGON 5120-00-889-2163 15-38 Used to remove and
15-39 install M35E1 peri
scope latch screws.
8.1 SIGHT, OPTICAL 10541749 15-28 Used to boresight
BORE 1240-00-941-9409 M85 machinegun

9. Deleted

10. Deleted

11. SOCKET: Socket Wrench 7383534 10-9 10-25 Used with torque
No-BAK testing 5120-00-627-8018 wrench.

12. Deleted
I

1-12 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 1-1. Special Tools, Test and Support Equipment

(Including Fabricated Items) - Continued

Reference
NSN or Fig Para
Item Reference No. No. No. Use Fig*

13. TOOL: Installation 11727430 15-19 15-63 Used to remove/install

4931-00-348-8435 clamp from/onto
ballistics drive rubber
boot.
14. TOOL, REMOVAL/ 10-24 10-56 Used to remove 1-9
INSTALLATION 10-57 and install power
pack electric drive
motor.
15. TEST SET: 11733300 12-1 3-1, Used to test fire
Cable 4931-00-629-3539 3-4, control cables and
3-5, ammo select units
3-11,
12-1
16. TEST SET: 12252405 12-4 3-1 Used to test
Stabilization 4933-01-046-7893 12-9 stabilization
system.
17. TEST SET: 11676011 12-2 3-1 Used to test
Turret Electrical 4933-00489-7398 12-3 turret electrical
System (TESTS) system.
18. Deleted
1
19. WRENCH, FACE 11674380 15-102 Used in removing
SPANNER 5120-01-044-5870 bearing of LRF
Receiver/Trans
mitter.
20. WRENCH, 11576361 13-4 13-13 Used to remove
FIRING 1
5120-00-740-0447 13-16 and install firing
COLLAR pin insert collar.

♦Fabrication drawings in this manual.

Change 2 1-13
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

1 1/8*1/16 IN.
I f—9/16 IN. HEX (SEE VIEW E)

9/16 IN. HEX BAR

MAKE FROM 9/16 IN. SOCKET HEAD KEY NSN 5120-00-240-5268

► —I 1/8 - 1/16 IN.

I— 1/2 IN. HEX BAR (SEE VIEW C)

=n o

1/2 IN. HEX BAR

MAKE FROM KEY NSN 5120-00-198-5391

4 1/4 - 1/8 IN. I— 1/2 IN.

1/2 IN. RADIUS

GRIND IF REQUIRED TO PROVIDE 1/4 IN. MIN. ENGAGEMENT

1/2 IN. SOCKET HEAD KEY (ALLEN WRENCH)

MAKE FROM 1/2 IN. SOCKET HEAD (ALLEN WRENCH) KEY NSN 5120-00-198-5391

AR 702496

Figure 1-8. Fabricated tools (1 of 2).

1-14
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

4 3/4 IN. -9/16 IN.

o
9/16 IN. RADIUS

9/16 IN. SOCKET HEAD KEY (ALLEN WRENCH)

MAKE FROM 9/16 IN. SOCKET HEAD (ALLEN WRENCH) KEY NSN 5120-00-240-5268
D AR702497
Figure 1-8. Fabricated tools (2 of 2).
. DETAIL "A"

DETAIL "B"

NOTE 4

NOTE 2

NOTE 3

DETAIL "C"
NOTE 4

NOTE 5

INSTALLATION TOOL AR702498

Figure 1-9. Power pack pump electric drive motor removal/installation tool (1 of 3).

1-15
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

T 1^- 1/2 DIA.

13/16
I r

1*-3/4 -•> MAKE FROM ANGLE STEEL 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 1/B INCH
- 2 PJECES REQUIRED
DETAIL "A"

3/B - 16 UNC-2A

2-1/8 MAKE FROM MILD STEEL,

COLD ROLLED, 3/B INCH
ROUND, APPROX. 2U/2 INCHES
LONG - 2 REQUIRED

DETAIL "CM
AR702499
Figure 1-9. Power pack pump electric drive motor removal/installation tool (2 of 3).

1-16
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

•11-1/4-
10-1/2 • W-3/8
- 5-1/4 •
1/2

at;
3/8 RAD
4 PLACES 1/2 DIA - 2 HOLES

1/4 RAD-2 PLACES

MAKE FROM MILD STEEL, HOT ROLLED

FLATS, 1/4x1 INCH
DETAIL "B"
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
2. SCREW, CAP, HEXAGON HEAD, MS90728-69 - 2 REQUIRED
3. WELD ON ALL FOUR (4) SIDES - 2 PLACES
4. NUT, PLAIN, HEXAGON, MS51967-8 - 4 REQUIRED
5. WASHER, FLAT, MS271 83-1 3 - 2 REQUIRED
6. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, TOLERANCE: ± 1/16 INCH
7. BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES AR702500

Figure 1-9. Power pack pump electric drive motor removal/installation tool (3 of 3).

1-17(1-18 blank)
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CHAPTER 2

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND

SERVICES

Section I. SERVICE UPON RECEIPT OF MATERIEL

2-1. General. (4) Degrease equipment, such as tools

and hardware, as required.
a. This section contains information (5) Prepare armament equipment for
covering services to be performed upon installation as indicated in para 2-2a.
receipt of a tank that has been prepared for c. Deprocessing the Turret (Figs 2-1 and
shipment. Whenever practicable, the tank 2-2).
crew will assist in the performance of the (1) Remove preservative material
services described in this section. from turret. Remove wrapping, barrier
b. Deprocess the vehicle. Refer to TM 9- material, and tape from hatches, periscope
2350-253-20-1. openings, vision blocks, and gun openings.
Remove excess grease from turret race ring.
2-2. Inspecting, Servicing, Installing, and Remove fabric from telescope and machine
Setting-Up Instructions. gun openings.
(2) Stow equipment on the vehicle in
a. General Procedures. Armament parts respective areas (fig 2-1 and 2-2).
received from storage coated with rust- d. Inspection of Gun Elevating and Turret
preventive compound should be thoroughly Traversing System. Perform the quarterly
cleaned with waste wiping cloths or a brush preventive-maintenance checks and services
saturated with dry cleaning solvent. (Item 28, indicated in table 2-1. Check operation of
App. C). After complete removal of the com controls before performing checks and ser
pound, lubricate as specified in LO vices (refer to TM 9-2350-253-10).
9-2350-253-12. Component parts of each weapon
e. Installation of Equipment. Install
should be deemed separately where practicable.
equipment in vehicle as indicated in figure
The component parts should be kept together
although parts are interchangeable. 2-2.
f. Installation of Fire Control Items. In
stall fire control items as indicated in figure
b. Deprocessing the Equipment. De-
2-2 and chapter 15. Perform PMCS. If
process the equipment as follows: materiel is found to be defective, report on
(1) Open each container and inventory QDR Form (para l-5b).
items with packaging list. Record missing
g. Communication Equipment. Refer to
items.
TM 9-2350-253-10 for installation and check
(2) Check packaging list against the out of communication equipment.
components of the end item list in TM 9-
2350-253-10 to ensure that all items indi
cated in the above manual have been re
ceived.
(3) Open inner packs and remove
material.

2-1
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

PERISCOPE
OPENING
LASER SMOKE GRENADE
RANGEFINDER STOWAGE BOX
FABRIC BLISTER
HATCH / WATER ANTENNA
THERMAL SHROUD

WIND
SENSOR
MAST

HATCH
WATER
CAN
GUN TURRET VISION BLOCKS
SMOKE RACE
OPENINGS GRENADE RING SMOKE GRENADE
LAUNCHER STOWAGE BOX

Figure 2-1. Deprocessing vehicle and equipment.

2-2 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

3. RADIOS IN TURRET BUSTLE.

Figure 2-2. Installation of turret equipment (1 of 3J.

2-3
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

1 . COMMANDER'S M36E1 DAYLIGHT AND

2. RETICLE PROJECTOR (A) AND GUNNER'S PASSIVE NIGHT VIEWING PERISCOPE
M35E1 DAYLIGHT AND PASSIVE NIGHT AND LIGHT SOURCE CONTROL 8619159
VIEWING PERISCOPE (B). IN CUPOLA.

3. Ml 05D TELESCOPE, TELESCOPE HANGEt,

AND FILTER BOX

OR
2. TTS AN/VSG-2

4. DRIVER'S NIGHT VISION VIEWER

(BOX UNDER GUN MOUNT)
EYEPIECE WITH PROTECTIVE CAP
AND PROTECTIVE WINDOW COVER

Figure 2-2. Installation of turret equipment (2 of 3).

2-4 Change 3
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

TRIGGER TYPE ODDMENT

OILER STOWAGE
BOX
FIRE /
I EXTINGUISHER

Figure 2-2. Installation of turret equipment (3 of 3). AMC 833087

Change 2 2-5
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section II. LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS

2-3. General. 2-4. Service Intervals.

Lubrication to be performed will be in accordance Service intervals specified in the lubrication order are for
with lubrication order LO 9-2350-253-12. Normally the normal operation and where moderate temperature,
crew will assist organizational maintenance personnel in humidity, and atmospheric conditions prevail. Reduce
lubrication of the materiel. intervals to compensate for abnormal operation and
severe conditions or contaminated lubricants.

Section III. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS)

2-5. General. performed quarterly, semiannually and annually by

organizational maintenance personnel assisted by the
a. Preventive maintenance is the systematic care, vehicle crew. •
inspection, and service of equipment to maintain it in
serviceable condition and detect faults and failures before
extensive and time-consuming repairs or replacement are
required.
NOTE
If the equipment must be kept in
continuous operation, check and
service only those items that can be
b. Make sure all crew PMCS has been completed checked and serviced without
prior to performing organizational quarterly PMCS. disturbing operation. Make the
Only before firing, during firing, and after firing checks complete checks and services when the
may be omitted. equipment can be shut down.

b. Organizational services are defined by and

c. If your equipment fails to operate. Troubleshoot
restricted to the procedures outlined in table 2-1, the
with proper equipment. Report any deficiencies using the
vehicle lubrication order, and Appendix B, Section II,
proper forms; see TM 38-750.
the Maintenance Allocation Chart. Approval to perform
higher category services may be given by the support
maintenance unit if the expertise, tools, and equipment to
perform the function are available at organizational level.
d. The Army system of maintenance prescribed
two types of preventive maintenance services;
maintenance checks and services performed by the crew
which are described in TM 9-2350-253-10, and those
covered in para 2-6, below. Perform machine gun PMCS
according to TM 9-1005-313-24 for 7.62-mm, and TM 9- c. Commanders are authorized to reduce the
1005-231-25 for caliber .50 machine gun. intervals between preventive maintenance services
whenever conditions indicate the need.

2-6. Organizational Services.

d. All of the maintenance procedures given in TM 9-
a. Table 2-1 contains the procedures and 2350-253-10 will be followed. Organizational mechanics
instructions necessary to perform organizational must be so thoroughly trained in these procedures that
preventive maintenance checks and services on the turret they can apply them automatically at all times in the
and cupola of the M60A3 tank. These services are performance of their duties.

2-6
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

e. Tank crews are often unaware of defects that g. Preventive maintenance checks and services for
have developed gradually in the vehicle. It is therefore the turret include sighting and fire control equipment,
desirable for organizational turret mechanics to inspect hydraulics, and armament. These services will be
the equipment as part of their preventive maintenance performed by the turret mechanic. Preventive
checks and services. Any repairs or adjustments maintenance checks and services for the communications
necessary to ensure safe operation must be made. system and searchlight will be performed by other
maintenance personnel in accordance with the
appropriate technical manuals (TM 1 1 series).

/ The organizational preventive maintenance

checks and service items and intervals have been 2-7. Record of Services Performed.
determined by Reliability Centered Maintenance
(RCM). Necessary replacements, cleaning, lubrication, DA Form 2404 is utilized by the organizational
and protection of parts and /or assemblies will be mechanic for recording periodic maintenance services.
accomplished as required, to ensure troubkfree All faults found will have corrective action taken. The
operation until the next preventive maintenance service is item number recorded in column "a" must correspond to
performed. the item number in table 2-1 PMCS. Refer to TM 38-750
for instructions on use of forms which pertain to
preventive maintenance services.

2-7
PSCHECKS
MOAND
2-1.
RATable
EGIARNVTIEZNIATCINEOVCSEAL

FOR
CRLEAMROIVTEYD
ABOXES
NOTE:
M UNITION

PROCEDURES

SQUCAHRETDEURLEY t(C)
lb-ft
225
least
ito
tat
guarehrtented
Check
12
securing
that
(A)
(B)
cupola
screws 6ocskwcarsehwrs 2
Remove
l(A)
and cskwcarshewrs, securing
and
l(B)
onuts tboard
pad
and
guard
erminal

Use
special
(item
1-1).
table
tool
2,

(C)
assembly
to
sup ort.

N'm).
(305

INSPECTED Assy and

Board Cupola
Attaching Terminal
ITEM TO
BE Cupola Screws Contact Boards

ITEM
NO.
 C(LEFT
LEFT
AND
RIGHT
BONATRADCTS
SHOWN)

earvmeirnsael (just
Slowly
cupola
until
tboard
rstrips begin
left
and
right
tocG)
engage
ontact

(D)
land
o6
cRemove
kwsacsrherws side left
cupola
right
then
and
Trto
averse left for
(F)
boards
(H)
springs
dirt,
andgrease, Reverse
previous
instructions
removal
ring
right
forward
securing
gear view
right
and
boards
(F).
contact t(G),
Check
strips
board
ecromnitnaclt Check
obvious
for
mbetween
isalinement
iring
and
(E)
guard
nsgear
tal
or dirty,
(G)
strips
If
(H)
springs with
clean
are
foreign
cand
omrawear,
tosieorn,
tboard
guard
pad
and
erminal
(E).
Remove
guard cleaning
28,
(item
solvent

NOTE
eburn
marks.
lectrical
board
(H).
springs springs.
and
gro ves
(C).
assembly
C).
App.
MPAND
CHECKS
SERVICES
OAR2-1.
Table
IEGNAVTEINZATINCOVNEAL

PROCEDURES
(SCHEDULE
QCUoAnRtTiEnuReLdY)

athe
station
gunner's
Have
satanistant main mounting
3
and
bracket
(A)
bolts
turret
nuts
elegun.
manually
depress
and vate main
of
for
During
check
mogun,
vement of
bearings
(D)
for
and
(C)
lCheck
o senes vraetsioinon, check
deDuring
and
leppower for
lslap
front
the
in
o or
senes Notify
mif
asupport
inuts,
nany
tenance
mof
8
mounting
shield
loain
gun
senes
main
elevating
Before
make
gun, is asantisuresotnaedt of
satout danger.
possible
side
to
warn m(E).
elevating
of
ends
econ
eye
hanism
tank.
the
of
front
Have
assist
an hand
left
his
eleva
the
of
front
on gunner's
turret
use
on,
power
con
lstation
the
place
oant
at
ader's and
cylinder
tion
hand
right
on gunner's
the
From
with
station, elevate
slightly
and
handles
trol
Posgun
main
theoverition
elerear
the
of
cylinder.
vation bbolts
loose.
eareorarings
bolts.
and
bearing
rear
WARNING
main
depress
and
gun.

(B).

INSPECTED Gun Elevating Mechanism

Main
ITEM TO
BE

ITEM
NO.
 asureanversing of
tmake
Before
rturret, ois
sautto
astwarnisiotdnaendt reusurenition closed
rack
aBe
mstowage before
traareivnersrisng s anistant manually
the
gunner's
aHave
at struarvteireosten for
check
During
mturret
ovement,
bolts
s(A)
mounting
loidesenes
6
in

notify
If
bolts
loose,
areany
(B).
bolts
mounting
and
2
top

WARNING CAUTION sright

and
left
lightly. maisupport
ntenance.

danger.
possible

tur et.

Traversing Mechanism
Turret
 of
eForm
date
for
reading.
Check
Book,
Log
2408-4,
bDA
last
pullover
and
qougage
riepsmceonpte
EFC
200
than
have
rounds
since
fired
If
bbeen
last
elapsed
days
90
orormoreescoping

for
of
elast
Check
Log
2408-4,
Form
DA
date
recoil
and
Book,
xqeuricpimsent
CHECKS
SMPO2-1.
AND
Table
AREGIARNVTIEZINATCINEOVCSEAL
firing,
esince
mnotify
last
If
elapsed
have
days
180
axisupport
enortrecnainsce. band
Check
of
pullover
reading.
number
EFC
since
fired
rounds
olast
rgage
escoping

PROCEDURES
mreading,
notify
pullover
and
aisupport
ntgage
enance.
(SQCUoAnHRtETiDnEUuRLeEdY)

e2-100-
P(para
amanual
lcreuvmacutlhaitornge

CoilIAWlhLubeOervdceklr.

LLube
AubriWcate
I
Order. LIAW
Lube
Order.
ubricate

Tiring
date.

Grease
Cupola Support
Turret
INSPECTED Ac umulator- Gun
105-MM
Scoping
and Tcaveraing
Mechanism Bore-
Tube Pul -Over
ITEM TO
BE
Manual Elevation Nitrogen Exercise Bearings
Recoil Gaging Points

ITEM
NO. 7 8 9 10 11 12
"i
 Perform
airflow
GPFU
using
check
Flow
and
Air
M39
(6 80- 0-436-421 )
Tester
SERVICES
AND
CHECKS
MPAORIE2-1.
NTable
GVTANEINZATNICVOENAL

system pand
the
numbers
contain
24
through
Item
19 jonucesctedmsueranetys The
alevel
to
rdtests an order
control
fire
operating
insure
tests
system. performed
be
the
pand
in
rmust
ocedures

PROCEDURES

Perform
sighting
parallax
equipment
check
2-13).
(para
QUARTERLY
SCHEDULE
it-
rNU
Change
sfilter
element
t(para
10-72).
abilization

TM
3s-at
each
t6 a80t-i31o6-n1.0

Lubricate
Order.
Lube
IAW Lubricate
Order.
Lube
IAW LIAW
Order.
Lube
ubricate presented.

Gun er's
Station Cmdr's,
Gun er's, M35E1
TTS
(or
INSPECTED Points Station
Can
Oil Loader's Points Cmdr's
Can
Oil Element
Filter LStation
oader's Sighting
Equip Pament Com•ander's
Station Points
Can
Oil ral ax: Equipped)
if Rangefinder
Stabilization
ITEM TO
BE CBR
Turret Equipment Gu•n er's Periscope Periscope Telescope
• AN/WG-2
M36E1 M105D Laser
•
Deleted

ITEM 17.1
NO. 14 15 16 17 18 19
ORCHECKS
MPAND
SGARTable
1EINRVTZEANIT.ACIONEVCASEL
2
b(para
and
2-20)
sthat
Make
aeclosure
fmi-psteusitcer 2-21)
performed
sbeen
(para
rhave
laser
ealnfg-etfeisntder

2-23.1).
cPerform
2-23
baitest
lead
(para
clsystem
rorocimustpiutcster
2-24).
bPurge
charge
and
(para
asystem
lcoimsptoinucetsnetsr
PROCEDURES b(para
2-18).
for
esighting
Check
alxsystem
ecvkasltaisovhne
(SQCUoAHnREtTiDEnURuLeEYd)
b(para
sPerform
2-22).
aosystem
clouimtspioucntser
test
check
aand
2-15).
(para
sylnicnhreomneiznation
Perform NOTE

Amain
9I
TM
105-MM
the
B-2o35gun
r0-eW25s3-i10g. ht

check.
prior
this
to

Synchronization Aand
linement: Rangefinder System
Sighting
INSPECTED if
TTS
(or
•Guner's Periscope Equipped) AN/V G-2
ITEM TO
BE
Computer System
XM-21
M35E1 L•aser Bal astic

ITEM 24.1
NO. 20 21 22 23 24
 Purge
fTTS
the
charge
and
units
2-24).
(para
ol owing

Record
psPAM
DA
IAW
7e3r8v-fi7oc5re0ms.ed

Co•m ander's
Display
2-24).
(para
charge
and
Purge Purge
charge
and
2-24).
(para Purge
charge
and
2-24).
(para Purge
charge
and
2-24).
(para charge
and
Purge
2-24).
(para
G•
Display
un er's
HAssembly
•ead

Com ander's Thermal

Tank (If
VSG-2
AN/
Range-
Laser Transmit er
Periscope (If
M3SE1 (TTS)
Sight Recording
Periscope Gun er's Equipped) Equipped) Receiver/ Projector Equipped) Telescope
Findcr Reticle (If
Unit M105D Services
M36E1 Unit
 ORPGMRACHECKS
SERVICES
EAND
NIVZNEATNEITNOIAVNLEC
2-1.
OTable
RPMGCHECKS
RASERVICES
AND
NEIVNZETANITOAINVLCE

Lightly
lpoint
moving
of
uIAW
Order.
Lube
bparts
at
croincta cet

PROCEDURES PROCEDURES
Clean
lIAW
and
ring
pinion
Order.
Lube
ubgears
ricate

SSCHEDULE
EMIAN UAL
Check
abassembly
10-9).
(para
dcjkulsatsmhent
Record
psIAW
DA
ePAM
7r3vf8io-c7re5ms0e.d SCHEDULE
ANNUAL
tmake
Before
rtauvreresitn,g is
astsasureanitsitoanetd of
outowarntside
possible Be unition rbefore
amrack
stowage
sure closed
etare
ainers

Change
oil
Order.
Lube
IAW
WARNING CAUTION

trtauvreresti.ng

danger.

Ring
Pinion
and
INSPECTED Loader's
Safety INSPECTED Power
Pack
ITEM TO
BE Traversing Traversing Recording ITEM TO
BE Hydraulic Reservoir
Gearbox Services
Turret Switch
Gear Drain

ITEM 32 33 ITEM
NO. 34 35 36 NO.
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Change 2 2-17
 perform
recoil
mfor
and
Have
aetwo-year
support
icnhteanainscem

2-1.
MCHECKS
POTable
STURRET
AND
AREGIARNVTIEZNIATCAIONEVCASEL

PROCEDURES

STCWHOE-DYUELAER sLAW
Record
7performed
PAM
DA
e3r8v-i7c5e0s.

105-MM
Cannon.

Mechanism 105-MM
and Cannon

INSPECTED Recording
Services
BE
TO
ITEM Recoil

ITEM
NO. 44 45
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section IV. TURRET HYDRAULIC SYSTEM SERVICES

2-8. General.

The section contains removal, installation, CAUTION

md inspection procedures for hydraulic lines Extreme care must be used to
ind fittings. Turret hydraulic system ser prevent dirt from entering
vices contained in this section are as follows: tubing and components.
zero pressure check, draining and bleeding (4) Plug all open hydraulic lines and
the hydraulic system, and charging the main ports with appropriate plugs to prevent en
or manual accumulators. trance of foreign matter.
b. Installation (Figs 1-3 and 2-3). Ensure
2-9. Hydraulic Lines and Fittings. that connector is installed in final position on
the component to which the connection will
a. Removal (Figs 1-3, 2-3, and 2-4). Hy be made. Install lines and fittings as follows:
draulic lines and components are shown in (1) Remove protective plugs from ends
figure 1-3. Before disconnecting a hydraulic of line assemblies and clean line assemblies
line for removal, tag the line for identifica thoroughly using dry-cleaning solvent, (item
tion using part numbers and nomenclature in 28, App. C). Dry with dry compressed air. If
TM 9-2350-253-20P-2.. Handle lines carefully dry compressed air is not available, place line
to prevent damage. To remove lines and assembly on previously cleaned area and
fittings, proceed as follows: allow to set for a minimum of five minutes
(1) Place ELEV/TRAV POWER and prior to installation.
MASTER BATTERY switches in OFF position (2) Position line assembly between
and engage turret traverse lock (TM 9-2350- connecting points and loosely clip line, if
253-10). necessary, to hold in place.
(2) Reduce system hydraulic pressure (3) Lubricate threads and sleeve (fig 2-
by manually depressing and holding the 3) with hydraulic fluid (item 13, App. C). Aline
hydraulic solenoid plunger (fig 2-4, view A) the line assembly tube ends in the connectors. Lines
and displacing gunner's control handles until may be flexed slightly during installation providing
pressure gage indicates 0 psi. no kinks or new bends are created. Start the
WATEHHTS nuts on the connectors by hand. Tighten end
To prevent possible injury to nut until resistance is felt. Hold component
personnel, ensure that hydraulic connector with one wrench and tighten nut
system pressure is relieved (0 with another wrench until nut is firmly, but
psi on hydraulic pressure gage) not tightly, seated.
before removing hydraulic sys (4) Stop and note position of turning
tem lines or components. wrench. Then turn nut not less than one-sixth
NOTE or more than one-third turn tighter than the
The gun elevating hydraulic noted position.
system must be bled whenever (5) Fill hydraulic system reservoir with
any hydraulic line or component hydraulic fluid in accordance with procedures
is disconnected, removed, or described in LO 9-2350-253-12.
replaced. Refer to paragraph (8) If a hydraulic fitting leaks, isolate
2-1 Od for instructions. the fitting, release the hydraulic pressure,
drain the turret hydraulic system, if neces
sary (para 2-1 Ob), and replace the fitting or
(3) To disconnect a hydraulic line, hold line, as necessary. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5.
the connector (fig 2-3) firmly with one Recheck level of hydraulic fluid power pack
wrench and apply turning force to nut with control reservoir and refill if necessary (para
another wrench. Disconnect and remove the 2-10a).
line assemblies at components and between (7) After all fittings are tight, bleed
lines at elbows, unions, and tees as necessary. the system of air (para 2-10d).
Be sure to remove line clips, if present, (8) Tighten all clips.
before attempting to remove line. (9) Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch
in ON position to charge the system.

Change 2 2-18.1 (2-18.2 blank)

 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

SLEEVE (SEE INSET A)

CONNECTOR
NUT

ASSEMBLE NUT AND SLEEVE TO TUBE

INSERT TUBE IN CONNECTOR

\ IBRATION TYPE
SLEEVE

INSET A. TIGHTEN FINGER TIGHT

NOTE SLEEVE BEVEL

SOME LINE CONNECTORS USE A VIBRATION TYPE SLEEVE. CONE ANGLE
UPON REPLACEMENT, USE TYPE SLEEVE ORIGINALLY INSTALLED. PILOT TUBE

SHOULDER
CUTTING EDGE

TIGHTEN WITH WRENCH AR702505

Figure 2-3. Hydraulic line fittings.

2-19
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

c. Inspection. If there is any evidence of b. Draining Turret Hydraulic System (Ftj

hydraulic fluid leakage at any seal in the gun 2-5).
elevating and turret traversing system in Rotate the turret until the drain codn
excess of seepage slightly moist to the touch, on the back of the power pack reservoir s
or yellow (FRH) discoloration of painted accessible from the driver's compartment
surfaces, the seal shall be replaced by the Perform zero pressure check (para 2-
proper support maintenance unit. If it has 10a). Attach hose to drain cock. Open draii
already been noted that a particular compo cock and allow all hydraulic fluid to drain
nent has an allowable leakage rate, this from reservoir into a suitable container,
information does not apply. Close drain cock. Remove hose.
2-10. Turret Hydraulic System Service. c. Filling Turret Hydraulic System. Fill
reservoir with hydraulic fluid in accordance
a. Zero Pressure Check (Fig 2-4). with procedures described in LO 9-2350-253-
(1) Place ELEV/TRAV POWER and 12.
MASTER BATTERY switches in OFF position,
and engage turret traverse lock (TM 9-2350- d. Bleeding Turret Hydraulic System (Fi\
2.6).
253-10).
(2) Manually depress and hold gunner's NOTE
control hydraulic power solenoid plunger
(view A). Gun muzzle shall be over front (top
| (3) Move gunner's control handles to the of driver's hatch), to obtain full
right or left and observe that needle of hydraulic depression.
| system pressure gage (view B) drops com
paratively slowly until the nitrogen precharge
(1) Turn MASTER BATTERY
pressure in the accumulator (550 to 500 psi) is
switch and Elev/Trav ON, and put power switch
| reached. At this point the needle on hydraulic
ON. Elevate and depress gun a minimum of five
system pressure gage will drop suddenly to zero
(5) times using gunner's control handles (view Al
(0). If the nitrogen precharge pressure reading
Then position gun in full depression.
on pressure gage is less than 500 psi, the
hydraulic (main) accumulator must be recharg-
(2) Install 6 ft length of tubing on
| ed with dry nitrogen (TM 9-2350- 253-20-2). If
front bleeder valve of elevating cylinder
nitrogen precharge pressure is greater than 550
(view B). Place other end of tubing ir
psi, bleed excess pressure by removing valve cap
container. Open front bleeder valve.
| and depressing valve core.
(4) Return gunner's control handles to (3) Using gunner's control handles
neutral position and release solenoid plunger. slowly elevate gun. Observe the tubing near
the front bleeder valve. Close front bleeder
Note deleted. valve when there is no evidence of air in the
outcoming oil (no air bubbles), and the front
(5) Check fluid level in reservoir early
model liquid level gage dipstick, late model liq bleeder valve is higher than the rear bleeder
uid level sight gage (view C). Fill in accordance valve, but prior to the end of motion.
with lubrication order. (4) Remove tubing from the front
Note deleted. bleeder valve and install on rear bleeder
valve (View B). Using gunner's control
WARNING handle, position gun at full elevation.
(5) Open rear bleeder valve on
FRH fluid may contain Tricresyl elevating cylinder.
Phosphate which may be absorbed
through the skin and produces (6) Using gunner's control handles slow
paralysis if taken internally. depress gun allowing oil to drain in container.
Appropriate protective measures
should be taken to avoid such
exposures.

2-20 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 2-4. Checking main accumulator for proper nitrogen pressure and reservoir for hydraulic
fluid level.

Change 2 2-21
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(18) Rotate tree end of fiexiD

clockwise, then counterclockwise,
limits of its travel in both directions,
(19) Install suitable length of 3
I.D. hose on bleeder valve "B" on sup
tion actuator (view E) and provide a
container to receive oil discharge froi
(20) Slightly open bleeder valv
superelevation actuator. Rotate shai
wise to its travel limit. Allow oil
through until no indications of air art
in the oil. Close bleeder valve "I
continuing to rotate shaft. Discont
tating shaft and move hose to bleed
"A" of superelevation actuator.
(21) Slightly open bleeder valv
superelevation actuator (view E).
shaft counterclockwise until feel of
tation indicates the actuator adjus
has run off the actuator internal lea
Allow oil to bleed through bleeder'
no indications of air are present in
Figure 2-5. Draining turret hydraulic system.
Close bleeder valve "A".
Observe the tubing near the rear bleeder valve. (22) Perform superelevation
Close rear bleeder valve when there is no
linkage adjustment (para 1049c).
evidence of air in the outcoming oil (no air bub lockwire on knurled nut after adj
bles) and the rear bleeder valve is higher than Return ELEV/TRAV POWER switd
the front but prior to the end of motion. Remove position
tubing. (23) Repeat procedures descri!
(7) Loosen manual accumulator through (8), above.
adapter from riser assembly. Place lint free cloth (24) Decrease hydraulic system
around rise assy by manual accumulator. Rapid gage reading to zero and check po
ly rotate the hand elevating pump handle reservoir oil level (para 2-10a).
counterclockwise until a solid flow of fluid (no (25) Place ELEV/TRAV POWI
air bubbles) emerges from the accumulator and in OFF position.
adapter. Tighten accumulator assembly to e. Charging Main Accumulator^
adapter (View C). (1) Except for air chuck v
(8) Position the gun at full elevation manifold pressure gage, intercom
using gunner's control handle. Hold the control accumulator charging device (cont
handle in full elevation position. Rotate manual box assembly) (item 4, table 1-1) as
elevating hand pump handle counterclockwise a figure 2-7.
minimum of 50 times. Return gunner's handle (2) Close pressure regulator
to neutral position. turning T-handle counterclockwi
(9) Operate the manual elevating handle turns freely.
handle to move the gun tube in elevation and (3) Fully open nitrogen supf
depression. Repeat step (8) if movement of gun The nitrogen bottle pressure gage I
is spongy. cate a minimum of 600 psi. If inc
less than 600 psi, replace nitrogen U
(10) Place ELEV/TRAV POWER fully charged tank.
switch in OFF position. (4) Open manifold shutoff 1
NOTE close bleeder valve.
Steps 11 through 16 deleted. (5) Purge lines by slowly tun
lator valve handle clockwise until j
(17) Disconnect flexible shaft from heard escaping from the air chu
computer output unit by removing lockwire from After 5 to 10 seconds, close manifo
knurled nut, loosening nut, and disconnecting valve.
shaft (view E).

2-22 Chancre 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

AMC 833204

Figure 2-6. Bleeding turret hydraulic system.

Change 2 2-23
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(8) Slowly open pressure regulator

WARNING
valve until pressure regulator gage indicates
Ensure that hydraulic system
500-550 psi.
pressure is relieved (0 psi on
(9) Slowly open manifold shutoff valve.
hydraulic system pressure gage)
If hydraulic system pressure gage shows build
before attempting to charge
up of pressure, repeat step (6).
main accumulator.
(10) Close nitrogen supply valve when
(6) Perform zero pressure check (para the pressure regulator gage stabilizes at
2-1 0a). original pressure regulator valve setting of
(7) Remove cap from accumulator 500-550 psi. Should overcharging occur, close
charging valve and install air chuck valve. To nitrogen supply valve and bleed off excess
install air chuck valve: pressure with bleeder valve.
(11) Turn "T" handle of air chuck valve
(a) Turn "T" handle on air chuck all the way out.
valve counterclockwise all the way out. (12) Open bleeder valve.
(b) Thread air chuck valve tightly (13) Remove accumulator charging
onto charging valve. regulator and associated components from
(c) Turn "T" handle on chuck valve accumulator charging valve and nitrogen
clockwise all the way in. tank.

ACCUMULATOR CHARGING DEVICE

MANUAL ELEVATION
I ACCUMULATOR
AMC 833010
Figure 2-7. Charging main accumulator or manual elevation accumulator.

2-24 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(14) Replace charging valve cap. (7) Using a suitable container to

fl5) Fill powerpack reservoir with cafch any hydraulic fluid, loosen fitting on
hydraulic oil, if required, in accordance with manual depression line (MD) at powerpack
procedures described in LO 9 -2350-253-12. riser to relieve and drain pressurized fluid
(16) Bleed system of air as required (view D, Fig 2-6). Then retighten fitting.
(para 2-10d). (8) Remove cap from accumulator
(17) Stow accumulator charging de charging valve and install air chuck valve.
vice in the box assembly. To install air chuck valve:
(a) Turn "T" handle air chuck
/. Precharging the Manual Elevation Ac valve counterclockwise all the way out.
cumulator (Fig 2-7). (b) Thread air chuck valve
tightly onto charging valve.
(1) Install regulator assembly (item (c) Turn "T" handle clockwise
36, App. B) on nitrogen tank. Nitrogen tank all the way in.
should have two black bands on upper part of (9) Slowly open pressure regulator
tank. An adapter assembly must be added to the valve until manifold pressure gage indicates
tank connection. Some commercial tanks will re 75-100 psi.
quire that a suitable commercial adapter be add (10) Close nitrogen supply valve
ed to the tank connection. when manifold pressure gage stabilizes at 75-
100 psi. Should overcharging occur, close
(2) Close pressure regulator valve nitrogen supply valve and bleed off excess
by turning counterclockwise until "T" handle pressure with bleeder valve.
turns freely. (11) Turn "T" handle of air chuck
(3) Fully open nitrogen supply valve all the way out.
valve by turning handle counterclockwise. (12) Open bleeder valve.
The nitrogen tank pressure gage must indi (13) Remove accumulator charging
cate a minimum of 200 psi. If the indication regulator from accumulator charging valve
is less than 200 psi, replace the nitrogen tank and nitrogen tank.
with a fully charged bottle. (14) Replace charging valve cap on
(4) Open manifold shutoff valve accumulator.
and air chuck valve. Close bleeder valve. (15) Service powerpack reservoir, as
(5) Purge lines by slowly turning required, in accordance with LO 9-2350-253-
regulator valve handle until gas can be heard 12.
escaping from the air chuck valve. After 5 (16) Recharge manual accumulator
to 10 seconds, close pressure regulator valve. with oil by rotating the hand elevating pump
handle counterclockwise until main gun hits
WARNING lower stop, and continue to rotate with one
Ensure the hydraulic sys hand until resistance is met.
tem pressure is relieved (0 (17) Bleed system of air (para 2-
psi on hydraulic system lOd), if required.
pressure gage) before at (18) Stow accumulator charging
tempting to charge the ac device in the box assembly.
cumulator.
(6) Reduce hydraulic system pres
sure to 0 psi using zero pressure check (para
2-10 a).

Change 2 2-25
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section V. FIRE CONTROL AND SIGHTING SYSTEM CHECK AND PURGING

from 10, and divide remainder by 2. The

2-11. General. result is negative correction.
/. To correct quadrant, note micrometer
This section contains the system level reading and increase reading by the amount
tests and adjustment procedures necessary to of negative correction.
insure an operating fire control system. The /. Repeat step e.
tests and adjustments must be performed in k. When laying gun to a given elevation,
the order presented. subtract correction from given elevation
angle. When measuring existing elevation
2-12. M1A1 Gunner's Quadrant End-for-End angle, add correction to reading.
Test (Fig 2-8). I When laying gun to an elevation near
horizontal, it is possible to have a negative
The M1A1 gunner's quadrant must be error value after subtracting quadrant correction.
calibrated prior to use in adjustments and In this case, drop elevation index arm to -10.
checks of the sighting and fire control sys subtract the negative value from 10 and
tem. Known quadrant error must be added index the result on the micrometer dial
to, or subtracted from, elevation measure- 2-13. Sighting Equipment Parallax Check.
merits where such error would affect test Parallax is the presence of apparent
results. The procedure for calibrating the movement between reticle and target aiming
quadrant is as follows: point when observer's head is moved 1/4 inch
a. Set index arm and micrometer scale to from side to side or up and down. Check
0. commander's and gunner's periscope,
b. Place quadrant on quadrant seats of telescope, laser rangefinder and TTS (if
breech ring with line-of-fire arrow facing equipped) for parallax before performing any
muzzle of gun. Center bubble by elevating or fire control tests. If parallax exceeds 0.1
depressing gun. mil, replace the equipment before
c. Turn quadrant end for end. If bubble proceeding.
is again centered, quadrant has no correction. 2-14. Boresighting the 105-MM Gun.
d. If bubble is not centered, attempt to
center with micrometer dial. If bubble cen Boresighting establishes the starting point
ters, correction is positive and equal to one- from which all mechanical adjustments
half micrometer dial reading. (synchronization and alinement) are made.
NOTE To boresight main gun, follow the procedure
When using M1A1 quadrant, prescribed in TM 9-2350-253-10.
read and record information
from micrometer scale on LINE ELEVATION SCALE
OF FIRE side of quadrant.
e. Set micrometer to correction reading,
center bubble by elevating or depressing gun,
and check by turning quadrant end for end.
Repeat as necessary to determine final error
value. If correction is greater than 0.4 mil,
return quadrant to support unit for mainte
nance.
f. When laying gun to a given elevation,
add correction to given angle, when measur
ing existing elevation, subtract correction
from reading.
gf> If bubble did not center by micrometer
dial, correction is negative. SHOE
h. To determine negative correction,
drop elevation index arm to -10 (one notch AK70251O
below zero), rotate micrometer until bubble Figure 2-8. Error calibration of gunner's
is centered, subtract micrometer reading quadrant M1A1.

2-26
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

2-14.1. Elevation Backlash Check. f. Record the elevation knob setting.

g. Determine the difference when laying
The following procedure lists the steps re the gun from low-to-high and high-to-low
quired to check the amount of backlash which which should not exceed 0.3 mil. If this
exists in the elevating mechanism and linkages tolerance is exceeded, check for binding or
of the sighting system. rubbing parts in the elevating mechanism,
a. Lay the main gun at approximately 270 sighting system. If not corrected, 'notify .
mils by performing steps (7) through (10) higher maintenance.
h. Repeat backlash steps a. through g. at
(para 2-1 5,b).
b. Relay gunner's periscope and range- approximately 180 and 90 mils gun elevation
finder reticles using the boresight knobs. on the way off the ramp.
c. Record the elevation knob setting. i. Reset boresight knobs to recorded
d. Relay the main gun from high to low in settings.
power mode to the stop at the end of its travel. /. Perform firing pin installation (TM 9-
It should hit with a thump. 2350-253-10).
e. Relay gunner's periscope and laser
rangefinder reticles using the boresight
knobs.

Change 2 2-26.1(2-26.2 blank)

 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

2-15. Synchronization and Alinement Pro NOTE

cedure. Make all boresight knob settings
a. General. This procedure "consists of in clockwise direction. If
two separate tests or checks: (1) synchroni necessary, rotate knob counter
zation and (2) alinement. Synchronization is clockwise before resetting
checked to detect elevation errors. Aline knob.
ment is checked to detect deflection errors. (7) Index 270 mils on the M1A1 gun- |
Although these two checks are performed ner's quadrant and place quadrant on breech ring
simultaneously, they are separate and distinct quadrant seats with line-of-fire arrow facing the
tests. Synchronization measures ability of
breech end of the main gun.
gunner's periscope and rangefinder to follow
gun movement within + 0.3 mil throughout NOTE
full range of gun elevation and depression. Hold quadrant in place when
Alinement measures ability of gunner's peri tank is being moved.
scope and rangefinder to follow gun move
ment within 0.3 mil in deflection throughout (8) Start tank (TM 9-2350-253-10) and
full range of elevation and depression. back up ramp until the bubble in the M1A1
b. Synchronization and Alinement. gunner's quadrant is approximately centered.
(1) Locate tanK on relatively level (9) Stop tank and shut down power-
terrain with rear of tank in front of a ramp or plant (TM 9-2350-253-10).
hill with sufficient grade to allow positioning (10) Position right section of M17A1
of tank approximately 270 mils (15 degrees) binocular over firing pin hole. Aline axis of
from horizontal. 105-mm gun bore on aiming point by
(2) Select a target with clearly defined operating manual traversing and elevating
right angles as near horizontal as possible and handles while using firing pin hole as a rear
at approximately 1200 meters. sight and muzzle cross threads as a front
(3) Charge manual accumulator sight. Always lay from left to right and low
| (para 2-10f (16)). to high, without overtravel.
(4) Perform end-for-end test with (11) Sight through gunner's periscope
M1A1 gunner's quadrant (para 2-12). (daylight reticle) or TTS and determine if
(5) Check gunner's periscope (daylight aiming cross is on the aiming point. If the
reticle) and rangefinder for parallax (para 2- aiming cross is alined exactly with the target
13). aiming point, proceed to step (12). If not,
(6) Boresight gunner's periscope (day proceed as follows:
light reticle) and rangefinder (TM 9-2350- Make sure that the lay of the
253-10). Keep firing pin removed and safely stow gun is not disturbed.
ed. Leave muzzle cross threads in position and (a) Unlock and rotate the boresight
keep M17A1 binoculars available. knobs until the aiming cross is laying exactly
NOTE on the target aiming point.
Always lay gun and reticle (b) Lock boresight knobs, check lay
(when rotating boresight knobs) of reticle, and note deflection slip scale
from low to high and left to reading. If alinement (deflection) error
right without overtravel. Re- exceeds 0.3 mil, return to level terrain and
check all sight reticles to en repeat steps (3) through (11) (b). If errors
sure that reticle movement did still exist, replace gunner's periscope head or
not occur after slipping scales TTS head and repeat steps (1) through (11)
on boresight knobs. If move of para 2-15b. If the alinement error still
ment occurred after boresight exceeds 0.3 mil, notify support maintenance.
knobs are locked, re-lay If it is within 0.3 mil, proceed to step (c).
reticle(s) and recheck for move (c) Note elevation slip scale read
ment. If movement of range- ing. If synchronization (elevation) error does
finder reticle exceeds 0.05 mil, not exceed 0.3 mil, proceed to step (12). If
notify higher maintenance. If error exceeds 0.3 mil, continue with step (d).
movement of periscope reticle
exceeds 0.1 mil, notify support
maintenance. (Thickness of
reticle lines equal 0.1 mil.)

Change 2 2-27
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(d) Add 4 to the noted elevation imum of 2 mils up, 5 mils down, 4 mils left,
scale reading, then divide by two. Unlock and and 4 mils right is required.
rotate elevation boresight knob to the com (c) If reticle movement is not
puted reading and relock knobs. within specifications, notify higher level of
(e) Adjust eccentrics on 11-inch arm maintenance.
until aiming cross of periscope is back on aim (15) Check level vial on 11-inch arm as
ing point (para 2-16), coast to level ground, and follows (fig 2-9, view A):
repeat procedure beginning with step (6). (a) Make sure that ELEV/TRAV
POWER switch is in OFF position.
(12) Sight through the range finder and (b) Obtain zero mils superelevation
determine if reticle is alined with the aiming as follows:
point. If the reticle is alined exactly with the 1. Set MANUAL/RANGEFIND-
target aiming point, proceed to step (13). If ER switch to MANUAL and NORMAL/BORE-
not, proceed as follows: SIGHT switch to NORMAL.
NOTE 2. Set RANGE control to 450
Make sure that lay of gun has meters.
not been disturbed. 3. Select APDS ammunition.
(a) Unlock and rotate the boresight 4. Record setting of ELEVA
knobs until the reticle is exactly layed on the TION COMMON ZERO control (return control
target aiming point.- Lock the knobs and to this setting after completing procedure).
check lay of reticle. 5. Operate ELEVATION
(b) Note deflection slip scale read COMMON ZERO control until output unit mil
ing. If alinement (deflection) error exceeds counter indicates 0.0 mils.
0.3 mil, return to -level terrain and repeat (c) Level gun with M1A1 gunner's
steps (6) through (10) and (12). If alinement quadrant and check level vial on 11-inch arm
(deflection) error still exceeds 0.3 mil, notify (fig 2-9, view A).
higher level of maintenance that a center NOTE
bearing alinement is required. If the aline Each level vial index line in the
ment error does not exceed 0.3 mil, proceed next step is equal to 1.5 mils.
to step (c). id) If level vial is not within 4.5
(c) Note elevation slip scale read mils of center (within the three division
ing. If elevation error does not exceed 0.3 marks of the vial), notify support
mil, proceed to step (13). If error exceeds 0.3 maintenance. If level vial is within specifica
mil, continue with step (d). tions, proceed to step (16), .below.
id) Add 4 to noted elevation scale (16) Return ELEVATION COMMON
reading then divide by two; unlock and rotate ZERO control to its original setting.
elevation boresight knob to the computed read (17) Set BORESIGHT/NORMAL switch to
ing and relock knobs. BORESIGHT.
(e) Adjust eccentrics on 5-inch arm (18) Set MANUAL/RANGEFINDER to
until aiming cross of rangefinder reticle is RANGEFINDER.
back on aiming point (para 2-17 ), coast to 2-16. Eleven-Inch Arm Adjustment (Fig 2-9,
level ground and repeat steps (6) through (10)
View A).
and (12).
(13) Once synchronization has been a. Loosen the four clamping screws on
achieved at 270 mils, verify synchronization the 11-inch arm caps.
and alinement on the way off of the ramp at
gun elevation of approximately 180 and 90 NOTE
mils. Dropping of the arm may be
(14) Check gunner's periscope or TTS necessary before and after ad
and rangefinder boresight knobs for correct justing the eccentrics.
travel as follows:
(a) Re-lay on target aiming point. b. Remove two locking screws from
fb) With 'the reticle aiming cross sleeve eccentric adjustment.
laying on the target aiming point, unlock and c. Loosen (do not remove) two retaining
rotate boresight knobs while observing setscrews in arm eye end.
movement of reticle aiming cross. A min

2-28 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

NOTE
When adjustment is completed
in the next step, identical red
or identical black incremental
markings of each eccentric
shall be alined with the cap
scribemarks.

d. Insert one 3/32-inch drift pin into one

of the untapped holes located on the circum
ference of the spindle and a second 3/32-inch
drift pin into one of the holes (not the tapped
hole) of the sleeve. Rotate spindle and sleeve
in opposite and equal increments with respect
to cap scribemarks until the aiming cross of
the gunner's periscope (daylight reticle) is
alined with the target aiming point. Rotate
in the direction of the increasing red scales if
reticle' is high or in the direction of the
increasing black scales if the reticle is low.
e. Tighten the two retaining setscrews
and install two locking setscrews.
f. Tighten the four clamping screws.
g. Check lay of gunner's periscope
(daylight) reticle. If not on target aiming
point, repeat steps (a) through (f), above. If
periscope cannot be synchronized by adjusting
eccentrics, notify support maintenance.
h. Once periscope has been adjusted by
rotating eccentrics, move tank to level
terrain and re-boresight (para 2-15,b, step (6).
i. Perform steps (7) through (11), para 2-
15,b, and recheck adjustments.

NOTE
Adjustments may have to be
repeated several times to
achieve elevation synchroniza
tion. Do not attempt to adjust
rangefinder linkage until
gunner's periscope has been
synchronized.

/. Once gunner's periscope is synchro

nized, (tank at 270 mils elevation, gun bore-
sight) proceed to para 2-15,b,step (12).

2-17. Five-Inch Arm Adjustment (Fig 2-9,

Views B and C).
a. Loosen center bolt and place tapered
fit of pry bar between clamping cap and 5-
AR/02S1Z inch arm. Tap lightly with a hammer (tap
ered fit) until eccentric shaft breaks
jure 2-9. Synchronization and alinement level free from sleeve.
vial and eccentric adjustments. b. Loosen four clamping screws on 5-
inch arm cap.
Change k 2-29
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

NOTE g. Perform steps (7) through (10) and (12)

When adjustment is completed in .para 2-15, b.
the next step, identical red or iden
tical black incremental markings of 2-18. Deleted.
each eccentric shall be alined with
the cap dividing line. 2-19. Fire Control System Tests.
c. Insert a 3/32-inch drift pin into one of The fire control system tests include the
the holes located on the circumference of the (1) ballistics computer system self test (para
outer eccentric scale. Insert a spanner 2-20) (2) laser rangefinder self test (para 2-
wrench (item 18, table 1-1) on the eccentric 21), (3) ballistic computer system solution test
face. Rotate inner and outer eccentrics in (para 2-22), and (4) computer system lead
opposite and equal increments with respect to circuits test (para 2-23). These tests should
the cap dividing line until aiming cross of be performed in the order presented and
rangefinder reticle is alined with target after the synchronization and alinement
aiming point. Rotate in the direction of the check (para 2-15) has been passed unless
increasing red scales if reticle is high, or in specified otherwise.
the direction of the increasing black scales if NOTE
the reticle is low. If test results are not correct,
refer to malfunction index and
NOTE
The reticle has the tendency to move correct trouble before
from target as the four clamping proceeding with test.
screws and center bolt are tightened. 2-20. M21 Ballistics Computer System Self
Adjustment may be necessary in the Test.
opposite direction of reticle move NOTE
ment to compensate for tightening of Tank must be on level ground
the clamping screws and bolt. before doing self test.
d. Tighten four clamping screws and a. Set MODE switch on R/T control panel
center bolt. to TEST.
e. Check lay of rangefinder reticle. If b. Set MASTER BATTERY switch to ON.
not on target aiming point, repeat steps a c. Set POWER switch on gunner's control
through d above. If rangefinder cannot be unit (GCU) to ON. Verify that POWER
synchronized by adjusting eccentrics, notify indicator illuminates.
support maintenance. If on target aiming d. Vary LIGHTS control on GCU. Panel
point, proceed to step f. light illumination should vary smoothly from
NOTE dim to bright. Adjust to normal brightness.
Adjustments may have to be e. Vary BRIGHT/DIM control on each ammo
repeated several times to select unit (ASU). Verify that indicator
achieve elevation synchroniza brightness varies smoothly. Also verify that
tion. the same indicator on each ASU is brighter
f. Once rangefinder has been adjusted by than the other three.
rotating eccentrics, move tank to level
terrain, re-boresight (para 2-1 5, b, step (6).

2-30 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

2-21. Laser Rangefinder Self Test.

NOTE O.O. Set POWER switch on GCU to OFF. |
Make sure HEAT AMMO switch a. Set MODE switch on R/T control panel
is in M456 position. to TEST.
b. Set MASTER BATTERY switch to ON.
f. Turn and hold LAMP/NORMAL/SYS c. Set POWER switch on GCU to ON.
TEM switch on GCU to LAMP position. All POWER indicator should illuminate.
SELF TEST and SENSOR FAIL indicators d. Set MANUAL/RANGEFINDER switch
should illuminate. Release switch. to RANGEFINDER.
g. Set MANUAL/RANGEFINDER switch e. Turn LIGHT control on R/T control
on GCU to MANUAL. Set HEAT AMMO panel full clockwise to TEST. All control
switch on GCU to M456. panel indicators should illuminate. The
RANGE (METERS) display should indicate
h. Turn and hold LAMP/NORMAL/SYS 8888 and the RTN display should indicate 8.
TEM switch to SYSTEM. Only the OK indi f. Adjust LIGHTS control counterclock
cator should illuminate. Release switch after wise and out of TEST position. Only the
verification. following indicators should be illuminated.
i. Verify that STATIONARY or MOVING RANGE (not flashing) BATL RNG
is illuminated on each ASU. Set either RESET LAST
MOVING/STATIONARY switch so that FEED TEST
MOVING is illuminated. g. The RANGE (METERS) and RTN dis
/. Set the MOVING/STATIONARY switch plays should indicate 0000 and 0, respec
on gunner's ASU to the other position. STA tively.
TIONARY should illuminate on both ASU's.
k. Set the MOVING/STATIONARY switch
on the commander's ASU to the opposite WARNING
position. MOVING should illuminate on both
Do not press RANGE switch on
ASU's. R/T or thumb switches on gunner's
I. Set the MOVING/STATIONARY switch control handles when MODE switch
on the gunner's ASU to the opposite position. is in ON or AUTO. This will fire the
STATIONARY should illuminate on both laser.
ASU's.
m. Set the MOVING/STATIONARY switch h. Set MODE switch to ON and then to
on the commander's ASU to the opposite AUTO. The ON and AUTO indicators should
position. MOVING should illuminate on both light in sequence and the RANGE indicator
ASU's. should flash within 4 seconds.
n. Press each of the four ammo select i. Place MANUAL/RANGEFINDER switch
switches on the gunner's ASU. The pressed to MANUAL. RANGE indicator should not flash.
switch should become brighter than the other Return switch to RANGEFINDER position.
three on both ASU's.
o. Repeat step n. for the commander's / Set MODE switch to TEST.
ASU. j.l. Set POWER switch on GCU to OFF. |
p. Set the MANUAL/RANGEFINDER k. Set EMER POWER switch on EU to
switch to RANGEFINDER. ON, then XMTR TEST. Test control panel
q. Turn and hold LAMP/NORMAL/SYS indicators should remain on in each position.
TEM switch to SYSTEM position. Only the Return switch to OFF position.
OK indicator should illuminate. Also verify k.l. Set POWER switch on GCU to ON. |
that the RANGE (METERS) and RTN dis /. Depress and hold RANGE pushbutton.
plays on the R/T control panel indicate 1850 RANGE (METERS) display should indicate
+ 15 and 2, respectively. Ignore any range 0002 and MALF indicator should light while
changes after switch is released. RANGE is depressed.
r. Repeat step q. for each type of ammo m. Depress BATL RNG. The indicator
except SPARE. should light.

Change 4 2-31
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

n. Perform each step in table 2-2. Indi is dangerous and can cause
cations should be as shown and MALF blindness if it enters the eye
indicator should not illuminate. directly or is reflected from a
WARNING shiny surface. During opera
Perform the remaining steps tion, checkout, and field test
only if in an AUTHORIZED ing, do not fire laser at re
LASING AREA. Before firing flective test targets or when
laser, insure that safety filter reflective surfaces may inter
has been installed on R-T eye cept the beam, or when per
piece. Also, either install sonnel are within 20 degrees of
safety filters on, or do not view the laser line-of-sight. Just
through, the M105D telescope; prior to firing, warn personnel
M35E1 daylight body, TTS day forward of the tank not to look
light channels, or M36E1 at the tank and also not to look
daylight body. The laser beam in direction of laser beam.

Table 2-2. Ranging and Logic Table

Input Indications

RANGE
Returns (METERS)
Press and Selector RTN Display SEL GO
Step Release Lights Display ( + 15)* Light Light

Set MO DE switch to TEST

1 RESET LAST 0 0000 OFF OFF
2 RANGE LAST 1 850 OFF ON
3 BATL RNG LAST 0 0000 OFF OFF
4 RANGE LAST 1 850 OFF ON
5 1 LAST 1 850 OFF ON
6 2 LAST 1 850 OFF ON
7 RANGE LAST 2 1850 OFF ON
8 RANGE LAST 3 2850 OFF ON
9 RANGE LAST 4 2850 ON OFF
10 1 1 4 850 ON OFF
11 2 2 4 1850 ON OFF
12 LAST LAST 4 2850 ON OFF
13 2 2 4 1850 ON OFF
14 FEED 2 4 1850 OFF ON
15 RESET LAST 0 0000 OFF OFF
16 2 2 0 0000 OFF OFF
17 RANGE 2 1 9995** ON OFF
18 FEED 2 1 9995 ON OFF
19 RANGE 2 2 1850 ON OFF
20 FEED 2 2 1850 OFF ON
21 Range * * * LAST 0 0000 OFF OFF
22 RESET LAST n 0000 OFF OFF

*Last digit of range display must always be 0 or 5.

**If RANGE (METERS) displays 000, go back to step 15.
***Set ELEV/TRAV POWER switch to ON position and range from
gunner's handles. Set ELEV/TRAV POWER switch to OFF position.
If computer fails step 21 of Table 2-2, perform troubleshooting of ranging
from gunner's control malfunction 102.

2-32 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 2-3. LRF FIRING TEST

Input Indications
RANGE
Returns (METERS)
Step Press and Selector RTN Display SEL GO
Release Lights Display ( + 15)* Light Light

1 RESET LAST 0 0000 OFF OFF

2 2 2 0 0000 OFF OFF

3 RANGE 2 1 9995* ON OFF

4 1 1 1 Target ON OFF
Range

5 FEED 1 1 Target OFF ON

Range

6 Range*** LAST 1 Target ON OFF

Range

♦If RANGE (METERS) displays 0000, press RESET and repeat test sequence.
**Last digit of range display must always be 0 or 5.
***Set ELEV/TRAV POWER switch to ON position and range from gunner's station. Set
ELEV/TRAV POWER switch to OFF position. If laser rangefinder fails step 6 of Table 2-3,
perform troubleshooting of ranging from gunner's control malfunction 102.

o. Select a clear area and a target within r. Set MODE switch on R/T control panel
range to intercept entire laser beam so that to ON position.
only one range return is received. s. Sight through laser eyepiece and lay
reticle on target aiming point.
NOTE
The LRF firing test is a check NOTE
of transmitter power output and If target range is not obtained in
receiver sensitivity. The two step 6 of table 2-3, make sure that
are checked by ranging at 1/2 LRF and gunner's reticles are on
power. Rangefinders operating sante target aiming point. If not,
properly under 1/2 power con use LRF for sighting to complete
ditions are assumed to have firing table and rebore sight the sys
adequate receiver sensitivity tem at the earliest opportunity.
and full power output. Do not
select a close target for this t. Perform each step of LRF firing test
test. Targets at 1200 meters (table 2-3) in the order listed.
are satisfactory under normal
conditions. 2-22. Ballistic Computer System Solution Tests.

p. Set EMER POWER switch on EU to a.Preliminary Procedures.

XMTR TEST position. (1) Locate tank on level terrain.
q. Open and secure LRF blister cover. (2) Set stabilization control selector
Close when ranging is complete. POWER and STAB switches to OFF position.

Change 2 2-33
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(3) Set LRF MODE switch to TEST posi (4) Add 50 mils to elevation scale
tion. reading. Depress index plunger and raise index
(4) Set MASTER BATTERY switch to ON arm to this new setting on elevation scale.
position. (5) Select HEP/WP ammunition on either
(5) Set POWER switch on gunner's control gunner's or commander's ammo select unit.
unit to ON position. (6) Set BORESIGHT/NORMAL switch to
(6) Adjust reticle controls on gunner's NORMAL.
periscope and LRF R/T to desired brightness. (7) Set RANGE METERS X100 dial to 12
(7) On gunner's control unit: and then set MANUAL/RANGEFINDER switch to
(a) Set ALTITUDE control to 0. MANUAL.
(b) Set AIR TEMP control to S (stan (8) Hold M1A1 in position on breech and
dard). slowly rotate RANGE METERS X100 dial toward
(c) Unlatch and open front cover. increasing ranges until bubble in M1A1 is centered
(d) Set crosswind AUTO/MANUAL (without overtravel).
switch to MANUAL. (9) Lay gunner's periscope 8X reticle on
(e) Set CROSSWIND MPH control to 0. target aiming point using elevation and deflection
(f) Record ZERO and COMMON ZERO boresight knobs.
knob settings and set knobs to 0 position. To (10) If elevation boresight knob setting is
minimize backlash, rotate knobs from +3 to 0. less than 4, subtract this setting from 4 to deter
(g) Record remaining tube life knob mine number of mils reticle was high. Proceed to
setting and set knob to NEW. step (12).
(h) Set MANUAL/RANGEFINDER (11) If elevation boresight knob setting is
switch to RANGEFEMDER. greater than 4, subtract 4 from this setting to
(i) Set BORESIGHT/NORMAL switch determine number of mils reticle was low. Proceed
to BORESIGHT. to step (13).
(8) Set ELEV/TRAV POWER switch to (12) Subtract number of mils reticle was high
ON position on gunner's control switch box. from 50.0 and record. Proceed to step (14).
(9) Set MOVING/STATIONARY switch on (13) Add number of mils reticle was low from
either gunner's or commander's ammo select unit 50.0 and record. Proceed to step (14).
to illuminate the moving indicator. (14) The recorded value from step (12) or
(10) Select a distant target (1200 meters) (13) as applicable should be equal to the MIL-
with clearly defined right angles as near horizontal counter reading within ± 0.5 mils.
as possible. (15) Rotate elevation and deflection bore
(11) Press BATL RNG on R/T unit control sight knobs to 6 and then to 4.
panel. c. Superelevation Actuator Accuracy Test.
(12) Make sure gunner's periscope daylight (1) Set MANUAL/RANGEFINDER switch
body and LRF. R/T unit elevation and deflection to RANGEFINDER.
boresight knobs are set to 4.0. (2) Press BATL RNG on R/T unit control
NOTE panel.
Always lay reticle from low to high (3) Make sure HEP/WP ammunition is still
and left to right without overtravel selected on ammo select units.
in all target laying operations. (4) Lay gunner's periscope 8X daylight
b. Output Unit MIL-Counter Accuracy Test. reticle on target aiming point using gunner's con
NOTE trol handles.
Make sure BORESIGHT/NORMAL (5) Press RANGE pushbutton on R/T unit
switch is set to BORESIGHT. until 2850 meter range is displayed in RANGE
(1) Lay gunner's periscope 8X daylight (METERS) display.
reticle on target aiming point using manual or (6) Re-lay reticle on target aiming point
power controls. using elevation and deflection boresight knobs.
(2) Position M1A1 gunner's quadrant on Elevation boresight knob should read between 2.0
breech quadrant seats with line-of-fire arrow facing and 6.0.
muzzle of main gun. (7) Rotate elevation and deflection bore
(3) Adjust index arm and micrometer knob sight knobs to 6 and then to 4.
until bubble is centered. (8) Repeat step (4).

2-34 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(9) Press RANGE pushbutton on R/T unit noted in step 5 above. |

until 850 meter range is displayed in RANGE e. Basic Solutions Test.
(METERS) display. NOTE
(10) Repeat steps (6) and (7). Make sure gunner's periscope 8X
d. Manual Range Accuracy Test. daylight body and R/T unit eleva
NOTE tion and deflection boresight knobs
Make sure LRF MODE switch is src set to 4.0
in TEST position, MASTER (1) Set BORESIGHT/NORMAL switch to
BATTERY switch is in ON po BORESIGHT.
sition, and MAIN GUN is ap (2) Press BATL RNG on R/T unit.
proximately LEVEL. (3) Set MANUAL/RANGEFINDER switch
to RANGEFINDER.
(1) Select HEP/WP ammunition on (4) Lay gunner's periscope 8X daylight
ammo select units. reticle on target aiming point using manual or
(2) Using the ranges and corr power elevating/traversing controls.
esponding MIL-counter readings specified (5) Set BORESIGHT/NORMAL switch to
below, perform steps 3 through 7 for each NORMAL.
range shown. NOTE
To select specified ranges, depress
RANGE MIL-COUNTER READINGS RANGE pushbutton on R/T unit
850 9.33 to 10.43 control panel until proper range (±
1850 25.93 to 27.23 15 meters with last digit always 0
2850 51.69 to 53.49 or 5) is shown in RANGE (ME
1200 14.27 to 15.37 TERS) display.
(6) Select 850 meter range on R/T unit.
(3) Set MANUAL/RANGEFINDER (7) Using elevation and deflection limits
switch to RANGEFINDER. specified in table 2-4, perform steps (8) through
(4) Press RANGE pushbutton on (11) for each ammo shown at the selected range.
R/T unit until selected range +15 meters is (8) Select ammo by depressing appropriate
displayed in RANGE (METERS) display. pushbutton on gunner's ammo select unit.
(1200 meters is selected by pressing BATL (9) Re-lay reticle on target aiming point
RNG, however, 0 will be displayed in the using elevation and deflection boresight knobs. Do
range meter display. not slip boresight scales.
(5) Note MIL-counter reading. (10) Check that output unit MIL- counter is
Make sure that this reading is within the within the limits specified in table for the ammo
limits specified in step 2. and range selected. If not, refer to troubleshooting.
(6) Set RANGE METERS x 100 dial (11) Check that deflection boresight knob
to same range as shown in RANGE (METERS) setting is within the limits specified in table for the
display on RANGEFINDER. ammo and range selected. If not refer to trouble
(7) Set MANUAL/RANGEFINDER shooting.
switch to MANUAL. The MIL-counter (12) Select 2850 meter range on R/T unit.
reading should be within +1.5 mils of reading (13) Repeat (7).

Change 1 2-34.1/(2-34.2 blank)

 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 2-4. BASIC SOLUTIONS TEST

MIL-Counter Superelevation (MILS)

APDS APDS HEAT FSDS

Range M392 M728 M456 HEP/WP M735

850 1.78 to 2.78 1.83 to 2.83 3.30 to 4.30 9.33 to 10.43 1.63 to 2.63
2850 7.03 to 8.13 7.56 to 8.66 18.01 to 19.21 51.69 to 53.49 6.16 to 7.26

Gunner's Station - Deflection Boresight Knob Settings

850 3.6 to 4.6 3.6 to 4.6 3.7 to 4.7 3.3 to 4.3 3.7 to 4.7
2850 3.0 to 4.0 3.0 to 4.0 3.1 to 4.4 0.8 to 2.8 3.3 to 4.3
Commander's Station (R/T) - Deflection Boresight Knob Settings

APDS
Range M392

850 3.8 to 4.9

2850 2.6 to 3.8

Change 1 2-35
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(14) Repeat steps (1) and (2). (16) Check that deflection boresight knob
(15) Lay LRF- R/T unit reticle on target setting is within the limits specified in table for the
aiming point using commander's control handle. ammo and range selected. If not, refer to trouble
(16) Select APDS- M392 ammunition. shooting.
(17) Set BORESIGHT/NORMAL switch to (17) Select 1850 meter range on R/T unit
NORMAL. and repeat step (12).
(18) . Using the boresight knob deflection (18) Select 2850 meter range on R/T unit
limits specified in table 2-4 for the RAT unit, per and repeat step (12).
form steps (9) and (11) after selection of each (19) Set CROSSWIND MPH control to 0,
range shown in table. ALTITUDE control to 0, and AIR TEMP to S.
(19) Set gunner's periscope and RAT unit (20) Set gunner's periscope elevation and
elevation and deflection boresight knobs to 6 and deflection boresight knobs to 6 and then to 4.
then to 4. g. Cant Unit Solutions Test.
f. Manual V/ind/Altitude/Air Temperature (1) Place POWER switch on gunner's con
Solutions Test. trol unit and ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF
(1) Make sure MANUAL/RANGEFINDER position. Make sure MODE switch on R-T control
switch is set to RANGEFINDER. panel is in TEST position.
(2) Set CROSSWIND MPH control to 30 (2) Disconnect system cable 3W3 from
left. the cant unit.
(3) Set CROSSWIND AUTO/MANUAL (3) Remove three nuts, lockwashers, and
switch to MANUAL. cant unit from turret ceiling.
(4) Set AIR TEMP dial to -60°F. (4) Install cant unit holding fixture and
(5) Set altitude dial to 2000. install the cant unit on the cant unit holding fix
(6) Set gunner's periscope deflection bore ture (fig 2-10).
sight knob to 7.5. (5) Connect system cable 3W3 to extension
(7) Press BATL RNG on R/T unit. cable and connect extension cable to cant unit.
(8) Set BORESIGHT/NORMAL switch to (6) Set gunner's quadrant to -267 mils (-15
BORESIGHT, degrees) and place in fixture. Negative cant angle
(9) Lay gunner's periscope 8X daylight indicates right side of cant unit is down.
reticle on target aiming point using manual or (7) Rotate quadrant to approximately level
power controls. position and tighten hand knob. Fine adjust to
(10) Set BORESIGHT/NORMAL switch to level with thumb screws.
NORMAL. (8) Place POWER switch on gunner's con
(11) Select 850 meter range on R/T unit. trol unit and ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in ON
(12) Using the elevation and deflection position.
limits specified in table 2-5, perform steps (13) (9) Place MOVING/STATIONARY switch
through (16) for each ammo shown at the selected to illuminate STATIONARY indicator.
range. (10) Depress HEP ammunition indicator on
(13) Select ammo by depressing appropriate either gunner's-or commander's ammo select unit.
pushbutton on gunner's ammo select unit. (11) Set gunner's periscope daylight body/
(14) Re-lay gunner's periscope reticle on tar channel deflection boresight knob to 7.5.
get aiming point using elevation and deflection (12) Press BATL RNG on R/T unit.
boresight knobs. Do not slip boresight scales. (13) Set BORESIGHT/NORMAL switch to
NOTE BORESIGHT.
Not all combinations of range and (14) Lay gunner's periscope 8X daylight
ammo have elevation/deflection lim reticle on target aiming point using manual or
its specified in table 2-5. Perform power controls.
steps (15) and/or (16) only as re (15) Set BORESIGHT/NORMAL switch to
quired to determine the limits NORMAL.
which are shown for the applicable (16) Press RANGE pushbutton on R/T unit
range and ammo. until 1850 meter range is displayed in RANGE
(15) Check that output unit MIL- counter (meters) display.
is within the limits specified in table for the ammo (17) From the gunner's station, perform
and range selected. If not, refer to troubleshooting. steps (18) through (20) for -15° cant.

2-36
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 2-5. Manual Wind/Altitude/Air Temperature Solutions Test

GUNNER'S STATION

APDS--M392 HEAT-M456 HEP/WP FSDS/M735

Elevation Deflection Elevation Deflection Elevation Deflection Elevation Deflection
(Mil- (Boresight (Mil- (Boresight (Mil- (Boresight (Mil- (Boresight
Range Counter) Knob) Counter) Knob) Counter) Knob) Counter) Knob)

850 4.2 to 5.2

1850 — 6.1 to 7.1 8.65 to 9.75 3.3 to 4.4 — — — 6.5 to 7.5
2850 — 5.5 to 6.5 17.41 to 18.61 0.3 to 1.6 — — — 6.2 to 7.2

Table 2-6. Cant Unit Solutions Test

GUNNER'S STATION

MIL-Counter Elevation AZ Common Zero Deflection Boresight

Knob Setting Knob Setting
Range -15° Cant +15° Cant -15° Cant +15° Cant

1850 24.77 to 26.07 25.27 to 26.57 +0.3 to +1.7 5.6 to 7.0

Table 2-7. Remaining Tube Life Solutions Test

GUNNER'S STATION
APDS-M392 HEAT--M456 HEP/WP FSDS-M735
Elevation Deflection Elevation Deflection Elevation Deflection Elevation Deflection
(Mil- (Boresight (Mil- (Boresight (Mil- (Boresight (Mil- (Boresight
Range Counter) Knob) Counter) Knob) Counter) Knob) Counter) Knob)

1200 2.46 to 3.4 to 4.4 4.84 to 3.5 to 4.5 15.60 to 2.8 to 4.0 2.34 to 3.5 to 4.5
3.46 5.94 16.70 3.34

(18) Rotate deflection boresight knob from (22) Set cant angle to simulate +15 degree
existing setting of 7.5 to 0.5. (+267 mils) cant. Positive cant angle indicates left
(19) Rotate AZ COMMON ZERO to +3 and side of cant is down.
then re-lay reticle on target aiming point using (23) Set gunner's periscope elevation bore
elevation boresight knob and gunner's control unit sight knob to 6 and then to 4.
AZ COMMON ZERO control. (24) Set POWER switch on gunner's control
(a) Output unit MIL- counter should unit and ELEV/TRAV POWER switch to ON posi
be within the limits specified in table 2-6 for -15° tion.
cant. (25) Make sure HEP/WP ammunition is still
(b) Gunner's control unit AZ COM selected on ammo select units.
MON ZERO control should be within the limits (26) Repeat steps (12) through (16).
specified in table 2-6 for -15° cant. (27) Re-lay reticle on target aiming point
(20) Return AZ COMMON ZERO control using elevation and deflection boresight knobs.
toO. (a) Output unit MIL- counter should
(21) Set POWER switch on gunner's control be within the limits specified in table 2-6 for +15°
unit and ELEV/TRAV POWER switch to OFF cant.
position.

2-37
 (3) Set APDS switch on gunner's code
(b) Deflection boresight knob should unit to M728.
be within the limits specified in table 2-6 for +15° (4) Press BATL RNG on R/T unit count
cant. panel.
(28) Set gunner's periscope elevation and (5) Set MOVING/STATIONARY switciK
deflection boresight knobs to 6 and then to 4. illuminate MOVING indicator.
(29) Set POWER switch on gunner's control (6) Make sure that all ZERO and COMMON
unit and ELEV/TRAV POWER switch to OFF ZERO controls on gunner's control unit are set I
position. Disconnect system cable 3W3 from cant 0.
unit. Remove cant position fixture and install cant (7) Lay gunner's periscope reticle on taijf
unit back in original position. aiming point using manual or power controls $
note MIL- counter reading. The MIL- counter m
h. ZERO and COMMON ZERO ing will be the reference from which elevatiot
Controls Solution Tests. measurements will be made and the target air.:';
(1) Set POWER switch on gunner's control point will be the reference from which retick
unit and ELEV/TRAV POWER switch to ON posi deflection measurements will be made.
tion. (8) Set APDS EL ZERO control on gun
(2) Press APDS ammunition switch on ner's control unit to +3.0 mils. MIL- counter re*
gunner's ammo select unit. ing should have increased by 3.0 ± 0.3 mils.

2-38
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(9) Return APDS EL ZERO control to 0. (12) Check that deflection boresight knob
:le is not on target aiming point, rotate eleva- setting is within the limits specified in table for the
oresight knob to bring reticle on target aim- ammo and range selected.
int. Boresight knob should be between 3.7 (13) Set gunner's periscope elevation and
3. deflection boresight knobs to 6 and then to 4.
(10) Set APDS AZ ZERO control on gun-
ontrol unit to +3.0 mils. ;'. Commander's Offset Solution Test.
(11) Rotate deflection boresight knob to (1) Make sure R/T unit MODE switch is in
eticle on target aiming point. Boresight knob TEST position.
1 be between 6.7 and 7.3 (2) Press BATL RNG on R/T unit.
(12) Return deflection boresight knob to (3) Make sure R/T unit elevation and
d AZ ZERO control to 0. deflection boresight knobs are set to 4.
(13) If reticle is not on target aiming point, (4) Using commander's control handle, lay
deflection boresight knob to bring reticle on LRF reticle on target aiming point.
aiming point. Boresight knob should be be- WARNING
3.7 and 4.3. Do not press R/T unit RANGE
(14) Return elevation and deflection bore- pushbutton or thumb switches on
cnobs to 4.0. gunner's control handles. This will
(15) Repeat steps (7) through (14) for fire laser.
iVP, HEAT, and FSDS ammunition types (5) While viewing LRF reticle, turn R/T
applicable AZ and EL ZERO controls. unit MODE switch from TEST to ON position.
(16) Repeat steps (7) through (14) for Reticle should jump to right of aiming point.
ON ZERO controls. (6) Rotate deflection boresight knob to re
Remaining Tube Life Solutions Test lay reticle on target aiming point. Boresight knob
(1) Set REMAINING TUBE LIFE % con- setting should be between 3.5 and 3.8.
3 0%. (7) Return MODE switch to TEST position.
(2) Set MOVING/STATIONARY switch to (8) Rotate deflection boresight knob to 6
inate MOVING indicator. and then to 4.
(3) Make sure the following controls are k. Post Test Procedures.
shown below: (1) Return ZERO, COMMON ZERO and
(a) CROSSWIND AUTO/MANUAL to REMAINING TUBE LIFE controls to recorded
UAL. settings.
(b) CROSSWIND MPH to 0. (2) Rotate elevation and deflection bore
(c) ALTITUDE to 0. sight knobs of gunner's periscope and R/T unit to
(d) AIR TEMP to S. 6 and then to 4.
(e) APDS to M392. (3) Make sure MANUAL/RANGEFINDER
(4) Press BATL RNG on R/T unit control switch is set to RANGEFENDER.
1. (4) Press BATL RNG on R/T unit.
(5) Set BORESIGHT/NORMAL switch to (5) Set BORESIGHT/NORMAL switch to
lESIGHT. BORESIGHT.
(6) Lay gunner's periscope 8X daylight (6) Using manual elevating and traversing
le on target aiming point using manual or controls, lay M105D telescope boresight reticle on
er elevating/traversing controls. target aiming point.
(7) Set BORESIGHT/NORMAL switch to (7) Check that the gunner's periscope
IMAL. reticle and LRF reticle are layed on same aiming
(8) Using elevation and deflection limits point. If not, rotate boresight knobs to bring reticle
ified in table 2-7, perform steps (9) through on target aiming point and slip boresight scales to
for each ammo shown at the selected range. read 4.
(9) Select ammo by depressing appropriate (8) Set BORESIGHT/NORMAL switch to
lbutton on gunner's ammo select unit. NORMAL.
(10) Re-lay reticle on target aiming point (9) If no other tests are to be performed:
g elevation and deflection boresight knobs. Do (a) Set POWER switch on gunner's
slip boresight scales. control unit to OFF position.
(11) Check that output unit MIL- counter is (b) Set ELEV/TRAV POWER switch
tin the limits specified in table for the ammo to OFF position.
range selected. (c) Set MASTER BATTERY switch to
OFF position.

2-39
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

2-23. Computer System Lead Circuits Test. k. Reset REMAINING TUBE LIFE control to
its original reading (refer to para 2-22, a. , step (7g).
a. Select HEAT ammunition on the gunner's /. Reset ZEROING AND COMMON ZERO ,
or commander's ammo select unit. controls to original settings (refer to para 2-22, a., I
b. Set MANUAL/RANGEFINDER switch on step (If).
the gunner's control unit to MANUAL and set m. Place CROSSWIND AUTO/MANUAL
METERS x 100 control to 20. switch to AUTO POSITION.
c. Set CROSSWIND AUTO-MANUAL switch n. Close and latch from cover on gunner's
to MANUAL, and CROSSWIND MPH control to control unit.
zero. Set MOVING/STATIONARY switch on o. Place POWER switch on gunner's control
ammo select unit to illuminate STATIONARY unit in OFF position.
indicator. Set ELEV/TRAV POWER switch to ON. p. Set ELEV/TRAV POWER switch to OFF
d. With the turret stationary, press either position.
palm switch and then momentarily press either q. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in
thumb switch on the gunner's control handle. OFF position.
Reticle should not move in field of view. If reticle
does not move, rate tachometer and computer cir Note deleted. I
cuits are operative. If the reticle moves, the rate
tachometer or computer is defective. Continue to 2-24. Nitrogen Purging Procedure.
hold either palm switch, and slew turret clockwise
(to the right) at medium speed (approximately 5 a. General. The nitrogen purging and
mils per second). Reticle should not move. If charging procedures will be used at the
reticle moves, computer unit is defective. Release completion of maintenance on optical and
palm switch. electronic pressurized sighting and fire
control units, when the internal pressure has
e. Press and hold either palm switch and slew
been relieved. Purging and charging will be
the turret clockwise (to the right) at medium speed accomplished at the conclusion of regular
(approximately 5 mils per second).
quarterly maintenance checks and services or
f. Momentarily press either thumb switch whenever moisture is evident within the in
while the turret is still moving and note that the strument. Purging and charging may require
reticle goes to the left. If the reticle does not move, the removal of units from vehicle. Care
either thumb switch, logic module, or rate tacho must be exercised while handling units to
meter unit is defective. prevent damage caused by carelessness.
g. Stop turret motion and continue to hold Under no circumstances will units be placed
palm switch. Reticle should remain stationary for on top of turret or on hull while purging and
at least 30 seconds after either thumb switch is charging procedures are performed. Instru
pressed (step f), even though turret motion has ments or units which show signs of excessive
stopped. If reticle moves before palm switch is re moisture (lenses or windows fogged) will re
leased, computer unit is defective. quire longer purging times then are listed. If
h. Release palm switch. Reticle should return moisture is persistent component must be
to center of field of view. returned to direct support maintenance.
i. Repeat steps d. through g. slewing turret
counterclockwise (to the left). Reticle should jump b. Set up of Purging and Charging Equip
right when thumb switch is depressed and left ment. Refer to TM 750-116.
when palm switch is released.
j. Repeat steps d. through g. from the com
mander's control.

2-40 Change 2
All data on pages 2-41 thru 2-50 deleted.
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CHAPTER 3

TROUBLESHOOTING

3-1. Scope. function index table" (table 3-5) precedes

troubleshooting (table 3-6). This index lists
a. This section contains troubleshooting systems of cupola and turret and malfunc
information and tests for locating and cor tions that are peculiar to each system. Only
recting some malfunctions that may develop specific malfunctions which may occur during
in various turret and cupola systems (gun operation or inspection of the turret are
elevating and turret traversing, armament, listed. Before using the troubleshooting
turret electrical, sighting and fire control, table, the mechanic should refer to table 3-5
and cupola control). Troubleshooting is a for appropriate malfunction number and asso
systematic isolation of defective components ciated page number.
by means of an analysis of trouble symptoms, (2) Stabilized mode troubleshooting
testing to determine defective components, technique. When a malfunction occurs during
and supplying remedies. Each symptom of stabilized mode of operation, perform further
trouble or malfunction given for an individual tests to determine if malfunction also exists
unit or system is followed by a list of during power mode of operation. If malfunc
corrective actions necessary to remedy mal tion also occurs in power mode, perform
functions. applicable power mode troubleshooting con
b. It is not possible to cover all troubles tained in table 3-6. If malfunction occurs
and deficiencies that may occur in a system only in stabilized mode of operation, proceed
under many conditions of operation. If a to stabilization mode malfunctions listed in
specific malfunction, test or inspection, and table 3-5 for the applicable troubleshooting
corrective action are not covered in trouble table pages.
shooting tables, proceed to isolate the system (3) Radio interference troubleshooting.
in which trouble occurs and locate the defec Table 3-6 contains the turret troubleshooting
tive component. If the trouble cannot be procedures to eliminate radio interference
isolated, notify support maintenance. Use all caused by a particular motor assembly. Prior
senses and methods to observe and locate to using this table, the radio interference
troubles. Do not neglect use of any test must be associated with a particular motor
instruments such as multimeters (para 3-2), assembly. This is accomplished by turning off
ohm meters, voltmeters, ammeters, or test the motors, one at a time, and noting if the
lamps. Standard armament procedures apply interference still exists. If the interference
in troubleshooting the weapon. To obtain the still exists with all the motors off, proceed to
maximum number of observed symptoms of the hull radio interference troubleshooting
trouble, question vehicle crew about condit procedures, TM 9-2350-253-20-1.
ions under which symptoms occurred. The (4) Special test equipment.
greater the number of trouble symptoms that (a) The following special test
can be evaluated, and the more detailed the equipment is used when troubleshooting
knowledge of existing conditions, the easier various systems within the turret and cupola
will be the isolation of the defect. Trouble
1. Stabilization Test Set (STS) (item
shooting for mechanical malfunctions of the
16, Table 1-1).
machine guns can be found in the applicable
2. Turret Electrical System Test Set
manual, e.g.: TM 9-1005-313-10 and -24 for (TESTS) (item 17, table 1-1).
7.62-mm (M240) machine gun, and TM 9- 3. Cable Test Set (CTS) (item 15,
1005-231-10 and -25 for .50 caliber (M85) table 1-1).
machine gun.
(W Before any test set is used,
c. The troubleshooting information con perform the associated self-test or opera
tained in this section parallels concepts of tional check. These tests/checks are located
responsibility prescribed in the Maintenance in chapter 12 for the STS and TESTS and in
Allocation Chart. the fire control system cable tests, para
(1) Troubleshooting tables. A mal graphs 3-6, 3-7 and 3-11 for the CTS.

3-1
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(c) The TESTS monitors tank and equipment damage during performance of
voltage at various points in the turret and troubleshooting procedures.
cupola when connected to cable connector 1. Place all switches in OFF or
1W2J2 or networks box connector 1A13J4. normal position when procedure is completed
These test points and the associated TESTS and before leaving the vehicle.
indicators are identified in tables 12-1 and 2. Whenever the driver's sta
12-2. tion is occupied, driver's hatch must be closed
(d) When the TESTS is to be used, per and the backrest installed before turret tra
form the following connection procedure. versing operations are performed.
WARNING 3. When the stabilization sys
Test set power switch must be set tem is first engaged, turret or gun movement
ON at all times. Activation of firing may occur. All personnel should be in a
circuits can occur if the test set position of safety as a precaution against
power switch is accidentally set to unexpected turret or gun movement.
the OFF position. Insure all wea 4. During stabilized operation,
pons are cleared prior to connect the magnetic brake and elevation shutoff
ing TESTS. solenoid are not energized. Movement of the
1. Place MASTER BATTERY gunner's control handles will cause turret and
switch in OFF position. gun movement, even though the magnetic
2. Connect TESTS to connectoi brake switch on the gunner's control handles
required by applicable troubleshooting procedure. is not depressed.
3. Verify that TESTS power switch 5. Ensure that MASTER BAT
is in ON position. TERY switch is in OFF position when conti
4. Place MASTER BATTERY nuity checks are being performed with multi
switch in ON position. meter.
(e) When the TESTS must be discon 6. Ensure that turret lock is
nected, perform the following disconnection proce locked after corrective action has been com
dure: pleted.
1. Place MASTER BATTERY
(6) Troubleshooting notes.
switch in OFF position.
(a) All voltage measurements are
2. Disconnect TESTS from turret
referenced to vehicle ground unless otherwise
connection(s) and reconnect turret harness connec
specified, using the multimeters in paragraph
tors.
3-2. Tolerance on 24 volt readings is + 6
(5) Prerequisites for troubleshooting volts.
procedures. (b) Continuity is a resistance of less
(a) Prior to performing turret trou than 1.0 ohm between test points. Continuity
bleshooting procedures, verify that the fol should be present and is a normal condition. A
lowing conditions exist: short is an abnormal condition. It is a resistance of
2. Vehicle batteries are less than 1.0 ohm between test points indicating
charged or external power is connected to continuity where none should exist. Make sure
the slave receptacle. multimeter is zeroed (para 3-2) before making the
2. Main gun, 7.62-mm machine measurement.
gun, and .50 caliber machine gun are unloaded
and completely safe for performing energized NOTE
circuit tests. In high current circuits such as
3. All switches are in OFF or the prime power feed for the
normal position before placing MASTER BAT powerpack drive motor, circuit
resistance greater than .01 ohm
TERY switch in ON position.
4. Vehicle is in an area which may be excessive.
permits unrestricted gun laying. (c) Troubleshooting is provided for
5. Hydraulic system is intact two types of fault conditions, open circuits
with no oil leaks. and short circuits. Problems listed in the
6. No physical evidence of malfunction index, for the most part, treat
electrical component or cable damage. the malfunction as an open-circuit problem.
7. Gun travel lock is released. When a malfunction is obviously a short
(b) The following safety precau circuit, as indicated by equipment going on
tions must be observed to prevent personnel and off, you may proceed directly to the
3-2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

malfunctions dealing with short circuits. (See b. Mechanically Zeroing the Multimeter,
additional information for TESTS trouble The multimeter must be mechan
shooting below.) ically zeroed before any tests are performed.
(d) If during TESTS usage, lamps in Refer to figure 3-2 for procedure.
use slowly flash on and off, a short exists in c. Electrically Zeroing the Multi
the circuit under test. Flashing is caused by the meter. The multimeter must be set up and
normal action of the circuit breaker in the turret zeroed before any resistance, continuity, or
oower relay and circuit breaker box. short circuit test is performed. Refer to
figures 3-3, 3-4, and 3-5 for procedures.
NOTE
d. Ohms Scale. The ohms scale is used to
It is normal for TEST lamps to dim
when a short exists in another part test for continuity, shorted circuits, and to
of the system. Be sure the lamp in measure resistance.
use is actually flashing on and off. (1) Continuity Tests (Fig 3-6). Conti
nuity tests check for a break (open) in a
(e) If a TESTS lamp flashes, consider
circuit component such as a switch or electri
the lamp to be on for the purposes of the proce
cal cable. To make a continuity test, proceed
dure. Allow 1 minute for lamp to come on in every
as instructed in figure 3-6. Figure 3-6 shows
step. If the procedure does not locate the fault,
a TS-352 B/U multimeter being used, but the
identify the circuit breaker number (CB1, CB2,
probes are connected to the circuit in the
etc) for the circuit under test using figures 3-19
same way with all three multimeters.
through 3-30 and FO-1. Then proceed to the series
of malfunctions for circuit breakers and short- (2) Short Circuit Tests (Fig 3-7). A
circuit problems (malfunctions list, malfunc short circuit (short) occurs when two compo
tions 74 through 82). Identify the proper nents that should not be connected have
procedure from the list and proceed as metal-to-metal contact with each other. A
instructed therein. short also occurs when a component that
(f) If these procedures also fail, should not touch ground has metal-to-metal
disconnect electrical connectors carrying contact with ground. To check for shorts,
prime power to the various equipments on proceed as shown in figure 3-7. Figure 3-7
that circuit breaker. To identify these shows a TS-352 B/U multimeter being used,
equipments, refer to figures 3-19 through 3- but the procedure is identical for all three
30 and FO-1 and track the circuit outward multimeters.
from the circuit breaker. The TESTS lamps (3) Resistance Measurement (Fig 3-8).
will stop flashing when the defective equip To measure the resistance of a circuit,
ment or system is disconnected. Allow 1 proceed as shown in figure 3-8. The proce
minute for return of power. If disconnecting dure is identical for all three multimeters.
a system removes the short (such as discon e. DC Volts Scale.
necting the computer system at the gunner's (1) Setup (Fig 3-9). The DC volts scale
control unit), any unit in that system may be is used to measure all voltages on the vehicle
defective. To locate the faulty unit, each except AC voltages. Before using the multi
unit may have to be replaced one at a time meter to measure DC voltage, proceed ac
rather than just disconnecting each unit one cording to instructions in figure 3-9 to set up
at a time. This is due to the prime power the multimeter.
interlock system.
(2) DC Voltage Measurement (Fig 3-10).
3-2. General Instructions for Use of Multi To measure DC voltage, proceed as
meters. instructed in figure 3-10.
a. General. Shop test sets may contain
any one of three multimeters: the Simpson f. AC Volts Scale.
160, the TS-352 B/U, or the AN/URM-105 (fig (1) Setup (Fig 3-11). The AC volts
3-1). Any of these can be used to trouble- scale is used to measure AC voltage when
shoot the vehicle electrical system. The present. Before using the multimeter to
following paragraphs and accompanying illus measure AC voltage-, proceed according to
trations contain instructions for the use of instructions in figure 3-11 to set up the
multimeters. multimeter.

3-3
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 3-1. Multimeters used in troubleshooting.

3-4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

?. ENSURE PROBES ARE SEPARATED AND NOT CONNECTED TO 4. IF NEEDLE WILL NOT ZERO, TURN METER IN FOR
A CIRCUIT. REPAIR. AR702526
Figure 3-2. Mechanically zeroing the multimeter.

(2) AC Voltage Measurement (Fig 3-12). gating and display circuitry of the AN/VVG 2
To measure AC voltage, proceed as laser rangefinder. Troubleshooting of system
instructed in figure 3-12. cables is accomplished with the cable test set
(15, table 1-1). The cable test set will check com
3-3. Diagrams and Schematics.
puter system cables in the tank or on the bench
a. Diagrams and schematics are provided (para 3-6).
as supporting aids to troubleshooting. Figures b. Self-Test Capability. The self-test
3-13 through 3-18 are cabling diagrams (of circuitry which provides XM21 computer sys
XM21, LRF, and TTS systems) for use with tem self-test capability is located in the
the Cable Test Set. computer unit. All controls are located on
b. Figures 3-19 through 3-30 are electri the gunner's control unit. These controls
cal schematics (of various systems) for use provide a quick check of the system to
with the Turret Electrical System Test Set. determine whether it is operative, has failed,
c. Figure 3-31 is a schematic (of the or will only operate in a degraded mode. If
M239 smoke grenade launcher system) for use the self-test indicates a failure of the com
with general shop equipment in troubleshoot puter unit, output unit, or reticle projector
ing that system. unit, the XM21 computer system is not
d. Foldout figure FO-1 is an overall operative. Also, the XM21 computer system
turret and cupola electrical schematic dia is inoperative if both the laser rangefinder
gram, located at the back of the manual. and RANGE METERS X100 control on the
e. Foldout figure FO-2 is a. gun elevation gunner's control unit have failed. If the
and turret traversing hydraulic flow diagram, rangefinder fails, range can be manually set
located at the back of the manual. with the RANGE METERS X100 control on
the gunner's control unit. If either rate
3-4. Troubleshooting the XM21 Computer tachometer or cant unit fails, degraded mode
System. operation is achieved by setting switch on
a. General. Troubleshooting of the XM21 either gunner's or commander's ammo select
computer system consists of fault isolation to units to illuminate the MOVING indicator. If
the major unit or system cable. Fault the crosswind sensor fails, the XM21 com
isolation of units is accomplished by system puter system will function without operator
self-test which shows defective units through corrective action as zero wind is automat
indicators on the gunner's control unit. Self- ically applied by the computer unit. How
test also performs a single check of the reply ever, if crosswind is known, it can be man-

3-5
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

NOTE: IF METER WILL NOT ZERO, REPLACE

BATTERIES. IF METER STILL WILL NOT ZERO
AFTER BATTERIES ARE REPLACED, TURN METER
IN FOR REPAIR. AR702527

Figure 3-3. Electrically zeroing multimeter ANAJRM-105.

3-6
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

RANGE SWIT€H ON DESIRED RANGE

OF OHMS POSITION.

BLACK LEAD (-) INTO THE OHMS -DC ± AC JACK

RED (+) LEAD GOES IN THE LEFT OHMS JACK

FUNCTION SWITCH ON OHMS.

NOW ' ZERO" THE METER BY TURNING THE

"OHMS ZERO ADJ" KNOB WHILE TOUCHING
THE PROBES TOGETHER.

TOUCH
PROBES

NOTE: IF METER WILL NOT ZERO, REPLACE BATTERIES.

IF METER STILL WILL NOT ZERO AFTER BATTERIES ARE
REPLACED, TURN METER IN FOR REPAIR. 6. UNTIL NEEDLE IS OVER "0" ON TOP SCALE.
AR702S28

Figure 3-4. Electrically zeroing multimeter TS-3S2 B/U.

3-7
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

TOUCH THE 2 PROBES TOGETHER

1 . SET SELECTOR SWITCH AT RANGE TO BE USED .

2. PUT BUCK PROBE IN COM JACK. NOTE: IF METER WILL NOT ZERO, REPLACE
BATTERIES. IF METER STILL WILL NOT ZERO
3. PUT RED PROBE IN +JACK. AFTER BATTERIES ARE REPLACED, TURN
METER IN FOR REPAIR.
4. TOUCH PROBES TOGETHER AND TURN Si
ADJ KNOB UNTIL NEEDLE IS OVER ZERO
ON TOP SCALE.

Figure 3-5. Electrically zeroing multimeter Simpson 160.

3-8
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

MECHANICALLY ZERO MULTIMETER a. IF NEEDLE SWINGS TO FAR RIGHT (OVER ZERO ON

(FIG 3-2). ELECTRICALLY ZERO MULTI TOP SCALE), CIRCUIT HAS CONTINUITY.
METER (FIG 3-1, 3-4, OR 3-5).
CAUTION b. IF NEEDLE DOES NOT MOVE, CIRCUIT IS OPEN
FAILURE TO PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEP MAY (CONTINUITY BROKEN).
RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE MULTIMETER. NOTE: WHEN TESTING A SWITCH OR A COMPONENT
WHICH CONTAINS A SWITCH, BE SURE TO CHECK THAT
SWITCH IS IN "ON" POSITION TO AVOID A FALSE
2. PLACE MASTER BATTERY SWITCH IN "OFF" POSITION. INDICATION OF AN OPEN CIRCUIT.
DISCONNECT CIRCUIT BEING TESTED. TO BE SAFE,
DISCONNECT BATTERY GROUND STRAP. c. IF NEEDLE JUMPS OR FLICKERS; CIRCUIT HAS A
LOOSE CONNECTION.
3. CONNECT METER PROSES TO BOTH TERMINALS OF
CIRCUIT UNDER TEST. d. IF NEEDLE MOVES TO RIGHT BUT NOT TO ZERO,
THE CIRCUIT HAS RESISTANCE. CONTINUITY IS A
4. OBSERVE METER NEEDLE: RESISTANCE OF LESS THAN 1 OHM.
AR702530

Figure 3-6. Continuity testing.

3-9
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

1. MECHANICALLY ZERO MULTIMETER

(FIG 3-2). ELECTRICALLY ZERO MULTI COMPONENT UNDER TEST, OTHER PROBE TO GROUND
METER (FIG 3-3, 3-4, OR 3-5). (E.G., VEHICLE CHASSIS). EXAMPLE ILLUSTRATED
CAUTION SHOWS CHECK FOR SHORT BETWEEN WIRE A AND WIRE
FAILURE TO PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEP MAY B IN GENERATOR-TO-REGULATOR CABLE.
RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE MULTIMETER.
2. PLACE MASTER BATTERY SWITCH IN "OFF" POSITION. 4. OBSERVE NEEDLE:
DISCONNECT CIRCUIT BEING TESTED. TO BE SAFE, o. IF NEEDLE SWINGS TO FAR RIGHT (OVER ZERO ON
DISCONNECT BATTERY GROUND STRAP. TOP SCALE), A SHORT CIRCUIT EXISTS.
3. IF CHECKING FOR SHORT BETWEEN COMPONENTS, b. IF NEEDLE DOES NOT MOVE, NO SHORT CIRCUIT
CONNECT ONE PROBE TO ONE COMPONENT, EXISTS.
OTHER PROBE TO OTHER COMPONENT. IF CHECKING c. IF NEEDLE JUMPS OR FLICKERS AN INTERMITTENT
FOR SHORT TO GROUND, CONNECT ONE PROBE TO SHORT CIRCUIT EXISTS.
AR702531

Figure 3-7. Short circuit test.

3-10
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

1. MECHANICALLY ZERO MULTIMETER

(FIG 3-2). ELECTRICALLY ZERO MULTI
METER (FIG 3-3, 3-4, OR 3-5).
CAUTION
FAILURE TO PERFORM-THE FOLLOWING STEP COULD
RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE MULTIMETER.
2. PLACE MASTER BATTERY SWITCH IN "OFF" POSITION.
DISCONNECT CIRCUIT BEING TESTED. TO BE SAFE, DIS
CONNECT BATTERY GROUND STRAP.
3. SET OHMS SELECTOR SWITCH TO PROPER RANGE FOR TEST
BEING CONDUCTED (E.G., RXI OR XI, OR RXIO OR XIO,
ETC.).
NOTE:
ALWAYS ZERO METER WHENEVER YOU CHANGE RANGES.
4. CONNECT PROBES ACROSS CIRCUIT OR COMPONENT
BEING TESTED. EXAMPLE ILLUSTRATED SHOWS RESISTANCE
MEASUREMENT OF A TEMPERATURE SENDING UNIT.
5. READ OHMS SCALE ON METER. INTERPRET READING
ACCORDING TO FOLLOWING TABLE:
OHMS SELECTOR OHMS SCALE
SETTING READING IS:
XI OR RXI READ DIRECTLY ON SCALE
XIO OR RXIO MULTIPLIED BY 10
XI00 OR RXI00 MULTIPLIED BY 100
•XIK OR RXIK MULTIPLIED BY 1000
•XIOK OR RXIOK MULTIPLIED BY 10,000
•K - 1000 TEMPERATURE
SENDING UNIT
(SAMPLE TEST)

EXAMPLE: THE METERS SHOWN BELOW HAVE THE FOLLOWING

READINGS:
OHMS SELECTOR
SETTING READING
XI OR RXI 4 OHMS
XIO OR RXIO 40 OHMS
XI00 OR RXI00 400 OHMS
XIK OR RXIK 4,000 OHMS
XIOK OR RXIOK 40,000 OHMS

TS-352 B/U SIMPSON 160 AN/URM-105

AR702532

Figure 3-8. Resistance measurement.

3-11
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

POLARITY
REVERSING
SWITCH

1. MECHANICALLY ZERO MULTIMETER.

SIMPSON 160
2. PLUG BLACK LEAD INTO -COM JACK. (E.G. TO MEASURE 24 VOLTS DC, TURN SELECTOR TO V/DC 50.
TO MEASURE LESS THAN 10 VOLTS, TURN SELECTOR TO V/DC
10. TO MEASURE LESS THAN 2.S VOLTS, TURN SELECTOR TO
3. PLUG RED LEAD INTO + JACK. V/DC 2.5.)
4. SET POLARITY REVERSING SWITCH TO+DIR POSITION. IF YOU ARE UNSURE OF VOLTAGE TO BE MEASURED, TURN
SELECTOR TO V/DC 1000 FOR FIRST READING, THEN REDUCE
RANGE AS SHOWN ABOVE FOR THE AN/URM-105 MULTIMETER.
TURN SELECTOR SWITCH TO PROPER VDC RANGE FOR VOLTAGE USING YOUR RANGES, NEXT READING WOULD BE MADE IN
YOU WISH TO MEASURE. V/DC 50A POSITION.
AR702533

Figure 3-9. DC voltage measurement setup (1 of 2).

3-12
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

AN/URM-105
MECHANICALLY ZERO MULTIMETER.
TURN SELECTOR SWITCH TO DC VOLTS RANGE
REQUIRED FOR VOLTAGE YOU WISH TO MEASURE.
(E.G., TO MEASURE 24 VOLTS DC, SET SELECTOR
AT DC VOLTS 100.)
IF YOU ARE UNSURE OF VOLTAGE TO BE MEASURED,
SET SELECTOR AT DC VOLTS 1000 FOR THE FIRST
READING. IF FIRST READING WAS LESS THAN 100
VOLTS, SET SELECTOR TO DC VOLTS 100. IF SECOND
READING WAS LESS THAN 10 VOLTS, SET SELECTOR
TO DC VOLTS 10 AND TAKE THIRD READING, ETC.

SET ON DC
VOLTS 100

-DC/ ± AC/OHMS
JACK
TS-352 B/U
1. MECHANICALLY ZERO MULTIMETER.
BLACK
2. SET FUNCTION SWITCH TO DIRECT. (RANGE LEAD
SWITCH CAN BE IN ANY POSITION.)
3. PLUG BLACK LEAD INTO -DC/±AC/OHMS JACK.
4. PLUG RED LEAD INTO JACK ON LEFT SIDE OF RED LEAD
METER SUITABLE FOR RANGE OF VOLTAGE YOU
WISH TO MEASURE.
(E.G. TO MEASURE 24 VOLTS, PLUG RED LEAD
INTO 50V JACK. TO MEASURE LESS THAN 10
VOLTS, USE 10V JACK. TO MEASURE LESS THAN
2.5 VOLTS, USE 2.5V JACK.)
IF YOU ARE UNSURE OF VOLTAGE TO BE
MEASURED, PLUG RED LEAD INTO 1000V JACK
FOR FIRST READING. THEN, REDUCE RANGE
AS SHOWN ABOVE FOR THE AN/URM-105 MULTI
METER BUT USING YOUR RANGES. NEXT
READING WOULD BE l FUNCTION
SWITCH
AR702534

Figure 3-9. DC voltage measurement setup (2 of 2).

3-13
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

MEASURING DC VOLTAGE:
1. MECHANICALLY ZERO AND SET UP MULTIMETER.- SIMPSON 160
CAUTION
IF YOU ARE UNSURE OF ANY VOLTAGE TO BE MEASURED,
ALWAYS START WITH THE HIGHEST RANGE GIVEN IN THE
SETUP INSTRUCTIONS TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THE MULTI
METER.
2. WITH ALL THREE METERS, CONNECT THE RED PROBE TO
THE POSITIVE SIDE (+) OF THE CIRCUIT UNDER TEST AND
THE BLACK PROBE TO THE NEGATIVE (-) SIDE. IF NEEDLE
TRIES TO MOVE OFF SCALE TO LEFT, REVERSE PROBES ON
CIRCUIT UNDER TEST.
3. READ METER. THE EXAMPLES ON THIS PAGE SHOW HOW
TO READ ALL THREE METERS.
SIMPSON 160
READ DC SCALE FOR RANGE CHOSEN BY SELECTOR SWITCH.
METER AT RIGHT SHOWS FOLLOWING READINGS:
SWITCH
SETTING SCALE READING
V/DC 50 0 - 50 20 VOLTS DC
V/DC 10 0 - 10 4 VOLTS DC
V/DC 2.5 0 - 25 (DIVIDE BY 10) I VOLT DC

TS-352B/U

TS-352B/U
READ DC SCALE FOR RANGE OF JACK RED LEAD IS CONNEC
TED TO. METER AT LEFT SHOWS FOLLOWING READINGS:
RANGE SCALE READING
50 V 0- 5 (MULTIPLY BY 10) 20 VOLTS DC
10 V 0-10 4 VOLTS DC
2.5 V 0- 2.5 I VOLT DC

AN/URM-105

AN/URM-105
READ UPPER BLACK STRAIGHT LINED PORTION OF AC AND
DC VOLTS SCALE FOR RANGE CHOSEN BY SELECTOR SWITCH.
METER AT RIGHT SHOWS FOLLOWING READINGS:
SWITCH
SETTING J&CAU READING
1000 DC V 0- 10 (MULTIPLY BY 100) 200 VOLTS DC
I 00 DC V 0-10 (MULTIPLY BY 10) 20 VOLTS DC
10 DC V 0-10 2 VOLTS DC
IDCV 0 - 10 (DIVIDE BY 10) .2 VOLT DC
AR70253:

Figure 3-10. DC voltage measurement.

3-14
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

AN/URM-105
MECHANICALLY ZERO MULTIMETER.
TURN SELECTOR SWITCH TO DESIRED RANGE. IF VOLTAGE IS UNKNOWN,
SET TO AC VOLTS 1000 FOR FJRST READING. IF VOLTAGE IS LESS THAN 100
VOLTS, SET SELECTOR TO AC VOLTS 100 AND TAKE SECOND READING, ETC.
TS-352 B/U
1. MECHANICALLY ZERO MULTIMETER.
2. TURN FUNCTION SWITCH TO AC VOLTS (RANGE SWITCH CAN BE AT
ANY SETTING.
3. PLUG BLACK LEAD INTO -DC/i AC/OHMS JACK.

e
BLACK K 1 1
LEAD e e s e

SET ON
1000
RED
LEAD
SELECTOR
SWITCH
FUNCTION
SWITCH

4. PLUG RED LEAD INTO JACK ON RIGHT SIDE OF METER FOR DESIRED
RANGE. IF RANGE IS UNKNOWN, PLUG INTO 1000V JACK FOR
FIRST READING. REDUCE RANGE, IF POSSIBLE, FOLLOWING PROCE
DURE SHOWN ABOVE FOR AN/VRM-105 FOR SECOND READING.
SECOND READING WOULD BE MADE IN 500 VOLT RANGE FOR THIS
METER.
SIMPSON 160
1. MECHANICALLY ZERO MULTIMETER
2. PLUG BLACK LEAD INTO -COM. JACK.
3. PLUG RED LEAD INTO +JACK.
4. TURN SELECTOR SWITCH TO V/AC POSITION, SELECTING DESIRED
RANGE. IF VOLTAGE IS UNKNOWN, SET TO V/AC 1000 FOR FIRST
READING. REDUCE RANGE, IF POSSIBLE, FOLLOWING PROCEDURE
SHOWN ABOVE FOR AN/VRM-105 FOR SECOND READING. SECOND
READING WOULD BE MADE IN 500 VOLT RANGE FOR THIS METER.

SELECTOR
SWITCH

AR702536

Figure 3-11. AC voltage measurement setup.

3-15
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

SELECTOR
SWITCH

MEASURING 115 VOLTS AC

MECHANICALLY ZERO AND SET UP MULTIMETER.
WITH ALL THREE MULTIMETERS, CONNECT ONE
PROBE TO ONE SIDE OF THE CIRCUIT UNDER TEST
AND THE OTHER PROBE TO THE OTHER SIDE. THE
EXAMPLE AT LEFT SHOWS 115 VOLTS AC BEING
MEASURED ACROSS AN AC LIGHT CIRCUIT.
3. READ THE AC SCALE OF THE METER. THE METERS
BELOW ALL ARE SHOWING 115 VOLTS AC.

TS-352 B/U
SIMPSON 160
AN/URM-105
AR702537

Figure 3-12. AC voltage measurement.

 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

ually input by placing CROSSWIND switch on

(8) Place MASTER BATTERY and I
gunner's control unit to MANUAL position,
and appropriate crosswind value on CTS POWER switch OFF. I
CROSSWIND MPH control. b. To check computer system cable 3W1,
proceed as follows:
3-5. Troubleshooting the Laser Rangefinder (1) Disconnect cable 3W1 from gun
System (LRF). ners control unit connector 2J1 and com
a. Troubleshooting of the LRF system puter unit connector Ul (figure 3-13).
consists of fault isolation to a component or (2) Remove long test cable W43 from
system cable. Fault isolation of the LRF CTS cover. Connect W43P1 to CTS connec
system is accomplished by following LRF tor 15J1 and connect W43P2 to 3W1P2 (dis
self-test procedure (para 2-21). The cable connected from GCU).
test set (15, table 1-1) is used to test system CAPTION
cables 3W33 and 3W34 contained in the fire Place MASTER BATTERY and
control system. This test verifies that the CTS POWER switches OFF be
system cable is the source of the LRF system fore removing/installing shorting
malfunction. Use of cable test set is des plugs and disconnecting/connect- I
cribed in paragraph 3-7. System cable 3W36
ing cables. I
(not tested with cable test set) is tested using
the procedure given in para 3-8. (3) Remove shorting connector CP2
b. A number of malfunctions in specific from CTS cover and connect it to system cable
areas of the LRF system will be automati 3W1P1 (disconnected from computer unit).
cally detected and indicated to the operator
CAUTION
during normal operation of the LRF system.
Do not perform checkout if
When the system detects a malfunction, the
computer unit is connected to
MALF lamp on the commander's control panel
cable 3W1. Application of 24
of the receiver-transmitter illuminates and a
vdc power will damage elec
2, 3, or 4 is displayed in the units position of
tronic components in computer
the RANGE (METERS) display. Return re
unit. If computer unit is con
ceiver-transmitter and electronics unit to
nected, the CONTINUITY
higher maintenance in pairs. Tag the two
(PRESS-TO-TEST) indicator will
units as a matched set.
illuminate.
3-6. Computer System Cables 3W1, 3W2,
and 3W3 Test Procedure (Table 3-1). (3.1) When cable test set is being used
within tank turret, connect turret chassis ground
a. Preliminary Steps. Refer to TM 9- to connector shell of cable under test, using elec
4931-360-1 4&P as required. trical lead (NSN 6625-01-154-7935) and two
(1) Set MASTER BATTERY switch to alligator clips (NSN 5999-01-093-2598). When
OFF. cable test set is being used on bench, connect
(2) Remove power cable W12 from the negative (-) power return connector of power
sable test set (CTS) cover. supply (NSN 6130-00-435-1116) to connector
(3) Connect power cable connector shell of cable under test, using electrical lead
W12P1 to CTS connector 15J2.
(NSN 6625-01-154-7935) and one alligator clip
(4) Remove power cable connector
(NSN 5999-01-093-2598).
IW2P13 from gunner's control unit connector
2J2 and connect 1W2P13 to CTS connector
W12P2 NOTE
(5) Set MASTER BATTERY and CTS The above procedure will provide for
POWER switch to ON position. Verify that identification of cables with electrical
ZTS POWER indicator is illuminated and shorts between cable shielding (which
CONTINUITY indicator does not illuminate. is wired to cable under test connector
(6) Press CONTINUITY indicator and shell) and wires within cable under test.
/erify indicator illuminates.
(7) Press INTERLOCK test switch
and verify that CONTINUITY indicator does
lot illuminate.

Change 2 3-17
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(4) Place MASTER BATTERY and (3) Connect shorting connections as

CTS POWER switch ON and verify that follows: CP3 to 3W2P3 (commander's ammo
| POWER indicator is illuminated. Verify select unit), CP4 to 3W2P5 (rate tach), CP7 to |
that CONTINUITY (PRESS-TO-TEST) lamp 3W2P6 (stab interface), and CP16 to top of wind
is not illuminated. Press INTERLOCK. sensor mast (fig 3-14). Leave 3W2P4 (gunner's
I Verify that CONTINUITY indicator does not ammo select unit) disconnected.
illuminate.
(5) Consecutively press CABLE TEST CAUTION
switches SI through S83 to test. Note Do not perform system cable
CONTINUITY (PRESS-TO-TEST) indicator for checkout if any units are con
each step. Indication should agree with that nected to system cable being
listed in table 3-2. If any indication does not tested. Application of vehicle
agree, perform steps f through f. power directly to units may
CAUTION damage some electronic compo
Place MASTER BATTERY and nents. If any units are con
CTS POWER switches OFF be nected, the CONTINUITY
fore removing/installing shorting (PRESS-TO-TEST) indicator
will illuminate.
■ plugs and disconnecting/connect-
| ing cables. (4) Place MASTER BATTERY and CTS
(6) Remove shorting connector CP2 POWER switch ON and verify that POWER
and return it to stowage area in CTS cover. indicator is illuminated. Verify that CON- 1
Do not reconnect cable to computer unit. TINUITY (PRESS-TO-TEST) indicator is not
(7) Place MASTER BATTERY and CTS illuminated. Press INTERLOCK. Verify
POWER switches ON and consecutively press that CONTINUITY indicator does not illumi- 1
CABLE TEST switches SI through S83 to test. nate. I
Verify that CONTINUITY (PRESS-TO-TEST) (5) Consecutively press CABLE TEST
indicator does not illuminate for each switch switches SI through S83 to test. Note CONTIN
pressed. If CONTINUITY (PRESS-TO-TEST) UITY (PRESS-TO-TEST) indicator for each
indicator illuminates for any switch pressed, step. Noted indication should agree with those
perform steps g through i. listed in table 3-2 for 3W2 (open test No. 1).
(8) Disconnect test cable W43 from If any indications for SI through S42 or S65
system cable 3W1, and reconnect 3W1 to GCU through S83 do not agree, perform steps f through
I and computer unit. If no other cables are to be L If indications for S43 through S64 do not agree, I
tested, disconnect power cable W12 and store in proceed to step (9).
CTS cover. Reconnect 1W2P13 to GCU connec CAUTION
tor 2J2. Place MASTER BATTERY and
c. Computer System Cable 3W2 Check. CTS POWER switches OFF be
(1) Disconnect cable 3W2 from com fore removing/installing shorting
puter unit 1J2 and from both ammo select units, plugs and disconnecting/connect- I
the rate tachometer unit, and the stab system ing cables. I
interface (3W2P6 to 1W3J1, located behind (6) Remove shorting plug CP3 from
and to the right of the azimuth indicator). Re connector 3W2P3 (commander's ASU) and con
move wind sensor probe from the top of the nect it to connector 3W2P4 (gunner's ASU).
I wind sensor mast (para 15-88). Leave connector 3W2P3 disconnected from com
(2) Connect test cable W43P1 to CTS mander's ASU.
connector 15J1. Connect W43P2 to W44P1 (6.1) When cable test set is being used
and connect W44P2 to system cable 3W2P1 within tank turret, connect turret chassis ground
(figure 3-14). to connector shell of cable under test, using elec
CAUTION trical lead (NSN 6625-01-154-7935) and two
Place MASTER BATTERY and alligator clips (NSN 5999-01-093-2598). When
CTS POWER switches OFF be cable test set is being used on bench, connect
fore removing/installing shorting negative (-) power return connector of power
I plugs and disconnecting/connect supply (NSN 6130-00-435-1116) to connector
ing cables.

3-18 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

shell of cable under test, using electrical lead CAUTION

(NSN 6625-01-154-7935) and one alligator clip Place MASTER BATTERY and
(NSN 5999-01-093-2598). CTS POWER switches OFF be
fore removing/installing shorting
NOTE plugs and disconnecting/connect
The above procedure will provide for ing cables.
identification of cables with electrical (10) Remove all shorting connectors and
shorts between cable shielding (which return them to stowage in CTS cover. Do not
is wired to the cable under test connec reconnect any connectors to system units or
tor shell) and wires within cable under stabilization interface.
test.
(7) Place MASTER BATTERY and (11) Place MASTER BATTERY and CTS
CTS POWER switch ON and verify that POWER switch ON. Consecutively press
POWER indicator is illuminated. Verify CABLE TEST switches SI through S83 and
that CONTINUITY (PRESS-TO-TEST) indi verify that CONTINUITY (PRESS-TO-TEST)
cator is not illuminated. Press INTER remains off for each switch pressed. If
LOCK. Verify that CONTINUITY indicator CONTINUITY (PRESS-TO-TEST) comes on
does not illuminate. for any switch pressed, there is a short
(8) Consecutively press CABLE TEST circuit present. If the short is indicated for
switches S5 through S32 to test. Note CON switches S43 through S64, the short may be in
TINUITY (PRESS-TO-TEST) indicator for each the wind sensor mast or EMI filter. Proceed
step. Noted indication should agree with those to step 12. If the short is indicated for
listed in table 3-2 for 3W2 (open test No. 2). switches SI through S42 or S65 through S83,
If OK, proceed to step (10). If any indications it is in the cable. Proceed to steps ' through
do not agree, perform steps f through L

(9) If indications for S43 through S64 NOTE

do not agree with table 3-2, proceed as follows: If cable checks good, proceed to step 13.
(a) Place CTS POWER switch OFF.
(b) Disconnect CP16 from top of (12) If a short circuit is indicated for
mast and stow in CTS cover. test switches S43 through S64, proceed as
(c) Remove wind sensor mast from follows:
turret roof and disconnect mast from EMI filter (a) Remove the wind sensor mast
(para 15-86). (para 15-86) and disconnect it from the EMI
(d) Connect shorting plug CP6 to EMI filter.
filter.
(b) Repeat test. If CONTINUITY
(e) Place MASTER BATTERY and CTS (PRESS-TO-TEST) indicator does not illumin
POWER switch ON. ate, the short is in the wind sensor mast.
(f) Press CABLE TEST switches S43 Perform steps f through h and replace mast
through S64. If indications agree, wind sensor (para 15-86). If short is still indicated
mast is defective. Perform steps f through i and without mast, proceed to step (c), below.
replace mast (para 15-866) if malfunction is (c) Disconnect EMI filter from
verified. If indications. do not agree with table 3-2, 3W2P2.
proceed to (g) below.
(d) Repeat test. If CONTINUITY
(g) Place CTS POWER switch OFF. (PRESS -TO-TEST) indicator does not illuminate,
(h) Disconnect CP6 from EMI fil the short is in the EMI filter. Perform steps f
ter. Disconnect EMI filter from 3W2P2. through h. If short is still indicated, cable 3W2 is
Connect CP6 to 3W2P2. defective. Perform steps f through i.
COPlace CTS POWER switch ON.
(j) Press CABLE TEST switches (13) Place MASTER BATTERY and
S43 through S64. If indications CTS POWER switch OFF. Disconnect test
agree, EMI filter is defective. Perform cables W43 and W44, and reconnect all connec
steps f through h and replace EMI filter if tors of 3W2. If no other cables are to be tested,
Tialfunction is verified. If indications do not disconnect power cable W12 and store in CTS
agree, cable 3W2 is defective. Perform cover. Reconnect 1W2P13 to GCU connector
steps f through i. 2J2.

Change 4 3-19
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

d. Computer System Cable 3W3 Check.

POWER indicator is illuminated. Verify I I
(1) Disconnect cable 3W3 from com that CONTINUITY (PRESS-TO-TEST) indi- '
puter unit 1J3, and from laser electronics
cator is not illuminated. Press INTER
unit (A31J6), output unit, reticle projector LOCK. Verify that CONTINUITY indicator I
unit (two connectors), and cant unit. does not illuminate. |
(2) Connect test cable W43P1 to CTS
connector 15J1. Connect W43P2 to W45P1 (5) Consecutively press CABLE TEST
and connect W45P2 to system cable 3W3P1 switches SI through S83. Note CONTINUITY
(fig 3-15). (PRESS-TO-TEST) indicator for each test.
CAUTION Noted indication should agree with those
Place MASTER BATTERY and listed in table 3-2 for 3W3 (open test
CTS POWER switches OFF be No. 1). If indications do not agree,
fore removing/installing shorting perform steps f through i.
I plugs and disconnecting/connect CAUTION
ing cables. Place MASTER BATTERY and
(3) Connect shorting connectors as CTS POWER switches OFF be
follows: CP8 to 3W3P2 (output unit), CP9 to fore removing/installing shorting
I 3W3P3 (reticle projector 2J2), CPU to 3W3P4 plugs and disconnecting /connect- I
(cant unit), and CP15 to 3W3P6 (laser electronics ing cables. I
I unit A31J6). Leave 3W3P5 (reticle projector 2J3) (6) Remove shorting connector CPS)
disconnected. from 3W3P3 (reticle projector 12J1) and stow
CAUTION in CTS cover. Connect shorting connector
Do not perform system cable CP10 to 3W3P5 (reticle projector 12J3).
checkout if any units are con Leave 3W3P3 (reticle projector 12J1) discon
nected to system cable being nected.
tested. Application of vehicle (7) Place MASTER BATTERY and the
power directly to units may CTS POWER switch ON. Verify that I
damage some electronic compo POWER indicator is illuminated. Verify I
nents. If any units are con that CONTINUITY (PRESS-TO-TEST) indi
nected, the CONTINUITY cator is not illuminated. Press INTER
(PRESS-TO-TEST) indicator will LOCK. Verify that CONTINUITY indicator I
illuminate. does not illuminate. I
(3.1) When cable test set is being used (8) Consecutively press CABLE TEST
within tank turret, connect turret chassis ground switches S25, S32 through S51, S53, S54, and
to connector shell of cable under test, using elec S83. Note CONTINUITY (PRESS-TO-TEST)
trical lead (NSN 6625-01-154-7935) and two indicator for each step. Noted indication
alligator clips (NSN 5999-01-093-2598). When should agree with those listed in table 3-2 for
cable test set is being used on bench, connect 3W3 (open test No. 2). If any indications do
negative (-) power return connector of power not agree, perform steps f through i.
supply (NSN 6130-00-435-1116) to connector CAUTION
shell of cable under test, using electrical lead Place MASTER BATTERY and
INSN 6625-01-154-7935) and one alligator clip CTS POWER switches OFF
(NSN 5999-01-093-2598). before removing/installing
shorting plugs and I
NOTE disconnecting/connecting cables. |
The above procedure will provide for
identification of cables with electrical (9) Remove all shorting connectors and
shorts between cable shielding (which return them to stowage in the CTS cover. Do
is wired to the cable under test connec not reconnect any connectors to system units
tor shell) and wires within cable under or laser.
test. (10) Place MASTER BATTERY and CTS
POWER switches ON. Consecutively press
(4) Place MASTER BATTERY and the
CTS POWER switch ON. Verify that CABLE TEST switches SI through S83. ,

3-20 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Verify that CONTINUITY (PRESS-TO-TEST) NOTE

indicator does not illuminate for each switch The following procedure is to be
pressed. If CONTINUITY (PRESS-TO-TEST) followed, if any indication other
indicator illuminates for any switch press than normal, as prescribed
ed, perform steps f through i. above, is observed during cable
(11) Place CTS POWER switch OFF. checkout.
Disconnect test cable W45 from system cable f. Verify that all cable connectors and
3W3 and reconnect all connections of 3W3. If no shorting plugs are properly seated in their
other cables are to be tested, disconnect power appropriate receptacles.
cable W12 and store in CTS cover. Reconnect g. Verify that proper test setup is being
1W2P13 to GCU connector 2J2. used for particular cable and test.
h. Repeat procedures that gave faulty
e. Disconnect test cables W43 and W45
indication.
from cable test set. Coil test cable W43 and
i. If faulty indication is repeated, system
return test cables W43 and W45 to stowage in
cable is faulty and must be replaced. Refer
cover of cable test set.
to para 15-99.

Change 2 3-20.1/(3-20.2 blank)

 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-1. Shorting Connectors Used in Open Test of System Cables 3W1, 3W2, and 3W3

3W2 3W3
Connector Connector
Number Number
Shorting 3W1
Connector Connector Open Open Open Open
Number Number Test Test Test Test
No. 1 No. 2 No. 1 No. 2
CP2 PI
CP3 P3 P4
CP4 P5 (Same)
CP6 (EMI, (Same)
or P2)
CP7 P6 (Same)
CP8 P2 (Same)
CP9 P3
CP10 P5
cpii P4 (Same)
CP15 P6 (Same)
CP16 Mast (Same)

Table 3-2. System Cables 3W1, 3W2, and 3W3 Checkout Procedure Indications

3W1 3W2 3W3

Press Open Open Open Open
Switch Open Test Test Test Test
Number Test No. 1 No. 2 No. 1 No. 2

1 ON OFF ON
2 ON OFF ON
3 ON OFF ON
4 ON OFF ON
5 ON ON OFF ON
6 ON ON OFF ON
7 ON OFF ON ON
8 ON OFF ON ON
9 ON ON ON ON
10 ON ON ON ON
11 ON ON ON ON
12 ON ON ON ON
13 ON ON ON ON
14 ON ON ON ON
15 ON ON ON ON
16 ON ON ON ON
17 ON ON ON ON
18 ON ON ON ON
19 ON ON ON ON
20 ON ON ON ON
21 ON ON ON ON
22 ON ON ON ON

3-91
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-2. System Cables 3W1, 3W2, and 3W3 Checkout Procedure Indications - Continued

3W1 3W2 3W3

Press Open Open Open Open
Switch Open Test Test Test Test
Number Test No. 1 No. 2 No. 1 No. 2

23 ON ON ON ON
24 ON ON ON ON
25 ON ON ON ON ON
26 ON ON ON ON
27 ON ON ON ON
28 ON ON ON ON
29 ON ON OFF ON
30 ON ON OFF ON
31 ON OFF ON ON
32 ON OFF ON ON ON
33 ON ON ON ON
34 ON ON OFF ON
35 ON ON ON ON
36 ON ON OFF ON
37 ON OFF ON OFF
38 ON OFF ON ON
39 ON OFF ON ON
40 ON OFF ON ON
41 ON OFF ON ON
42 ON OFF OFF ON
43 ON ON OFF ON
44 ON ON OFF ON
1 45 ON ON* ON ON
46 ON ON ON ON
47 ON ON ON ON
48 ON ON ON ON
49 ON ON ON OFF
50 ON ON ON OFF
51 ON ON ON OFF
52 ON ON ON
53 ON ON ON ON
54 ON ON ON ON
55 ON ON ON
56 ON ON ON
57 ON ON ON
58 ON ON ON
59 ON ON ON
60 ON ON ON
61 ON ON ON
62 ON ON ON
63 ON ON ON
64 ON ON ON
65 ON ON ON
66 ON ON ON
67 ON ON ON
68 ON ON ON
♦When using CP16 (wind mast is connected), disregard continuity indication for S45.
However, when using CP6 (wind mast is not connected) either with or without EMI filter,
continuity indicator should be ON when S45 is activated.

3-22 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-2. System Cables 3W1, 3W2, and 3W3 Checkout Procedure Indications - Continued

3W1 3W2 3W3

Press Open Open Open Open
Switch Open Test Test Test Test
Number Test No. 1 No. 2 No. 1 No. 2

69 ON ON ON
70 ON ON ON
71 ON ON OFF
72 ON ON OFF
73 ON ON OFF
74 ON ON OFF
75 ON ON OFF
76 ON ON OFF
77 ON ON OFF
78 ON ON OFF
79 ON OFF OFF
80 ON OFF OFF
81 ON OFF OFF
82 ON OFF ON
83 OFF OFF ON ON

NOTE that CONTINUITY indicator does not il- I

When using CP 16 (wind mast is con luminate.
nected), disregard continuity indication (8) Place MASTER BATTERY and
for S45. However, when using CP6 CTS POWER switch OFF.
(wind mast is not connected) either
with or without EMI filter, continuity b. Cable Test Procedures.
indicator should be ON when S45 is (1) Remove test cable W43 from stow
activated. age area in cable test set cover and connect
connector PI of cable W43 to connector 15J1
3-7. LRF System Cable Checkout (Cables
on cable test set.
3W33 and 3W34).
NOTE
a. Preliminary Steps. Refer to TM 9-
Remove from cable test set
4931-360-14&P as required.
stowage area only shorting con
(1) Set MASTER BATTERY switch to
nectors required for particular
)FF.
test. After completing each
(2) Remove power cable W12 from the
sable test set (CTS) cover. test, return shorting connectors
not being used for next test.
(3) Connect power cable connector
V12P1 to CTS connector 15J2. (2) Refer to figure 3-16 and disconnect
(4) Remove power cable connector all connectors of cable to be tested.
W2P13 from gunner's control unit connector
!J2, and connect 1W2P13 to CTS connector CAUTION
V12P2 Do not perform cable checkout
if any units are connected. Ap
(5) Set MASTER BATTERY switch
and CTS POWER switch in ON position. plication of vehicle power di
Verify CTS POWER indicator is illuminated rectly to units may damage
and CTS CONTINUITY indicator does not some electronic components. If
illuminate. any units are connected after
(6) Press CTS CONTINUITY indicator step (4) is performed, CONTI
and verify that it illuminates. NUITY (PRESS-TO-TEST) indi
(7) Press INTERLOCK switch. Verify cators will illuminate.

Change 2 3-23
rM 9-2350-253-20-2

COMPUTER
UNIT

P1
□0-

SYSTEM
GUNNER'S CABLE 3W1
CONTROL
UNIT

L
+ 24 V
POWER (1W2P13)
CD P2

TEST CABLE W43 POWER CABLE W12

Q pi
15J1 15J2

CABLE
TEST SET

NOTE: CONFIGURATION SHOWN

IS FOR OPEN TEST.
AR702538

Figure 3-13. Cable test set configuration for test of computer system cable 3W1.

3-24
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

COMPUTER
UNIT
■M J2 J3 J4
~[ljT| Qj2j |1J3| [W

+24V (1W2 PI 3)
POWER
CABLE E^P2

. TEST
n CD CABLE W43
PI I

COMMANDER'S
AMMO SELECT R
UNIT SYSTEM CABLE 3W2
S3 cw Tl
GUNNER'S STAB
AMMO SELECT R SYSTEM
UNIT IW3J1 IS[

RATE THUMB
TACHOMETER R Ji SWITCHES
UNIT
L_J U

NOTES: □ CP6(IF FAILED

CONFIGURATION SHOWN IS FOR OPEN THROUGHiEMI FILTER).
TEST NO. 1
C?j SHORTING PLUG USED (CONNECTED) ONLY □ CP6 (IF FAILED
DURING OPEN TEST NUMBER SHOWN WITHIN FROM TOP OF MAST).
SYMBOL.

AR702539

Figure 3-14. Cable test set configuration for test of computer system cable 3W2.

3-25
 1
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

COMPUTER UNIT

TT

LASER
ELECTK»:
n TEST UNIT A3'
CABLE
TEST CABLE I -0 Pi CP16Q
"ft

POWER CABLE W12

PI DPI
.1 SYSTEM
16J1 tmn ♦24V CABLES!
CABLE POWER
TEST SET (1W2P13)

NOTE:
CON FIGURATION SHOWM IS FOR
OPEN TEST NO. 1.

| 1
2 SHORTING PLUG USED (CONNECTED) ONLY DURING
! J OPEN TEST NUMBER SHOWN WITHIN SYMBOL

Figure 3-15. Cable test set configuration for test of computer system cable 3W3.

3-26
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(3) Connect test cable W43 to test luminated. Press INTERLOCK switch. Verify
cable W46 or W47, as applicable, and then that CONTINUITY indicator does not
W46 to 3W33, or W47 to 3W34, as applicable illuminate.
(fig 3-17). (6) Consecutively press CABLE TEST
CAUTION switches SI through S53 to test. Note
Place MASTER BATTERY and CONTINUITY (PRESS-TO-TEST) indicator for
CTS POWER switches OFF each step. The noted indication should agree
before removing/installing with that listed in table 3-3 for open test of
shorting plugs. cable under test. If indication does not
agree, perform steps (10) through (12).
(4) Connect the shorting connectors CAUTION
CP12 or CP13 to system cable 3W33 or 3W34, Place MASTER BATTERY and
as applicable. CTS POWER switches OFF
CAUTION before removing/installing
Do not perform system cable shorting plugs.
checkout if Receiver-Transmit (7) Remove shorting connector from
ter (R-T) Unit is still connected cable being tested and return shorting con
to system cable being tested. nector to cable test set stowage area.
Application of vehicle power (8) Place MASTER BATTERY and CTS
directly to R-T Unit may dam POWER switches in ON position. Consecu
age some electronic compon tively press CABLE TEST switches SI
ents. If R-T Unit is connected, through S53. Verify CONTINUITY
the CONTINUITY (PRESS-TO- (PR ESS- TO-TEST) indicator does not illumi
TEST) indicator will illuminate. nate for each switch pressed. If CONTI
(4.1) When cable test set is being used NUITY (PRESS-TO-TEST) indicator illumi
within tank turret, connect turret chassis ground nates for any switch pressed, refer to steps
to connector shell of cable under test, using elec (7) through (10).
trical lead (NSN 6625-01-154-7935) and two (9) Place MASTER BATTERY and CTS
alligator clips (NSN 5999-01-093-2598). When POWER switches OFF. Disconnect test
cable test set is being used on bench, connect cables W43 and W46 or W47 from system
negative (-) power return connector of power cable being tested (system cable 3W33 or
supply (NSN 6130-00-435-1116) to connector 3W34) and from cable test set. Coil test
shell of cable under test, using electrical lead cable W43 and return cables to stowage area.
(NSN 6625-01-154-7935) and one alligator clip (10) Verify that all cable connectors
(NSN 5999-01-093-2598). and shorting plugs are well seated in their
appropriate receptacles.
NOTE (11) Verify that proper test setup is
The above procedure will provide for being used for the particular system cable
identification of cables with electrical and test.
shorts between cable shielding (which (12) Repeat procedure that gave the
is wired to the cable under test connec faulty indication.
tor shell) and wires within cable under (13) If faulty indication is repeated,
test. system cable is faulty and must be replaced.
(5) Place MASTER BATTERY and the Refer to para 15-107 and para 15-108 for replace
CTS POWER switch ON. Verify that POWER ment procedure of system cables.
indicator is illuminated. Verify that CONTINUI
TY (PRESS-TO-TEST) indicator is not il-

Change 2 3-27
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

TO XM21 COMPUTER SYSTEM

SYSTEM
CABLE 3W3
J
3W3P6

3W33P1

A31J7 Q] TEST ACCESS

SYSTEM
CABLE
W33
3W34P1

SYSTEM
CABLE
W34
SYSTEM CABLE W36

3W36P2
P2 |I 3\
3W34P2 3W33P2

a—a-
A30J1 A30J3 A30J2
RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER

NOTE: SYSTEM CABLE 3W3 IS PART OF XM21 COMPUTER SYSTEM.

AR70254I

Figure 3-16. LRF system cable interconnection diagram.

3-28
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

SHORTING SHORTING
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
CP12 CP13
D D
O P2 P2

SYSTEM SYSTEM
CABLE CABLE
3W34

PI PI
P2 n

TEST TEST
CABLE CABLE
W47
Pi PI
»P2

TEST
CABLE
W43

■a:VEHICLE
TEST CABLE W12 LJ POWER (1W2P13)
P2

15J1 15J2

CABLE TEST SET

NOTE : ONLY ONE CABLE (3W33 OR 3W34) AND THE

APPLICABLE TEST CABLE AND SHORTING CONNECTO
ARE TO BE CONNECTED TO THE CABLE TEST SET WHI
PERFORMING A CHECKOUT.

Figure 3-17. Cable test set configuration far test of LRF system cables 3W33 and 3W34.

3-29
 1

TM 9-2350-253-20-2
Table 3-3. LRF System Cables 3W33 and 3W34 ChecKout
Press
Switch System Cable 3W33 System Cable
Number Open Test Open Ter
1 ON ON
2 ON ON
3 ON ON
4 ON ON
5 ON ON
6 ON ON
7 ON ON
8 ON ON
9 ON ON
10 ON ON
11 ON ON
12 ON ON
13 ON ON
14 ON ON
15 ON ON
16 ON ON
17 ON ON
18 ON ON
19 ON ON
20 ON ON
21 ON ON
22 ON ON
23 OFF ON
24 OFF ON
25 ON ON
26 ON ON
27 ON ON
28 ON ON
29 ON ON
30 ON ON
31 ON ON
32 ON ON
33 ON ON
34 ON ON
35 ON ON
36 ON ON
37 ON ON
38 ON ON
39 OFF ON
40 ON ON
41 OFF ON
42 ON ON
43 ON ON
44 ON ON
45 ON ON
46 ON ON
47 ON ON
48 ON ON
49 ON ON
50 OFF ON
51 OFF ON
52 ON ON
53 ON ON

3-30
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

3-8. LRF System Cable 3W36 Checkout. nect power cable connector W12P1 to CTS
connector 15J2 (fig 3-18.1). I
WARNING (3) Disconnect vehicle cable con
System cable 3W36 is a high nector 1W2P13 from the computer Gunner's
voltage cable. To prevent dam Control Unit (GCU) connector 2J2 (located
age to system op injury to per at the top of GCU).
sonnel, LRF system must be (4) Connect vehicle cable con
OFF. nector 1W2P13 to the test set power cable
connector W12P2 (fig 3-18.1). I
a. Verify that gunner's control unit (5) Verify the operational status
POWER ON-OFF switch and electronics unit of the CTS by performing the following: |
EMER POWER switch are set to OFF. (a) Place the MASTER BAT
b. Disconnect system cable 3W36 from TERY switch and the CTS POWER switch to I
electronics unit connector A31J1 and from the ON positions and verify that the CTS I
receiver-transmitter connector A30J1. POWER indicator illuminates and the CTS I
c. Connect one probe of multimeter CONTINUITY indicator does not illuminate. I
(para 3-2) to pin Pl-A of cable 3W36. (b) Press the CTS CONTINU
d. Set multimeter to XI OHMS scale. ITY indicator and verify that CONTINUITY I
e. Connect other probe of multimeter to pin indicator illuminates only when pressed. I
P2-A of cable 3W36. Continuity should be (c) Press INTERLOCK TEST
present. switch and verify that CONTINUITY indica
f. Repeat steps c through e for pins B, tor does not illuminate.
C, and D of cable 3W36. (d) Place the CTS POWER
g. Replace cable 3W36 if continuity and MASTER BATTERY switch to the OFF
does not exist (para 4-15). position.
I h. Check for shorts between all sockets, and
(6) Deleted.
between each pin and connector shell. No shorts
should be present. NOTE
3-9. Cable Connector Cross Reference. When disconnecting vehicle
cables or attaching CTS cables
Table 3-4 provides a cross reference be
tween cable reference designations and and shorting plugs, inspect the
plugs for bent pins and contami
components that interconnect.
nation.
3-10. Troubleshooting the Tank Thermal
b. Set Up
sight (TTS) AN/VSG-2. (On tanks (1) Disconnect the TTS interconnect
equipped with TTS)
ing cable connectors 3W4P1 from the power
Troubleshooting of the TTS AN/VSG-2
converter, 3W4P2 and 3W4P3 from the back
system consists of fault isolation to the Line
of the head assembly, 3W4P4 from the back
Replaceable Unit (LRU) or system cable.
of the gunner's display, and 3W4P5 from the
Fault isolation of units is accomplished by
commander's display (fig 3-18).
Built In Test Equipment (BITE) providing a (20 Remove CTS cables W43 and W48
system self-test capability through a display and shorting plugs CP52, CP53, CP 54 and
on the gunner's display unit. Troubleshoot
CP 55 from the CTS cover.
ing of TTS system cable 3W4 is accom
(3) Connect CTS cable connector
plished with the Cable Test Set (CTS). The
W43P1 to CTS connector 15J1 (fig 3-18.1).
CTS provides the capability for testing TTS
(4) Connect CTS cable connector
system cable either while mounted in the
W48P1 to CTS cable connector W43P2 (fig
tank or when removed from the tank.
3-18.1).
3-11. TTS System Cable (3W4) Test Pro (5) Connect test cable connector
cedure W48P2 to TTS cable connector 3W4P1 (fig
a. Preliminary Steps. Refer to TM 3-18.1).
9-4931-360-14&P as required. (6) Connect shorting plugs to TTS
(1) Place MASTER BATTERY cable as follows:
switch to the OFF position. CP52 to 3W4P2, CP53 to 3W4P3, CP54
(2) Remove power cable W12 to 3W4P4 and CP55 to 3W4P5 (fig 3-
from the Cable Test Set (CTS) cover. Con 18.1).

Change 2 3-31
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

3W4P2- HEAD

HI
3W4P3—-J 1t
(3W4) HARNESS ASSY
(3W3) WIRING HARNESS
GUNNER'S
DISPLAY —nr—i
TOM21 I
COMPUTER
3W4P4-I
2jl —

p> 3W4P5 4J1

L-g 3J1 B- 3W4P1
1W5 4J2
COMMAt-ODER'S
DISPL AY POWER
1 CONVERTER

(1W5) HARNESS ASSY—<J>

IW5P2-) I 1
TURRET |
POWER
tH-C and"" '
9 i CB BOX I
/ 1 1

Figure 3-18. TTS system cable interconnection diagram.

TANK
THERMAL J2,
SIGHT O CP52 HEAD
CABLE a UNIT
3W4 P3 ui
CP53
a
TEST CABLE P4
W43 P2 PI P2 PI 2JI GUNNERS
CP54 DISPLAY
U Q TEST CABLE UD-i UNIT
W48
P5 3JI COMNDRS
CP55 DISPLAY
a UNIT
I POWER CABLE 0 O I
| VV|2 P2 1W2P13 |^
pQ
VEHICLE CABLE
1 l'5J2 1 W2

CABLE TEST SET

AMC 833012

Figure 3-18.1. Cable test set configuration for test of TTS system cable 3W4.

3-32 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(6.1) When cable test set is being used (1) Place MASTER BATTERY and
within tank turret, connect turret chassis ground CTS POWER switch to ON position. Verify
to connector shell of cable under test, using elec that CTS POWER indicator illuminates and
trical lead (NSN 6625-01-154-7935) and two CONTINUITY indicator does not illuminate.
alligator clips (NSN 5999-01-093-2598). When (2) Press CONTINUITY indicator and
cable test set is being used on bench, connect verify indicator illuminates.
negative (-) power return connector of power (3) Press INTERLOCK TEST switch
supply (NSN 6130-00-435-1116) to connector and verify that CONTINUITY indicator does
shell of cable under test, using electrical lead not illuminate. If it does not illuminate,
(NSN 6625-01-154-7935) and one alligator clip proceed to d. If it illuminates, proceed to
(NSN 5999-01-093-2598). (4).
(4) Place CTS POWER switch OFF and
NOTE disconnect cable connector W48P2 from cable
The above procedure will provide for connector 3W4P1 (fig 3-18.1). Plaee CTS
identification of cables with electrical POWER switch ON and repeat test. If CON
shorts between cable shielding (which TINUITY indicator illuminates, CTS is defec
is wired to cable under test connector tive; refer to TM 9-4930-360-1 4&P. If indicator
shell), and wires within cable under does not illuminate, proceed to (5).
test.
(5) Place CTS POWER switch OFF
Ground can be connected to PI, P2, P3, and reconnect cable connector W48P2 to
or P4. Because P5 is not connected to 3W4P1. Place CTS POWER switch ON while
shielding, it should not be used. holding the INTERLOCK TEST switch de
pressed and lift each cable connector. If
NOTE CONTINUITY indicator blinks or does not
All exposed metal portions of illuminate, proceed to d. If CONTINUITY
the TTS cable including connec indicator remains illuminated, proceed to
tors, metal junctions and ex (6).
posed metal shielding and asso
(6) While holding the INTERLOCK test
ciated CTS shorting plugs must
switch depressed, shift the vehicle TTS cable
be electrically insulated from
back and forth at its two metal branch fittings.
tank chassis ground in order to
If CONTINUITY indicator blinks or remains off,
pass the INTERLOCK test.
proceed to d. If CONTINUITY indicator remains
illuminated, replace vehicle TTS cable 3W4 and
(7) Electrically insulate all exposed recheck the removed cable. If removed cable
metal portions of the TTS cable including con passes all tests, notify higher maintenance.
nectors, metal junctions, shorting plugs and ex
posed metal shielding. Rubber tape insulation or CAUTION
equivalent may be used to prevent metal-to- The INTERLOCK TEST must be
metal contact with the tank chassis. passed before proceeding with
the OPEN and SHORT TESTS.
c. Interlock Test When pressing switches, they
CAUTION must be pressed consecutively
from SI through S55.
The CTS provides an interlock test to
verify that no TTS cable connectors
NOTE
have been left connected accidentally
Do not press more than one CTS
to system components. Accidental ap
switch at a time since this may
plication of CTS power to TTS com
cause false indication by the
ponents can result in damage to some
CTS.
TTS components. Perform the follow
ing interlock test before the Open and
Short Tests.

Change 2 3-32.1
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

d. Open Test (7) Place CTS POWER a

Consecutively press CABLE TEST and connect shorting plug CP54;
switches SI through S55. Note CONTINU Remove CP55 from 3W4P5. Sta
ITY indicator for each test. Noted indica plug CP 55 in CTS cover.
tion should agree with those listed in table (8) Place CTS POWER sunt
3-3.1 for Open Test. If any indication does consecutively press CABLE TEST
not agree, proceed to g. SI through S55. Note CONTINUF
e. Short Test (Fig 3-18.1). tor for each test. Noted indies';
(1) Place CTS POWER switch OFF agree with those listed in table
and remove shorting plug CP52 from 3W4P2. Short Test No. 4. If any indicate
(2) Place CTS POWER switch ON and agree, proceed to g.
consecutively press CABLE TEST switches /. Cable Test Complete
SI through S55. Note CONTINUITY indica (1) Place the CTS POWER a
tor for each test. Noted indication should the vehicle MASTER BATTERY
agree with those listed in table 3-3.1 for the OFF positions.
Short Test No. 1. If any indication does not (2) Remove shorting phi
agree, proceed to g. CP 53 and CP 54 from the TTS
(3) Place CTS POWER switch OFF stow them in the CTS cover.
and connect shorting plug CP 52 to 3W4P2 (3) If no other cables are a
and remove CP 53 from 3W4P3. disconnect power cable W12, test:
(4) Place CTS POWER switch ON and and W48 from the test set and stoi
consecutively press CABLE TEST switches cover. Reconnect vehicle cable
SI through S55. Note CONTINUITY indica 1W2P13 to GCU connector 2J2 and
tor for each test. Noted indication should connection cable connectors 3W4F
agree with those listed in table 3-3.1 for 3W4P3, 3W4P4 and 3W4P5 (fig M
Short Test No. 2. If any indication does not
g. Fault Verification
agree, proceed to g.
(1) Place CTS POWER s*
(5) Place CTS POWER switch OFF Verify that proper test set-up is i)
and connect shorting plug CP 53 to 3W4P3 Inspect each cable connection ant
and remove CP54 from 3W4P4. shorting connectors for bent pins
(6) Place CTS POWER switch ON and are bent, notify support maintenen
consecutively press CABLE TEST switches (2) Place CTS POWER swilf
SI through S55. Note CONTINUITY indica repeat procedures that gave ti
tor for each test. Noted indication should
cation.
agree with those listed in table 3-3.1 for (3) If faulty indication is
Short Test No. 3. If any indication does not system cable is faulty and mustie
agree, proceed to g.
Refer to para 15-99.

3-32.2 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-3.1 TTS System Cable 3W4 Checkout

'est Indication

'ress Short Short Short Shorl

> witch Open Test Test Test Test
lumbers Test No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4

1* ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

2* ON ON OFF OFF OFF
3* ON OFF ON OFF ON
4* ON ON OFF ON OFF
5* ON OFF OFF OFF ON
6* ON OFF ON ON ON
7* ON ON ON ON OFF
8 ON OFF ON OFF ON
9 ON OFF ON ON ON
10 ON ON OFF OFF ON
11 ON ON OFF OFF ON
12 ON ON OFF OFF ON
13 ON ON OFF OFF ON
14 ON ON OFF OFF ON
15 ON ON OFF OFF ON
16 ON ON OFF OFF ON
17 ON ON OFF OFF ON
18 ON ON OFF OFF ON
19 ON ON OFF ON OFF
20 ON ON OFF ON OFF
21 ON ON OFF ON OFF
22 ON ON OFF ON OFF
23 ON ON OFF ON OFF
24 ON ON ON ON OFF
25 ON ON OFF OFF ON
26 ON ON ON OFF ON
27 ON ON ON OFF ON
28 ON ON ON OFF ON
29 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
30 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
31 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
32 ON ON OFF OFF OFF
33 ON OFF ON OFF ON
34 ON ON OFF ON OFF
35 ON OFF OFF OFF ON
36 ON OFF ON ON ON
37 ON ON ON ON OFF
38 ON OFF ON OFF ON
39 ON ON OFF OFF ON
40 ON ON OFF OFF ON
41 ON ON OFF OFF ON
42 ON ON OFF OFF ON
43 ON ON OFF OFF ON

Change 2 3-32.3
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-3.1 TTS System Cable 3W4 Checkout - Continued

Test Indication

Press Short Short Short Short

Switch Open Test Test Test Test
Numbers Test No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4

44 ON ON OFF OFF ON
45 ON ON OFF OFF ON
46 ON ON OFF OFF ON
47 ON ON OFF OFF ON
48 ON ON OFF ON OFF
49 ON ON OFF ON OFF
50 ON ON OFF ON OFF
51 ON ON OFF ON OFF
52 ON ON ON ON OFF
53 ON ON ON OFF ON
54 ON ON ON OFF ON
55 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

♦NOTE: An improper test set-up will cause a test failure during the first seven steps of
each test routine. Verify proper test set-up before rejecting the cable.

3-32.4 Change 2
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-4. Turret Cable and Connector Cross Reference

System Cable

Connector
Connector Contains Connects to
Designation Identification Circuits Components/Cable

1W1 PI 100 Hull/turret electrical contact

P2 100/100 Turret power relay box
Jl 148 Radio cable 4W1
1W2 PI Turret power relay box
P2 Laser power supply
P3 Hydraulic pump pressure switch
P4 Gunner's CBR heater unit
P5 Power pack blower
P6 Traverse interference switch
P7 Elevation shut-off solenoid
P8 Armament cable 1W6 Jl
(circuits 113B, 103B, 147)
P9 Firing relay box
P10 Gunner's control box
Pll EMI filter assembly
P12 Deck clearance valve
P13 M21 gunner's control unit
P14 Azimuth indicator
P15 Commander's CBR heater unit
P17 Loader's dome lamp control
P18 Cupola junction box
P20 Magnetic brake
P21 Commander's handle
P22 Networks box
P23 Networks box
P24 Networks box
P25 Gunner's dome lamp control
P26 Loader's CBR unit
P27 Elevation interference switch
P28 Elevation interference switch
P29 Main gun dome lamp control
Jl Traverse interference switch
J2 Turret electrical system test set
1W3 PI Controller unit
P2 Elevation servo
P3 Rate sensor
P4 Stab control selector
P5 Stab engage solenoid
P6 Adjustable resistor assembly
P7 Gunner's control assembly
P8 Traverse servo
P9 Commander's stab shut-off box
P10 Loader's stab shut off
Jl Fire control harness 3W2P8
J2 EMI filter assembly
1W4 PI 104 Turret power relay box
P2 104 Hydraulic pump motor

(3-33 blank)/3-34 Change 4

 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-4. Turret Cable and Connector Cross Reference - Continued

System Cable
Connector
Connector Contains Connects to
isignation Identification Circuits Components/Cable

1W5 PI Searchlight control box

P2 Turret power relay box
1W6 Jl 113B, 103B, 147 Main cable 1W2P8
147 Harness adapter for connection
to telescope reticle control and
quadrant control
113C Loader's safety switch
113B Loader's safety switch
113G Loader's safety switch
103B 7.62-mm machine gun solenoid
USE Blasting machine
113D Blasting machine
113G Blasting machine
113C Safety relay
113D Cable 1W10 circuit 113D
USE Cable 1W10 circuit 113E
1W7 PI 137/159 Turret power relay box
P2 137/159 Vent blower switch box
1W8 PI 159 Blower assembly
P2 159 Vent blower switch box
1W9 PI 141, 142, 143, Turret electrical contact
144, 145, 160,
151, 198, 199,
457, 463, 464,
426
Jl 141, 142, 143, Intercommunication cable 4W11
144, 145, 160,
151, 198, 199,
457, 463, 464,
426
1W10 113D Safety relay
USE Primer
113D Cable 1W6 circuit 11 3D
113E Cable 1W6 circuit 113E
1W11 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Contact board assembly
6,7
Grd, 3, 5, 7, Interconnecting box
6, 4, 111, 426
1W12 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Contact board assembly
? 6,7
■ Grd, 3, 5, 7, Interconnecting box
f 6, 4, 111, 426
1W13 PI Commander's panel
. P2 .50 cal. machine gun
P3 Trigger switch
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-4. Turret Cable and Connector Cross Reference - Continued

System Cable
Connector
Connector Contains Connects to
Designation Identification Circuits Com ponents/Cable

P4 Last round stop switch

P5 Last round stop switch
Jl Periscope reticle control
J2 Periscope intermediate harness If
J3 Trigger switch
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Cupola slip ring
6,7
1W14 147 Cable 1W15 circuit 147
147 Periscope power
Periscope power
1W15 147 Cable 1W13J2
Reticle control
147 Cable 1W14 circuit 147
1W16 PI Searchlight control
Jl Searchlight cable 5W1
1W17 PI Searchlight remote control
P2 Searchlight control

3-36
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 3-19. Turret-cupola power distribution electrical schematic.

Change 2 3-37
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

8 3•* i
g III M

_ iSilai

liii

Figure 3-20. Stabilization system power distribution electrical schematic.

3-38 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

POWER RELAY] NOTES:

&C/BBOX 1
1. SYMBOL INDICATES TEST POINTS WHEN APPEARING OUTSIDE
OF A COMPONENT.
2. LETTERS DESIGNATE TEST CONNECTOR CONTACTS.
3. NUMBERS DESIGNATE LAMPS ON THE TESTS.
4. * INDICATES THE PWR. ON LAMP ON THE TESTS.
5. AINDICATES TESTS GND.

ELEV;TRAV POWER I
SWITCH |

X IIYD j 1 - PRESS ~X ' ' Til TROL

O PUMP I SWITCH I I RATE SENSOR-1
Vmotori I r~~lk—I powerI
I , i r\ 1 PACK . j IpOWErISUPPLY,
fELEV lf
I SHUT I •
1 OFF 3

piq ji
*& rT*©-f*
I LOADER S STAB SHUT-|
'A* Jl OFF SWITCH
Jl- P10

Figure 3-21. Elevating and traversing power control (power and stabilized mode)
electrical schematic.

Change 4 3-39
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

POWER ELEV/TRAV
i RKLAY POWER
I & C/B
BOX
I ") CB9
I
' 73^"""
ri
IW2
P22X

TB2-2 J>—

NOTES: \ CMDR'S TRIGGER

L SYMBOL INDICATES TEST POINTS.
2. LETTERS DESIGNATE TEST CONNECTOR CONTACTS. r~
3. NUMBERS DESIGNATE LAMPS ON THE TESTS. t

! OVERRIDE 1
< SOLENOID 9
IGNR'S
1 CONTROL
I ASSY VALVE ~
[ASSY AR702547

Figure 3-22. Commander's override circuit electrical schematic.

3-40
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

i
l
J1„ fELEV/TRAV
1 SWITCHPOWER")
-, 9
PI P28 n I _J_ uirmj
TRAV INT ( I Rl.EV°1NT
ELEV. INT !^
,
I SWITCH |^ 8WITCH J
P10 I— 1 I
GNR'S CONTROL BOX
1W2 1W2

IdeckSlearancB
^ P23 P23 solenoid *

1W2
rtu
®1. SYMBOL INDICATES TEST POINTS WHEN;
APPEARING OITSIDE OF COMPONENTS.
LETTERS DESIGNATE TEST CONNECTOR
CONTACTS.
NUMBERS DESIGNATK LAMPS ON n. EMI \ PI
THE TESTS. Pll x,K^FILTER
y! 1W3
k ^| ASSY (R*-
| ^
I I" , Ai1
I CONTROLLER I
I UNIT I
I I AR702S48

Figure 3-23. Rear deck clearance diagram electrical schematic.

3-41
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

| AMPL I ^
I 1 f
_RATE8ENSOR _|

AR702549

Figure 3-24. Stabilization system traverse and elevation channel diagram.

NOTE

Refer to Appendix D for Figure D-l, Stabilization system -

computer system interface (without logic module).

3-42
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

) STAB
VITCH

TO
ELEV/TRAV
POWER

SYMBOL INDICATES TEST POINTS WHEN APPEARING OUTSIDE OF A COMPONENT.

LETTERS DESIGNATE TEST CONNECTOR CONTACTS.
NUMBERS DESIGNATE LAMPS ON THE TURRET ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TEST SET, USED FOR
TROUBLESHOOTING.
' INDICATES THE PWR . ON LAMP ON THE TESTS.
^INDICATES TESTS GRD.

Figure 3-25. Stabilization system - computer system interface.

Change 2 3-43
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 3-26. Main gun and machine gun electrical control electrical schematic.

3-44 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 3-27. Cupola and .50 caliber machine gun control electrical schematic.

Change 4 3-45
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

POWER I
Wl, RELAY L I
CB10 i CB3/ C/B BOX |
CM \
I

1^
n Pl^
1W7
1WS 1W2
P2v|/
P15 P« P26 Jl.
i r VENTILATOR CB1
SEARCHLIGHT i i CMDR-S GNR'S LDR-S BLOWER
MASTER I i CBR CBR CBR DISTRIBUTION a BLOWER
CONTROL UNIT i i UNIT UNIT UNIT BOX sio^ofp utility
84 9- outixt
J
NOTES
1. SYMBOL DESIGNATES TEST POINT.
2. LETTER INDICATES THE TEST CONNECTOR CONTACT.
3. • DESIGNATES THE PWR ON LAMP ON TEST.

AI702SS3
Figure 3-28. Searchlight, turret blower, and CBR power control.

POWER
RELAY
4 C/B
I CB11 /• BOX
I X
PI
1W2

NOTES:
SYMBOL INDICATES TEST
POINTS WHEN APPEARING
OUTSIDE COMPONENTS.
2. NUMBERS DESIGNATE LAMPS
ON
I ELEV QUAD JtELMCOp7|
3. LETTERS DESIGNATE TEST CONTACTS. LIOHT SOURCE RBTICU
CONTROL JjDONTROLj
AI7WJM
Figure 3-29. Turret lighting control

3-46
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

POWER
RELAY
& C/B
BOX

1. SYMBOL INDICATES TEST

POINTS.
2. LETTERS INDICATE TEST
CONNECTOR CONTACTS.
3. NUMBERS DESIGNATE LAMPS
ELECTRONICS UNIT ON TESTS.

AMC 833015

Figure 3-30. LRF - computer control interface.

Change 2 3-47
 Figure 3-31. M239 smoke grenade launcher system.

3-48 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-5. Malfunction Index

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM

NOTE

Use of Turret Electrical System Test Set (TESTS)

is required for some of the following malfunctions.

Malfunctions Manual Mode Page

1. Turret does not traverse freely, or fails to traverse. 3-54

2. Hand elevation pump handle spins when released. 3-55
3. Main gun does not elevate manually, or elevates sluggishly. 3-55
Power Mode
NOTE: Troubleshooting with Turret Electrical System Test Set (TESTS). Refer
to operating instructions (para 12-4) and self test (para 12-6).
Use of TESTS is required in following malfunctions; 4, 8, 9, 10, 16, 18,
19, 24, 25, 43. In Armament System: 47, 48, 49, 51, 54, 56. In Turret
Electrical: 63, 69, 76, 78, 81, 82, 85, 86. In Sighting and Fire
Control System: 100, 121. Ignore any lamp indications not
specifically mentioned in these procedures; several lamps will remain
lit at all times.
4. Hydraulic pressure gage indicates zero or low (less than 925 psi) 3-55
hydraulic system pressure.
5. Abnormal noise in hydraulic pump or motor. 3-57
6. Power pack cycles in short bursts. 3-57
7. Power pack fails to shut off or pressure is excessive (greater than 1275 3-57
psi).
8. Power pack runs sluggishly. 3-57
9. Gunner's and/or commander's control assemblies inoperative in elevation 3-58
and/or azimuth.
10. Gunner's control handles operate without closing gunner's palm switches. 3-60
11. Erratic or sluggish traversing. 3-62
12. Erratic or sluggish elevation. 3-63
13. Main gun drifts up or down. 3-64
14. Turret drifts when gunner's palm switches are depressed. 3-64
15. Main gun stuck in elevation. 3-64
16. Commander's override inoperative. 3-65
17. Superelevation actuator inoperative. 3-67
18. Faulty deck clearance operation. 3-67
19. Elev/Trav power not available. 3-69
20. Turret and/or main gun moves by displacing control handles with turret 3-6S
power OFF.
Stabilized Mode
Troubleshooting With Stabilization Test Set (STS)

21. Gun elevating and turret traversing system not operating properly in 3-70
stabilized mode.
•Turret traversing speed low.
•Turret fails to traverse.
•Azimuth axis not stabilized.
•Erratic tracking in azimuth
•Main gun speed low.

Change 2 3-49
TM 9-2350-253-20-2
Table 3-5. Malfunction Index - Continued

Malfunctions ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - Continued Page

♦Main gun cannot be elevated or depressed.
•Elevation axis not stabilized.
♦Erratic tracking in elevation.
♦Inability to turn on stabilization.
♦NOTE: Malfunctions not identified by a sequence number do not appear in
the troubleshooting table as individual malfunctions. For
troubleshooting of unnumbered malfunctions and malfunctions 22
through 30, 32, and 34 through 42, perform the procedures set forth
for malfunction 21. The stabilization test set (STS) is not required for
malfunctions 22, 23, 24, 25 through 30, and 43 through 46. The STS
must be utilized to troubleshoot for malfunction 21. The STS is
designed to test and troubleshoot the stabilization system. By pro
viding an indication of acceptance or nonacceptance of components,
the STS eliminates the need for qualitative judgment on the part of
the user.
22. Blower assembly inoperative (stabilization power indicator light on control 3-77
selector comes on).
23. Power indicator light control selector inoperative (blower runs). 3-78
24. Stabilization system voltage not available. 3-78
25. STAB switch fails to remain "ON." 3-80
26. Time delay inoperative. 3-81
27. STAB indicator light does not come ON. 3-81
28. Rate sensor power not available. 3-81
29. Positive power supply inoperative. 3-82
30. Negative power supply inoperative. 3-82
31. Uncontrolled drift in azimuth. 3-83
32. Traverse handle indication not acceptable as handles are rotated. 3-83
33. Uncontrolled drift in elevation. 3-85
34. Elevation handle indication not acceptable as handles are rotated. 3-85
35. TRAV BALANCE potentiometer cannot be nulled. 3-86
36. TRAV BALANCE potentiometer functions improperly. 3-87
37. ELEV BALANCE potentiometer cannot be nulled. 3-88
38. ELEV BALANCE knob functions improperly. 3-88
39. Rate sensor traverse output functions improperly. 3-89
40. Rate sensor elevation output functions improperly. 3-90
41. Traverse servovalve inoperative. 3-91
42. Elevation servovalve inoperative. 3-92
(Without Stabilization Test Set)
43. Deck clearance inoperative. 3-93
44. Turret oscillates in traverse. 3-93
45. Main gun oscillates in elevation. 3-93
46. STAB indicator light on stabilization shutoff box does not come ON. 3-93
ARMAMENT SYSTEM
Main Gun M68
47. Main gun will not fire from gunner's trigger switches, but will fire from 3-94
commander's trigger.
48. Main gun will not fire from commander's trigger, but will fire from gunner's 3-95
trigger.
49. Main gun will not fire from commander's or gunner's triggers but will 3-96
fire from blasting machine.
50. Main gun will not fire from blasting machine but fires from either 3-98
commander's or gunner's triggers.

3-50 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-5. Malfunction Index - Continued

Malfunctions ARMAMENT SYSTEM - Continued Page
51. Main gun will not fire from trigger switch on manual elevation handle 3-99
but will fire from gunner's trigger.
52. Main gun will not fire from any position. 3-99
7.62-mm Machine Gun M240
47. 7.62-mm machine gun will not fire from gunner's trigger switches, but 3-94
will fire from commander's trigger.
48. 7.62-mm machine gun will not fire from commander's trigger, but will 3-95
fire from gunner's trigger.
51. 7.62-mm machine gun will not fire from trigger switch on manual elevation 3-99
handle, but will fire from gunner's trigger.
53. 7.62-mm machine gun will not fire electrically. 3-100
Main Gun and 7.62-mm Machine Gun
54. Main gun and 7.62-mm machine gun will not fire from commander's or 3-101
gunner's triggers.
Caliber .50 Machine Gun
55. Caliber .50 machine gun will not fire (periscope reticle illuminates). 3-102
56. Caliber .50 machine gun will not fire (periscope reticle does not illuminate, 3-103
or commander has no night vision and no passive reticle).
Smoke Grenade Launcher
57. Vehicle voltage does not pass functional check of smoke grenade 3-104 |
launcher circuit.
58. Vehicle voltage not present at electrical plug pins A (+) and B (-) of smoke 3-104
grenade launcher circuit when pushbutton is depressed and held.
59. Faulty pushbutton unit. 3-106
60. Faulty wiring harness (6W1). 3-106
61. Smoke grenade on-off power box switch lamp is lit but no power at pin 3-107
C or F of pushbutton unit.
62. Smoke grenade on-off power box switch lamp not lit when switch is pushed 3-107
on.
TURRET ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
63. Domelights do not operate. 3-107
64. Gunner's domelight fails; other domelights operate. 3-108
65. Main gun domelight fails; other domelights operate. 3-108
66. Loader's domelight fails; other domelights operate. 3-108
67. Vent blower fails to operate. 3-108
68. No voltage present at utility power outlet. 3-109
69. Commander's air filter heater fails to operate; other heaters operate. 3-110
70. Gunner's air filter heater fails to operate; other heaters operate. 3-110
71. Loader's air filter heater fails to operate; other heaters operate. 3-110
72. Turret prime power not available (hull subsystems operable). 3-110
73. Searchlight inoperative. 3-111
TURRET ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - SHORT CIRCUITS
74. CB1 and CB8, hydraulic pump inoperative. 3-111
75. CB2, searchlight/TTS inoperative. 3-112 I
76. CB4, laser inoperative (emergency operation not possible). 3-112
77. CB5, cupola power inoperative. 3-112

Change 2 3-51
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-5. Malfunction Index - Continued

TURRET ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - SHORT CIRCUITS - Continued Page
Malfunctions
78. CB6, computer inoperative. 3-114
79. CB7, ELEV/TRAV POWER not available. 3-114
80. CB9, firing circuitry inoperative - main gun and 7.62-mm machine gun. 3-117
81. CB10, commander's gunner's and loader's air heaters fail to operate. 3-118
82. CB11, lighting inoperative. 3-119
83. Power pack blower motor circuit breaker fails to remain ON. 3-120
84. STAB electronics circuit breaker fails to remain ON. 3-121
85. Premature firing of main gun. 3-121
86. Premature firing of 7.62-mm machine gun. 3-122
87. Premature firing of caliber .50 machine gun. 3-122
CUPOLA CONTROL SYSTEM
88. Excessive backlash in azimuth drive. 3-122
89. Azimuth drive fails to operate. 3-122
90. Azimuth lock assembly fails to operate or has excessive backlash. 3-122
91. Excessive backlash or resistance in cradle elevation drive or elevation 3-122
drive fails to operate.
SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM
(On tanks equipped with M35E1 periscope.)
92. Elevation quadrant light or telescope reticle inoperative. 3-123
93. Commander has no reticle illumination (passive or day). 3-123
94. Commander's passive periscope reticle inoperative. 3-123
95. Commander's daylight periscope reticle inoperative. 3-124
96. Gunner's passive periscope inoperative. 3-124
97. Gunner's daylight and night reticles inoperative. 3-124
.98. Either gunner's reticle inoperative. 3-124
99. Azimuth indicator lamp inoperative. 3-125
100. Commander's or gunner's lead inoperative. 3-125
101. LRF and manual range accuracy test failure 3-126.1
102. Laser will not range from gunner's thumb switches 3-126.2
but ranges from R/T control panel.
103. Gunner's and/or commander's LRF reticle oscillates 3-127
with stab system turned off.
104. Reticle movement at gunner's or commander's station 3-128
when crosswind switch on gunner's control unit is in
AUTO position (hydraulic system in POWER or MANUAL
mode).
105. Superelevation incorrect, oscillation or excessive elevation 3-128
error during computer system solution test.
106. Excessive deflection error during computer system solution tests. 3-129
107. Excessive manual wind/altitude/air temperature error during computer 3-130
system solutions.
108. Excessive cant correction error during computer system solutions. 3-130
109. WIND SENSOR FAIL indicator on gunner's control unit comes on, crosswind 3-130
switch in AUTO position.
110. One or more indicator lights do not come on when LAMP/NORMAL/SYSTEM 3-131
switch is set to LAMP position.
111. OK indicator light does not come on when LAMP/NORMAL/SYSTEM 3-131
(self-test mode) switch is set to system position.

3-52 Change 5
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-5. Malfunction Index - Continued

Malfunctions SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM Page
(on tanks equipped with M35E1 periscope) - Continued
112. POWER indicator light on gunner's control unit does not come on when 3-131
POWER switch is set to ON.
113. Ammo select unit defects. 3-132
114. MALF indicator on R/T control panel is illuminated. 3-132
115. Laser rangefinder fails self-test or computer salf-test. 3-132
116. LRF reticle brightness cannot be varied with brightness control. 3-133
117. DEFLECTION or ELEVATION control knobs on R/T unit do not operate 3-133
smoothly.
118. 6x/12x control inoperative. 3-133
119. One or more lamps in pushbutton switches on R/T control panel of unit 3-133
do not come on.
120. LRF system does not operate (all control panel indicators out). 3-133
121. LRF system does not operate with EMER POWER switch in ON position. 3-133
SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM
TTS (On tanks equipped with TTS)
122. No thermal image on gunner's or commander's displays; TTS cooler not 3-134
operating; lamp test does not work (power-down conditions).
123. Blank or distorted video in gunner's display (good image in commander's 3-135
display).
124. Blank or distorted video in commander's display (good image in gunner's 3-135
display).
125. Blank or distorted image in both commander's and gunner's displays 3-135
(reticles are visible).
126. 8X or IR reticles not illuminated. 3-136
127. BLK HOT, WHT HOT, or WFOV indicators not illuminated when appropriate 3-136
(Not a critical mission function).
128. IX reticle not illuminated. 3-136
129. COOL light does not extinguish. Ensure that cooler has been running 3-136
longer than 10 minutes.
130. IR display has scan, raster, but poor or no video. 3-136
131. Cooler does not operate when mode switch is in ON or STBY position. 3-136
132. 8X telescope does not retain boresight. 3-136
133. Thermal channel does not retain boresight. 3-137
134. Neither thermal channel nor 8X channel retains boresight. 3-137
135. Reticle horizontal traverse behaves erratically or is not functioning. 3-137
136. Thermal image is abnormal with missing lines, irregular scan (flicker 3-138
overlap), collapsed scan (vertical line in center of display), noise patterns
on image, intermittent image, or snowy display (in good weather).
137. Improper functioning of brightness contrast, or polarity controls on 3-138
gunner's or commander's display.
138. Thermal scene (at 100 meters or greater) goes out of focus when switching 3-138
to wide field of view.
139. Moisture condensation on interior surfaces of LRU's. 3-138
140. Jammed boresight knobs. 3-138
141. FOV and/or focus controls jammed or not functioning. 3-138
RADIO INTERFERENCE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
142. Radio interference exists as a result of power pack control electric drive 3-138
motor running.
143. Radio interference exists as a result of turret vent blower motor running. 3-139
144. Radio interference exists as a result of power pack blower motor running. 3-139
145. Main gun and/or turret move (in stabilized mode) when radio equipment 3-139
is keyed.

3-53
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting

WARNING

The following safety precautions should be observed to prevent

personnel and equipment damage during performance of
troubleshooting procedures.
(1) Place all switches in OFF or normal position when procedure is completed and before
leaving the vehicle.
(2) Whenever the driver's station is occupied, close driver's hatch and install backrest before
turret traversing operations are performed.
(3) When the stabilization system is first engaged, turret or gun movement may occur. AG
personnel should be in a position of safety as a precaution against unexpected turret or gu
movement.
(4) During stabilized operation, the magnetic brake and elevation shutoff solenoid are no:
energized. Movement of the gunner's control handles will cause turret and gun movement, ever
though the magnetic brake switch on the gunner's control handle is not depressed.
(5) Ensure that MASTER BATTERY switch is in OFF position when continuity checks are
being performed during troubleshooting of stabilization system.
(6) Ensure that turret lock is locked after corrective action has been completed.
(7) Place ELEV/TRAV POWER and MASTER BATTERY switches in OFF position before
performing continuity checks or before any electrical connection is connected or
disconnected. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position before checking for 24 vdc
at a test point.

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - MANUAL MODE

1. TURRET DOES NOT TRAVERSE FREELY, OR FAILS TO TRAVERSE.
Step 1. Check that turret traversing lock and gun travel lock are released.
a. If yes, proceed to step 2.
b. If no, release lock and recheck manual traversing operation. If still
no, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Inspect hull-turret inflatable seal.
a. If inflated, reduce pressure to zero and recheck traverse. Proceed
to step 3.
b. If not inflated, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Inspect traverse gearbox for damage and mounting hardware for tightness.
a. If damage exists or tightness does not exist, notify support main
tenance of condition.
b. If not damaged and tight, proceed to step 4.
Step 4. Check area around ring gear for obstructions.
a. If obstruction(s) are present, remove.
b. If no obstruction(s) exist, proceed to step 5.
Step 5. Attempt to traverse manually.
a. If handle rotates freely, go to step 6.
/). If handle fails to rotate, go to step 7.
Step 6. Turn turret power on and attempt to traverse manually.
a. If turret traverses, replace pin lock (para 10-14).
b. If turret does not traverse, proceed to step 7.
Step 7. Disconnect hand traversing drive linkage from no-bak assembly (para 8-3).
Depress handle detent and rotate hand traversing drive handle.
a. If handle rotates freely, notify support maintenance that traverse
gearbox assembly is defective.

3-54 Change 5
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - MANUAL MODE - Continued
6. If handle fails to rotate, or does not rotate freely, replace hand
traversing drive (para 8-3).
2. HAND ELEVATION PUMP HANDLE SPINS WHEN RELEASED.
Notify support maintenance of defective powerpack control assembly.
3. MAIN GUN DOES NOT ELEVATE MANUALLY, OR ELEVATES SLUGGISHLY.
Step 1. Inspect hydraulic lines for damage.
a. If damage exists, replace defective lines (para 2-9).
6. If damage does not exist, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Check vehicle internally and externally for obstructions around main gun.
a. If obstructions exist, remove.
b. If obstructions does not exist, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Charge manual elevation accumulator (para 2-1 Of). If malfunction still
exists, notify support maintenance of a manual mode malfunction.
Step 4. Check manual hand elevation pump for any leaks or binding during manual
operation. Notify Support Maintenance if leaking or malfunction exists.
ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - POWER MODE
4. HYDRAULIC PRESSURE GAGE INDICATES ZERO OR LOW (LESS THAN 925 PSI)
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM PRESSURE (See electrical schematic, fig FO-1, diagram and
figures 3-19 and 3-21).
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER
switch on gunner's control box in ON position. Check that hydraulic powerpack
motor operates.
a. If motor operates, proceed to step 2.
b. If motor does not operate, proceed to step 6.
Step 2. Check elevating and traversing system operation in power mode.
a. If normal, replace hydraulic pressure gage (para 10-68).
6. If not normal, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF position. Check hydraulic lines
for damage.
a. If damaged, replace damaged hydraulic lines (para 2-9).
b. If not damaged, proceed to step 4.
Step 4. Check hydraulic fluid level (para 2-1 0a).
a. If level is low, fill to proper level (para 2-1 0a (5)).
6. If level is not low, proceed to step 5.
Step 5. Replace hydraulic pressure relief valve (para 10-66). Check system
pressure. Pressure should be 925 to 1275 psi.
If malfunction still exists, notify support maintenance that
hydraulic powerpack control assembly is defective.
Step 6. ELEV/TRAV POWER Indicator light on gunner's control box should be on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 7.
6. If no, proceed to step 17.
♦Step 7. Connect TESTS per para 3-lc(4)(tfJ (to connector J2 of cable 1W 2). Lamp
1 should be on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 8.
6. If no, proceed to step 12.
Step 8. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P2
of cable 1W4 from hydraulic pump motor. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch
in ON position. Check for 24 vdc between socket P2 and ground.

Change 2 3-55
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - POWER MODE - Continued

4. ZERO OR LOW (LESS THAN 925 PSI) HYDRAULIC SYSTEM PRESSURE - Continued.

a. If 24 vdc is present, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and replace
power pack electric drive motor (para 10-56).
b. If 24 vdc is not present, proceed to step 9.
Step 9. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector
PI of cable 1W4 from power relay and circuit breaker box (fig FO-1).
Check continuity between pin PI and Socket P2.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 10.
b. If continuity does not exist, disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) Wand
notify support maintenance that cable 1W4 is defective.
Step 10. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W2 from turret power relay and circuit) breaker box
(figFO—1). Disconnect connector P3 of cable 1W2 from hydraulic pressure
switch. Check continuity between pin J of PI and socket B of P3.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 11.
b. If continuity does not exist, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and
notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is defective.
Step 11. Replace turret power relay and circuit breaker box (para 5-38). Reconnect cables. Plan
ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in ON position. Check if zero or low hydraulic system
pressure still exists.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and notify support mainten
ance that hydraulic power pack control assembly is defective.
b. If no, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and forward defective turret
power relay and circuit breaker box to support maintenance for repair.
Step 12. Lamp 7 should be on.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and replace pressure switch
(para 10-67).
b. If no, proceed to step 13.
Step 13. Lamp 13 should be on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 14.
b. If no, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and test ELEV/TRAV power
circuit in gunner's control box (para 5-31).
Step 14. Lamp 16 should be on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 15.
b. If no, proceed to step 16.
Step 15. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P23
of cable 1W2 from networks box and connector P3 from hydraulic pressure
switch; check continuity between socket A of P3 and pin E of P23.
a. If continuity exists, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) replace net
works box (para 5-53).
b. If continuity does not exist, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and
notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is defective.

3-56 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

ALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - POWER MODE - Continued

ZERO OR LOW (LESS THAN 925 PSI) HYDRAULIC SYSTEM PRESSURE - Continued
Step 16. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P2Z
of cable 1W2 from networks box; disconnect connector P10 from gunner's
control box (fig FO-1). Check continuity between socket E of P10 and socket
B of P22.
a. If continuity exists, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and replace
networks box (para 5-53).
b. If continuity does not exist, disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (e) and
notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is defective.
Step 17. Turn main gun domelight on, and check its operation.
a. If domelight comes on, proceed to malfunction 19, step 2.
b. If domelight does not come on, proceed to step 18.
Step 18. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P2 of cable 1 Wl
from turret power relay and circuit breaker box. Check for +24 volts on socket A or G
of P2 when MASTER BATTERY switch is in ON position.
a. If present, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and replace power relay
and circuit breaker box (para 5-38).
b. If not present, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and notify support
maintenance that cable 1W1 is defective.
. ABNORMAL NOISE IN HYDRAULIC PUMP OR MOTOR.
Perform zero pressure check (para 2-1 0a). Check oil level on reservoir oil gage.
a. If oil level is low, add oil (LO 9-2350-253-12).
b. If oil level is not low, replace power pack motor (para 10-56) and
turn hydraulic system on. If abnormal noise persists, notify support
maintenance that hydraulic power pack assembly is defective.
. POWER PACK CYCLES IN SHORT BURSTS.
Perform zero pressure check (para 2-1 0a). Observe pressure gage.
a. If pressure drops slowly until 550 to 500 psi is reached and then
drops to zero, replace hydraulic pressure switch (para 10-67).
b. If pressure drops to zero at higher than 550 psi, nitrogen precharge
pressure is excessive. Bleed excess precharge (para 2-1 0a).
'. POWER PACK FAILS TO SHUT OFF OR PRESSURE IS EXCESSIVE (GREATER THAN 1275
PSI). (See schematic, fig FO-1.)
Step 1. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF position. Place MASTER BATTERY
switch to ON position.
a. If hydraulic motor runs, replace turret power relay box (para 5-38).
b. If hydraulic motor does not run, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in ON position. Observe pressure gage.
a. If pressure indicates over 1275 psi, replace hydraulic pressure
switch (para 10-67).
b. If pressure does not reach 925 psi, go back to malfunction 4.
8. POWER PACK RUNS SLUGGISHLY. (REFER TO FIGURES 3-19 and FO-1)
Step 1. Connect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (d) (to cable connector 1W2J2). Connect multimeter
set to measure 24 vdc to TP3 (+) and TP4 (-) of TESTS. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER

Change 4 3-57
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - POWER MODE - Continued

switch in ON position. Exercise power pack using gunner's handles while
observing meter. Reading should not fall below 18 volts except possibly when
pump starts.
a. If voltage drops below 18 volts, proceed to step 2.
b. If voltage remains above 18 volts, proceed to step 3.
8. POWER PACK RUNS SLUGGISHLY - Continued.
Step 2. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (e) Remove multimeter. Disconnect connector P2 of
cable 1W1 from turret power relay and circuit breaker box. Also disconnect 1 Wl from slip
ring. Inspect all connectors for corrosion, carbon or burned contacts. Measure resistance
of cable 1W1.
a. If corroded, clean and retest (step 1).
b. If contacts on turret power relay and circuit breaker box connector
are burned, replace box (para 5-38).
c. If contacts on slip ring connector or cable 1W1 are burned, or if
resistance of cable 1W1 is greater than 0.2 ohm, notify support
maintenance, that cable is defective.
d. If power pack still runs sluggishly proceed to malfunction 72.
Step 3. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) Remove multimeter. Remove PI of cable 1W4
from turret power relay and circuit breaker box and P2 from hydraulic pump. Inspect
all connectors for corrosion, carbon, or burned contacts. Measure resistance of cable 1W4.
a. If corroded, clean and recheck power pack speed.
b. If contacts on turret power relay and circuit breaker box connector
or cable 1W4 are burned, replace box (para 5-38) or cable.
c. If resistance of cable 1W4 is greater than 0.2 ohms, notify support main
tenance that cable 1W4 is defective.
d. If power pack still runs sluggishly, notify support maintenance that
power pack is defective.

9. GUNNER'S AND/OR COMMANDER'S CONTROL ASSEMBLIES INOPERATIVE DM ELEVATION

AND/OR AZIMUTH. (See figures 3-19, 3-21, and FO-1)

Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER

switch in ON position. ELEV/TRAV POWER indicator light should come on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 2.
b. If no, proceed to malfunction 19, step 1.
Step 2. Check gun travel lock and turret lock.
a. If both locks are released, proceed to step 3.
b. If either lock is not released, release lock.
Step 3. Attempt to traverse the turret and elevate the gun from the gunner's and
commander's control assemblies.
a. If both gunner's and commander's control assemblies are inoperative in both
elevation and traversing, proceed to step 5.
b. If both gunner's and commander's control assemblies are inoperative ir
either elevation or traversing, proceed to step 12.
c. If only gunner's control assembly is inoperative in either or both
elevation or traversing, replace gunner's control assembly (para 10-
38 or para 10-38.1).
3-58 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - POWER MODE - Continued

9. GUNNER'S AND/OR COMMANDER'S CONTROL ASSEMBLIES INOPERATIVE IN ELEVATION

AND/OR AZIMUTH - Continued.

d. If only commander's control assembly is inoperative in both

elevation and traversing, proceed to step 4.
e. If only commander's control assembly is inoperative in either elevation
or traversing, adjust commander's control rods (para 10-34). If adjust
ment fails, replace gunner's control assembly (para 10-38).
Step 4. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF position. Depress commander's palm
switch, and listen for audible click of the override solenoid.
a. If solenoid operates, replace gunner's control assembly (para 10-38).
b. If solenoid does not operate, proceed to malfunction 16, step 1.
Step 5. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P7
of cable 1W3 from gunner's control assembly. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER
switch in ON position. Check for 24 vdc between socket P of P7 and ground.
a. If 24 vdc is present, check for 24vdc at lead of solenoid.
If present, replace hydraulic power valve solenoid (para 10-69).
b. If 24 vdc is not present, proceed to step 6.
Step 6. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P23
of cable 1W2 from networks box. Check continuity between pin H of P23 and
socket P of P7.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 9.
b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 7.
Step 7. Disconnect connector P4 of cable 1W3 from stabilization control selector (fig 3-20).
Check continuity between pin H of P23 and socket J of P4.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 8.
b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 11.
Step 8. Check continuity between socket P of P7 and socket U of P4.
a. If continuity exists, replace stabilization control selector (para 5-
44).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W3 is defective.
Step 9. Connect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (d) (to connector J2 of cable 1W2). Place ELEV/
TRAV POWER switch in ON position. Lamp 13 should come on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 10.
b. If no, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and test ELEV/TRAV
POWER circuit in gunner's control box (para 5-31 ).
Step 10. Disconnect TESTS per para Z-lc(A)(e) and place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in
OFF position. Disconnect connector P10 of cable 1W2 from gunner's control box
(fig FO-1). Disconnect connector P22 of cable 1W2 from networks box. Check con
tinuity from socket E of P10 to socket B of P22.
a. If continuity exists, replace networks box (para 5-53).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W2 is defective.
Step 11. Disconnect connector Pll of cable 1W2 and connector J2 of cable 1W3 from
EMI filter assembly. Check continuity between pin P of Jl on filter assembly
and socket P of PI.

Change 5 3-59
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - POWER MODE - Continued

9. GUNNER'S AND/OR COMMANDER'S CONTROL ASSEMBLIES INOPERATIVE IN ELEVATION

AND/OR AZIMUTH - Continued.
a. If continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 or
1W3 is defective.
b. If continuity does not exist, replace EMI filter assembly (para 5-
81).
Step 12. Attempt to elevate or depress the main gun and traverse the turret from
either commander's or gunner's control assemblies.
a. If gun elevates and depresses but turret will not traverse, check
pin lock assembly (para 10-14). If pin lock is defective, repair or
replace (para 10-14). If pin lock is not defective, notify support
maintenance that turret traverse gearbox assembly is defective.
b. If gun does not elevate and depress but turret will traverse,
proceed to step 13.
Step 13. Attempt to elevate the main gun manually.
a. If it elevates, proceed to step 14.
b. If it does not elevate, notify support maintenance that elevating
mechanism is defective.
Step 14. Depress gunner's palm switch, and listen for click of elevation shutoff solenoid
a. If click can be heard, replace elevation shutoff valve (para 10-62).
b. If click cannot be heard, replace the elevation shutoff solenoid
(para 10-64).
10. GUNNER'S CONTROL HANDLES OPERATE WITHOUT CLOSING GUNNER'S PALM
SWITCHES. (See figures 3-19, 3-20, 3-21, 3-22, and FO-1).
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER
switch in OFF position. Attempt to traverse turret and elevate or depress gun
with palm switch depressed. Movement should not occur.
a. If movement occurs, replace gunner's control assembly (para 10-
38).
b. If no, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in ON position. Make sure stabilization
system is off. Attempt to elevate and depress main gun, and traverse turret
without depressing gunner's palm switches.
a. If main gun elevates or depresses but turret does not traverse,
proceed to step 5.
b. If turret traverses but gun does not elevate or depress, proceed to
step 3.
c. If main gun elevates and depresses and turret traverses, proceed to
step 7.
Step 3. Connect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (d) (to connector J2 of cable 1W2). Lamp 15 should
come on and then go off when palm switches are depressed.
o. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (e) notify support maintenance
the magnetic brake in the traverse gearbox assembly is defective.
b. If no, proceed to step 4.
Step 4. Connect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (d) (to connector J4 on networks box). Lamp 26
should come on and then go off when palm switches are depressed.

3-60 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - POWER MODE - Continued

10. GUNNER'S CONTROL HANDLES OPERATE WITHOUT CLOSING GUNNER'S PALM
SWITCHES - Continued.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and notify support mainten
ance that cable 1W2 is defective.
b. If not, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and replace networks box
f Dara 5-53).
Step 5. Connect TESTS per par 3-lc (4) (d) (to connector J2 of cable 1W2). Lamp 35 should
come on and then go off when palm switches are depressed.
a. If yes, disonnect TESTS per para 3-lc (4) (e) and proceed to step 5.1.
b. If no, proceed to step 6.
Step 5.1 Click should be heard from elevation shut off solenoid behind main accumulator when
palm switch is depressed.
a If yes, replace elevation shut-off valve (para 10-64).
b. If no, replace elevation shut-off solenoid (para 10-64).
Step 6. Connect TESTS per para 3-lc (4) (d) (to connector J4 on networks box). Lamp 25
should come on and then go off when palm switches are depressed.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc (4) (e) and notify support mainten
ance that cable 1W2 is defective.
b. If no, disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (e) and replace networks box (para
5-53).
Step 7. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OF? position. Connect TESTS to
connector J2 of cable 1W2. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position.
Lamp 8 should come on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 8.
b. If no, proceed to step 9.
Step 8. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc (4) (e) and place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF
position. Disconnect connector P22 of cable 1W2 from networks box. Disconnect con
nector P21 of cable 1W2 from commander's control assembly. Check continuity between
socket R of P22 and socket F of P21.
a. If continuity exists, replace networks box (para 5-53).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W2 is defective.
Step 9. Lamp 6 should be on.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc (4) (e) and replace commander's
control assembly (para 10-35).
b. If no, proceed to step 10.
Step 10. Lamp 16 should be on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 11.
b. If no, proceed to step 15.
Step 11. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc (4) (e) and place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF
position. Disconnect connector P7 of cable 1W3 from gunner's control assembly. Check
continuity between pins D and E of Jl.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 13.
b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 12.
Step 12. Check palm switch adjustments (para 10-41c).
a. If palm switches are properly adjusted, replace defective palm
switch (para 10-41).
b. If palm switches are not properly adjusted, adjust in accord with
para 10-41c.

Change 4 3-61
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - POWER MODE - Continued
10. GUNNER'S CONTROL HANDLES OPERATE WITHOUT CLOSING GUNNER'S PAL
SWITCHES - Continued.
Step 13. Disconnect connector of P21 of cable 1W2 from commander's com-
assembly. Check continuity between socket E of P7 and socket D of P21.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 16.
b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 14.
Step 14. Disconnect connector P4 of cable 1W3 from stabilization control selector (f
FO-1). Check continuity between socket N of P4 and socket E of P7.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 17.
6. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cat*
1W3 is defective.
| Step 15. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OF
position. Disconnect connector P23 of cable 1W2 from networks box. Disconnect ca
nector Pll of cable 1W2 from EMI filter assembly. Check continuity between pinG
P23 and socket D of Pll.
a. If continuity exists, replace networks box (para 5-53).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cat:
1W2 is defective.
Step 16. Disconnect connector Pll of cable 1W2 and connector J2 of cable 1W3 fro-
EMI filter assembly. Check continuity between pin D of Jl on filter assemi
and socket D of PI.
a. If continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 i
defective.
b. If continuity does not exist, replace the EMI filter assembly (par
5-81).
Step 17. Check continuity between socket P of 1W3 P4 and socket D of 1W2 P21.
a. If continuity exists, replace stabilization control selector (para i
44).
b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 18.
Step 18. Disconnect connector Pll of cable 1W2 and connector J2 of cable 1W3 fro-
EMI filter assembly. Check continuity between pin E of Jl on filter assembly
and socket E of PI.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 19.
b. If continuity does not exist, replace EMI filter assembly (para 5-
81).
Step 19. Check continuity between pin P of 1W3 P4 and pin E of 1W3 J2.
a. If continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1 W2 is defective
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cabk
1 W3 is defective.
11. ERRATIC OR SLUGGISH TRAVERSING.
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER
switch in ON position. Attempt to traverse the turret manually.
a. If tracking is erratic, and excessive effort is required, proceed to
step 2.
b. If tracking is normal and no excessive effort is required, proceed to
step 7.

3-62 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - POWER MODE - Continued

11. ERRATIC OR SLUGGISH TRAVERSING - Continued.
Step 2. Observe hull-turret seal pressure gage.
a. If reading is zero, proceed to step 3.
b. If reading is not zero, reduce seal pressure to zero, recheck
traverse, and proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Inspect turret ring and drive pinions for possible obstructions.
a. If obstructions exist, remove obstructions.
b. If obstructions do not exist, proceed to step 4.
Step 4. Inspect turret ring gear and drive pinions.
a. If gear or pinions are excessively dirty, clean as necessary.
b. If gear or pinions are galled or pitted, notify support maintenance.
c. If gear or pinions are not dirty, galled, or pitted, proceed to step 5.
Step 5. Inspect traverse gearbox assembly mounting bolts for tightness.
a. If bolts are tight, proceed to step 6.
b. If bolts are loose, tighten as necessary.
Step 6. Perform traverse gearbox backlash adjustment.
a. If erratic tracking or low traversing speeds still exist, notify
support maintenance that traverse gearbox assembly is defective.
b. If tracking and traversing speeds are normal again, the abnormal
condition was caused by excessive backlash.
Step 7. Observe hydraulic pressure gage.
a. If reading is 925 psi or more, proceed to step 8.
b. If reading is below 925 psi, refer to malfunction 4.
Step 8. Perform zero pressure check (para 2-1 0a). Check oil level of hydraulic power
suPPly» a_ ^ 0ji ievei iS correct, proceed to step 9.
b. If the oil level is incorrect, add oil (LO 9-2350-253-12).
Step 9. Check hydraulic lines between accumulator and traverse gearbox for restric
tions (dents, etc.).
a. If restrictions exist, replace hydraulic line(s) (para 2-9).
b. If restrictions do not exist, proceed to step 10.
Step 10. Slowly elevate the main gun, using gunner's handles, while observing a distant
target through gunner's telescope. Elevation tracking should be smooth.
a. If yes, notify support maintenance of defective traverse gearbox.
b. If no, notify support maintenance to replace pressure regulator
assembly. If malfunction is not corrected, have regulator assembly
reinstalled and replace gunner's control assembly (para 10-38).
12. ERRATIC OR SLUGGISH ELEVATION.
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER
switch in ON position. Attempt to elevate and depress main gun manually.
a. If elevation and/or depression is erratic or excessive effort is
required, proceed to step 2.
b. If elevation and depression are normal, proceed to step 4.
Step 2. Inspect the elevating mechanism and area around the main gun for possible
obstructions.
a. If obstructions exist, remove obstructions.
b. If obstructions do not exist, proceed to step 3.

Change 2 3-63
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - POWER MODE - Continued

12. ERRATIC OR SUGGISH ELEVATION - Continued.

Step 3. Bleed the hydraulic system (para 2-10) and then elevate and depress main gun.
a. If erratic tracking or low speed still exists, notify support
maintenance that elevating mechanism is defective.
b. If operation is normal, the malfunction was caused by air in the
system.
Step 4. Observe hydraulic pressure gage.
a- If reading is 925 psi or more, proceed to step 5.
b. If reading is below 925 psi, refer to malfunction 4.
Step 5. Perform zero pressure check (para 2-10a). Check oil leveL
a. If level is correct, proceed to step 6.
b. If level is incorrect, add oil (LO 9-2350-253-12).
Step 6. Check hydraulic lines between accumulator and elevating mechanism for
restrictions (dents, etc.).
a. If restrictions exist, replace defective hydraulic line(s) (para 2-9).
b. If restrictions do not exist, proceed to step 7.
Step 7. Slowly traverse the turret, using gunner's handles, while observing distant
target through gunner's telescope. Azimuth tracking should be smooth.
a> If no, replace pressure regulator assembly. If malfunction is not
corrected, reinstall regulator assembly and replace gunner's control
assembly (para 10-38).
b. If yes, notify support maintenance that elevating mechanism is
defective.
13. 105-MM GUN DRIFTS UP OR DOWN.
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Place ELEV/TRAV
POWER switch in ON position.
a. Gun slowly elevates (or depresses) and electric motor continues to
cycle, stabilization valve deenergized but remains open replace
valve (par. 10-70).
b. If drift occurs with and without palm switch actuation, proceed to
step 2.
c- If drift occurs only with palm switch actuation, notify support
maintenance.
Step 2. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF position.
a- If drift still exists, replace the elevating mechanism (para 10-59).
b. If drift stops, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Perform zero pressure check (para 2-10 a). Disconnect one of the hydraulic
tube assemblies that runs between deck clearance valve and the elevating
mechanism at elevating mechanism port PI. Cap tube assembly and plug
port PI (use plug MS 21913-4 NSN 4730-00-595-2612 and cap MS 21914-4
NSN 4730-00-640-0632). Cap and plug are capable of withstanding pressure
of at least 1300 psi. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in ON position.
a. If drift still exists, replace superelevation actuator (para 10-43).
°« If drift does not occur, replace deck clearance valve (para 10-11).

3-64 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - POWER MODE - Continued

4. TURRET DRIFTS WHEN GUNNER'S PALM SWITCHES ARE DEPRESSED.

Replace gunner's control assembly (para 10-38).
5. MAIN GUN STUCK IN ELEVATION.
Step 1. Determine if main gun is stuck in elevation at all turret positions or only in the
rear deck sector.
a. If stuck in rear deck sector only, adjust elevation interference
switch (para 5-20).
b. If stuck in other turret positions, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Perform zero pressure check (para 2-1 0a). Attempt to depress gun using
manual elevating pump.

Change 2 3-64.1/3-64.2 blank)

 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

IALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - POWER MODE - Continued

». MAIN GUN STUCK IN ELEVATION - Continued.

a. If gun depresses, proceed to step 3.
b. If gun does not depress, replace elevating mechanism (para 10-59).
Step 3. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF position. Disconnect harness
connector at elevation shutoff valve. Place ELEV/TRAV switch in ON
position. Attempt to depress gun.
a. If gun depresses, proceed to step 4.
b. If gun will not depress, replace elevating mechanism (para 10-59).

Step 4.Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF position. Reconnect harness at

elevation shutoff valve. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER in ON position. Depress
gunner's palm switch. Click should be heard from elevation shutoff valve
solenoid.
a. If present, replace elevation shutoff valve (para 10-62).
b. If not present, replace elevation shutoff valve solenoid (para 10-64).
L6. COMMANDER'S OVERRIDE INOPERATIVE. (See figures 3-19, 3-21, 3-22, 3-25, 3-26 and FO-1]
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Place ELEV/TRAV
POWER switch is in OFF position. Actuate commander's override switch
and listen for click from override solenoid.
a. If click is heard, replace gunner's control assembly (para 10-38).
b. If click is not heard, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Connect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (d) (to connector J4 on networks box). Lamp 9
should come on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 3.
b. If no, proceed to step 8.
Step 3. Actuate the commander's override switch. Lamp 23 should come on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 4.
b. If no, proceed to step 7.
Step 4. Actuate the commander's override switch. Lamp 21 should come on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 5.
b. If no, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and replace networks box
(para 5-53).
Step 5. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) . Disconnect connector P23 of cable 1W2 from
networks box. Disconnect connector P7 of cable 1W3 from connector Jl on gunner's
control assembly. Check continuity between pin J of P23 and socket C of P7.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 6.
6. If continuity does not exist, reconnect cable 1 W3 and proceed to step 15.
Step 6. Remove socket connector from override solenoid. Connect connector P7 of cable 1 W3
to connector Jl on gunner's control assembly. Check continuity from pin J of P23
(on networks box assembly) to the socket connector removed from the override
solenoid.
a. If continuity exists, replace override solenoid (para 10-69).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that
| gunner's control assembly harness is defective.
Step 7. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) . Disconnect connector P23 of cable 1W2 from
networks box. Disconnect connector P21 of cable 1W2 from commander's control

Change 2 3-65
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - POWER MODE - Continued

16. COMMANDER'S OVERRIDE INOPERATIVE - Continued.
assembly. Check continuity between socket G of P21 and pin M of P23.
a. If continuity exists, replace commander's control assembly (para 10-35).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W2 is defective.
Step 8. Lamp 19 should be on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 9.
b. If no, proceed to step 10.
Step 9. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) . Disconnect connector P21 of cable 1W2 fras
commander's control assembly. Check continuity between pin A and pin B of Jl (ot
commander's control assembly).
a. If continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is
defective.
b. If continuity does not exist, replace commander's control assembly
(para 10-35).
Step 10. Place MAIN GUN switch on gunner's control box in ON position. MAIN GUN
indicator light should come on.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and replace networks box
(para 5-53).
b. If no, proceed to step 11.
Step 11. Connect TESTS oer Dara 3-lc (4) (d) (to connector J2 of cable 1W2). Lamp 29 should
come on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 12.
b. If no, proceed to step 13.
Step 12. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc (4) (e) . Disconnect connector P22 of cable 1W2 from
networks box. Disconnect connector PI from power relay box (fig FO-1). Check con
tinuity between pin C of PI and socket A of P22.
a. If continuity exists, replace networks box (para 5-53).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W2 is defective.
Step 13. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector
P22 of cable 1W2 from networks box. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in
ON position. Lamp 29 should come on.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc (4) (e) and disconnect connector
P22 of cable 1W2 to networks box and proceed to malfunction 74.
b. If no, proceed to step 14.
Step 14. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc (4) (e) . Disconnect connector PI of cable
1W2 from J3 of turret power relay box (fig FO-1). Check for short to
ground from pin C of PI.
a. If short exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1 W2 is
defective.
b. If short does not exist, replace turret power relay box (para 5-38).
Step 15. Disconnect connector Pll of cable 1W2 and connector J2 of cable 1W3 from
EMI filter assembly. Check continuity between pin C of Jl on filter assembly
and socket C of PI.
a. If continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 or
1W3 is defective.

3-66 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

iLFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - POWER MODE - Continued

COMMANDER'S OVERRIDE INOPERATIVE - Continued.

b. If continuity does not exist, replace EMI filter assembly (para 5-
81).
SUPERELEVATION ACTUATOR INOPERATIVE.
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER
switch in ON position. Attempt to elevate main gun using the gunner's control
handles.
a. If gun elevates, proceed to step 4.
b. If gun does not elevate, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Attempt to elevate main gun using manual elevation system.
a. If gun elevates, proceed to step 3.
b. If gun does not elevate, notify support maintenance that elevating
mechanism is defective.
Step 3. Observe turret power valve solenoid plunger.
a. If plunger is depressed, replace gunner's control assembly (para
10-38 or para 10-38.1).
b. If plunger is not depressed, proceed to malfunction 9, step 12.
Step 4. Inspect hydraulic lines and linkages between superelevation actuator and
elevating mechanism and the hydraulic power pack for damage.
a. If damage exists, replace defective hydraulic line(s) (para 2-9).
b. If damage does not exist, proceed to step 5.
Step 5. Disconnect flexible shaft from superelevation actuator (para 10-47). Select
different type of ammo on ammo select box. End of shaft should rotate.
a. If yes, replace superelevation actuator (para 10-43). . Retest for
proper superelevation. If defect still exists, replace elevating
mechanism (para 10-59).
b. If no, proceed to step 6.
Step 6. Disconnect flexible shaft at output unit. Watch output unitdrive gear and MIL
counter as different ammo is selected. Output gear should turn, MIL counter
reading should change, and sound of output unit drive motor should cease when
MIL counter stops.
a. If all above conditions occur, replace flexible shaft (para 10-47).
b. If all above conditions do not occur, replace output unit (para 15-93).
FAULTY DECK CLEARANCE OPERATION. (See figures 3-19, 3-23, 3-27, and FO-1.)
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER
switch in ON position. Position 105-mm gun slightly below zero. Slowly
traverse turret, in power mode. Listen for click from deck clearance solenoid
when gun is in rear deck sector (approximately 1650 mils from center line of
vehicle).
a- If click is heard, replace deck clearance valve (para 10-11).
b. rf click is not heard, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Connect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (d) (to connector J2 of cable 1W2). Position main
gun over center of rear deck above zero. Lamp 11 should come on and lamp 10 should
go off.
a. If yes, proceed to step 3.
b. If lamp 11 is off, proceed to step 9.
c. If lamps 11 and 10 are on disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and re
place elevation interference switch (para 5-18).

Change 2 3-67
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - POWER MODE - Continued

18. FAULTY DECK CLEARANCE OPERATION - Continued.

Step 3. Depress main gun slightly below zero. Lamp 10 should come on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 4.
b. If no, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and proceed to step 8.
I Step 4. Lamp 9 should be on.
a. If yes, replace the deck clearance valve solenoid (para 10-12).
b. If no, proceed to step 5.
Step 5. Lamp 14 should be on.
I a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (e) and proceed to
step 7.
b. If no, proceed to step 6.
Step 6. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (e) and reconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (d) it
connector J4 on networks box). Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON positioa
Depress main gun slightly below zero. Lamp 17 should come on.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and replace networks bci
(para 5-53).
b. If no, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and notify support mainter
ance that cable 1W2 is defective.
Step 7. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P22
of cable 1W2 from networks box. Disconnect connector P12 of cable 1W2 fror
deck clearance solenoid. Check continuity from socket connector PI 2 to pin E
of P23.
a. If continuity exists, replace networks box (para 5-53).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W2 is defective.
Step 8. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF position. Disconnect connectors P2"
and P28 of cable 1W2 from elevation interference switch. Check continuity
between pin connector Jl and pin connector J2.
a. If continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is
defective.
b. If continuity does not exist, adjust/replace elevation interference
switch (paras 5-20 and 5-18).
Step 9. Lamp 12 should be on.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and adjust or replace the
slipring traverse safety limit (interference) switch (paras. 5-16 and 5-14).
b. If not on or not adjustable, proceed to step 10.
Step 10. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect TESTS from
connector 32 of cable 1W2. Connect TESTS to connector J4 on the networks
box. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Lamp 20 should come
on.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and notify support mainten
ance that cable 1W2 is defective.
b. If no, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and replace networks box
(para 5-53).

3-68 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

ALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - POWER MODE - Continued

I. ELEV/TRAV POWER NOT AVAILABLE. (See figures 3-19, 3-20, 3-21, 3-22, FO-1)
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Turn main gun domelight
on, and check its operation.
a. If domelight comes on, proceed to step 2.
b. If domelight does not come on, refer to prime power malfunction in
TM 9-2350-253-20-1 malfunction 60 - MASTER BATTERY
indicator inoperative.
Step 2. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Connect TESTS per para
3-lc(4) (d) (to connector J2 of cable 1W2). Lamp 26 should come on. I
a. If yes, proceed to step 3.
b. If no, proceed to step 4.
Step 3. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in ON position. Lamp 26 should remain
on. _
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (e) and test ELEV/TRAV I
POWER circuit in gunner's control box (para 5-31).
b. If no, proceed to malfunction 79.
Step 4. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector
P10 of cable 1W2 from gunner's control box (fig FO-1). Place MASTER
BATTERY switch in ON position. Lamp 26 should come on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 6.
b. If no, proceed to step 5.
Step 5. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (e) . Disconnect connector PI of cable |
1W2 from turret power relay box (fig FO-1). Check continuity between pin
B of Pi and socket F of P10 then reconnect P10. Check for short to ground
at pin B of PI.
a. If continuity exists, and short does not exist, replace turret power
relay and circuit breaker box (para 5-38).
b. If continuity does not exist, or short exists, notify support
maintenance that cable 1W2 is defective.
Step 6. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF position. Reconnect connector P10 of
cable 1W2 to gunner's control box (fig FO-1). Place MASTER BATTERY switch
in ON position. Lamp 26 should come on.

a.
If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and proceed to
malfunction 79.
b. If no, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and repair short in
ELEV/TRAV POWER circuit in gunner's control box (para 5-34).
!0. TURRET AND/OR MAIN GUN MOVES BY DISPLACING CONTROL HANDLES WITH
rURRET POWER OFF.
Verify that ELEV/TRAV POWER switch and indicator lamp on gunner's control box
were OFF when malfunction occurred.
a. If switch was off and turret drifts in azimuth at same rate until
hydraulic pressure bleeds off, pinlock engages, turret stops
(stabilization shut off valve struck open para. 10-70).
6. If turret continues to drift and pressure does not bleed off (turret
power valve is defective) notify support maintenance.

Change 2 3-69
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE

TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET

21. GUN ELEVATING AND TURRET TRAVERSING SYSTEM NOT OPERATING PROPERLY IN
STABILIZED MODE. (See figures 3-19 and FO-1.)
Step 1. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch on gunner's control box in OFF position. Place
stabilization POWER and STAB switches on control selector in OFF positions. Place
STAB ELECTRONICS and POWER PACK BLOWER circuit breakers on the networks
box in OFF positions. Place MASTER BATTERY switch (located on driver's control
panel) in OFF position. Engage turret lock and gun travel lock. Prior to performing
troubleshooting procedure, check for tight connections at all stabilization harness
connectors.
Step 2. Remove stabilization test set (STS) cable assembly from cover and connect as
follows:
a. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W3 from controller unit.
b. Connect connector PI of cable 1W3 to STS connector marked
CABLE.
c. Connect STS cable connector marked CONTROLLER UNIT to
controller unit.
d. Connect the connector marked TEST SET to STS. Place STS test
selector switch to OFF and MODE selector switch to N (normal)
positions.
WARNING
Unless otherwise specified herein, turret lock and gun travel lock should be engaged to
restrict gun/turret motion. The turret and main gun will move during checkout of
several of the stabilization components. All personnel and equipment should be clear of
gun and turret while the stabilization system test and troubleshooting procedures are
performed. If any emergency should develop during troubleshooting, the stabilization
system can be turned off by pushing the STS POWER switch. When the SOLENOID
indicator lamp is illuminated, the stabilization solenoid valve is energized and
undesirable turret or gun movement may occur. The solenoid valve is energized only
when the STS test selector switch is in positions 14 and 15.
CAUTION
Do not place the STS under the weapon breech when performing troubleshooting
procedures. The gun will elevate during some procedural steps and could hit the test set
and damage it.
NOTE
Testing out of sequence or proceeding to test other components after a defective
component has been identified will produce false indications and lead to incorrect
results in troubleshooting.
e. Two persons are required to perform these troubleshooting proce
dures using the STS, one at the gunner's position to operate the
turret controls and the other to operate the STS. Test procedures
should be performed in sequence. The test set is designed to check
certain components and then use these components to test other
components.
Step 3. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER
switch in ON position. Place stabilization POWER switch and POWER PACK

3-70 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE - Continued

TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET - Continued

II. GUN ELEVATING AND TURRET TRAVERSING SYSTEM NOT OPERATING PROPERLY IN
STABILIZED MODE - Continued.
BLOWER circuit breaker in ON positions. POWER indicator lamp on control
selector and POWER PACK BLOWER lamp on networks box should illuminate
and power pack blower should run.
a. If yes, proceed to step 4.
b. If stabilization POWER indicator lamp illuminates, POWER PACK
BLOWER indicator lamp does not illuminate, and blower runs,
replace BLOWER indicator lamp. If lamp still does not illuminate,
replace networks box (para 5-53).
c. If POWER and POWER PACK BLOWER indicators illuminate, but
blower assembly does not run, check connector P5 of cable 1W2 for
good electrical contact. If electrical contact is good, disconnect
test set and proceed to malfunction 22, step 1.
d. If stabilization POWER indicator lamp illuminates, POWER PACK
BLOWER indicator lamp does not illuminate, and blower assembly
does not run, check connector P22 of cable 1W2 for good electrical
contact. If electrical contact is good, disconnect STS and proceed
to malfunction 22.
e. If POWER indicator lamp does not illuminate, and blower assembly
runs, replace POWER indicator lamp. If lamp still does not
illuminate, check electrical contact at connector PI of cable 1W3.
If electrical contact is good, disconnect STS and proceed to
malfunction 23, step 1.
f. If POWER indicator lamp does not illuminate and blower assembly
does not run, check connectors P4 and J2 of cable 1W3 for good
electrical contact. If connectors have good contact, proceed to
step 4.
Step 4. Place STAB ELECTRONICS circuit breaker in ON position and verify if
lamp illuminates. Verify that STS POWER switch is not illuminated. If
illuminated, depress and release STS pushbutton. Place STS MODE
selector switch in position L (lamp test) and ensure that the STS POWER
and SOLENOID lamps illuminate. Place the STS MODE selector switch in
position N (normal) and STS test selector switch in position 1 (vehicle
voltage). The STS needle should indicate between (+)5 and (+)10.
a. If yes, proceed to step 5.
b. If STAB ELECTRONICS lamp does not illuminate and needle
indicates between (+)5 and (+)10, replace lamp. If lamp still does
not illuminate, replace networks box (para 5-53).
c. If STAB ELECTRONICS lamp does not illuminate or illuminates
and needle does not move, or needle is not indicating properly,
check connector P3 of cable 1W3 for good contact. If there is good
contact, disconnect STS and proceed to malfunction 24, step 1.
Step 5. Place STS test selector switch in position 2 (time delay), and place STAB

Change 2 3-71
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE - Continued

TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET - Continued

21. GUN ELEVATING AND TURRET TRAVERSING SYSTEM NOT OPERATING PROPERLY IN
STABILIZED MODE - Continued.
switch on control selector in ON position. STAB switch should remain in ON
position and the STAB indicator will not be illuminated.
o. If yes, proceed to step 6.
b. If no, disconnect STS and proceed to malfunction 25, step 1.
Step 6. Push STS POWER switch on as indicated by illuminated button. After 10- to
20-second delay, needle should indicate between (+)5 and (+)10 and STAB
indicator light on control selector will illuminate.
a. If yes, proceed to step 7.
b. If time delay is less than 10 seconds, or more than 20 seconds,
replace stabilization controller unit (para 5-57).
c. If needle does not move, proceed to malfunction 26.
d. If STAB indicator light fails to come on, and lamp is not defective,
proceed to malfunction 27.
Step 7. Place STS test selector switch in position 3 (rate sensor power). Needle should
indicate between (+)6 and (+)10.
a. If yes, proceed to step 8.
b. If needle is not indicating properly, replace ECU (para 5-57).
c. If needle does not move, proceed to malfunction 28, step 1.
Step 8. Place STS test selector switch in position 4 (positive power supply). Needle
should indicate between (+)6 and (+)10.
a. If yes, proceed to step 9.
b. If no, proceed to malfunction 29, step 1.
Step 9. Place STS test selector switch in position 5 (negative power supply). Needle
should indicate between (-)6 and (-)10.
o. If yes, proceed to step 10.
b. If no, proceed to malfunction 30, step 1.
Step 10. Place STS test selector switch in position 6 (traverse handle). With gunner's
handles in center position, needle should indicate between (-)0.5 and (+)0.5.
a- If yes, proceed to step 11.
b- If no, adjust traverse adjustable resistor (para 10-40c) and then
proceed to step 11.
Step 11. Place STS MODE selector switch in position S (special test). Needle should indicate
between (-)0.5 and (+)0.5.
o. If yes, proceed to step 12.
b. If no, adjust traverse adjustable resistor (para 1040c), and then
proceed to step 12.
Step 12. Place STS MODE selector switch in position N. Rotate gunner's handles fully
to right, then left, and return to center. Needle should move to between (+)6
and (+)10 when handles are moved right, then to between (-)6 and (-)10 when
handles are moved left, and return slowly to center when handles are in center
position.
a. If yes, proceed to step 13.

3-72 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

ALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE - Continued

TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET - Continued

GUN ELEVATING AND TURRET TRAVERSING SYSTEM NOT OPERATING PROPERLY IN

STABILIZED MODE - Continued.
b. If needle does not indicate properly, check connector P6 of cable
1W3 for good electrical contact. If connector has good electrical
contact, proceed to malfunction 32.
c. If needle does not return to center after gunner's handles are
returned to center, adjust traverse adjustable resistor (para 10-
40c), and then proceed to step 13.
Step 13. Rotate handles to right until needle indicates (+)4 and then to left until needle
indicates (-)4. Handles should rotate approximately equal amounts in both
directions and return to center when released.
a. If yes, proceed to step 14.
b. If no, replace adjustable resistor assembly (para 10-40).
Step 14. Place STS TEST selector switch in position 7 (elevation handle). With gunner's
handles in center position, need should indicate between (-)0.5 and ( + )0.5.
a. If yes, proceed to step 15.
b. If no, adjust elevation adjustable resistor (para 10-40c) and then
proceed to step 15.
Step 15. Place STS MODE selector switch in position S (special test). Needle should
indicate between (-)0.5 and (+)0.5.
a. If yes, proceed to step 16.
b. If no, adjust elevation adjustable resistor (para 10-40c) and then
proceed to step 16.
Step 16. Place STS MODE selector switch in position N. Rotate gunner's handles to full elevation
then to full depression and return slowly to center. Needle should move to between
(+)6 and (+)10 for full elevation, (—)6 and (— )10 for full depression and return to center
when handles are in center position.
a. If yes, proceed to step 17.
b. If needle does not indicate properly, proceed to malfunction 34,
step 1.
c. If needle does not return to center after gunner's handles have
been displaced and returned slowly to center, adjust elevation
adjustable resistor (para 10-40c) and proceed to step 17.
Step 17. Rotate handles in elevation until needle indicates (+)4 and then in depression
until needle indicates (— )4. Return gunner's handle to center position. Handles should
rotate approximately equal amounts in both directions.
a. If yes, proceed to step 18.
b. If no, replace adjustable resistor assembly (para 10-40).
Step 18. Place STS TEST selector switch in position 8 (traverse balance). Rotate
TRAV BALANCE knob fully right, then left. Needle should move to
between (+)6 and (+)10 as knob is rotated fully right, then pass through
zero and move to between (-)6 and (-)10 as knob is rotated fully left.
Needle should move smoothly throughout the range.
a. If yes, rotate TRAV BALANCE knob to recenter needle, proceed to
step 19. If needle cannot be centered, proceed to malfunction 35.
b. If no, proceed to malfunction 36, step 1.
Change 2 3-73
 Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE - Continued

TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET - Continued

21. GUN ELEVATING AND TURRET TRAVERSING SYSTEM NOT OPERATING PROPERLY D
STABILIZED MODE - Continued.

Step 19. Place STS TEST selector switch in position 9 (elevation balance). Rotate ELEV
BALANCE knob fully right, then left. Needle should move to between ( +)6 and
(+)10 as knob is rotated fully right, then to between (-)6 and (-)IO as knob is rotated
fully left. Needle should move smoothly throughout the range.
a. If yes, rotate ELEV BALANCE knob to recenter needle and proceed
to step 20. If needle cannot be centered, proceed to malfunction
37, step 1.
b. If no, proceed to malfunction 38, step 1.
Step 20. Refer to para 5-60 for access to gain potentiometers and adjust TRAV and ELEV GAIN
potentiometers fully counterclockwise (minimum gain) in ECU. At conclusion of
troubleshooting procedure, again refer to para 5-60 and complete adjustment of gain
potentiometers. Proceed to step 21.
Step 21. Place STS TEST selector switch in position 10 (traverse amplifier output). Nee
dle should indicate between (-)l and (+)1.
a. If yes, proceed to step 22.
b. If no, adjust for proper traverse amplifier output (para 5-60).
c. If adjustment fails, replace ECU (para 5-57).
Step 22. Move RIGHT/UP - LEFT/DOWN switch to RIGHT/UP the LEFT/DOWN
positions. Needle should move beyond (-)4 for RIGHT/UP, and beyond (+)4 for
LEFT/DOWN. Release switch. Switch should return to center position.
a. If yes, proceed to step 23.
b. If no, replace ECU (para 5-57).
Step 23. Rotate gunner's handles fully right then left. Needle should move to left of
(-)6 when handles are fully right and to right of (+)6 when handles are fully
left* a. If yes, proceed to step 24.
b. If no, replace ECU (para 5-57).
Step 24. Return gunner's handles to center position. Rotate TRAV BALANCE knob
right and then left. Indicator needle should move to left (-) when knob is
rotated to the right and move to the right (+) when knob is rotated to the left.
a. If yes, center the STS indicator needle with the TRAV
BALANCE knob, proceed to step 25.
b. If no, replace ECU (para 5-57).
Step 25. Place STS MODE selector switch in position S (traverse dither voltage).
Needle should indicate +1 or more.
a. If yes, proceed to step 26.
6. If no, replace ECU (para 5-57).
Step 26. Place STS MODE selector switch in position N. Place test set selector switch
in position 11 (elevation amplifier output). Indicator needle should indicate
between (-)l and (+)1.
a. If yes, proceed to step 27.
b. If no, replace ECU (para 5-57).
Step 27. Place RIGHT/UP - LEFT/DOWN switch in RIGHT/UP then LEFT/DOWN

3-74 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

ALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE - Continued

TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET - Continued

GUN ELEVATING AND TURRET TRAVERSING SYSTEM NOT OPERATING PROPERLY

IN STABILIZED MODE - Continued
positions. Needle should move rapidly beyond (-)5 for RIGHT/UP, then beyond
(+)5 for LEFT/DOWN. Release switch. Switch should return to center position.
a. If yes, proceed to step 28.
b. If no, replace ECU (para 5-57). |
Step 28. Rotate gunner's control handles to full elevation then full depression. Needle
should move beyond (+)6 for full elevation, then beyond (-)6 for full depression.
a. If yes, proceed to step 29.
6. If no, replace ECU (para 5-57). |
Step 29. Return gunner's handles to center position. Rotate ELEV BALANCE knob right
and then left. Needle should move to right (+) when the knob is rotated to the
right and move to the left (-) when the knob is rotated to the left.
If yes, center the STS indicator needle with the ELEV I
BALANCE knob, proceed to step 30. '
b. If no, replace ECU (para 5-57); |
Step 30. Place STS MODE selector switch in position S (elevation dither voltage)
Needle should indicate (+)2.5 to (+) off scale.
a. If yes, proceed to step 31.
b. If no, replace ECU (para 5-57). ■
Step 31. Place STS MODE selector switch in position N. Place STS selector switch in
position 12 (rate sensor traverse output).
WARNING
Turret will traverse and main gun will elevate when gunner's handles are displaced after
disengaging turret lock and gun travel lock.
Disengage turret lock and gun travel lock. Needle should be between (-)l and
(+)1 when gunner's handles are in center position.
a. If yes, proceed to step 32.
b. If no, replace stabilization rate sensor assembly (para 5-62).
Step 32. Place STS MODE selector switch in position S (rate sensor null offset). Needle
should indicate between (-)6 and (+)6.
a. If yes, proceed to step 33.
b. If no, replace stabilization rate sensor assembly (para 5-62).
Step 33. Place STS MODE selector switch in position N. Move gunner's handles fully
right and then left. Needle should move to between (+)6 and (+)10 when
handles are moved right, then between (-)6 and (-)10 when handles are moved
left.
a. If yes, proceed to step 34.
b. If no, proceed to malfunction 39, step 1.
Step 34. Place STS selector switch in position 13 (rate sensor elevation output). Position
turret so that gun is over front of tank. With gunner's handles in center position,
needle should indicate between (— ) 1.5 and (+)1.5.
a. If yes, proceed to step 35.
b. If no, replace stabilization rate sensor assembly (para 5-62).
Change 4 3-75
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE - Continued

TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET - Continued
21. GUN ELEVATING AND TURRET TRAVERSING SYSTEM NOT OPERATING PROPERLY IN
STABILIZED MODE - Continued
Step 35. Place STS MODE selector switch in position S (rate sensor null offset). Needle
should indicate between (-)6 and (+)6.
a. If yes, proceed to step 36.
b. If no, replace stabilization rate sensor assembly (para 5-62).
Step 36. Place STS MODE selector switch in position N. Place gun in full depression.
Move gunner's handles to full elevation. Needle should indicate between (+)2
and (+)10 while gun is moving. Place gun in full elevation. Move gunner's
handles to full depression. Needle should indicate between (-)2 and (-)10 while
gun is moving. If handles are held in full elevation or depression until gun
reaches stops, needle will return to between (-)1.5 and (+)1.5.
a. If yes, move main gun to maximum elevation and proceed to step
37.
b. If no, proceed to malfunction 40, step 1.

WARNING
If undesirable gun turret movement occurs in steps 37 or 38, place the STS
Test Selector Switch to any position other than position 14 and 15. Turret
will traverse right when right/up - left/down switch is in right/up position;
turret will traverse left when switch is in left/down position.

Step 37. Place STS Test Selector Switch in position 14 (traverse servovalve).
Rotate Null Knob on STS to Null Turret Drift. Turret Drift stops.
a. If yes, proceed to step 39.
b. If no, check connection P5 and P8 of cable 1W3 for good
electrical contact. If connectors have good contacts,
notify support maintenance that traverse servovalve is
defective.

WARNING
If undesirable gun movement occurs in steps 39 or 40, place STS Test Selector
Switch in any position other than position 14 or 15. Gun will elevate when
switch is in right/up position and depress when switch is in left/down
position.

Step 39. ENSURE gun is over front of tank and turret lock is engaged. Place
STS Test Selector Switch in position 15 (elevation servovalve).
I Rotate Null Knob on STS to Null Gun Drift. Gun Drift stops.
a. If yes, proceed to step 40.
b. If no, replace elevation servovalve (para 10-65).

3-76 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

LFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE - Continued
TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET - Continued
GUN ELEVATING AND TURRET TRAVERSING SYSTEM NOT OPERATING PROPERLY IN
STABILIZED MODE - Continued
Step 40. Place gun in full depression using right/up - left/down switch.
Place switch in right/up position and meter needle should swing
between 0 and 6 in the (+) scale, and then read (+) off scale after
gun reaches full elevation mechanical stops. Ensure gun is in full
elevation. Place switch in left/down position and meter needle should
swing between 0 and 6 in the (-) scale, and then read (-) off scale
after gun reaches full depression mechanical stops,
a. If yes, proceed to step 41.
6. If no, check connectors to P5 and P8 of cable 1W3 for good electrical contact.
If connectors have good contact, proceed to malfunction 42, step 1.
c. Deleted.
Step 41. Upon completion of troubleshooting, perform the following procedures:
a. Rotate STS selector switch to OFF position.
b. Push test set POWER switch off.
c. Turn OFF stabilization POWER and STAB switches and
ELEV/TRAV power switch.
d. Disconnect STS cable from connector Jl on controller. Disconnect
connector PI of cable 1W3 from STS harness.
e. Connect connector PI of cable 1W3 to connector Jl of controller
unit.
f. Refer to paragraph 5-60 and complete the adjustment of the gain potentio
meters as required in step 20.
BLOWER ASSEMBLY INOPERATIVE (STABILIZATION POWER INDICATOR LIGHT ON
CONTROL SELECTOR COMES ON). (See figures 3-19, 3-21 and FO-1.)
NOTE
Before performing the steps in this procedures, refer to malfunction 21.
Step 1. Observe POWER PACK BLOWER indicator light on networks box.
a. If light is on, proceed to step 2.
b. If light is not on, proceed to step 4.
Step 2. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Connect TESTS to con
nector J2 of cable 1W2. Place MASTER BATTERY switch, ELEV/TRAV
power switch, STAB power switch, and power pack blower circuit breaker
switch in ON position. Lamp 28 should come on.
a. If yes, replace power pack blower motor (para 5-25).
b. If no, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect TESTS from
cable 1W2 and connect it to connector J4 on networks box. Place MASTER
BATTERY switch in ON position. Lamp 6 should come on.
a. If yes, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is defective.
b. If no, replace networks box (para 5-53).
Step 4. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Connect TESTS to
connector J4 on networks box. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON
position. Lamp 16 should come on.
a. If yes, replace networks box (para 5-53).
b. If no, proceed to step 5.

Change 4 3-77
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE - Continued
TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET - Continued
22. BLOWER ASSEMBLY INOPERATIVE (STABILIZATION POWER INDICATOR LIGHT ON
CONTROL SELECTOR COMES ON) - Continued.
Step 5. Place stabilization POWER switch on control selector in OFF position.
Disconnect connector P22 of cable 1W2 from networks box. Disconnect
connector P4 of cable 1W3 from control selector (para 544). Check for
continuity between socket N of P22 and socket S of P4.
a. If continuity exists, replace stabilization control selector (para 5-45).
b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 6.
Step 6. Disconnect connector Pll of cable 1W2 and connector J2 of cable 1W3 from
EMI filter assembly. Check continuity between pin F of Jl on filter assembly
and socket F of PI.
a. If continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 or
1W3 is defectvie.
b. If continuity does not exist, replace EMI filter assembly (para 5-
81).
23. POWER INDICATOR LIGHT CONTROL SELECTOR INOPERATIVE (BLOWER RUNS). (See
figures 3-19 and FO-1.)
Before performing the steps of this procedure, refer to malfunction 21.
Step 1. Place stabilization POWER switch in OFF Position. Disconnect connector P4
of cable 1W3 from control selector (fig FO-1). Check continuity between
socket B of P4 and ground.
a. If continuity exists, replace stabilization control selector (para 5-
45).
b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Check continuity between socket W of PI and socket B of P4.
a. If continuity exists, replace ECU (para 5-57).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W3 is defective.
24. STABILIZATION SYSTEM VOLTAGE NOT AVAILABLE. (See figures 3-19, 3-20, 3-21 and
FO-1.)
Before performing the steps of this procedure, refer to malfunction 21.
Step 1. POWER indicator light on control selector should be ON.
a. If yes, proceed to step 2.
b. If no, proceed to step 10.
Step 2. STAB ELECTRONICS indicator light on networks box should be ON.
a. If yes, proceed to step 6.
b. If no, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Connect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (d) (to connector J4 on networks box). Lamp 15
should come on.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and replace networks box
(para 5-53).
b. If no, proceed to step 4.
Step 4. Place stabilization POWER switch to OFF position. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-lfl
(4) (e). Disconnect connector P22 of cable 1W2 from networks box. Disconnect con
nector P4 of cable 1W3 from the stabilization control selector (fig FO-1). Check con
tinuity between socket M of P22 and socket K of P4.
a. If continuity exists, replace stabilization control selector (para 5-45).

3-78 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

ALFUNCTION
"Co% TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE - Continued

TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET - Continued

STABILIZATION SYSTEM VOLTAGE NOT AVAILABLE - Continued.

b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 5.
Step 5. Disconnect connector Pll of cable 1W2 and connector J2 of cable 1W3 from
EMI filter assembly. Check continuity between pin K of Jl on filter assembly
and socket K of PI.
a. If continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 or
1W3 is defective.
b. If continuity does not exist, replace EMI filter assembly (para 5-
81).
Step 6. Connect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (d) (to connector J4 on networks box). Lamp 5
should come on.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and proceed to'step 7.
b. If no, disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (e) and replace networks box
(para 5-53).
Step 7. Place stabilization POWER switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P24
of cable 1W2 from networks box. Disconnect connector P3 of cable 1W3 from
rate sensor. Check for continuity between pin W of P24 and sockets J or F of
P3.
n. If continuity exists, proceed to step 9.
b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 8.
Step 8. Disconnect connector Pll of cable 1W2 and connector J2 of cable 1W3 from
EMI filter assembly. Check continuity between pin L of Jl on filter assembly
and socket L of PI.
a. If continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 or
1W3 is defective.
b. If continuity does not exist, replace EMI filter assembly (para 5-
81).
Step 9. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W3 from ECU. Check continuity between socket S of
PI and socket H of P3.
a. If continuity exists, replace stabilization rate sensor assembly (para 5-62).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W3 is defective.
Step 10. The ELEV/TRAV POWER indicator light on gunner's box should be on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 11.
b. If no, refer to malfunction 19.
Step 11. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF position. Place POWER switch on con
trol selector in OFF position. Disconnect connector P10 of cable 1 W2 from gunner's
box. Disconnect connector P4 of cable 1W3 from stabilization control selector (fig
FO-1). Check continuity between socket J of P4 and socket E of P10.
a. If continuity exists, replace stabilization control selector (para 5-
44).
b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 12.
Step 12. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P23
of cable 1W2 from networks box. Check continuity between pin H of P23 and
socket J of P4.
Change 4 3-79
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE - Continued

TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET - Continued

24. STABILIZATION SYSTEM VOLTAGE NOT AVAILABLE - Continued.

a. If continuity exists, replace networks box (para 5-53).

b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 13.
Step 13. Disconnect connector Pll of cable 1W2 and connector J2 of cable 1W3 from
EMI filter assembly. Check continuity between pin P of Jl on filter assembly
and socket P of PI.
a. If continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 or
1W3 is defective.
b. If continuity does not exist, replace EMI filter assembly (para 5-
81).

25. STAB SWITCH FAILS TO REMAIN "ON." (see figure 3-21 and FO-1.)
Before performing the steps in this procedure, refer to malfunction 21.
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch to OFF position and disconnect connector P4
of 1W3 from Jl on control selector. Set control selector POWER switch to ON posi
tion. Check continuity between pins B and M of connector Jl on control selector,
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 2.
6. If continuity does not exist, replace control selector (para 5-45).
Step 2. Measure resistance between pins J and '1' of connector Jl on control selector. Resistance
I should be between 200 and 1000 ohms .
a. If yes, proceed to step 3.
b. If no, replace control selector (para 5-45).
Step 3. Hold control selector STAB switch in ON position and cjieck for continuity between
pins L and J of controls Jl on control selector. Release STAB switch after continuity
check.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 4.
b. If continuity does not exist, replace control selector (para 5-45).
Step 4. Disconnect connectors 1W3P9 from commander's stab shut-off, 1W3P10 from loader's
stab shut-off, and 1W3P1 from controller unit. Check continuity between pins A and B
of connectors Jl on commander's and loader's stab shut-off boxes.
a. If continuity exists for both stab shut-off boxes, proceed to step 5.
b. If continuity exists for only one (or neither) stab shut-off box, replace stab
box without continuity.
Step 5. Check continuity between the following sockets in connectors of 1W3 harness:
T of P4 and A of P10
B of P10 and A of P9
B of P9 and M of P4
B of P4 and W of PI
a. If continuity exists at all locations, replace controller unit (para 5-57).
b. If continuity does not exist at all locations, notify support maintenance
that 1W3 is defective.

3-80 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

ALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION,
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE - Continued

TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET - Continued

. TIME DELAY INOPERATIVE.

NOTE
Before performing the steps of this procedure, refer to malfunction 21.
Step 1. Place STAB switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W3 from
STS harness. Hold STAB switch in ON position. Check for 24 vdc between socket
U of PI and ground.
a. If 24 vdc is present, replace ECU (para 5-57).
b. If 24 vdc is not present, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Place STAB and stabilization POWER switches in OFF positions. Discon
nect connector P4 of cable 1W3 from stabilization control selector
(fig FO-1). Check continuity between socket L of P4 and socket U of PI.
a. If continuity exists, replace stabilization control selector (para 5-45).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W3 is defective.

. STAB INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON.

NOTE
Before performing the steps of this procedure, refer to malfunction 21.
Step 1. Place STAB switches in OFF position and then back to ON position.
Stabilization shutoff lamp should come on in 12 to 18 seconds.
a. If yes, replace stabilization control selector (para 545).
5. If no, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Place STAB switch and stabilization POWER switch in OFF positions.
Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W3 from stabilization test set harness.
Disconnect connector P9 of cable 1W3 from stabilization shutoff switch.
Check continuity between socket V of PI and socket C of P9.
a. If continuity exists, replace ECU (para 5-57).
b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Disconnect connector P4 of cable 1W3 from stabilization control selector (fig
FO-1). Check continuity between socket A of P4 and socket V of PI.
a. If continuity exists, replace stabilization control selector (para 5-
45).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W3 is defective.

8. RATE SENSOR POWER NOT AVAILABLE.

NOTE
Before performing the steps of this procedure, refer to malfunction 21.
Step 1. Place STAB and stabilization POWER switches in OFF positions. Disconnect
connector PI of cable 1W3 from stabilization test set harness. Check for 32 to
42 ohms between sockets N and P of PI.
a. If 32 to 42 ohms exists, proceed to step 3.
b. If 32 to 42 ohms does not exist, proceed to step 2.

Change 4 3-81
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE - Continued

TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET - Continued
28. RATE SENSOR POWER NOT AVAILABLE - Continued.
Step 2. Disconnect connector P3 of cable 1W3 from rate sensor. Check continuity
between socket N of PI and socket A of P3, and also between socket P of PI
and socket B of P3.
a. If continuity exists, replace stabilization rate sensor assembly (para 5-62).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W3 is defective.
Step 3. Disconnect connector P3 of cable 1W3 from rate sensor. Check sockets N and
P of PI for short to ground.
a. If short exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is
defective.
6. If short does not exist, replace ECU (para 5-57).

29. POSITIVE POWER SUPPLY INOPERATIVE.

NOTE
Before performing the steps of this procedure, refer to malfunction 21.
Step 1. Place STAB and stabilization POWER switches in OFF positions. Disconnect
connector PI of cable 1W3 from STS harness. Check socket C of PI for short
to ground.
a. If short exists, proceed to step 3.
b. If short does not exist, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Check socket a of Pi for short to ground.
a. If short exists. Droceed to steD 4.
b. If short does not exist, replace ECU (para 5-57).
Step 3. Disconnect connector P6 of cable 1W3 from adjustable resistor assembly.
Check socket c of Pi for short to ground.
a. If short exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is
defective.
b. If short does not exist, replace adjustable resistor assembly (para
10-40).
Step 4. Disconnect connector P4 of cable 1W3 from control selector (fig FO-1).
Check socket a of PI for short to ground.
a. If short exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is
defective.
b. If short does not exist, replace stabilization control selector (para
5-45).

30. NEGATIVE POWER SUPPLY INOPERATIVE.

NOTE
Before performing the steps of this procedure, refer to malfunction 21.
Step 1. Place STAB and stabilization POWER switches in OFF positions. Disconnect
connector PI of cable 1W3 from STS harness. Check socket E of PI for short
to ground.
a. If short exists, proceed to step 3.
b. If short does not exist, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Check socket c of PI for short to ground.
a. If short exists, proceed to step 4.
6. If short does not exist, replace ECU (para 5-57).

3-82 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE - Continued

TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET - Continued

JO. NEGATIVE POWER SUPPLY INOPERATIVE - Continued.

Step 3. Disconnect connector P6 of cable 1W3 from adjustable resistor assembly.
Check socket e of PI for short to ground.
a. If short exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is
defective.
b. If short does not exist, replace adjustable resistor assembly (para
10-40).
Step 4. Disconnect connector P4 of cable 1 W3 from control selector (fig FO-1). Check socket
c of PI for short to ground.
a. If short exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is
defective.
b. If short does not exist, replace stabilization control selector (para 545).
31. UNCONTROLLED DRIFT IN AZIMUTH.
NOTE
Before performing the steps of this procedure, refer to malfunction 21.
Step 1. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER and MASTER BATTERY switches in OFF positions.
If vehicle is TTS equipped, remove TTS ballistic shield handle assembly from gunner's
control assembly (para 15-115). Remove six screws and washers securing adjustable
resistor access plate and gasket and remove the plate and gasket. Using two 1/4-inch
open end wrenches, loosen the traverse adjustment jamnut while holding the adjusting
nut.
Step 2. Engage turret lock and gun travel lock. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in
ON position. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in ON position. Place STS
MODE switch in position N. Place STS test selector switch in position 6
(traverse handle). Place stabilization POWER and STAB switches in ON
positions. Push STS POWER switch on if button is not illuminated. Check for
an STS meter indication between (-)0.5 and (+)0.5.
a. If meter indicates more than -.5 to +.5, adjust traverse adjustable
resistor (para 10-40c).
b. If meter indicates within -.5 to +.5, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Place STS MODE selector switch in position S. Check for a meter indication
between (-)0.5 and (+)0.5.
a. If meter indicates -.5 to +.5, proceed to step 4.
b. If meter indicates more than -.5 to +.5, replace adjustable resistor
assembly (para 10-40).
Step 4. Install the access plate, gasket, screws, and washers.
32. TRAVERSE HANDLE INDICATION NOT ACCEPTABLE AS HANDLES ARE ROTATED.
NOTE
Before performing the steps of this procedure, refer to malfunction 21.
Step 1. Slowly rotate gunner's handles fully to the right and hold. Observe STS needle.
a. If needle deflects, proceed to step 2.
b. If needle does not deflect, proceed to step 10.
Step 2. Observe STS needle.
a. If needle deflects to between (+)6 and (+)10, proceed to step 3.
b. If needle does not deflect to between (+)6 and (+)10, replace
adjustable resistor assembly (para 10-40).

Change 2 3-83
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE - Continued

TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET - Continued

32. TRAVERSE HANDLE INDICATION NOT ACCEPTABLE AS HANDLES ARE ROTATED -

Continued.
Step 3. Observe STS needle for smooth deflection without jumps or oscillations.
a. If smooth, proceed to step 4.
b. If not smooth, replace adjustable resistor assembly (para 10-40).
Step 4. Return gunner's handles to "center" position. Observe STS needle.
o. If needle does not return to center, refer to malfunction 31.
b. If needle returns to center, proceed to step 5.
Step 5. Slowly rotate gunner's handles fully to the left. Observe STS needle.
o. If needle deflects, proceed to step 6.
b. If needle does not deflect, proceed to step 9.
Step 6. Observe STS needle.
a. If needle deflects to between (-)6 and (-)IO, proceed to step 7.
b. If needle does not deflect to between (-)6 and (-)10, replace
adjustable resistor assembly (para 10-40).
Step 7. Observe STS needle for smooth deflection without jumps or oscillations.
a. If smooth, proceed to step 8.
b. If not smooth, replace adjustable resistor assembly (para 10-40).
Step 8. Return gunner's handles to "center" position.
a. If STS needle does not return to center, refer to malfunction 31.
b. If needle returns to center, refer to malfunction 21, step 14.
Step 9. Place STAB and POWER switches on control selector and ELEV/TRAV
POWER switch on gunner's switch box in OFF positions. Disconnect
■ connector P6 of cable 1W3 from adjustable resistor assembly. Place
switches back to ON positions. Check for 13 vdc between sockets A
(ground) and D of P6.
a. If 13 vdc is present, replace adjustable resistor assembly (para 10-
40).
b. If 13 vdc is not present, notify support maintenance that cable 1WJ
is defective.
Step 10. Place STAB and POWER switches on control selector, and ELEV/TRAV
POWER switch in OFF positions. Disconnect connector P6 of cable 1W3 from
adjustable resistor assembly. Place STAB, POWER, and ELEV/TRAV POWER
switches in ON positions. Check for 13 vdc between sockets C and D (ground)
of P6.
a. If 13 vdc is present, proceed to step 11.
b. If 13 vdc is not present, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3
is defective.
Step 11. Check socket E of P6 for short to ground. (Ensure that multimeter test leads
do not contact sockets A or C of P6 during test.)
a. If short exists, proceed to step 12.
b. If short does not exist, proceed to step 13.
Step 12. Place POWER and STAB switches and ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF
positions. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W3 from the STS harness. Check
socket E of P6 for short to ground. (Ensure that multimeter test leads do not
contact sockets A or C of P6 during test.)

3-84 Change 2
 7M 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE - Continued

TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET - Continued

32. TRAVERSE HANDLE INDICATION NOT ACCEPTABLE AS HANDLES ARE ROTATED -
Continued.
o. If* short exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is
defective.
6. If short does not exist, replace ECU (para 5-57).
Step 13. Place STAB and POWER switches and ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF
positions. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W3 from STS harness. Check
continuity between socket K of PI and socket E of P6.
a. If continuity exists, replace adjustable resistor assembly (para 10-
40).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W3 is defective.
33. UNCONTROLLED DRIFT IN ELEVATION.
NOTE
Before performing the steps of this procedure, refer to malfunction 21.
Step 1. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER and MASTER BATTERY switches in OFF positions.
If vehicle is TTS equipped, remove TTS ballistics shield handle assembly from gunner's
control assembly (para 15-115). Remove six screws and washers securing adjustable
resistor access plate and gasket and remove the plate and gasket. Using two 1/4-inch
open end wrenches, turn the traverse adjustment jamnut while holding the adjusting nut.
Step 2. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Engage turret lock and gun
travel lock. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in ON position. Place STS
MODE switch in position N. Place stabilization POWER and STAB switches in
ON positions. Place STS test selector switch in position 7 (elevation
adjustment). Push POWER switch on if button is not illuminated. Check for
an STS meter indication between (-)0.5 and (+)0.5.
o. If meter indicates more than -.5 to +.5, adjust elevation adjustable
resistor (para 10-40c).
b. If meter indicates -.5 to +.5, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Place STS MODE selector switch in position S. Check for a meter indication
of -.5 to +.5.
a. If meter indicates -.5 to +.5, proceed to step 4.
b. If meter indicates more than -.5 to +.5, replace adjustable resistor
assembly (para 10-40).
Step 4. Install the access plate, gasket, screws, and washers.
34. ELEVATION HANDLE INDICATION NOT ACCEPTABLE AS HANDLES ARE ROTATED.
NOTE
Before performing the steps of this procedure, refer to malfunction 21.
Step 1. Observe STS needle as gunner's handles are slowly rotated and held to full
elevation position.
a. If needle deflects, proceed to step 2.
b. If needle does not deflect, proceed to step 9.
Step 2. Observe STS needle again.
a. If needle is in between (+)6 and (+)10, proceed to step 3.
b. If needle is not between (+)6 and (+)10, replace adjustable resistor
assembly (para 10-40).

Change 4 3-85
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE - Continued

TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET - Continued

34. ELEVATION HANDLE INDICATION NOT ACCEPTABLE AS HANDLES ARE ROTATED -

Continued.
Step 3. Observe STS needle for smooth deflection, without jumping or oscillations.
a. If smooth, proceed to step 4.
b. If not smooth, replace adjustable resistor assembly (para 10-40).
Step 4. Return handles to center position, and observe STS needle.
n. If needle returns to center, proceed to step 5.
b. If needle does not return to center, refer to malfunction 33.
Step 5. Rotate gunner's handles slowly to the full depression mode. Observe STS
needle.
a. If needle deflects, proceed to step 6.
b. If needle does not deflect, replace adjustable resistor assembly
(para 10-40).
Step 6. Observe STS needle again.
a. If needle deflects to between (-)6 and (-)IO, proceed to step 7.
b. If needle does not deflect between (-)6 and (-)10, replace adjustable
resistor assembly (para 10-40).
Step 7. Observe STS needle for smooth deflection without jumps or oscillations.
a. If smooth, proceed to step 8.
b. If not smooth, replace adjustable resistor assembly (para 10-40).
Step 8. Return gunner's handles to center position and observe STS needle.
a. If needle returns to center, refer to malfunction 21, step 18.
b. If needle does not return to center, refer to malfunction 33.
Step 9. Place STAB and POWER switches, and turret ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in
OFF positions. Disconnect connector P6 of cable 1W3 from adjustable resistor
assembly. Place STAB and POWER switches, and ELEV/TRAV POWER switch
in ON positions. Check for ground at socket B of P6. (Ensure that test leads
do not contact sockets A or C of P6 during test.)
a. If yes, proceed to step 10.
b. If no, proceed to step 11.
Step 10. Place STAB and POWER switches and ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF
positions. Check for ground at socket B of P6.
a. If yes, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is defective.
b. If no, replace ECU (para 5-57).
Step 11. Place STAB and POWER switches, and ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF
positions. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W3 from test set harness. Check
continuity between socket D of PI and socket B of P6.
a. If continuity exists, replace adjustable resistor assembly (para 10-
40).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W3 is defective.
35. TRAV BALANCE POTENTIOMETER CANNOT BE NULLED.
NOTE
Before performing the steps of this procedure, refer to malfunction 21.
Step 1. Rotate traverse balance knob fully right and left and observe STS needle.

3-86 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE - Continued

TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET - Continued

5. TRAV BALANCE POTENTIOMETER CANNOT BE NULLED - Continued.

a. If needle deflects only to between (+)6 and (+)10, proceed to step 2.
b. If needle does not deflect to between (+)6 and (+)10, proceed to
step 4.
Step 2. Place STAB and POWER switches, and ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF
positions. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W3 from STS harness. Check for
continuity between pins E and c of Jl on STS harness.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 3.
b. If continuity does not exist, replace stabilization controller unit (para 5-57).
Step 3. Disconnect connector P4 of cable 1W3 from stabilization control selector (fig FO-1).
Check continuity between socket c of PI and socket H of P4.
a. If continuity exists, replace stabilization control selector (para 5-45).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W3 is defective.
Step 4. Observe STS needle for deflection between (-)6 and (-)10 as knob is rotated
fully left.
a. If needle deflects to between (-)6 and (-)10, proceed to step 5.
b. If needles does not deflect to between (—)6 and j(—)10, replace stabilization
control selector (para 5-45).
Step 5. Place STAB and POWER switches and ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF
positions. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W3 from STS harness. Check for
continuity between pins C and a at Jl on test set.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 6.
b. If continuity does not exist, replace stabilization controller unit (para 5-57).
Step 6. Disconnect connector P4 of cable 1W3 from stabilization control selector (fig FO-1).
Check continuity between socket a of PI and socket F of P4.
a. If continuity exists, replace stabilization control selector (para 545).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W3 is defective.
36. TRAV BALANCE POTENTIOMETER FUNCTIONS IMPROPERLY.
NOTE
Before performing the steps of this procedure, refer to malfunction 21.
Step 1. Place TRAV/BALANCE knob on control selector fully right and observe STS
needle.
a. If needle deflects, proceed to step 2.
b. If needle does not deflect, proceed to step 4.
Step 2. Observe if needle deflects to between (+)6 and (+)10.
a. If yes, proceed to step 3.
b. If no, replace stabilization control selector (para 5-45).
Step 3. Place TRAV/BALANCE knob fully left and observe STS needle.
a. If needle deflects to between (-)6 and (-)10, refer to malfunction
21, step 19.
b. If needle does not deflect to between (—)6 and (—)10, replace stabilization
control selector (para 5-45).
Step 4. Place STAB and POWER switches, and ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF

3-87
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE - Continued

TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET - Continued

36. TRAV BALANCE POTENTIOMETER FUNCTIONS IMPROPERLY - Continued.

positions. Disconnect connector P4 of cable 1W3 from stabilization control selector (fig
FO-1). Check socket G of P4 for short to ground.
a. If short to ground exists, proceed to step 5.
b. If short does not exist, proceed to step 6.
Step 5. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W3 from STS harness. Check pin G of P4
for short to ground.
a. If yes, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is defective.
b. If no, replace stabilization controller unit (para 5-57).
Step 6. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W3 from STS harness. Check continuity
between socket b of PI and socket G of P4.
a. If continuity exists, replace stabilization control selector (para 5-45).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W3 is defective.
37. ELEV BALANCE POTENTIOMETER CANNOT BE NULLED.
NOTE
Before performing the steps of this procedure, refer to malfunction 21.
Step 1. Rotate ELEV/BALANCE knob fully right and left, and observe STS needle.
a. If needle deflects only to (+) or only to (-), proceed to step 2.
b. If needle indicates approximately equal amounts in both directions,
replace stabilization control selector (para 5-45).
Step 2. Place STAB and POWER switches and ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF
positions. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W3 from STS harness. Check
sockets X and Z of PI for continuity to ground.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 3.
b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 4.
Step 3. Disconnect connector P4 of cable 1W3 from stabilization control selector (fig FO-1).
Again check sockets X and Z of PI for continuity to ground.
a. If continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is
defective.
b. If continuity does not exist, replace stabilization control selector (pan
545).
Step 4. Disconnect connector P4 of cable 1W3 from stabilization control selector. Check con
tinuity between: sockets Z of PI and E of P4; X of PI and C of P4, Y of PI and D of P4.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 5.
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W3 is defective.
Step 5. Reconnect connector P4 of cable 1W3 to stabilization control selector (fig FO-1). Check
continuity between sockets Y and Z of PI as ELEV/BALANCE knob is rotate fully left
and between sockets X and Y of PI as the knob is rotate right.
a. If continuity exists, replace stabilization controller unit (para 5-57).
b. If continuity does not exist, replace stabilization control selector (para 545).
38. ELEV BALANCE KNOB FUNCTIONS IMPROPERLY.
NOTE
Before performing the steps of this procedure, refer to malfunction 21.

3-88
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE - Continued

TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET - Continued

38. ELEV BALANCE KNOB FUNCTIONS IMPROPERLY - Continued.

Step 1. Rotate ELEV/BALANCE knob fully to the right, and observe STS needle.
a. If needle deflects, proceed to step 2.
b. If needle does not deflect, proceed to step 4.
Step 2. Observe if STS needle deflects to between (+)6 and (+)10.
a. If yes, proceed to step 3.
b. If no, replace stabilization control selector (para 5-45).
Step 3. Rotate ELEV/BALANCE knob fully to the left.
a. If STS needle deflects to between (-)6 and (-)10, refer to
malfunction 21, step 20.
b. If needle does not deflect to between (—)6 and (—)10, replace stabilization
control selector (para 5-45).
Step 4. Place STAB and POWER switches and ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF
positions. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect
connector P4 of cable 1W3 from stabilization control selector (fig FO-1). Check socket D
of P4 for short of ground.
a. If short exists, proceed to step 5.
b. If short does not exist, proceed to step 6.
Step 5. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W3 from STS harness. Recheck socket D of
P4 for short to ground.
a. If short exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is
defective.
b. If short does not exist, replace ECU (para 5-57).
Step 6. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W3 from STS harness. Check continuity
between socket Y of PI and socket D of P4.
a. If continuity exists, replace stabilization control selector (para 545).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W3 is defective.

39. RATE SENSOR TRAVERSE OUTPUT FUNCTIONS IMPROPERLY.

NOTE
Before performing the steps of this procedure, refer to malfunction 21.
Step 1. Place STAB and POWER switches and ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF
positions. Disconnect connector P3 of cable 1W3 from stabilization rate sensor assem
bly. Check continuity between socket G of P3 and ground.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 2.
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W3 is defective.
Step 2. Check sockets D and K of P3 for continuity to ground.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 3.
b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 7.
Step 3. Reconnect connector P3 of cable 1W3 to stabilization rate sensor assembly. Place TUR
RET POWER and STAB and POWER switches in ON positions. When STAB indicator
light comes on, rotate gunner's handles fully right and observe STS needle.
a. If needle deflects, replace stabilization rate sensor assembly (para 5-62).

Change 4 3-89
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE - Continued

TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET - Continued

39. RATE SENSOR TRAVERSE OUTPUT FUNCTIONS IMPROPERLY - Continued.

b. If needle does not deflect, proceed to step 4.
Step 4. Place STAB and POWER switches, and ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF
positions. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W3 from STS harness. Check
socket L of PI for short to ground.
a. If socket L of PI is grounded, proceed to step 5.
b. If socket L of PI is not grounded, proceed to step 6.
Step 5. Disconnect connector P3 of 1W3 from stabilization rate sensor assembly. Recheck
socket L of PI for short to ground.
a. If short exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is
defective.
b. If short does not exist, replace stabilization rate sensor assembly (para 5-62).
Step 6. Disconnect connector P3 of cable 1W3 from rate sensor assembly. Check
continuity between socket L of PI and socket E of P3.
a. If continuity exists, replace stabilization rate sensor assembly.
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W3 is defective.
Step 7. Reconnect connector P3 of cable 1 W3 to stabilization rate sensor assembly. Discon
nect connector PI of cable 1W3 from STS harness. Check continuity between pinsd
and R of J 1 on STS cable.
a. If continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is
defective.
b. If continuity does not exist, replace ECU (para 5-57).
40. RATE SENSOR ELEVATION OUTPUT FUNCTIONS IMPROPERLY.
NOTE
Before performing the steps of this procedure, refer to malfunction 21.
Step 1. Rotate the gunner's handles to full elevation. Observe STS needle.
a. If needle deflects, proceed to step 2.
b. If needle does not deflect, proceed to step 3.
Step 2. Place STAB and POWER switches, and ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF
positions. Disconnect connector P3 of cable 1W3 from stabilization rate sensor assembly.
Check socket G of P3 for continuity to ground.
a. If socket G of P3 is grounded, replace rate sensor assembly (para 5-
62).
b. If socket G of P3 is not grounded, notify support maintenance that
cable 1W3 is defective.
Step 3. Place STAB and POWER switches, and ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF
positions. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W3 from STS harness. Check
socket F of PI for ground.
a. If yes, proceed to step 4.
b. If no, proceed to step 5.
Step 4. Disconnect connector P3 of cable 1W3 from stabilization rate sensor assembly. Check
socket F of PI to determine if ground is still present.
a. If yes, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is defective.
b. If no, replace rate sensor assembly (para 5-62).

3-90 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE - Continued

TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET - Continued

40. RATE SENSOR ELEVATION OUTPUT FUNCTIONS IMPROPERLY - Continued.

Step 5. Disconnect
connector P3 of cable 1W3 from stabilization rate sensor assembly. Check
continuity
between socket C of P3 and socket F of PI.
a.
If continuity exists, replace stabilization rate sensor assembly (para 5-62).
b.
If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W3 is defective.
41. TRAVERSE SERVOVALVE INOPERATIVE.
NOTE
Before performing the steps of this procedure, refer to malfunction 21.
Step 1. Place RIGHT/UP - LEFT DOWN switch m RIGHT/UP position.
a. If turret traverses, proceed to step 11.
b. If turret does not traverse, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Observe STS POWER and SOLENOID lamps.
a. If they are illuminated, proceed to step 3.
b. If they are not illuminated, proceed to step 10.
Step 3. Place STS test selector switch in position 15. Place RIGHT/UP - LEFT/DOWN
switch in RIGHT/UP position.
a. If main gun elevates, proceed to step 4.
b. If main gun does not elevate, proceed to step 8.
Step 4. Place STAB and POWER switches on stabilization control selector and ELEV/TRAV
POWER switch in OFF positions. Disconnect connector P8 of cable 1W3 from traverse
servovalve. Check for ground at pin A of Jl on servovalve.
n. If yes, notify support maintenance that traverse servovalve is defective,
b. If no, proceed to step 5.
Step 5. Check for resistance of 900 to 1100 ohms between pins A and B of Jl on
traverse servovalve.
a. If resistance exists, proceed to step 6.
b. If resistance does not exist, notify support maintenance that traverse servo
valve is defective.
Step 6. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W3 from STS harness. Check sockets A and
B of P8 for short to ground.
a. If short exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is
defective.
b. If short does not exist, proceed to step 7.
Step 7. Check continuity between socket B of P8 and socket J of PI and between
socket A of P8 and socket H of PI.
a. If continuity exists, notify support maintenance that pilot check valve is
defective.
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W3 is defective.
Step 8. Place STAB and POWER switches on control selector and ELEV/TRAV POWER
switch in OFF positions. Disconnect connector P5 of cable 1W3 from
stabilization solenoid valve. Check for continuity to ground at socket A of P5.
a. If yes, proceed to step 9.
b. If no, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is defective.

3-91
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

IALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE - Continued

TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET - Continued

41. TRAVERSE SERVOVALVE INOPERATIVE - Continued.

Step 9. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W3 from STS harness. Check continuity
between socket B of P5 and socket e of PI.
a. If continuity exists, replace stabilization power solenoid valve (para 10-
70).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W3 is defective.
Step 10. Place STAB and POWER switches on stabilization control selector and ELEV7TRAV
POWER switch in OFF positions. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W3 from STS
harness. Disconnect connector P5 of cable 1W3 from stabilization power solenoid valve.
Check for ground at socket e of PI.
a. If yes, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is defective.
b. If no, replace stabilization power solenoid valve (para 10-70).
Step 11. Check if needle moves to beyond +4.5.
a. If yes, proceed to step 12.
b. If no, notify support maintenance that traverse servovalve is defective.
Step 12. Place RIGHT/UP - LEFT/DOWN switch in LEFT/DOWN position.
a. If turret traverses, notify support maintenance that traverse servovalve is
defective.
b. If turret does not traverse, notify support maintenance that pilot check
valve is defective.
42. ELEVATION SERVOVALVE INOPERATIVE.
NOTE
Before performing the steps of this procedure, refer to malfunction 21.
Step 1. Place RIGHT/UP - LEFT/DOWN switch in RIGHT/UP position.
a. If main gun elevates, proceed to step 2.
b. If main gun does not elevate, proceed to step 3.
Step 2. Place RIGHT/UP - LEFT/DOWN switch in LEFT/DOWN position.
a. If main gun depresses, replace elevation servovalve (para 10-65).
b. If main gun does not depress, notify support maintenance that pilot check
valve is defective.
Step 3. Place STAB and POWER switches on stabilization control selector and ELEV/TRAV
POWER switch in OFF positions. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W3 from STS
harness. Check sockets A and B of PI for short to ground.
a. If short exists, proceed to step 4.
b. If short does not exist, proceed to step 5.
Step 4. Disconnect connector P2 of cable 1W3 from elevation servovalve. Recheck
sockets A and B of PI for short to ground.
a. If short exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is
defective.
b. If short does not exist, replace elevation servovalve (para 10-65).
Step 5. Check for resistance of 450 to 550 ohms between sockets A and B of PI.
a. If resistance is within range specified, notify support maintenance that
pilot check valve is defective.
b. If resistance is not within range specified, proceed to step 6.
Step 6. Disconnect connector P2 of cable 1W3 from elevation servovalve. Check
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE - Continued

TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET - Continued

42. ELEVATION SERVOVALVE INOPERATIVE - Continued.

continuity between socket A of PI and socket B of P2, and between socket B

of PI and socket A of P2.
n. If continuity exists, replace elevation servovalve (para 10-65).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W2 is defective.

43. DECK CLEARANCE INOPERATIVE.

Step 1. Connect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (d) (to connector J2 of cable 1W2).
Place ELEV/TRAV POWER, and STAB switches to ON and place main gun
over center of rear deck and slightly below zero. Lamp 14 should come
on.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc (4) (e) and proceed to
step 2.
b. If no, disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc (4) (e) and proceed to step 3.
Step 2. Place POWER and STAB switches on stabilization control selector and
ELEV/TRAV POWER switch to OFF positions. Disconnect connector PI 1 of cable
1W2 from EMI filter assembly. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W3 from con
troller unit. Check continuity between pin R of Jl and socket T of PI.
a. If continuity exists, replace ECU (para 5-57).
b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 4.
Step 3. Place STAB and POWER switches on stabilization control selector and ELEV/TRAV
POWER switch in OFF positions. Disconnect connector P23 of cable 1W2 from net
works box. Disconnect connector Pll of cable 1W2 from EMI filter assembly. Check
continuity between pin P of P23 and socket R of Pll.
a. If continuity exists, replace networks box (para 5-53).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W2 is defective.
Step 4. Disconnect connector J2 of cable 1W3 from EMI filter assembly. Check
continuity between pin R of Jl on filter assembly and socket R of PI.
a. If continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is
defective.
b. If continuity does not exist, replace EMI filter assembly (para 5-
81).
44. TURRET OSCILLATES IN TRAVERSE.
Adjust traverse GAIN POT in ECU (para 5-60). If turret still oscillates, refer to malfunction
21.
45. MAIN GUN OSCILLATES IN ELEVATION.
Adjust elevation GAIN POT in ECU (para 5-60). If gun still oscillates, refer to malfunction
21.
46. STAB INDICATOR LIGHT ON STABILIZATION SHUTOFF BOX DOES NOT COME ON.
Step lr. Replace stabilization shutoff lamp (TM 9-2350-253-10). Place MASTER
BATTERY, STAB, and POWER switches and ELEV/TRAV POWER switch to ON
positions. After a 12- to 18-second delay, stabilization indicator light should
come on.

Change 4 3-93
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM - STABILIZED MODE - Continued

TROUBLESHOOTING WITH STABILIZATION TEST SET - Continued

46. STAB INDICATOR LIGHT ON STABILIZATION SHUTOFF BOX DOES NOT COME .
Continued.
a. If yes, discard defective lamp.
b. If no, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. STAB indicator light on stabilization control selector should be on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 3.
b. If no, proceed to malfunction 27, step 2.
Step 3. Place STAB and POWER switches in OFF positions. Disconnect connectc-
of cable 1W3 from controller unit. Disconnect connector P9 of cable:
from stabilization shutof f box. Check continuity between socket V of PI i
socket C of P9.
a. If continuity exists, replace stabilization shutoff box (para 5-84 •.
b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 4.
Step 4. Disconnect connector P4 of cable 1W3 from stabilization control selector (fig Ffr,
Check continuity between socket R of P4 and socket C of P9.
a. If continuity exists, replace stabilization control selector (para 5-44).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that as
1W3 is defective.

ARMAMENT SYSTEM

47. MAIN GUN OR 7.62-MM GUN WILL NOT FIRE FROM GUNNER'S TRIGGER SWITCHES
BUT WILL FIRE FROM COMMANDER'S TRIGGER. (See figures 3-19, 3-20, 3-21, 3-22,
3-25, 3-26 and FO-1).
WARNING
ENSURE ALL WEAPONS ARE CLEAR OF AMMUNITION BEFORE STARTING TESTS.
■ Step 1. Connect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (d) (to connector J4 on networks box). Lamp 2
* should come on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 2.
b. If no, proceed to step 7.
Step 2. Lamp 14 should be on while depressing gunner's trigger.
I a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and replace the nemos
box (para 5-53).
b. If no, proceed to step 3.
| Step 3. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) . Disconnect connector Pll of cable lW2fes
EMI filter assembly (fig FO-1). Check for continuity between pins A and Bof Jlwia
depressing gunner's trigger.
a. If continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable lWJi
defective.
b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 4.
Step 4. Disconnect connector P7 of cable 1 W3 from connector J 1 on gunner's control assec:
I Check for continuity between pin A of Jl of EMI filter and socket A of P7 anc >
tween pin B of Jl of EMI filter and socket B of P7.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 5.
b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 6.

3-94 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

[ALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ARMAMENT SYSTEM - Continued

. MAIN GUN OR 7.62 MACHINE GUN WILL NOT FIRE FROM GUNNER'S TRIGGER
SWITCHES BUT WILL FIRE FROM COMMANDER'S TRIGGER - Continued.

Step 5.Check trigger adjustment (para 10-41c).

a. If trigger is properly adjusted, replace defective trigger switch (para 10-
41).
b. If trigger is not properly adjusted, adjust trigger (para 1041c).
Step 6. Disconnect connector J2 of cable 1W3 from EMI filter assembly. Check
continuity between pin A of Jl and socket A of PI on filter assembly. Check
continuity between pin B of Jl and socket B of PI on filter assembly.
a. If continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is
defective.
b. If continuity does not exist, replace EMI filter assembly (para 5-
81).
Step 7. Lamp 9 should be on.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and replace networks box g
(para 5-53).
b. If no, proceed to step 8.
Step 8. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) . Disconnect connector P22 of cable 1W2 from |
connector Jl on networks box and connector P21 of cable 1W2 from connector Jl on
commander's control assembly. Check continuity between socket F of P22 and socket B
of P21.
a. If continuity exists, replace commander's control assembly (para 10-35).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W2 is defective.
8. MAIN GUN OR 7.62-MM MACHINE GUN WILL NOT FIRE FROM COMMANDER'S TRIGGER
BUT WILL FIRE FROM GUNNER'S TRIGGER (See figures 3-19, 3-22, 3-26 and FO-1).
WARNING
ENSURE ALL WEAPONS ARE CLEAR OF AMMUNITION BEFORE STARTING TESTS.
Step 1. Connect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (d) (to connector J4 on networks box). Lamp 10 |
should be on while actuating the commander's override switch and trigger.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and replace networks box _
(para 5-53).
b. If no, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Lamp 22 should be on while actuating the commander's override.
a. If yes, proceed to step 4.
b. If no, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Lamp 23 should be on while actuating the commander's override.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (e) and replace networks box ■
(para 5-53).
b. If no, proceed to step 5.
Step 4. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) . Disconnect connector P21 of cable 1W2 from |
connector Jl on commander's control assembly. Check for continuity between pins
C and E while depressing commander's trigger.
a. If continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is defec
tive.

Change 2 3-95
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ARMAMENT SYSTEM - Continued

48. MAIN GUN OR 7.62-MM MACHINE GUN WILL NOT FIRE FROM COMMANDER'S THE
BUT WILL FIRE FROM GUNNER'S TRIGGER - Continued.

b. If continuity does not exist, replace commander's control asse

(para 10-35).
Step 5. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (e) . Disconnect connector P21 of cable IT.
connector Jl on commander's control assembly. Check for continuity between K :
of Jl while actuating commander's trigger.
a. If continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1
defective.
b. If no continuity, replace commander.s control assembly (para 10-35i
49. MAIN GUN WILL NOT FIRE FROM COMMANDER'S OR GUNNER'S TRIGGERS BUT KTL
FIRE FROM BLASTING MACHINE (See figures 3-19, 3-21, 3-23, 3-26, 3-27 and FO-1).
WARNING
ENSURE ALL WEAPONS ARE CLEAR OF AMMUNITION BEFORE
STARTING TESTS.
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Place MAIN GUN sit;
ON position. MAIN GUN light on gunner's switch box should illuminate,
a. If yes, proceed to step 2.
b. If no, proceed to step 26.
Step 2. Connect TESTS to connector J2 of cable 1 W2 per para Z-\c(A)(b). Lamp 20 £
flash while depressing gunner's triggers.
a. If yes, proceed to step 12.
b. If no, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Lamp 23 should be on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 4.
6. If no, proceed to step 6.
Step 4. Lamp 24 should be on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 5.
b. If no, proceed to step 11.
Step 5. Lamp 25 should be on while depressing gunner's triggers.
a. If yes, proceed to step 32.
b. If no, proceed to step 6.
Step 6. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4)(e) from connector J2 and reconnect TEST:
connector J4 on networks box per para 3-lc(4)(d). Lamp 32 should be on while 6ep
ing gunner's triggers.
a. If yes, proceed to step 21.
6. If no, proceed to step 7.
Step 7. Lamps 28 and 29 should be on.
a. If both are lit, proceed to step 16.
b. If neither is lit, proceed to step 8.
c. If only one lamp lights, replace networks box (para 5-53).
Step 8. Lamp 9 should be on.
a. If yes, replace networks box (para 5-53).
6. If no, proceed to step 9.

3-96 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

LFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
' CORRECTIVE ACTION

ARMAMENT SYSTEM - Continued

MAIN GUN WILL NOT FIRE FROM COMMANDER'S OR GUNNER'S TRIGGERS BUT WILL
FIRE FROM BLASTING MACHINE - Continued.

Step 9. Lamp 19 should be on.

o. If yes, proceed to step 23.
b. If no, proceed to step 10.
Step 10. Lamp 18 should be on.
a. If yes, replace networks box (para 5-53).
b. If no, proceed to step 25.
Step 11. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4)(e). Disconnect connector P23 of cable 1W2 from
networks box. Disconnect connector P9 of cable 1W2 firing relay box. Check con
tinuity between pin C of P23 and socket B of P9.
a. If continuity exists, replace networks box (para 5-53).
6. If no continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is
defective.
Step 12. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-la(4)(e). Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W10, cir
cuit 113C, from main gun safety relay. Place loader's safety switch to FIRE posi
tion. Depress gunner's trigger. Check for a momentary reading of 24 vdc between
socket A 113C of 1W10P1 and ground when trigger is depressed.
a. If 24 vdc is present, proceed to step 13.
6. If 24 vdc is not present, proceed to step 15.
Step 13. Reconnect connector PI of cable 1W10. Disconnect cable 1W6 (circuit 113D) from
blasting machine. Check for a momentary reading of +24 vdc at cable 1W6 (circuit
113D) connector when depressing gunner's trigger.
a. If 24 vdc is present, replace blasting machine (para 5-41).
6. If 24 vdc is not present, proceed to step 14.
Step 14. Disconnect cable 1W10 (circuit 113D) from main gun safety relay. Check continui
ty between socket B of connector PI of cable 1W10 and cable 1W6 (removed from
blasting machine).
a. If continuity exists, replace main gun safety relay (para 13-17).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable 1W6
or 1W10 is defective.
Step 15. Disconnect cable 1W6 (circuits 113B and 113C) from loader's safety switch. Check
switch continuity with switch in FIRE position.
a. If continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W6 or 1W10
is defective.
b. If continuity does not exist, replace loader's safety switch (para 5-66).
Step 16. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4)(e). Disconnect P24 of cable 1W2 from networks
box and Pll of cable 1W2 from EMI filter. Check continuity between pin H of P24
and socket A of Pll. Also check between pin J of P24 and socket B of Pll.
a. If continuity exists for both, proceed to step 17.
6. If continuity does not exist for either, notify support maintenance that
cable 1W2 is defective.
Step 17. Disconnect connector J 2 of cable 1W3 from EMI filter. Check continuity between
pin A of Jl and socket A of PI on EMI filter. Also check between pin B of Jl and
socket B of PI.
a. If continuity is present, proceed to step 18.
6. If continuity is not present for either, replace EMI filter (para 5-81).

Change 2 3-97
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
' CORRECTIVE ACTION

ARMAMENT SYSTEM - Continued

49. MAIN GUN WILL NOT FIRE FROM COMMANDER'S OR GUNNER'S TRIGGERS BUT WILL
FIRE FROM BLASTING MACHINE - Continued.
Step 18. Disconnect P7 of cable 1W3 from gunner's control assembly. Check continuit;.
ween pin M of J 2 (disconnected from EMI filter) and socket M of P7. Also d
between pin N of J 2 and socket N of P7.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 19.
b. If no continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable lfl
defective.
Step 19. With trigger switches depressed on gunner's control handles, check continuity:
ween pins A and B of connector Jl on gunner's control assembly.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 20.
6. If continuity does not exist, adjust or replace trigger switches. If rej
is not made, notify support maintenance that the gunner's cre:
assembly is defective.
Step 20. With trigger switch depressed on manual elevation hand pump, check contia
between pins N and M of connector Jl on gunner's control assembly.
If continuity does not exist, replace trigger switch. If repair is not na
notify support maintenance that gunner's control assembly is defect?
Step 21. Disconnect TESTS per para Z-lc(A)(e). Disconnect connector P24 of cable 1 W2tn
networks box. Disconnect P10 of cable 1W2 from gunner's control box. Check a
tinuity between pin M of P24 and socket G of P10.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 22.
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable 1*
is defective.
Step 22. Disconnect P9 of cable 1 W2 from firing relay box. Check continuity between som
C of P9 and socket C of P10.
a. If continuity exists, test MAIN GUN or MACHINE GUN circuiting:
ner's control box (para 5-31).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable \l
is defective.
Step 23. Disconnect TESTS per para Z-\c(A)(e). Disconnect P23 of cable 1 W2 from networt
box. Disconnect P21 of cable 1W2 from commander's handle. Check continuity he
ween pin D of P23 and socket A of P21.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 24.
6. If no continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable lW2i
defective.
Step 24. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4)(e). Disconnect P22 of cable 1 W2 from networs
box. Check continuity between pin F of P22 and socket B of P21.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 31.
6. If no continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable lW2s
defective.
Step 25. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4)(e). Disconnect connector P22 of cable lW2frn
networks box. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W2 from power relay and circs
breaker box. Check continuity between socket A of P22 and pin C of Pi.
a. If continuity exists, replace power relay and C/B box.
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable lWI
is defective.

3-98 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

FUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ARMAMENT SYSTEM - Continued

LAIN GUN WILL NOT FIRE FROM COMMANDER'S OR GUNNER'S TRIGGERS BUT WILL.
IRE FROM BLASTING MACHINE - Continued.
Step 26. Place MACHINE GUN switch on gunner's switch box in ON position. MACHINE
GUN indicator light on gunner's control switch box should illuminate.
a. If yes, test MAIN GUN circuit in the gunner's control switch box (para
5-31).
b. If no, proceed to step 27.
Step 27. Connect TESTS per para 3-la(4)(6) (to connector J2 of cable 1 W2). Lamp 29 should
light.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-la(4)(e) and proceed to step 28.
b. If no, proceed to step 29.
Step 28. Ensure MASTER BATTERY switch is in OFF position. Disconnect connector P22
of cable 1W2 from networks box. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON posi
tion. Check for 24 vdc between socket A of P22 and ground.
a. If 24 vdc is present, replace networks box (para 5-53).
b. If 24 vdc is not present, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is
defective.
Step 29. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P22 of
cable 1W2 from networks box. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position.
Lamp 29 should be on.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-la(4)(e) and connect connector P22
of cable 1W2 to networks box and proceed to malfunction 80.
b. If no, proceed to step 30.
Step 30. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-la (4) (e). Disconnect connector PI of cable 1 W2 from
power relay box (fig FO-1). Check pin C of PI for short to ground.
a. If short circuit exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is
defective.
b. If short circuit does not exist, replace power relay and circuit breaker
box (para 5-38).
Step 31. Check continuity between Jl pin f and 34 socket k on turret networks box.
a. If continuity exists, replace commander's handles (para 10-35).
b. If continuity does not exist, replace turret networks box (para 5-53).
Step 32. Disconnect 1W2P9 from the firing relay box. Disconnect 1W2P8 from
1W6J1. Check continuity from socket F of P9 to pin B of P8.
a. If continuity exists, replace firing relay box (para 5-78).
b. If continuity does not exist, inform support maintenance
of defective 1W2 cable.

Change 4 3-98.1
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ARMAMENT SYSTEM - Continued

50. MAIN GUN WILL NOT FIRE FROM BLASTING MACHINE BUT FIRES FROM EITHER
COMMANDER'S OR GUNNER'S TRIGGERS. (See figures 3-19, 3-26 and FO-1).
WARNING
ENSURE ALL WEAPONS ARE CLEAR OF AMMUNITION BEFORE STARTING TESTS.
Step 1. Disconnect cable 1W6 (circuit 113G) from loader's safety switch. Set loader's safe
ty switch to FIRE position. Check socket connector of cable 1W6 (circuit 113G)for
short to ground.
a. If short exists, proceed to step 2.
b. If short does not exist, replace loader's safety switch (para 5-66).
Step 2. Disconnect cable 1W6 (circuit 113G) from blasting machine. Check continuity
of circuit 113G from safety switch to blasting machine.
a. If continuity exists, replace blasting machine (para 5-41).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W6 is defective.

3-98.2 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2
Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

UNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ARMAMENT SYSTEM - Continued

GUN OR 7.62-MM MACHINE GUN WILL NOT FIRE FROM TRIGGER SWITCH ON
VNUAL ELEVATION HANDLE BUT WILL FIRE FROM GUNNER'S TRIGGER. (See figures
19, 3-22, 3-26 and FO-U

ENSURE ALL WEAPONS ARE CLEAR OF AMMUNITION BEFORE STARTING TESTS.

Step 1. Connect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (d) (to connector J4 on networks box). Place MAS
TER BATTERY switch in ON position. Lamp 29 should come on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 2.
b. If no, disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (e) and replace networks box
(para 5-53).
Step 2. Lamp 13 should be on while depressing the manual elevation firing switch.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (e) and replace networks box
(para 5-53).
b. If no, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (e) . Disconnect connector Pll of cable 1W2 from
EMI filter assembly. Check continuity between pins N and M on EMI filter assembly
while depressing manual elevation firing switch.
a. If continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is
defective.
b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 4.
Step 4. Disconnect connector P7 of cable 1W3 from connector Jl on gunner's control
assembly. Check continuity between socket N of P7 and pin N of connector on
EMI filter assembly and also between socket M of P7 and pin M of connector
on EMI filter assembly.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 5.
b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 6.
Step 5. Disconnect connectors from manual elevation pump handle firing switch.
Check switch continuity at switch pins while depressing switch.
a. If continuity exists, replace gunner's control assembly (para 10-38).
b. If continuity does not exist, replace manual elevation pump handle
firing switch (para 8-9).
Step 6. Disconnect connector J2 of cable 1W3 from EMI filter assembly. Check
continuity between pin M of Jl and socket M of PI on filter assembly. Check
continuity between pin N of Jl and socket N of PI of filter assembly.
a. If continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is
defective.
b. If continuity does not exist, replace EMI filter assembly (para 5-
81).
MAIN GUN WILL NOT FIRE FROM ANY POSITION. (See figures 3-19, 3-26 and FO-1.)
WARNING
ENSURE ALL WEAPONS ARE CLEAR OF AMMUNITION BEFORE STARTING
TESTS.
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Install firing circuit
tester in breech. Place MAIN GUN switch on gunner's control box in ON
position. Set loader's safety switch to FIRE position. Depress gunner's
trigger. Tester light should flash.
a. If yes, replace defective ammo (TM 9-2350-253-10).
Change 2 3-99
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ARMAMENT SYSTEM - Continued

52. MAIN GUN WILL NOT FIRE FROM ANY POSITION - Continued.
b. If no, proceed to step 2.
Step 2.Depress gunner's trigger and check for a momentary reading of 24 vdc at '
contact plate on breech to ground.
a. If 24 vdc is present, disassemble breech ring group and clean -
the breech firing mechanism (para 13-14,13-15).
b. If 24 vdc is not present, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Disconnect cable 1W6 (circuits 113D and 113E) from blasting machine. C
for continuity through blasting machine socket connectors.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 4.
b. If continuity does not exist, replace blasting machine (para 54:
Step 4. Disconnect cable IW6 (circuits 113B and 113C) from loader's safety s*
Check for continuity between switch pin connectors with switch in i
position.
a. If continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable .1
1W10 between blasting machine and firing plate on breech'::
113E) is defective.
b. If continuity does not exist, adjust/replace loader's safety >~
(para 5-71, 5-66).
53. 7.62-MM MACHINE GUN WILL NOT FIRE ELECTRICALLY. (See figures 3-19, Ml
FO-1.)
WARNING
ENSURE ALL WEAPONS ARE CLEAR OF AMMUNITION BEFORE STARTING TESTS
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Place MACHINE E
switch on gunner's switch box in ON position. MACHINE GUN indicator I
on gunner's switch box should come on.
a. If light comes on, proceed to step 2.
b. If light does not come on, replace lamp in MACHINE GUN indta
light. If light does not come on, repair gunner's switch box (pn
34).
Step 2. Check installation of machine gun solenoid electrical connections.
a. If properly installed, proceed to step 3.
b. If disconnected or improperly installed, install properly,
malfunction still exists, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Depress gunner's trigger switch. Machine gun solenoid should energize ri
click.
a. If click is heard, repair machine gun (TM 9-1005-313-23).
b. If click is not heard, proceed to step 4.
Step 4. Disconnect cable 1W6 from machine gun solenoid. Check for 24 vdc bet*
harness connector at machine gun solenoid and ground while gunner's trigs
depressed.
a. If 24 vdc is present, replace machine gun solenoid (para 13-30).
b. If 24 vdc is not present, proceed to step 5.
Step 5. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector."

3-100 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

IALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ARMAMENT SYSTEM - Continued

. 7.62-MM MACHINE GUN WILL NOT FIRE ELECTRICALLY - Continued.

cable 1W6 from connector P8 cable 1W2. Check continuity between socket A
of Jl and socket connector at machine gun solenoid.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 6.
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W6 is defective.
Step 6. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P9 of
cable 1W2 from firing relay box. Check continuity between socket D of P9 and
pin A of P8.
a. If continuity exists, replace firing relay box (para 5-78).
6. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 7.
Step 7. Disconnect connector P10 of cable 1W2 from connector J-l on gunner's control switch
box. Check continuity between pins G and B of connector J-l.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 8.
6. If continuity does not exist, test gunner's control switch box (para 5-31).
Step 8. Connect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (b) to connector J-4 on networks box. Lamp 18 should
come on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 9.
b. If no, proceed to step 10.
Step 9. Lamp 32 should be on while depressing any firing trigger.
a. If yes, notify support maintenance of defective 1W2 cable.
b. If no, replace defective networks box (para 5-53).
Step 10. Lamp 29 should be on.
a. If yes, notify support maintenance of defective 1W2 cable.
b. If no, replace defective networks box (para 5-53).
. MAIN GUN AND 7.62-MM MACHINE GUN WILL NOT FIRE FROM COMMANDER'S OR
GUNNER'S TRIGGERS. (See figures 3-19,3-22, 3-25 and FO-1.)
WARNING
ENSURE ALL WEAPONS ARE CLEAR OF AMMUNITION BEFORE STARTING TESTS.
Step I. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Place MAIN GUN switch in
ON position. MAIN GUN indicator light on gunner's control box should come
on.
a. If light comes on, proceed to step 2.
b. If light is off, proceed to malfunction 49.
Step 2. Connect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (d) (to connector J4 on networks box). Lamp 19
should come on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 3.
b. If no, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and replace the networks
box (para 5-53).
Step 3. Lamp 9 should be on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 4.
b. If no, proceed to step 6.
Step 4. Depress gunner's trigger and check lamp 32.
a. If lamp is on, proceed to step 5.
b. If lamp is off, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and replace the net
works box (para 5-53).

Change 4 3-101
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
ARMAMENT SYSTEM - Continued
54. MAIN GUN AND 7.62-MM MACHINE GUN WILL NOT FIRE FROM COMMANDER'S OR
GUNNER'S TRIGGERS.-Continued
Step 5. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) . Disconnect connector P24 of cable 1W2 from
networks box. Disconnect connector P10 of cable 1W2 from gunner's control box (fig
FO-1). Check continuity between pin M of P24 and socket G of P10.
a. If continuity exists, repair circuit 103/113 in gunner's control box (para
5-34).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2
is defective.
Step 6. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (e) . Disconnect connector P23 of cable 1W2 from
networks box. Disconnect connector P21 of cable 1W2 from commander's control
assembly. Check continuity between pin D of P23 and socket A of P21.
a. If continuity exists, replace commander's control assembly (para
10-35).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W2 is defective.
55. CALIBER .50 MACHINE GUN WILL NOT FIRE (PERISCOPE RETICLE ILLUMINATES). (See
figures 3-19, 3-27 and FO-1.)
WARNING
CLEAR ALL WEAPONS OF AMMUNITION BEFORE STARTING TESTS.
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Place CUPOLA POWER
switch on networks box in ON position. Place GUN SAFETY switch on
commander's panel in ON position. Verify LAST ROUND STOP switch in
ammo box is depressed. GUN READY indicator light on commander's panel
should come on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 2.
b. If no," proceed to step 8.
Step 2. Disconnect connector P2 of cable 1W13 from caliber .50 machine gun. Depress
trigger and check for 24 vdc between socket connector P2 (hi) and ground.
a. If 24 vdc is present, notify support maintenance to replace .50-
caliber machine gun solenoid (TM 9-1005-231-25).
b. If 24 vdc is not present, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Place GUN SAFETY switch on commander's panel in OFF position. Disconnect
connector P3 of cable 1W13 and connector J3 from trigger switch. Check
continuity between switch pin and socket connectors while depressing switch.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 4.
b. If continuity does not exist, replace trigger switch (para 9-5).
Step 4. Place GUN SAFETY switch in ON position and depress LAST ROUND switch
or place LAST ROUND OVERRIDE switch in ON position. Check for 24 vdc be
tween socket connector P3 of cable 1W13 and ground.
a. If 24 vdc is present, proceed to step 5.
b. If 24 vdc is not present, proceed to step 7.
Step 5. Place CUPOLA POWER switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector PI of
cable 1W13 from commander's panel. Check continuity between socket J of PI
and pin connector J3.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 6.
h. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W13 is defective.

3-102 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

LLFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ARMAMENT SYSTEM - Continued

CALIBER .50 MACHINE GUN WILL NOT FIRE (PERISCOPE RETICLE ILLUMINATES) -
Continued.
Step 6. Check continuity between socket H of PI and socket connector P2 of cable
1W13.
a. If continuity exists, replace commander's panel (para 549).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W13 is defective.
Step 7. Place CUPOLA POWER switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector PI of
cable 1W13 from commander's panel. Check continuity between socket K of
PI and socket connector P3.
a. If continuity exists, replace commander's panel (para 5-49).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W13 is defective.
Step 8. Place the LAST ROUND OVERRIDE switch on commander's panel in ON
position. GUN READY indicator light should be on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 9.
b. If no, replace commander's panel (para 5-49).
Step 9. Place CUPOLA POWER switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector PI of
cable 1W13 from commander's panel. Check continuity between sockets L ana
M of PI while last round stop switch is depressed.
a. If continuity exists, replace commander's panel (para 5-49).
b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 10.
Step 10. Disconnect connector P4 and P5 of cable 1W13 from last round stop switch.
Check switch continuity at pin connectors while switch is depressed.
a. If continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W13 is
defective.
b. If continuity does not exist, replace last round stop switch (para 14-
5).
CALIBER .50 MACHINE GUN WILL NOT FIRE (PERISCOPE RETICLE DOES NOT ILLU
MINATE, OR COMMANDER HAS NO NIGHT VISION AND NO PASSIVE RETICLE). (See
figures 3-19, 3-26, 3-27 and FO-1).
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Place CUPOLA POWER
switch in ON position. POWER ON light on commander's panel should come
on.
a. If yes, replace commander's panel (para 5-49).
b. If no, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. MASTER POWER indicator light on networks box should come on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 3.
b. If no, proceed to step 7.
Step 3. Connect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (d) (to connector J4 on networks box). Place CUP
OLA power switch in ON position. Lamp 12 should come on.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and proceed to step 4.
b. If no, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and replace networks box
(para 5-53).
Step 4. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector PI of
cable 1W13 from commander's panel. Disconnect connector P22 of cable 1W2
from networks box. Check continuity between socket J of P22 and socket A of
PI.

Change 4 3-103
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ARMAMENT SYSTEM - Continued

56. CALIBER .50 MACHINE GUN WILL NOT FIRE (PERISCOPE RETICLE EHJES
ILLUMINATE) - Continued.
a. If continuity exists, replace commander's panel (para 5-49).
b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 5.
Step 5. Remove radio receiver R-442A/VRC from mount. Disconnect connector ?:•
cable 1W2 from cupola interconnecting box. Check continuity between socks
of P22 and socket B of P18.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 6.
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that «
1W2 is defective.
Step 6. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W11 and connector PI of cable 1W12 from cupokz:
connecting box. With cupola slip ring on 1W11 contact board, check continuity bees?
socket A of PI (cable 1W13) and socket B of PI (cable 1W11). With cupola slip ring on :'■
contact board, check continuity between socket A of PI (cable 1W13) and socket B of.'
(cable 1W12).
a. If continuity is present for either of the above measurements, notify s?p:
maintenance cupola interconnecting box assembly is defective.
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance th&t-
cabling between cupola interconnecting box assembly i
commander's panel (1W11, 1W12 and/or 1W13) is defective.
Step 7. Connect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (d) (to connector J2 of cable 1W2). Lamp 33 sb.
come on.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4)(e) and notify support mar
nance that cable 1W2 is defective.
b. If no, proceed to step 8.
Step 8. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector"
of cable 1W2 from networks box. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in "J
position. Lamp 33 should come on within one minute.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and proceed to malfun:
77.
b. If no, disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (e) and replace turret pop
relay and circuit breaker box (para 5-38).
Step 9. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector
P22 of cable 1W2 from networks box. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in
ON position. Lamp 33 should come on.
a. If yes, proceed to malfunction 77.
b. If no, proceed to step 10.
Step 10. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect TESTS
from connector J2 of cable 1W2. Disconnect connector Pi of cable 1W2
from turret power relay box. Check pin A of connector Pi of cable 1W2
for short to ground.
a. If short exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 i
defective.
b. If short does not exist, replace turret power relay box (para 5-381

3-104 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

ALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ARMAMENT SYSTEM - Continued

VEHICLE VOLTAGE DOES NOT PASS FUNCTIONAL CHECK (PARA 13-46) OF SMOKE
GRENADE LAUNCHER CIRCUIT. (See figures 3-19, 3-31 and FO-1.)
Step 1. MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position.
Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position.
I
Step 2. Deleted.

Step 3. Loose electrical connectors.

Tighten all connectors.
Step 4. Faulty discharger.
NOTE
This applies to both left and right dischargers.
a. Place GRENADE POWER switch and MASTER BATTERY switch
OFF.
6. Disconnect electrical connectors from back of dischargers (para 13-38).
c. Place GRENADE POWER switch and MASTER BATTERY switch
ON and with LEFT pushbutton depressed, check for vehicle voltage
between sockets A (+) and B (-) (6W3) and between sockets B (-) and
C (+) (6W2) of electrical connectors P2. Proceed to step 4d. below.
d. With GRENADE POWER switch and MASTER BATTERY switch ON
and with RIGHT pushbutton depressed, check for vehicle voltage
between sockets B (-) and C (+) (6W3) and between sockets A (+)
and B (-) (6W2) of electrical connectors P2.
e. If vehicle voltage is present, discharger is faulty. Remove
discharger (para 13-38) and repair (TM 3-1040-266-20&P).
f. If vehicle voltage is not present, proceed to malfunctions 58 and 59
below.
VEHICLE VOLTAGE NOT PRESENT AT ELECTRICAL PLUG PINS A (+) AND B (-) OF
SMOKE GRENADE LAUNCHER CIRCUIT WHEN PUSHBUTTON IS DEPRESSED AND
HELD. (See figures 3-19, 3-31, and FO-1.)
Step 1. Faulty wiring harnesses (6W3 and 6W2).

Change 4 3-104.1/(3-104.2 blank)

 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

ALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ARMAMENT SYSTEM - Continued

U VEHICLE VOLTAGE NOT PRESENT AT ELECTRICAL PLUG PINS A (+) AND B (-) OF
SMOKE GRENADE LAUNCHER CIRCUIT WHEN PUSHBUTTON IS DEPRESSED AND
HELD - Continued.
a. Place GRENADE POWER switch and MASTER BATTERY switch
OFF.
b. Remove connectors PI from Jl and J2 of housings (fig FO-1).
c. Place GRENADE POWER switch and MASTER BATTERY switch
ON.
d. With left pushbutton depressed, check for vehicle voltage between
pins A (+) and B (-) of Jl and between pins B (-) and C (+) of 32.
e. With right pushbutton depressed, check for vehicle voltage between
pins B (-) and C (+) of Jl and between pins A (+) and B (-) of J2.
f. If vehicle voltage is present, wiring harness is faulty. Replace
harness(es) (para 13-44).
0. If vehicle voltage is not present, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Faulty pushbutton unit.
Place GRENADE POWER switch and MASTER BATTERY switch OFF
and remove connector from pushbutton unit. With pushbuttons
depressed, check for continuity between pins B and C and between B
and D (right switch) and between E and F and between E and A (left
switch). If no continuity is present, replace faulty pushbutton switch
(TM 3-1040-266-20&P).
Step 3. Damaged connector on pushbutton unit (if both lack power, check for damage).
Replace damaged pushbutton unit (para 13-43).
Step 4. Faulty wiring harness (6W1).
a. Place GRENADE POWER switch and MASTER BATTERY switch
OFF.
b. (1) Disconnect harness 6W1 from power box, pushbutton unit, and
from rubber connectors J3 and P3.
(2) Check for continuity from P3 (and from J3) to socket A,
(connector P2J1) of power box end of harness 6W1. Also check
for continuity of connector P2J1 (at power box end of harness
6W1) socket B to connector P1J1 (at pushbutton unit end of
harness 6W1) socket C. Check also for continuity from
connector P2J1 socket D (at power box end of harness 6W1) to
connector P1J1 socket F (at pushbutton end of harness 6W1).
Proceed to step 46.(5).
(3) Check for continuity from socket A at connector P1J1 (at
pushbutton unit end of harness 6W1) to socket C of connector J2
(at right housing end of harness 6W1). Also check for continuity
from socket B of connector P1J1 (at pushbutton end of harness
6W1) to socket A of connector J2 (at right housing end of
harness 6W1). Proceed to step 4b.(5).
(4) Check for continuity from socket D of connector P1J1 (at
pushbutton end of harness (6W1) to socket C of connector Jl (at
left housing end of harness 6W1). Also check for continuity
from socket E of connector P1J1 (at pushbutton end of harness

3-105
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ARMAMENT SYSTEM - Continued

6W1) to socket C of connector Jl (at left housing end of harness

6W1). Proceed to next step.
(5) If continuity is not present for any of the above steps (2), (3),
or (4) , harness 6W1 is faulty. Replace discharger harness 6W1
(para 13-45).
(6) If continuity is present at steps (2), (3), and (4), check
malfunction 72.
c. Check for damaged connector. Replace faulty harness (para 13-45).
59. FAULTY SMOKE GRENADE PUSHBUTTON UNIT. (See figures 3-19, 3-31 and FO-1.)
Step 1. Place GRENADE POWER switch and MASTER BATTERY switch OFF and
remove connector from pushbutton unit. With pushbuttons of Jl depressed,
check for continuity between pins B and C and between B and D (right switch)
and between E and F and between E and A of Jl (left switch).
a. If no continuity is present, replace faulty pushbutton switch (TM 3-
1040-266-20&P).
b. If continuity is present, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Check for damaged connector on pushbutton unit.
a. Replace damaged pushbutton unit (para 13-43).
b. If not damaged, refer to malfunction 60.
60. FAULTY WIRING HARNESS (6W1). (See figures 3-19, 3-31 and FO-1.)
Step 1. Place GRENADE POWER switch and MASTER BATTERY switch OFF.
Disconnect harness 6W1 from power box, pushbutton unit, and from rubber
connectors J3 and P3. Check for continuity from P3 (and from J3) to socket
A, (connector P2J1) of power box end of harness 6W1. Also check for
continuity of connector P2J1 (at power box end of harness 6W1) socket B to
connector P1J1 (at pushbutton unit end of harness 6W1) socket C. Check also
for continuity from connector P2J1 socket D (at power box end of harness
6W1) to connector P1J1 socket F (at pushbutton end of harness 6W1).
a. If continuity does not exist in any check, replace harness 6W1 (para
13-45).
b. If continuity exists, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Check for continuity from socket A at connector PIJl (at pushbutton unit end
of harness 6W1) to socket C of connector J2. (at right housing end of harness
6W1). Also check for continuity from socket B of connector P1J1 (at
pushbutton end of harness 6W1) to socket A of connector J2 (at left housing
end of harness 6W1).
a. If continuity does not exist on any check, replace harness 6W1 (para
13-45).
b. If continuity is present, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Check for continuity from socket D of connector P1J1 (at pushbutton end of
harness 6W1) to socket C of connector Jl (at left housing end of harness 6W1).
a. If continuity does not exist on any check, replace harness 6W1 (para
1345).
b. If continuity is present, proceed to step 4.
Step 4. Check for damaged connectors.
a. If connectors are damaged, replace faulty harness 6W1 (para 13-45).
b. If connectors are not damaged, refer to malfunction 61.
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

ALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

ARMAMENT SYSTEM - Continued

SMOKE GRENADE ON-OFF POWER BOX (GRENADE POWER) SWITCH LAMP IS LIT BUT
NO POWER AT PIN C OR F OF PUSHBUTTON UNIT. (See figures 3-19, 3-31 and FO-1.)
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. If not previously
disconnected, disconnect connector W1P2, from Jl of power box assembly.
Place GRENADE POWER switch in ON position. Check continuity between pin
A and pin B on power box connector.
a. If continuity does not exist, replace power box assembly (para 13-
42).
b. If continuity exists, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Check continuity between pin A and pin D of power box connector.
a. If continuity does not exist, replace power box assembly (para 13-
42).
b. If continuity exists, refer to malfunction 60.
SMOKE GRENADE ON-OFF POWER BOX SWITCH LAMP NOT LIT WHEN SWITCH IS
PUSHED ON.
Step 1. Main vehicle power not on.
Turn power on.
Step 2. Faulty wiring harness.
a. Check harness from power source to power box switch for
electrical continuity.
b. If harness is faulty, replace faulty harness.
Step 3. Faulty power switch or lamp.
Check power switch continuity. Replace defective lamp (TM 9-2350-
253-10). Replace power box assembly (para 13-42).

TURRET ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

. DOMELIGHTS DO NOT OPERATE. (See figures 3-19, 3-29 andFO-1.)

Step 1. Connect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (d) (to connector J4 on networks box). Lamp 7
should come on.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and replace networks box
(para 5-53).
b. If no, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c
(4) (<?) and reconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (d) (to connector J2 of cable 1W2).
Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Lamp 32 should come on.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and notify support main
tenance that cable 1W2 is defective.
b. If no, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector
P22 of cable 1W2. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Lamp 32
should come on.
a. If yes, proceed to malfunction 82.
b. If no, proceed to step 4.
Step 4. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (e) . Disconnect connector PI of cable lW2,from
power relay box. Check pin D of PI for short to ground.
a. If short exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is
defective.
6. If short does not exist, replace power relay box (para 5-38).
Change 2 3-107
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

TURRET ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - Continued

64. GUNNER'S DOMELIGHT FAILS; OTHER DOMELIGHTS OPERATE. (See figures 3-19,
3-29 and FO-1.)
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P25
of cable 1W2 from connector Jl on gunner's domelight assembly. Place -
MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Check for 24 vdc between P25 and
ground.
a. If 24 vdc is present, repair domelight assembly (para 5-9).
b. If 24 vdc is not present, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P24
from networks box. Check continuity between pin D of P24 and socket
connector P25.
a. If continuity exists, replace networks box (para 5-53).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W2 is defective.
65. MAIN GUN DOMELIGHT FAILS; OTHER DOMELIGHTS OPERATE. (See figures 3-19,
3-29 and FO-1.)

Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P29
of cable 1W2 from connector Jl on main gun domelight assembly. Place
MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Check for 24 vdc between P29 and
ground.
a. If 24 vdc is present, repair main gun domelight assembly (para 5-9).
b. If 24 vdc is not present, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P24
from networks box. Check continuity between pin E of P24 and socket
connector P29.
a. If continuity exists, replace networks box (para 5-53).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W2 is defective.
66. LOADER'S DOMELIGHT FAILS; OTHER DOMELIGHTS OPERATE. (See figures 3-19, 3-29
and FO-1.)
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P17
of cable 1W2 from loader's domelight assembly. Place MASTER BATTERY
switch in ON position. Check for 24 vdc between socket connector P17 and
ground.
a. If 24 vdc is present, repair loader's domelight assembly (para 5-9).
b. If 24 vdc is not present, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P24
from networks box. Check continuity between pin C of P24 and socket
connector P17.
a. If continuity exists, replace networks box (para 5-53).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W2 is defective.
67. VENT BLOWER FAILS TO OPERATE. (See figures 3-19, 3-28 and FO-1.)
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Check for 24 vdc at
UTILITY OUTLET.
a. If 24 vdc is present, proceed to step 2.
b. If 24 vdc is not present, proceed to step 4.

3-108
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

IALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

TURRET ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - Continued

VENT BLOWER FAILS TO OPERATE - Continued:
Step 2. Turn MASTER BATTERY switch OFF and disconnect connector P2 of cable
1W8 from vent blower distribution box. Place MASTER BATTERY and
BLOWER switches in ON positions. Check for 24 vdc between socket connector
J 2 and ground.
a. If 24 vdc is present, proceed to step 3.
b. If 24 vdc is not present, repair ventl blower distribution box (para 5-89).
Step 3. Place BLOWER switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W8
from vent blower. Check continuity between pin connector P2 and socket
connector PI.
a. If continuity exists, replace vent blower (para 5-22).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W8 is defective.
Step 4. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P2 of
cable 1W7 (circuit 159/137) from vent blower distribution box. Check pin
connector Jl on vent blower distribution box for short to ground.
a. If short exists, proceed to step 7.
b. If short does not exist, proceed to step 5.
Step 5. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Check for 24 vdc between
socket connector P2 of cable and ground.
a. If 24 vdc is present, repair vent blower distribution box (para 5-89).
b. If 24 vdc is not present, proceed to step 6.
Step 6. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector
PI of cable 1W7 from power relay box (fig FO-1). Check for continuity
between pin connector PI and socket connector P2. Reconnect connector
Pi and check for short from socket connector P2 to ground.
a. If short does not exist, and continuity exists, replace power relay
box (para 5-38).
b. If short exists, or continuity does not exist, notify support mainte
nance that cable 1W7 is defective.
Step 7. Disconnect connector P2 of cable 1W8 from vent blower distribution box.
Recheck pin connector Jl for short to ground with BLOWER switch and
CBI ON.
a. If short exists, repair vent blower distribution box (para 5-89).
b. If short does not exist, proceed to step 8.
Step 8. Connect P2 of cable 1W8 to J2 of vent blower distribution box.
Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W8 from -blower and check socket
connector PI of cable 1 W8 for short to ground.
a. If short exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W8 is
defective.
b. If short does not exist, replace vent blower (para 5-22).
NO VOLTAGE PRESENT AT UTILITY POWER OUTLET.
Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Place BLOWER switch on vent blower
distribution box to ON position. Check vent blower operation.
a. If vent blower operates, repair vent blower distribution box (para
5-89).
6. If vent blower fails to operate, refer to malfunction 67.

Change 2 3-109
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

TURRET ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - Continued

69. COMMANDER'S GAS PARTICULATE FILTER HEATER FAILS TO OPERATE; OTHER

HEATERS OPERATE. (See figures 3-19, 3-28 and FO-1.)
Step 1. Connect TESTS per para 3-lc (4) (d) (to connector J2 of cable 1W2). POWER ON lamp
on the TESTS should come on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 2.
b. If no, disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc (4) (e) and replace power relay box
(para 5-38).
Step 2. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc (4) (e) , Disconnect connector P15 of cable 1W2 fron
commander's heater. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Check for 24
vdc between socket connector P15 and ground.
a. If 24 vdc is present, replace commander's heater (para 17-2a).
b. If 24 vdc is not present, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2
is defective.
70. GUNNER'S GAS PARTICULATE FILTER HEATER FAILS TO OPERATE; OTHER HEATERS
OPERATE. (See figures 3-19, 3-28 and FO-1.)
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P4 of
cable 1W2 from gunner's heater (fig FO-1). Place MASTER BATTERY switch
in ON position. Check for 24 vdc between socket connector P4 and ground.
a. If 24 vdc is present, replace gunner's heater (para 17-2b).
b. If 24 vdc is not present, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector PI of
cable 1W2 from power relay box (fig FO-1). Check continuity between pin Lof
connector PI of cable 1W2 and socket connector P4.
a. If continuity exists, replace power relay box (para 5-38).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W2 is defective.
71. LOADER'S GAS PARTICULATE FILTER HEATER FAILS TO OPERATE; OTHER HEATERS
OPERATE. (See figures 3-19, 3-28 and FO-1.)
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P2S
of cable 1W2 from loader's heater. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON
position. Check for 24 vdc between socket connector P26 and ground.
a. If 24 vdc is present, replace loader's heater (para 17-2c).
b. If 24 vdc is not present, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector PI of
cable 1W2 from power relay box (fig FO-1). Check continuity between pin S
of connector PI of cable 1W2 and socket connector P26.
a. If continuity exists, replace power relay box (para 5-38).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W2 is defective.
72. TURRET PRIME POWER NOT AVAILABLE (HULL SUBSYSTEMS OPERABLE). (See figures
3-19 and FO-1.)
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P2 of
cable 1W1 from power relay box (fig FO-1). Place MASTER BATTERY switch
in ON position. Check for 24 vdc between socket A of P2 and ground.
a. If 24 vdc is present, replace power relay box (para 5-38).
b. If 24 vdc is not present, proceed to step 2.

3-110 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

A.LFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

TURRET ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - Continued

. TURRET PRIME POWER NOT AVAILABLE (HULL SUBSYSTEMS OPERABLE) - Continued

Step 2. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector PI of

cable 1W1 (circuit 100) from hull/turret slip ring. Check continuity from pin
connector PI to socket A or G of P2.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 3.
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance to replace
cable 1W1.
Step 3. Disconnect cable 11673823 (circuit 47) from hull/turret slip ring. Check
continuity through slip ring (from slip ring connector which interfaces with
cable 11673823 connector to slip ring connector which interfaces with
connector PI of cable 1W1).
a. If continuity exists, notify support maintenance that cable is defective.
b. If continuity does not exist, replace the hull/turret slip ring
(para 5-11).
I. SEARCHLIGHT INOPERATIVE. (See figures 3-19, 3-28 and FO-1.)
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Place CIRCUIT TEST switch
on searchlight master control panel in position 2 to check available input
power.
a. If power is present, proceed to troubleshooting procedures for IR
searchlight set contained in TM 11-5855-217-12-1.
b. If power is not present, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Check domelight operation.
a. If domelight operates, proceed to step 3.
b. If domelight does not operate, refer to malfunction 72.
Step 3. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector PI of
cable 1W5 from searchlight master control unit. Place MASTER BATTERY
switch in ON position. Check sockets A (+) and B (-) of PI for 24 vdc.
a. If 24 vdc is present, proceed to IR searchlight set troubleshooting
procedures contained in TM 11-5855-217-12-1.
b. If 24 vdc is not present, proceed to step 4.
Step 4. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Check continuity from
socket B (-) of connector PI of cable 1W5 (El of cable 1W5) to ground.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 5.
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W5 is defective.
Step 5. Disconnect connector P2 of cable 1W5 from power relay box (fig FO-1). Check
for continuity between socket P2 and socket A (+) of PI.
a- If continuity exists, proceed to malfunction 75.
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W5 is defective.
74. CB1 AND CB8, HYDRAULIC PUMP INOPERATIVE. (See figures 3-19 and FO-1)
Step 1. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W4 from connector J2 of turret power relay
and circuit breaker box. Check J2 for a short to ground.
a. If yes, replace turret power relay and circuit breaker box (para 5-
38).
b. If no, proceed to step 2.
3-111
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

TURRET ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - Continued

74. CB1 AND CB8, HYDRAULIC PUMP INOPERATIVE. (See figures 3-19 and FO-1)- Cora
Step 2. Connect connector PI of cable 1W4 to 32 of turret power relay and a
breaker box. Disconnect connector P2 of cable 1W4 from Jl on hy*
pump. Check for a short between PI and ground.
a. If yes, replace cable 1W4.
b. If no, notify support maintenance that power pack control assa
is defective.
75. CB2, SEARCHLIGHT/TTS INOPERATIVE. (See figure 3-19 and FO-1.)
Step 1. Verify that MASTER BATTERY switch is in OFF position. Verify that connec
tor PI of cable 1W5 is connected to searchlight master control unit/power con
verter unit. Verify that connector P2 of cable 1W5 is disconnected from power
relay box (fig FO-1). Check socket connector P2 for short to ground,
a- If short exists, proceed to step 2.
b. If short does not exist, replace power relay box (para 5-38).
Step 2. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W5 from searchlight master control unit pes
converter unit. Connect P2 of cable 1W5 to power relay box. Check PI of a
1W5 for a short to ground.
a. If short exists, notify support maintenance that cable If;
defective.
6. If short does not exist, proceed to troubleshooting procedures k
searchlight set in TM 11-5855-217-12-1 and for TTS, proceed to mzz
tion 122.
76. CB4, LASER INOPERATIVE (EMERGENCY OPERATION NOT POSSIBLE). (See figures-
3-30 and FO-1).
Step 1. Connect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) fd> (to connector J2 of cable 1W2). Lamp 34 &
come on.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and replace the electro
unit and laser-receiver transmitter.
b. If no, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Disconnect connector P24 of cable 1W2 from networks box. Lamp 34 shouk
on.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and notify support mail
ance that cable 1W2 is defective.
b. If no, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Disconnect connector P22 of cable 1W2 from networks box. Lamp 34 shoul
on.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (e) and replace networks
(para 5-53).
b. If no, proceed to step 4.
Step 4. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (e) . Disconnect connector PI of cable lW2f
power relay box (fig FO-1). Check pin H of PI for short to ground.
a. If short exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W'
defective.
b. If short does not exist, replace power relay box (para 5-38).
77. CB5, CUPOLA POWER INOPERATIVE. (See figures 3-19, 3-27 and FO-1.)
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY, CUPOLA POWER and switches in ON posit
Verify GUN SAFETY switch on commander panel is in OFF position.

3-112 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

iALFU NOTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
TURRET ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - Continued
77. CB5 CUPOLA POWER INOPERATIVE - Continued.
POWER ON lamp in the commander's panel should come on and stay on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 2.
b. If no, proceed to step 6.

Step 2. Place GUN SAFETY switch in ON position. The GUN READY lamp should
come on and stay on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 3.
b. If no, proceed to step 5.
Step 3. Turn M36E1 light source control fully clockwise. The POWER ON lamp on
commander's panel should remain on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 4.
b. If no, replace light source control (para 15-35).
Step 4. Turn RETICLE and TUBE controls on M36E1 periscope fully clockwise. The
POWER ON lamp on commander's panel should remain on.
a. If yes, return vehicle to service.
b. If no, replace passive elbow (para 15-27).
Step 5. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect following
connectors of cable 1W13: P2 at machine gun solenoid, J3 and P3 at trigger,
P4 and P5 at last round sensing switch, J2 at cable 1W15, and Jl at light
source control. Successively connect each connector, one at a time. After
each connection, place MASTER BATTERY, CUPOLA POWER and GUN
SAFETY switches in ON position. The POWER ON lamp on commander's panel
should come on and stay on.
a. If lamp goes off after P2 is connected, replace machine gun (TM 9-
2350-253-10).
b. If lamp goes off after P3 and J3 are connected, replace machine
gun, (TM 9-2350-253-10).
c. If lamp goes off after P4 and P5 are connected, repair or replace
last round stop switch (para 14-5).
Step 6. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector PI of cable
1W13 from commander's panel. Place MASTER BATTERY and CUPOLA POWER
switches in ON position. The POWER lamp on the networks box should come on and
stay on.

a. If yes, replace commander's panel (para 5-49).

b. If no, proceed to step 7.
Step 7. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector J2 of
cable 1W12 and connector J3 of cable 1W11 from cupola junction box. Place
MASTER BATTERY and CUPOLA POWER switches in ON positions. The
POWER ON lamp on the networks box should come on and stay on.
a. If yes, notify support maintenance that cable 1W11, 1W12, or 1W13
is shorted.
b. If no, proceed to step 8.
Step 8. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P22
of cable 1W2 from networks box. Check pockets J and H of cable 1W2 for a
short to ground.

Change 2 3-113
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

TURRET ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - Continued

77. CB5, CUPOLA POWER INOPERATIVE - Continued.

a. If J is shorted, notify support maintenance that cupola junction box
or cable 1W2 is shorted.
b. If pin H is shorted, proceed to step 9.
c. If neither pin is shorted, replace networks box (para 5-53).
Step 9. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1 W2 from power relay and circuit breaker box. Check
pocket A of J3 on power relay and circuit breaker box for a short to ground.
a. If yes, replace turret power relay and circuit breaker box (para 5-
38).
b. If no, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is shorted.
78. CB6, COMPUTER INOPERATIVE. (See figures 3-19, 3-30, and FO-1.
Step 1. Connect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (d) (to connector J2 of cable 1W2). Disconnect con
nector P13 of cable 1W2 from gunner's control unit: Lamp 3 should come on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 3.
b. If no, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) . Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W2 from
power relay box (fig FO-1). Check pin F of PI for short to ground.
a. If short exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is
defective.
b. If short does not exist, replace power relay and circuit breaker box
(para 5-38).
Step 3. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) . Check cables 3W1, 3W2 and 3W3 for shorts
using Cable Test Set (CTS), (para 3-6).
a. if cable is shorted, replace cable.
b. If cable is not shorted, replace computer system units, one at a
time, until defect is corrected. Last unit replaced is defective:
Gunner's Control Unit, Computer, Ammo Select Units, Wind Sensor
Unit, Mast and EMI Filter, Rate Tachometer, Cant Unit, Reticle
Projector Unit (para 15-75, 15-73, 15-78, 15-88, 15-86, 15-91, 15-
82, 15-84 and 15-95, respectively).
79. CB7, ELEV/TRAV POWER NOT AVAILABLE. (See figures 3-19, 3-21 and FO-1.)
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P22
of cable 1W2 from networks box. Place MASTER BATTERY and ELEV/TRAV
POWER switches in ON positions. ELEV/TRAV POWER indicator light should
come on and stay on. Connect P22 of 1W3 to networks box after test.
a. If yes, proceed to step 3.
b. If no, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Place MASTER BATTERY and ELEV/TRAV POWER switches in OFF position.
Disconnect connector P10 of cable 1W2 from gunner's control box (fig FO-1).
Check socket E of P10 for short to ground.
a. If short exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is
defective.*

3-114 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

ALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

TURRET ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - Continued

CB7, ELEV/TRAV POWER NOT AVAILABLE - Continued.

b. If short does not exist, repair gunner's control box (para 5-34).
Step 3. Disconnect connector P23 and P24 of cable 1W2 from networks box. Place
MASTER BATTERY and ELEV/TRAV POWER switches in ON positions.
ELEV/TRAV POWER indicator light should come on and stay on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 4.
b. If no, replace networks box (para 5-53).
Step 4. Check following pins of connector P23 of cable 1W2 for a short to ground.
Pins P, R, F, E, H and G. No short should be present.
NOTE
Diodes in the electrical circuits can give a faulty indication of a short. When a
short is indicated, always reverse the multimeter test leads and repeat the
check. A short is present when both readings are the same and less than 1
ohm.
a. If pin P is shorted, proceed to step 5.
b. If pin R is shorted, proceed to step 8.
c. If pin F is shorted, proceed to step 9.
d. If pin E is shorted, proceed to step 10.
e. If pin H is shorted, proceed to step 12.
f. If pin G is shorted, proceedto step 16.
Step 5. Remove connector PI of cable 1W3 from stab controller. Check pin P of
connector 1W2P23 for a short to ground.
a. If yes, proceed to step 6.
b. If no, replace stab controller (para 5-57).
Step 6. Remove connector J2 of cable 1W3 from EMI filter. Check pin P of connector
1W2P23 for a short to ground.
a. If yes, proceed to step 7.
b. If no, notify support maintenance, that cable 1W3 is shorted.
Step 7. Remove connector Pll of cable 1W2 from EMI filter. Check pin R of
connector Jl onEMI filter for a short to ground.
a. If yes, replace EMI filter for a short to ground.
b. If no, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is shorted.
Step 8. Connect P23 of cable 1W2 to networks box. Remove connector P12 of cable
1W2 from deck clearance valve. Check for a short between socket of P12 and
ground.
a. If yes, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is shorted.
b. If no, replace deck clearance valve solenoid (para 10-11).
Step 9. Remove connectors P27 and P28 of cable 1W2 from elevation interference
switch. Remove connectors P6 and Jl of cable 1W2 from traverse
interference switch. Check Jl or J2 at elevation interference switch for a
short to ground. Repeat for Jl or PI of traverse interference switch.
a. If yes, at elevation interference switch, replace the switch (para 5-
18).
b. If yes, at traverse interference switch, repair/replace the switch
(para 5-14).
c. If no, at both switches, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2
is shorted.
3-115
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

TURRET ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - Continued

79. CB7, ELEV/TRAV POWER NOT AVAILABLE - Continued.

Step 10. Remove connector P3 of 1W2 from hydraulic pressure switch. Check pin B of
Jl on pressure switch for a short to ground.
a. If yes, replace pressure switch (para 10-67).
b. If no, proceed to step 11.
Step 11. Remove connector PI of cable 1W2 from turret power relay and circuit
breaker box. Check for a short to ground from socket J of J3 on box.
a. If yes, replace turret power relay and circuit breaker box (para 5-
38).
b. If no, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is shorted.
Step 12. Remove connector P4 of 1W3 from Jl of stab control selector unit. Check pin
H of connector 1W2P23 for a short to ground.
a. If yes, proceed to step 15.
b. If no, proceed to step 13.
Step 13. Check pin U of connector 1W3P4 for a short to ground.
a. If yes, proceed to step 14.
b. If no, replace stab control selector (para 545).

Step 14. Connect P4 of 1W3 to Jl of stab control selector. Disconnect P7 of 1W3

at gunner's handle. Check pin P of P7 for a short to ground.
a. If yes, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is defective.
b. If no, replace hydraulic power valve in gunner's control assembly
(para 10-38).
Step 15. Remove connector J2 of 1W3 and Pll of 1W2 from EMI filter. Check pin P of
Jl on EMI filter for a short to ground.
a. If yes, replace EMI filter (para 5-81).
b. If no, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 or 1W3 is
defective.
Step 16. Disconnect connector P4 of cable 1W3 from Jl of stab control selector. Cheek
pin G of 1W2P23 for a short to ground.
a. If yes, proceed to step 17.
b. If no, proceed to step 19.
Step 17. Disconnect Pll of 1W2 and J2 of 1W3 from Jl and PI of EMI filter. Check pfa
Jl-D on EMI filter for a short to ground.
a. If yes, replace EMI filter (para 5-81).
b. If no, proceed to step 18.
Step 18. Connect J2 of 1W3 to PI of EMI filter. Disconnect P7 of 1W3 from Jl of
gunner's handles. Check sockets D and E of connector 1W3P7 for a short to
ground.
a. If yes, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is defective.
b. If no, replace gunner's control assembly (para 10-38).
Step 19. Check socket P of connector 1W3P4 for a short to ground.
a. If yes, proceed to step 20.
b. If no, replace stab control selector (para 5-45).
Step 20. Disconnect connector J22 of 1W2 from networks box. Check socket P of cable]
1W3 for a short to ground.
a. If yes, proceed to step 21.
3-116 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

LFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

TURRET ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - Continued

CB7, ELEV/TRAV POWER NOT AVAILABLE - Continued.

b. If no, proceed to step 23.
Step 21. Disconnect J2 of 1W3 and Pll of 1W2 from EMI filter. Check pin E of Jl on
EMI filter for a short to ground.
a. If yes, replace EMI filter (para 5-81).
b. If no, proceed to step 22.
Step 22. Disconnect P21 of 1W2 from commander's handle. Check pin D of Jl on
handles for a short to ground.
a. If yes, replace commander's handle (para 10-35).
b. If no, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 or 1W3 is
defective.
Step 23. Check pin R of Jl at networks box for a short to ground.
a. If yes, replace networks box (para 5-53).
b. If no, proceed to step 24.
Step 24. Disconnect P20 of cable 1W2 at magnetic brake. Check pin A of Jl on brake
for a short to ground.
a. If yes, notify support maintenance that megnetic brake is shorted.
b. If no, proceed to step 25.
Step 25. Disconnect P7 of 1W2 at elevation shutoff valve. Check pin of P7 at valve for
short to ground.
a. If yes, replace elevation shutoff valve solenoid (para 10-64).
b. If no, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is shorted.
CB9, FIRING CIRCUITRY INOPERATIVE - MAIN GUN AND 7.62-MM MACHINE GUN. (See
figures 3-19, 3-22, 3-26 and FO-1.).
Step 1. Verify that MASTER BATTERY switch is in OFF position. Verify that
TESTS is connected to connector J2 of 1W2. Disconnect connector P7 of
cable 1W3 from gunner's control assembly. Place MASTER BATTERY
switch in ON position. Lamp 29 should come on and stay on.
a. If yes, replace gunner's control assembly (para 10-38).
b. If no, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector
J2 of cable 1W3 from PI of EMI filter. Place MASTER BATTERY switch
in ON position. Lamp 29 should come on and stay on.
a. If yes, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is defective.
b. If no, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector Pll
of cable 1W2 from Jl of EMI filter. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON
position. Lamp 29 should come on and stay on.
a. If yes, replace EMI filter (para 5-81).
b. If no, proceed to step 4.
Step 4. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P21
of cable 1W2 from connector Jl of commander's handle. Place MASTER
BATTERY switch in ON position. Lamp 29 should come on and stay on.
a. If yes, replace commander's handle (para 10-35).
b. If no, proceed to step 5.
Step 5. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P23
of cable 1W2 from J2 of networks box. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in

Change 2 3-117
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

TURRET ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - Continued

80. CB9, FIRING CIRCUITRY INOPERATIVE - MAIN GUN AND 7.62-MM MACHINE GUN •
Continued.
ON position. Lamp 29 should come on and stay on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 6.
b. If no, proceed to step 7.
Step 6. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Remove connector P10 oi
cable 1W2 from Jl of gunner's control box. Check pin A of Jl for a short t:
ground.
a. If yes, repair/replace gunner's control box (para 5-30).
b. If no, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is defective.
Step 7. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P9ol
cable 1W2 from gun firing relay. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON
position. Lamp 29 should come op and stay on.
a. If yes, replace gun firing relay (para 5-78).
b. If no, proceed to step 8.
Step 8. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connectors
I P22 and P24 of cable 1W2 from Jl and J3 of networks box. Check pin A
of Jl for a short to ground.
a. If yes, replace networks box (para 5-53).
b. If no, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is defective.
81. CB10, COMMANDER'S, GUNNER'S, AND LOADER'S AIR HEATERS FAIL TO OPERATE.
(See figures 3-19, 3-26, 3-28 and FO-1.)
| Stepl. Connect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (d) (to connector J2 of cable 1W2). Disconnect ca
nector P15 of cable 1W2 from commander's CBR unit. The TESTS power ON lamp
should come on.
■ a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and replace commander's
heater unit (para 17-2a).
b. If no, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P4 of
cable 1W2 from gunner's CBR unit. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in 01
position. Power ON lamp should come on.
■ a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and replace gunner's hea:e
unit (para 17-26).
b. If no, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector PI
of cable 1W2 from loader's CBR heater unit. Place MASTER BATTERY switi
in ON position. The TESTS power ON lamp should come on.
I a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (e) and replace loader's heafl
unit (para 17-2c).
b. If no, proceed to step 4.
| Step 4. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (e) . Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W2 fhl
turret power relay and circuit breaker box. Check pins L, M, and N of PI for short a
ground.
a. If short exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 d
defective.
b. If short does not exist, replace power relay and circuit breaker t> I
(para 5-38).

3-118 Change 2

. -J
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

LFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION
TURRET ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - Continued
CB11, LIGHTING INOPERATIVE. (See figures 3-19, 3-29 and FO-1.)
Step 1. Verify that TESTS is connected to connector J2 of cable 1W2. Verify that I
MASTER BATTERY switch is in OFF position. If disconnected, reconnect I
connector P22 of cable 1W2 to networks box. Disconnect P24 cable 1W2
from networks box. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position.
Lamp 32 should come on and stay on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 2.
b. If no, proceed to step 15.
Step 2. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) Check pin D of connector P24 for short to |
ground.
a. If short exists, proceed to step 3.
b. If short does not exist, proceed to step 5.
Step 3. Disconnect connector PI from gunner's domelight assembly. Recheck pin D of
P24 for short to ground.
a. If short exists, proceed to step 4.
b. If short does not exist, repair gunner's domelight assembly (para 5-
6).
Step 4. Disconnect connector P25 from gunner's domelight variable resistor. Recheck pin D of
connector P24 for short to ground.
a. If short exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is
defective.
b. If short does not exist, replace gunner's domelight variable resistor (para
5-8).
Step 5. Check pin E of connector P24 for short to ground.
d. If short exists, proceed to step 6.
b. If short does not exist, proceed to step 8.
Step 6. Disconnect connector PI from main gun domelight assembly. Recheck pin E of
connector P24 for short to ground.
a. If short exists, proceed to step 7.
b. If short does not exist, repair main gun domelight assembly (para 5-
6).
Step 7. Disconnect connector P29 of cable 1W2 from main gun domelight variable resistor.
Recheck pin E of connector P24 (cable 1W2) for short to ground.
a. If short exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is
defective.
b. If short does not exist, replace main gun domelight variable resistor (para
5-8).
Step 8. Check pin C of connector P24 for short to ground.
a. If short exists, proceed to step 9.
b. If short does not exist, proceed to step 11.
Step 9. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W2 from loader's domelight assembly.
Recheck pin C of connector P24 for short to ground.
a. If short exists, proceed to step 10.
b. If short does not exist, repair loader's domelight assembly (para 5-
6).
Step 10. Disconnect connector P17 of cable 1W2 from loader's domelight variable resistor.
Recheck pin C of connector P24 for short to ground.
a. If short exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is
defective.

Change 2 3-119
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

TURRET ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - Continued

82. CB11, LIGHTING INOPERATIVE - Continued.

b. If short does not exist, replace loader's domelight variable resistor (pan
8).
Step 11. Check pin B of connector P24 for short to ground.
a. If short exists, proceed to step 12.
b. If short does not exist, proceed to step 13.
Step 12. Disconnect connector P14 of cable 1W2 from azimuth indicator. Recheck pin
B of connector P24 for short to ground.
a. If short exists, notify support maintenance that, cable 1W2 is
defective.
b. If short does not exist, replace azimuth indicator (para 15-67).
Step 13. Remove connectors from elevation quadrant control and telescope reticle
control. Check pin A of connector P24 (cable 1W2) for short to ground.
a. If- short exists, notify support maintenance that cabling between
networks box and elevation quadrant/telescope reticle control
(1W6) is defective.
b. If short does not exist, proceed to step 14.
Step 14. Reconnect elevation quadrant. Recheck pin A of connector P24 for short to
ground.
a. if short exists, replace elevation quadrant light source control (pari
15-19).
b. If short does not exist, replace the telescope light source control
(para 15-58).
Step 15. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P22
of cable 1W2 from networks box. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OH
position. Lamp 32 should come on and stay on.
a. If yes, disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc(4) (e) and replace networks be;
(para 5-53).
b. If no, disconnect TESTS per para 3-1 c (4) (e) and proceed to step 16.
Step 16. Connect connector P22 of cable 1W2 to Jl on networks box. Disconnect
connector PI of cable 1W2 from turret power relay box. Check pin D o:
connector PI for a short to ground.
a. If present, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is defective.
b. If no, replace turret power relay and circuit breaker box (para 5-
38).
83. POWER PACK BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILS TO REMAIN ON. (See figures
3-19, 3-21 and FO-1.)
Step 1. Disconnect connector P24 of cable 1W2 from networks box. Place the POWEB
PACK BLOWER MOTOR circuit breaker in ON position.
a. If circuit breaker remains on, proceed to step 2.
b. ' If circuit breaker does not remain on, replace networks box (para V
53).
Step 2. Reconnect connector P24 to networks box. Disconnect connector P5 of cable
1W2 from the power pack blower. Place the POWER PACK BLOWER MOTOR
circuit breaker in ON position.
a. If circuit breaker remains on, replace the power pack blower
assembly (para 5-25).

3-120 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

TURRET ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - Continued

13. POWER PACK BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILS TO REMAIN ON - Continued.
b.If circuit breaker does not remain on, notify support maintenance
that cable 1W2 is defective.
J4. STAB ELECTRONICS CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILS TO REMAIN ON. (See figures 3-19, 3-20
and FO-1.)
Step 1. Disconnect connector P24 of cable 1W2 from networks box. Place the STAB
ELECTRONICS circuit breaker in ON position.
a. If circuit breaker remains on, proceed to step 2.
b. If circuit breaker does not remain on, replace networks box (para 5-
53).
Step 2. Disconnect connector PI of cable 1W3 from the controller unit. Reconnect
connector P24 to networks box. Place the STAB ELECTRONICS circuit
breaker in ON position.
a. If circuit breaker remains on, replace the controller unit (para 5-
57).
b. If circuit breaker does not remain on, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Disconnect connector P3 of cable 1W3 from the rate sensor. Reconnect
connector PI to the controller unit. Place the STAB ELECTRONICS circuit
breaker in ON position.
a. If circuit breaker remains on, proceed to step 4.
b. If circuit breaker does not remain on, proceed to step 5.
Step 4. Check socket H of connector P3 for short to ground.
a. If short exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is
defective.
b. If short does not exist, replace rate sensor (para 5-62).
Step 5. Disconnect connectors J2 of cable 1W3 and Pll of cable 1W2 from EMI filter
assembly. Check pin L of EMI filter for a short to ground.
a. If yes, replace EMI filter assembly (para 5-81).
b. If no, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 or 1W3 is
defective*
85. PREMATURE FIRING OF MAIN GUN. (See figures 3-19, 3-26 and FO-1).
Step 1. Connect TESTS per para 3-lc (4) (d) (to connector J2 of cable 1W2). Lamp 21) should
not be on.
a. If it is on, disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc (4) (e) and replace firing relay
box (para 5-78).
b. If it is off, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc (4) (e) . Disconnect cable 1W6 (circuits 113B and 113C)
from loader's safety switch. Check continuity at switch pin connectors (in SAFE posi
tion).
a. If continuity exists, replace loader's safety switch (para 5-66).
b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Verify that MASTER BATTERY switch is in OFF position. Disconnect
connector P21 of cable 1W2 from commander's control assembly. Check
continuity between pins C and E of Jl without depressing trigger.
o. If continuity exists, replace commander's control assembly (para
10-35).
b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 4.

Change 2 3-121
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

TURRET ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - Continued

85. PREMATURE FIRING OF MAIN GUN - Continued.

Step 4. Disconnect connector J2 of cable 1W3 from EMI filter assembly. Check continuity
between pins M and N of J2 without depressing manual elevation control firing switch.
a. If continuity exists, replace manual elevation control firing switch (pan 8-
9).
b. If continuity does not exist, proceed to step 5.
Step 5. Check continuity between pins A and B of connector J2 without depressing
gunner's trigger.
a. If continuity exists, replace defective trigger switch in gunner's
control assembly (para 10-41).
b. If continuity does not exist, replace EMI filter assembly (para 5-
81).
86. PREMATURE FIRING OF 7.62-MM MACHINE GUN. (See figures 3-19, 3-26 and FO-1.)
Connect TESTS per para 3-lc (4) (d)< (to connector J2 of cable 1W2). Check lamp 21.
a. If lamp 21 is on, disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc (4) (e) and replace
firing relay box (para 5-78).
b. If lamp 21 is not on, disconnect TESTS per para 3-lc (4) (e) and
proceed to malfunction 85, step 3.
87. PREMATURE FIRING OF .50 CALIBER MACHINE GUN. (See figures 3-19, 3-27 and FO-1.)
Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connectors J3 and P3 of
cable 1W13 from trigger switch. Check continuity at trigger pin and socket connectors
without depressing trigger.
a. If continuity exists, replace trigger switch (para 9-5).
b. If continuity does not exist, replace commander's panel (para 5-49).
CUPOLA CONTROL SYSTEM
88. EXCESSIVE BACKLASH IN AZIMUTH DRIVE.
Adjust azimuth gearbox (para 9-8b). If adjustment fails, replace azimuth gearbox (para
9-8a).
89. AZIMUTH DRIVE FAILS TO OPERATE.
Inspect for obstructions or damage to azimuth gearbox.
a. If obstruction exists, clear and recheck azimuth drive operation.
b. If damage exists, replace azimuth gearbox (para 9-8a).
c. Adjust azimuth gearbox (para 9-8b). If azimuth drive still fails to
operate, replace azimuth gearbox (para 9-8a).
90. AZIMUTH LOCK ASSEMBLY FAILS TO OPERATE OR HAS EXCESSIVE BACKLASH.
Inspect azimuth lock assembly for damage or improper installation.
a. If damage or improper installation exists, repair and reinstall
azimuth lock assembly (para 9-11).
b. If damage or improper installation does not exist, replace azimutfr
lock assembly (para 9-11).
91. EXCESSIVE BACKLASH OR RESISTANCE IN CRADLE ELEVATION DRIVE OR ELEVATION
DRIVE FAILS TO OPERATE.
Step 1. Inspect elevation screw jack assembly for damage.
o. If damage exists, replace elevation screw jack assembly (paraM)-
b. If damage does not exist, proceed to step 2.

3-122 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

CUPOLA CONTROL SYSTEM - Continued

91. EXCESSIVE BACKLASH OR RESISTANCE IN CRADLE ELEVATION DRIVE OR ELEVATION
DRIVE FAILS TO OPERATE. - Continued
Step 2. Check operation of cradle elevatioh drive.
a. If excessive backlash exists, replace elevation screw jack assembly
(para 9-4).
b. If excessive backlash does not exist, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Adjust equilbrator springs (para 14-11) and recheck operation of cradle
elevation drive. If excessive resistance still exists in operation of cradle,
replace elevation screw jack assembly (para 9-4).

SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL SYSTEMS

(on tanks equipped with M35E1 periscope)

92. ELEVATION QUADRANT LIGHT OR TELESCOPE RETICLE INOPERATIVE. (See figures 3-

19, 3-29 and FO-1.)
Step 1. Check operation of quadrant light source control and telescope light source
controL
a. If either operates normally, proceed to step 2.
b. If neither operates normally, proceed to step 3.
Step 2. Perform a continuity check on the branch of cable 1W6 going to the defective
component.
a. If continuity is present, replace elevation quadrant light source
control (para 15-19) or telescope light source control (para 15-58),
as applicable.
b. If continuity is not present, replace cable 1W6.
Step 3. Perform a continuity check between 1W2P24-A and 1W6 connector at either
light source control.
a. If present, replace networks box (para 5-53).
b. If not present, proceed to step 4.
Step 4. Perform a continuity check between 1W2P24-A and 1W2P8-C.
a. If present, notify support maintenance that harness 1W6 is
defective.
b. If not present, notify support maintenance that harness 1W2 is
defective.
93. COMMANDER HAS NO RETICLE ILLUMINATION (PASSIVE OR DAY). (See figures 3-19, 3-
27 and FO-1.)
Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Place CUPOLA POWER switch on
networks box in ON position. POWER ON lamp on commander's panel should come on.
a. If yes, notify support maintenance that cable 1W13 is defective.
b. If no, proceed to malfunction 56, step 2.
94. COMMANDER'S PASSIVE PERISCOPE RETICLE INOPERATIVE. (See figures 3-19, 3-27
and FO-1.)
Stepl. Replace reticle bulb. Place MASTER BATTERY and CUPOLA POWER
switches in ON position. Turn RETICLE control on passive elbow maximum
clockwise. Set POWER switch on passive elbow to ON.
a. If reticle illuminates, discard defective bulb.

3-123
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM - Continued

94. COMMANDER'S PASSIVE PERISCOPE RETICLE INOPERATIVE - Continued.

u. If reticle does not illuminate, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Disconnect connectors of 1W14 at periscope. Check for 24 vdc on pin
connector of 1W14.
o. If present, replace passive elbow (para 15-27).
b. If not present, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Disconnect cable 1W14 from cable 1W15. Check for 24 vdc on connector
1W15-C (socket).
a. If present, notify support maintenance that cable 1W14 is defec
tive.
b. If not present, proceed to step 4.
Step 4. Disconnect cable 1W15 from cable 1W13-J2. Check for 24 vdc on pin
connector of J2.
a. If present, notify support maintenance that cable 1W15 is defec
tive.
b. If not present, notify support maintenance that cable 1W13 is
defective.
95. COMMANDER'S DAYLIGHT PERISCOPE RETICLE INOPERATIVE. (See figures 3-19, 3-27
and FO-1.)
Disconnect cable 1W13-J1 from light source control. Check for 24 volts at cable
1W13J1 pin connector.
a. If present, replace light source control (para 15-35).
b. If not present, notify support maintenance that cable 1W13 is
defective.
96. GUNNER'S PASSIVE PERISCOPE RETICLE INOPERATIVE (DAYLIGHT RETICLE OK).
(See figures 3-19, 3-29 and FO-1.)
Step 1. Replace night viewing reticle lamp. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON
position. Place computer POWER switch on gunner's control unit in ON
position. Check passive reticle operation.
a. If reticle operates, discard defective bulb.
b. If reticle does not operate, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Place POWER switch on gunner's control unit in OFF position. Remove passive
elbow from periscope (para 15-38). Place computer POWER switch in ON
position. Check the two electrical interface pins on the reticle projector for
24 vdc.
a. If 24 vdc is present, replace passive elbow (para 15-39).
b. If 24 vdc is not present, replace the reticle projector (para 15-95).
97. GUNNER'S DAYLIGHT AND NIGHT RETICLES INOPERATIVE.
Check cable 3W3 using cable test set (para 3-6).
a. If defective, replace cable.
b. If not defective, replace reticle projector (para 15-95).
98. EITHER GUNNER'S RETICLE INOPERATIVE.
Replace associated reticle bulb and check operation.
a. If operative, return to service.
b. . If not operative, replace reticle projector (para 15-95).

3-124
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

ALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM - Continued

. AZIMUTH INDICATOR LAMP INOPERATIVE. (See figures 3-19, 3-29 and FO-1.)
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Check operation of gunner's
domelight.
a. If domelight operates, proceed to step 2.
b. If domelight does not operate, proceed to malfunction 63.
Step 2. Place MASTER BATTERY switch to OFF position. Disconnect connector P14
of cable 1W2 from azimuth indicator. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON
position. Check for 24 vdc at socket connector PI 4 to ground.
a. If 24 vdc is present, replace azimuth indicator (para 15-67).
b. If 24 vdc is not present, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P24
of cable 1W2 from networks box. Check continuity between pin B of connector
P24 and socket connector P14.
a. If continuity exists, replace networks box (para 5-53).
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W2 is defective*
0. COMMANDER'S OR GUNNER'S LEAD INOPERATIVE. (See figures 3-19, 3-25 and FO-1.)
Step 1. Determine whether both commander's and gunner's switches are inoperative (com
puter system lead circuits test in fire control system tests, (para 2-23). Also deter
mine if commander's control will introduce lead at gunner's station and vice ver
sa. Check in both power and stab mode.
a. If lead circuits work in power mode but not stab mode, proceed to
malfunction 21.
b. If lead circuits work in stab mode but not power mode, replace rate
tachometer (para 15-82).
c. If one gunner's thumb switch is inoperative, notify support main
tenance.
d. If one gunner's palm switch is inoperative, replace palm switch
(para 10-41).
e. If lead cannot be obtained at either station using either gunner's or
commander's controls in power or stab mode, proceed to step 2.
f. If lead can be obtained at gunner's station using either gunner's or
commander's controls in both power and stab mode, but not at
commander's station, replace R/T (para 15-102) and electronics
unit (para 15-105) followed by computer (para 15-73) if repairs are
not effected.
g. If lead can be obtained at commander's station, in the laser rangefinder,
using gunner's or commander's controls in both power and stab mode,
but not at gunner's station, replace reticle projector (para 15-95) or
(with tanks equipped with TTS) replace gunner's display (para 15-111)
followed by computer (para 15-73) if repairs are not effected.
h. If lead can be obtained at gunner's and commander's station using
gunner's controls but cannot be obtained using commander's
controls, proceed to step 7.
i. If lead can be obtained at gunner's and commander's station using
commander's controls but cannot be obtained using gunner's
controls, proceed to step 11.

Change 2 3-125
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM - Continued

100. COMMANDER'S OR GUNNER'S LEAD INOPERATIVE - Continued.

Step 2. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P6of
cable 3W2 from connector Jl of cable 1W3 (fire control interface). Place
MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Check socket B of connector
1W3J1 for +24 vdc while trying to input lead into the system using gunner's
controls. It should be present.
a. If yes, proceed to step 3.
b. If no, proceed to step 6.
Step 3. Check cable 3W2 using cable test set (para 3-6).
a. If cable checks good, proceed to step 4.
b. If cable checks bad, replace cable.
Step 4. Select HEP ammo on ASU. Set RANGE METERS X100 dial to 30. Set
MANUAL/ RANGEFINDER switch to MANUAL. Set CROSSW1ND
AUTO/MANUAL switch to MANUAL. Vary CROSSWIND MPH control while
observing gunner's reticle.
a. If reticle moves in response to dial movement, replace rate
tachometer (para 15-82) followed by computer (para 15-73) if
repair is not effected.
b. If reticle does not move, proceed to step 5.
Step 5. Perform cant unit check of ballistics computer system solutions test (para 2-22).
Perform only enough steps to determine proper motion of gunner's reticle.
a. If reticle moves properly, replace computer (para 15-73).
b. If reticle does not move properly, replace cant unit (para 15-84)
followed by computer (para 15-73) if repairs are not effected.
Step 6. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF position. Actuate commander's
palm switch and listen for click of override solenoid.
a. If yes, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is defective.
b. If no, refer to malfunction 16.
Step 7. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Connect TESTS to
connector J2 of cable 1W2. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position.
Depress commander's palm and thumb switches. Lamp 17 should come on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 8.
b. If no, proceed to step 9.
Step 8. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector Pll
of cable 1W2 and connector J2 of cable 1W3 for EMI filter. Check continuity
from pin S of Jl to socket S of PI on EMI filter.
a. If yes, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is defective.
b. If no, replace EMI filter (para 5-81).
Step 9. Depress commander's palm and thumb switches. Lamp 18 should come on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 10.
b. If no. replace commander's handle (para 10-35).
Step 10. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector
P23 of cable 1W2 from J2 and connector P22 of cable 1W2 from Jl at
networks box. Check continuity between socket X of J2 and pin P of Jl on
networks box. Reverse polarity of probes. Resistance should be very high
one way and very low the other.
a. If yes, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is defective.
b. If no, replace networks box (para 5-53).
3-126 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

LFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM - Continued

COMMANDER'S OR GUNNER'S LEAD INOPERATIVE - Continued.

Step 11. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Connect TESTS to
connector J2 of cable 1W2. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position.
Lamp 19 should come on.
a. If yes, proceed to step 13.
b. If no, proceed to step 12.
Step 12. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P22
of cable 1W2 from connector Jl on networks box. Disconnect P24 of cable
1W2 from connector J3 on networks box. Check continuity between socket G
of J3 and Pin F of Jl on networks box. Reverse polarity of probes.
Resistance should be very high one way and very low the other way.
a. If yes, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is defective.
b. If no, replace networks box (para 5-53).
Step 13. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector J2 of
cable 1W3 from connector PI on EMI filter. Check continuity from pin J of Jl
and socket J of PI on EMI filter.
a. If yes, proceed to step 14.
b. If no, replace EMI filter (para 5-81).
Step 14. Disconnect connector P7 of cable 1W3 from connector Jl on gunner's control.
Check continuity between pin J of J2 and socket J of P7 on cable 1W3. Also
check continuity between pin S of J2 and socket S of P7 on cable 1W3.
a. If both yes, proceed to step 15.
b. If either no, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is
defective.
Step 15. Check continuity between pin D and pin E of connector Jl on gunner's
control.
a. If no, adjust palm switches (para 10-41).
b. If yes, notify support maintenance that gunner's control module is
defective.
101. LRF AND MANUAL RANGE ACCURACY TEST FAILURE.

Step 1. MIL-counter reading with MANUAL/RANGEFINDER switch in RANGE-

FINDER should be within the test limits specified for each range (step 3 of
test).
a. If MIL-counter does not move during range changes, proceed to
step 2.
b. If MIL-counter moves, but is incorrect for each range, replace
computer (para 15-73) followed by R/T and EU (paras 15-102 and
105) if necessary.
c. If MIL-counter moves, but is incorrect for some ranges, replace
R/T and EU (para 15-102 and 105).
d. If MIL-counter is correct for each range, proceed to step 4.
Step 2. With MANUAL/RANGEFINDER switch in RANGEFINDER, rotate MANUAL
RANGE dial.

Change 4 3-126.1
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM - CONTINUED

a. 11 MiL-counter moves, replace gunner's control unit (para 15-73).
b. If MIL-counter does not move, replace gunner's control unit (para
I 15-75).
Step 3. Check cables 3W1 and 3W3 with cable test set (para 3-6).
a. If cables check good, replace computer (para 15-73) followed by
R/T and EU (paras 15-102 and 105) if necessary.
b. If cable(s) check bad, replace defective cable(s).
Step 4. The difference between MIL-counter readings when switching from RANGE-
FINDER to MANUAL should be within +1.5 mils for each range selected,
a. If yes, proceed with remainder of system tests in para 2-22.
6. If no, replace gunner's control unit (para 15-75).

102. LASER WILL NOT RANGE FROM GUNNER'S THUMB SWITCHES BUT RANGES FROM
R/T CONTROL PANEL
Step 1. Place computer POWER and MASTER BATTERY switches in OFF positions.
Remove connector P6 of cable 3W2 from connector Jl of cable 1W3. Connect
I multimeter between socket Jl-K of cable 1W3 and ground. Place computer
POWER, MASTER BATTERY and ELEV/TRAV POWER switches in ON posi
tion. Depress and hold either gunner's palm switch and then momentarily depress
either thumb switch. Multimeter should indicate 5.0 to 10.5 vdc when thumb switch
is depressed. When both palm switches are released, the voltage should be 0 to
0.7 vdc. Pressing either thumb switch without use of palm switches should not
result in an output voltage.
a. If proper voltages are present from both thumb switches, proceed
to step 2.
b. If 5.0 to 10.5 vdc is not present from either thumb switch, proceed
to step 5.
c. If proper voltages are present for only one thumb switch, replace
gunner's control assembly (para 10-38).

3-126.2 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

FUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM - Continued

LASER WILL NOT RANGE FROM GUNNER'S THUMB SWITCHES BUT RANGES FROM R/T
CONTROL PANEL - Continued.
Step 2. Perform test of computer system cable 3W2 using cable test set (para 3-6).
a. If cable is good, proceed to step 3.
b. If cable is defective, replace cable 3W2.
Step 3. Perform test of computer system cable 3W3 (para 3-6).
a. If cable is good, proceed to step 4.
b. If cable is defective, replace cable 3W3.
Step 4. Connect 3W3P1 to computer. Connect multimeter between 3W3P6-B and
ground. Press and hold either palm switch and then momentarily depress either thumb
switch. Multimeter should indicate approximately 15 vdc.
a. If present, replace R/T (para 15-102) and EU (para 15-105).
b. If not present, replace computer unit (para 15-73).
Step 5. Disconnect 1W3P7 from Jl at gunner's handles. Check continuity between
P7-K and Jl-K of 1W3 cable.
a. If continuity is not present, notify support maintenance that cable
1 W3 is defective.
b. If continuity is present, replace gunner's control handle switches (para
10-41).
Step 6. Check continuity between pin D and pin E of connector Jl on gunner's
controL
a. If continuity is not present, adjust palm switches (para 10-41).
b. If continuity is present, notify support maintenance that gunner's
control module is defective.
GUNNER'S AND/OR COMMANDER'S LRF RETICLE OSCILLATES WITH STAB SYSTEM
TURNED OFF. (See figure FO-1)
Step 1. Turn MASTER BATTERY and COMPUTER POWER switches ON and observe
both reticles.
a. If both reticles oscillate, proceed to step 2.
b. If only gunner's reticle oscillates, proceed to step 3.
c. If only commander's LRF reticle oscillates, proceed to step 4.
Step 2. Checkout computer cables 3W2 and 3W3 using the cable test set (para 3-6).
a. If all tests passed, replace the computer unit (para 15-73).
b. If one or more tests not passed, replace the defective cable (para
4-15).
Step 3. Checkout cable 3W3 using the cable test set (para 3-6).
a. If all tests passed, replace the reticle projector unit (para 15-95).
b. If one or more tests not passed, replace the 3W3 cable.
Step 4. Checkout cables 3W3 and 3W33 using the cable test set (para 3-6).
a. If all tests passed, replace computer (para 15-73). Repeat step 1
and if malfunction is still present, replace the R/T (para 15-102)
and EU (para 15-105).
b. If all tests not passed, replace defective cable (para 15-99 and 15-107).

Change 2 3-127
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM - Continued

104. RETICLE MOVEMENT AT GUNNER'S OR COMMANDER'S STATION WHEN CROSSWIND
SWITCH IS IN AUTO POSITION.
Replace EMI filter connector (para 15-86).
\ 105. SUPERELEVATION INCORRECT, OSCILLATION, OR EXCESSIVE ELEVATION ERROR
DURING COMPUTER SYSTEM BASIC SOLUTION TESTS.
Step 1. Set LAMP/NORMAL/SYSTEM switch on gunner's control unit to SYSTEM. The
OK indicator should illuminate.
a. If OR illuminates, proceed to step 2.

3-128 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

•UNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM - Continued

SUPERELEVATION INCORRECT, OSCILLATION, OR EXCESSIVE ELEVATION I
ERROR DURING COMPUTER SYSTEM BASIC SOLUTION TESTS.-Continued.
b. If any other SENSOR FAIL or SELF TEST indicators illuminate,
replace the indicated components.
Step 2. Set controls as follow:

CONTROL POSITION

MODE TEST
MASTER BATTERY ON
GCU POWER ON
ALTITUDE 0
AIR TEMP S
CROSSWIND MPH 0
BORESIGHT/NORMAL NORMAL
AZ ZEROING (4) 0
EL ZEROING (4) 0
AZ ZERO 0
EL ZERO 0
MANUAL/RANGEFINDER RANGEFINDER
REMAINING TUBE LIFE NEW
CROSSWIND AUTO/MANUAL MANUAL
AMMO (2) TABLE 2-4

Step 3. Using the LRF RANGE pushbutton, select the ranges shown in table 2-4. For
each range, compare the reading of the output unit MIL counter with that
specified for the ammo in use. Perform only enough steps for each ammo go
determine counter operation. The counter should indicate the specified
number of mils of elevation.
o. If counter reading is correct, proceed to step 4.
6. If counter reading oscillates, is always incorrect, or movement is slug- |
gish, proceed to step 5.
c. If counter reading is incorrect for only one ammo type, replace
computer (para 15-73).
Step 4. Bleed hydraulic system (para 2-10a) and perform ballistic computer system solutions
test (para 2-22). Superelevation should be correct.
a. If correct, return vehicle to service.
b. If incorrect, replace superelevation actuator (para 10-43).
Step 5. Replace computer and repeat step 1. Counter reading should be correct.
a. If correct, return vehicle to service.
b. If incorrect, replace output unit (para 15-93).
EXCESSIVE DEFLECTION ERROR DURING COMPUTER SYSTEM SOLUTION TESTS.

Step 1. Set LAMP/NORMAL/SYSTEM switch on gunner's control unit to SYSTEM. The

OK indicator should illuminate.
a. If OK illuminates, proceed to step 2.

Change 2 3-129
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL SYSTEMS - Continued

106. EXCESSIVE DEFLECTION ERROR DURING COMPUTER SYSTEM SOLUTION TESTS.

- Continued b Jf my othep SENS0R FAIL or SELF TEST indicators illuminate,
replace the indicated components.
Step 2.Repeat ballistic computer system solution tests (para 2-22) and check for error deflec
tions at both the commander's and gunner's stations.
a. If errors exist at both stations, replace computer unit (para 15-731.
b. If errors are only at gunner's station, replace reticle projector (para
15-95).
c. If errors are only at commander's station, replace receiver transmitter
unit (para 15-102) and electronic unit (para 15-105).
107. EXCESSIVE MANUAL WIND/ ALTITUDE/AIR TEMPERATURE ERROR DURING COM
PUTER SYSTEM SOLUTIONS.
Step 1. Set LAMP/NORMAL/SYSTEM switch on gunner's control unit to SYSTEM. The
OK indicator should illuminate.
a. If the OK indicator illuminates, proceed to step 2.
b. If any other SENSOR FAIL or SELF TEST indicators illuminate,
replace the indicated components.
Step 2. While observing MIL counter on output unit, rotate AIR TEMP, ALTITUDE, and
CROSSWIND controls. The MIL counter reading should change smoothly as
each control is rotated.
a. If MIL counter moves in each case, replace computer (para 15-73).
b. If MIL counter does not move in each case, replace gunner's control
unit (para 15-75).
108. EXCESSIVE CANT CORRECTION ERROR DURING COMPUTER SYSTEM SOLUTIONS.
Step 1. Set LAMP/NORMAL/SYSTEM switch on gunner's control unit to SYSTEM. The
OK indicator should illuminate.
a. If the OK indicator illuminates, proceed to step 2.
b. If any other SENSOR FAIL or SELF TEST indicators illuminate,
replace the indicated components.
Step 2. Replace the cant unit (para 15-84). If defect is not corrected, replace the
computer (para 15-73).

SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL COMPONENTS-M21 COMPUTER SYSTEM

NOTE
Prior to replacing a computer system unit or cable, ensure that cable connectors have
been installed properly and that connector pins are not bent. Do not connect or
disconnect with power on.
109. WIND SENSOR FAIL INDICATOR ON GUNNER'S CONTROL UNIT COMES ON WITH
CROSSWIND SWITCH IN AUTO POSITION (See figure FO-1).
Step 1. Inspect wind sensor for broken sensor element.
a. If defective, replace wind sensor probe (para 15-88).
b. If not defective, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Remove wind sensor and test crosswind sensor mast, EMI filter, and cable
3W2 with cable test set (para 3-6c).
a. If mast, filter, and cable check good, replace crosswind sensor probe
(para 15-88) or computer (para 15-73).
o. If mast, filter, and cable check bad, proceed to step 3.
3-130 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL COMPONENTS-M21 COMPUTER SYSTEM-Con-

tinued
109. WIND SENSOR FAIL INDICATOR ON GUNNER'S CONTROL UNIT COMES ON WITH
CROSSWIND SWITCH IN AUTO POSITION - Continued
Step 3. Remove wind sensor mast, check EMI filter and cable with test set (para 3-6).
a. If filter and cable check good, replace crosswind sensor mast (para
15-86).
b. If filter and cable check bad, proceed to step 4.
Step 4. Remove EMI filter (para 15-91). Check cable 3W2 with cable test set (para 3-
6).
a. If cable checks bad, replace cable.
b. If cable checks good, replace EMI filter (para 15-91).
110. ONE OR MORE INDICATOR LIGHTS DO NOT COME ON WHEN LAMP-NORMAL-SYSTEM
SWITCH IS SET TO LAMP POSITION.
Replace the lamps in any SENSOR FAIL or SELF TEST indicators that did not il
luminate. If indicators still do not illuminate, replace gunner's control unit (para 15-75).

111. OK INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON WHEN LAMP-NORMAL-SYSTEM (SELF-

TEST MODE) SWITCH IS SET TO SYSTEM POSITION.
Step 1. Set LAMP-NORMAL-SYSTEM switch to LAMP. The OK SELF TEST indicator
should illuminate.
a. If present, proceed to step 2.
b. If not present and bulb has been replaced, replace gunner's control
unit (para 15-75).
Step 2. Set LAMP-NORMAL-SYSTEM switch to SYSTEM. Only the OK indicator
should be on.
a. If present, return vehicle to service.
b. If not present, replace unit indicated by SELF TEST or SENSOR
FAIL indicators.
c. If no SELF TEST or SENSOR FAIL indicators are illuminated
and/or OK indicator is off, replace gunner's control unit (para 15-75)
or computer unit (para 15-73).
112. POWER INDICATOR LIGHT ON GUNNER'S CONTROL UNIT DOES NOT COME ON WHEN
POWER SWITCH IS SET TO ON. (See figures 3-19, 3-30 and FO-1.)
Step 1. Turn the MASTER BATTERY and GUNNER'S CONTROL UNIT power
switches to ON position. Observe control panel of R/T, after ensuring EMER
POWER switch on EU is in OFF position. Control panel indicators should
be illuminated.
a. If illuminated, replace bulb in gunner's control unit.
b. If not illuminated, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Place MASTER BATTERY and GUNNER'S CONTROL UNIT power swit
ches to OFF position. Disconnect connector P13 of cable 1W2 from gunner's
control unit. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON position. Check for 24
vdc between socket A of P13 and ground.
a. If not present, proceed to step 3.
b- If present, proceed to step 5.
Step 3. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector PI of
cable 1W2 from power relay box (fig FO-1). Check continuity between pin F of
PI and socket A of PI 3.
a. If continuity exists, proceed to step 4.
b. If continuity does not exist, notify support maintenance that cable
1W2 is defective.
Change 2 3-131
 TNI 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL COMPONENTS-M21 COMPUTER SYSTEM-Con-

tinued
112. POWER INDICATOR LIGHT ON GUNNER'S CONTROL UNIT DOES NOT COME ON WHEN
POWER SWITCH IS SET TO ON. - Continued
Step 4. Connect connector P13 of cable 1W2 to 2 gunner's control unit. Check pin F of PI
I for short to ground.
a. If short exists, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is
defective.
b. If short does not exist, replace turret power relay and circuit
breaker box (para 5-38).
Step 5. Check system cables 3W1, 3W2 and 3W3 using cable test set (para 3-6).
a. If cable is defective, replace (para 15-99).
b. If system cable is not defective, proceed to step 6.
Step 6. Place MASTER BATTERY switch ON. Disconnect 3W1P1 and check for 24
vdc at sockets 1, 2, 3, and 4 of PI or gunner's control unit receptacle 2J1.
a. If voltage exists at all pins, replace- computer (para 15-73).
b. If voltage does not exist at all pins, replace gunner's control unit
(para 15-75).
113. AMMO SELECT UNIT DEFECTS. (See figure FO-1)
Step 1. Place MASTER BATTERY and computer POWER switches in ON position and
turn up BRIGHT/DIM control on both ammo select units. If a lamp does not
light, replace lamp and proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Check each ammo select unit using the cable test set (para 15-81).
a. If units are good, proceed to step 3.
6. If a unit is defective, replace ammo select unit (para 15-78).
Step 3. Check out cable 3W2 using cable test set (para 3-6).
a. If cable is good, replace computer (para 15-73).
b. If cable is defective, replace cable (para 15-99).
Prior to replacing a unit or a system cable, ensure that system cable connectors have
been properly installed. Examine connectors for bent pins.
SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL COMPONENTS - LASER RANGEFINDER
114. MALF INDICATOR ON R/T CONTROL PANEL IS ILLUMINATED. (See figure FO-1)
CAUTION
If malfunction 4 was displayed on RANGE (METERS) display or the system automat
ically turns itself off, inspect cable 3W33P2-S. If a carbon trace is present, or even
suspected, replace R/T, EU, and cable 3W33 as a group. Do not depend on multimeter
resistance tests or cable test set checks to locate high voltage (high resistance) shorts.
Step 1. Check cables 3W33, 3W34, and 3W36 using a cable test set (para 3-7 and para
3-8).
a. If all test results are correct, replace receiver-transmitter (para
15-102) and electronics unit (para 15-105).
b. If all test results are not correct, replace defective cables (para
15-107).
115. LASER RANGEFINDER FAILS SELF TEST OR COMPUTER SELF TEST. (See figure FO-1)
Check cables 3W3, 3W33 and 3W34 using cable test set (para 3-6).
a. If cables check good, replace R/T (para 15-102) and EU (para 15-
105).
b. If cable(s) is defective, replace cable 3W3 (para 15-99) or cables
3W33 or 3W34 (para 15-107).
3-132 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

LLFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL COMPONENTS - LASER RANGEFINDER - Continued

LRF RETICLE BRIGHTNESS CANNOT BE VARIED WITH BRIGHTNESS CONTROL.

Replace receiver-transmitter (para 15-102) and electronics unit (para 15-105).

DEFLECTION OR ELEVATION CONTROL KNOBS ON R/T UNIT DO NOT OPERATE

SMOOTHLY.
Replace receiver-transmitter unit (para 15-102) and electronics unit (para 15-105).

6X/12X CONTROL INOPERATIVE.

Replace receiver-transmitter unit (para 15-102) and electronics unit (para 15-105).

. ONE OR MORE LAMPS IN PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES ON R/T CONTROL PANEL UNIT DO

NOT COME ON.
Place LIGHT control in TEST position and replace all lamps that do not illuminate
(para 15-104). I
a. If all indicators are illuminated, perform LRF self test (para 2-21). I
6. If all indicators are still not illuminated, replace receiver-transmitter |
(para 15-102) and electronics unit (para 15-105).
LRF DOES NOT OPERATE (ALL CONTROL PANEL INDICATORS OUT) COMPUTER. (See
figures 3-19, 3-30, and FO-1)
Step 1. Set EMER PWR power switch on electronics unit to ON position. Control
panel indicators should illuminate.
a. If yes, proceed to step 2.
b. If no, proceed to step 4.
Step 2. Check system cable 3W3 using cable test set (para 3-6).
a. If cable checks good, proceed to step 3.
b. If cable checks bad, replace cable (para 15-99). I
Step 3. Replace computer unit (para 15-73). LRF should operate.
a. If system operates, return to service.
b. If system does not operate, reinstall original computer unit and
replace R/T and EU (para 15-102, 15-105).
Step 4. Check cables 3W33, 3W34, and 3W36 using cable test set and multimeter. |
a. If cables check bad, replace cables.
b. If cables check good, proceed to malfunction 121. ■
LRF SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE WITH EMER POWER SWITCH IN ON POSITION. (See
figures 3-19, 3-30 and FO-1.)
Step 1. Connect TESTS to J2 of cable 1W2. Lights 4 and 5 should • on. .
a. If yes, replace R/T (para 15-102) and EU (para 15-105).
b. If no, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Check that lamp 34 on TESTS is ON.
a. If on, proceed to step 3.
b. If not on, proceed to step 4.
Step 3. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector P24
of cable 1W2 from J3 of networks box. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON
position. Check sockets R and S of J3 for 24 volts dc. |
a. If yes, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is defective.
6. If no, replace networks box (para 5-53).

Change 2 3-133
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL COMPONENTS - LASER RANGEFINDER - Continued

121. LRF SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE WITH EMER POWER SWITCH IN ON POSITION. (See
figures 3-19, 3-30 and FO-1.) - Continued
Step 4. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position. Disconnect connector PI of cable
1W2 from J3 on power relay box. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in ON posi
tion. Check socket H of J3 for 24 volts.
a. If yes, notify support maintenance that cable 1W2 is defective.
b. If no, replace turret power relay and circuit breaker box (para
5-38).
SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL COMPONENTS - TTS
(On tanks equipped with TTS)

122. NO THERMAL IMAGE ON GUNNER'S OR COMMANDER'S DISPLAY:

TTS COOLER NOT OPERATING: LAMP TEST DOES NOT WORK (POWER DOWN CONDI
TIONS) (See figure 3-18, 3-19 and FO-1)

NOTE

The 8X and IR reticles may or may not be on.

Step 1. Verify that MASTER BATTERY switch, power converter circuit (4CB1) and
gunner's display MODE switches are on the ON position.
a. If in OFF position turn ON MASTER BATTERY switch, power
converter circuit breaker (4CB1) and gunner's display MODE
switch.
b. If switches are on, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Improperly secured cable 1W5.
a. Check that cable 1 W5 is securely connected at power relay box and power
converter.
b. If cable 1W5 is securely connected, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Defective Cable 1W5.
a. With gunner's display MODE switch and MASTER BATTERY
switch in OFF position, disconnect cable 1W5 con
nectors PI from power converter and P2 from turret
power relay and circuit breaker box.
b. Check continuity between sockets A and B of con
nector 1W5P1. Also check for continuity between
sockets C and D of connector 1W5P1 and chassis
ground.
c. If cable fails either continuity check, replace de
fective cable 1W5. If continuity exists in both
checks, proceeds to Step 4.

3-134 Change 5
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

IALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL COMPONENTS - TTS - Continued

(On tanks equipped with TTS)
Step 4. Vehicle power not supplying + 18 to 30 vde.
a. Reconnect cable 1W5 connector P2 to turret power
relay and circuit breaker box. Place MASTER BATTERY
switch to ON position.
b. Verify that +18 to 30 vdc is present at connector PI
of cable 1W5 by placing positive multimeter test
lead in either socket A or B and negative test lead
in either socket C or D.
c. If voltage is not present, refer to malfunction 75
to troubleshoot turret power relay and circuit
breaker box.
d. If voltage is present, proceed to step 5.
Step 5. Defective power converter.
a. With gunner's display MODE switch in OFF position, disconnect cable
3W4P1 connector from power converter. Turn the gunner's display MODE
switch to ON position and verify continuity between pins x and BB and
between pins w and y on 3W4P1. If continuity is verified, install a new
power converter (para 15-113).
b. If continuity is not verified, proceed to step 6.
Step 6. Improperly secured cable 3W4.
a. With power switched to OFF, verify that cable 3W4 is securely
connected. (Check connectors 3W4P1, 3W4P2, 3W4P3, 3W4P4 and
3W4P5.
b. If cable 3W4 is securely connected, proceed to step 7.
Step 7. Defective cable 3W4.
a. Perform test of cable 3W4 using cable test set (para 3-11). Replace
cable 3W4 if indicated.
b. If 3 W4 passes continuity check, proceed to step 8.
Step 8. Defective gunner's display.
a. Replace gunner's display (para 15-111).
123. BLANK OR DISTORTED VIDEO IN GUNNER'S DISPLAY (GOOD IMAGE IN
COMMANDER'S DISPLAY).
Step 1. Dirty optical interface.
a. Remove gunner's display (para 15-111) and verify that interface
lens is clean and dry.
b. If optical interface is clean, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Defective gunner's display.
Replace gunner's display (para 15-111).
124. BLANK OR DISTORTED VIDEO IN COMMANDER'S DISPLAY (GOOD IMAGE IN GUNNER'S
DISPLAY).
Step 1. Commander's display out of focus.
Re focus commander's display.
Step 2. Dirty optical interface.
a. Verify that interface lenses between commander's display and head
assembly are clean and dry.
b. If this fails to correct the video in the commander's display, install
a new commander's display (para 15-110).

Change 5 3-135
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL COMPONENTS - TTS - Continued

(On tanks equipped with TTS)
Step 3. Defective commander's display.
If display is blank (no video, no reticles), replace commander's display
(para 15-110).
125. BLANK OR DISTORTED IMAGE IN BOTH COMMANDER'S AND GUNNER'S DISPLAY
(RETICLES ARE VISIBLE).
Step 1. Defective LRU (BITE indicated).
a. Perform lamp test to insure that all BITE lamps are good.
b. Activate system BITE and look for failure indications. Replace
indicated LRU.
c. If no failure is indicated, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Defective head assembly.
a. Turn up both BRIGHT controls and place GUNNER/CMDR switch
in opposite position.
b. If video is still not good, replace head assembly (para 15-112).
c. If video is good, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Defective LRU (commander's or gunner's display).
Replace LRU on which BRIGHT control does not respond.
126. 8X OR IR RETICLES NOT ILLUMINATED.
Step 1. Defective light bulb.
a. If other reticles/indicators are lighted, replace faulty bulb.
b. If other reticles/indicators are not lighted, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Defective gunner's display.
Replace gunner's display (para 15-111).
127. BLK HOT, WHT HOT OR WFOV INDICATORS NOT ILLUMINATED WHEN APPROPRIATE
(NOT A CRITICAL MISSION MALFUNCTION).
Defective gunner's display.
Replace gunner's display (para 15-111).
128. IR RETICLE NOT ILLUMINATED.
Step 1. Defective head assembly.
a. Look for presence of 8X reticle, IR reticle, FOV and WHT/BLK
HOT.
b. If these reticles/indicators are operational, replace head assembly
(para 15-112).
c. If not operational, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Defective gunner's display.
Replace gunner's display (para 15-111).
129. COOL LIGHT DOES NOT EXTINGUISH. ENSURE THAT COOLER HAS BEEN RUNNING
LONGER THAN 10 MINUTES.
Step 1. Defective head assembly.
a. If quality of thermal display is good, replace head assembly (para
15-112).
b. If quality of thermal image is bad, proceed to step 2.
.Step 2. Defective LRU.
a. Perform lamp test to ensure that all BITE lamps are good.
b. Activate system BITE and replace defective LRU.
c. If no failure is indicated, replace head assembly (para 15-112).
130. IR DISPLAY HAS SCAN RASTER, BUT EITHER POOR OR NO VIDEO.
Step 1. Ballistic shield closed.

3-136 Change 5
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. TroaWeshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION ^^^^^^
SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL COMPONENTS - TTS - Continued
(On tanks equipped with TTS)
a. Open ballistic shield.
6. If ballistic shield is already open, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Dirty IR window.
a. Clean IR window.
b. If IR window is clean, perform steps 1 and 2, malfunction 125.
131. COOLER DOES NOT OPERATE WHEN MODE SWITCH IS IN "ON" OR "STBY"
POSITION. LAMP TEST WORKS PROPERLY. (See figures 3-18 and 3-19 and FO-1).

Step 1.Improperly secured cable 3W4.

a. Refer to malfunction 122, step 6.
b. If cable 3W4 is secure, proceed to malfunction 122, step 7.
Step 2. Defective Power Converter
a. Remove 3W4P2.
CAUTION: POTENTIALLY DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT
b. Check for 115 VAC rms between 3W4P2 pin C and 3W4P2 pin A,
and 3W4P2 pin C and 3W4P2 pin B.
c. If voltage is not present, replace power converter (para 15-113).
d. If 115 VAC is present, proceed to step 3, malfunction 131.
Step 3. Defective Cooler/Head Assembly.
a. Replace head assembly (para 15-112).
1S2. 8X TELESCOPE DOES NOT RETAIN BORESIGHT.
Defective gunner's display.
a. If thermal channel retains boresight, replace gunner's display
(para 15-111).
b. If thermal channel does not retain boresight, proceed to mal
function 133.
133. THERMAL CHANNEL DOES NOT RETAIN BORESIGHT.
Step 1. Defective gunner's display.
a. If 8X telescope also does not retain boresight, proceed to malfunction
132.
b. If 8X telescope retains boresight, check to see if IR boresight
mechanism functions smoothly without backlash.
c. If IR boresight mechanism does not function smoothly, replace
gunner's display (para 15-111).
d. If IR boresight mechanism functions smoothly, proceed to step
2.
Step 2. Defective head assembly.
a. Replace head assembly (para 15-112).
134. THERMAL CHANNEL AND 8X CHANNEL DO NOT RETAIN BORESIGHT.
Step 1. Defective head assembly.
a. Switch computer to boresight mode and vary elevation of gun. If
scene in 8X telescope moves correspondingly, proceed to step
2.
b. If scene in 8X telescope does not move correspondingly with gun,
vary elevation of gun while observing elevation of drive coupling.
If elevation drive coupling is not both latched and turning, proceed
to step 3.
c. If elevation drive coupling is latched and turning, replace head
assembly (para 15-112).
Change 5 3-137
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL COMPONENTS - TTS - Continued

(On tanks equipped with TTS)
Step 2. Loose mounting of head assembly and/or gunner's display.
a. Secure mounting bolts on head assembly (para 15-112) and/or
gunner's display (para 15-111). If bolts are already secure, proceed
to step 3.
Step 3. Defective fire control system.
a. Refer to fire control system fault isolation procedure in
paragraphs 2-11 through 2-24.
135. RETICLE HORIZONTAL TRAVERSE BEHAVES ERRATRICALLY, OR IS NOT FUNCTIONING
(See figure 3-18).
Step 1. Cable W3 improperly connected.
a. With power turned OFF, check that cable 3W3 is securely connected
at both gunner's display and fire control computer ends.
b. If cable 3W3 is secured firmly, proceed to step 2.
Step 2. Defective cable 3W3.
a. Perform cable test set check of cable 3W3. Replace cable 3W3 if defec
tive (para 15-99).
b. If cable 3W3 passes cable test set check, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Defective LRU.
a. Activate fire control computer self-test (para 2-20). Replace indicated
LRU failure.
b. If no failure is indicated, proceed to step 4.
Step 4. Defective gunner's display and fire control computer.
Replace gunner's display (para 15-111) and fire control computer
(para 15-73).
136. THERMAL IMAGE ABNORMAL WITH EITHER MISSING LINES, IRREGULAR SCAN (FUCKER
OVERLAP), COLLAPSED SCAN (VERTICAL LINES IN CENTER OF DISPLAY), NOISE
PATTERNS ON IMAGE, INTERMITTENT IMAGE, OR SNOWY DISPLAY (IN GOOD WEATHER).
Step 1. Defective LRU.
Perform steps 1 and 2, malfunction 129.
137. IMPROPER FUNCTIONING OF BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST, OR POLARITY CONTROLS
ON GUNNER'S OR COMMANDER'S DISPLAY.
Step 1. Defective gunner's or commander's display.
a. Check control on other display panel for proper functioning. If
same problem occurs in both LRU, proceed to step 2.
b. If problem occurs in only one display, replace that LRU.
Step 2. Defective head assembly.
Replace head assembly (para 15-112).
138. THERMAL SCENE (AT 100 METERS OR GREATER) GOES OUT OF FOCUS WHEN SWITCHING
TO WIDE FIELD OF VIEW.
Defective head assembly.
Replace head assembly (para 15-112).
139. MOISTURE CONDENSATION ON INTERIOR SURFACES OF LRU'S.
Excessively humid conditions.
Purge LRU per paragraph 2-24.
140. JAMMED BORESIGHT KNOBS.
Defective LRU.
Replace LRU.
141. FOV AND/OR FOCUS CONTROLS JAMMED OR NOT FUNCTIONING.
Defective head assembly.
Replace head assembly (para 15-112).

3-138 Change 5
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table 3-6. Troubleshooting - Continued

ALFU NOTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL COMPONENTS - TTS - Continued

(On tanks equipped with TTS)
RADIO INTERFERENCE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM

NOTE
The following malfunctions are caused by a particular motor assembly. Prior to using
these procedures, the radio interference must be associated with a particular motor
assembly. This is accomplished by turning off motors, one at a time, and noting if
interference still exists. If interference still exists with all motors off, proceed to radio
interference troubleshooting (TM 9-2350-253-20-1).

2. RADIO INTERFERENCE EXISTS AS A RESULT OF POWER PACK CONTROL ELECTRIC

DRIVE MOTOR RUNNING.
Check for proper mounting and good electrical connections and ensure tooth-type
washers are tight.
J. RADIO INTERFERENCE EXISTS AS A RESULT OF TURRET VENT BLOWER MOTOR
RUNNING.
Inspect for loose cables and bonding, and insecure mounting.

4. RADIO INTERFERENCE EXISTS AS A RESULT OF POWER PACK BLOWER MOTOR

RUNNING.
Inspect blower to see if it is securely mounted and properly connected electrically.

5. MAIN GUN AND/OR TURRET MOVE (IN STABILIZED MODE) WHEN RADIO EQUIPMENT
IS KEYED.
Replace EMI filter assembly (para 5-81).

Change 2 3-139 /( 3-140 blank)

 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CHAPTER 4

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

4-1 General. motion using lens paper (item 29, App. C). If
lens smears make a triangular pad of lens
This section contains cleaning, inpection, paper, moisten it in lens cleaning compound
and repair instructions which are common (item 9, App. C) and beginning at the center
methods and are not specific to one of the surface clean outward in a circular
component or assembly. Supplemental in motion. Gradually increase the area being
structions pertinent to a specific component cleaned until the entire surface has been
are given in the appropriate sections. covered. Check to insure surface is clean, if
not repeat the procedure,
4-2. Cleaning. b . Cleaning Methods.
(1) Remove foreign matter from
WARNING component/part by immersing into a suitable
Some cleaning agents specified container filled with cleaning agent. Agitate
are flammable. Use only in or wipe with lint-free cloth. Do not immerse
well ventilated areas. Keep large components/parts unless instructed. If
away from flames, sparks, or the vapor-degreaser method is used, treat
heat. Do not smoke while ment for two to three minutes is sufficient.
using. Prevent contact with (2) Remove foreign matter from
eyes, mouth, and/or skin. Wear recessed areas with a stiff-bristled brush or
rubber gloves when performing crocus cloth (item 5, App. C). Scrapers can
cleaning procedures. be used only when damage to surfaces will
not affect use of component/part.
a. Cleaning Agents. (3) Dry component/part thoroughly
(1) Drycleaning solvent (item 28, App. C) by using dry compressed air or wiping with a
is used to remove oil and grease from metal sur clean, lint-free cloth (item 22, App. C).
faces by brushing, immersion, or wiping. It is non
flammable. The vapors are toxic and it evaporates 4-3. Inspection and Repair of Cast Parts and
quickly without leaving a corrosion-inducing film Machined Surfaces.
on metal surfaces.
a. Inspect cast parts for cracks or
fractures. Inspect interiors for scores and
CAUTION burrs.
Do not immerse electrical com b. Inspect machine surfaces for cracks,
ponents, rubber parts, or parts fractures, galling, pitting, scoring, and cor
with gasket or asbestos mat rosion.
erial in drycleaning solvent or c. Remove scores and burrs from
other cleaning agent unless the machined surfaces of cast parts with crocus
procedures instruct you to do cloth dipped in drycleaning solvent (item 28,
so. App. C). Replace part if cracked, fractured,
(2) Lens cleaning compound (item or excessively scored, worn, or burred.
9, App. C) is used to clean exposed optics/ d. Clean and refinish areas of
lenses (TM 9-2350-253-10). defective paint in accordance with TM 43-
0139.
a. 1 . Cleaning Methods for Optics. 4-4. Inspection and Repair of Shafts and
(1) External optical windows and Splines.
lenses (TM 9-2350-253-10).
(2) Wipe the surface in a circular a. Inspect shafts for cracks, fractures,

Change 1 4-1
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

scores, and deformation. Remove minor b. Military specifications referenced in

nicks with crocus cloth (item 5, App. C). this manual will be used as mandatory guide
Replace shafts if they are cracked, lines beyond the scope of TM 9-237 during
fractured, scored, or deformed. welding processes.
b. Inspect splines for cracks, fractures, c. When welding requirements are
wear, and deformation. Remove minor nicks beyond organizational capabilities, notify
with crocus cloth. Replace splined parts if support maintenance personnel.
splines do not permit proper fit or are
cracked, worn, or fractured. 4-10. Inspection, Care, and Maintenance
of Antifriction Bearings.
4-5. Inspection and Repair of Threaded Parts.
Refer toTM 9-214.
a. Inspect all threaded parts for worn
or damaged threads. 4-11. Inspection of Bushing Type Bearings.
b. Repair by chasing damaged threads
with a tap or die. Inspect bushing type bearings before
removal, for wear, cracks, fractures, pitting,
4-6. Inspection of Retaining Rings. or scoring. Replace bearings if worn or
damaged.
Replace retaining rings if worn, scored,
or deformed. 4-12. Inspection and Replacement of
Cushioning Material.
4-7. Inspection and Removal of Dowel Pins.
a. Inspect cushioning material for
a.. Inspect dowel pins for wear and punctures, breaks, cracks, and deterioration.
proper fit. Replace if defective. b. Replace damaged parts bonded with
b. If necessary to remove dowel pins, rubber adhesive as follows:
use one of the following methods: (1) Scrape damaged cushioning
(1) Grip pin with self-locking pliers material, bonded seals, or gaskets from com
and pull with a twisting motion. ponent.
(2) Grind pin off flush with surface (2) Remove any paint from
and drill out remainder of pin. surfaces of area to be bonded.
(3) Remove oil, grease, or other
4-8. Removal of Studs. contaminants by cleaning with a cloth soaked
in dry cleaning solvent Type II (SD-2) PD-680
If necessary to remove studs, use one of (item 28, App. C).
the following methods:
a. Use stud remover. WARNING
b. Apply penetrating oil (item 20, App. Work area should be well vent
C) to base of stud. Thread two hex nuts on ilated to reduce toxicity caused
stud and jam the nuts. Sharply tap head of by solvents. Do not smoke in
stud several times with a hammer. Turn work area. Solvent and bonding
lower nut to remove stud. adhesives are toxic and flam
c. Apply penetrating oil (item 20, App. mable.
C) to base of stud. Sharply tap head of stud NOTE
several times with a hammer. Unscrew stud Bonding should be accomplished
with self-locking pliers. at a minimum room temper
d. Grind stud off flush with surface ature of 65 F. Do not use tape
and drill out remainder of stud. to temporarily hold parts to
4-9. Inspection and Repair of Welds. gether during bonding oper
ation.
a. Inspect, repair and paint welds in (4) Use a brush or suitable appli
accordance with TM 9-237 and TM 43-0139. cator to apply a thin coat of adhesive (item

4-2 Change 1
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

1 4, App. C) to the mating surface of each meters (N-m).

part. Allow adhesive to set for approximately
15 minutes before joining parts. 4-15. Inspection and Repair of Wiring
Harnesses and Cables.
4-13. Inspection and Repair of Gears.
a. General. Repair of wiring harnesses
a. Inspect gears for wear, nicks, and cabling is limited to replacement of
scores, and burrs. Check that gears are connectors, terminals, receptables, or
securely mounted., manufactured wire; temporary installation of
b. Remove minor nicks with crocus jumper wires; taping of damaged insulation;
cloth (item 5, App. C). Replace gears if straightening of bent pins in cable
damaged in any way. connectors; and installation of cable clamps.

4-14. Torque Specifications. CAUTION

All wire connections must be
Torque specifications in this manual are soldered; a twisted wire con
expressed in both the current U.S. system and nection is not sufficient.
the metric system. Figures in parentheses,
which follow the U.S. system values, are b. Soldering (Table 4-1). Solder used
metric equivalents expressed in Newton for electrical repair will be of the non-acid

Change 2 4-2.1/(4-2.2 blank)

 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

type. Rosin flux is permitted. Use solder of (4) Place WCW washer over cable at
composition SN50 or SN60 (item 27, App. C). rear of ferrule and slide shell over washer and
Wires to be inserted in connectors or terminals terminal.
will be pretinned. When repairing a wire connec f. Replacement of Female Connector with
tion, insulation should be stripped from wires so Washer (View C, Fig 4-2).
that no insulation will touch the soldered connec NOTE
tion. The number of damaged strands in a wire Tag each cable lead with pin/socket
will not exceed the limits of table 4-1. Wires will designation before removing cable.
be cleaned of oxides, films, oil, or grease prior to (1) Strip cable insulation 1/8-inch.
soldering. (2) Slide shell over cable insulation.
c. Replacement of Plugs and Receptacles (3) Slide washer over wire to cable
(Fig 4-1). insulation.
(1) Strip cable insulation equal to (4) Insert cable into terminal assembly
depth of solder wells of inserts. and crimp.
(2) Remove grommet retaining nut (5) Slide washer and shell over termi
from plug assembly (or receptacle) and slide nal.
back over cable. g. Replacement of Female Connectors
NOTE with Sleeve (View D, Fig 4-2).
Tag each cable lead with pin/socket NOTE
designation before removing cable. Tag each cable lead with pin/socket
(3) Slide grommet back from plug designation before removing cable.
assembly (or receptacle) and remove damaged (1) Strip cable insulation 1/8-inch.
cable. (2) Slide shell and sleeve over cable.
(4) Insert cable leads in solder wells of (3) Insert cable into terminal assembly
inserts, and solder. and crimp.
(5) Slide grommet over inserts en (4) Slide shell and sleeve over termi
suring that proper insert is in proper grommet nal.
hole. h. Replacement of Manufactured Wire.
(6) Press grommet into plug assembly
(1) Measure length of defective wire.
(or receptacle). (2) Cut new wire to length.
(7) Thread retaining nut onto plug as (3) Install plugs, receptacles, terminals and
sembly (or receptacle) and tighten. connectors (paras c - g).
d. Replacement of Terminals (View A, i. Installation of Jumper Wires
Fig 4-2). (1) Disassemble connector and
NOTE unsolder defective wire {see paragraphs c
Tag each cable lead with pin/socket through g above).
designation before removing cable. (2) Clip off end of wire as close to
(1) Strip cable insulation equal to cable insulation as possible.
depth of terminal well (area A). (3) Install new wire into connector.
(2) Slide insulator over cable. (4) Lay wire along path of harness
(3) Insert cable into terminal well and assembly and clip wire at cable reel when
crimp cable in area A and cable insulation in proper length is determined.
area B. (5) Thread wire along path of cable
(4) Slide insulator, if provided, over harness, passing wire through clamps.
crimped end of terminal. (6) Trim wire to final length.
e. Replacement of Male Connectors (View B, (7) Disassemble connector and install
Fig 4-2). wire as above, or install terminal assembly,
NOTE as applicable.
Tag each cable lead with pin/socket (8) Install connector or terminal.
designation before removing cable. (9) Tape the wire securely to the
harness at intervals that will provide protec
(1) Strip cable insulation equal to tion from vibration or sagging.
depth of ferrule welL Repair of Insulation.
(2) Slide shell over cable. (1) Examine the area of defective in
(3) Insert cable into ferrule well and sulation. Do not repair insulation that is
crimp in area A. brittle, dry, and cracking except as a tempo-

4-3
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

GROMMET
PLUG ASSY
CABLE

PLUG ASSY

CABLE WELL

T
MALE INSERT

NUT
GROMMET

RECEPTACLE
CABLE

NUT
GROMMET

NUT GROMMET PLUG ASSY

CABLE

Figure 4-1. Replacement of plugs and receptacles.

4-4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

rary repair. Broken, cut, or nicked strands (3) For large cables, apply a second layer
must not exceed the limits of table 4-1. of tape, (item 17, App. C), beginning on insula
Replace wire, or cut and splice if nicked tion, over taped area, and finishing on' insulation.
strands are excessive. k. Repair of Bent Connector Pins. Use
(2) If number of damaged strands is the first method of pin straightening when
satisfactory, cover the damaged area with possible. Examine straightened pins for
electrical tape (item 17, App. C). Tape must cover cracks or burrs. Remove burrs before in
an area extending at least 3/4-inch beyond either stalling. Replace connector if pin is cracked.
side of damaged area. Tape should be applied so (1) Slip a mating female contact over
that each succeeding wrap overlaps by one the bent pin and push pin back into position.
half of tape width. (2) Use a pair of long nosed pliers to
straighten pin.
Table 4-1. Broken Wire Strand Limits

Wire Strands Nicked or Broken Strands

(Total) (Maximum)

Less than 7 0
7-15 1
16-18 2
19-25 3
26-36 4
37-40 5
41 or more 6

CABLE v INSULATOR \ TERMINAL

CABLE SHELL ^ "C" WASHER

FERRULE

CABLE - SHELL WASHER TERMINAL ASSY

CABLE SHELL
SHELL . SLEEVE TERMIN/
TERMINAL ASSY

PCCP Cits cesif

AR702558
Figure 4-2. Replacement of cable connector'

4-5 (4-6 blank)

r
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CHAPTER 5

MAINTENANCE OF TURRET
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Section I. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

rl. General.

The turret electrical system consists of an ventilating blower circuits, accessories

ilectrical contact ring assembly (slipring) for control circuits, searchlight (for non-TTS
ransmitting power and interphone circuits tanks) and radiation detector feed circuits,
rom hull to turret, turret and gun and various relays, switches, interconnecting
>perational control circuits, gun safety cables, harnesses, and associated components.
sircuits, radio power and interphone circuits,

Section II. MAINTENANCE OF TURRET

RADIO INTERFERENCE SUPPRESSORS

5-2. Description. (2) A conductive gasket is used be

tween the motor housing and the elbow base.
Radio interference suppression is the (3) A conductive gasket is used be
elimination, or minimizing, or any electrical tween the capacitor mounting base and
disturbances which cause undesirable elbow.
•esponse or malfunctioning of communication (4) Plated, internal tooth-type lock-
equipment or disclosure of the vehicle loca washers are used under the motor through
tion to sensitive electrical detectors. It is bolt heads.
also important that vehicles be properly (5) Plated, internal tooth-type lock-
suppressed to prevent radio interference with washers are used under the capacitor and
neighboring vehicles. elbow mounting screw heads.
b. Turret Ventilating Blower Motor
5-3. Causes of Interference. Assembly (View B, Fig 5-1), A 1.5-ufd, 60-
ampere, 50-volt dc feed-through capacitor is
Electrical interference of the type to be inserted in the input lead of the motor at the
dealt with by suppresion may be caused in the motor housing. The capacitor bracket is
turret by the hydraulic system power pack bonded to the motor end bell housing with a
motor, the turret ventilating blower motor wire-mesh neoprene gasket and four plated
assembly, or the power pack blower motor. tooth-type lockwashers. A bonding strap is
used to ensure ground between the motor
5-4. Suppression Assembly Methods. housing and the vehicle.
c. Power Pack Blower Motor Assembly
Radio interference suppression is accom (Para 5-24). A 0.25-ufd, 100-volt dc feed-
plished in the electrical subassemblies of the through capacitor is inserted in the input lead
turret by the use of conductive gaskets, feed- of the blower motor at the motor housing.
through capacitors, and plated tooth-type The capacitor is mounted to the motor
lockwashers. Typical locations of radio inter housing with two screws and plated tooth-
ference suppression hardware are illustrated type lockwashers.
in figure 5-1. d. Wind Sensor Mast EMI Filter (Para
a. Hydraulic System Power Pack Motor 15-91). An EMI filter is located at the base
Electric Drive (View A, Fig 5-1). of the wind sensor mast. The EMI filter
(1) A 2.0-ufd, 200-ampere, 50-volt dc prevents radio transmission that may be
feed-through capacitor is inserted in the picked up by the wind sensor mast from
positive lead of the motor at the motor entering the XM21 computer circuitry.
housing.

5-1
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

A B
Figure 5-1. Radio interference suppression capacitors - location.

Section III. MAINTENANCE OF DOMELIGHT

5-5.Description.
with remaining two screws and lockwashers
There are three domelights in the turret Tighten screws installed in step a above.
which provide general lighting to the
c. Connect electrical connector to dome-
loader's, gunner's and commander's areas.
light connector.
Each domelight is a self-contained instru-
| ment with a white lamp, a blue lamp, and a <L Place MASTER BATTERY switch ON
three position selector switch for OFF, and check for proper operation of domelight.
blackout (red), and normal lighting. A
safety plunger on the selector switch pre
vents the switch from entering the white
light position during a blackout. A variable
resistor is mounted to the base of the dome- 5-8. Replacement of Variable Resistor (Figure 5-21
light assembly and permits adjustment of
light intensity in either red or white mode. a. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in
OFF position.
b. Disconnect two variable resistor electrical
5-6. Removal (Figure 5-2).
connectors.
c. Loosen setscrew securing knob to variable
a. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in resistor and remove knob.
OFF position. d. Remove nut and lockwasher securing rheo
b. Disconnect electrical connector from stat to mounting bracket and remove variable resis
domelight. tor.
c. Remove four screws and lockwashers e. Position variable resistor and secure to
securing loop clamp, variable resistor, bracket, and mounting bracket with lockwasher and nut.
domelight to mounting bracket and remove vari f. Install knob and tighten setscrew securiaf
able resistor with bracket, loop clamp, and dome- knob to variable resistor.
light. g. Connect two variable resistor electrical
connectors.
h. Check for proper operation of variable
5-7. Installation (Figure 5-2). resistor.
5-9. Replacement of Domelight Component!
a. Position domelight on mounting brack
(Fig 5-3).
et and install two screws with lockwashers.
Do not tighten screws. a.
Door seal and captive screws.
b. Position variable resistor and bracket to (1) Remove domelight (para 5-6).
domelight. Position loop clamp over one domelight (2) Loosen eight captive screws
mounting hole, and secure variable resistor bracket door to body (view A, fig 5-3).

5-2 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 5-2. Removal and installation of domelight.

LENS
CAPTIVE . RETAINING
SCREW(B) SCREW(7) plate
WHITE LAMP
RETAINING SOCKET ASSEMBLY
RING(B)

SCREWI2)

TERMINAL B
TERMINAL R
DOOR TERMINAL W
DOOR SEAL PARTITION
BLUE LAMP SCRE SCREW (4) (HIDDEN) |
SOCKET ASSEMBLY WASHER(2) LOCK WASHER (4)
(HIDDEN)

AMC 833017

Figure 5-3. Replacement of domelight components.

(3) Remove door. (7) Install replacement door seal.

(4) Inspect door for missing or damaged (8) Connect electrical lead at rotary switch
:aptive screws. Replace defective or missing retain- terminal B.
ng ring and captive screws. (9) Position door and secure with eight
(5) Disconnect electrical lead at rotary captive screws.
twitch terminal B (view B, fig 5-3). (10) Install domelight (para 5-7).
(6) Remove door seal.

Change 2 5-3
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

6.Rotary Switch. (10) Remove seven screws securing leu re

(1) Remove domelight (para 5-6). taining plate to door, and remove retaining puce
(2) Loosen eight captive screws securing (fig 54).
door to body (view A, fig 5-3). (11) Remove blue lens and gasket
(3) Remove door. Remove white lens and seal.
(4) Disconnect electrical leads at rotary (12) Position blue lens and gasket (use
switch terminals R, W, and B (view B, fig 5-3). new gasket). Position white lens and seal
(5) Remove screw and lockwasher securing (use new seal).
knob to switch and remove knob (fig 5-4). (13) Position retaining plate and secure with
(6) Remove nut assembly, flat washer, and seven screws (fig 5-4).
gasket securing switch to door and remove rotary (14) Position blue lamp socket and
switch. mounting pad on door and secure with two
(7) Position rotary switch and gasket on screws and washers (view B, fig 5-3 and fig
door and secure with washer and nut. 5-4).
(8) Position knob on rotary switch, and (15) Connect electrical lead to rotary switch
secure with lockwasher and screw (fig 5-4). terminal R (view B, fig 5-3).
(9) Connect electrical leads at terminals R, (16) Position partition and install four lock-
W, and B (view B, fig 5-3). washers and screws securing partition to door (view
(10) Position door and secure with eight B, fig 5-3 and fig 5-4).
captive screws. (17) Position white lamp socket and mount
(11) Install domelight (para 5-7). ing pad on door.
c. Blue and White Lenses. (18) Position ground wire terminal from
(1) Remove domelight (para 5-6). socket assembly onto mounting bracket.
(2) Loosen eight captive screws securing (19) Secure pad and terminal to door with
door to body (view A, fig 5-3). two screws and washers.
(3) Remove door. (20) Connect electrical lead to rotary switch
(4) Disconnect electrical lead at rotary terminal W (view B, fig 5-3).
switch terminal B (view B, fig 5-3). (21) Connect electrical lead to rotary switch
(5) Disconnect electrical lead at rotary terminal B.
switch terminal R. (22) Position door and secure with eight
(6) Remove two screws and flat washers captive screws.
securing blue lamp socket mounting pad to door, (23) Install domelight (para 5-7).
and remove socket and mounting pad (fig 5-4).
(7) Disconnect electrical lead at rotary d. Rotary Switch Knob Plunger (Fig 5-4).
switch terminal W (view B, fig 5-3). (1) Remove setscrew securing plunger is
(8) Remove two screws and washers secur knob.
ing white lamp socket mounting pad to door, and (2) Remove plunger and spring.
remove socket and mounting pad (fig 5-4). (3) Position replacement spring and plun
(9) Remove four screws and lockwashers ger in knob.
securing partition to door, and remove partition (4) Secure plunger in knob with setscrew
(view B, fig 5-3 and fig 5-4).
e. Lamp.
Refer to TM 9-2350-253-10.

5-4 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

SCREW (2)

AMC 833018
Figure 5-4. Domelight - exploded view.

Change 2 5-5
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section IV. MAINTENANCE OF TURRET

ELECTRICAL CONTACT RING ASSEMBLY

5-10. Description. n. Loosen two hose clamps securing two air

The turret electrical contact ring assembly con hoses to two elbows in lower housing and discon
sists of the slipring assembly, the traverse safety nect hoses from elbows housing (view F).
limit switch assembly, the switch actuating bell o. Remove screw and two lockwashers secur
crank, the safety actuating control cam, and the ing ground cable to hull (view E).
mounting hardware. It is located in the center of p. Lift open turret platform access door.
the turret platform. The turret electrical contact q. Traverse turret (TM 9-2350-253-10) to gain
ring assembly provides electric, interphone, and access (through turret platform access panel) to two
filtered air connections from the hull to the tur harness connectors at lower housing recepUde
ret. The slip ring assembly consists of twelve com (view F).
munication rings and brushes, one power ring, and r. Disconnect two harness connectors from
one ground ring and brush assembly. It provides an lower housing receptacles (view F).
electrical circuit from the stationary section in the s. Remove four screws and lockwashers secur
hull to the rotating section in the turret when the ing slipring bracket to hull (view F). Remove slip-
MASTER BATTERY switch is in the ON position. ring and bracket.
5-11. Removal (Fig 5-5). t. Remove traverse safety limit (interference
a. Set MASTER BATTERY switch to OFF. switch (para 5-14).
b. Remove four screws, lockwashers, and flat u. If slipring is being replaced, perform the
washers securing traverse safety limit (interference) following (Fig 5-5, views D and F).
switch access cover to slipring shield (view A). Re (1) Remove four screws and lockwashers
move cover. and remove mounting bracket.
c. Loosen clamp securing commander's gas (2) Loosen clamp and remove comman
particulate air hose to outer elbow in turret plat der's gas particulate hose.
form (view A). Rotate outer elbow to release outer (3) Unscrew and remove five elbows
end of hose. on slipring.
d. Remove five screws, lockwashers, and flat
(4) Apply antiseize compound (item 26.4,
washers securing rear half of slipring upper shield App. C) to plugs and install plugs in holes in
to turret floor and remove upper shield (view B).
slipring.
e. Remove rear half of slipring lower shield NOTE
(views B and E). Replace dry-rotted or damaged
f. Loosen clamp securing loader's gas parti hoses.
culate air hose to inner elbow and rotate inner 5-12. Installation (Fig 5-5).
elbow on slipring to release end of hose (view C). a. If a slipring is being replaced, perform the
g. Under inner elbow for loader's gas particu following (fig 5-5, views D and C).
late air hose, remove screw and lockwasher secur (1) Remove five plugs from hoses for hose
ing ground strap to slipring upper housing (view C). fittings.
h. Disconnect two harness connectors from (2) Apply antiseize compound (item 26.4.
upper housing receptacles (view C). App. C) to three elbows. Install elbows in slip-
I. Disconnect two traverse safety limit (inter ring upper housing for commander's, gunner's
ference) switch harness lead connectors (view C).
and loader's gas particulate air hoses.
/. Remove four screws, lockwashers, and flat
(3) Apply antiseize compound (item 26.4.
washers securing front half of slipring upper shield
App. C) to two elbows. Install elbows in supring
to turret floor and remove shield (view C).
lower housing for gas particulate air lines (view
k. Loosen inner clamp securing gunner's gas
C).
particulate air hose elbow and release hose by rota (4) Install commander's gas particulate
ting inner elbow on slipring (view E).
hose and hose clamp and tighten clamp.
/. Remove lockwire, screw, and tube from
(5) Position mounting bracket onto slipring
upper housing arm (view E). and secure with four screws and lockwashers (view
m. Remove front half of slipring lower shield
F).
(views C and E). b. Position slipring in hull and secure mount
ing bracket with four screws and lockwashers (vie*
F).
5-6 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 5-5. Slipring Removal and Installation (1 of 3)

c. Connect two air hoses to lower housing and I Install tube, screw, and lockwire in upper
secure with two clamps (fig 5-5, view F). housing arm (view E).
d. Lift turret platform access door. ;'. Install gunner's air hose on gas particulate
e. Traverse turret (TM 9-2350-253-10) to gain inner elbow by rotating inner elbow and secure
access to two lower housing receptacles (view F). with clamp (view E).
f. Connect two harness connectors to two k. Install loader's gas particulate air hose on
lower housing receptacles (view F). inner elbow and secure with clamp (view C).
g. Secure ground cable to lower housing with /. Secure ground strap to upper housing with
screw and two lockwashers (view E). screw and lockwasher (view C).
h. Position front half of slipring lower shield m. Replace traverse safety limit (interference)
on turret floor (view E). switch (para 5-15).

5-7
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 5-6. Slipring Removal and Installation (2 of 3)

5-8
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

n. Position front half of slipring upper shield switch access cover to rear half of slipring upper
over slipring and lower shield and secure to turret shield and remove cover (view A).
floor with four screws, lockwashers, and flat wash u. Position rear half of upper shield over slip-
ers (view C). ring and lower shield and secure to turret floor
o. Connect two harness lead connectors to with five screws, lockwashers, and flat washers
traverse safety limit (interference) switch leads (view B).
(viewC). v. Install commander's gas particulate air hose
p. Connect two harness connectors to upper and clamp on outer elbow by rotating outer elbow
housing receptacles (view C). and secure clamp (view A).
Q- Install loader's gas particulate air hose and w. Adjust limit switch (para 5-16). I
clamp on inner elbow by rotating inner elbow and Position traverse safety limit (interference)
secure clamp (view C). switch access cover on upper shield and
r Install air hose to elbow (on slipring) and secure with four screws, lockwashers, and
secure with clamp. flat washers (view A).
s. Position rear half of lower shield onto x. Traverse turret 360° and operate communi
urret platform (view E). cation equipment while traversing to ensure power
t. Remove four screws, lockwashers, and flat is available to turret and communications equip
washers securing traverse safety limit (interference) ment through slipring.

UPPER
HOUSING
ARM I
BRACKET
SCREW (2)
LOCKWASHER (4)
(HIDDEN)

GROUND
CABLE
|AIR
CLAMP HOSE
LOWER LOWER HOUSING SCREW
SHIELD i HARNEfs h-""^ 1^ " / LOCKWASHER
(REAR HALF) |CONNECTOR (2)| ^ SHOWN WITH
W| TURRET REMOVED
AR702565

Figure 5-5. Slipring Removal and Installation (3 of 3)

Section V. MAINTENANCE OF SLIPRING TRAVERSE SAFETY

LIMIT (INTERFERENCE) SWITCH

5-13. Description. traversing over the rear of vehicle. The switch is

mounted on top of the slipring, in the center of the
The traverse safety limit (interference) switch turret floor, and is mechanically actuated by a cam
is part of the gun elevation control circuitry. It follower when the gun is traversed beyond 1778
operates in conjunction with the gun elevation mils (approximately) left or right of vehicle front
interference switch and deck clearance valve to center line. Actuation of the switch provides power
elevate the main gun above zero mils while power to the main gun elevation interference switch.

Change 2 5-9
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

TRAVtKit iAFtl Y
LIMIT (INTERFERENCE) SWITCH
ACCESS COVER

CAM FOLLOWER QUALIFICATION MARK

ARM (HIDDEN)

AH7025*
Figure 5-6. Removal, installation and adjustment of traverse safety
limit (interference) switch

5-14. Removal (Fig 5-6). d. Disconnect two switch lead connectors

from slipring box harness (view C).
a. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF e. Remove two screws and two lockwashers
position. securing switch to slipring bracket; (remove switch
b. Remove four capscrews, lockwashers, and (view C)).
flat washers securing traverse safety limit (interfer
ence) switch access cover toslipring shield (view A). 5-15. Installation (Fig 5-6).
Remove cover.
c. Remove screw, lockwasher, and loop clamp a. Position traverse safety limit (interference)
securing traverse safety limit (interference) switch switch in place on slipring bracket. Secure switch
lead to top of slipring box. to bracket with two screws and two lockwashers

5-10
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

lew C). Tighten screws to 8-10 Ib-in (0.9-1.1 d. Loosen locknut securing adjustment screw
m). in cam follower arm (view C).
b. Connect two switch lead connectors to e. Back adjusting screw out until clearance
nnectors on slipring harness (view C). exists between screw and switch plunger. Adjust
c. Ensure that switch leads lie flat on top of screw inward until switch just clicks. Rotate adjust
pring. Position loop clamp in place around ing screw one full turn inward and secure locknut.
itch leads and secure clamp with screw and lock- Ensure that screw does not move while adjusting
isher (view C). locknut.
d. Position access cover on rear shield and f. Traverse turret until main gun is over front
:ure with four screws, lockwashers, and flat center line of vehicle and fully depress gun.
ishers (view A). g. Slowly power traverse turret to the right
16. Adjustment (Fig 5-6). and check that main gun elevates to 0 + 17 mils
after traversing approximately 90 degrees from
a. Elevate gun above 0 mils and traverse turret front of vehicle. Repeat the above procedure while
itil main gun is over rear deck centered above gun power traversing turret to the left. If main gun
ivel lock. does not elevate, proceed to troubleshooting (chap
b. Place MASTER BATTERY and TURRET ter 3). If main gun elevates, but not to 0 + 17 mils,
)WER switches in OFF position. adjust gun elevation interference switch (para 5-20).
c. Remove four screws, lockwashers, and flat h. Position access cover on slipring shield and
ishers securing access cover to slipring shield. Re- secure with four screws, lockwashers and flat
ove cover (views A and B). washers (view A).

Section VI. MAINTENANCE OF GUN ELEVATION INTERFERENCE SWITCH

-17. Description. b. Connect two electrical connectors.

The gun elevation interference switch is
ounted on the ballistics drive cross shaft, 5-20. Adjustment (Fig 5-7).
le switch is actuated when the main gun is
low 0 mils elevation and, if the traverse a. Position vehicle on level terrain and
terference switch is closed, provides elevate gun above 0 mils.
hide power to the solenoid of the deck b. Traverse turret until main gun is over
earance valve. rear deck.
18. Removal (Fig 5-7). c. Place MASTER BATTERY and TUR
RET POWER switches in OFF position.
a. Position vehicle on level ground and
d. Manually depress main gun to 9 mils as
vel main gun at 9 degrees (using gunner's
measured with M1A1 gunner's quadrant.
ladrant).
e. Ensure that there is some space for
b. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in adjustment left on nut and plunger. Loosen
FF position.
screw securing clamp to cross shaft. Rotate
c. Disconnect two electrical connectors. clamp plunger and depress until switch clicks.
d. Remove two screws, lockwashers, and
Rotate clamp 1/8 inch beyond point where
its securing switch to mounting bracket and
switch clicks. Tighten screw on clamp.
imove switch.
f. Place MASTER BATTERY switch and
■19. Installation (Fig 5-7). TURRET POWER switch in ON positions.
a.0. Apply sealing compound (item 26.3, g. Slowly elevate, then depress main gun.
?p. C) to threads of two mounting screws. h. As gun is depressed, elevation switch
a. Position switch and secure to mounting should close and gun should automatically
acket with two screws, lockwashers, and nuts. elevate to 0 + 17 mils. Readjust plunger for
proper elevation over rear deck if necessary.
If gun does not elevate, proceed to trouble
shooting (table 3-6).

Change 2 5-11
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 5-7. Removal, installation, and adjustment of gun elevation interference switch.

i. Traverse turret slowly to rear. When /. If gun does not elevate sufficiently to
gun is approximately 90 degrees from front of clear rear deck, readjust clamp assembly,
vehicle, gun should automatically elevate. k. If gun does not elevate, check the slip
ring traverse safety limit switch (para 5-16).

Section VII. MAINTENANCE OF TURRET VENTILATOR BLOWER ASSEMBLY

5-21. Description. c. Disconnect the electrical cable con

nector (view A).
The turret ventilator blower is located in d. Loosen clamp securing silencer to
the upper right corner of the turret ceiling on blower assembly. Remove silencer (view A).
the tank. It provides ventilation for the crew e. Remove rubber insulating tape (view
compartment of the vehicle and helps purge A).
the compartment of gases during and after f. Remove four screws securing venti
firing of the guns. lating blower cover to turret and remove
cover (view B).
5-22. Removal (Fig 5-8). g. Remove six screws and lockwashers
securing mounting ring to turret (view C).
a. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in Two people are required when removing the
OFF position. blower assembly; one person inside, and one
b. Remove communications equipment as outside of the turret.
required to gain access to electrical con h. Remove blower assembly (view C).
nector (TM 9-2350-253-10).

5-12
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2
holding ground strap to between 16 and 20 lb-
{. Remove and discard gasket. Use new in (1.86 to 2.2 N.m) (view D).
gasket during installation. NOTE
/. Remove four screws, lockwashers, and Two people are required when
nuts securing ring and ground strap to case, installing the blower assembly;
and remove ring (view D). one person inside, and one out
side of the turret.
5-23. Installation (Fig 5-8). c. Position new gasket on blower assem
bly and lower blower assembly into position
a. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in on turret. Secure mounting ring to turret
OFF position. with six lockwashers and screws (view C).
b. Position ring and ground strap on case d. Apply sealing compound (item 25, Appen
of replacement blower assembly and secure with dix C) to rim of ventilating blower cover. Position
four screws, lockwashers, and nuts. Torque screw ventilating blower cover on turret and secure with

SCREW (4) »ING

lOCKWASHJR (4)
NUT (4)

GROUND STRAP

Figure 5-8. Removal and installation of turret ventilator blower.

Change 2 5-13
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

four screws (view B). Tighten screws to 100-125 f. Connect electrical cable connector to
Ib-ft (136-169 N m). blower assembly (view A).
e. Install new rubber insulating tape (1/32 g. Verify that blower operates (TM 9-
inch thick by 2 inches wide) (item 17, Appendix 2350-253-10).
C) on blower assembly (view A), and install silen
cer. Insure that rubber tape is not damaged.

Section VIII, MAINTENANCE OF POWER PACK BLOWER ASSEMBLY

5-24. Description. 5-26. Inspection and Repair.

Inspect tubes, hoses, and gaskets for

The power pack blower assembly is con damage or excessive wear. Replace damaged
nected to the power pack electric drive or excessively worn items. Inspect blower
motor housing by two air ducts. The blower inlets and outlets for obstructions or defor
circulates air through the power pack elec mations. Remove obstructions and straighten
tric-drive motor housing to cool the motor deformations. Inspect for missing or dam
during operation in the stabilized mode. aged mounting hardware. Replace as re
quired.
5-27. Installation (Fig 5-9).
5-25. Removal (Fig 5-9). a. Secure two ducts and gaskets to power
pack motor with eight screws and lock
washers (view B).
a. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in b. Position four clamps on four hoses and
OFF position. connect hoses and two tubes. Position four
b. Remove four screws, lockwashers, and clamps on opposite ends of hoses and secure
flatwashers securing gunner's foot plate. to two blower outlets and two ducts (view B).
Remove foot plate (view A). c. Secure tubes to periscope box by in
c. Disconnect electrical connector from stalling strap with two screws and lock
blower motor (view B). washers (view B). Use spacers as needed,
d. Remove two screws and three lock- but no more than two spacers for each
washers securing two blower assembly straps screw.
to gunner's pedestal (view B). d. Position heat shrinkable tubing over
e. Remove blower assembly ground lead electrical lead. Position electrical lead to
(view B). blower motor terminal and solder (item 27, App.
f. Remove blower and two straps (view C). Slide heat shrinkable tubing over soldered con
B). nection and shrink tubing using heat gun.
g. Remove nut and lock washer securing e. Secure ground lead to blower motor
cable clamp and electrical leads to blower with screw and lockwasher.
motor. Remove cable clamp. f. Position cable clamp around electrical
h. Remove screw and lockwasher se leads and secure with nut and lockwasher.
curing ground lead to blower motor. Remove g. Position blower and ground lead on
ground lead. pedestal and secure to gunner's pedestal (view
i. Unsolder and remove electrical lead A) with two screws and three lockwashers
from blower motor terminal. (view B).
/. Remove two screws, lockwashers, h. Connect electrical connector to
and spacers. Remove strap securing two blower assembly (view B).
tubes to periscope stowage box (view B). i. Position gunner's footplate and secure
k. Remove eight clamps securing four to mount with four flat washers, lockwashers,
hoses to two blower outlets, tubes, and ducts. and screws (view A).
Disconnect two tubes and four hoses (view B).
5-28. Test.
I. Remove two power pack motor ducts
and gaskets by removing eight screws and Perform operational check of power pack
lockwashers (view B). blower assembly (TM 9-2350-253-10).

5-14 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 5-9. Removal and installation of blower assembly.

Change 2 5-15
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section IX. MAINTENANCE OF GU: ER'S CONTROL BOX ASSEMBLY

5-29. Description.
(3) Connect multimeter to connector
The gunner's control box consists of a
pins E and F of elevation and traverse power
housing and cover on which are mounted
switch and circuits 625 and 625 A. With
three toggle switches and associated indica
switch in OFF position, circuit should be
tor lights, an electrical connector, and inter
open. With switch in ON position, continuity
connecting wiring. The ELEV/TRAV POWER
should exist.
switch and indicator light provide control and
monitoring of 28 vdc power applied from the (4) To test diode and circuit 625A,
turret power relay. The MAIN GUN and unscrew elevation and traverse indicator lamp
MACHINE GUN switches, when placed in lens and remove lens and lamp. Ensure box is
OFF position, interrupt the firing circuits; in not grounded. Connect positive multimeter lead
the ON position, firing circuits are completed to contact in light socket and negative lead to
and associated indicator lamps come on. The exterior of box. Resistance should be present.
main gun switch does not prevent firing the Reverse leads and repeat test. Continuity should
main gun with the blasting machine. not be present. If one measurement is at least
100 times larger than the other, circuit 625A and
5-30. Removal (Fig 5-10). diode are serviceable. If measurements are the
a. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in same in both checks, the diode is defective and
OFF position. the lead must be replaced. If circuit tests open,
b. Loosen two screws and lockwashers, make a point-to-point continuity check, using
securing mounting plate to the upper mount wiring diagram (fig 5-12), of circuit 625A between
ing weldment (view A). elevation/traverse power switch and connector
c. Remove two screws, flat washers, and pin E and between elevation/traverse power
lockwashers securing mounting plate to lower switch and indicator lamp. Replace wiring, as re
mounting bracket. Slide the plate down to quired, to correct any open circuits found. If no
clear the upper weldment and tilt the open circuits are found, replace lead.
mounting plate forward.
d. Disconnect electrical connector from NOTE
rear of gunner's control box. Diode is built into lead,
d. Electrical Tests (Fig 5-12).
e. Remove four screws and lockwashers
securing control box to mounting plate and NOTE
remove control box. Proceed with electrical tests
5-31. Tests. only after satisfactory comple
a. Remove cover (fig 5-11). . Remove six tion of continuity tests ( c
screws and lockwashers securing cover to above).
case and pull cover away from case.
b. Visually inspect electrical connector, (1) Install elevation/traverse lamp and
wiring, and components for evidence of dam lens.
age. (2) Place all switches in OFF position.
c. Continuity Test. Using a multimeter, (3) Connect positive lead of a 28-vdc
(para 3-2) perform continuity tests (1) power supply to connector pin A. Connect
through (4) below. If readings are not as negative lead to case ground.
indicated, perform point-to-point tests, using (4) Turn power supply, MAIN GUN
wiring diagram, to isolate a faulty component switch, and MACHINE GUN switch ON and
or circuit (fig 5-12). verify that main gun and machine gun indica
(1) Connect multimeter leads to con tor lamps illuminate (fig. 5-10, view B).
nector pins G and B of machine gun switch (5) Turn power supply off and move
and circuits 103, 103A, and 113. With switch positive lead to connector pin E.
in OFF position, circuit should be open. With (6) Turn power supply and ELEV/TRAV
switch in ON position, continuity should exist. switch ON and verify that elevation/traverse
(2) Connect multimeter leads to con lamp illuminates (fig. 5-10, view B).
nector pins G and C of main gun switch and (7) If any of the indicator lamps fail to
circuits 103, 113, and 113A. With switch in illuminate, disconnect power supply and iso-
OFF position, circuit should be open. With
switch in ON position, continuity should exist.
5-16 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

AR702570
Figure 5-10. Removal, installation, and repair of gunner's control box.

5-17
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

late faulty wiring or components by point to- (2) Solder (item 27, App. C) each end of
point continuity tests using a multimeter and lead to components using wiring diagram (fig 5-12).
wiring diagram (fig 5-12). as a guide. If ground lead is being installed, secure
terminal end to case with screw and two lock
5-32. Disassembly. washers (fig 5-11).
a. Cover (Fig 5-11). Remove six screws (3) Position heat shrinkable tubing
and lockwashers from cover and remove over solder connections and shrink using heat
cover and gasket. gun.
b. Switchesi(Fig5-ll). b. Wiring Harness (Figs 5-11 and 5-12).
(1) Remove insulation from terminals, (1) Position wiring harness and connec
of switch to be removed. tor gasket in case.
(2) Tag and unsolder leads from termi (2) Secure connector to case with four
nals. screws and lockwashers.
(3) Remove nut and lockwasher se (3) Position a piece of heat shrinkable
curing switch to cover and remove switch and tubing 1-inch long over each lead of harness.
seal. (4) Solder (item 27, App. C) harness leads
c. Indicator Lights (Fig 5-11). to component terminals using wiring diagram (fig
(1) Remove insulation from terminals 5-12) as a guide.
to light to be removed. (5) Position heat shrinkable tubing
(2) Tag and unsolder leads from termi over solder connections and shrink using a
nals. heat gun.
(3) Remove nut and lockwasher se c. Indicator Lights (Fig 5-11).
curing light to cover and remove light and (1) Position indicator light, with seal,
seal. through cover and secure with nut and lock
d. Wiring Harness (Fig 5-11). washer.
(1) Remove insulation from wiring har (2) Position a piece of heat shrinkable
ness leads at switches and unsolder connec tubing 1-inch long over leads and solder (item
tions. 27, App. C) leads to light terminals.
(2) Remove four screws and lock- (3) Position heat shrinkable tubing
washers securing connector to case and re over solder connections and shrink using a
move wiring harness and connector gasket. heat gun.
e. Separate Wiring Leads (Fig 5-11). Re d. Switches (Fig 5-11).
move insulation from each end of lead to be NOTE
removed and unsolder connections. If ground If new switch is being installed,
lead is being removed, remove screw and two remove and discard key washer
lockwashers securing ground leads to case. and terminal screws furnished
with switch.
5-33. Cleaning. (1) Position switch, with seal, through
Wipe box and components with a clean cover with keyway located in OFF position
cloth. and secure with nut and lockwasher.
(2) Position a piece of heat shrinkable
5-34. Repair. tubing 1-inch long over leads to be connected
to switch. Solder (item 27, App. C) leads to switch
a. Refer to para 4-15. terminals.
b. Replace all components or wiring (3) Position heat shrinkable tubing
found defective during tests (para 5-31). over solder connections and shrink using a
heat gun.
e. Tests. Perform functional tests as
5-35. Assembly. required, to ensure that the gunner's control
box is restored to a completely serviceable
a. Separate Wiring Leads (Figs 5-11 and condition (refer to TM 9-2350-253-10).
5-12). f. Cover (Fig 5-11). Position cover gasket
(1) Position a piece of heat shrinkable and cover on case and secure with six screws and
tubing, 1-inch long, over each end of lead to lockwashers. Tighten screws between 50-60 lb-
be installed (except terminal end of ground in (lubricated) (5.7-6.8 N.m).
leads).
5-18 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

SCREW (6)
LOCKWASHER (6)

SCREW (4)
^ / LOCKWASHER (4)

CONNECTOR

SCREW
LOCKWASHER (2)

SWITCH (3)
NUT
LOCKWASHER

AR702571

Figure 5-2 J. Gunner's control box disassembly and assembly.

*6. Installation (Fig 5-10).

d. Secure the mounting plate to the lower
a. Position control box on mounting plate mounting bracket with two screws, flat
d secure with four screws and lockwashers washers, and lockwashers. Tighten the upper
lew A). mounting screws.
b. Connect electrical connector. e. Perform main gun and machine gun
c. Slide upper mounting plate screws, firing circuit checks (TM 9-2350-253-10).
skwashers, and threaded plate into slots in
per mounting weldment. Do not tighten
rews.

5-19
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

MACHINEGUN MAIN GUN

INDICATE INDICATOR
LAMP LAMP

ELEV/TRAV
POWER SWITCH

Figure 5-12. Gunner's control box wiring diagram.

Section X. MAINTENANCE OF TURRET POWER RELAY AND CIRCUIT BREAKER BOX

5-37. Description. to turret structure. Remove turret power relay

The turret power relay and circuit breaker and CB box (view B) with mounting brackets and
CB box is mounted on a bracket located on the ground lead attached.
turret platform forward and to the right of the e. Remove four screws and lockwasher
electrical contact ring assembly and directly securing two mounting brackets to turn
beneath the gunner's footrest plate. It contains power relay and CB box and remove bracket
| 10 circuit breakers of the automatic-reset type, from box.
and the control relay for the hydraulic power
supply. 5-39. Installation (Fig 5-13).
a. Secure two mounting brackets to turn
5-38. Removal (Fig 5-13). power relay and CB box with four screws H
lockwashers. Position replacement turn
a. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in power relay and CB box with mounting bracke
OFF position. to turret platform. Secure ground lead, powe
b. Remove four screws, lockwashers, and relay and CB box with four screws M
washers securing gunner's footplate to turret lockwashers (view B).
power relay and CB box, and remove foot b. Connect wiring cable connectors t
plate (view A). the relay box (view B).
c. Disconnect five electrical connectors c. Position gunner's footplate, and seeur
from turret power relay and CB box (view B). with four washers, lockwashers, and sere*
d. Remove four screws and lockwashers (view A).
I securing two mounting brackets and ground lead

5-20 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 5-13. Removal and installation of turret power relay and circuit breaker box.

Section XI. MAINTENANCE OF BLASTING MACHINE

5-40. Description. a. Remove handle, shaft and pin. Use new

handle, shaft and pin for installation, if required.
The blasting machine (auxiliary firing
b. Remove terminal, insulation and shell.
device) is a hand-twist-operated device which
Use new terminal, insulation and shell, if
produces an electrical output through gener
required.
ator action. The gun firing circuits are
bypassed when the blasting machine is used.
The loader's safety switch is not bypassed. 543. Installation (Fig 5-14).
The blasting machine is mounted on a combi
nation gun mount to the left of the gunner's a. Position replacement blasting machine
control assembly. in mounting bracket and secure with screw
and lockwasher (view B).
541. Removal (Fig 5-14). b. Tighten mounting bracket screw (view
B).
a. Disconnect three electrical connectors c. Connect three electrical connectors
(view A). (view A).
b. Remove screw and lockwasher se d. Perform firing circuit test of main gun
curing blasting machine to bracket and re (TM 9-2350-253-10).
move blasting machine (view B).

5-42. Repair (Fig 5-14).

Repair consist of replacement of

handle, shaft pin and electrical terminals.

Change 2 5-21
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section XII. MAINTENANCE OF STABILIZATION CONTROL SELECTOR

5-44. Description. on mounting plate and secure with fo.

The stabilization control selector is screws and lockwashers.
bracket-mounted on the turret wall and pro b. Connect electrical connector.
c. Slide upper mounting plate sow
vides power and stabilization mode toggle
lockwashers, and threaded plate into slots i
switches for operation of the stabilization
upper mounting weldment. Do not tight?
components and control knobs used to null
turret or main gun drift during stabilized screws.
d. Secure the mounting plate to the low?
operation. mounting bracket with two screws, fist
545. Removal (Fig 5-15). washers, and lockwashers. Tighten the tm
upper mounting screws.
a. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in e. Check for proper operation of *
OFF position.
stabilization system (TM 9-2 3 5 0-2 53-10).
b. Loosen two screws and lockwashers
that secure the threaded plate and mounting 547. Inspection and Repair (View B, Fig 515)
plate to upper mounting weldments.
c. Remove two screws, flat washers, and a. Inspect lens for cracks.
lockwashers securing mounting plate to lower b. Remove lens cap and seal. Inspect
mounting bracket. Slide the plate down to seal for damage. Use new seal on installa
clear the upper weldment and tilt the tion, if required.
mounting plate forward. c. Install replacement lens cap and seal
d. Disconnect electrical connector from as required.
rear of the stabilization control selector.
e. Remove four screws and lockwashers Repair consists of replacement of lens np
securing control selector to mounting plate with seals and adhesive-backed identification plate
d. Remove lens cap and seal. Use new sea! os
and remove control selector.
installation. Seal cones with replacement lens cap
5-46. Installation (Fig 5-15). e. Install replacement lens cap and seal as
a. Position replacement control selector required.

5-22
TM 9-2350-253-20-2
TM 9-2,350-253-20-2

Section XIII. MAINTENANCE OF

COMMANDER'S CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY

5-48. Description. 5-49. Removal (Fig 5-16).

The commander's control panel assembly a. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in

consists of a cast aluminum alloy housing and OFF position.
cover, on which are mounted two switches, b. Disconnect the electrical connector
two indicator lights, three electrical from the panel assembly.
connectors, and associated internal wiring c. Remove four screws and lockwashers
components. The POWER ON indicator light and remove the panel assembly.
illuminates when both the MASTER
BATTERY switch, and the CUPOLA POWER 5-50. Repair (Fig 5-16).
switch on the networks box, are placed in the
ON position. The GUN READY indicator Repair consists of replacement of lens cap and
seal, which is part of lens cap.
light illuminates whenever cupola power is
a. Remove lens cap and seal.
available, GUN SAFETY switch is placed in
b. Install new lens cap and seal.
the up position, and the last round switch in
the .50 caliber ammo box is actuated or the 5-51. Installation (Fig 5-16).
LAST ROUND OVERRIDE switch is placed in
the override position. The GUN SAFETY a. Position the panel assembly on its
switch controls 28 vdc power to the M85 mounting bracket and secure with four screws
machine gun firing circuits. The firing and lockwashers.
circuit is interrupted during firing when the b. Connect the electrical connector to
end round of the ammunition belt moves past the panel assembly.
the ramp button (actuator) of the last round c. Verify operation of panel assembly
stop switch. Actuating the LAST ROUND (TM 9-2350-253-10).
OVERRIDE switch will then complete the
firing circuit to permit expending of
remaining rounds.

5-24
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 5-16. Removal and installation of commander's control panel assembly.

5-25
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section XIV. MAINTENANCE OF NETWORKS BOX ASSEMBLY

5-52. Description. 5-54. Installation (Fig 5-17).

The networks box is located on the right a. Position networks box and secure with
turret wall to the right of the commander. It four screws and lockwashers.
provides turret electrical distribution and b. Connect three wiring harness con
contains manually reset circuit breakers to nectors to the networks box.
protect electrical components from electrical c. Place two circuit breakers on the
overload. networks box in ON position.

5-53. Removal (Fig 5-17). 5-55. Repair.

a. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in Repair consists of replacement of cap and
OFF position. seal.
b. Disconnect three wiring harness con a. Remove lens and seal. Use new seal
nectors. for installation, if required.
c. Remove four screws and lockwashers b. Install replacement lens and seal, as
securing box, and remove box. required.

Figure 5-17. Removal and installation of networks box assembly.

5-26
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section XV. MAINTENANCE OF

ELECTRONICS CONTROLLER UNIT (ECU)

5-56. Description. b. Position ECU on mounting bracket and

secure with four mounting bolts.
The Electronics Controller Unit (ECU) is c. Connect electrical connector to stabi
mounted on the turret wall at the com lization controller unit.
mander's station and is connected electrically d. Disengage turret traverse lock and gun
to the stabilization rate sensor assembly, travel lock.
stabilization control selector, traverse and e. Perform gain adjustment (para 5-60) upon
elevation servovalves, and the adjustable re completion of installation.
sistor assembly. The controller unit includes 5-60. Adjustment (Gain) (Fig 5-19).
a dc voltage regulator, timer, power supply,
amplifiers, and gain controls. a. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in
OFF position.
b. Disengage turret traverse lock and gun
travel lock.
c. Loosen 12 captive screws and remove the
cover from the ECU (view A).
d. Loosen two locknuts and rotate the
TRAV and ELEV GAIN potentiometer adjust
ment screws fully counterclockwise (view B).
e. Place the following switches in the ON
positions:
(1) MASTER BATTERY switch.
(2) ELEV/TRAV POWER switch.
(3) Control selector POWER switch.
(4) Control selector STAB switch.
Wait 10 to 20 seconds for STAB indicator
light on control selector to come on.
/. Slowly rotate the TRAV GAIN poten
tiometer adjustment screw clockwise until the tur
Figure 5-18. Removal and installation of ECU. ret begins to oscillate. If no oscillation occurs after
the adjustment screw is turned fully clockwise,
5-57. Removal (Fig 5-18). slowly begin to traverse the turret. While in mo
tion, release the gunner's control handle.
a. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in
OFF position. g. Rotate the TRAV GAIN potentiometer
b. Engage turret traverse lock and gun adjustment screw counterclockwise until the
travel lock. turret oscillation stops.
c. Disconnect electrical connector. h. Slowly rotate the turret 360 degrees to
insure oscillation does not reappear; if it
d. Remove four mounting bolts and remove
ECU from bracket mounted on the turret wall at does, repeat step f at point of oscillation.
the commander's station. i. Tighten locknut (TRAV) (view B).
e. Remove four screws, lockwashers, and / Slowly rotate the ELEV GAIN poten
washers and remove mounting bracket. tiometer adjustment screw (view B) clockwise un
til the main gun begins to oscillate. If no oscilla
5-58. Inspection. tion occurs, slowly begin to elevate or depress the
main gun. With gun still in motion, release the gun
a. Inspect for missing captive screws. ner's control switch.
b. Inspect electrical connectors for dam k. Rotate the ELEV GAIN potentiometer
aged or missing pins. adjustment screw counterclockwise until the
5-59. Installation (Fig 5-18). main gun oscillation stops.
I. Elevate and depress gun through corn
a. Position mounting bracket and secure
with four screws, lockwashers, and washers.
Change 4 5-27
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

plete travel to assure oscillation does not (3) Turret ELEV/TRAV POWER
reappear. If it does, repeat step j. switch*
m. Tighten locknut (ELEV) (view B). (4) MASTER BATTERY switch.
n. Place the following switches in the o. Reinstall the ECU cover and secure with 12 |
OFF positions: captive screws (view A).
(1) Control selector STAB switch.
(2) Control selector POWER switch.

Figure 5-19. Adjustment of ECU.

I

Section XVI. MAINTENANCE OF STABILIZATION RATE SENSOR ASSEMBLY

5-61. Description. d. Remove three screws and lockwashers

holding bracket to rate sensor and separate
The stabilization rate sensor assembly bracket and rate sensor (view B).
contains traverse and elevation axes rate
gyros, an amplifier-demodulator for each 5-63. Inspection.
axis, and associated internal circuitry. The Inspect housing and components for
rate sensor is connected electrically to the damage or looseness.
1 ECU and the turret traversing and elevation
servovalves. 5-64. Installation (Fig 5-20).

5-62. Removal (Fig 5-20). a. Attach mounting bracket to stabiliza

tion rate sensor assembly with three lock
a. Place MASTER BATTERY in OFF washers and screws (view B).
position. b. Position bracket and rate sensor on
b. Disconnect electrical connector from gun mount and secure with two lockwashers
stabilization rate sensor assembly (view A). and screws (view A).
c. Remove two screws and lockwashers c. Connect electrical connector to rate
securing rate sensor mounting bracket to gun sensor (view A).
mount and remove rate sensor and bracket d. Verify proper operation of stabiliza
(view A). tion system (TM 9-2350-253-10).

5-28 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section XVII. MAINTENANCE OF LOADER'S

SAFETY SWITCH
5-65. Description.
Located on the left side of the combina
tion gun mount, the loader's safety switch
assembly provides protection against acci
dental firing of the main gun during perform
ance of the loading procedure. When the
switch operating lever is in the SAFE posi
tion, an electrically open circuit is presented
to the firing voltage for the main gun. When
the operating lever is in the FIRE position,
the firing circuit is completed through closed
electrical contacts of the switch. Release of
the switch from FIRE position is accom
plished by either main gun recoil or manually
by a latch release lever. Major components
of the loader's safety switch assembly are:
(1) operating lever, (2) slide assembly, and (3)
switch assembly.
5-66. Removal (View A, Fig 5-21).

WARNING
Verify that main gun and 7.62-
mm machine gun are unloaded.
a. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in
OFF position.
b. Place main gun in gun travel lock (TM
9-2350-253-10).
c. Disconnect three electrical connec
tors.
d. Remove screw and two lockwashers secur
ing ground lead and switch leads clamp.
e. Remove ground lead and switch leads
clamp.
f. Remove three screws and lockwashers
attaching guard and loader's safety switch assembly
to combination gun mount.
g. Remove guard and safety switch assembly.
h. Remove three screws and lockwashers
securing loader's guard and remove guard.

5-67. Disassembly (View B, Fig 5-21).

a. Remove two screws and lockwashers
securing switch lead clamps to switch plate
and remove clamps.
b. Remove two screws, nuts, and lock
washers securing switch to switch plate and
AK702580
remove switch.
c. Remove spring from operating lever
and switch plate.
d. Remove two screws and nuts securing
Figure 5-20 Removal and installation of guides and brace to switch plate and remove
stabilization rate sensor. brace, two guides, and slide.

Change 2 5-29
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

SCREW (2)

SPRING
PIN

SWITCH ADJUSTMENT SCREW JAM NUT

I

Figure 5-21. Removal, installation and repair of loader 's safety switch.

5-30
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

e. Remove spring pin securing operating (1) Two screws with jam nuts (fig 5-22)
er pin to switch plate and remove pin and require plastic coating compound (item 7, App. C)
crating lever. be applied to entire length of threads to a depth of
f. Remove jamnut and switch adjustment approximately 80 percent of thread depth.
e w from operating lever. (2) Allow to cure at 72°F (22°C) from 6
g. Remove spring from slide. to 24 hours or at 200°F (93°C) for ten minutes.
h. Remove jamnut and slide stop adjustment (3) For other screws, except clamp
ew from slide. retaining screws which do not require
coating, apply plastic coating compound
(item 7, App. C) for a minimum of 1-1/2
>8. Repair and Service. times thread diameter from screw end. Cure
as in (2) above.
a. It loader's safety switch assembly compon-
t screws (fig 5-22) require individual replacement, b. Replace other component parts as required.
ply plastic coating compound (item 7, App. C) c. Remove dirt and other foreign matter from
follows: all metal surfaces.
d. Lubricate in accordance with LO 9-2350-
253-12.

SLIDE

NUT SCREW

A B

C AMC 833378
Figure 5-22. Adjustment of loader's safety switch assembly.

Change 2 5-31
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

5-69. Assembly (View B, Fig 5-21). jamnut and, using a 0.005 inch feeler gage i
shim, adjust screw to obtain 0.005 ♦ 0.005
a. Install operating lever and pin on
inch gap between slide and slide stop (viei
switch plate. Secure lever pin with spring
B).
pin.
b. Position slide, two guides, and brace e. Maintain slide stop adjustment screw
on switch plate with operating lever between position (view B) and tighten jamnut with a
guides. Secure brace and guides to switch 9/16-inch wrench.
plate with two screws and nuts. f. With lever in FIRE position, looses
c. Install operating lever spring. jamnut on switch adjustment screw (view A).
d. Install jam nut on switch adjustment screw g. Rotate switch adjustment screw
and install onto operating lever. clockwise until double clicks of switches
e. Install slide spring. activating is heard.
f. Install jam nut on slide slip adjustment
screw and install screw into slide stop.
g. Position switch on switch plate and
WARNING:
secure with two screws, nuts, and lock-
Verify that main gun and 7.62-
washers.
mm machine gun are unloaded
h. Secure switch leads to switch plate
and loader's safety switch lever
with two clamps, screws, and lockwashers.
is in SAFE position (view C).
5-70. Installation (View A, Fig 5-21). h. Place MASTER BATTERY and ELEV
/TRAV POWER switches in OFF position.
CAUTION i. Connect firing circuit tester in main
Do not damage, twist, or distort
gun firing circuitry (TM 9-2350-253-10).
electrical wiring to switch as /. Place MASTER BATTERY and ELEV
sembly.
/TRAV POWER switches in ON position.
k. Place MAIN GUN switch on gunner's
a. Position loader's safety switch assem
switch box in ON position and verify that
bly and guard and secure with three lock-
washers and screws. Tighten screws to 80-90 MAIN GUN indicator light is ON.
I. Actuate one of trigger switches of
lb-ft (108-122 N.m).
b. Connect three electrical connectors. gunner's control handle. Verify that lamp of
c. Position clamp on three switch leads. Posi firing circuit tester flashes brightly for eacn
tion lockwashers and ground lead under clamp. trigger action. If lamp does flash, rotate
d. Secure ground lead with clamp using screw switch adjustment screw clockwise 1/4 turd
and lockwasher. Repeat this step.
e. Adjust loader's safety switch (para 5-71). m. Place MASTER BATTERY and ELEV
f. Test loader's safety switch (para 5-72). /TRAV POWER switches in OFF position.
n. Actuate blasting machine. Verify
5-71. Adjustment (Fig 5-21). that lamp of firing circuit tester flashes
brightly. If lamp does not flash, rotate
NOTE switch adjustment screw clockwise 1/4 tun
Adjustment steps must be per
and repeat steps j through n.
formed in following sequence. o. Rotate screw one additional turn
a. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in clockwise.
OFF position. p. Maintain switch adjustment screw it
b. Loosen switch adjustment screw and jam- position and tighten jamnut (view A).
nut. Back off screw, counterclockwise to prevent q. Place loader's safety switch in SAFE
contact with switch assembly when lever is in position (view A).
FIRE position.
c. Place lever in FIRE (forward) position
(view A).
d. Loosen slide stop adjustment screw

5-32 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

i-72. Test (View C, Fig 5-22). g. Lift latch release lever and note
that loader's safety switch lever drops to
WARNING SAFE position (view C).
Verify that main gun and 7.62mm h. Actuate one of the trigger switches
machine gun are unloaded and and verify that lamp on firing circuit tester
loader's safety switch lever is in remains off. If tester does light refer to
SAFE position (view C). adjustment of loader's safety switch (para.
5-71).
a. Place MASTER BATTERY and f. Place loader's safety switch in firing
BLEV/TRAV POWER switches in OFF position. position.
b. Connect firing circuit tester into
/. Place MASTER BATTERY and
nain gun firing circuitry (TM 9-2350-253-10).
ELEV/TRAV POWER switches to OFF
c. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in position.
ON position and the loader's safety switch lever
in FIRE position (view C). k. Actuate blasting machine and verify
that lamp of firing circuit tester flashes
d. Place MAIN GUN switch on gunner's
brightly. If tester fails to light, refer to
switch box in ON position and verify that
troubleshooting.
MAIN GUN indicator light is ON.
e. Lift latch release lever and note I. Lift latch release lever and note
that loader's safety switch drops to SAFE that safety switch lever drops to SAFE
position. Place loader's safety switch in FIRE position (view C).
position. m. Actuate blasting machine and verify
f. Actuate, one at a time, the trigger that lamp of firing circuit tester remains off.
switches of gunner's control handle, and verify If tester does light refer to adjustment of
that lamp of firing circuit tester flashes loader's safety switch (para. 5-71).
brightly for each trigger action. If tester n. Remove firing circuit tester (TM 9-
fails to light refer to troubleshooting. 2350-253-10).
Section XVIII. MAINTENANCE OF LOADER'S STABILIZATION
EMERGENCY SHUT-OFF SWITCH BOX ASSEMBLY
5-73. Description. stabilization POWER switch in OFF position.
The loader's emergency stabilization shutoff b. Disconnect electrical connector.
c. Remove two nuts, lockwashers, and|
switch is similar to the commander's shutoff
switch. It allows the loader to turn off the main screws from mounting bracket.
d. Remove shutoff box assembly.
gun stabilization system. The switch is normal
ly used when servicing the machine gun or dur
5-75. Repair (View A, Fig 5-23).
ing the loading operation when the tank is mov
ing and the stabilization system is operating.
During stabilization system operation, the main Repair consists of replacement of lens and
seal.
gun remains relatively on target regardless of
a. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER and stabili
vehicle motion, which creates hazardous gun mo
zation POWER switches in OFF position.
tion when servicing the machine gun or main
b. Unscrew lens cap.
gun. Depressing the switch places the turret
c. Replace lens and seal.
hydraulic system in the normal power mode and
puts the stabilization system on standby.
5-76. Installation (View B, Fig 5-23).
Stabilization system operation must be restored
by the gunner.
a. Position shutoff box assembly onto
mounting bracket and secure with two screws, |
5-74. Removal (View B, Fig 5-23).
lockwashers, and nuts.
a. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch and b. Connect electrical connector.

Change 2 5-33
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 5-23. Loader's stabilization emergency shutoff switch.

5-34
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section XIX. MAINTENANCE OF GUN FIRING RELAY ASSEMBLY

5-77. Description.

The gun firing relay assembly consists of

four relays and associated circuitry enclosed
in a sealed box with an attached mounting
plate. The four relays and associated circuits
provide a safety (dead man) firing control
function for the main gun and a firing control
function for the coax machine gun. Three of
the relays are so timed and interconnected in
the main gun firing circuit that they provide
a firing pulse of from 0.1 to 0.5 seconds in
duration for each actuation of one of the
trigger switches. A firing pulse cannot be
generated unless the trigger switch is fully
released and then actuated. This safety (dead
man) switching prevents detonation of sub
sequently loaded rounds until the trigger
switch has been released after firing a pre
viously loaded round. The fourth relay
controls the M240 machine gun solenoid and
is actuated when the MACHINE GUN switch Figure 5-24. Removal and installation of
on the gunner's switch box is placed in the ON gun firing relay box.
position, and a trigger switch is actuated.
Electrical interface between relay assembly
and turret electrical system is provided
through an eight-pin connector, mounted on washers securing relay box to mounting
one side of the gun firing relay assembly. bracket and remove relay box.
The gun firing relay assembly is mounted on
the right side and in the forward area of the 5-79. Installation (Fig 5-24).
turret.
5-78. Removal (Fig 5-24). a. Position relay box on mounting bracket
and secure with six lockwashers and four
a. Place MASTER BATTERY and capscrews.
ELEV/TRAV POWER switches in OFF b. Connect cable connector to gun firing
position. relay box.
b. Disconnect cable connector. c. Perform main gun and machine gun
c. Remove four capscrews and six lock- electrical tests (table 2-1).

Section XX. MAINTENANCE OF

ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) FILTER

5-80. Description.

The larger EMI filter located on the turret motor, and trigger firing switches. These
wall minimizes electrical interference that undesirable signals are minimized by the EMI
may be picked up from the turret electrical filter before they reach the STABILIZATION
wiring harness. Such electrical interference ELECTRONICS and cause undesirable re
may be caused by hydraulic system pump sponses or malfunctions to the gun or turret.
motor, vent blower motor, power pack blower

Change 2 5-35
TM 9-2350-253-20-2
5-81. Removal (Fig 5-25). 5-82. Installation (Fig 5-25).
a. Place MASTER BATTERY and
ELEV/TRAV POWER switches in OFF a. Position replacement EMI filter on
position. mounting bracket and secure with three flat
b. Disconnect two electrical connectors. washers, lockwashers, and capscrews.
c. Remove three screws, lockwashers, b. Connect electrical connectors to EMI
and flat washers securing EMI filter to filter assembly.
mounting bracket and remove EMI filter.

AR702585

Figure 6-25. Removal and installation of EMI filter.

5-36
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section XXI. MAINTENANCE OF COMMANDER'S STABILIZATION

EMERGENCY SHUT-OFF SWITCH BOX ASSEMBLY

5-83. Description.
The stabilization shutoff box consists of a
cast aluminum alloy case, and a cover, to
which are mounted a pushbutton switch and
an indicator light. An electrical receptacle
mounted on one end of the housing provides a
means of interfacing the internal circuitry
with the turret electrical system. The
shutoff box provides a visual indication to the
commander, by means of the indicator light,
that the stabilization system has been
engaged. Momentarily depressing the stab
shutoff pushbutton switch disengages the
stabilization system and puts the system in
stand by.
5-84. Removal (View B, Fig 5-26).

a. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch and

stabilization POWER switch in OFF position.
Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF
position.
b. Disconnect electrical connector:
c. Remove nuts and lockwashers, and
remove screws from mounting bracket.
d. Remove stabilization shutoff box as
sembly.

5-85. Installation (View B, Fig 5-26).

- a. Position the stabilization shutoff box

assembly on mounting bracket so that
mounting holes in the bracket and the switch
box are alined.
b. Insert two screws from bottom of
mounting bracket through shutoff assembly,
and secure with nuts and lockwashers.
c. Connect electrical harness connector
Figure 5-26. Removal and installation of
to shutoff assembly.
commander's stabilization
d. Verify that stabilization emergency
emergency shutoff box assembly.
shutoff box assembly functions properly
(table 3-6).
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section XXII. MAINTENANCE OF TURRET VENTILATOR BLOWER

DISTRIBUTION BOX ASSEMBLY
5-86. Description. c. Disconnect and identify electrical con
nectors on circuit breaker (view B).
The turret ventilator blower distribution d. Remove two screws, lockwashers, and
box assembly is located on the turret ceiling nuts securing circuit breaker to distribution
near the commander's domelight. It contains box and remove circuit breaker (view B).
the turret ventilator blower switch, and a e. Remove cover on utility outlet.
utility outlet with circuit breaker. f. Disconnect electrical lead of utility
outlet and identify.
5-87. Removal (View A, Fig 5-27). g. Remove two screws and lockwashers
securing utility outlet and chain to
a. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in distribution box and remove utility outlet.
OFF position, and disconnect .two electrical
connectors. 5-89. Repair.
b. Remove four screws, washers, and
lockwashers securing distribution box to Replace worn or defective parts.
mounting pads, and remove distribution box.
5-90. Assembly (Fig 5-27).
5-88. Disassembly (Fig 5-27).
a. Position utility outlet and chain on
a. Remove two nuts and washers (view B) distribution box and secure with two screws
securing wire leads to turret ventilator and lockwashers.
blower switch. (Identify and remove wire b. Connect electrical lead identified in
leads from switch.) step f (para 5-88).
b. Remove two screws and lockwashers c. Install cover on utility outlet.
securing turret ventilator blower switch to d. Position circuit breaker on distribution
distribution box and remove turret ventilator box and secure with two screws, lockwashers,
blower switch (view A). and nuts (view A).

Figure 5-27. Removal, installation, and repair of turret ventilator blower distribution
box assembly.

5-38
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

e. Connect electrical connectors re 5-91. Installation (view A, Fig 5-27).

moved in step c (para 5-88) to circuit breakers
(view B).
f. Position turret ventilator blower a. Position distribution box and secure to
switch on distribution box and secure with mounting pads with four lockwashers, flat
two screws and lockwashers (view A). washers, and screws.
g. Secure wire leads removed in step a b. Connect two electrical connectors to
(para 5-88) to turret ventilator blower switch with distribution box.
two nuts and washers (view B).

5-39/540 (Blank)
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CHAPTER 6

MAINTENANCE OF TURRET PLATFORM

AND BASKET EQUIPMENT

Section I. MAINTENANCE OF COMMANDER'S SEAT

•1. Description. assembly slot. This reduces the spring ten
The commander's seat consists of a cylin- sion on the support assembly.
ical steel support assembly, seat, backrest, b. Remove three screws and lockwashers
id platform. The support assembly is securing seat and backrest assembly to seat
ounted to the turret platform and contains support assembly and remove the seat and
spring-loaded seat adjusting assembly to backrest assembly (view A).
tiich the support bracket of the seat and a b. l Remove two bolts and washers
otrest platform are attached. A locking securing guard assembly to turret. Remove
indie on the support assembly may be lifted guard assembly (view A).
permit raising or lowering of the seat and c. Remove bolt and washer securing
ring-loaded adjusting assembly. The seat upper bracket of seat support assembly to
id support bracket are pivotal and spring- turret (view A).
aded, and fold back when not in use. Seat
id backrest are fabricated of metal and NOTE
wered with rubber padding and vinyl If engine is removed, access to
>vered fabric. the seat support assembly
-2. Removal (Fig 6-1). attaching hardware can be ac
complished from the engine
WARNING
compartment with the main gun
Seat support assembly is under
positioned forward on turret
spring tension. Do not pull
centerline. Otherwise, it is
height adjusting handle unless
necessary to rotate the turret
someone is sitting in seat,
until seat support assembly is
a. Sit in seat and pull height adjusting
accessible from the driver's
andle, releasing locking pin from retaining
compartment as shown (view B).
ale in inner tube assembly. Slowly transfer
jur weight from seat until footrest platform d. Remove two screws, washers, and
ses to the full extent of travel in support nuts securing lower seat support assembly to

AMC833020
Figure 6-1. Removal and installation of commander's seat.

Change 2 6-1
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

SEAT COVER SKIRT

RETAINING
FRAME

REPLACE RUBBER
IF NECESSARY
SEAT FRAME

AR7025?C

Figure 6-2. Disassembly and assembly of commander's seat (1 of 3).

fi-2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

turret platform and remove seat support to platform and remove plunger assembly
assembly (view B). (view K, fig 6-2).
o. Remove screw, washer, and nut secur
6-3. Disassembly (Figs 6-2 and 6-3). ing handle assembly to outer tube and remove
handle assembly (view L, fig 6-2).
a. Remove cotter pins (view A, fig 6-2). p. Remove spring pin securing pin re
WARNING tainer washer, spring, and seat adjusting
Spring is under 180 lb-in (20.3 locking pin to outer tube, and remove re
N-m) of torque. Proceed with tainer washers, spring, and locking pin (view
caution to avoid personnel M, fig 6-2).
injury. WARNING
b. Tap pivot pin through support bracket Seat support assembly and
and remove pin and spring with sleeve (view mount are under spring tension.
B, fig 6-2). Use care when removing set-
c. Remove spring from sleeve (fig 6-3). screws, and when removing sup
d. Remove seat and backrest assembly port assembly from mount,
from seat mounting support bracket (view B, q. Scribe a continuous line on mount and
fig 6-2). support assembly. Remove two setscrews
e. Remove four screws and lockwashers securing support assembly to mount (view N,
securing seat support to seat frame and fig 6-2). Maintain hand pressure on support
remove seat support (view C, fig 6-2). mount and gently tap mount to free support
NOTE tension. Separate support assembly from
If seat support pad is damaged mount and remove spring (view O, fig 6-2).
or deteriorated and requires re r. Slide inner tube assembly out of outer
placement, remove pad and tube assembly (view O, fig 6-2).
clean pad mounting surface in
accordance with paragraph 4- 6-4. Cleaning, Inspection, Service, and
12. Repair.
f. Pull molded rubber out of recess in
seat retaining frame (view D, fig 6-2). Clean and inspect components in accord
ance with general maintenance procedures
g. Remove cotter pin from retaining
(chapter 4). Replace damaged or worn parts.
sleeve securing seat cover and pad to seat
retaining frame (view D, fig 6-2) and remove 6-5. Assembly (Figs 6-2 and 6-3).
retaining sleeve, seat cover, and seat pad
(view E, fig 6-2). a. Lubricate inner tube assembly height adjust
h. Remove four screws and lockwashers ing holes with grease (item 15, App. C) (LO 9-
securing backrest support to backrest frame 2350-253-12). Insert inner tube assembly into
and remove backrest support (view G, fig 6- outer tube assembly and insert spring into inner
2). tube assembly (view O, fig 6-2).
U Pull molded rubber out of recess in
WARNING
bacKrest frame (view F, fig 6-2).
When mount is secured onto
/. Remove cotter pin from retaining
outer tube assembly, the seat
sleeve and remove retaining sleeve, backrest
support assembly is under spring
cover, and pad (view H, fig 6-2) .
k. Remove three screws and lockwashers tension.
securing tube stop to inner tube and remove b. Aline scribe marks on mount with
tube stop and platform assembly (view J, fig scribe marks on outer tube assembly. Secure
6-2). outer tube assembly to mount with two
I. Remove four screws and washers se setscrews (view N, fig 6-2).
curing two spring tension clips to platform c. Install seat adjusting locking pin,
assembly and remove spring tension clips spring, and retainer washer on outer support
(view J, fig 6-2). assembly and secure with spring pin (view M,
m. Remove two cotter pins and two pivot fig 6-2).
pins securing footrest to platform and remove d. Compress inner tube assembly until
footrest (view K, fig 6-2). locking pin seats into a seat adjusting hole in
n. Remove four screws, washers, lock the inner tube assembly (view M, fig 6-2).
washers, and nuts securing plunger assembly e. Secure handle assembly to outer tube
6-3
TM 9-2350-253-20-2
SACKREST

MCKREST
MOLDED RO&BER SACKREST COVER

SCWW (4)
WASHC* (4>

PIATFORM
ASSY

Figure 6-2. Disassembly and assembly of commander's seat (2 of 3).

6-4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INNER
TUBE
ASSEM81Y

Figure Disassembly and assembly of commander's seat (3 of 3).

assembly with screw, washer, and nut (view /. Install platform assembly onto inner
L, fig 6-2). tube platform support bar and position tube
f. Secure plunger assembly to platform stop to platform assembly. Secure tube stop
with four screws, lookwashers, and nuts (view and platform assembly to support bar with
K, fig 6-2). three screws and lookwashers (view J, fig 6-
g. Position footreat on platform and 2).
insert two pivot pins (view K, fig 6-2). k. Install replacement backrest pad onto
fu Secure pivot pins to platform with two backrest pad onto backrest frame and bond
cotter pins (view K, fig 6-2). with adhesive (item 3, Appendix C) (view H,
i. Position two spring tension dips on fig 6-2).
platform and secure clips to platform with I. Position backrest cover over backrest
four washers and screws (view J, fig 6*2). pad and secure to backrest frame with
retaining sleeve and cotter pin (view H, fig 6-
6-5
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

RETAINING
SEAT SLEEVE
ASSEMBLY

SCREW
AR702593

Figure 6-3. Commander's seat - exploded view.

0-6
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

m. Secure backrest cover into backrest support bracket until pin enters holes in
frame by inserting molded rubber into recess support bracket (view B, fig 6-2).
of backrest frame (view H, fig 6-2). x. Insert a drift pin through brackets and
ru Secure backrest support to backrest sleeve and place spring in loaded position
frame with four screws and four lockwashers (view B, fig 6-2).
(view G, fig 6-2). y. Tap pivot pin through brackets and
o. Install replacement seat pad to seat sleeve (view B, fig 6-2).
frame and bond with adhesive (item 3, z. Install two cotter pins into pivot pin
App. C) (view C, fig 6-2). (view A, fig 6-2).
p. Position seat cover over seat pad and 6-6. Installation (Fig 6-1).
secure to seat frame with retaining sleeve a. Install support assembly and secure
and cotter pin (view D, fig 6-2). mount to turret platform with two nuts,
q. Fold skirt edge of seat cover over washers, and screws (view B). Nut is acces
outside edge of retaining frame (view E, fig sible either from driver's compartment, or
6-2). from engine compartment if power plant is
r. Insert end of molded rubber in recess removed (view B).
of retaining frame with lip edge over inside b. Position seat support assembly so
edge of retaining frame (view F, fig 6-2). that mounting holes in bracket are alined
s. Press molded rubber into recess until with mounting holes in turret and secure
cover is completely locked in frame (view F, support assembly to turret with bolt and
fig 6-2). washer (view A).
t. Secure seat support to seat frame with b. l Position legs of guard assembly in
four screws and lockwashers (view C, fig 6-2). two retainers on side of ammunition stow
u. Install spring onto sleeve and insert pin age box. Secure guard assembly to turret
into sleeve (fig 6-3). with two bolts and washers. Tighten bolts
v. Position seat and backrest between to 300-350 lb-ft (407-475 N-m).
support bracket (view B, fig 6-2). c. Secure seat assembly to inner tube
w. Insert sleeve with spring between seat assembly with three screws and lockwashers
(view A).
Section n. MAINTENANCE OF COMMANDER'S SWING SEAT
6-7. Description. Clean and inspect components in accord
ance with general maintenance procedures
The commander's swing seat is mounted (chapter 4). Replace damaged or worn parts.
pivotally on a pedestal welded to the turret
roof. A handle on the seat frame locks the
6-11. Assembly.
seat in stowed position or releases it for
use. a. Insert guide, spring, and locking wedge
through handle, (fig 6-5).
6-8. Removal (Fig 6-4). b. Compress spring and position handle on
commander's swing seat. Secure with capscrew,
Remove nut and two washers securing flat washer, and self-locking nut (fig 6-5).
commander's swing seat to pedestal; remove pedes
c. Fold skirt edge Of seat cover over
tal (view A).
outside edge of retaining frame (view F, fig
6-2).
6-9. Disassembly (Figs 6-4 and 6-5).
d. Insert end of molded rubber in recess
a. Remove cotter pin and retaining of retaining frame with lip edge over inside
sleeve and pull molded rubber out of recess in edge of retaining frame (view F, fig 6-2).
retaining frame (view D, fig 6-2). e. Install seat cover and retaining sleeve.
b. Remove seat cover (view E, fig 6-2). Secure sleeve with cotter pin (view G, fig 6-
c. Remove capscrew, flat washer, and 2).
self-locking nut from handle (fig 6-5).
d. Remove guide, spring, and locking
wedge from handle (fig 6-5). 6-12. Installation (Fig 6-4).

6-10. Cleaning, Inspection, Service, and Re Position commander's swing seat, and secure to
pair. pedestal with two washers and nut (view A).

Change 2 6-7
TM 9-2350-253-20-2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 6-5. Commander's swing seat - exploded view.

Section III. MAINTENANCE OF GUNNER'S SEAT AND PEDESTAL ASSEMBLY

6-13. Description. 6-14. Removal (Fig 6-6).

The gunner's seat and pedestal assembly a. Remove backrest and lift seat assem
(fig 6-6) consists of a cylindrical steel pedes bly (view A).
tal, support assembly, seat, backrest, and b. Remove blower assembly (para 5-25).
adjusting knobs and handles. A handle on the c. Remove four screws, lockwashers, and
pedestal releases the spring-loaded support flat washers, and remove pedestal (view B).
assembly to permit raising or lowering of the
seat. Adjusting knobs permit changing of the 6-15. Disassembly (Fig 6-7 and 6-8).
tilt or height of the seat backrest. Seat and
backrest are fabricated of metal and covered a. Disassembly of Backrest Assembly.
with rubber padding and vinyl covered fabric. (1) Remove cotter pin from straight

6-9
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

pin. Remove straight pin from backrest arate knob adjusting assembly from support
bracket. Remove backrest and bracket. bracket.
(2) Remove cotter pin and flat washer (5) Remove clevis from adjusting- knob.
from locking plate welded nut and remove (6) Remove locknut and flat washer
adjusting knob and lockwasher from locking securing adjusting knob block to adjusting
plate. knob and remove block from adjusting knob.
(3) Remove two cotter pins from two (7) Remove cotter pin from seat cover
backrest cover retaining sleeves. Remove retainer and remove retainer and seat cover.
retaining sleeves and backrest cover.

Figure 6-6. Removal and installation of gunner's seat and pedestal.

i
(4) Remove molded rubber from recess (8) Remove molded rubber from recess
in backrest frame and remove seat back pad. in seat pan assembly.
(9) Remove rubber pad from seat pan
b. Disassembly of Seat Assembly (Fig 6-8).
assembly.
(1) Slide backrest support from support c. Disassembly of Gunner's Seat Pedestal.
backrest.
(2) Remove cotter pin from straight The support assembly is under
pin securing support bracket to seat assembly spring tension and caution
and remove straight pin. should be exercised to prevent
(3) Remove cotter pin from straight injury to personnel.
pin securing knob adjusting clevis to seat NOTE
assembly and remove straight pin, bracket, The seat assembly may be used
and knob adjusting assembly. to apply a downward pressure
(4) Remove cotter pin from straight on the support spring when re
pin securing knob adjusting assembly to sup leasing the height locking
port bracket and remove straight pin. Sep- handle.

8-10
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 6-7. Disassembly and assembly of gunner's seat and pedestal (1 of 2).

(1) Apply downward pressure on the flat washer securing angle adjustment handle
support assembly and release height locking to support assembly.
handle. Gently release the pressure on the (4) Remove spring pin from angle
support spring until the spring is fully re locking pin and remove handle, locking pin,
laxed. spring retainer, and spring from support
(2) Remove setscrew and lockwasher assembly.
and remove support and support spring from (5) Remove screw, locknut, and flat
pedestal. washer securing height adjustment handle to
(3) Remove capscrew, locknut, and pedestal.

6-11
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 6-7. Disassembly and assembly of gunner's seat and pedestal (2 of 2).

6-12
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(6) Remove spring pin from height b. Assembly of Seat Assembly.

locking pin and remove handle, locking pin,
WARNING
spring retainer, and spring from pedestal. The support assembly is under
spring tension. Do not inad
6-16. Cleaning, Inspection, Service, and Re vertently release locking pin
pair. during the following steps. If it
is necessary to adjust height,
compress spring with body
Clean and inspect components in accord weight or downward pressure,
ance with general maintenance procedures release locking pin, and grad
(chapter 4). Replace damaged or worn parts. ually release or compress sup
port assembly to the desired
6-17. Assembly (Fig 6-8). height and engage locking pin.
(1) Install block to adjusting knob and
a. Assembly of Gunner's Seat Pedestal. secure with flat washer and locknut.
(1) Insert locking pin in height adjust (2) Thread clevis onto adjusting knob.
ment handle. (3) Position knob adjustment assembly
(2) Place spring over locking pin and into support bracket and aline pin holes.
place spring retainer over spring. (4) Secure knob adjustment assembly
(3) Position handle locking pin into pin to support bracket with straight pin and
hole on pedestal and secure locking pin to install cotter pin into straight pin.
pedestal with spring pin. (5) Position knob adjusting clevis to
(4) Aline holes on handle with holes in seat assembly and aline pin holes.
pedestal and secure height adjustment handle (6) Secure knob adjusting clevis to seat
to pedestal with screw, flat washer, and assembly with straight pin, and install cotter
locknut. pin into straight pin.
(5) Insert locking pin in angle adjust (7) Position support bracket to seat
ment handle. assembly and aline pin holes.
(6) Place spring over locking pin and (8) Secure support bracket to seat as
place spring retainer over spring. sembly with straight pin and install cotter pin
(7) Position handle locking pin into pin into straight pin.
hole on support assembly and secure locking (9) Slide backrest support into support
pin to support assembly with spring pin. bracket.
(8) Aline holes on handle with holes on (10) Install rubber pad to seat pan as
support and secure angle adjustment handle sembly.
to support with capscrew, flat washer, and (11) Install molded rubber into recess on
locknut. seat pan assembly.
(9) Insert support spring into pedestal. (12) Position seat cover and secure to
Pull height adjustment handle out to allow seat pan assembly with retainer and cotter
spring to fall to bottom. pin.
(10) Insert support assembly into pedes c. Assembly of Backrest Assembly.
tal and compress spring and adjust position of (1) Install backrest pad to backrest
support assembly until height locking pin frame.
releases into support hole at desired height. (2) Install molded rubber into recess in
backrest frame.
NOTE (3) Install backrest cover to backrest
When height adjustment locking and secure with two retainers and two cotter
pin is released and seated in pins.
hole in support, setscrew will (4) Place lockwasher over adjusting
automatically be positioned in knob threaded end.
alinement slot when installed in (5) Position backrest bracket on ad
pedestal. justing knob.
(6) Position backrest bracket and ad
(11) Install lockwasher and setscrew justing knob to support assembly.
into pedestal. (7) Position locking plate to adjusting

6-13
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

RETAINER . COTTER PIN

LOCKING PLATE
WITH WELDED SELF-
LOCKING NUT

STRAIGHT PIN

STRIGHT PIN
BLOCK
LOCKNUT

COTTER
PIN (2)

HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
LOCKING PIN

AR702399

Figure 6-8. Gunner's seat pedestal - exploded v(ew.

6-14
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

knob threaded end that protrudes through the 6-18. Installation (Fig 6-6). >
slot in the support assembly.
(8) Turn adjustment knob counter a. Position pedestal on turret floor and
clockwise into the locking plate welded nut secure with four washers, lockwashers, and
until the locking plate, bracket, and adjusting screws (view B).
knob are secure to the support assembly. b. Install blower assembly (para 5-27).
(9) Position backrest to backrest c. Lower seat assembly on pedestal, and
bracket and aline mounting holes. install backrest (view A).
(10) Secure backrest to backrest
bracket with straight pin and cotter pin.
Section IV. MAINTENANCE OF LOADER'S SEAT

Section IV. MAINTENANCE OF LOADER'S frame (view M, fig 6-9) and separate cover
SEAT and pad from frame.
6-19. Description. h. Remove molded rubber from seat
frame.
The loader's seat assembly (fig 6-9) I. Remove cotter pin and retaining
consists of a ' seat, backrest, two support sleeve from seat assembly and separate cover
assemblies, and attaching parts. Backrest and pad from frame. \
and support bracket mount to the turret ring
with dowel pins or on the turret traverse 6-22. Cleaning, Inspection, Service, and Re
lock. The seat is attached to a second pair.
support bracket which is pivotally attached to
Clean and inspect components in accord
the backrest bracket. Seat and backrest are
ance with general maintenance procedures
fabricated of metal and covered with rubber
(chapter 4). Replace damaged or worn parts.
padding and vinyl covered fabric.
6-20. Removal (Fig 6-9). 6-23. Assembly (Fig 6-10).
Lift seat off dowel pins to remove (view a. Assemble seat cover, pad, and frame
A). and secure with retaining sleeve and cotter
6-21. Disassembly (Figs 6-9 and 6-10). pin.
a. Remove two washers and flat washers b. Install molded rubber into seat frame.
(view B, fig 6-9). c. Install molded rubber into backrest
WARKWQ frame (view M, fig 6-9).
Spring is under 45 lb-in (5.09 d. Position backrest frame, pad, and
N m) of torque. Handle cau cover together and secure to support bracket
tiously to avoid injury. with three hex nuts and lockwashers.
b. Partially tap out pin until it is free of e. Install spring on spring support and
hole in support bracket (view C, fig 6-9). install pin into support (fig 6-10).
c. Pull back assembled spring and spring /. Assemble support bracket, seat sup
support cautiously until U-shaped portion of port plate, spring, and spring support (view H,
spring clears back of seat support plate, fig 6-9). 1
snapping into unloaded position (view D, fig g. Aline holes in support bracket and
6-9). supporting plate and tap pin in place (view :H,
d. Remove pin and spring support along fig 6-9).
with spring (view E, fig 6-9) and disassemble h. Twist support plate and support
pin, sleeve and support (fig 6-10). bracket until spring drops over support
e. Remove four capscrews and lock- bracket (view G, fig 6-9).
washers securing seat support plate to seat i. Install x-washers and flat washers to
assembly. Remove seat support plate and hold spring in place (view B, fig 6-9).
seat assembly. /. Install seat assembly on seat support
f. Remove three hex nuts and lock- plate with four capscrews and lockwashers.
washers securing support bracket to backrest
assembly. Remove support bracket and back 6-24. Installation (Fig 6-9).
rest assembly.
g. Remove molded rubber from backrest Install seat on dowel pins (view A).

6-15
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

6-16
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 6-9. Removal, disassembly, assembly, and installation of loader's seat (2 of 2).

6-17
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 6-10. Loader's seat - exploded view.

Section V. MAINTENANCE OF TURRET TRAVERSE LOCK ASSEMBLY

6-25. Description.

The turret traverse lock is located on the

left side of the turret race assembly ring.
Engagement of the lock prevents traversing
of the turret in either direction. The lock is
manually operated by means of a spring-
loaded detent lever and a handle. Depressing
the lever permits rotation of the handle for
either engaging or disengaging the teeth of
the lock bolt with the race assembly pinion
gear of the turret.

6-26. Removal (Fig 6-11).

a. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in

OFF position and engage gun travel lock.
b. Remove four screws and dowels. Figure 6-11. Removal and installation of
c. Remove turret traverse lock assembly. turret traverse lock assembly.

6-18
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

6-27. Installation (Fig 6-11). f. Press down on lever assembly to com

press spring. Remove pivot pin.
a. Position turret traverse lock assembly
g. Slowly release pressure on lever
on turret ring.
assembly and remove lever assembly and
b. Secure lock to turret with four
spring from handle.
screws and dowels. Tighten screws to 160-
h. Inspect pins in lever and handle assem
165 lb-ft (217-223 N-m). blies and replace as necessary.
i. Put spring on handle assembly.
6-28. Repair (Fig 6-12).
j. Place lever assembly on top of spring
and engage lever in groove of handle assem
a. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in
bly.
OFF position and engage gun travel lock.
k. Press down on lever assembly to com
b. Place handle midway between
press spring and install pivot pin to secure
LOCKED and UNLOCKED positions. Re
lever assembly to handle assembly. Install
move nut and flat washer from actuating
new cotter pin to secure pivot pin.
shaft.
I. Position assembled handle on housing
c. Remove assembled handle with shaft
and install shaft.
from housing.
m. Install flat washer and new nut to
d. Remove shaft from assembled handle.
secure shaft in housing.
e. Remove cotter pin securing pivot pin.

NUT

Figure 6-12. Turret traverse lock assembly repair.

Change 2 6-19
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section VI. MAINTENANCE OF TURRET BLISTERS

Section VI. MAINTENANCE OF TURRET 6-31. Repair of Right Blister.

BUSTERS
a. Replace locking pin and or locking pin
6-29. Description.
assembly as required. Inspect for damage.
There are two turret blisters, one on each WARNING
side of the turret. The right blister provides Do not paint inside surface of
ballistic protection of the laser rangefinder door. Special painting proce
end housing. dures are required.
6-30. Removal of Right Blister. b. Replace door if distorted or damaged
a. Remove receiver-transmitter unit or if inside painted surface is damaged,
from outboard bearing support (refer to para scratched, chipped, or cracked.
15-102). c. Remove cotter pin and washer
b. Loosen and remove four screws and securing hinge pin and door to blister. Re
lockwashers securing outboard bearing sup move door.
port to turret wall and remove outboard d. Replace blister as required.
bearing support (fig 15-31, view C).
CAUTION 6-32. Removal of Left Blister.
Removal of blister requires one
person outside the turret to CAUTION
hold and support blister being Removal of blister requires one
removed, and one person inside person outside the turret to
the turret to remove hex-socket hold and support blister being
screws. removed and one person inside
c. Remove five hex-socket screws using the turret to remove hex-socket
fabricated tool (item 3, table 1-1) that secure screws.
blister to turret and remove blister (fig 6-13).

Figure 6-13. Right turret blister.

6-20
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

a. Loosen and remove five screws and with five hex-socket screws using fabricated
lockwashers securing cover and blister to tool (3, table 1-1) and tighten to 125 lb-ft (169
turret. Remove blister. N«m) minimum.
b. Thoroughly clean mating surface of d. Position outboard bearing support on
blister and turret of all sealing materials, turret wall and secure with four screws and
oil, residue, and contaminants. lockwashers. Tighten bolts to 58 + 8 lb-ft (79
6-33. Repair of Left Blister. + 11 N-m).
e. Install receiver-transmitter unit to
outboard bearing support (para 15-103).
Replace blister as required. Inspect for
cracks.
6-35. Installation of Left Blister.
6-34. Installation of Right Blister. NOTE
Door is on right blister only.
a. Secure door to blister with hinge, pin, CAUTION
washer, and cotter pin. (Door should have Installation of blister requires
black paint on inside surface.) one person outside the turret to
b. Check operation of door. Replace if hold and support blister being
necessary. installed and one person inside
CAUTION the turret to install the hex-
Installation of blister requires socket screws.
one person outside the turret to a. Apply 1/8" bead of sealing compound
hold and support blister being (item 25.1, App. C) uniformly to mating sur
installed and one person inside face of cover.
the turret to install the hex- b. Position cover and blister on turret
socket screws. and secure with five screws and lock
c. Position blister and secure to turret washers. Tighten screws to 125 lb-ft (169
N.m) minimum.

Section VII. MAINTENANCE OF TURRET PLATFORM BATTERY ACCESS DOOR

6-36. Description. e. Remove two screws and nuts and

remove latch plate from turret platform
The turret platform battery access door is (view D).
located on the turret platform. Raising the 6-38. Installation of Hinge and Catch (Fig
door provides access to the vehicle batteries. 6-14).
6-37. Removal of Hinge and Catch (Fig a. Position hinge and secure with three
6-14). washers, lockwashers, and screws (view C).
b. Position latch plate on turret platform
a. Using the ring as a handle, unscrew and secure with two screws and nuts
and remove the stud and washer (view A). (View D).
b. Remove catch assembly by detaching c. Secure turret platform battery access
four nuts and screws (view B). door to hinge with three nuts, washers, and
c. Remove three screws, washers, and screws (view C).
nuts and remove turret platform battery d. Secure catch assembly to turret
access door (view C). platform access door with four screws and
d. Remove three screws, lockwashers, nuts (view B).
and washers; remove hinge. e. Using the ring as a handle, secure the
stud into the turret platform battery access
door with a screw and washer (view A).

Change 2 6-21
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

6-22
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CHAPTER 7

MAINTENANCE OF DOORS AND PORTS

Section I. MAINTENANCE OF LOADER'S

HATCH ASSEMBLY

7-1. Description. 7-3. Installation of Hatch Seal (Fig 7-1).

The loader's hatch door consists of homo a. Scrape seal groove on rim of hatch
geneous steel casting mounted on a spring- with a wire brush; remove oil, grease, ce
loaded hinge. A pivoting handle and lever ment, paint, or other contaminants.
assembly on the rim of the door permit
latching and locking of the hatch in the WARNING
closed position. A second handle mounted Work area should be well venti
near the hinge serves to lock the hatch door lated to reduce toxicity caused
in the open position. Near the center of the by solvents. Do not smoke in
door is a circular, removable plate to which is work area. Solvents and
attached the loader's periscope mount assem bonding adhesive are toxic and
bly. flammable.
b. Using a narrow brush or suitable ap
plicator, apply a thin coat of adhesive (item
7-2. Removal of Hatch Seal (Fig 7-1).
4, App. C) to the bonding surface of hatch
rim and seal.
Open hatch cover; pry seal loose from rim
c. Allow adhesive to set until it be
of hatch.
comes tacky, then fit seal into place.

AR702607

Figure 7-1. Replacement of loader's hatch seal.

Change 2 7-1
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

7-4. Removal of Hatch Door (Fig 7-2). g. Install seal and gasket on periscope
mount (view F). Use adhesive (item 4, App. C) to
a. Raise hatch door to a full-open posi secure in Dlace.
tion to provide minimum torque on leaf h. Install periscope mount assembly into
torsion spring (view D). hatch assembly (view E).
b. Remove eight screws securing the i. Position shims and retaining plate and
two end covers and caps (view C). secure with three screws and lockwashers.
c. Remove end covers and caps (view D).
d. Remove shims (if used), tube, and 7-8. Replacement of Bearings (View G, Fig
torsion spring (view D). 7-2).
e. Remove hatch door (view D).
Drive out old bearings and install replace
7-5. Inspection (Fig 7-1). ment bearings flush with outer edge of
surface or recessed not more than 0.005 inch.
Inspect hatch seal for damage or deterio
ration. Replace if necessary.
7-9. Replacement of Hold-Open Mechanism
7-6. Replacement of Door Hold-Open and Hold-Closed Mechanism (View G,
Handle Clip (View B, Fig 7-2). Fig 7-2).

a. Remove two screws securing clip to a. Disassembly.

hatch and remove clip. (1) Remove bolt securing hold-open
b. Secure clip to hatch with two screws. mechanism to hatch, and remove shim and
hold-open mechanism.
7-7. Replacement of Periscope Mount As (2) Loosen two screws and remove
sembly (Fig 7-2). cover from hold-open mechanism (view H).
(3) Remove two screws, four lock
a. Remove three screws, lockwashers, washers, and two nuts (view H).
and shims securing retaining plate to peri (4) Remove bolt from support and re
scope mount assembly and remove retaining move pin from dog.
plate. (5) Remove pin from cam and remove
NOTE handle, dog, and spring from cam.
On removal of mount assembly,
(6) Remove disk and spring from dog.
note number of shims at each of
(6.1) Remove preformed packing froral
the three mounting holes (view
E). Shims are located between dog. I
retaining plate and mount as (7) Remove bolt securing hold-closed
sembly. mechanism to hatch and remove shim,
b. Remove periscope mount assembly bushing, spring, and shim from hold-closed
from hatch door (view E). Remove seal and mechanism.
gasket (view F). (8) Remove pin from handle and re
c. Remove two screws and remove peri move plate.
scope lid latch, two springs, and two latch b. Assembly.
retainer pins (view F). (1) Aline pin holes of handle and plate
d. Remove two retainer springs, four and secure handle to plate with pin.
screws, and four retainer assemblies (view F). (2) Install spring into handle and plate.
e. Position and install two retainer (3) Insert bushing into handle.
springs, four retainer assemblies, and secure (4) Install bolt and shim into handle
with four screws in periscope mount assembly through bushing.
(view F). (5) Add or remove shims so that rota
f. Position periscope lid latch, two latch tional force needed to engage or disengage
retainer pins, and two springs. Secure with handle does not exceed 20 lbs (at end of
two screws (view F). handle). I

7-2 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

SCREW (2)

SCREW (2)
LOCKWASHER (2) |
WASHER (2)

AR"02i08
Figure 7-2. Removal and installation of loader's hatch assembly components (1 of 3).
(5.1) Remove bolt and apply antiseize (8) Secure spring and handle to cam
ompound (item 26.4, App. C) to threads. Install with pin.
olt and tighten to 110-130 lb-in. (11-15 N.m). (9) Insert pin into dog. Install bolt
into support.
NOTE (10) Install two screws, four lock-
During assembly, coat all washers, and two nuts into support. Do not
threads with sealing compound, tighten screws (view H).
(item 25, App. C) and lubricate (11) Install cover slots onto screws,
all connecting surfaces of dog and tighten two screws and two nuts (view
and slot in hinge lightly with oil, H).
(item 18, App. C) or grease, (12) Secure hold-open mechanism to
(item 15, App. C). hatch with bolt and shim as required to
(6) Install preformed packing, spring provide an 0.015 inch maximum clearance
tnd disk in dog. between cam and cover with no binding or
(7) Install spring into cam and aline interference throughout cam travel.
?in holes on handle with pin holes on cam. (13) Tighten bolt to 110-130 lb-in (11-
15 N.m).

Change 2 7-3
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2
7-10. Installation of HatchDoor (Fig 7-2). (. Remove two screws and lockwashers
a. Position hatch door in vertical position securing retainer and latch assembly (view E);
(for minimum torque when installing leaf remove latch assembly, spring, and shims.
torsion spring) over loader's hatch turret /. Remove three screws, lockwashers,
weldment (view D). and shims securing plate to periscope mount
b. Install tube, leaf torsion spring, and assembly; remove seal and/or gasket. Shims
shims if necessary (view D). Lightly lubri- are located between plate and mount assem
|cate each leaf torsion spring with grease bly. On removal, note number of shims at
(item 15, App. C). each of the three mounting holes (view E).
c. Position end covers and caps (view D). k. Remove two screws and remove latch-
d. Apply sealing compound (item 26, App. C) and springs (view F).
to eight (8) screws and install. Torque to 11-14 I. Remove retainer springs, four screws,
Ib-ft (unlubricated) (15-19 N m). and four retainers (view F).
e. Lubricate assembly in accordance
7-12. Installation of Hatch Components (Fig
with LO 9-2350-253-12.
7-2).
NOTE
With hatch closed, force re- a. Position and install retainer springs,
■ quired to unlock hatch shall not four retainers and four screws (view F) in
I exceed 20 pounds. With hatch periscope mount assembly.
I unlocked, force required to pull b. Position latch and springs, install two
I hatch to its extreme open posi- screws and tighten (view F).
I tion shall not exceed 55 pounds, c. Install seal and/or gasket (view F).
| measured at hatch lock handle. d. Insert periscope mount assembly into
Force required to unlock hatch hatch assembly (view E).
from an open latch position and e. Position shims (refer to para 7-11),
rotate to the balanced position install plate and secure with three screws ami
shall not exceed 60 pounds, lockwashers (view E).
measured at end of hatch lock f. Position hatch in vertical position (to
handle. To lock hatch in closed provide minimum torque when leaf torsion
position, downward force shall spring is installed) over loader's hatch turret
not exceed 50 pounds and weldment.
rotational force shall not exceed g. Install tube and leaf spring (view D).
20 pounds at end of hatch lock h. Position end covers and caps (view D).
handle. t. Apply sealing compound (item 26, App.
7-11. Removal of Hatch Components (Fig 7- C), Type II, Grade V to 8 screws used to install
2). covers and caps. Torque to 11-14 Ib-ft (unlubri
cated) (15-19 N m± 2N-m).
a. Remove bolt, washer, and bushing NOTE
(view A). Lubricate assembly in accord
o. Remove handle and lever assembly, ance with LO 9-2350-253-12
spring, and shims (view B). after installation.
c. Remove two screws and washers se
j. Ease tension on hatch hinge spring by
curing spring clip and remove spring clip
half closing hatch, (view C). Block open until
(view B).
lock is installed.
d. Remove two screws, lock washers, and k. Install hatch door open lock with two
washers securing support and cover to casting
screws, washers, and lockwashers (view B).
(view B). I. Install spring clip with two screws and
e. Ease tension on door hinge spring by
washers (view B).
half closing hatch door and remove hatch
m. Aline spring and shims while holding
open lock (view B).
handle lever assembly in position.
f. Raise hatch door to a vertical position n. Install bolt, washers, and bushing
to provide minimum torque on leaf torsion through handle lever assembly and tighte"
spring. (view A).
g. Remove eight screws securing the two o. Check hatch operation by closing and
end covers and caps (view D). latching; then reopen to the halt and full lode
h. Remove end covers, caps, and leaf
positions. Adjust lock and/or hatch as neces
spring, and remove hatch cover (view E).
sary.
7-4 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 7-2. Removal and installation of loader's hatch assembly components (2 of 3).

7-5
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

H
AMC 833021
Figure 7-2. Removal and installation of loader's hatch assembly components (3 of 3).

7-6 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section II. MAINTENANCE OF CUPOLA (COMMANDER'S) HATCH ASSEMBLY

7-13. Description. hatch and remove clip.

b. Secure replacement clip to hatch with
The commander's hatch door consists of a two screws.
homogeneous steel casting mounted on a
spring-loaded hinge. A pivoting handle and 7-20. Replacement of Bearings (Fig 7-4).
lever on the rim of the door permits latching
and locking of the hatch door in the closed Drive out old bearings and install replace
position. A second handle, mounted near the ment bearings flush with outer edge of
hinge, serves to lock the hatch door in the surface or recessed not more than 0.005 inch,
open position. measured with a thickness (feeler) gage.
7-14. Service.
7-21. Replacement of Hold-Open Mechanism
During installation, coat each spring with grease
and Hold-Closed Mechanism (Fig 7-5).
(item 15, App. C).
7-15. Removal (Fig 7-3). a. Disassembly.
(1) Remove bolt securing hold-open
a. Raise hatch assembly to a vertical mechanism to hatch and remove bolt, shim,
position to provide minimum torque on leaf and hold-open mechanism (view A).
torsion spring. (2) Loosen two screws and remove
b. Remove eight screws securing the two cover from hold-open mechanism (view B).
end covers and caps. (3) Remove two screws, four lock-
c. Remove end covers and caps. washers, and two nuts (view B).
d. Remove shims (if used), tube, and
(4) Remove bolt from support and re
spring. move pin from dog (view A).
e. Remove hatch assembly.
(5) Remove pin from cam and remove
7-16. Inspection (Figs 7-3 and 7-4). handle, dog, and spring from cam (view A).
(6) Remove preformed packing, disk |
a. Inspect seal for damage or deteriora
and spring from dog (view A).
tion (fig 7-3). Replace if necessary.
b. Inspect protection pad for damage or (7) Remove bolt securing hold-closed
deterioration (fig 7-4). Replace if necessary mechanism to hatch and remove shim,
(para 7-18). bushing, spring, and shim from hold-closed
mechanism (view A).
7-17. Replacement of Seal. (8) Remove pin from handle and re
move plate (view A).
Remove old seal and scrape away old b. Assembly.
adhesive from rim of hatch. Attach new seal (1) Aline pin holes of handle and plate
with adhesive, (item 3, App. C). and secure handle to plate with pin (view A).
(2) Install spring into handle and plate
7-18. Replacement of Protection Pad (Fig 7- (view A).
4). (3) Insert bushing into handle (view A).
(4) Install bolt and shim into handle
through bushing (view A).
Remove old pad and scrape away old
(5) Add or remove shims so that rota
adhesive. Attach new pad to hatch with
tional force needed to engage or disengage
adhesive, (item 4, App. C).
handle does not exceed 20 lbs (at end of
handle). I
7-19. Replacement of Door Hold-Open Han (5.1) Remove bolt and apply antiseize I
dle Clip (Fig 7-4).
compound (item 26.4, App. C) to threads. Install
a. Remove two screws securing clip to bolt and tighten to 9-11 lb.-ft.(12-15 N.m). I

Change 2 7-7
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

HATCH ASSY

SCREW (2) AB7024II

Figure 7-3. Removal and installation of cupola hatch assembly.
NOTE pin holes on handle with pin holes on cam
During assembly, coat all (view A).
threads with sealing compound, (8) Secure spring and handle to cam
(item 25, App. C) and lubricate with pin (view A).
all connecting surfaces of dog (9) Insert pin into dog. Install bolt
and slot in hinge lightly with oil, into support (view A).
(item 18, App. C), or grease, (10) Install two screws, four lock-
(item 15, App. C). washers, and two nuts in support. Do not
(6) Install preformed packing, spring, tighten screws (view B).
and disk into dog (view A). (11) Install cover slots onto screwi I
(7) Install spring into cam and aline and tighten two screws and two nuts (view "
B).
7-8 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

'igure 7-4. Replacement of door open handle clip, bearings, and protection pad - cupola hatch
assembly.

(12) Secure hold-open mechanism to Force required to unlock hatch

hatch with bolt and shim as required to
from an open latch position and
provide an 0.015 inch maximum clearance
rotate to the balanced position
between cam and cover with no binding or shall not exceed 60 pounds,
interference throughout cam travel.
measured at end of hatch lock
(13) Tighten bolt to 10-12 lb-ft (14-16 handle. To lock hatch in closed
Nm). position, downward force shall
not exceed 50 pounds and
7-22. Installation (Fig 7-3). rotational force shall not exceed
20 pounds at end of hatch lock
a. Place hatch assembly in vertical posi handle.
tion and install tube and spring; install shims,
if required. b. Lubricate springs with grease (item 15,
App C).
NOTE
c. Position two end caps and covers on hatch.
Apply sealing compound, (item 26, App. C), to the
With hatch closed, force re
threads of eight (8) screws and install. Torque to
quired to unlock hatch shall not
11-14 lb-ft (unlubricated) (15-19 N m).
exceed 20 pounds. With hatch
unlocked, force required to pull
hatch to its extreme open posi
tion shall not exceed 55 pounds,
measured at hatch lock handle.

Change 2 7-9
 COVER
HATCH
NUT (2)
\ / LOCK
/ / WASHER

SUPPORT A *

IOCKWASHER
(2)
SCREW (2)
B
AMC 83302
Figure 7-5. Replacement of hold-open and hold-closed mechanisms - cupola hatch assembly

7-10 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CHAPTER 8

MAINTENANCE OF TURRET MANUAL

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING
COMPONENTS

Section I. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

8-1. General.

The gun elevating and turret traversing In manual mode, the hand elevating pump
system provides three modes of operation: assembly and a manual elevation accumulator
stabilized, power, and manual. The main gun provide pressurized hydraulic fluid to a
can be elevated or depressed while the turret manual locking valve of the elevating mecha
is in traverse in any of the three modes of nism for elevating or depressing the main
operation. Stabilization components are in gun. Manual traversing is accomplished
corporated into the system to permit accu mechanically through a hand-crank gear set
rate firing of the main gun while the tank is (hand traversing drive) coupled to the trav
in motion. ersing gearbox.

Section II. MAINTENANCE OF TURRET HAND TRAVERSING DRIVE

8-2. General. 8-3. Removal (Fig 8-1).

The hand traversing drive is a manually a. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER and MAS
operated mechanism used for manually tra TER BATTERY switches in OFF positions and
versing the turret. Force applied to the engage turret traverse lock.
crank handle to maintain turret movement b. Remove the three screws securing
should average less than 17 pounds. The drive hand traversing drive to the mounting brack
shaft housing of the hand traversing drive is et.
secured to a bracket welded to the turret c. Remove hand traversing drive by slid
wall to the right of the gunner. The tube ing splined adapter off splined shaft of no-
assembly is connected to the no-bak device bak.
which is a part of the turret traversing
mechanism. Squeezing the handle locking
lever and manually turning the handle will
traverse the turret in either direction de - 8-4. Disassembly (Fig 8-2).
pending upon direction of handle rotation.
The no-bak device permits motion to be o. Remove screw and lockwasher se
imparted to the traversing mechanism from curing arm to input gear shaft. Remove handle
the hand traversing drive but prevents motion assembly and arm from housing.
from power traversing motion from being b. Remove handle retaining ring and
transmitted back through the traversing handle assembly from arm.
mechanism to the handle. The hand trav c. Remove pin securing locking lever to
ersing drive has a detent position which locks arm, and remove locking lever, plunger, and
the handle and prevents the handle from spring.
turning in case the no-bak device malfunc d. Remove pin securing lever to handle.
tions. The detent lock is released when the Pull lever from handle to gain access to pin
handle locking lever is depressed. The lever securing connector link to lever.
must be depressed during all manual trav e. Remove pin securing connector link to
ersing operations. lever and remove lever.

8-1
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

AR702614

Figure 8-1. Removal and installation of hand traversing drive.

f. Remove pin securing connector link to b. Secure one end of tube to universal
shaft, remove link from shaft, and remove shaft joint with rivet. Secure other end of tube to
from handle. second universal joint with rivet.
g. Remove setscrew from lever. c. Secure assembled tube to output gear shaft
h. Remove rivet securing universal joint to with rivet.
output gear assembly and remove assembled tube d. Position handle shaft into handle. Secure
from output gear shaft. shaft to connector link with pin.
i. Remove rivet securing adapter to universal e. Position lever into handle slot. Secure con
joint and remove adapter. nector link to lever with pin (view B).
Remove two rivets securing tube to two f. Secure lever to handle with pin.
universal joints and remove tube from universal g. Install setscrew into lever. Adjust setscrew
joints. to obtain 0.06 ± 0.03 inches of lever play before
shaft travels.
8-5. Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair. h. Install spring and plunger into arm. Secure
Refer to Chapter 4 for inspection and cleaning locking lever to arm with pin.
instructions. Replace defective components as i. Install handle assembly into arm. Secure
necessary. handle assembly to arm with handle retaining ring.
j. Secure arm to input gear shaft with lock-
8-6. Assembly (Fig 8-2).
washer and screw.
a. Secure adapter to universal joint with
rivet.

8-2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

AR702615

Fi&trt 8-2. DtwuwmMy and atMmbly of hand trawr$in<j drive.

8-3
TM 9-2350-253-20-2
I
8-7. Installation (Fig 8-1). c. Secure hand traversing drive to mount
ing bracket with three screws.
a. Coat all bearing surfaces with grease
(item 15, App. C).
b. Install hand traversing drive by sliding
splined adapter onto splined shaft of no-bak
assembly.

Section III. MAINTENANCE OF TURRET HAND ELEVATING PUMP

ASSEMBLY HANDLE FIRING SWITCH

8-8. Description.

Manual elevation or depression of the curing hand elevating pump firing switch
main gun is accomplished through use of the housing to pump (view B). Remove housing.
hand elevating pump assembly. This system e. Remove four screws securing firing
is normally used to make fine corrections in switch to housing (view C).
gun lay, or in case of an emergency (failure f. Pull switch from housing. If neces
of power pack control assembly) may be used sary, push cable though grommet to extend
for complete gun elevation or depression. switch from housing.
The pump is also used to charge the manual g. Unsolder leads from firing switch
elevation accumulator. A firing trigger is (view C) pull cable through grommet. Re
located on the pump handle for emergency move gasket and discard if damaged.
firing of the main gun or 7.62-mm machine
gun. Maintenance of the pump assembly is 8-10. Installation of Hand Elevating Pump
limited to replacement of the handle firing Handle Firing Switch.
switch.
a. Install new gasket on firing switch
8-9. Removal of Hand Elevating Pump (view C), if necessary.
Handle Firing Switch (Fig 8-3).
CAUTION
Use only non-corrosive core
a. Place MASTER BATTERY switch and
solder or non-corrosive paste
ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF positions.
and solder wire.
WARNING b. Solder (item 27, App. C) two electrical
Unload guns. Place MACHINE cable leads to firing switch (view C).
GUN and MAIN GUN switches c. Secure firing switch and gasket to
in the OFF positions. firing switch with four flat head screws (view
b. Disconnect two cable connectors (view C).
A). d. Position firing switch housing and se
c. Remove grommet nut and slide grom- cure with three flat head screws (view B).
met nut back on cable (view B). e. Slide grommet nut forward on cable,
d. Remove three flat head screws se and install (view B).
f. Connect cable connectors (view A).
g. Perform firing circuit test on main gun
(TM 9-2350-253-10).

8-4
Figure 8-3. Removal and installation of hand elevating pump handle firing switch.

8-5
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section IV. MAINTENANCE OF MANUAL ELEVATION ACCUMULATOR

8-11. Description. 8-12. Removal (Fig 8-4).

The manual elevation accumulator is a WARNING

piston-type accumulator which stores nitro Fluid in the elevation accumu
gen gas on one side of a floating piston and lator will be under pressure.
hydraulic fluid on the other. It is vertically Ensure that hydraulic system
mounted on the riser of the power pack pressure is relieved (0 psi on
control assembly. The accumulator is pre- hydraulic system pressure gage)
charged with dry nitrogen to a pressure of 75 before attempting to remove
to 100 psi with no hydraulic fluid in the accumulator.
accumulator. The manual elevation accumu a. Perform zero pressure check (para 2-
lator and associated lines and components are 10a).
charged with pressurized hydraulic fluid by b. Using a suitable container to catch
turning the manual elevation pump handle of hydraulic fluid, loosen manual depression
the hand elevating pump assembly counter (MD) hydraulic tube and allow hydraulic fluid
clockwise until firm resistance is encountered to drain into container.
after the main gun has been fully depressed.

MANUAL
ELEVATION
ACCUMULATOR

PACKING

AOAPTER

PACKING

AR702617

Figure S-4. Removal,installation and charging of manual elevation accumulator.

8-6
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

c. Unscrew manual elevation accumula e. Depress main gun to maximum depres

tor and adapter from power pack control riser sion, and continue to turn hand elevating
(view A). Plug open ports. pump handle until it can no longer be turned
d. Remove adapter and two preformed with one hand. The manual elevation accu
packings from accumulator (view B). Discard mulator is now charged.
packings. f. Bleed manual elevation system (para
2-1 Od).
8-13. Inspection, Service, and Repair (Fig 8-5).

PROTECTIVE
Inspect manual elevation accumulator for CAP
damage. Remove protective cap and check
charging valve for leakage. Refer to para 2-
10 for service.
WARNING
Before removing valve core or
body, release precharged nitro VALVE
gen pressure from accumulator. BODY
Repair consists of replacement of
charging valve cap, core, or body. Replace
valve cap, core, or body as required. Perform
nitrogen precharge procedure (para 2-1 Of).

8-14. Installation (Fig 84). MANUAL

ELEVATION
a. Remove plugs from open ports. Screw ACCUMULATOR
adapter and two new preformed packings onto
manual elevation accumulator (view B).
b. Install and tighten accumulator and
adapter on power pack control riser (view A).
c. Tighten manual depression (MD) hy AR702618
draulic tube on MD port of riser (view A).
d. Precharge accumulator (para 2-10f). Figure 8-5. Repair of manual elevation
accumulator.

8-7(8-8 Blank)
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CHAPTER 9

MAINTENANCE OF CUPOLA MANUAL

ELEVATING AND TRAVERSING
COMPONENTS

Section I. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

9-1. General.

This section contains instructions for cupola azimuth gearbox, and cupola azimuth
maintenance of the elevation screwjack as- lock assembly,
sembly (including gun firing trigger switch),

Section II. MAINTENANCE OF CUPOLA

ELEVATION SCREWJACK ASSEMBLY

9-2. Description. a. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in

OFF position.
The cupola elevation screwjack assembly b. Elevate machine gun to maximum po
is a hand-operated device used to depress or sition (+60 degrees).
elevate the caliber .50 machine gun over a c. Clean elevation screwjacks with dry clean
range of -178 mils to +960 mils with cupola ing solvent (item 28, App. C); wipe dry with a
installed. As the machine gun is elevated or clean cloth.
depressed, a mechanical linkage connected to d. Apply a light coat of grease (item 15, App.
the head mirror of the commander's M36E1 C) to elevation screwjack.
periscope changes the periscope field of view. e. Elevate and depress machine gun
A trigger on the handle of the screwjack several times to thoroughly distribute
assembly is included for electrically firing lubricant.
the machine gun.

9-3. Service (Fig 9-1). 9-4. Deleted.

Perform the following services;

WARNING
Ensure machine gun is clear of 9-5. Replacement of Gun Firing Trigger
ammunition. Switch (Fig 9-1).
CAUTION
Ensure that complete machine WARNING
gun is installed in cupola prior Ensure machine gun is clear of
to operation of screwjack as
ammunition.
sembly. Excessive screwjack
handwheel effort will be pres
ent if machine gun is not in
stalled and continuous use can
damage the gears.

Change 2 9-1
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

I Figure 9-1. Replacement of gun firing trigger switch assembly.

9-2 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

a. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in d. Position replacement switch in

OFF position. handle. Secure with cap and two screws
■ cuU Disconnect two firing switch con- (view B).
I nectors (view B). e. Secure handle with washer and
* b. Remove retaining ring and washer retaining ring (view B).
| (view B). A Connect two firing switch connectors
c. Remove handle, two screws, cap, and (view B).
I switch (view B). When replacing switch,
install new retaining ring. 9-6. Deleted.

Section III. MAINTENANCE OF CUPOLA AZIMUTH GEARBOX

9-7. Description.

The azimuth gearbox assembly is mounted should not exceed 1.25 inch of crank move
to the cupola assembly and contains bearings ment at any location. Loosen or tighten
gears and a spur gear which mates with the three nuts if necessary. If adjustment fails,
cupola race ring gear. The azimuth gearbox replace springs.
assembly transmits rotary motion of the
cupola traverse handle to the race ring gear, 9-9. Azimuth Gearbox Crank Components
allowing the cupola to traverse.
a. Removal (Fig 9-3).
9-8. Cupola Azimuth Gearbox. (1) Remove spring pin securing crank
to crankshaft and remove crank (view A).
a. Removal (Fig 9-2). Remove three (2) Remove spring pin securing
self-locking nuts, springs, and two washers se- shoulder pin to crankshaft assembly (view B).
curing azimuth gearbox to cupola body and Disassemble shoulder pin, grip spring washer,
A remove gearbox (views A and B). and crankshaft assembly.
™ b. Installation and Adjustment (Fig 9-2). b. Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair.
(1) Position azimuth gearbox on studs Clean and inspect components in accordance
on cupola body and on ring gear (view B). with general maintenance procedures
Loosely attach with three nuts, two washers (chapter 4). Replace or repair worn or
(lower studs), and three springs (views A and defective parts.
B). c. Installation (Fig 9-3).
(2) Position gearbox until pinion gear (1) Insert shoulder pin through grip
teeth are parallel to cupola ring gear (view spring washer, and crankshaft assembly. Se
B). Tighten three nuts until minimum back cure with spring pin (view B).
lash without binding is obtained (view B). (2) Install crank over crankshaft and
(3) Rotate cupola 360 degrees while secure with spring pin (view A).
checking backlash and binding. Backlash

Change 2 9-3
TM 9-2350-253-20-2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

A
B !
AR702621

Figure 9-3. Removal and Installation of azimuth gearbox crank components.

9-5
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section IV. MAINTENANCE OF CUPOLA AZIMUTH LOCK ASSEMBLY

9-10. Description. c. Remove nut and plunger assembly

(view C).
The azimuth lock assembly locks the d. Remove adjusting knob and spring pin
cupola to the turret when the rear rack of the (view D).
lock is engaged to the cupola ring gear. e. Hold gear rack handle and unscrew
shaft worm. Remove shaft worm and gear
9-11. Removal (Fig 9-4). racks from housing (view E).

a. Remove lockwire, two screws, and 9-13. Cleaning.

lockwashers (view A).
b. Remove azimuth lock assembly and CAUTION
shims (if used) (view B). Retain shims for The interlock portion of the azimuth
reinstallation. lock assembly is located above the
opening of the cupola plastic ball
9-12. Disassembly (Fig 9-5). bearing race assembly. Care must be
taken to prevent dry cleaning solvent
a. Place azimuth lock on surface and from entering the race assembly
press down on cam while removing cotter pin, opening and contacting the plastic ball
retaining pin, and roller. Release pressure bearings.
gradually and remove cam (view A). Clean all components of the azimuth lock
b. Remove spring and interlock pin (view assembly with a cloth or sponge soaked in dry
B). cleaning solvent (item 28, App. C). Wipe parts
dry with a clean cloth.
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 9-5. Disassembly and assembly of azimuth lock assembly.

9-7
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

9-14. Inspection (Fig 9-5). d. Hold plunger assembly in adjusted po

sition with a screwdriver and tighten nut
a. Check plunger assembly for crossed or (view C).
damaged threads. Check plunger for wear e. Install spring and interlock pin (view
and for spring action. Check housing and cam B).
assembly for cracks and breaks. f. Position cam in slot in interlock pin
b. Check interlocking pin for damage and and, while pressing down on cam, install
spring for action. Check shaft worm for wear and roller, retaining pin, and new cotter pin (view
damage. A).
c. Replace missing or damaged parts.
9-16. Installation (Fig 9-4).
9-15. Assembly (Fig 9-5).
a. Install azimuth lock assembly and ori
a. Position gear rack in housing and ginal shims (if any).
install shaft worm (view E). b. Install shims as required to adjust
b. Install adjusting knob and spring pin backlash between locking gear and ring gear
(view D). to a minimum without binding throughout 360
c. Install nut on plunger and install plun degrees of traverse.
ger in housing. Adjust to hold gear rack c. Secure lock assembly in position with
handle in "open" or "closed" position without two screws and washers. Install lockwire
binding (view C). (item 30, App. C) (view A).

9-8
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CHAPTER 10

MAINTENANCE OF POWER ELEVATING

AND TRAVERSING SYSTEM

Section L SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

10-1. General.
The gun elevating and turret traversing handles are actuated (opened). The trav
system contains the hydraulically and mech ersing mechanism is internally lubricated. A
anically actuated mechanisms (fig 1-3 and pump distributes the lubricating oil as re
FO-2) that position both the turret and the quired during rotation of the turret. A
main gun in azimuth, and the main gun in pinlock locks the power input shaft to the
elevation or depression. traversing gearbox differential when the hy
Contained within the system are the draulic power is off. When the hydraulic
electrically actuated valves that control the power solenoid is energized, approximately
flow of hydraulic fluid to the main gun 125 psi fluid pressure is directed to the
elevating and traversing mechanisms. Also pinlock by the power shutoff spool and auxil
contained in the system is a selector (hydraulic iary power valve of the gunner's control
pressure drain) valve used in zeroing the 105-mm assembly hydraulic power valve assembly. A
gun. The system provides three modes of operation: mechanical decoupling (no-bak) device serves
stabilized, power, and manual. The main gun can to prevent rotation of the hand traversing
be elevated or depressed while the turret is in tra drive handle when the turret is being oper
verse in any of the three modes of operation. Stabi ated by hydraulic power or when the vehicle
lization components are incorporated into the sys is on a slope.
tem to permit accurate firing of the main gun while
the tank is in motion. 10-2. Description of Power Pack Control
In both power and stabilized modes, the Assembly (Fig 10-1).
electric drive motor and hydraulic pump in
the power pack control assembly provide a The power pack control assembly is the
hydraulic fluid under high pressure to the central control point for gun elevation or
system. In stabilized mode, electrical motion depression and turret traversing. It also
sensors generate electrical signals resulting provides the system with hydraulic fluid
from deviations in gun position from the under pressure. The power pack control
selected aiming point. These electrical sig assembly includes the following major compo
nals are processed in a stabilization con nents and assemblies: (1) gunner's control
troller unit and sent to the elevation and assembly; (2) manual elevating pump assembly;
traverse servovalves in the elevation and (3) manual elevation accumulator; (4) electric
traverse stabilizer manifold assemblies. Magni drive motor; (5) hydraulic system pump; (6)
tude and polarity of the electrical signals deck clearance valve; (7) power pack reser
determine the action of the servovalves voir; (8) hydraulic power solenoid; and (9)
which, in turn, control the flow of hydraulic override valve. The electric drive motor
fluid to the elevating cylinder and to a drives the hydraulic system pump located in
hydraulic gearbox motor in the traversing the reservoir which generates hydraulic fluid
mechanism. under pressure for the hydraulic system.
The traversing mechanism has a hydraulic Hydraulic fluid under pressure is stored in the
gearbox motor which receives pressurized oil main accumulator. When pressure in the
from the power pack control assembly. The main accumulator drops below 925 psi, a
hydraulic gearbox motor, in turn, transmits hydraulic pressure switch on the main accu
torque through a series of gears which mesh mulator energizes the turret power relay,
with the turret ring gear. A magnetic brake which provides electrical power to the elec
prevents turret creep caused by turret un tric motor. When the main gun is depressed
balance when the vehicle is operating on below 0 degrees, and the turret is positioned
slopes. The magnetic brake is released when in the azimuth segment between 1900 mils
the normally closed palm switches in the and 4500 mils, the deck clearance valve is
commander's control or gunner's control electrically actuated by solenoid actions.

10-1
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

12 AR702624
Legend for figure 10-1.
1. Superelevation actuator to elevating mechanism. 10. Manual elevation and depression to elevating mechanism.
2. Superelevation actuator to deck clearance valve and power pack. 11. Elevation shut-off valve to deck clearance valve.
3. Superelevation actuator to elevating mechanism. 12. Elevation stabilizer manifold return line to power pack drain.
4. Power pack control to pin lock. 13. Elevation stabilizer manifold to stabilization power solenoid rate.
5. Drain line from pin lock, traverse backlash cylinder, and 14. Deck clearance valve to elevation stabilizer manifold,
traverse gearbox hydraulic motor. 16. Traverse stabilizer manifold to traverse gearbox.
6. Superelevation actuator drain line. 16. Power pack control to traverse stabilizer manifold.
7. Power pack to deck clearance valve. 17. Traverse stabilizer manifold to backlash cylinder.
8. Pressure switch to pressure gage. 18. Power pack control to elevation shut-off valve.
9. Accumulator to power pack.

Figure 10-1. Gun elevating and turret traversing components and hydraulic tubes (1 of 2).

10-2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

COMMANDER'S
CONTROL ASSEMBLY

TRAVERSE STABILIZER
MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY

TRAVERSE
BACKLASH
CYLINDER
ASSEMBLY

TRAVERSING
MECHANISM
ASSEMBLY

SUPERELEVATION
ACTUATOR

DECK
CLEARANCE
VALVE

MANUAL
ACCUMULATOR STABILIZATION
HYDRAULIC
FILTER
ASSEMBLY
ELEVATION SHUT OFF
VALVE ASSEMBL'

ELEVATING
ECHANISM

ELEVATION
SERVOVALVE

ELEVATION STABILIZER
MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY

AR702625

Figure 10-1. Gun elevating and turret traversing components and hydraulic tubes (2 of 2).

10-3
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

The resultant flow of hydraulic fluid causes are displaced from neutral position. When
the elevating mechanism to elevate the gun the override solenoid is energized, the com
until it clears the air cleaners, rear top deck mander's handle controls the spools. When
assembly, and gun travel lock. Control of the energized, the hydraulic power solenoid posi
system is provided by movement of the tions the power shutoff in the hydraulic
elevating or traversing spools in the gunner's power valve to permit hydraulic fluid under
control assembly when the gunner's handles pressure to enter the system.

Section II. MAINTENANCE OF TRAVERSE BACKLASH CYLINDER ASSEMBLY

10-3. Description.

The backlash cylinder assembly is c. Remove two mounting screws and

mounted on the traversing mechanism two lockwashers from alternate corners (A
gearbox in the turret. The backlash cylinder and C or B and D, view B). Replace with
consists of a housing, piston, spring, and longer screws.
bearing. It provides a means of applying a d. Remove two remaining screws and
load factor within the traversing gearbox lockwashers. Alternately loosen two long
output gear trains. This load is intended only screws (inserted in step c) until backlash
to take up backlash in the output gearing. cylinder is free.
The cylinder spring applies a constant load
e. Carefully lift backlash cylinder
against the upper end of the traversing
assembly away from traversing gearbox
gearbox backlash shaft assuring constant
mechanism and remove backlash cylinder
tooth load of the two helical gears against
assembly, spring, cup, bearing assembly
the output gear trains. When the turret is
(bearings down), washers, and gasket.
operated with the stabilization system turned
on, hydraulic pressure is applied to the top of
the antibacklash piston to increase tooth 10-4.1. Antibacklash mechanism tests (Fig.
load. 10-2.1).
a. Install test plate assembly
10-4. Removal (Fig 10-2). on backlash cylinder.
b. Leakage Test 1.
(1) Attach flexible hose to port B
of backlash sylinder assembly.
WARNING
Fluid in the backlash (2) Open shutoff valve and operate
cylinder assembly is under M3 pump to obtain 1500 + 50 psi on gage.
(3) Close shutoff valve to maintain
pressure.
pressure for 5 minutes. There should be no
a. Perform zero pressure check (para leakage past packings.
(4) Open shutoff valve and reduce
2-10a).
pressure to zero.
b. Disconnect three hydraulic lines.
c. Leakage Test 2.
Place plugs in all lines and ports.
(1) Remove flexible hose from port
B and attach to tee at port D.
WARNING
(2) Cap the open stem of tee at
The backlash cylinder is
port D.
spring loaded. During
(3) Remove 3000 psi gage and
removal or installation, use
install 60 psi gage in its place.
blocking or suitable lever
(4) Operate M3 pump to obtain 10
to prevent sudden
+ 5 psi on the gage.
expansion of spring while
(5) Close shutoff valve to maintain
mounting screws are being
pressure for 5 minutes. There should be no
removed or installed.
leakage past packings.
(6) Open shutoff valve and reduce
pressure to zero.

10-4 Change 2
10-5
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

TEST 2 TEST
GAGE 9337925 GAGE 11669730
0-60 PSI 0-3000 PSI

TUBE ASSEMBLY
1/4 IN. TUBING
COUPLING SLEEVE (2) MS5 1825-3
AN9IO-2 NUT (2) MS5 1823-3 ADAPTER
MS5 1819-33
SHUTOFF VALVE BUSHING
ADAPTER AN9I2-I
7358551 MS5I8I9-35
FLEXIBLE HOSE
MS27369E0I80

ADAPTER FILTER ASSY MS28720-4

MS5 1 843-23 ELEMENT AN6235-IA
ADAPTER PACKING 'ACKING AN6227-7
MS5 1 843-23 MS28775-004
PACKING
MS28775-004
TEE
MS5 1892-23
TEST 2 PACKING
MS28775-004

FLEXIBLE HOSE
MS27369E0540

TEE IBACKLASH ASSYI

MS5 1 892-23
PACKING
MS28775-004

| PLATE ASSYl
9337964

AMC 833166

Figure 10-2.1. Antibacklash mechanism leakage tests.

10-6 Change 2
i
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

10-5. Disassembly (Fig 10-3). d. Install backlash cylinder assembly

and components (para. 10-8).

WARNING 10-8. Installation (Fig 10-2).

Backlash cylinder is spring
loaded and fluid inside is a. Check traversing gearbox assembly
under pressure. for proper adjustment of backlash before
installing backlash cylinder (para. 10-9).
a. Remove backlash cylinder assembly b. Carefully position a replacement
and components in lower portion of housing in gasket, spring, cup bearing assembly (with
accordance with para. 10-4. bearing down), washer, and backlash cylinder
b. Remove four screws and on mounting surface. Pack bearing with
lockwashers and remove cap from housing. grease (item 15, App. C) before installation.
Remove and discard preformed packing from c. Secure backlash cylinder to
cap. mounting surface on traversing mechanism
c. Remove piston and discard gearbox with four lockwashers and mounting
preformed packing from piston. screws.
d. Remove fitting from port B. d. Remove plugs and install three
e. Replace piston if necessary. hydraulic lines in backlash cylinder.
e. Bleed the hydraulic system (para. 2-
10-6. Inspection. lOd) and check for leaks.
a. Visually inspect piston shaft for
wear or bends. 10-9. Adjustment (Figs 10-4 and 10-5).
b. Examine all packing grooves for
evidence of scoring or sharp edges. a. Position turret so that drive pinion
lc. Inspect upper and lower bores of gears of traversing gearbox are accessible
cylinder for evidence of scoring. from driver's compartment (view A).
d. Inspect housing mounting base for
evidence of cracks or deformations,
especially around mounting holes.
e. Replace all defective components.

10-7. Assembly (Fig 10-3).

NOTE
Assemble in a clean dust
free area. Rinse all
components in dry cleaning
solvent (item 28, App. C),
and dry with compressed air
immediately prior to
assembly.
a. Lightly coat new preformed
packings with hydraulic fluid (item 13, App.
C).
6. Lightly coat upper bore of cylinder
with hydraulic fluid (item 13, App. C), and
carefully install piston with new preformed
packing. Do not damage packings during
assembly.
c. Install cap with new preformed
packing and secure with four screws and
lockwashers. Install fitting in port B.

(10-6. 1 blank)/10-6. 2 Chaise 2

 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 10-4. Adjustment of traversing mechanism gearbox backlash.

CAUTION

Hold drive pinion gears during

removal of retaining rings from ■
WARNING output pinion shaft to avoid
Engage turret lock to prevent dropping the gears of the shafts
injury to personnel while re prematurely.
moving or adjusting drive pinion NOTE
gears. If the drive pinion gears do not
b. Perform zero pressure check (para 2- slip off easily it may be neces
0a). sary to pry them loose with a
c. Remove three screws and lockwashers bar or puller.
ecuring pinion guard plates and remove
dates (view A, fig. 10-4). e. Remove drive pinion gears from output
d. Remove backlash cylinder (para 10-4) to pinion shafts (view C, fig. 10-4) by removing
ixpose floating shaft (view B, fig. 10-4). retaining rings with retaining ring pliers. I

Change 2 10-7
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

f. Ensure floating shaft drops to lower p. Disengage turret lock. Set azimuth
limit of travel. Install one drive pinion gear scale to O. Manually rotate turret 6400 mils
on output pinion shaft with a minimum of to starting point of traverse. Remove backlash
clearance between pinion gear and turret ring cylinder (para 10-4) and force floating shaft to
gear (view A, fig. 10-5). lower limits of travel.
q. Measure distance from top of gearbox
NOTE
This condition is obtained by to top of floating shaft. Compare reading
rotating the drive pinion gear with that taken in step m. If shaft has
one spline at a time around the dropped more than 0.04 inches from set point
output shaft pinion until this (step m ) repeat adjustment procedure. If correct,
position is found. install backlash cylinder (para 10-8).
g. Using a thickness (feeler) gage measure
clearance "A" between drive pinion gear and turret r. Install pinion guard plates (view A, fig
ring gear (view A, fig 10-5) and record. 10-4).
h. Remove drive pinion gear from output Table 10-1. Output Pinion Adjustment for
pinion shaft and force floating shaft to lower Backlash Cylinder Assembly
limit of its travel.
i. Clamp V-blocks (item 5, table 1-1) to OUTPUT PINION ADJUSTMENT
exposed end of floating shaft so V-blocks are flush (a) (b)
with top of gearbox (view B, fig. 10-4). MEASURED RAISE FLOATING
/. Refer to tabular data in table 10-1 and CLEARANCE A SHAFT
select the value in column (b) which corre
sponds to clearance "A", column (a) (meas .020 - .050 .420 3/8 to 15/32
ured in step g). .051 - .070 .330 5/16 to 11/32
k. Manually raise V-blocks and secure by .071 - .090 .240 7/32 to 1/4
placing a feeler gauge (with appropriate .091 - .120 .100 3/32 to 1/8
thickness as determined from table 10-1 and OUTPUT PINION TIGHT
step g. above) or shim stock under V-blocks AGAINST THIS TURRET
I. Reinstall both drive pinion gears with RACE GEAR FACE
a minimum of clearance between drive pinion TURRET RACE ASSEMBLY
MEASURE
gears and turret ring gear (view D, fig. 10-4). CLEARANCE
NOTE "A"
This condition is obtained by
rotating drive pinion gear one
spline at a time around output
pinion shaft until the position is GEARBOX OUTPUT
RIGHT SIDE
found where clearance between A
driving pinion gear and turret MINIMUM CLEARANCE
ring gear is at a minimum then BY ROTATING PINION (LEFT SIDE)
secure driving pinion gear with
MINIMUM CLEARANCE
a retaining ring. Repeat for BY ROTATING PINION (RIGHT SIDE
other driving pinion gear,
m. Remove feeler gauge or shim stock
from under V-blocks. If floating shaft drops, re
move V-blocks and drive pinion gears, and then
repeat steps f through m . If not, carefully measure
distance from top of gearbox to top of floating
shaft and record.
n. Remove V-blocks from floating shaft
(view B, fig. 10-4).
o. Install backlash cylinder (para 10-8) minus
three hydraulic lines.
CAUTION
Do not turn stabilization system
on during step q as hydraulic oil Figure 10-5. Backlash cylinder floating
will flow from the lines discon shaft adjustment.
nected in step p.

10-8 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section III. MAINTENANCE OF DECK CLEARANCE VALVE

10-10. Description. formed packing and tee with preformed packing.

Discard preformed packings.
The deck clearance valve assembly is b. Installation.
solenoid-operated and, when actuated, causes (1) Coat new preformed packing with hy
hydraulic fluid under pressure to elevate the draulic fluid (FRH). Install two tube adapters and
main gun to clear the air cleaners, rear top two new preformed packings, elbow and tee, with
deck assembly, and gun travel lock. The deck new preformed packings.
clearanpe valve assembly is mounted on the (2) Position deck clearance valve on bra
rear of the power pack control assembly. cket and secure with two lockwashers and screws
Actuation of this valve shuts off flow of (view A). Install two adapters and new preformed
hydraulic fluid from the power pack control packings (view B) on valve bottom.
assembly to the elevation hydraulic lines. (3) Connect seven hydraulic tubes to deck
However, hydraulic fluid from the power pack clearance valve (view A and B).
control assembly is transmitted through the (4) Connect electrical connector to deck
deck clearance valve to the elevation hydrau clearance solenoid (view A).
lic line thereby elevating the main gun. A (5) Check operation of deck clearance
drain line is connected to the depression port valve (TM 9-2350-253-10). Check for leakage of
of the deck clearance valve, permitting oil to hydraulic fluid, and bleed system, if necessary
return from the elevating mechanism to the (para 2-10d).
drain of the power pack control assembly.
When the normally open elevation and trav 10-12. Solenoid or Valve Body Replacement.
erse interference switches are both closed, (Fig 10-6).
the deck clearance valve solenoid is ener a. Solenoid Replacement.
gized. The elevation interference switch is (1) Perform zero pressure check (para 2-10
closed when the main gun is below 0 degrees a).
elevation and the traverse interference (2) Disconnect electrical connector from
switch is closed whenever the turret is deck clearance solenoid (view A).
positioned between approximately 1900 mils (3) Remove four socket head screws, lock
and 4500 mils of azimuth. When the gun and washers, and nuts securing solenoid to valve spacer,
turret move out of the interference zone, the and remove solenoid (view B).
deck clearance valve solenoid is auto (4) Position replacement solenoid on valve
matically deenergized. spacer and secure with four socket head screws,
lockwashers, and nuts (view B).
10-11. Replacement. (5) Connect electrical connector to deck
a. Removal (Fig 10-6). clearance solenoid (view A).
(6) Check operation of deck clearance
WARNING valve assembly (TM 9-2350-253-10).
Fluid in the deck clearance b. Valve Body Replacement.
valve solenoid is under pressure. (1) Remove deck clearance valve assembly
(1) Perform zero pressure check (para 2- (para 10-1 la).
10a). (2) Remove four socket head screws, lock
(2) Disconnect electrical connector (view washers and nuts securing solenoid to valve spacer
A). and remove solenoid (view B).
(3) Disconnect seven hydraulic tubes from (3) Remove four screws and lockwashers,
deck clearance valve (view A). Plug or tape all open and separate valve body from valve spacer. Remove
hydraulic tubes and parts. gasket from valve body (view B).
(4) Remove two adapters and preformed (4) Position replacement gasket on replace
packings on bottom of valve, to permit access to ment valve body and secure valve body to spacer
bottom mounting screw. with four lockwashers and screws.
(5) Remove two screws and lockwashers se (5) Position solenoid on valve spacer and
curing deck clearance valve to bracket (view A). secure with four socket head screws, lockwashers,
Remove deck clearance valve from bracket. and nuts (view B).
(6) Remove two remaining tube adapters (6) Install deck clearance valve assembly
and preformed packings. Remove elbow and pre (para 10-116).

10-9
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

\ LOCKWASHER (4)
SCREW (4)
LOCKWASHER (4)

DECK
CLEARANCE
VALVE

AR7Q2631
Figure 10-6. Removal and installation of deck clearance valve solenoid.
Section IV. MAINTENANCE OF TRAVERSING GEARBOX PINLOCK ASSEMBLY

10-13. Description. the hydraulic power solenoid (part of the

hydraulic power supply) is energized, approxi
The gearbox lock pin locks the power mately 125 psi fluid pressure is directed to
input shaft to the traversing gearbox differ the lock pin by the power shutoff spool
ential when the hydraulic power is off. When unlocking the power input shaft.

10-10
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

WASHER 14)

SCREW (4)

COVER

GASKET
HOUSING

PISTON

COVER

PACKING
PISTON SPRING

PACKING

COVER
DRAIN INLET
PORT PORT
(PORT D5I (PORT Gl

AR702632
Figure 10-7. Removal and installation of traversing gearbox hydraulic pin lock assembly and
components.

10-11
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

10-14. Removal of Components (Fig 10-7). loosen bottom end before removal |
of hydraulic pin lock assembly. \
WARNING
Fluid in the hydraulic system d. Remove four screws and lockwashers M
securing hydraulic pin lock assembly or pin ™
will be under pressure,
lock pin housing to traversing gearbox (view
a. Reduce hydraulic system pressure to 0
A). Remove lock (or housing) and gasket
psi, using zero pressure check (para 2-1 0a).
5. Drain lubricating oil from traversing Discard gasket.
e. If either the hydraulic pin lock
gearbox (LO 9-2350-253-12).
assembly or housing is being replaced,
c. Remove cover, spring, and gasket from
remove two adapters and preformed packings
hydraulic pin lock housing (views B and C).
(view A). Discard packings.
Discard gasket.
d. Remove lock pin piston from housing 10-17.1. Testing Pin Lock Assembly (Fig
(view D). 10-7, view F).
e. If piston cannot be removed, remove a. With port D5 plugged, apply 120 + 10
housing from traversing gearbox (para 10- psi to port G. There should be no leakage at
I 17d). If end of piston is deformed or burred, port D5 or end of piston during the 3rd
file until smooth and remove piston (view D). minute of a 3 minute period.
If piston still cannot be removed, replace b. With port G plugged, apply 120 + 10
hydraulic pin lock (para. 10-17) as a unit. to port D5 as in step a above.
f. Remove and discard two preformed c. Within 15 seconds of pressure being
removed from port G, end of piston must
packings from piston (view E).
extend 5/16 + 1/32 from housing.
10-15. Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair.
d. End of piston must be flush with
Refer to chapter 4 for cleaning and housing when pressure of 100 psi MAX is
inspection procedures. Replace defective
applied to port G.
components, as necessary. NOTE
10-16. Installation of Components (Fig 10-7). Any evidence of erratic piston
a. Obtain a hydraulic pin lock parts kit movement or excessive oil leak
(TM 9-2350-253-20P-2). age from port D5 when pressure i
b. Coat preformed packings with hy is smoothly applied and released I
draulic fluid (FRH) (item 13, App. C) and install will necessitate rebuild of the I
on hydraulic pin lock piston (view E). pin lock assembly. I
c. Insert piston into hydraulic pin lock 10-18. Installation of Traversing Mechanism
housing (view D). Gearbox Lock Assembly or Housing
d. Position helical spring in cover and
(Fig 10-7).
install cover and gasket (views C and B). a. Install two adapters and new pre
NOTE formed packings in ports of hydraulic pin lock
If pin lock piston was scored or
(view A and B).
burred, and housing had to be re-
b. Position hydraulic pin lock on gear
I moved (para 10-14e), replace pin
box and secure with four screws and lock-
lock assembly.
washers (view A). Tighten screws to 40-50 I
10-17. Removal of Traversing Mechanism
lb-in (5-6 N-m). |
Gearbox Pin Lock Assembly or Housing c. Connect hydraulic tube to drain port
(Fig 10-7). D5 (views F and A).
WARNING d. Connect M3 hydraulic pump to inlet
Fluid in the hydraulic lock pin port G (view F).
assembly and housing will be e. Apply pressure with M3 hydraulic
under pressure, pump and listen for click of pin lock piston
a. Perform zero pressure check (para 2- actuation. Relieve hydraulic pressure.
10a). f. Disconnect pump and connect hydrau
5. Drain lubricating oil from traversing lic tube to inlet port G (views F and A).
gearbox (LO 9-2350-253-12). g. Bleed the hydraulic system (para 2-
c. Identify and disconnect two hydraulic lOd). a
tubes (view A). Plug open lines and ports. h. Check operation of hydraulic lock pin. |
I CAUTION i. Replenish traversing gearbox (LO 9-"
To prevent damage to outside line, 2350-253-12).

10-12 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section V. MAINTENANCE OF NO-BAK ASSEMBLY

10-19. Description. d. Remove two retaining rings securing
bearing in housing cover and remove bearing
The no-bak assembly is a mechnical de (view D),
coupling device which prevents rotation of e. Using wood block, tap no-bak housing
the hand traversing drive handle when the until front driven member comes free of
turret is being operated by hydraulic power or housing (views E and G).
if rotation of turret is caused by weight of f. If front driven member does not come
the main gun either from hitting an obstacle free of housing readily, use single jaw adapter
or when the tank is on a slope. and slide bar from mechanical puller kit (shop

AR70
Figure 10-8. Removal and installation of turret traversing gearbox no-bak assembly.
10-20. Removal (Fig 10-8). equipment, automotive maintenance and
repair, organizational maintenance, common
a. Remove TTS commander's display unit number 2) to complete removal (view F).
(if equipped) (para 15-110). g* Compress tension springs and remove
b. Remove hand traversing drive (para 8- locking bar and tension springs (views G and
3). H).
c. Remove four screws and lockwashers h. Using wooden block, tap out lockring,
securing no-bak to clutch. Remove no-bak rear driven member, and pin from housing
and shim(s). (view H).
i- If rear driven member does not come
10-21. Disassembly Fig 10-9). free of housing readily, use single jaw adaptor
and slide bar from mechanical puller kit to
complete removal (view F).
a. Remove four screws and lockwashers
securing cover to housing and remove cover ]. Refer to figure 10-10 for exploded
and shims (view B). Retain shims for view of no-bak.
CAUTION
assembly.
Do not lose pin that secures
b. Remove woodruff key from shaft, if
lockring to housing, or woodruff
necessary for replacement (view B).
c. Remove retaining ring securing shaft key that locks rear driven mem
in housing cover and remove shaft (view C). ber to output bevel gear of no-
bak.

10-13
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 10-9. Disassembly and assembly of turret traversing gearbox no-bak ( 1 of 2).

10-14
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 10-9. Disassembly and assembly of turret traversing gearbox no-bak (2 of 2).

10-15
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 10-10. Turret traversing gearbox no-bak - partial exploded view.

10-16
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

10-22. Cleaning and Lubrication. h. Perform torque test (para 10-25).

Refer to paragraph 4-2. Lubricate sliding sur 10-25. Torque Test (View I, Fig 10-9).
faces with light coat of grease (item 14, App. C).
Apply torque to splined input shaft, using
10-23. Inspection and Repair. no-bak testing - splined socket (socket
a. Inspect components visually for wrench, item 11, table 1-1). The torque
damage or wear. Observe condition of bear required to maintain motion of the splined
ings, shaft, driven members, locking bar, shaft shall not vary more than 5 lb-in (0.6
springs, inside of no-bak housing, and other N.m) and the maximum torque shall not
components. exceed 22 lb-in (2.5 N.m).
b. Repair or replace defective compo
nents. See Chapter 4 for general inspection
and repair instructions.
10-24. Assembly (Fig 10-9). 10-26. Installation (Fig 10-8).

a. Install rear driven member into no-bak NOTE

housing (view H). If same no-bak is reinstalled,
NOTE use same number of shims re
Aline woodruff key with wood moved. If a replacement no-
ruff slot. Using brass drift (on bak is being installed, a
outer edge only) or block of minimum number of shims
hard wood, tap rear driven should be used as required (in
member into position in no-bak cluding none) between clutch
housing. and no-bak until the gears run
b. Install lockring and pin into housing as smoothly as possible.
(view H).
c. Install lockring bar and tension springs a. Position no-bak on clutch. Shim as
and front driven member (views G and H). required.
d. Insert bearing into housing cover and b. Secure no-bak to clutch with four
secure with two retaining rings (view D). screws and lockwashers. Torque screws to
e. Insert shaft through bearing and secure 17-19 lb-ft (23-26 N-m).
with retaining ring (view C). c. Install hand traversing drive (para 8-7).
f- Position woodruff key in shaft keyway d. Install TTS commander's display unit
(view B). (if equipped) (para 15-110).
NOTE
Use shims as required to obtain 10-27. Turret Traversing Test.
0.005 to 0.010 end play of no-
bak. Perform traversing portion of turret
g. Position shims and housing cover on traversing and gun elevating procedures.
housing. Secure cover with four screws and
lockwashers (view B). Tighten screws to
108-120 lb-in (12-14 N.m).

Change 2 10-17
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section VI. MAINTENANCE OF MAIN ACCUMULATOR

10-28. Description. tor by removing valve cap and depressing

valve core.
The main accumulator is a piston-type b. Remove valve core, valve body, and
accumulator having nitrogen gas on one side preformed packing.
of a floating piston and hydraulic oil on the c. Replace components as required.
other side. The accumulator is precharged d. Install preformed packing, valve body,
with nitrogen at a pressure of 525 psi with no valve core, and valve cap.
hydraulic fluid in the accumulator. The e. Charge the main accumulator (para 2-
function of the accumulator is to store lOe).
hydraulic fluid under pressure for operating 10-30. Removal (Fig 10-12).
the gun elevating and turret traversing sys
WARNING
tem. The normal working pressure for the
Ensure that hydraulic system
hydraulic system ranges from approximately
pressure is relieved (0 psi on
950 psi to 1225 psi. The electric drive motor
hydraulic system pressure gage)
in the power pack control assembly drives the
before attempting to remove
hydraulic system pump which pressurizes the
main accumulator.
hydraulic fluid that is stored within the main
a. Perform zero pressure check (para 2-
accumulator. The electric motor is con
10a).
trolled by the hydraulic pressure switch
b. Disconnect two hydraulic tubes from
mounted on the accumulator through actua
tee at bottom of main accumulator and plug
tion of the turret power relay in the turret
open hydraulic lines.
power distribution box. The pressure is
c. Disconnect hydraulic tube from nipple
maintained between 950 psi and 1225 psi.
The main accumulator is equipped with an at bottom of accumulator.
indicating gage (hydraulic pressure gage) d. Remove screw and nut from upper
which indicates hydraulic fluid pressure. retaining strap.
d. l. Remove screw, two nuts, lock-
10-29. Repair. washers, and clamp from lower retainer
strap.
Repair of the main accumulator consists e. Remove four screws and lock washers
of replacing the valve cap, valve core (fig 10- securing retaining straps to accumulator
11), or valve body. support and remove straps.
WARNING f. Remove accumulator from support.
Ensure that hydraulic system g. If accumulator is being replaced,
pressure is relieved (0 psi on remove tee, two nipples, and two packings
hydraulic system pressure gage from bottom of accumulator.
and main accumulator), before 10-31. Inspection.
attempting to repair main accu
mulator. Inspect main accumulator for damaged
a. Perform zero pressure check (para 2- threads, dents, or defects. Replace if dam
10a). Relieve nitrogen pressure in accumula aged in any way.

10-18 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

AR702636

Figure 10-11. Repair of main accumulator.

AMC 833024
Figure 10-12. Main accumulator removal and installation.

Change 2 10-19
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

10-32. Installation (Fig 10-12). d. l. Attach lower retaining strap to

a. If new accumulator is used, install two main accumulator with screw, two nuts,
packings, two nipples, and tee on bottom of lock washer and clamp.
accumulator. e. Connect hydraulic tube to nipple at
b. Position accumulator in support. bottom of accumulator.
c. Attach retaining straps to accumulator f. Unplug two hydraulic tubes and con
support with four screws and lockwashers. nect to tee at bottom of main accumulator.
| d. Attach upper retaining strap to main g. Recharge the main accumulator (para
accumulator with screw and nut. 2-1 Oe).
Section VII. MAINTENANCE OF COMMANDER'S
CONTROL ASSEMBLY AND LINKAGE
10-33. Description. ator is depressed. To avoid
The commander's control is secured to a possible injury, all personnel in
bracket mounted on top of the turret trav side or outside the vehicle
ersing mechanism. The commander's control should stand clear of the main
contains a magnetic brake switch, override gun.
switch, and gun firing switches. The mag
netic brake switch and the override switch a. Place MASTER BATTERY and ELEV/-
are simultaneously actuated by depressing TRAV POWER switches in ON positions, and
the commander's control actuator (palm depress override actuator on commander's
switch). Actuation of the magnetic brake control handle. If the control linkage is
switch opens the magnetic brake electrical properly adjusted, the commander's control
circuit and releases the magnetic brake in the handle will remain in the neutral position.
traversing mechanism. At the same time, Release the override actuator.
when the override switch is actuated, the b. If the control handle has a tendency to
solenoid- operated override control spool in rotate clockwise when the override switch is
the gunner's control assembly transfers con actuated, the traverse rod length must be
trol of the system to the commander. When increased by unscrewing the rod end. If the
the palm switch is closed and the handle is handle rotates counterclockwise, the traverse
tilted forward, the gun will depress. When rod length must be shortened by screwing the
tilted rearward, the gun will elevate. Rota rod end into the rod.
tion of the handle will cause the turret to c. Remove alien screw securing traverse
rotate in the same direction. Actuation of lever to shaft and loosen jam nut.
the override switch will also alter the firing d. Hold commander's control in neutral
circuits of the guns by isolating the three gun position and depress override actuator. Rotate
firing trigger switches in the gunner's control rod end until end of lever is flush with flat sur
assembly from the gunner's firing circuits and face of traversing shaft.
by placing the gun firing trigger switch in the
commander's control in the gun firing cir NOTE
cuits. When the commander's control actua If screw securing lever to arm
tor is released, control of the system reverts assembly is loose or was
to the gunner's control. The commander's removed, tighten screw to 5-7
control is connected mechanically to the lb-ft (6.8-9.5 N.m).
gunner's control assembly by two control e. Secure traverse rod end to traverse
rods. lever with screw and nut.
10-34. Commander's Control Linkage Adjustment If necessary, repeat c through e,
(Fig 10-13). above, until tendency of commander's control
handle to rotate in the traverse axis has been
WARNING eliminated.
If the elevation and traverse g. If the control handle has a tendency to
rods are out of adjustment, move rearward when the override switch is
some movement of the main actuated, the elevating rod length must be
gun or turret may occur when shortened. If the handle moves forward, the
the commander's override actu elevation rod length must be increased.

10-20 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

i AMC 833084
Figure 10-13. Adjustment of commander's control linkage.

h. Adjust elevation rod end similarly to h. Remove commander's control from

traverse rod end (c through e, above) until mounting bracket (view B).
movement of control handle in elevation axis
has been eliminated. 10-36. Installation (Fig 10-14).
10-35. Removal of Commander's Control (Fig
10-14). a. Position commander's control on
mounting bracket, and secure with four lock-
a. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER and washers and capscrews (view B).
MASTER BATTERY switches in OFF posi b. Connect electrical connector to com
tions and engage turret traverse lock. mander's control (view B).
b. Remove nut and screw from traverse c. Screw traverse rod into rod end at
rod end and traverse lever (view A). commander's control (view A).
c. Loosen jam nut on traverse rod end d. Tighten jam nut on traverse rod end
(view A). (view A).
d. Unscrew traverse rod from rod end at e. Connect traverse rod end to traverse
commander's control (view A). lever and secure with screw and nut (view A).
e. Remove elevation rod, using procedure
f. Install elevation rod, using same pro
similar to that described in steps b, c, and d
cedure described in steps c through e for
(view A).
traverse rod.
f. Disconnect electrical connector from g. Adjust commander's control linkage
commander's control (view B). upon completion of installation procedures.
g. Remove capscrews and lockwashers
from commander's control and mounting
bracket (view B).

Change 2 10-21
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

A B AR702639

Figure 10-14. Removal and installation of commander's control assembly.

Section VIII. MAINTENANCE OF GUNNER'S CONTROL ASSEMBLY

Note deleted.

10-37. Description. direction of flow of the hydraulic fluid. The

gunner's control assembly contains a mag
The gunner's control assembly consists of netic brake switch which is actuated by the
a logic module, right and left handles, a normally closed palm switch on the gunner's
housing in which various mechanical linkages control handle. Actuation of the magnetic
function, and a hydraulic control valve. The brake switch opens the magnetic brake elec
gunner can fire both the main gun and the tric circuit which releases a magnetic brake
7.62-mm machine gun, power elevate or in the traversing mechanism thereby enabling
depress the main gun, and traverse the turret the traversing mechanism to operate. Provi
through the use of the gunner's control sions are made in the gunner's control assem
handles. By operating the gunner's control, bly to permit control of the hydraulic system
various internal hydraulic valves are actu to be shifted to the commander's control.
ated, thereby permitting flow of hydraulic This permits the tank commander to override
fluid under pressure to actuate either the the gunner's controls and to take control of
main gun elevating cylinder or the hydraulic gun elevating and depressing, turret travers
gearbox motor in the turret traversing gear ing, and firing of the main gun and the 7.62-
box, or both. The elevating cylinder will mm machine gun.
either elevate or depress the main gun, The electronics (logic) module assembly con
depending on direction of flow of hydraulic nects to the gunner's switches and computer. With
fluid. Similarly, the hydraulic gearbox motor either gunner's palm switch depressed, momentari
in the traversing mechanism will traverse the ly depressing either thumb switch will fire the
turret in either direction, depending on the LRF and establish lead.

10-22 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 10-15. Gunner's control assembly.

GUNNER'S PLUNGER HYDRAULIC

CONTROL \ POWER VALVE
Lead remains fixed until the gunner's palm switches
are released. Momentarily releasing both gunner's
palm switches cancels the lead and allows a new
lead (and range from gunner's station) to be estab
lished. The simultaneous lead and range functions
from the thumb switch are not available at the
commander's station.
The adjustable resistor assembly is located in RECEPTACLE- MOUNTING
the gunner's control assembly and is connected BRACKET
ELECTRICAL
electrically to the stabilization controller CONNECTORS CAPSCREW (2)
unit. The adjustable resistor assembly sends LOCKWASHER (21
cancelling signals to the stabilization
controller unit to prevent stabilization
correction signals from being introduced into
the system as a result of turret and gun
movement commanded by gunner's or
commander's controls. Figure 10-16. Removal and installation of
gunner's control assembly.

Change 2 10-23
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

10-38. Removal of Gunner's Control Assembly ends and secure with two screws and lock-
(Figs 10-15 and 10-16). washers (fig 10-15).
WARNING g. If vehicle is TTS equipped, install TTS
Fluid in the main accumulator ballistic shield handle assembly to gunner's
will be under pressure. control assembly (para 15-115).
a. Perform zero pressure check (para 2- h. Place MASTER BATTERY and
10a). ELEV/TRAV POWER switches in ON positions
b. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in and check for hydraulic leaks.
OFF position. If vehicle is TTS equipped, f. Bleed the hydraulic system (para 2-
remove ballistic shield control handle (para lOd).
15-115). /. Check operation of turret and gun
c. Remove two screws and lock washers control in both power and stabilized mode.
and remove connecting rod levers (fig 10-15). Refer to TM 9-2350-253-10 for power and
d. Disconnect and tag seven hydraulic stabilized mode operating instructions.
lines from hydraulic power valve assembly
(fig 10-16). 10-40. Replacement and Adjustment of
e. Install suitable plugs in the open lines Adjustable Resistor Assembly of Gun
and ports of the hydraulic power valve assem ner's Control Assembly (Fig 10-17).
bly (fig 10-16).
f. Remove two capscrews and lock- a. Removal.
washers securing deck clearance valve (1) Place ELEV/TRAV POWER and
mounting bracket to hydraulic power valve MASTER BATTERY switches in OFF posi
assembly and remove deck clearance valve tions.
(fig 10-16). (2) If vehicle is TTS equipped, remove
g. Disconnect wiring harness from recep TTS ballistic shield handle assembly from
tacle (fig 10-16). gunner's control assembly (para 15-115) and
h. Disconnect two hand elevating pump position ballistic shield handle assembly and
assembly electrical connectors (fig 10-16). cable to prevent interference during removal
1. Remove four capscrews and lock- of adjustable resistor cover.
washers securing hydraulic power valve (3) Remove XM21 gunner's ammo sel
assembly to riser and remove the gunner's ect unit (para 15-7 8b).
control assembly from the riser (fig 10-16). (4) Disconnect commander's rod ends
j. Remove four preformed packings and and remove elevation and traverse levers
discard. (para 10-35).
10-39. Installation of Gunner's Control As (5) Disconnect cable connector from
sembly (Fig 10-16). gunner's control assembly cover (view A).
a. Coat four new preformed packings (6) Remove six screws and lock washers
with hydraulic fluid (FRH) (item 13, App. C) securing resistor adjustment cover plate and
and install with replacement gunner's control gasket to the gunner's control assembly
assembly hydraulic power valve assembly on riser. cover, and remove cover plate (view B).
Secure the assembly to the riser with four cap- (7) Hold traverse adjusting nut and
screws and washers (fig 10-15). loosen locknut; turn adjusting nut until it is
released from traverse control bracket as
b. Connect two hand elevating pump
sembly (view B).
assembly electrical connectors.
(8) Repeat step (7) for the elevation
c. Connect wiring harness electrical con
adjusting nut (view B).
nector to receptacle.
d. Install deck clearance valve and (9) Remove two screws securing gun
-mounting bracket to the hydraulic power ner's control assembly cover and remove cover
valve assembly using two capscrews and (view B).
lock washers. (10) Remove locknut and electrical con
e. Remove plugs from lines and ports as nector (view C).
required and install hydraulic lines, previously (11) Remove two screws and washers
tagged, to the hydraulic power valve assem securing clamp to cover; remove clamp (view
bly. C).
f. Install connecting rod levers and rod (12) Remove screw, lockwasher, and

10-24 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

ADJUSTMENT
COVER PLATE
SCREW 12)
SCREW (6)

LOCKWASHER (6)
FORWARD

GASKET

JAM NUT (2)

TRAVERSE
ADJUSTING
NUT
TRAVERSE CONTROL
BRACKET ASSY
ELEVATION CONTROL
BRACKET ASSY GUNNER'S
CONTROL
SUPPORT ASSEMBLY
COVER
ASSEMBLY
ELEVATION
ADJUSTING NUT

LOCKNUT
ADJUSTABLE
RESISTOR
ASSEMBLY

WASHER
ELECTRICAL
LOCKWASHER CONNECTOR
PACKING
MOUNTING SCREW
ELECTRICAL
CLAMP, WASHER (2) 1 CONNECTOR
RESISTOR ADJUSTING NUTS SCREW (2)

AR 702641
Figure 10-17. Removal, adjustment, and installation of adjustable resistor assembly.
washer securing adjustable resistor assembly (2) Secure wiring, using two screws,
to gunner's control assembly cover and and clamp (view C).
remove resistor assembly (view C). (3) Install new packing on electrical
b. Installation. connector; secure connector to gunner's con
(1) Position adjustable resistor assem trol assembly cover with locknut (view C).
bly on gunner's control assembly cover, and (4) Position cover on gunner's control
secure with screw, lock washer, and washer assembly and secure with two screws (view B). |
(view C).

Change 2 10-25
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(5) Attach adjustable resistor slider (8) Place test set mode selector switch
shafts to the traverse and elevation control in position S. Rotate adjusting nut slowly in
bracket assemblies by screwing the adjusting either direction as required to obtain a meter
nuts to the control ends. Do not tighten indication of 0.
locknut at this time. (9) Tighten the traverse jam nut while
holding the adjusting nut.
(5.1) Connect electrical connector
to adjustable resistor. (10) Rotate handles in both directions,
allowing handles to return slowly to center
(6) Perform adjustment of resistor from each direction. If meter needle does
assembly and complete installation by per not return to 0, or if meter indication from
forming steps (6) through (10) of para 10-40c. one direction is different from the other,
c. Adjustment of Adjustable Resistors repeat steps (7) through (9).
(Fig 10-17). (11) Repeat steps (7) through (10) for
(1) Place MASTER BATTERY switch the elevation adjustment, except that the
in OFF position. test set selector switch should be placed in
(2) Ensure ELEV/TRAV POWER switch position 7 (elevation adjustment).
is in OFF position also. (11.1) Turn STS POWER switch to
(3) Remove six screws and washers OFF.
securing adjustable resistor adjustment cover (11.2) Place STAB and STAB POWER
plate and gasket and remove the plate and switches to OFF.
gasket (view B). (11.3) Place ELEV/TRAV and MAS
(4) Using a 1/4-inch open-end wrench TER BATTERY switches to OFF.
(automotive electric wrench set from number (12) Install the adjustment cover plate,
2 common tool set), loosen the traverse gasket, screws, and washers.
adjusting jam nut while holding the adjusting
(13) If vehicle is TTS equipped, install
nut (view B).
(5) Remove stabilization test set cable TTS ballistic shield handle assembly to gun
from test set cover and connect as follows: ner's control handle assembly (para 15-115).
(a) Disconnect connector PI of (14) Install commander's control linkage.
I cable 1W3 from ECU. (15) Install gunner's ammo select unit
(b) Connect connector PI of cable (para 15-79).
1W3 to test cable connector marked CABLE. NOTE
(c) Connect test cable connector If returning to testing procedure
marked CONTROLLER UNIT to controller unit. (i.e., malfunction 21, step 16),
(d) Place test set test selector switch reestablish power by following
in OFF position and mode switch in position N. steps 11.3, 11.2, and 11.1.
(e) Connect the connector marked 1041. Gunner's Control Handle Switches.
TEST SET to test set. WARNING
(6) Engage turret traverse lock and Visually check to ensure all
gun travel lock. Place MASTER BATTERY guns are unloaded.
switch in ON position. Place ELEV/TRAV NOTE
POWER switch in ON position. Both right and left gunner's
NOTE control handle switches are
Place test set test selector switch removed, installed, and adjusted
in position 6 (traverse handle). in the same manner.
Place stabilization POWER and a. Removal (Figs 10-18 and 10-19).
STAB switches in ON positions. (1) Place MASTER BATTERY switch,
Push POWER switch ON if but MAIN GUN switch, MACHINE GUN switch,
ton is not illuminated. and ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF
positions and engage turret traverse lock.
(7) Verify that test set mode switch is
(2) Remove four screws and
in position N. Rotate traverse adjustment nut
lockwashers securing cover plate and logic
on adjustment resistor assembly in either direc
module to gunner's control box housing (view
tion as required to obtain minimum reading on
A, fig 10-18).
test set meter.

10-26 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 10-18. Removal and installation of gunner's control

handle switches.

Change 2 10-27
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(3) Remove two socket head screws c. Adjustment of Gunner's Control Handle
and lockwashers securing handle cover to Trigger and Palm Switches (Fig 10-19).
gunner's control handle (view A, fig 10-18). WARNING
(4) Remove handle cover from gunner's Ensure that all guns are un
control handle (view A, fur 10-18). loaded. Place MACHINE GUN
(5) Cut splices from wires (view B, fig and MAIN GUN switches in OFF
10-18). position.
(6) Deleted. NOTE
(7) Remove gunner' s control firing trig The following procedures apply
ger switch and gunner's control palm switch to both gunner's handles.
from gunner's control handle (fig 10-19). (1) Turn MASTER BATTERY and
b. Installation (Figs 10-18 and 10-19). ELEV/TRAV POWER switches to ON position.
(2) Slowly rotate trigger adjustment
(1) Using adhesive (itenv 1, App. C), setscrew in a clockwise direction (as viewed
bond enough shims to replacement palm and from head of screw) until trigger switch is no
trigger switches to provide an interference fit longer actuated by the trigger (no audible
of .001 to .017 inches between the switches click) (fig 10-19, view A).
and the handle (fig 10-19, view B). Apply (3) While maintaining a light pressure
adhesive as follows: on the trigger, slowly rotate the trigger
adjustment setscrew in counterclockwise di
Number of coats: 2 or 3
rection until the switch actuates (a click is
Drying time between heard). Continue to rotate setscrew in
coats: 30 to 60 minutes
counterclockwise direction until approxi
(2) After bonding shim(s) to switch(es),
mately 1/3 turn past the point where audible
allow adhesive to dry 2 to 6 minutes before
click occurred (view A).
installing switch(es) into handle.
(4) Adjust palm switch adjustment set-
screw, using same procedures as in steps (1)
NOTE
and (2) for trigger adjustment setscrew (view
The palm switch is normally
A).
closed and the trigger switch is (4.1) Fill tapped holes with sealing com
normally open. Check markings
pound (item 10.1, App. C).
on switch to determine position
(5) Position handle cover on gunner's
of contacts for installation.
control handle and secure with two lock-
washers and socket head screws (fig 10-18,
(3) Trim leads on replacement
switches to proper length. Position switch view A).
leads, gunner's control firing trigger switch, (6) Position logic module and cover
and gunner's control palm switch in gunner's plate on gunner's control box and secure with
control handle (fig 10-19, view A). four lockwashers and screws (fig 10-18, view
(4) Insert palm and trigger switch leads A).
(7) Check operation of firing circuits
through handle shaft and connect leads using (TM 9-2350-253-10).
splice and heat shrink insulation sleeve (fig 10- (8) Check operation of magnetic
18, view C). brake and elevation shut-off systems (TM 9-
(5) Deleted. 2350-253-10).
(6) Adjust trigger and palm switches in
accordance with paragraph c before installing
handle cover.

10-28 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 10-19. Adjustment of gunner's control handle trigger switches and palm switches.

10-29
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section IX. MAINTENANCE OF SUPERELEVATION ACTUATOR

10-42. Description. tuator. Tag hydraulic lines and plug open

lines and ports with suitable plugs.
The superelevation actuator is located d. Remove four capscrews securing
on the right side of the turret and is hydrau- superelevation actuator to turret mounting
lically connected to the elevating mechanism bracket.
and the power pack control assemblies and e. Remove superelevation actuator from
mechanically coupled to the output unit of turret mounting bracket.
the XM21 ballistics computer system. Super f. Remove four adapters from super
elevation angle data, consisting of range elevation actuator ports.
data and ammunition characteristics, g. Remove and discard four preformed
is transmitted mechanically from the output packings from superelevation actuator.
unit to the superelevation actuator. The 10-44. Installation (Fig 10-20).
superelevation actuator adds sufficient hy a. Coat four new preformed packings with
draulic fluid to the elevating mechanism to hydraulic fluid (item 13, App. C). Install packing
correctly position the main gun. and four adapters into superelevation actuator
ports.
1043. Removal (Fig 10-20). b. Position superelevation actuator on
turret mounting bracket.
WARNING c. Install four capscrews securing super
Fluid in the superelevation ac elevation actuator to turret mounting
tuator will be under pressure. bracket.
a. Perform zero pressure check (para 2- d. Connect four hydraulic lines to
10a). elevation actuator adapters.
b. Remove flexible drive shaft from e. Install flexible drive shaft on i
superelevation actuator (para 10-47). actuator (para 10-49).
c. Open bleeder valves and disconnect f. Perform flexible drive shaft adjustment
four hydraulic lines from superelevation ac (para 10-49c).

SUPERELEVATION
ACTUATOR
(SEE INSET)

FLEXIBLE
DRIVE
SHAFT

HYDRAULIC SUPERELEVATION
LINE (4) ACTUATOR
PREFORMED
PACKING (4)
(HIDDEN) ADAPTER
(4)
|PACKING|
(4)

FROM
'elevating
(mechanism

Figure 10-20. Removal, installation, and check of superelevation actuator.

10-30
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

9' Bleed turret hydraulic system upon b. Lay gunner's periscope reticle on a
completion of installation (para 2-10d). clearly defined aim point at least 1000
h. Check operation of superelevation meters away.
actuator by performing test (para 10-45). c. Set the manual range dial to
several range values between 500 meters
10-45. Test. and 3500 meters. For each range value,
observe that gun superelevation motion
a. Place M21 ballistics computer in occurs. After motion stops, observe that
MANUAL range mode and select HEP ammuni horizontal center line of periscope reticle
tion. Set manual range dial to 1200 meters. Place remains on target in elevation within + 2.5 I
ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in ON position. mils.

Section X. MAINTENANCE OF SUPERELEVATION ACTUATOR DRIVE SHAFT

10-46. Description. 1047. Removal (Fig 10-21).

The superelevation actuator linkage a. Place MASTER BATTERY and
is an encased flexible drive shaft which
ELEV/TRAV POWER switches in OFF posi-
interconnects between the output unit of tion.
the M21 ballistics computer system and the 6. Remove lockwire securing knurled nut at
superelevation actuator. Elevation cor the superelevation actuator and the M21
rections generated by the computer are ballistics computer system output unit.
mechanically fed through the flexible drive
c. Disconnect the flexible drive shaft from
shaft to the superelevation actuator.
both the superelevation actuator and the output
unit.
d. Remove two screws, washers, and
clamps securing the shaft casing and remove
flexible shaft.

%
Figure 10-21. Removal, adjustment, and installation of superelevation actuator drive shaft.

Change 2 10-31
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

10-48. Inspection. c. With the superelevation actuator flexible

drive shaft connected to the superelevation
Check drive dog and splines for signs of actuator, rotate the square end drive of the
excessive wear. Pull shaft free of casing and shaft clockwise until the stop is reached and
inspect shaft for any indications of un
back off three turns. Manually rotate the
winding. If any part of the shaft is damaged
output shaft of the XM21 ballistics computer
sufficiently to impair its functions, replace
system output unit in the direction which
entire assembly.
increases the mil indication of the output
unit until a stop is reached (approximately 85
10-49. Installation (Fig 10-21).
mils). Connect the flexible drive shaft of the super
elevation actuator to the output unit. (The drive
a. Install two clamps onto replacement flex dog or square end of the flexible shaft may have to
ible drive shaft and secure with two screws and be rotated slightly to mate with the connector on
washers. the output unit). Secure with knurled nut and re
b. Install flexible drive shaft onto supereleva
place lockwire (item 30, App. C).
tion actuator and secure with knurled nut and re
place lockwire (item 30, App. C).
Section XI. MAINTENANCE OF POWER PACK RESERVOIR
check markings for legibility. Replace dip
10-50. Description.
stick if damaged.
b. Installation (View C, Fig 2-4). Install
The power pack hydraulic reservoir serves
liquid level gage dipstick in reservoir.
as supply reservoir for the hydraulic fluid
which powers the elevating and traversing
10-53. Reservoir Liquid Level Sight Gage.
systems.
a. Removal (Fig 10-23).
WARNING
10-51. Reservoir Drain Cock. Ensure that hydraulic system
pressure is relieved (0 psi on
a. Removal (Fig 10-22). pressure gage).
WARNING (1) Perform zero pressure check.
Ensure that hydraulic system (2) Drain hydraulic fluid from system.
pressure is relieved (0 psi on (3) Remove four (4) screws and lock-
pressure gage). washers securing liquid level gage to reser
voir and remove gage and plate.
(1) Perform zero pressure check (para b. Installation (Fig 10-23).
2-1 0a). (0.1) Seal screws and level gage surface
(2) Drain hydraulic fluid from system in contact with reservoir with sealing compound
(para 2-10b). (item 26.2, App. C).
(3) Traverse turret until drain cock is (1) Position liquid level gage and plate
accessible from driver's compartment. on reservoir and secure with four lockwashers
(4) Remove drain cock. and screws.
b. Installation (Fig 10-23). (2) Refill power pack reservoir (LO 9-
(1) Apply antiseize compound (item 2350-253-12) and check for leaks.
8, App. C) to thread portion of reservoir drain
cocks. 10-54. Reservoir Oil Strainer.
(2) Install drain cock. a. Removal (Fig 10-23).
(3) Refill power pack reservoir (LO 9-
(1) Unscrew oil strainer nut from
2350-253-12) and check for leaks.
reservoir.
(2) Remove oil strainer from reservoir.
10-52. Reservoir Liquid Level Gage Dipstick.
b. Cleaning. Wash oil strainer with dry
a. Removal (View C, Fig 2-4). cleaning solvent, (item 28, App. C). Dry with dry
(1) Remove liquid level gage dipstick compressed air. If compressed air is not available,
from power pack reservoir. place oil strainer on previously cleaned area and
(2) Examine dipstick for damage and allow to air dry.

10-32 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

c. Inspection and Repair (Fig 10-23). d. Installation (Fig 10-23).

Inspect all soldered joints for defects. Re- (1) Insert oil strainer into power pack
solder (item 27, App. C) if necessary. Inspect oil reservoir.
strainer nut for worn or damaged threads. Replace (2) Screw oil strainer nut into
oil strainer if damaged in any way that may impair reservoir to secure oil strainer in place.
functions.

Figure 10-22. Removal and installation of reservoir drain cock.

Figure 10-23. Removal and installation of reservoir liquid level sight gage and oil strainer.

10-33
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section XII. MAINTENANCE OF POWER PACK ELECTRIC DRIVE MOTOR

10-55. Description. motor to turret platform by loosening the fabrica

ted tool j-bolts adjusting nuts (view A).
The power pack control electric drive 9. Disengage motor from fabricated tool and
motor is a sealed waterproof unit located at remove from under reservoir. Remove motor-to-
the bottom of the power pack control assem pump coupling spider from motor coupling (view
bly. The electric drive motor is a constant D). Remove motor from turret.
speed, series-wound, direct-current unit of r. If motor is being replaced, perform the
ten horsepower. following steps:
(1) Remove and discard cotter pin (view
10-56. Removal (Fig 10-24). E) securing locknut to motor shaft and remove
locknut, fan (view F), woodruff key, and two flat
a. Unlock gun travel lock and turret
traverse lock. washers (view G) from motor shaft.
(2) Remove eight screws and lockwashers
b. Traverse turret until power pack elec
securing two air duct elbows and two gaskets to
tric drive motor is accessible from driver's
motor housing. Remove elbows and gasket. Discard
compartment.
c. Depress gun to stops. gaskets (view G).
(3) Loosen setscrew securing motor coup
d. Engage turret traverse lock.
e. Turn MASTER BATTERY and ling to motor shaft. Remove motor coupling and
ELEV/TRAV POWER switches in OFF posi woodruff key from motor shaft (view D).
s. If new motor is to be installed, proceed to
tion.
para 10-57. If not, check motor coupling setscrew,
f. Remove gunner's seat and seat support
and pump coupling setscrew for security of mount
assembly (para 6-14).
g. Remove turret power relay and CB box ing (view D).
(para 5-38).
h. Disconnect electrical connector ' from 10-57. Installation (Fig 10-24).
power pack electric drive motor (view A).
i. Loosen two clamps and disconnect two air a. Remove eight screws and lockwashers
blower tubes from power pack motor air duct securing two shipping plates to motor
elbows (view A). housing. Remove shipping plates and gaskets
/". Remove screw, flat washer, and two inter (view H).
nal/external tooth lockwashers securing motor, b. Install two shipping plates on un
electrical lead (ground strap) to motor support serviceable motor with eight screws and
bracket and remove lead (views B and C). lockwashers (view H).
k. Remove remaining three screws, lock- NOTE
washers, and flat washers securing motor to sup Check thickness of new air duct
port bracket (view C). elbow gaskets. Gaskets must be
/. Remove four screws, lockwashers, and flat 0.062 inch thick. If not, apply
washers securing power pack mounting bracket sealing compound (item 23, app. C)
mounting plate to platform floor and remove plate to gaskets prior to installation.
and bracket (view C). (Note: Do not remove
c. Install two gaskets and two air duct
bracket from plate.)
elbows on motor housing and secure with
m. Remove four screws securing fan shroud
eight socket head capscrews and lockwashers
section (2) to motor and remove shroud (view D).
If necessary, pry shroud sections apart for remov (view G).
d. Install two flat washers on motor shaft
al.
and position woodruff key in slot in motor
n. Remove two of the four screws and lock
shaft (view G) (fan end) and install fan (view
washers (180 degrees apart on sides only) securing
power pack electric drive motor to reservoir (view F). Secure fan with locknut and install new cotter
pin through locknut and motor shaft (view E).
D).
o. Install fabricated removal/installation tool Bend cotter pin tangs around locknut.
(item 14, table 1-1) on power pack reservoir as e. Position woodruff key in slot in motor
shown in view A. shaft and install motor coupling on shaft with
p. Remove remaining two screws and lock serrated edge facing away from motor body
washers securing motor to reservoir, and lower (view D).

10-34
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 10-24. Power pack electric drive motor removal and installation (1 of 4).

Change 2 10-35
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

J SCREW , FLAT WASHER,

SCREW (3) | LOCKWASHER (2)
LOCK WASHER (3)
FLAT WASHER (3) ELECTRICAL LEAD
(GROUND STRAP)
SCREW (4)
MOUNTING PLATE LOCKWASHER (4)
FLATWASHER(4)

PUMP COUPLING SETSCREW

( HIDDEN!

MOTOR COUPLING SETSCREW

LOCKWASHER (4)
SCREW (4)
MOTOR

FAN SHROUD SECTION (2)

(ONE SHOWN,
ONE ON OTHER SIDE)
SCREW (2)
( EACH SECTION)
AR702655

Figure 10-24. Power pack electric drive motor removal and installation (2 of 4).

10-36
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 10-24. Power pack electric drive motor removal and installation (3 of 4).

f. Measure and note distance from pump CAUTION

coupling mating surface and bottom of pump Tighten tool j-bolt nuts only
mount (view I). until spider coupling comes in
g. Adjust coupling on motor shaft until dis contact with pump coupling.
tance from motor coupling mating surface and Over tightening when spider
motor mating surface is 0.030 inch less than dis coupling and pump coupling are
tance noted in (f) above (view J). Tighten motor misalined, could force pump
coupling setscrew (view D). shaft through pump and into
h. Install fabricated removal/installation tool reservoir.
(item 14, table 1-1) on power pack reservoir as
shown in view A.
L Install spider coupling on motor coupling k. Tighten j-bolt nuts evenly until spider
(view D). coupling comes in contact with pump coupling
j. Position power pack pump motor under (view K).
power pack reservoir and engage tool (item 14, /• Using a screwdriver, rotate motor
table 1-1).

10-37
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

spider coupling until spider coupling and pump PUMP ASSEMBLY

coupling are alined (view K).
NOTE
If binding occurs, lower motor
and realine spider coupling and
pump coupling.
Continue to tighten j-bolt nuts slowly,
checking for proper alinement of pump PUMP COUPLING
coupling and spider coupling, until motor is
properly seated in pump housing recess (view I
K).
n. install two screws and lockwashers
(180 degrees apart) securing motor to reser
voir. Tighten securely (view B).
o. Remove fabricated removal/installation
tool (item 14, table 1-1) from reservoir.
p. Install remaining two motor mounting
screws and lockwashers.
q. Install two motor shroud sections on motor
housing with four screws as indicated in view D.
r. Secure power pack motor support bracket
mounting plate (with bracket attached) to turret
platform with four screws and lockwashers (view
C).
s. Secure power pack motor to support
bracket with three screws and lockwashers (view
A).
t. Position electrical lead (ground strap) and
secure motor to mounting bracket with screw, flat
washer and two internal/external tooth lockwash
ers (views B and C).
u. Route air duct tubes around left side of
power relay box and connect tubes to air duct
elbows. Tighten clamps securely (view A).
v. Connect power pack motor electrical
connector (view A).
w. Install turret power and searchlight relay
box and gunner's foot plate (para 5-39).
NOTE
N AR702651
Keep air tubes free of dirt and
debris. Figure 10-24. Power pack electric drive motor
x. Install gunner's seat support assembly and removal and Installation (4 of 4).
seat (para 6-18).

Section XIII. MAINTENANCE OF MAIN GUN ELEVATING MECHANISM ASSEMBLY

10-58. Description.

The elevating mechanism is located pack control assembly, the manual elevation
directly beneath, and is attaehed to the pump and accumulator, and the supereleva
combination gun mount and to the turret race tion actuator. Movement of the piston in the
ring. The elevating mechanism is connected, elevating mechanism elevates or depresses
by means of hydraulic lines, to the power the main gun tube.

10-38
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 10-25. Elevating mechanism and front bracket removal and installation.

10-39
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

10-59. Removal (Fig 10-25). TRAV POWER switches in OFF positions.

b. Open bleeder valves (view B) and
a. Put gun in travel position (TM9-2350- extend piston of elevating cylinder to allow
253-10). proper positioning in front bracket and com
b. Perform zero pressure check (para 2- bination gun mount.
10a). c. Position elevating mechanism in front
c. Disconnect electrical connector on bracket and install shouldered bolt. Connect
front of servovalve (view A). hydraulic tube to swivel connector. Tighten
NOTE tube nut.
Cap or plug all hydraulic tubes d. Position right side swivel hydraulic
and ports to prevent entry of tube support bracket to front bracket and
foreign material. secure with two lockwashers and screws (view
d. Tag (for identification purposes) and B).
disconnect two hydraulic tubes on front of e. Position elevating mechanism in
servovalve (view A). combination gun mount and install
e. Tag and disconnect six hydraulic tubes shouldered bolt. Install two self-locking
at lock valve (view A). Disconnect bottom nuts on two shouldered bolts (view B),
tubes first and work toward top of lock valve Tighten nut to 600-660 Ib-ft (814-895 N.m). |
(view A). f. Remove caps and plugs from hydraulic
f. Remove self-locking nut and shoul tubes and ports and install six hydraulic tubes
dered bolt securing elevating mechanism to to lock valve (view A). Start at top and work
combination gun mount (views A and B). down.
g. Remove two hex head screws and g. Position and secure pressure and re
lockwashers securing swivel tube support turn hydraulic tubes to servovalve.
bracket to right side of front bracket (view h. Connect electrical connector to servo
B). valve (view A).
h. Remove self-locking nut and i. Close bleeder valves (view B). Bleed
shouldered bolt securing elevating mechanism hydraulic system (para 2-1 Od).
to front bracket (view B). /. Check for leakage of hydraulic fluid
10-60. Installation. Check system operation (TM 9-2350-253-10).

a. Place MASTER BATTERY and ELEV/-

Section XIV. MAINTENANCE OF ELEVATION SHUT-OFF VALVE ASSEMBLY

10-61. Description. 10-62. Removal (Fig 10-26).

The elevation shutoff valve assembly is a WARNING

solenoid-controlled hydraulic valve installed Fluid in the elevation shutoff
in the hydraulic circuit between the elevating valve assembly will be under
mechanism and the power pack control. The pressure.
valve is electrically controlled through the a. Perform zero pressure check (para 2-
gunner's or commander's palm switches. 10a).
When the turret power is turned on, the b. Disconnect electrical connector from
solenoid is energized and hydraulic flow valve solenoid (view B).
between the power pack and elevating mech c. Disconnect three hydraulic lines from
anism is blocked. When either palm switch is valve (view A) and plug open lines.
actuated, the solenoid is deenergized, per d. Remove two screws and lockwashers
mitting pressurized hydraulic fluid flow to securing valve to main accumulator support
the elevating mechanism through the deck and remove valve.
clearance valve. The purpose of the valve is
to prevent accidental movement of the main 10-63. Installation (Fig 10-26).
gun. a. Position elevation shutoff valve assembly

10-40
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

>n main accumulator support and secure with two b. Disconnect electrical connector.
crews and lockwashers. c. Remove four screws and lockwashers
b. Install three new preformed packings securing solenoid to valve. Remove defective
n valve body. solenoid and gasket.
c. Connect three hydraulic lines to valve d. Position replacement solenoid and gas
view A). ket on valve and secure with four screws and
d. Connect electrical connector to valve lockwashers.
.olenoid (view B). e. Connect electrical connector to sole
e. Bleed hydraulic system (para 2-1 Od) noid.
ind check for leaks. f. Verify correct operation of elevation
f. Verify correct operation by performing shutoff valve by energizing hydraulic power
:tep f of para 10-64 below. supply and attempting to elevate main gun,
using gunner's control handles (without first
10-64. Repair and Test (Fig 10-26, view B).
depressing the palm switches). Main gun
Repair is limited to replacement of defective should not elevate.
solenoid or valve.
g. Remove elevation shut-off valve assembly
WARNING (para 10-62).
Fluid will be under pressure in the h. Replace elevation shut-off valve assembly
elevation shutoff valve assembly. (para 10-63).

Figure 10-26. Removal and installation of hydraulic pressure gage and elevation shutoff valve.
Section XV. MAINTENANCE OF
MISCELLANEOUS HYDRAULIC VALVES AND FILTERS
10-65. Elevation Servovalve (Fig 10-27). WARNING
Fluid in the elevation servo
a. Description. The elevation servovalve valve assembly will be under
is part of the stabilization elevation valve pressure.
assembly and is mounted on its manifold. The (1) Perform zero pressure check (para
servovalve regulates hydraulic flow through 2-1 0a).
the stabilization elevation to the elevating (2) Fully depress main gun and engage
mechanism by means of summed and ampli gun travel lock.
fied electrical control signals from the ECU when the (2.1) Remove four screws and flat
stabilization mode is selected. washers securing guard (if present) to mani
b. Removal, v fold. Remove guard (view B).
(3) Remove four screws and lock
O.a. Perform zero pressure check (para
washers securing magnetic shield to studs.
2-10a). -
Remove shield (view B).
a. Place MASTER BATTERY and ELEV/-
TRAV POWER switches in OFF position. 10-41
Change 4
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 10-27. Removal and installation of elevation servovalve.

10-42 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2
(4) Disconnect electrical connector
(view A). (4) Refill power pack reservoir with
(5) Remove four studs and lock- hydraulic oil (LO 9-2350-253-12).
washers securing elevation servo valve (5) Bleed the hydraulic system (para 2-
assembly to manifold. Remove valve and lOd) and check for leaks.
four packings. Discard old packings (view
B). 10-67. Hydraulic Pressure Switch (Fig 10-28).
c. Installation.
(1) Position elevation servovalve as a. Description. The hydraulic pressure
sembly and new packing, lightly coated with switch is an electrohydraulic assembly. The
hydraulic fluid, (item 13, App. C), on the mani switch is hydraulically connected to the main
fold, and secure with four studs and lockwashers accumulator and electrically connected to
(view B). Tighten studs to 21-28 lb-ft (18-38 N m) the turret power relay in the turret power
dry, or to 16-21 lb-ft (22-28 N m) wet. distribution box. The switch energizes the
(2) Connect electrical connector to turret power relay when the accumulator
servovalve (view A). pressure drops to approximately 925 psi and
(3) Position magnetic shield over the deenergizes the turret power relay to stop
studs and secure with four screws and lock- the power pack control electric drive motor
washers (view B). when the accumulator pressure reaches ap
(3.1) Position guard (if present) over proximately 1225 psi.
magnetic shield and secure to manifold with b. Removal.
four screws and flat washers (view B). WARNING
(4) Release gun from gun travel lock. Fluid in the hydraulic pressure
(5) Bleed the hydraulic system (para switch will be under pressure.
2-10d) and check for leaks.
10-66. Hydraulic Relief Valve (Fig 10-24)
a. Description. The hydraulic relief
valve is connected in the hydraulic line from
the main accumulator to the power pack
control. In the event of excessive pressure
(2200 + 200 psi) in the accumulator circuit,
the relief valve will open, permitting hydrau
lic fluid in the accumulator to flow through
the hydraulic line to the power pack control
reservoir.
b. Removal.
WARNING
Fluid in the hydraulic relief
valve will be under pressure.
(1) Drain turret hydraulic system (para
2-1 0b).
(2) Gain access from driver's compart
ment. Remove four screws, lockwashers, and
two straps.
(3) Remove reducer at each end of
relief valve.
(4) Discard relief valve and packings.
c. Installation. Figure 10-28. Removal and installation of
(1) Making sure that the arrow on the hydraulic pressure switch.
relief valve is pointing correctly, mount
relief valve to plate at bottom of main (1) Perform zero pressure check (para
accumulator with two straps, four lock 2-1 0a).
washers, and screws. (2) Disconnect wiring harness from
(2) Install two packings and reducers pressure switch.
onto relief valve. (3) Remove screw securing pressure
(3) Connect two hydraulic lines to switch clamp to main accumulator support
relief valve. and remove clamp.

Change 2 10-43
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(4) Remove hydraulic pressure switch and controls when the hydraulic power solenoid is
gasket from adapter tee. deenergized.
(2) Override solenoid. The override
c. Installation solenoid is mounted on the hydraulic power
(1) Install hydraulic pressure switch valve assembly of the gunner's control assem
and gasket on tee adapter. bly. When the override solenoid is energized,
(2) Position switch clamp on switch control of the spools in the hydraulic power
and secure to main accumulator support with valve assembly is transferred to the com
screw. mander's control.
(3) Connect electrical connector to b. Removal (Fig 10-29).
switch.
(4) Bleed hydraulic system (para 2-10d) WARNING
and check for leaks. Make sure that hydraulic
(5) Check power pack reservoir (LO 9- system pressure is relieved (0
2350-253-12). psi on hydraulic system pressure
gage) before attempting to re
10-68. Hydraulic System Pressure Gage place hydraulic power solenoid
(Fig 10-26). and override solenoid.
(1) Perform zero pressure check (para
a. Removal. 2-1 0a).
WARNING (2) Disconnect electrical connector
Fluid in the hydraulic system from solenoid.
pressure gage will be under (3) Remove four screws and lock-
pressure. washers securing the solenoid and gaskets.
Discard gaskets.
(1) Perform zero pressure check (para c. Installation (Fig 10-29).
2-1 0a). (1) Position new gasket and solenoid on
(2) Loosen locking nut on hydraulic hydraulic power valve assembly and aline
system pressure gage (view A). mounting holes.
(3) Remove hydraulic system pressure (2) Secure solenoid to valve with four
gage and packing. screws and lockwashers. Tighten screws to
b. Installation. 24-36 lb-in (3-4 N.m).
(3) Connect electrical connector.
(1) Moisten new packing with hydraulic
fluid (item 13, App. C). Install it on end of union.
(2) Position hydraulic system pressure
gage, tighten locking nut, and ensure that
gage faces gunner's seat.
(3) Bleed hydraulic system (para 2-1 Od)
and check for leaks.

10-69. Hydraulic Power Solenoid or Override

Solenoid (Fig 10-29).
a. Description.
(1) Hydraulic power solenoid. The
hydraulic power solenoid is mounted on the
hydraulic power valve assembly of the gun
ner's control assembly. When the solenoid is
energized, a spool is moved by the solenoid
plunger to permit hydraulic fluid under pres
sure to be transmitted to spool valves in the
hydraulic power valve assembly. When the
solenoid is deenergized, the hydraulic fluid
supply is shut off from all the valves in the Figure 10-29. Removal and installation of
hydraulic power valve assembly. The turret commander's power solenoid
control system cannot be operated by power valve and override solenoid.

10-44 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

10-70. Stabilization Power Solenoid Valve (3) Identify and disconnect two hy
(Fig 10-30). draulic lines from power solenoid valve fit
tings (unions). Plug open lines (fip 10-29).
a. Description. The stabilization power (4) Remove two screws and lock-
solenoid valve is installed in a hydraulic line washers and remove power solenoid valve.
between the accumulator and the traverse (5) Remove two unions and packings
and elevation servovalves. It is connected from body and discard packings (view B).
| electrically to the ECU. When the stabilized mode c. Installation (Fig 10-30).
is selected, the stabilization power solenoid valve (1) Install two unions and new packings
opens to permit hydraulic flow to the elevation and into stabilization power solenoid valve body
traverse servovalves. (view B).
(2) Position power solenoid valve on
b. Removal (Fig 10-30). mounting surface and secure with two screws
WARNING and lockwashers (view B).
Fluid in the hydraulic power (3) Remove plugs and connect two
solenoid valve will be under hydraulic lines.
pressure. (4) Connect electrical connector to
(1) Perform zero pressure check, para power solenoid valve (fig 10-29).
2-1 0a. (5) Bleed the hydraulic system (para 2-
(2) Disconnect power solenoid valve lOd).
electrical connector. (6) Check operation of power solenoid
valve.

ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
SOLENOID VALVE

(21
BODY PACKING (2)

AR702658
Figure 10-30. Removal and installation of stabilization solenoid valve.
Change 4 10-45
 COVER
(MAGNETIC SHIELD)

B AMC 833382

Figure 10-31. Removal and installation of traverse mechanism stabilizer manifold covers.

10-46 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

10-71. Traverse Stabilizer Manifold Assembly (Fig (view B).

10-31). (2) Position cover over tubes and onto
a. Repair. brackets and secure with four flatwashers,
lockwashers and screws (view A).
Repair of the traverse stabilizer manifold
10-72. Stabilization System Filter Assembly.
assembly consists of the replacement of the mani
fold assembly covers and associated mounting a. Removal (Fig 10-32).
hardware. (1) Traverse turret so that stabiliz
b. Removal of covers.
ation system filter assembly is accessible
(1) Remove four screws, lockwashers, and
from driver's compartment.
flat washers securing cover to brackets and remove
cover (view A). WARNING
(2) Remove four screws and washers secur Ensure that hydraulic system is
ing covers (magnetic shields) to studs and remove relieved of pressure (0 psi) be
covers (view B). fore attempting to remove fil
c. Installation of covers. ter.
NOTE (2) Perform zero pressure check (para
Matching threads must be clean 2-1 Oa).
of grease and oil before coating. (3) Remove two hydraulic lines, cap lines
(0.1) Coat four magnetic shield screws with appropriate plugs, and identify.
with coating compound (item 7, App. C). (4) Remove elbow, two packings and two
(1) Position cover (magnetic shield) over reducers from filter. Discard packings.
studs and secure with four screws and washers

Figure 10-32. Servicing stabilization system filter assembly.

Change 2 10-47
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(5) Remove two screws, and lockwashers. b. Remove bowl from housing.
c. Drain fluid from bowl into container.
(6) Remove and discard filter assembly
(view B). d. Remove filter element and throw
away.
b. Installation (Fig 10-32). e. Remove and discard preformed pack
(1) Position filter assembly onto ing and two gaskets from housing.
mounting bracket and secure with two screws /. Using rag dampened with solvent
and lockwashers. (item 28, App. C), clean inside and outside of
(2) Install two packings and reducers in bowl.
filter assembly. g. Place bowl in clean place to air dry.
(3) Install elbow onto reducer at input port h. Lightly coat threads of bowl with
of filter assembly. silicone compound (item 11, App. C).
(4) Connect hydraulic lines to output redu
cer. i. Lightly coat new preformed packing
(5) Connect hydraulic line to elbow. with hydraulic fluid (item 13, App. B).
j. Install preformed packing and two
new gaskets in housing.
c. Post Installation Procedures
k. Install new filter element in housing.
I. Position bowl on housing and hand
NOTE
tighten.
m. Tighten bowl on housing.
After replacing the filter
element or the complete
filter assembly, the trapped NOTE
air must be removed from
the system. The following procedures apply
to type 2 and type 3 filters.
(1) Place Master Battery,
Elev/Trav Power and Stabilization switches
n. Using pliers, remove lockwire from
ON.
bowl.
(2) Traverse turret clockwise and
counterclockwise without introducing gun
elevation movement NOTE

(3) With Stabilization System ON For type 2 filter, go to step p.

and Hands OFF the gunner's control handle,
start the tank and turn the tank clockwise
and then counterclockwise. Turn Elev/Trav o. Using hands, remove bowl from hous
Power and Stabilization System Switches ing. Go to step q.
p. Using adjustable wrench, remove
OFF and shut down engine.
bowl from housing.
(4) Manually elevate and depress q. Drain fluid from bowl into container.
gun. If spongy, bleed elevation system.
r. Remove filter element and throw
away.
10-72.1 Replacement of Stabilization Filter s. Remove and discard preformed pack
Element (Fig 10-32.1). ing and retainer from housing.
a. Determine type of filter installed t. Using rag dampened with solvent
(view A). (item 28, App. C), clean inside and outside of
bowl.
NOTE u. Place bowl in clean place to air dry.
For type 1 filter, perform steps b v. Lightly coat threads of bowl with
thru m and view B. For type 2 and
silicone compound (item 11, App. C).
type 3 filters, perform n thru ab
and view C. w. Lightly coat new preformed packing
with hydraulic fluid (item 13, App. B).

10-48 Change 2
 TM. 9-2350-253-20-2

x. Install preformed packing and re NOTE

tainer in housing.
y. Install new filter element in housing. For type 3 filter, go to step ab.
z. Position bowl on housing and hand
tighten.
oa. Using adjustable wrench, tighten
bowl on housing.
ab. Using pliers, install lockwire from
bowl to housing.

TOP VIEW TOP VIEW

EARLY LATE
SIDE VIEW MODEL MODEL SIDE VIEW

TYPE 1 TYPE 2 TYPE 3

(BENDLX) (PUROLATOR) (AHICRAFT APPLIANCES
AND EQUIPMENT)

VIEW A

HOUSING

HOUSING
GASKET
PREFORMED
PACKING RETAINER

PREFORMED
PACKING
FILTER
FILTER
ELEMENT
ELEMENT

BOWL
BOWL

LOCKWIRE

Type 1 filter. Type 2 or 3 filter.

VIEW B VIEWC AMC 833175
Figure 10-32.1. Stabilization filters.

Change 2 10-49
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

10-73. Selector Valve selector valve and remove lever.

(6) Remove large nut and washer securing
a. Removal (Fig 10-33).
selector valve to bracket and remove valve.
WARNING (7) Remove tie fitting from drain valve if
replacement of valve is required.
Fluid in the main b. Installation (Fig 10-33).
accumulator will be under
pressure. (1) Install tie fitting in drain valve if new
valve is being installed.
(1) Perform zero pressure check (2) Position selector valve in bracket and
(para 2-10a). secure with large nut and washer.
(3) Position lever on selector valve and se
(2) Place MASTER BATTERY switch in cure with one screw.
OFF position. (4) Remove plugs from hydraulic lines and
(3) Disconnect and tag three hydraulic ports of selector valve.
lines from selector valve. (5) Connect three hydraulic lines to selec
tor valve.
(4) Install suitable plugs in open hydraulic (6) Place MASTER BATTERY and ELEV/
lines and in parts of selector valve. TRAV POWER switches in ON position and check
(5) Remove one screw securing lever to for hydraulic leaks.

833188

Figure 10-33. Removal and installation of selector valve.

10-50 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CHAPTER 11
MAINTENANCE OF STOWAGE BOXES,
RACKS, PROTECTIVE PADS, MACHINE
GUN INTERRUPTER, AND GUN SHIELD
COVER

Section I. MAINTENANCE OF AMMUNITION STOWAGE BOXES,

RACKS, AND MISCELLANEOUS STOWAGE BOXES AND COMPONENTS
11-1. Description. (b) Lift ammunition box straight up
Tubular stowage racks mounted in the and off rack mounting pins (view B).
turret bustle and to the left (on platform) of (3) Remove four bolts and two lock-
the main gun provide space for 24 rounds of washers securing seven 105-mm ammunition
105-mm ammunition. The ammunition is held clamps and mounting parts to turret.
securely in place by a spring-loaded handle Remove clamps with attached parts (view
(retainer). These handles are pulled against C).
the spring and then swung aside to allow the (3.1) Removal of Guards, Oddment Tray
rounds of ammunition to be inserted or and Bustle Three Round Ammunition Rack.
withdrawn from stowage rack tubes. Space
(a) Loosen wing nuts and re
for another 13 rounds is located on the turret
platform floor, to the left of the main move radio guard (view E, fig 11-1).
armament. The ammunition is clamped here, fb) Remove three screws, lock-
base -end-down. The upper stowage rack washers, and flatwashers securing right guard
retainer assembly, which is attached to the to turret roof (view E, fig 11-2). Remove guard.
turret ring, drops over the projectile ends of (c) Remove five screws, lock-
the ammunition and secures the rounds in an washers, and flatwashers securing left guard
upright position. to turret roof (view E, fig 11-2). Remove
Most racks will hold all types of guard.
ammunition. Some racks may have signs and (d) Disconnect input hose to
color specifying the only type of ammunition commander's electric air filter heater unit
to be stowed in the particular rack. Machine (view E, fig 11-1) and remove from oddment
gun ammunition is packed in metal boxes tray.
secured to the turret wall and platform with (e) Remove eight screws,
capscrews in the cupola ammunition box and lockwashers, and flatwashers securing odd
feed system. ment tray to bustle floor (view E, fig 11-2).
11-2. Ammunition Stowage Boxes and Racks, Remove oddment tray.
if) Remove three screws,
a. Removal (Fig 11-1).
lockwashers, and flatwashers securing three-
NOTE round ammunition rack (view E, fig 11-1) to
Removal of commander's seat mounting pads on bustle floor.
platform guard assembly is only (g) Lift three- round ammuni
required for removal of ammuni tion rack off pin and remove from turret.
tion box on edge of turret Note and record number of flatwashers on pin
basket. and mounting pads.
(0.1) Remove guard assembly (para
(3.2) Installation of Guards, Oddment
ll-3b) (5).
Tray and Bustle Three Round Ammunition
(1) Remove ammunition boxes by Rack.
removing four screws, washers, and lockwashers
(a) Install same number of
for each box (view A).
washers on alining pin (as noted during re
(1.1) Remove fire extinguisher (para moval).
18-1).
(b) Position three-round ammuni
(2) Remove 7.62-mm machine gun am tion rack into bustle (view E, fig 11-1) and onto
munition box as follows: alining pin and mounting pad.
(a) Remove three bolts (view B).

Change 2 11-1
 Figure 11-1. Removal and installation of ammunition stowage boxes and racks (lof2).

11-2 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

RETAINER
HANDLE

RETAINER HANDLE WITH TUBE RETAINER HANDLE WITHOUT TUBE

G H
AMC 833167

Figure 11-1. Removal and installation of ammunition stowage boxes and racks (2 of 2).

Change 2 11-3
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(c) Install same number of (4) Install 7.62-mm machine gun

washers between three round ammunition ammunition box as follows:
rack and mounting pads (as noted during (a) Position 7.62-mm machine gun
removal). ammunition box on rack mounting pins and
(d) Secure three round amm secure with three bolts (view B). Tighten
unition rack with three screws, lockwahers, bolts to 300-350 lb-ft (207-275 N.m).
and flatwashers. (b) Position ammunition boxes on
fe) Position oddment tray into turret platform floor and secure each box
bustle and secure with eight screws, lock- with four flat washers, lockwashers, and
washers, and flatwashers (view E, fig 11-2). screws (view A).
(fl Install input hose through (5) Install fire extinguisher (para
oddment tray and connect onto commander's 18- 1).
electric air filter unit. Tighten hose clamp (view (6) Install guard assembly (para
E, fig 11-1). ll-3f).
(g) Install left and right guards 11-3. Miscellaneous Stowage Boxes, Racks,
and secure to turret roof with eight screws, Brackets, Trays, and Screens.
lockwashers, and flatwashers (view E, fig
11-1) and tighten wing nuts (view E, fig 11- a. Removal of Three-Round Ammunition
Rack and Loader's Periscope Boxes (Figs 11-1
(4) Remove eight screws, lockwashers, and 11-2).
and washers securing 18-round ammunition (1) Remove four lockwashers, washers,
rack to mounting pad in turret bustle. Re and screws securing three-round ammunition
move 18-round ammunition rack (view E). rack assembly to mounting, pads of driver's
(5) Loosen two setscrews securing night viewer and oddment stowage boxes
retainer handle to rack and remove handle (view D, fig 11-1). Remove ammunition rack
(view F). assembly.
b. Disassembly of Retainer Handle (Views (2) Remove four screws, lockwashers,
G and H, Fig 11-1). and washers, securing loader's periscope box
(1) Remove tube. to mounting pads in turret; remove loader's
(2) Remove pin securing sleeve to periscope box (view A, fig 11-2).
handle. Remove sleeve, two springs, plug, a. J Removal of latch from three round
and spacer.
ammunition rack (Fig 11-1).
c. Repair. Repair is generally limited to
replacement of attaching hardware, straps, and (1) Remove two screws, nuts, and
protective pads cemented to brackets and four washers, securing latch to three-round
ammunition rack (view D, fig 11-1).
brackets within boxes.
d. Assembly of Retainer Handle (Fig 11- (2) Remove latch.
1). 5. Removal of Miscellaneous Brackets,
(1) Position plug, spacer, and two Boxes, and Guard (Fig 11-2).
springs on handle (view H). (1) Remove four screws, lockwashers,
(2) Position sleeve and secure with pin and nuts; remove radio accessory bracket
(view H). (view B).
(3) Position tube and secure (view G). (2) Remove two screws, lockwashers,
e. Installation (Fig 11-1). and nut securing each of two spare lamp
(1) Secure retainer handle to rack with boxes to radio box; remove two spare lamp
two setscrews (view F). boxes (view B).
(2) Position 18-round ammunition rack (3) Remove four screws and lock
on mounting pads in turret bustle and secure washers and remove grenade box (view C).
with eight screws, lockwashers, and washers (4) Remove eight screws, lockwashers,
(view E). and washers securing radio box to mounting
(3) Position 105-mm ammunition pads; remove radio box (view D).
clamps on retaining brackets and secure with (5) Remove two bolts and washers
two mounting bolts at ammunition rack securing commander^ seat platform guard
mount and two bolts and lockwashers at assembly to turret (view F). Remove guard
accessory box (view C). assembly.

11-4 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

b.l Installation of latch on three-round (2) Position radio box on mounting

ammunition rack (Fig 11-1). pads in turret and secure with eight screws,
(1) Position latch on three-round lockwashers, and washers (view D).
ammunition rack (view D, fig 11-1). (3) Position grenade box and secure
(2) Secure latch with two screws, with four lockwashers and screws (view C).
nuts, and four washers. (4) Position two spare lamp boxes and
secure with four nuts, lockwashers, and
c. Installation of Three-Round
Ammunition Rack and Loader's Periscope screws (view B).
(5) Position radio accessory bracket
Boxes (Figs 11-1 and 11-2).
and secure with four nuts, lockwashers, and
(1) Position loader's periscope box on
screws (view B).
mounting pads in turret and secure with four
washers, lockwashers, and screws (view A, fig 11-4. Driver's Night Viewer Stowage Box,
11-2). Rations Box, and Oddment Stowage
(2) Position three-round ammunition Box (Fig 11-3).
rack assembly on mounting pads of driver's
night viewer and oddment stowage boxes and a. Removal.
secure with four washers, lockwashers, and (1) Rotate turret so that main gun is
screws (view D, fig 11-1). pointed to front of tank (TM 9-2350-253-10).
d. Installation of Miscellaneous Brackets, (2) Depress main gun as far as possible
Trays, Boxes, and Guard. (Fig 11-2). (TM 9-2350-253-10).
(1) Position legs of guard in two (3) Place MASTER BATTERY and
retainers on side of ammunition stowage box. turret ELEV/TRAV power switches in OFF
Secure guard assembly to turret with two position (TM 9-2350-253-10).
bolts and washers (view F). Torque bolts to (4) Remove three-round ammunition
300-350 lb -ft (405-475 N.m). rack (para ll-3a(D).

Change 2 11-4.1/(11-4.2 blank)

 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

f- F AMC 833026
Figure 11-2. Removal and installation of periscope stowage boxes, miscellaneous
racks, brackets, trays, boxes, and guards.

Change 2 11-5

L
 Figure 11-3. Removal and installation of driver's night viewer stowage box, rations box,
and oddment stowage box.

11-6 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(5) Remove gunner's electric air filter (2) Clean insert mounting surface(s) of
heater unit (para 17-2b). dirt, grease, dry adhesive, etc., with dry
(6) Remove electronics unit (para cleaning solvent, (item 28, App. C).
15-105). (3) Apply a thin coat of general purpose
(7) Remove four screws, lockwashers, adhesive (item 2, App. C) to insert on pad mount
and flat washers securing oddment stowage ing surface(s) in stowage box and to mounting
box to rations box. Remove two screws, face(s) of insert or pad.
lock washers, and flat washers securing
oddment stowage box to turret floor. NOTE
Remove oddment stowage box. Exercise care to place the in
(8) Remove four screws, lockwashers, sert or pad in the proper posi
and flat washers securing rations box to tion before joining mating sur
driver's night viewer stowage box and remove faces. Adhesive is a contact
rations box. cement; once the two surfaces
(9) Remove two screws, lockwashers, are joined, they cannot be sepa
and flat washers securing driver's night rated for repositioning without
viewer stowage box to turret and remove destroying the adhesive quality
driver's night viewer stowage box. of the cement and possibly
b. Repair of Driver's Night Viewer Stow damaging the insert or pad.
age Box. (4) Wait until adhesive is tacky then
CUSHION place insert in position in stowage box.
INSERT (5) Remove latch assemblies and
backing plates, outer cover hinge, and inner
cover hinge as necessary by drilling out rivet
(fig 11-5).
(6) Attach latch assembly to support
plate with four countersunkhead rivets.
(7) Attach support plate with attached
latch assembly to stowage box with four
rivets.
(8) Attach each catch to outer cover
CUSHION
INSERT with three rivets.
(9) Peen both ends of inner cover hinge
pin in replacement hinge.
(10) Attach inner cover hinge to inside
of stowage box with seven rivets.
(11) Attach inner cover to hinge with
INSERT INSERT seven rivets.
(12) Peen both ends of outer cover
AR702665 hinge pin in replacement hinge.
Figure 11-4. Replacement of cushion inserts (13) Attach outer cover hinge to stow
in driver's night viewer stowage box. age box with 14 rivets.
(14) Attach outer cover to hinge with
14 rivets.
NOTE (15) Pull plunger assembly components
Disassemble stowage box only out of inner cover and box structure as
to extent necessary to replace necessary. Press replacement components
defective component. into mounting holes.
(1) Replace cushion inserts and pad by (16) Replace decalcomania markers as
scraping off old insert (fig 11-4). necessary.
WARNlSQ c. Repair of Rations Box (Fig 11-6).
Fumes of the adhesive and dry
NOTE
cleaning solvent are toxic and Disassemble rations box only to
flammable. Use only in a well- extent necessary to replace de
ventilated area. fective component.

11-7
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(1) Remove latch assemblies, catches, (6) Attach cover to hinge with 11
and cover hinge as necessary by drilling out rivets.
(7) Replace slgns/decals/markers as
rivets.
(2) Attach each catch to cover with necessary.
three rivets. d. Installation (Fig 11-3).
(3) Attach each latch to front of box NOTE
with four rivets. Assemble the three boxes inside
(4) Peen both ends of hinge pin to the turret. The three boxes
prevent removal. bolted together will not fit
(5) Attach cover hinge to top of box through loader's hatch.
with 11 rivets.

Figure 11-5. Repair of driver's night viewer stowage box.

11-8
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

RIVET (6)

CATCH (2)
(PART OF LATCH ASSY)

RIVET (11)

RIVET (11)

MARKER

Figure 11-6. Repair of rations box.

11-9
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(1) Attach rations box to driver's night (5) Attach oddment stowage box to
viewer stowage box with four screws, floor with two screws, lockwashers, and flat
lockwashers, and flat washers. Do not washers. Do not tighten. Use spacers (max
tighten. imum of three) as required.
(2) Attach oddment stowage box to (6) Tighten screws installed in steps (1)
rations box with four screws, lockwashers,
and (2), above.
and flat washers; do not tighten. (7) Tighten screws installed in steps (4)
(3) Place assembled boxes on turret
and (5), above.
basket floor under main gun.
(8) Install electronics unit (para 15-
NOTE 106).
When installing stowage boxes (9) Install gunner's electric air filter
use spacers as needed between heater unit (para 17-2b).
mounting flange and turret plat (10) Install three-round ammunition
form to eliminate any gap that rack (para 11-3).
may exist. (11) Elevate main gun to approximately
10 degrees (TM 9-2350-253-10).
(4) Attach driver's night viewer stow (12) Rotate turret and place main gun
age box to floor with two screws, lock-
in travel lock (TM 9-2350-253-10).
washers, and flat washers. Do not tighten. (13) Place MASTER BATTERY switch
Use spacers (maximum of three) as required. in OFF position and secure vehicle (TM 9-
2350-253-10).

Section II. MAINTENANCE OF PROTECTION PADS

11-5. Description.

Personnel protection pads are mounted in mounting brackets or tabs which are riveted
the crew compartment at critical points to or welded to the turret or cupola.
provide maximum protection to personnel b. Bonded Pads. To remove protection
from recoil action when firing the gun and pads bonded by adhesive directly to a hatch
from unexpected movement of the vehicle. door or other metal surface, scrape damaged
Typical locations of the personnel protection cushioning material from metal surface.
pads are the inner circumference of the c. Screw- Mounted Pads. Pad assemblies
commander's hatch door and the underside of incorporating brackets which are screw-
the loader's hatch door. mounted to the turret or a turret component
are replaced as complete assemblies by re
11-6. Removal of Protection Pads (Fig 11-7). moving the accessory mounting screws.
d. Inspection. Refer to para 4-12.
a. General. Protection pads are mounted
by one of the following methods. 11-7. Installation of Protection Pads.
(1) The protection pads are bonded
with adhesive directly to a metal surface of a. Installation of Bonded Pads. Refer to
the turret or cupola. para 4-12.
(2) The protection pads are bonded to b. Installation of Screw- Mounted Pads.
mounting brackets which are attached to a Pad assemblies incorporating brackets which
turret or cupola fixture by means of screws. are screw-mounted to the turret or a turret
(3) The protection pads are bonded to component are installed in complete assem
blies by installing accessory mounting screws.

11-10 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 11-7. Typical placement of personnel protection pads.

11-11
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section HI. MAINTENANCE OF TURRET EXTERIOR STOWAGE BRACKETS,

STRAPS, MACHINE GUN INTERRUPTER AND GUN SHIELD COVER

11-8. Description. (2) Thread the strap tip through slots

and attach buckle to strap tip.
The machine gun interrupter is a safety
device mounted on the front of the turret 11-11. Cargo Stowage Straps (Fig 11-8).
which will prevent the caliber .50 machine
gun from shooting the searchlight. When the a. Removal. Unbuckle strap and remove
interrupter is in the up position, it will cause strap from cargo rack.
the machine gun to rise up and shoot over the b. bxstallation. Wrap strap around cargo
searchlight. rack and fasten buckle.
11-9. Caliber .50 Machine Gun Front 11-12. Gun Shield Cover.
Interrupter and Bracket Assembly (Fig
11-8).
a. Removal (Fig 11-9, View A).
a. Removed. Remove two screws and two (1) Remove searchlight if necessary
lock washers securing bracket assembly to (para 16-2a).
turret and remove bracket assembly (fig 11-9, (2) Remove clamps and cover on 7.62-
view B). mm machine gun and articulated M105D
b. Disassembly. telescope.
(1) Remove two spring pins, remove (3) Remove two nuts and washers
pin assembly, and remove interrupter bar. securing lower balls to searchlight mounts.
(2) Disconnect chain from S-hooks and Remove balls.
remove chain. (4) Remove nut, lockwasher, and screw
(3) Disconnect S-hook from pin assem securing upper searchlight mounting bracket
bly and remove S-hook from bracket. and ball and remove bracket from upper
(4) Remove eye rivet from bracket, searchlight mount.
c Assembly. (5) Remove three clamps from search
(1) Install eye rivet to bracket. light mount ports and one clamp from gun
(2) Install S-hooks to chain and attach tube.
S-hooks to pin assembly and to eye rivet. (6) Remove 35 screws, washers, lock-
(3) Position interrupter bar into washers, and six straps securing cover on gun
bracket slots and aline mounting holes. tube and remove gun shield cover.
(4) Secure interrupter bar to bracket b. Installation (Fig 11-9, View A).
with two spring pins and pin assembly. (1) Position gun shield cover over gun
d. Installation. Secure bracket to turret tube.
with with two screws and two lock washers (2) Secure cover to turret with 35
(fig 11-9, view B). screws, flat washers, lockwashers, and six
11-10. Five Gallon Water Canteens Mounting straps.
Bracket, and Strap (Fig 11-8). (3) Install and secure clamp over gun
tube and gun shield cover.
a. Removal. (4) Install and secure three clamps
(1) Unbuckle strap and thread the over searchlight mounts and cover.
strap tip through the slots and remove strap. (5) Install covers over 7.62-mm
(2) Remove four screws and four lock- machine gun and articulated M105D telescope
washers and remove canteen mounting and secure with clamps.
bracket from turret. (6) Install searchlight if removed in
b. Installation. 1112a (para 16-3).
(1) Secure canteen mounting bracket c. Cleaning. Clean as required with dry cloth,
to turret with four screws and four lock- water dampened cloth, or cloth soaked in soapy
washers. water.

11-12 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CARGO STOWAGE STRAP (4) AR702649

Figure 11-8. Turret exterior stowage brackets, straps, machine gun interrupter, and mounting

11-13
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 11-9. Removal and installation of gun shield cover and caliber .50 machine gun
interrupter.

11-14
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CHAPTER 12

MAINTENANCE OF TEST EQUIPMENT

Section I. MAINTENANCE OF CABLE

TEST SET

12-1. Description.

The cable test set (CTS) (15, table 1-1 and

fig 12-1) is a portable test set used to check
continuity and detect short circuited con
ductors in cables of the AN/VVG-2 laser
rangefinder, the M21 ballistics computer
system, the AN/VSG-2 tank thermal sight,
and the ammo select unit operation. The CTS
is contained in a military equipment case.
The cover is used to store a power cable,
interconnection cables, power adapter cable,
ammo select cable, and shorting connectors.

12-2. General.

For inspection, test, and repair of cable

test set, refer to TM 9-4931-360-14&P.

AR70B671

Figure 12-1. Cable test set.

Section II. MAINTENANCE OF TURRET

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TEST SET
12-3. Description. 12-4. Operating Instructions.

a. General Description. The turret elec Operating instructions are given in the
trical system test set (TESTS) (17, table 1-1 individual troubleshooting procedures of table
and fig 12-2), is a portable test set used to 3-6. Controls and indicators of TESTS are
troubleshoot various systems within the tur shown in figure 12-3 and listed in table 12-3.
ret and cupola. It consists of the test unit The self test (para 12-6) should be performed
and a test cable. The TESTS isolates mal before each use.
functioning electrical system components by
checking the presence of dc voltages by 12-5. Preventive Maintenance Checks and
means of integral lamps. The test points and Services (PMCS).
associated TESTS indicators when connected
to vehicle cable 1W2J2 and networks box Perform PMCS quarterly. A fully opera
1A13J4 are shown in tables 12-1 and 12-2. tional vehicle is required.

12-1
TM 9-2350-253-20-2
TEST CABLE
a. Check TESTS for cleanliness. Clean in
accordance with general maintenance in
structions (para 4-2).
b. Check test unit and test cable for
physical damage.
c. Perform self test (para 12-6).
12-6. Self Test.
a. General Self test of the TESTS
should be performed prior to and after use in
the vehicle and also quarterly to ensure
operating capability.
6. Procedure.
(1) Place MASTER BATTERY switch TEST UNIT
to OFF and leave TESTS POWER switch on at
all times.
WARNING
Power switch must be on at all
times to prevent gun from fully AR702672
elevating and/or activating the fir
ing circuit relays under certain Figure 12-2.
test conditions. Turret electrical system test set.
(2) Connect TESTS cable connector (5) Place MASTER BATTERY switch
WTS1P1 to TESTS connector Jl. in ON position. Some TESTS lamps will come
(3) Connect TESTS cable connector on faintly.
WTS1P2 to J2 of cable 1W2. (6) Depress LAMP TEST. All 35 lamps
NOTE should come on. Replace lamps that do not
Cable may be connected to net light and depress LAMP TEST again. If all
works box connector 1A13J4 for lamps come on, TESTS is operational. If all
partial self test. Lamps 33, 34, lamps do not come on, return TESTS to
and 35 will not be tested. higher maintenance. Release LAMP TEST switch.
CAUTION (7) If TESTS is to be used immediately,
Turn MASTER BATTERY switch continue troubleshooting procedure. When
off before TESTS POWER using TESTS, ignore any lamps not specifica
switch. TESTS POWER switch lly mentioned in the procedure. Several will
must not be off with MASTER
remain on at all times.
BATTERY switch on. (8) If TESTS is not to be used immedi
(4) Place TESTS POWER switch in ately, place TESTS POWER switch and
ON position. Dim lamps will become bright MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF position.
and TESTS POWER indicator will come on. Disconnect and stow TESTS cable. Return
Relays may be heard energizing within the TESTS to storage.
TESTS.

INDICATOR
LAMPS

POWER ON-OFF
SWITCH

TEST CONNECTOR TEST JACKS

Figure 12-3. TESTS component location.
12-2 Change 2
 CON ECTOR P3-B
P8-C

P13-A P21-D P21-F

P3-B P2-A P2-B P3-A
1W2
P12

(CABLES)
REBOX
POWER
XECLAUYD/ICNBG
CBETWEEN
AND
POINT
TEST
OMPONENTS EPOWER
ncmdr's
box,
LeEtsw,
Vw/oTrRkAsV
filter,
gunner's
sEMI
control
palm
esw,
lector, filter,
scEMI
palm
gunner's
eolsw,
netcrtolr,
ENPOWER
box,
switch.
eLtEwVo/rTkRsAV iebox,
Nnsw"s.
ltetrvfw/eorternkacsev
EnLeEtswVw/oTrRkAsV
box,
POWER EPOWER
NLeEtswVw/oTrRkAsV
box,

SYSTEM
12-1.
TABLE
ECHECKS
TANK
LECTRICAL
"TESTS"
USING
C1W2J2
CABLE
AT
ON ECTOR
ELsw
POWER
EV/TRAV

Nbox
etworks Networks
box Networks
box

None palm

control
gunner's Input
cmdr's
to
Input
to
press,
TEST
POINT from
Output psw.res ure gun quick
Input
to discon from
Output cmdr's
electronics electronics palm
Input
to Input
to .Input
to palm
sw Input
to
nect unit unit unit valve
sw sw

Computer
system
power valve
dear,
Deck
power
CIRCUIT
TEST
UNDER shutoff
Elev
valve,
mag- shutoff
Elev
valve,
mag
Hydraulic
relay
pump coil
relay
pump
power
elescope reticle
quad,
tElev control
power
Hydraulic
sw,
press

LRF
power brake
power brake
power
eoQ
power LRF
power

INDICATOR
TESTS
1 2 4 5 7 8 9
 CON ECTOR

Pll-R P20-A Pll-D Pll-S

1W2
P27 P6 Jl
P10

(CABLES)
REBOX
POWER
XECLAUYD/ICNBG
CTEST
BPOINT
AND
OMEPTOWNENETNS oCmdr's
lock
lead
nveswtsw,
box,
rwoirdkes
interfer,
Trav
EneLsw,
box,
tEwVo/rTkRsAV ENPOWER
box,
trav
eLtEsw,
wVo/rTkRsAV ieELEV/
sw%,
Nnlet vrw/foterka.sv
box,
filter,
EMI
Nesw,
palm
cmdr's
box,
tworks Egunner's
STAB
palm
LEsw,
V/TRAV
ENLeEtswVw/oTrRkAsV
box,
POWER Ebox,
POWER
NLesw
EtVw/oTrRkAsV

12-1.
ETABLE
TANK
CHECKS
SYSTEM
LECTRICAL
USING
C"1W2J2
CABLE
AT
OTNESETCSO"R

POWER
TRAV
sw

POWER
sw intswerfer POWER
sw

None

(ELEV/TRAV Input
brake
to
POINT
TEST Output ielev
from nterfer. Output intrav
from terfer. Input
trav
to
interfer,
sw Output gunner's
from con Input
EMI
to Input
EMI
to EMI
Input
to
sw)
POWER
box
trol
filter filter filter
sw sw

TEST
UNDER
CIRCUIT Deck
valve,
clear,
stab iEsw"s,
nltevr/ftera.v deck
valve
clear,
power nltevr/ftera.v valve
iEsw"s, clear,
deck
power GSTAB
palm sw, shutoff
unsw.er's elev
palm
cmdr's
sw valve,
brake
mag Cmdr's
lead
computer
to
conpower
unit
trol er iElev
stab
ntsw,
erfer.
unit,
control er
deck unit,
control er
stab unit
control er
Stab
valve
clear,
power
brake
Mag
power

power power

INDICATOR
TESTS
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
 CON ECTOR.

P21-H P10-F
1W2 P8-B P8-A - P9-A P9-B P9-E
P1W

(RELAY/CB
POWER
BOX
CABLES)
EXCLUDING
CBTEST
OPOINT
AND
EMPTOWNENTNS lead
Cmdr's
lock
onbox
vesw,
trwoirdkes
gGUN
trigger,
MunAsw,
CerH'sI/NcmEdr's

GUN
MAIN
trigger,
cmdr's
gunner's
sw,

ETABLE
TANK
12-1.
LSYSTEM
ECHECKS
CTRICAL
USING
"C1W2J2
CABLE
ATTONESETCSTO"R Firing
relay,
networks
box Firing
relay,
networks
box onbox
vesw,
trwoirdkes obox
nvesw,
trworikdse
-

Networks
box Networks
box Networks
box

None

networks
box firing
Input
to
TEST
POINT from
Output cmdr's from
Output from
Output from
Output
lead firing
relay firing
relay box
control firing
relay
1W2
cable 1W2
cable Input
to Input
to to gunner's
Input Input
to
lock
sw -
relay

Cmdr's
lead
computer
to triggers,
cmdr's osvoepower
lead,
and firing
M/G
sCoax
olenoid
CIRCUIT
TEST
UNDER lreniode Lmain
safe,
oasw,
der's safety
relay
gun
power safe,
Lmain
oasw,
der's safety
relay
gun
power ELEsw
POWER
V/TRAV
O&
gunner's
vesw,
r ide firing
K3
relay
power
Machine
power
gun
Main
gun
power
input
power
Not
used
power

INDICATOR
TESTS
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
 CON ECTOR

1W2 Pl-C Pl-D Pl-A Pl-H J3-M

- -
P5 P7

(CABLES)
REBOX
POWER
XECLAUYD/INCGB
CBTEST
POINT
OAND
MEPTOWNENETNS
networks EPOWER
filter,
STAB
palm,
Cmdr's
EMI
box, palm
gunner's
LEsw,
swV/TRAV
filter
NEMI
POWER
STAB
box,
esw,
tworks

TANK
12-1.
TABLE
ESYSTEM
CHECKS
LECTRICAL
"TESTS"
USING
CABLE
AT
C1W2J2
ON ECTOR

aNot
p licable

None None None None None

TEST
POINT from
Output relay/
power from
Output relay/
power from
Output relay/
power from
Output relay/
power from
Output relay/
power
Input
to blower Internal to solenoid
Input CBbox
CBbox CBbox CB
box CBbox
-

blower
pack
Power
motor er ide firing
ovpower
lamps,
sw, K3
main
relay,
gun unit
control
CBR
Cmdr's
CIRCUIT
UNDER
TEST Cupola
nepower,
tworks
gMain
ungun
/machine
telescope control,
quad,
Elev reticle
dome tank
LRF
emergency
shutoff
Elev
valve
safety
power
sw
buss
+D
TESTS lamps, indpower
azimuth icator sopower
lenoid

box
power
used
Not
power power power

INDICATOR
TESTS POWER ON/OFF

28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
 NBOX
ETWORKS
CON ECTOR

_ - - -
JS-W J3-U Jl-C - Jl-F Jl-G Jl-J

(CABLES)
REBOX
POWER
XECLAUYD/ICNBG
COTEST
BPOINT
AND
MEPTONWENETSN
filter,
NEMI
POWER
stab
box,
etsw,
works filter,
Nesw,
EMI
box,
POWER
stab
tworks otrigger,
box,
nCmdr's
vesw.
trwoirdkse

12*2.
TABLE
ECHECKS
TANK
SYSTEM
LECTRICAL
'TESTS'*
USING
CAT
CABLE
1A13J4
ON ECTOR
_ - - - - Obox
nvetsw,
rwoirdkes
EPOWER
LEsw.V/TRAV ELEsw.V/TRAV
POWER

Networks
box

None

POINT
TEST networks
box box
networks box
networks networks
box networks
box networks
box
from
Output from
Output from
Output
Input
to Input
to Input
to
- - - -

Power
blower
peek
motor
TEST
UNDER
CIRCUIT
telescope reticle
quad,
Elev control,
dome Gand
triggers
un er's trigger
Cmdr*s
power
lead
lock
power
sw box
junction
Cupola
Rate
sensor
power
lamps, indpower
azimuth icator

used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not Used
Not
power power

INDICATOR
TESTS
! 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
 NBOX
ETWORKS
CON ECTOR

Jl-K Jl-L Jl-M Jl-N Jl-S Jl-A J2-D

(CABLES)
RBOX
POWER
EXLCAUYD/ICNBG
CTEST
BPOINT
AND
OEMPTOWNENTNS trigger,
NEMI
elev
box,
handle
epump
tworks
filter,
nEMI
POWER
stab
box,
esw,
tworks filter,
Estab
POWER
EMI
Lsw,
EV/TRAV
iEbox,
nletvew/rotfrkeasrv,
sw's.,
filter,
onEMI
box,
vesw.
trwoirdkse

12-2.
TABLE
ELECTRICAL
TANK
CHECKS
SYSTEM
USING
C"1A13J4
CABLE
ATOTNESETCSO"R
nPOWER
box
etsw,
works
EPOWER
LEsw.V/TRAV EPOWER
Lsw.
EV/TRAV

filter,
ovesw.r ide
Networks
box

None

gunner's handle
from trigger
networks
box nbox
etworks networks
box nbox
etworks
POINT
TEST Input
net
to handle
pump Input
net
to Input
net
to from
Output
box from
works elev box
works box
works
trigger to
Input Input
to Input
to

TEST
UNDER
CIRCUIT indicators
gun/MG
Main
GUN/MACHINE
MAIN MAIN
GUN/MACHINE
firing
over ide
relay,
Rate
sensor
power blower
pack
Power sconlteronloierd, Ovesw
power
r ide
valve
clear,
Deck
sw's
GUN
power sw's
GUN
power
motor
power
unit
power power
sw.

INDICATOR
•TESTS
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
 NETWORKS
BOX
CON ECTOR

J2-F J2-L J2-M J2-N J2-U J2-V Jl-H Jl-J

J2 - -

(CABLES)
REXCLAUYD/ICNBG
POWER
BOX
CTEST
BOPOINT
AND
MEPTOWNENETNS STAB
filter,
gunner's
EMI
palm
Cmdr's
sw,
POWER
Enbox,
palm
LeswEtsw,
Vw/oTrRkAsV sw, POWER
gunner's
STAB
filter,
palm
Cmdr's
EMI Ebox,
npalm
LeswEsw,
tVw/oTrRkAsV
filter,
ELEV/
STAB
palm
gunner's
EMI
sw,
palm
cmdr's
nesw,
brake,
Mag
box,
tworks
ENPOWER
box,
LeEtswVw/oTrRkAsV

12-2.
TABLE
ETANK
CHECKS
SYSTEM
LECTRICAL
"OTNESETCSO"R
C.USING
CABLE
AT
1A13J4 -
obox,
Nvetswrwoirdkes obox,
Nvetswrwoirdkes oNbox,
vetswrwoirdkes obox,
Nveswtrwoirdkes obox,
Nveswtrwoirdkes

POWERsw
TRAV

TEST
POINT nbox
etworks box
networks box
networks box
networks networks
box networks
box networks
box networks
box box
networks
from
Output from
Output from
Output from
Output from
Output from
Output from
Output
Input
to to
Input
-

Elevpump
trigger
handle
CUNDER
TEST
IRCUIT
unit
conpower
trol er trigger
Cmdr's
power sOvoelrniodied cmdr's
and trigger
power Gsw's
trigger
un er's
iTrnatve/reflerv, sOovlernoide brake
Mag
ground shutoff
Elev
valve brakepower
Mag
deck
sw's,
clear, solpower
enoid
solenoid,
valve

used
Not Not
used
power power power

INDICATOR
TESTS
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
 NBOX
ETWORKS
CON ECTOR

J3-M - Jl-H
- - -

(CABLES)
EBOX
RXECLAUYD/ICNBG
POWER
CBTEST
AND
POINT
OEMPTOWNENTNS trigger,
/cmdr's
obox,
Nvetgunner
rwoirdkes

ETABLE
CHECKS
SYSTEM
TANK
12-2.
LECTRICAL
USING
1A13J4
C"OTNESETCSO"R
CABLE
AT - -
- -

None
sw

POINT
TEST networks
box nbox
etworks
from
Output
Input
to
- - - -

CIRCUIT
TEST
UNDER
GMUANC/HMIANIEN

GUNpower
sw
TESTS
power
used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not

INDICATOR
TESTS POWER ON/OFF

31 32 33 34 35
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

TABLE 12-3. "TESTS" Controls and Indicators

Control/Indicator Function

POWER Switch ON position - connects TESTS to full vehicle power

for operation.
OFF position - for stowage only.

LAMP TEST Switch Connects all 35 indicator lamps to vehicle power if

TESTS is connected to cable connector 1W2J2.
Connects 32 indicator lamps to vehicle power if
TESTS is connected to networks box connector
1A13J4.

Indicator Lamp (35) Monitor vehicle voltage at various test points. (See
tables 12-1 and 12-2). Illuminated lamp indicates
presence of vehicle voltage at test point.

POWER Indicator Indicates position ot- POWER switch. Illuminates

when POWER switch is in ON position.

Test Jack (TP1-TP4) Monitor internal TESTS circuits.

12-7. Maintenance.

a General Maintenance of TESTS con

sists of the items specified in PMCS (para (3) Replace lamp in lens.
12-5) and replacement of lens and lamps. (4) Replace lens by hand, turning
For other defects, return TESTS to higher clockwise while pushing inward.
maintenance.
b. Lens and Lamp Replacement. 12-8. Troubleshooting.
(1) Turn lens counterclockwise by hand
and remove. Troubleshoot TESTS by performing the
(2) Remove lamp by pulling out of self test (para 12-6). Replace defective lens and
lens. lamps (para 12-7).

Section UI. MAINTENANCE OF

STABILIZATION TEST SET

12-9. Description.

a General. The stabilization test set STS permit isolation of a malfunction to a

(STS) (item 16, table 1-1 and fig 124) is a specific circuit within the stabilization
portable test set that is used to troubleshoot system. The STS is also used to adjust the
the stabilization system. The STS checks ac adjustable resistors in the gunner's control
and dc voltage signals in the stabilization handle assembly (para 10-40c). A test cable,
system, indicating voltage levels on an in stored in the cover, is used to interconnect
tegral meter. Switches on the panel of the the stabilization system and the STS. The

Change 2 12-11
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

AR702674

Figure 12-4. Stabilization test set.

CONNECTOR Jl

Figure 12-5. Stabilization test set-front panel.

12-12
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

STS is approximately 11 inches long, 6 inches b . Interconnect STS with the stabilization
wide, 9 inches high, and weighs approximately wiring harness and electronic controller unit.
18 pounds. (Power input requirements are (1) Connect test cable connector P3 to
satisfied by the vehicle from 18 vdc to 30 STS cable connector Jl.
vdc). (2) Connect test cable connector P2 to
6. STS Components. The test cable is a electronic controller unit connector Jl.
three-branched electrical cable used to con (3) Connect test cable connector Jl to
nect the STS to the stabilization system. The connector PI of stabilization harness 1W3.
connector marked CABLE connects to the c. Ensure that STS POWER on-off switch
vehicle harness, the connector marked CON and STS selector switch are in OFF position.
TROLLER connects to the controller unit, Ensure that MODE switch is in N position.
the connector marked TEST SET connects to d. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in
the STS. The STS front panel (figure 12-5) ON position.
contains the following items. NOTE
(1) Test connector Jl, in conjunction If STS POWER switch is il
with the test set cable, is used for intercon luminated, depress STS POWER
nection to the stabilization system. The
switch.
interconnection also provides vehicle power e. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in
input required for operation of the STS.
ON position.
(2) The SOLENOID indicator is illum
/. Place stabilization POWER switch in
inated in selector switch positions 14 and 15,
ON position.
indicating that the stabilization solenoid
g. Place MODE selector switch in LAMP
valve is energized.
TEST position and verify that the power and solen
(3) The POWER switch is an illuminat oid lamps light. If lamps do not light, replace (para
ed push on-push off switch which controls 12-10). If lamps still do not light, notify support
power to the STS and stabilization system maintenance.
controller unit.
h. Perform procedures for malfunction 21
contained in table 3-6, and verify that the
12-10. Lens and Lamp Replacement. STS indicates an "accept" condition in each
step for a properly functioning tank. If STS
a. Lens and Indicator Lamp Removal. does not operate properly or is damaged,
(1) Turn lens counterclockwise and re notify support maintenance.
move. i. Place STS POWER switch in OFF
(2) Remove lamp by pulling it out of position.
the lens. j. Place STS selector switch in OFF
6. Lens and Indicator Lamp Installation. position.
(1) Replace lamp in lens. k. Place stabilization STAB and POWER
(2) Install lens by turning clockwise switches in OFF position.
while pushing inward. Do not over-tighten. /. Place ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in
OFF position.
12-11. Operational Check - STS. m. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in
In order to determine if the STS is in OFF position.
n. Disconnect test cable and secure
proper operating condition, perform the fol
equipment.
lowing operational check in a fully opera
tional vehicle.
a. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in
OFF position.

Change 2 12-13(12-14 blan'1

i
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CHAPTER 13

MAINTENANCE OF TURRET ARMAMENT

Section I. DESCRIPTION

13-1. General. the gun tube. The breech mechanism consists

of the breech ring with a semi-automatic,
This section contains instructions for
vertical sliding breechblock and operating
organizational maintenance of the M68A1
mechanism.
(105-mm) main gun, the M140A1 combina
tion gun mount, and the smoke grenade
13-3. M140A1 Combination Gun Mount.
launcher. The procedures in this section are
supplemental to the procedures in TM 9-
The combination gun mount is a con
2350-253-10, which should be available for
ready reference during operations outlined centric recoil hydrospring, constant-distance
in this section. Organizational maintenance type which houses the main gun. The
instructions for the 7.62-mm and caliber .50 combination gun mount supports the gun on
machine guns are contained in TM 9-1005- trunnion bearings installed on pins set in the
313-24 and TM 9-1005-231-25, respectively. turret. Elevation and depression of the main
gun is accomplished by operation of a hydrau
lic elevating mechanism. The combination
13-2. Main Gun. gun mount provides attachment facilities for
the coaxial 7.62-mm machine gun, the M105D
The main gun is a drop block, center articulated telescope, and the auxiliary firing
recoil-actuated type which has an electrically mechanism (blasting machine).
operated firing device. Major components of
the gun are: gun tube, bore evacuator, and 13-4. Breechblock Group.
breech mechanism. The gun tube is of one-
piece construction and is removable from the The breechblock group consists of the
breech ring by the quick-change method. The breechblock, firing contact assembly, retrac
bore evacuator, mounted on the gun tube, tor clamp, retainer assembly, firing pin as
aids in the removal of propellent gases from sembly, firing pin extractor guide, and firing
pin retractor.

Section II. MAINTENANCE OF BREECH OPERATING MECHANISM

13-5. Description. (e) Remove self-locking nut on shoulder bolt

holding breech operating cam assembly in place
The breech operating mechanism consists and remove bolt and cam assembly (view A).
of the breech operating lever and the breech f. Unscrew and remove operating crank
block closing mechanism. pin, operating crank detent, and operating
crank (views B, C, and D).
13-6. Removal (Fig 13-1). g. Depress plunger and pull breech oper
(a) Remove breechblock, breechblock crank ating lever assembly back. Slide lever assem
pivot and extractors (refer to TM 9-2350-253-10). bly off operating shaft (view E).
(b) Remove loader's SAFETY switch h. Unscrew the adjuster detent, then
assembly and guard (para 5-66). while supporting the breechblock crank, re
(c) Using a 3/32-in. alien wrench, loosen two move the breechblock closing mechanism
spring plunger setscrews at least three complete assembly and crank (views F and G).
turns, located on the side of combination gun 13-7. Disassembly of Components of Breech
mount (view A). Operating Mechanism (Figs 13-2 and
(d) Using a 1/2-in. combination wrench, 13-3).
loosen two spring plungers by turning them
clockwise into combination gun mount as far as
possible (view A). a. Remove spring pin, plunger, and spring

Change 2 13-1
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

from handle of breech operating assembly (fig 13-8. Disassembly of Cam Assembly (Fig 13-1).
13-2).
a. Remove screw, lockwasher, and flat washer
b. Remove spring pin, clutch, and spring
from handle (fig 13-2). securing cam to bracket (view A).
c. Remove operating shaft and closing b. Remove cam.
spring shaft pin and remove operating shaft c. Remove index plug.
(view A, fig 13-3). 13-9. Inspection, Cleaning, and Repair (Figs 13-2
d. Remove closing spring adjuster pin and 13-3).
from closing spring adjuster and remove a. Inspect all threaded parts for wear,
closing spring (view B, fig 13-3). corrosion, or breakage.
e. Remove expansion plug from closing b. Inspect machined surfaces for
spring adjuster (view C). scratches, scores, burrs.

A B

OPERATING
SHAFT

Figure 13-1. Removal and installation of breech operating mechanism (1 of 2).

13-2 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 13-1. Removal and installation of breech operating mechanism (2 of 2).

13-3
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

c. Examine springs and closing spring for c. Insert spring and clutch into handle of
deformity. breech operating lever assembly; secure with
d. Clean all components of the breech spring pin (fig 13-2).
mechanism with a cloth or sponge saturated with d. Insert spring and plunger into handle of
CLP (item 4.1, App. C). Use bath method for operating lever assembly and secure with
small parts. Remove any corrosion, burrs, or spring pin.
scored areas with cloth, crocus cloth (item 5,
App. C), or by stoning. Wipe parts completely 13-11. Installation (Fig 13-1).
dry and apply a thin film of CLP (item 4.1, App.
a. Position breechblock crank in oper
C) on all parts (refer to LO 9-2350-253-12). ating mechanism bracket with pivot hole
e. Replace bent, cracked, distorted, broken, toward rear of breech (view G). Install
corroded or unevenly worn parts or parts which do closing mechanism from gunner's side, aline
not visually appear to fit or function properly. detent groove in closing mechanism with hole
Also, replace parts having enlarged or elongated in closing mechanism bracket, and install
holes or having holes with chipped edges. adjuster detent (views F and G).
b. Position breech operation lever assem
bly on shaft, while depressing plunger, and
pull lever all the way back. Return lever
assembly to rest position and release plunger
(view E).
c. Position operating crank on operating
shaft and secure with operating crank pin;
install operating crank detent (views B, C,
and D).
a\ Install cam assembly index plug into bracket
(view A).
e. Install cam into bracket and secure with
screw, lockwasher and flat washer (view A).
f. Adjust cam (TM 9-2350-253-10).

CAUTION
Avoid thread damage. Ensure
that cam torque spring plungers
are screwed into combination gun
mount as far as possible before at
tempting to insert shoulder bolt.
DO NOT force bolt into misalined
cam and torque bracket.
(g) Position cam assembly on torque
bracket and install shoulder bolt (view A).
Figure 13-2. Breech operating lever (h) Install self-locking nut (view A).
assembly - exploded view.
(i) Using a 1/2-in. combination wrench, turn
13-10. Assembly of Components of Breech two spring plungers in combination gun mount
Operating Mechanism (Figs 13-2 and counterclockwise until they fit tight against cam
13-3). bracket and tighten spring plunger setscrews
a. Insert expansion plug into closing against spring plungers (view A).
spring adjuster (view C, fig 13-3). (j) Install loader's SAFETY switch and
b. Insert end of closing spring with elon guard (para 5-70).
gated holes into closing spring adjuster, and (k) Install breechblock crank pivot, extrac
insert closing spring adjuster pin (view B, fig tors, and breechblock (TM 9-2350-253-10).
13-3). Position operating shaft in the closing
spring adjuster (view A). Aline arrows in
shaft and adjuster and insert closing spring
shaft pin.

13-4 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

A
B

AR702679

Figure 13-3. Disassembly of breech block closing mechanism assembly.

13-5
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section III. REPAIR OF BREECH RING GROUP

13-12. Description. h. Remove setscrew from top slot in

firing plunger insert collar (fig 13-5).
The breechring provides the interconnec i. Move electrical wires to permit access to
tion between the gun tube and the breech firing plunger insert collar through gunner's
block group. The ring holds the tube by a guard, and remove firing plunger insert collar
special chamfered buttress thread which al with tubular wrench (item 20, table 1-1) (views I
lows for a quick-change of the gun tube F and G, fig 13-4).
requiring only 1/8 turn (45 degrees) for /. Slide firing plunger insert collar from
removal or installation. In addition, the ring firing plunger insert and depress firing plung
provides the means for mounting the sliding er to allow removal of collar. With firing
breechblock, breech operating mechanism, operat plunger depressed, remove firing conductor
ing lever stop, and gun firing circuitry. and sleeve.
k. Remove firing plunger insert, firing
13-13. Disassembly (Figs 13-4 and 13-5). plunger, spring firing conductor, and sleeve
(fig 13-5).
/. Remove the breechblock (TM 9-2350-253-
WARNING 10).
Never leave handle in down m. Disassemble the breechblock (TM 9-2350-
position. With operating handle 253-10).
in down position and breech n. Disassemble firing pin (view B, fig I
held open by plungers on the 13-5.1). I
extractors, tripping the extrac (1) Remove cup and hub. I
tors will cause breechblock to (2) Slide sleeve, insulator, and washer I
close and handle to fly up. off body. ■
13-14. Cleaning (Fig 13-5).
a. Depress plunger in operating lever and CAUTION
open and close breech of gun. Return handle Do not lubricate electrical
to latched position (view A, fig 13-4). firing contacts or insulators.
b. Remove three screws, flat washers,
Clean all components of the breechblock
and lockwashers securing loader's guard and
group thoroughly with a cloth or sponge
loader's safety switch assembly to
saturated with CLP (item 4.1, App. C). Remove I
combination gun mount (fig 13-4, view H).
any corrosion, burrs, or scored areas with crocus
Remove loader's guard and place on top of
cloth (item 5, App. C). Wipe parts dry with a
main gun.
clean cloth. Apply a thin film of CLP (item 4.1, I
c. Using alien wrench remove lower, then
App. C) on all parts except firing plunger insert I
upper, screw and lockwashers and remove
collar (view A, fig 13-5), firing plunger insert, fir- |
operating lever stop, plunger, and spring (views
ing plunger, spring firing conductor, and sleeve.
B and C, fig 13-4).
Do not apply any CLP to firing components I
WARNING (view B, fig 13-5). |
Operating lever stop assembly
13-15. Inspection and Repair (Fig 13-5).
is spring-loaded when installed.
Inspect all threaded parts for wear, break
d. Remove four screws and lockwashers age or corrosion. Inspect machined surface
securing access cover plate to gunner's guard; of operating lever stop ( view B, 13-4), for
remove access cover plate (view D, fig 13-4). scratches, scores, burrs and wear. Examine
e. Disconnect electrical connector from springs for deformity and fatigue. Ensure
safety relay (view E, fig 13-4). that insert collar, firing plunger, and firing
f. Remove screw and lockwasher se conductor are free of corrosion, rust, and
curing electrical lead to firing contact and foreign matter (fig 13-5). Check parts for cracks
ground lead attached to relay (view E, fig 13- and breaks. Repair is generally limited to replace
4). ment of unevenly worn or damaged components,
g. Remove two screws securing firing parts that visually appear to be bent or distorted,
contact to gunner's guard; remove firing and parts that are rusted, corroded, pitted, or
contact (view E, fig 13-4). visually appear to be deteriorated.

13-6 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 13-4. Disassembly, assembly, and installation of breech ring group (1 of 2)

13-7
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

H
AMC
Figure 13-4. Disassembly, assembly, and installation of breech ring group (2 of 2)
13-16. Assembly (Figs 13-1, 13-4 and 13-5). f. Position electrical lead to firing con
CAUTION tact and secure with screw and lockwasher
Assemble washer to body with (view F, fig 13-4).
rounded surface of washer facing g. Position ground wire and secure witli
rounded surface of body. lockwasher and screw (view E, fig 13-4).
a. Assemble the firing pin (view B, fig h. Connect electrical connector to safety
relay (view E, fig 13-4).
13-5.1).
(1) Slide washer, sleeve, and insulator L Position access cover plate on gunner's
over body. guard and secure with four screws and lock-
(2) Secure hub to body. Tighten to washers (view D, fig 13-4). Tighten screws to
9.6-14.4 in-lb (1.1-1.6 N.m). 5-7 lb-ft (7-9 N.m).
(3) Secure cup to body. Tighten to j. Position operating lever stop, plunger,
9.6-14.4 in-lb (1.1-1.6 N.m). and spring in operating lever stop and secure
a. l Assemble the breechblock (TM 9- to breech with two screws and lockwashers
2350-253-10). (views B and C, figs 13-4).
k. Secure loader's guard to combination
b. Install the breechblock (TM 9-2350-253-
gun mount with three screws, flat washers,
10).
and lockwashers (view H, fig 13-4).
c. Install sleeve, firing conductor, spring, and
/. Depress plunger in operating lever and
firing plunger, firing plunger insert, and firing plun
ger insert collar (fig 13-5). Secure collar using tubu open and close breech. Return handle to
lar wrench (views F and G, fig 13-4). latched position (view A, fig 13-4).
WATlNlNG
d. Install setscrew in top slot in firing
Ensure all weapons are clear of
plunger insert collar (fig 13-5).
ammunition before performing
e. Position firing contact to gunner's
any firing circuit checks.
guard and secure with two screws (view E, fig
m. Install firing circuit tester and check main
13-4).
gun firing circuit (TM 9-2350-253-10).

13-8 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

SCREW
LOCKWASHER
OPERATING LEVER STOP

A*. OPERATING LEVER STOP PLUNGER

* .SPRING

INSULATOR

SETSCREW
FIRING PLUNGER INSERT COLLAR
FIRING PLUNGER INSERT
FIRING PLUNGER
SPRING
FIRING CONDUCTOR

BREECH RING
REMOVED FROM
GUN ASSEMBLY
FOR CLARITY

AR702683
AMC 833076

Figure 13-5. Breech ring group - partial Figure 13-5.1. Disassembly and assembly
exploded view. of firing pin.
I

Change 2 13-8.1
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

13-17. Gun Safety Relay. (2) Remove four screws and lock-
washers securing access plate to gunner's
a. Description. The gun safety relay is a guard and remove plate (view D).
24 vdc single pole-double throw relay en (3) Remove electrical connector from
closed in a waterproof case which is mounted relay (view E).
inside the gunner's shield. The relay is (4) Remove two screws and lock-
energized when the loader's safety switch is washers securing relay and one ground wire to
in the FIRE position. When energized, one gunner's shield and remove relay (view E).
set of contacts opens ground to the firing c. Installation. (Fig 13-4).
circuit and the other set of contacts closes to (1) Place MASTER BATTERY switch
provide vehicle power to the firing circuit. in OFF position.
When loader's safety switch is in SAFE (2) Position relay and ground wire on
position, the relay interrupts vehicle power to gunner's shield and secure with two screws
the firing circuit and shorts the firing circuit and lock washers. Tighten screws to 4-6 lb-ft
to the ground. (5-8 N-m).
(3) Connect electrical connector to
b. Removal (Fig 13-4). relay (view E).
(1) Place MASTER BATTERY switch (4) Position access plate to gunner's
in OFF position. guard and secure with four screws and lock-
washers (view D).

Section IV. MAINTENANCE OF MAIN GUN TUBE ASSEMBLY

13-18. Description. 13-20. Replacement of Evacuator Group.

The main gun tube is of one-piece con a. Description. The bore evacuator is
struction, and is removable from the breech mounted on the gun tube and aids in the
ring by the quick-change method. removal of propellant gases from the tube.
b. Refer to TM 9-2350-253-10 for re
13-19. Removal of Gun Tube Assembly. moval, disassembly, cleaning, inspection, as
sembly, and installation instructions. Re
Refer to support maintenance level for
place broken or defective parts as listed in
removal of gun tube assembly.
TM 9-2350-253-20P-2.

13-8.2 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

13-21. Removal and Installation of Rear undercoat coating (item 6, App. C) and/or
Thermal Shroud (Fig. 13-6). quick drying lust erl ess enamel (item 12, App.
C).
a. Removal
(1) Refer to TM 9-2350-253-10 for c. Installation (Fig. 13-6).
removal of front thermal shroud and bore (1) Install rear shroud and clamp so
evacuator. that drain hole of shroud is on the bottom.
(2) Remove spring from handle of (2) Position clamp over slotted end
clamp and release clamp handle. of rear shroud.
(3) Slide rear shroud assembly off (3) Visually align edge of clamp with
the gun tube. edge of rear shroud.
(4) Replace packings on bore evacu (4) Close the clamp.
ator. (5) Torque nut on clamp 93-99 lb-in.
(10.5-11.2 N m.).
b. Inspection of Front and Rear Shroud (6) Open clamp and release.
Assembly. (7) Repeat steps (4) and (5) until
(1) If cracks are more than 1 inch, torque reading stays within specified limits.
replace thermal shroud. (8) Attach spring to clamp.
(2) Spot paint chips as required (9) Install bore evacuator and front
using pretreatement primer (item 21, App. C), thermal shroud, refer to TM 9-2350-253-10.

REAR
THERMAL
GUN TUBE

AMC 833095

Figure 13-6. Removal and installation of rear thermal shroud.

13-22. Shimming of Front Shroud (Fig. 13- f. Install collar firmly against muzzle
6.1). step.
g. Slide shroud over the collar until the
a. Remove front thermal shroud TM 9- shroud is complete contact with the flange on
2350-253-10. collar.
b. If necessary, the bore evacuator may
be removed and served at this time. Refer to NOTE
TM 9-2350-253-10.
c. Slide can assembly over the small Only hand pressure or slight tap
diameter end of the shroud. (Refer to figure ping with a wooden block should
13-6.1). be used to seat the shroud.

d. Slide front clamp over front of h. Place shroud spacer on gun tube with
shroud. "step" side of spacer towards retaining nut.
e. Position shroud over the gun tube i. Measure gap between the shroud
with drain holes down. spacer and the shroud.

Change 2 13-9
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

FRONT CLAMP REAR CLAMPS

COLLAR
SHROUD SPACERS

RETAINING NUT
AMC 833005
13-6.1. Shimming of front shroud.
j. Select shims to the width of the gap q. Torque nuts (figure 13-6.2) of all
obtained in step i. three clamps 93-99 lb.-in. (10.5-11.2 N-m).
r. Open and close clamps.
NOTE s. Repeat steps (p) and (q) until torque
reading stays within specified limits.
Individual shim laminations t. Attach clamp springs.
can be separated with a u. Install muzzle plug. Refer to TM 9-
sharp knife. 2350-253-10.

k. Remove collar, shroud with can

assembly and Clamp, and shroud spacers from
gun tube.
I. Install shims on gun tube assembly.
Install front shroud with can assembly and
front clamp. Install front collar. Install
shroud spacers between retaining ring and
shims.
m. Check clearance and add shims as
necessary to obtain a clearance of no greater
than .010 inch. Zero clearance is preferred.
Do not cut shims to place over gun tube.
Front shroud must be removed to add shims.
n. Once proper clearance has been
obtained, slide the can assembly over the
shims and spacers. (Refer to figure 13-6.2).
NOTE
CAN
ASSEMBLY
All clamps (can clamps, SHROUD
front muzzle clamp, rear SPACERS CLAMP
SPRINGS
shroud clamps) must be
installed with the clamp
handles positioned at the Figure 13-6.2. Position of can assembly.
top of the gun to avoid
damage (figure 13-6.1). 13-23. Installation of Gun Tube Assembly.
o. Close can assembly clamps, Refer to support maintenance for installation
p. Close muzzle end clamp. of gun tube assembly.

13-10 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section V. MAINTENANCE OF REPLENISHER ASSEMBLY

13-24. Description. e. Remove hexagon head screw and

washer from hose clamp, remove clamp (view
The replenisher, hose, and filling valve A).
maintain a proper volume of oil in the recoil f. Remove adapter and elbow from re
mechanism chambers. A spring-loaded piston plenisher assembly; inspect adapter and elbow
in the replenisher cylinder forces oil from the for crossed threads and replace if necessary
replenisher into the recoil mechanism to (view B).
compensate for contraction or loss. The g. Disconnect hose and remove elbow
replenisher is able to absorb excess fluid from from combination gun mount. Check elbow
the recoil mechanism due to expansion from for damaged threads and replace if necessary
heat generated during firing. (view C).

13-25. Replacement of Replenisher, Hose,

and Filling Valve (Fig 13-7).

The replenisher and the hose and filling

valve may be removed separately or together
as required. In either case, the preliminary
step must be to drain the oil from the 13-27. Installation (Fig 13-7).
replenisher.

13-26. Removal (Fig 13-7). a. Install elbow in combination gun

mount; connect replenisher hose to elbow
NOTE (view C).
Omit step c if only hose and b. Install the filling valve, lockwasher,
filling valve are to be removed. plug, and gasket. Bend one flange of lock
Omit steps d through g if only washer in slot of replenisher head and the
the replenisher is to be re other flange over filling valve (views A and
moved. B). Tighten plug to 96-120 lb-in (10.9-13.6
a. Open petcock and drain the oil into a N.m).
suitable container (view A). c. Position clamp around hose and secure
b. Remove hose assembly from adapter with washer and hexagon head screw (view
(view A). A).
c. Remove two screws and nuts from d. Position replenisher (with elbow at
clamps, and open clamps; remove replenisher bottom) in clamps and secure with two screws
(view A). and nuts. Attach hose assembly to adapter
d. Remove plug and gasket; straighten (view A).
flanges of lockwasher and remove filling e. Close petcock on replenisher and fill in
valve and lockwasher (views A and B). accordance with procedures prescribed in TM
9-2350-253-10.

Change 2 13-11
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 13-7. Removal and installation of replenisher, hose, and filling valve.

13-12
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section VI. MAINTENANCE OF 7.62-MM

COAXIAL MACHINE GUN MOUNT AND RELATED PARTS

13-28. Description. h. Loosen and remove alien head screw

securing retaining spring pin and rear pin
The 7.62-mm coaxial machine gun mount assembly to rear mounting bracket. Remove
is attached to the left side of the combina retaining spring pin and rear pin assembly.
tion gun mount for the main gun. It provides i. Remove spring roll pin securing adjust
azimuth and elevation adjustments to bore- ment knob (azimuth) and ratchet bracket to
sight and zero the 7.62-mm machine gun to traversing screw. Remove adjustment knob
function coaxially with the main gun. and ratchet bracket.
/. Unscrew and remove traversing screw
13-29. Removal (Fig 13-8). securing'traversing and elevating bracket
k. Remove lower spring roll pin from
a. Remove 7.62-mm coax machine gun connecting pin securing rear mounting brack
and cartridge bag (see TM 9-2350-253-10). et to traversing and elevating bracket.
b. Disconnect solenoid from solenoid con I. Remove spring roll pin securing adjust
nector (view A). ment knob (elevation) and ratchet bracket to
NOTE elevating shaft. Remove adjustment knob
Machine gun mount is heavy. and ratchet bracket.
c. Remove four self-locking screws and m. Separate rear mounting bracket from
washers and remove machine gun mount with traversing and elevating bracket.
deflector, cartridge bag support, travel lock, n. Remove remaining spring roll pin se
and solenoid (view C). curing connecting pin to rear mounting brack
d. Remove four screws and lockwashers et. Remove connecting pin, then unscrew and
and remove empty cartridge bag support. remove elevating shaft from rear mounting
Remove four brackets from support (view D). bracket.
e. Cut lockwire and remove two screws, o. Remove spring roll pin securing trigger
and separate machine gun mount from de linkage shaft to trigger actuater level. Re
flector assembly (view D). move trigger linkage shaft.
p. Remove one of two spring roll pins
13-30. Disassembly (Fig 13-9). securing trigger roller pin and trigger roller
to arms of trigger actuator lever. Remove
a. Pull out front and rear pin assemblies trigger roller and trigger roller pin.
and remove travel lock. q. Remove remaining spring roll pin from
b. Carefully remove spring roll pin se trigger roller.
curing solenoid clevis to manual trigger to
avoid damaging clevis arm. 13-31. Repair.
c. Cut and remove safety wire and three
drilled-head hex screws securing solenoid to a. Inspect all parts of mount in accor
mount assembly. dance with chapter 4.
d. Remove solenoid, being cautious not to b. Repair consists of replacement of bro
turn solenoid clevis as it would require ken or damaged parts found during disassembly
additional adjustment upon reassembly. and inspection.
e. Remove spring roll pin securing man
ual trigger to trigger linkage shaft. Remove 13-32. Assembly (Fig 13-9).
manual trigger and trigger linkage shaft with NOTE
attachments from rear mounting bracket. During reassembly of mount,
f. Loosen and remove alien head screw check parts for proper fit,
securing retaining spring pin and front pin to alinement, undue wear, and
front mounting block and remove retaining other maintenance indicators,
spring pin and front pin assembly. a. Insert one of two spring roll pins into
g. Loosen and remove hex nut and washer one end of trigger roller pin and position
securing front mounting block to mount base. trigger roller between arms of trigger
Remove front mounting block. actuator lever and insert trigger roller pin.

13-13
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 13-8. Removal and installation of M240 7.62-mm coaxial machine gun mount assembly
with empty cartridge bag support and deflector assembly.

13-14
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

TRAVEL LOCK
FRONT PIN
ASSEMBLY

/% ALLEN
/ HEAD
RETAINING SCREW
CLIP

ALLEN SCREW

WASHER
SPRING ROLL PIN

HEX NUT
TRAVERSING AND
ELEVATING BRACKET
ADJUSTMENT
RATCHET BRACKET
ADJUSTMENT KNOB

SPRING ROLL PIN SPRING ROLL PIN'

AR702687

Figure 13-9. M240 7.62-mm coaxial machine gun mount assembly - exploded view.

13-15
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

b. Secure trigger roller pin to trigger n. Position and secure solenoid to

actuator lever with remaining spring roll pin mounting bracket assembly with three drilled
and insert trigger linkage shaft through trig head hex screws. Insert spring roll pin
ger actuator lever and secure with spring roll through solenoid clevis and manual trigger.
o. Install solenoid ground wire to mount
pin.
c. Screw elevating shaft into rear base and secure with alien screw and lock-
washer.
mounting bracket.
d. Insert connecting pin into rear mount CAUTION
ing bracket and secure with spring roll pin. When installing safety wire
e. Attach rear mounting bracket to tra through heads of solenoid
versing and elevating bracket by sliding attachment bolts, use care to
elevating shaft and connecting pin to tra assure that wire cannot impede
versing and elevating bracket. travel of manual trigger or
f. Secure connecting pin to traversing clevis mechanism.
and elevating bracket with spring roll pin. If p. Install safety wire through heads of
holes in connecting pin and traversing and solenoid attachment bolts.
elevating bracket do not line up, elevating q. Insert trigger linkage shaft with
shaft will have to be adjusted. Loosen/- attachments through rear mounting bracket.
tighten as required. r. Install manual trigger onto end of
g. Position and secure traversing and- trigger linkage shaft and roll pin in solenoid
elevating bracket to mount base with clevis. Partially insert spring roll pin into
traversing screw. manual trigger. Do not fully secure manual
h. Attach ratchet bracket and adjustment
trigger to trigger linkage shaft until solenoid
knob (azimuth) to traversing screw and secure adjustment has been completed (para 13-33).
with spring roll pin.
i. Attach ratchet bracket and adjustment 13-33. Installation (Fig 13-8).
knob (elevation) to elevating shaft and secure a. Position deflector assembly on mount
with spring roll pin. assembly and secure with two drilled head
/. Insert rear pin assembly into rear screws. Insert lockwire, and secure (view D).
mounting bracket and secure with retaining NOTE
spring pin and alien head screw. When attaching cartridge bag
fc Insert front mounting block into mount support brackets to mount,
base and secure with washer and hexnut. secure solenoid ground wire
(Tighten nut until it contacts washer then with left rear support bracket
tighten additional 1/3 turn.) screw and lockwasher. Ensure
I. Insert front pin assembly into front that ground wire is positioned
mounting block and secure with retaining between bracket and machine
spring pin and alien head screw. gun mount.
m. Position travel lock and secure by
pushing in the front and rear pin assemblies. b. Attach two rear support brackets
(short ones) to rear of cartridge bag support
NOTE and secure to machine gun mount. Attach to
Whenever the mount, solenoid, remaining support bracket in front of car
or a manual trigger link part is tridge bag support and secure to machine gun
replaced/installed, the distance mount. Adjust location of cartridge bag
between the link roller and the support by sliding it back and forth as
machine gun trigger must be necessary to center bag support opening
checked for clearance. See directly beneath large opening in machine gun
paragraph 13-33 for proper clear mount. Torque all four mounting screws to 8-
ance and procedure. 10 lb-ft (11-14 N.m).

13-16 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

c. Position machine gun mount with re 13-34. Adjustment (Fig 13-10).

lated parts and install four self-locking
NOTE
screws and thrust washers (view B). Torque
Whenever a mount assembly, a
all four mounting screws to 90 to 110 lb-ft
trigger link part, or a solenoid
(122 to 149 N.m).
is replaced, distance between
d. Connect solenoid electrical power con link roller and machine gun
nector (view A). trigger must be checked for a
e. Pull out front and rear pin assemblies clearance of 0.01 to 0.03 inch.
and remove travel lock (view C).
As manual trigger/solenoid
NOTE clevis engages link roller, which
Before installation of machine actuates machine gun trigger,
gun, preset mount by turning the solenoid clevis must be
elevation knob clockwise until rotated to lengthen or shorten
rear mounting bracket bottoms clevis shaft to effect proper
on flange of elevation shaft. machine gun trigger clearance.
Turn elevation knob counter a. Install machine gun in mount, measure
clockwise for 23 clicks. Turn clearance between machine gun trigger and
traversing knob clockwise until link roller. If adjustment is necessary,
the traversing and elevating remove roll pin securing manual trigger to
bracket backs up to the bottom trigger linkage shaft, pull rear pin assembly
of its travel. Turn traversing securing machine gun to mount and lift rear
knob counterclockwise 31 clicks. of weapon to clear linkage shaft. Remove
linkage shaft with its attachments.
f. Position and install 7.62-mm machine b. Move manual trigger to clear clevis
gun and empty cartridge bag in accordance and rotate clevis as required to obtain proper
with TM 9-2350-253-10. clearance. Each 1/2 turn of clevis results in
g. Boresight and zero machine gun in approximately 0.018 inch travel of clevis
accordance with TM 9-2350-253-10. shaft.

Figure 13-10. M240 7.62-mm coaxial machine gun trigger adjustment.

Change 2 13-17
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

c. Replace trigger and linkage shaft with ballistic shield. Remove deflector from nylon
its attachments and partially insert spring ballistic shield,
roll pin, replace machine gun in mount, and b. Installation.
recheck machine gun trigger clearance. If
proper clearance is met, complete insertion (1) Position deflector plate, and washers
of spring roll pin, if not repeat step b. (two) over nylon ballistic shield as shown (fig
13-11).
13-35. Deflector Plate (Fig 13-11). (2) Secure with two locknuts.

a. Removal.
(1) Loosen and remove two locknuts
and two washers securing deflector to nylon

Figure 13-11. Deflector plate, removal and installation.

13-36. 7.62-mm Coaxial Machine Gun Spare Barrel b. Installation.

Stowage Box (Fig 13-12).
(1) Position spare barrel stowage box
a. Removal. and secure with four screws, nuts and lock-
(1) Remove five screws, lockwashers washers (views B, C, and D). Shim as
and flatwashers, securing oddment tray needed with washers to obtain proper fit of
screen and remove screen (view A). stowage box.
(2) Remove four screws, nuts, lock- (2) Position oddment tray screen and
washers, and spare barrel stowage box secure with five screws, lockwashers and
| (views B, C, and D). flatwashers, (view A).

13-18 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

SCREWS (5)
LOCKWASHERS (5)
FLAT WASHERS (5)

FLATWASHER
(AS REQ'D)
FLATWASHER(2)
LOCKWASHER(2)' NUT(2)

Figure 13-12. 7.62-mm coaxial machine gun spare barrel stowage box removal and installation.

Section VII. MAINTENANCE OF M239 SMOKE GRENADE LAUNCHER

13-37. Description. 13-38. Removal (Fig 13-13).

WARNING
The grenade launcher system provides the Make sure both dischargers are
M60A3 combat tank with a self-screening smoke
clear of smoke grenades before pro
capability. The M239 grenade launcher consists of
ceeding.
two dischargers, two canvas covers, and pushbutton
a. Both left and right dischargers are
unit, and two grenade storage boxes. The GREN
removed in the same manner. The following
ADE-POWER box, the harness assemblies, and two
steps refer to the removal of either dis
mounting brackets are part of the vehicle.
charger. Refer to view A for the left
discharger and view B for the right dis
charger.
b. Make sure GRENADE-POWER switch is
off (light off).

Change 2 13-19
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 13-13. Smoke grenade discharger removal and installation.

13-20
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

c. Place MASTER BATTERY switch to mounting bracket by loosening and removing

OFF. coupling nut.
d. Unscrew coupling nut on harness con
nector P2 at rear of discharger.
NOTE NOTE
Do not twist or turn harness Before installation apply thread
connectors. locking compound (item 26, App. C)
e. Pull harness connector halves apart to screw threads.
with a straight linear motion.
f. Secure harness connector to dummy e. Position discharger on mounting
receptacle on back of discharger mounting bracket and secure with three screws and flat
bracket by engaging and tightening coupling washers. Tighten to 55-74 lb-ft (74.5 to 100.2
nut. N-m).
f. Aline key and keyway of harness con
g. Remove three screws and flat washers nector P2 and discharger connector.
securing discharger to mounting bracket and
NOTE
remove discharger.
Do not twist or turn harness
13-39. Dummy Receptacle. connector.
g. Push harness connector halves
NOTE
Both left and right receptacles are together to fully engage and hand tighten
removed/installed in the same man coupling nut.
ner. h. Perform functional check (para 13-46).
a. Removal.
NOTE 13-41. Smoke Grenade Discharger Repair and
Note position of keyway in recep Disassembly.
tacle prior to removal.
Refer to TM 3-1040-266-20 & P.
(1) Loosen and remove four screws and
lockwashers securing dummy receptacle to dis
13-42. GRENADE-POWER Box.
charger mounting bracket.
(2) Remove dummy receptacle and a. Removal (Figure 13-14).
gasket. WARNING
b. installation. Make sure both dischargers are
clear of M239 smoke grenades
(1) Position dummy receptacle key before proceeding.
toward rear of turret and secure receptacle (1) Make sure GRENADE-POWER switch
and gasket to bracket with four screws and is off (light off).
lockwashers. (2) Place MASTER BATTERY switch
(2) Deleted. to OFF.

NOTE
1340. Installation (Figure 13-13).
Do not twist or turn harness
connectors.
WARNING
(3) Unscrew coupling nut and pull
Make sure both dischargers are connector P2 of harness assembly 6W1 from
clear of M239 smoke grenades GRENADE-POWER box connector Jl in a
before proceeding. straight linear motion.
a. Both left and right dischargers are
(4) Remove two screws, lockwashers,
installed in the same manner. Refer to view
and nuts securing discharger power box to
A for the left discharger and view B for the mounting bracket on turret ceiling.
right discharger.
(5) Remove GRENADE-POWER box.
b. Make sure GRENADE-POWER switch is b. Installation (Figure 13-14).
off (light off).
c. Place MASTER BATTERY switch to WARNING
OFF. Make sure both dischargers are
d. Disconnect harness connector P2 from clear of M239 smoke grenades
dummy receptacle on back of discharger before proceeding.

Change 2 13-21
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(1) Place MASTER BATTERY switch (4) Push harness connector halves to
gether to fully engage and hand tighten
to OFF.
(2) Secure GRENADE-POWER box to coupling nut.
mounting bracket on turret ceiling with two
screws, lock was hers, and nuts. 1343. Smoke Grenade Pushbutton Unit.

NOTE a. Removal (Figure 13-15).

Do not twist or turn harness WARNING
connectors. Make sure both dischargers are
clear of M239 smoke grenades
(3) Aline key and keyway of harness before proceeding.
connector P2 of harness assembly 6W1 with (1) Make sure GRENADE-POWER switch
power box connector Jl. is off (light off).

CEILING OF TURRET
LOCKWASHER (2)

NUT (2)

COUPLING NUT

GRENADE
POWER BOX
HARNESS ASSY I CONNECTOR
(6W1) P2
CONNECTOR
AR 702692

Figure 13-14. Grenade power box removal and installation.

13-22
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(2) Place MASTER BATTERY switch (4) Aline key and keyway of harness
to OFF. connector PI of harness assembly 6W1 with
NOTE connector Jl of pushbutton unit.
Do not twist or turn harness (5) Push connector halves together to
connector. fully engage and hand tighten coupling nut.
(3) Unscrew coupling nut and pull con (6) Perform functional check (para 13-
nector PI of harness assembly 6W1 from 46).
pushbutton unit connector Jl in a straight c. Repair, Disassembly and Assembly.
linear motion. Refer to TM 3-1040-266-20 & P.
(4) Remove four screws and lockwash-
ers securing pushbutton unit to bracket on 13-44. Discharger Harness.
turret ceiling.
(5) Remove pushbutton unit. a. Removal (Figure 13-16).
b. Installation (Figure 13-15). WARNING
WARNING Make sure both dischargers are clear
Make sure both dischargers are of M239 smoke grenades before
clear of M239 smoke grenades proceeding.
before proceeding. (1) Both the left discharger harness
(1) Make sure GRENADE-POWER switch (6W3) and right discharger harness (6W2) are
is off (Light OFF). removed in the same manner. Refer to view
(2) Place MASTER BATTERY switch A for the left discharger harness (6W3) and
to OFF. view B for the right discharger harness (6W2).
(3) Secure pushbutton unit to mounting (2) Make sure GRENADE-POWER switch
bracket on turret ceiling with four screws and is off (light off).
lockwashers. (3) Place MASTER BATTERY switch
NOTE to OFF.
Do not twist or turn harness
connector.

Figure 13-15. Smoke grenade pushbutton unit removal and installation.

13-23
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

NOTE (2) Make sure GRENADE-POWER switch

Do not twist or turn harness is off (light off).
connectors. (3) Place MASTER BATTERY switch
(4) Unscrew coupling nut and pull con to OFF.
nector P2 from discharger connector in a (4) Remove cap from housing.
straight linear motion.
(5) Unscrew coupling nut and pull con NOTE
nector PI from connector Jl of housing in a Do not twist or turn harness
straight linear motion. connectors.
(6) Remove discharger harness.
(7) Install cap on housing. (5) Aline key and keyway of harness
b. Installation (Figure 13-16). connector PI and connector Jl on housing.
WARNING (6) Push connector halves together to
Make sure both dischargers are clear fully engage and hand tighten coupling nut.
of M239 smoke grenades before (7) Aline key and keyway of harness
proceeding. connector P2 with connector on discharger.
(1) Both left discharger harness (6W3) (8) Push connector halves together to
and right discharger harness (6W2) are in fully engage and hand tighten coupling
stalled in the same manner. Refer to view A (9) Perform functional check (para 13-46).
for left discharger harness (6W3) and view B
for right discharger harness (6W2).

A B AMC

Figure 13-16. Discharger harness removal and installation.

13-24 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

13-45. Smoke Grenade Harness Assembly (6W1). (3) Insert harness into access hole and
carefully push harness through to outside of
turret.
(4) Secure harness to clamps on turret
a. Removal (Figure 13-17). walls and ceiling.
WARNING (5) Connect harness assembly to con
Make sure both dischargers are clear nector pins (as marked) on right and left connec
of M239 smoke grenades before tors installed in housings.
proceeding. (6) Install connectors and gaskets to
(1) Make sure GRENADE-POWER switch housing.
is off (light off). (7) Secure eight screws, lockwashers,
(2) Place MASTER BATTERY switch and caps with cable to housings.
to OFF. (8) Secure ground leads to pads on
NOTE turret wall (at harness exit from turret) with
Do not twist op turn the con two screws, flat washers, and lockwashers.
nectors. (9) Install 7.62-mm machine gun am
(3) Unscrew coupling nut and pull con munition box (para ll-2e).
nector PI from smoke grenade pushbutton (10) Connect right and left discharger har
unit in a straight linear motion. nesses (para 13-44).
(4) Unscrew coupling nut and pull (11) Secure ground lead and clamp to
connector P2 from GRENADE-POWER box. turret ceiling using screw and lockwasher.
(5) Disconnect harness rubber con (12) Connect harness rubber connectors
nectors J 3 and P3. J3 and P3.
(6) Remove screw and lockwasher NOTE
securing ground lead and clamp to turret Do not twist or turn the harness
ceiling. connectors.
(7) Remove screws, washers, and (13) Aline key and keyway of harness
clamps securing harness to brackets on turret connector P2 to GRENADE-POWER box.
ceiling. (14) Push connector halves together to
(8) Disconnect right and left discharger fully engage and hand tighten coupling nut.
harnesses (para 13-44). (15) Aline key and keyway of harness
(9) Remove 7.62-mm machine gun am connector PI to smoke grenade pushbutton
munition box (para ll-2a). unit.
(10) Remove two screws, flatwashers, (16) Push connector halves together to
and lock washers securing ground leads to pads fully engage and hand tighten coupling nut.
on turret wall (at harness exit from turret). (17) Perform functional check (para 13-
(11) Remove eight screws, lock- 46).
washers, and cap from housing.
(12) Remove connectdrs and gasket
1346. M239 Smoke Grenade Launcher Functional
with attached harness.
Check.
(13) Disconnect harness assembly from
connector pins on both right and left con
nectors. WARNING
(14) Carefully pull harness into turret Make sure M239 grenade discharg
through access hole and remove harness from ers are not loaded before perform
clamps on turret wall and ceiling. ing test. Make sure that GRENADE-
b. Installation (Figure 13-17). POWER switch is in off position
(power light is not lit) before un
WARNING
loading grenades from a discharger.
Make sure both dischargers are clear Never place your body in front of
of M239 smoke grenades before discharger when unloading grenades
proceeding.
from a discharger.
(1) Make sure GRENADE-POWER switch
is off (light off). a. Preliminary Procedures.
(2) Place MASTER BATTERY switch (1) Place MASTER BATTERY switch
to OFF. to ON position.

Change 2 13-25
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 13-17. Smoke grenade harness assembly (6WI) removal and installation.

13-26
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(2) Make sure GRENADE-POWER switch Refer to view A for left stowage box and view B
is off (light off). for right stowage box.
(3) Place GRENADE-POWER switch (2) Remove four capscrews, lockwashers,
on (light on). and flat washers, securing smoke grenade stowage
(4) Have a helper inside turret operate the box to turret.
push button unit switches during the following (3) Remove smoke grenade stowage
tests: box.
b. Functional Check Procedures:
CAUTION
Do not short-circuit positive multi-
| meter (NSN 6625-00-999-6282, or
equal) test probe to vehicle or dis
charger when performing the next
step.
(1) Using a multimeter with negative
probe to ground, touch positive probe to tip
of plug at bottom center of each discharger
barrel (figure 13-18).
(2) Depress and hold LEFT switch on
push button unit and check that vehicle
voltage is present at left discharger barrels 3,
4 and 6 and is not present at barrels 1, 2 and
5. Refer to figure 13-19 (view A) for left
discharger barrel numbers.
(3) Depress and hold RIGHT switch on
push button unit and check that vehicle
voltage is present at left discharger barrels 1,
2 and 5 and is not present at barrels 3, 4, and
6. AR702696
(4) Depress and hold RIGHT switch on
push button unit and check that vehicle Figure 13-18. Typical barrel measurement
voltage is present at right discharger barrels point for vehicle voltage.
3, 4 and 6 and is not present at barrels 1, 2
and 5. Refer to figure 13-19 (view B) for the
right discharger barrel numbers.
(5) Depress and hold LEFT switch on b. Repair.
push button unit and check that vehicle Refer to Chapter 4 for repair. Replace damaged
voltage is present at right discharger barrels components.
1, 2 and 5, and is not present at barrels 3, 4, c. Installation (Figure 13-20).
and 6.
(6) Place GRENADE-POWER switch to
off position (light off). WARNING
(7) Place MASTER BATTERY switch
to OFF position. Make sure smoke grenade stowage
(8) Install respective canvas cover boxes are clear of M239 smoke
over each discharger. grenades prior to installation.

13-47. Smoke Grenade Stowage Boxes. (1) Both left and right smoke grenade
stowage bins are installed in the same man--
a. Removal (Figure 13-20).
ner. Refer to view A for left stowage box and view
WARNING B for right stowage box.
Make sure smoke grenade stowage (2) Aline smoke grenade stowage box with
boxes are clear of M239 smoke four mounting studs on outside of turret.
grenades prior to removal. (3) Secure smoke grenade stowage box to
(1) Both left and right smoke grenade turret with four capscrews, lockwashers, and flat
stowage boxes are removed in the same manner. washers.

Change 2 13-27
TM 9-2350-253-20-2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 13-20. Smoke grenade stowage boxes removal and installation.

Section VIII. MAINTENANCE OF NYLON BALLISTICS SHIELD

1348. Description. NOTE

Count the number of threads
The nylon personnel ballistics protector shown on adjusting screw (view
shield fits over the interior portion of the C) and record.
main gun and gun mount and attaches to the I. Loosen pressure on mounting plate
turret. The shield prevents enemy fire from (view B) by means of adjusting screw (view
entering the turret around main gun shield. C).
m. Pull temperature compensating link
away from nylon ballistic shield (view-C).
13-49. Removal (Fig 13-21). n. Remove 7.62-mm coax machine gun
deflector plate (para 13-35).
a. Secure gun in travel lock (TM 9-2350- o. Remove 23 nuts, washers, and spring
253-10). clamps securing ballistic shield to turret
b. Place MASTER BATTERY and (view D).
ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF position. p. Fold nylon ballistic shield down over
c. Remove M105D telescope (para 15-47). gun mount.
d. Remove gunner's periscope (para 15- q. Remove 16 screws, lockwashers, and
38) or tank thermal sight (para 15-110 thru eight straps, securing nylon ballistic shield to
15-113). fjun mount (view D). Remove nylon ballistic
e. Remove 7.62-mm machine gun (TM 9- shield.
2350-253-10)
f. Remove coaxial machine gun mount
(para 13-28). 13-50. Installation (Fig 13-21).
g. Remove 7.62-mm ammunition box
(para 11-2). o. Position nylon ballistic shield on gun
h. Remove four screws from bearing caps mount and secure with eight straps and 16
of trunnion link assembly (view A). washers, lockwashers, and screws (view D).
i. Remove nut and spacer from trunnion b. Unfold nylon ballistic shield up over
and remove trunnion link assembly (view A). gun mount.
/. Remove lacing. c. Position ballistics shield on turret and
k. Remove two screws and washers from secure with 23 spring clamps, washers, and
temperature compensating link mounting nuts (view D).
plate (view B).

13-29
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 13-21. Removal and installation of nylon ballistics shield.

13-30
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

d Position and install 7.62-mm coax i. Install caps and four screws on ballis
machine gun deflector plate and secure with tics drive trunnion link assembly (view A).
two nuts and flat washers (para 13-35). j. Install 7.62-mm ammunition box (para
e. Position temperature compensating 11-2).
link (view C) and adjust pressure on tempera k. Install coaxial machine gun mount
ture compensating link surrounding plate (para 13-33).
(view B) by means of adjusting screw (view
C). Adjust screw so same number of threads I. Install 7.62-mm machine gun (TM 9-
are visible as recorded in para 1349 step 1. 2350-253-10).
f. Install temperature compensating link m. Install M105D telescope (para 15-49).
mounting plate (view B) and secure with two n. Install gunner's periscope (para 15-39)
screws and washers. or tank thermal sight (para 15-110 thru 15-
g. Install lacing. 113).
h. Position trunnion link assembly and o. Release gun travel lock (TM 9-2350-
secure with spacer and nut on trunnion (view 253-10)
A).

13-31
i
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CHAPTER 14

MAINTENANCE OF CUPOLA ARMAMENT

Section I. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

14-1. Scope.

This chapter contains instructions for lay, sight, and fire the weapon. The cupola
maintenance of caliber .50 ammunition box has facilities for 360-degree overlap vision
and feed system, vision blocks, and cradle and an electrical slipring to provide for
assembly and cover. operation of the power and communication
circuits throughout 360-degree traverse. The
14-2. Description. caliber .50 machine gun is elevated and
depressed by mechanical controls and tra
The commander's cupola M19 (hereinafter verses when the cupola is traversed. ■ The
referred to as cupola) mounts a caliber .50 machine gun is designed for either electrical
machine gun M85 and the controls required to or manual firing.

Section II. MAINTENANCE OF CALIBER .50

AMMUNITION BOX AND FEED SYSTEM

14-3. Description.

The caliber .50 ammunition box and feed (4) Remove flexible chute assembly
system consists of a metal ammunition box (view A).
and chute assembly. The box and chute (5) Remove four screws, lockwashers,
assembly are curved to fit the interior of the and nuts at inner side and bottom of track
cupola and mounted to welded bracket just assembly (view B).
above the cupola ring. Ammunition for the (6) Remove track assembly (view B).
caliber .50 machine gun is stored in the box (7) Disconnect two cable connectors
and fed to the machine gun through the chute (1W13 P4 and P5) from last round stop switch
assembly. A last round stop switch assembly (view C). Remove two screws and clamps
located in the ammunition box will cause the securing last round stop switch leads.
GUN READY light to go out when there are (8) Remove screw and cable clamp
20 rounds or less of ammunition in the securing two connectors to cupola ring guard.
ammunition box. (9) Remove six screws, lockwashers,
and washers securing ammunition box and
14-4. Caliber .50 Ammunition Box and Feed three blocks (inside box) to three front
System (Fig 14-1). supports (view C).
(10) Remove two nuts, lockwashers,
a. Removal. washers, and screws securing ammunition box
(1) At gun end of chute, withdraw and to rear support (view C).
lock spring-loaded pins by squeezing pins (11) Remove ammunition box, and re
located at bottom of chute assembly (view move three blocks inside box (view C).
A). (12) Remove two screws, lockwashers
(2) Remove machine gun (TM 9-2350- securing fixed chute assembly to machine gun
253-10). cradle; remove chute assembly (view E).
(3) At box end of chute assembly,
squeeze two pins (at top of chute) to with
draw spring-loaded pins securing chute to
track assembly. Pull pins forward to detent
position to lock pins open (view A).

14-1
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 14-1. Removal and installation of caliber .50 ammunition box and feed system.

14-2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

b. Inspection. securing last round stop switch leads.

(1) Check interior of ammunition box Connect two cable connectors (1W13 P4 and
and flexible feed chute for obstructions or P5) to last round stop switch (view C).
surface defects which may interfere with (6) Position track assembly; install
ammunition feed, or damage ammunition. four nuts, lockwashers, and screws at inner
(2) Check for chipping or other defects side and bottom of track assembly (view B).
on inside surface finish, and for accumulation (7) Move pins out of detent position to
of dirt or foreign matter. lock flexible chute assembly in place at both
(3) Check flexible chute assembly for ends; position chute assembly as shown (view
damage, proper flexibility, and ease of opera A).
tion of quick removal pins at both gun and
ammunition box end. 14-5. Last Round Stop Switch Assembly (Fig
CAUTION 14-1).
Do not clean rubber stops in
ammunition box doors with sol a. Removal.
vent. (1) Disconnect two cable connectors
c. Cleaning. Clean components of am (1W13 P4 and P5) from last round switch
munition box and feed system with dry (view C). Remove two screws and clamps
cleaning solvent (item 28, App. C). Wipe dry with a securing last round stop switch leads.
clean cloth. (2) Remove screw and cable clamp
d. Repair. Replace or repair damaged or securing cables to cupola ring guard.
unserviceable parts. Check for burrs, gouges, (3) Open ammunition box door at track
and dents; repair or straighten parts as end of box (view D).
required to restore them to serviceable con (4) Remove two screws, lockwashers,
dition. If necessary, replace last round stop and nuts securing button guard to box, and
switch assembly (para 14-5). remove button guard (view D).
e. Installation. (5) Remove two screws securing
switch assembly to bracket, and remove
NOTE switch assembly (view D).
When positioning fixed chute b. Installation.
assembly, make sure it is alined NOTE
with feedway of machine gun. Shim as required to provide
clearance of 5.25 + 0.01 inches
(1) Position fixed chute assembly on between ramp button and inside
machine gun cradle; secure with two flat edge (door side) of ammunition
washers, lockwashers, and screws (view D and box (view D).
fig 14-3 view E). Install machine gun (TM 9- (1) Position switch assembly to
2350-253-10). bracket and secure with two screws (view D).
(2) Position three blocks inside (2) Position button guard to box and
ammunition box, and secure ammunition box secure with two screws, lockwashers, and
to rear support with two screws, lockwashers, nuts.
and nuts (view C). (3) Close ammunition box door at
(3) Secure ammunition box and three track end of box (view D).
blocks (inside box) to three front supports (4) Secure cables to cupola ring guard
with six washers, lockwashers, and screws with screw and cable clamp.
(view C). (5) Install two screws and clamps se
(4) Secure two cables to cupola ring curing last round stop switch leads. Connect
guard with clamp and screw (view C). two cable connectors (1W13 P4 and P5) to
(5) Install two screws and clamps last round switch.

Section III. MAINTENANCE OF VISION BLOCKS

14-6. Description.
with 360 degrees of overlap vision from the
The vision blocks provide the commander M19 cupola with the hatch open or closed.

14-3
tfM 9-2350-253-20-2

14-7. Service (Fig 14-2). c. Remove wedge and vision blocks; re

move capscrew from tapped hole (view C).
Inspect vision blocks for cracks, clouding, d. Thoroughly scrape vision block cavity
surface scratches, or other vision impairing in cupola (view C).
defects. Replace defective blocks. Check
waterproof seal of block to cupola. Remove 14-9. Installation (Fig 14-2).
and reseal (item 23, App. C), if necessary.
a. Apply Sealing compound (item 23,
App. C) to frame area where vision blocks contact
14-8. Removal (Fig 14-2). frame (view C).
b. Install vision block and wedge (view C).
a. Remove locking wire and two cap- c. Install two capscrews. Tighten capscrews
screws (view A). alternately to 7-10 lb-ft (9-14 N.m). Secure cap-
b. Insert one capscrew (removed in step a screws with locking wire (item 30, App. C) (view
above) into the tapped hole and tighten to A).
release wedge (views B and C).

CAPSCREW

14-4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section IV. MAINTENANCE OF CRADLE ASSEMBLY AND COVER

14-10. Description (Figs 14-3 and 14-4). a. Place MASTER BATTERY switch OFF.
b. Remove clamp, eight nuts, seven
The cupola cradle assembly houses the washers, five straps, and remove canvas
caliber .50 machine gun. The cradle assembly machine gun cover (view A, fig 14-3).
consists of a forged cast steel housing fitted ( c. Remove six capscrews, and lock-
with equilibrator springs and an access door. washers and remove cradle access cover
The springs are externally adjusted to provide (view B, fig 7-3).
a balanced cradle so that no excessive screw- d. Elevate cradle to its maximum posi
jack handwheel effort is required to elevate tion and block cradle in place with prefabri
or depress the\gun. An external weather cated block (11-1/8 inches in length) (view C,
proof cover is over the cradle assembly to fig 14-3).
keep moisture and ballistics fragments from e. Remove caliber .50 machine gun (TM
entering the cupola around the gun mount and 9-2350-253-10) and disconnect periscope link
cradle openings. A zipper on the cover allows assembly. Disconnect hand elevating screw-
entry to the access door when the cover is jack assembly at cradle and remove screw-
installed. The access door is fitted with a jack from cradle assembly.
hold-open latch which holds the door in the f. Remove two screws, lockwashers, and
open position during loading or servicing the washers and remove flexible chute assembly
caliber .50 machine gun. (view E).
g. Remove screw, lockwasher, clamp, and
14-11. Service. serrated washer and disconnect electrical
cable and ground lead at left trunnion arm
CAUTION (view F).
Do not exercise the hand ele-. h. Remove screw, lockwasher, and loop
vating screwjack without a clamp and disconnect electrical cable at
machine gun installed. bottom of cradle (view F).
a. Elevate and depress machine gun to {. Remove locking wire from eight
check tension on equilibrator springs. Bal screws; hold a load on equilibrator springs
ance should be such that no excessive screw- with a wrench, and remove four screws from
jack handwheel effort or binding occurs when inner bolt circle (view G).
cradle and machine gun are elevated or y. Release pressure slowly, and remove
depressed through their full range of opera four screws from outer bolt circle (view G).
tion. Adjust by rotating shaft assembly to Jc Remove retainer, shaft assembly, and
obtain required balance (views D and H, fig three springs (view H).
14-3). I. Remove bolt spacer, washer, and nut
b. Open access door and check door lock from left trunnion shaft (view I).
for spring action and burrs on sliding bracket. m. Remove cradle assembly.
c. Remove cradle cover (view B, fig 14-3)
and check front and rear machine gun 14-13. Disassembly (Fig 14-4).
mounting surfaces for wear. Lubricate trun
nion bearing (LO 9-2350-253-12). a. Open access door (view A).
d. Check equilibrator springs and shaft b. Remove two screws, and lockwashers
for dust accumulation, dirt, and foreign mat and remove access door (view A).
ter especially between individual spring coils c. Remove two screws, lockwashers, and
(view H, fig 14-3). washers securing door hold-open components
e. Install cradle cover and close access to cradle. Remove door components (view B).
door (view B, figs 14-3 and 14-4). d. Remove two screws, washers, and
lockwashers. Remove bracket (view C).
14-12. Removal (Fig 14-3). e. Open hook that attaches chain to
welded clip on cradle and remove pin assem
CAUTION bly (view D).
Do not move the cradle screw- /. Remove left and right retaining rings
jack assembly unless a machine (view E).
gun is installed.

14-5
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 14-3. Removal and installation of cradle assembly (1 of 2).

14-6
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CRADLE ASSEMBLY

Figure 14-3. Removal and installation of cradle assembly (2 of 2).

Change 2 14-7
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

g. Push out left trunnion bearing from screws in outer bolt circle (view H).
inside of cradle (view E). NOTE
h. Pull right trunnion bearing out of blind Do not install four screws in
hole. If bearing is too tight, use a bearing inner circle, or locking wire
puller (view E). until after adjustment of equili-
14-14. Inspection (Fig 14-4). brator springs (view D).
c. Insert shaft assembly through cupola
a. Inspect all threaded parts for wear and body opening, turning shaft to aline groove
crossed threads. with inside tange of equilibrator springs, and
b. Check brackets for wear, burrs, insert end of shaft assembly in bearing (view
cracks, and corrosion.
H).
c. Inspect springs for deformity and
d. Position equilibrator springs in approx
fatigue; replace cotter pin.
imate installed position (view H).
d. Inspect access door (view A) and
e. Connect electrical cable and ground
cradle assembly (view E) for cracks, breaks,
lead at left trunnion arm with clamp, lock-
corrosion, or deformity. Bearings (view E)
washer, screw, and serrated washer (view F,
must be free of chips, cracks, dirt, corrosion,
fig 14-3).
or other foreign matter, and must be properly
f. Install flexible chute assembly and
lubricated (LO 9-2350-253-12).
secure with two washers, lockwashers, and
14-15. Cleaning and Service. screws (view E, fig 14-3).
a. Clean all components of the cradle g. Connect screwjack at cradle end, con
assembly with a cloth or sponge soaked in dry nect periscope link assembly, and install
cleaning solvent Type II (SD-2), PD-680 (item caliber .50 machine gun (TM 9-2350-253-10).
28, App. C). Remove corrosion, burrs, or scored h. With fabricated block in place, turn
areas with crocus cloth (item 5, App. C) and wipe shaft counterclockwise with wrench until
parts dry with a clean cloth. first four holes in retainer aline with four
b. Apply a thin film of oil on all un- holes in shaft assembly (view D, fig 14-3).
painted parts and surfaces, except bearings. i. Install four screws in retainer to lock
See LO 9-2350-253-12. shaft assembly (view D, fig 14-3).
c. Clean cradle cover as required with dry j. Remove block from cradle (view G, fig
cloth, water dampened cloth, or cloth soaked in 14-3) and test elevation and depression of the
soapy water. cradle with elevating screwjack assembly.
14-16. Assembly (Fig 14-4). Balance should be such that there is no
a. Lubricate bearings with grease (item 15, excessive handwheel effort or binding when
App. C), and press into position (view E) (LO 9- the cradle and machine gun are elevated or
2350-253-12). depressed through the full range of operation.
b. Install left and right retaining rings NOTB
(view E). If excessive effort exists, reinstall
c. Install pin assembly to welded chip by block and remove the four screws
securing hook to welded chip (view D). and readjust the spring counter
d. Position bracket and secure with two clockwise to decrease elevation
lockwashers, washers, and screws (view C). effort, and clockwise to decrease
e. Install latch, spring, straight pin, and depression effort. Perform step j
cotter pin (view C). again.
f. Install door hold-open components, k. Install lockwire (item 30, App. C) through
with two washers, lockwashers, and screws eight screws (view G, fig 14-3).
(view B). I. Position access cover and secure with
g. Install access door (view A). six capscrews and lockwashers (view B, fig
14-3). Tighten three capscrews on top to 67-
14-17. Installation (Fig 14-3). 75 lb-ft (91-101 N«m) and three capscrews on
a. Position cradle assembly and support side to 135-145 lb-ft (183-197 N-m).
cradle with prefabricated wooden block 11- m. Place canvas machine gun cradle cover
1/8 inch long. Install nut, washer, spacer, and in position and install five straps, seven
bolt in left trunnion shaft (view I, fig 14-3). washers, eight nuts, and clamp (view A, fig
Torque nut to 67-75 lb-ft (91-101 N-m). 14-3).
b. Install retainer and secure with four
14-8 Change 2
TM 9-2350-253-20-2
I

V
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CHAPTER 15

MAINTENANCE OF SIGHTING AND FIRE

CONTROL EQUIPMENT

Section I. DESCRIPTION
15-1. General. or depression, and superelevation data from
the computer system. Superelevation data
This section contains the system descrip from the computer system is also applied to
tion and system tests for components of the the gun elevating hydraulic system. Both
sighting and fire control systems. night and daylight sighting are provided by
the gunner's periscope. A reticle projector
15-2. Sighting and Fire Control Systems. attached to the rear of the periscope
projects a reticle image, corrected in
. a. The M60A3 tank is equipped with azimuth by the computer system, into the
passive night vision and conventional daylight periscope field of view.
sighting and fire control components, a solid b. Secondary Direct System. The second
state ballistics computer system, and a laser ary direct fire control system is used when
rangefinder. The sighting and fire control the primary direct system is inoperative. It
components are part of five independent is composed of an M105D articulated tele
sighting and fire control systems. These are scope, Ml 14 telescope mount, M50 instru
the primary direct, secondary direct, ment light, light source control 8619165-1,
auxiliary, 7.62mm machine gun, and the and a filter box. The telescope mount is
caliber .50 machine gun sighting and fire attached to the main gun mount so that
control systems. telescope line-of-sight follows the gun aiming
b. Some MOO A3 tanks are equipped with a point. A telescope eyepiece hanger maintains
Tank Thermal Sight AN/VSG-2. The Tank the eyepiece in a usable position throughout
Thermal Sight (TTS) is an integrated the range of gun elevation and depression.
day/night periscope sight installed at the The light source control is powered from the
gunner's station. It incorporates daylight vehicle main batteries and is the primary
sights of 8-power and unity power. Day/night source of reticle illumination. The instru
thermal channels provide wide or narrow ment light is self-powered and is a secondary
field-of-view sighting. They can be used source of illumination, if required. The filter
effectively during day, night or reduced box contains six eyepiece filters which allow
visibility conditions. The thermal channels operation under varying field conditions.
will penetrate fog, smoke and dust clouds. Three of the filters are green and provide
The thermal scene is displayed at both the laser eye protection for the telescope,
gunner's and commander's stations. On those gunner's periscope, and commander's peri
tanks equipped with the TTS, the Gunner's scope. The other three filters are for
Periscope M35E1, the Periscope Mount standard telescope operation.
M118E1, and the Reticle Projector Unit will c. Auxiliary System. The auxiliary (indi
have been replaced. rect) fire control system provides a method
of firing the main gun when the target is not
15-3. Systems Description. visible from the tank. The system is com
posed of an M28E2 azimuth indicator and an
a. Primary Direct Fire Control System.
Ml 3A3 gunner's fire control quadrant. The
The primary direct fire control system is
azimuth indicator provides gun direction rela
I composed of the M21 Ballistics Computer tive to a fixed point and the quadrant
System, Laser Rangefinder AN/VVG-2,
provides gun elevation.
I reticle projector, M35E1 gunner's (or TTS)
periscope and M118E1 mount. These com d. 7.62-mm Coax Machine Gun System.
The 7.62-mm coax machine gun sighting and fire
ponents are mechanically linked by ballistics
control system is composed of the reticle projec
drive M10A3 which corrects and synchro
tor or gunner's display (TTS) and the unity
nizes rangefinder and periscope lines-of-
sight in accordance with main gun elevation power window of the gunner's periscope. The

Change 2 15-1
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

reticle projector or gunner's display (TTS) 15-5. Laser Rangefinder System (Fig 15-2).
superimposes a machine gun reticle through the
unity power window. Because the main gun, The Laser Fire Control Rangefinder
7.62-mm coax machine gun, and the gunner's AN/WG-2 (LRF) system provides the range
periscope are synchronized in azimuth and eleva data for the M21 Ballistics Computer Sys
tion, the machine gun is on target when viewed tem. It is composed of a receiver-trans
through the gunner's periscope. mitter (R/T), center and outboard bearing
e. Caliber .50 Machine Gun System. The supports, electronics unit (EU), and three
caliber .50 machine gun sighting and fire interconnecting cables. Target range is
control system is composed of light source obtained by transmitting a laser light pulse to
control 8619159, commander's M36E1 peri the target and receiving reflected light from
scope, Ml 19 periscope mount, and an M50 the target(s). The elapsed time from trans
instrument light. The light source control mission to reception is measured and convert
furnishes primary reticle illumination for the ed into target range. The LRF accepts a
periscope. The instrument light is a second maximum of eight target replies received
ary source of reticle illumination if the light during a ranging. However, range data are
source control or vehicle power fails. stored for only the first three replies. A
range reply can be automatically processed
15-4. M21 Ballistics Computer System (Fig (AUTO mode) or manually (ON mode) and
15-1). displayed for operator evaluation. The dis
played range information includes a target
The M21 ballistics computer system identification number and the target range.
generates the azimuth and elevation In AUTO mode, range data are automatically
corrections introduced into the primary transmitted to the ballistics computer of the
direct fire control system. Corrections are main gun fire control system provided typical
made for ammo type, range, air temperature, target criteria are met. When the first reply
altitude, vehicle cant, crosswind, and is selected, data are automatically fed to the
remaining tvbe life. The system also allows computer if only one or two replies are
tile gunner to input individual azimuth and received and the first reply is within range.
elevation corrections for each ammo type. With the last reply selected, three or less
Elevation corrections are applied to the replies must be received and the last reply
ballistics drive and superelevation actuator, must be within range. If these criteria are
and hence to the gunner's periscope, laser not met, or if the second reply has been
rangefinder, and the main gun. Azimuth selected, range data must be evaluated and
corrections are applied to the laser manually fed to the computer as in the ON
rangefinder and to the reticle projector to mode. Data transmission in the ON mode is
provide target lead in the rangefinder and not automatic, allowing for evaluation and
gunner's periscope. The system is composed selection of the target replies before data
of a computer, gunner's control unit (GCU), feed. When the desired reply ( 1, 2 or last)
gunner's and commander's ammo select units has been selected, the data for that reply is
(ASU's), rate tachometer, cant angle sensor fed to the computer manually using a push
(cant unit), crosswind sensor mast, EMI filter, button on the receiver-transmitter control
crosswind sensor probe, output unit, and three panel. A TEST mode of operation is provided
system cables. to self-test the LRF circuitry.

15-2 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 15-1. M21 Ballistics computer system with cable interconnection

diagram.

Change 2 15-3
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

AR702706

Figure 15-2. Laser rangefinder system with cable interconnection diagram.

15-4 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253r20-2

Section n. MAINTENANCE OF DRIVER'S M27 PERISCOPE SEAL

15-6. Description

The M27 periscope is a unity power

viewing device used by the driver in the
M60 A3 tank. Three such devices are provided
to extend the field of view. The seal between
the periscope and the tank limits water
leakage to less than a continuous drip.
15-7. Removal (Fig. 15-3).
a. Remove periscope from tank (TM 9-
2350-253-10).
b. Pry out old seal with knife or other
suitable tool.
1 5-8 . Installation C ig. 1 5-3).
a. Scrape old adhesive , and rubber
from seal seating area with a wire brush.
b. Remove any contaminant such as
paint or grease from the seating area.
c. Using a narrow brush . or ^suitable
applicator, paint a thin coat of adhesive (item
3, App C) on mating surfaces of seal and peri
scope.
d. When adhesive becomes tacky,
install seal in place.
e. Rub excess adhesive from top
surface of seal.
/. Install periscope in tank (TM 9- Figure 15-3. Removal and installation
2350-253-10). of M27 periscope seal.

Section III. MAINTENANCE OF LOADER'S M37 PERISCOPE

15-9. Description. 15-10. Removal. Refer to TM 9-2350-253-10.

The loader's M37 periscope is a unity power 15-11. Installation. Refer to TM 9-2350-253-
device installed so the loader can see in the direc 10.
tion of the main gun.
Section IV. MAINTENANCE OF DRIVERS NIGHT VISION VIEWER AN-VVS/2
15-12. Description. CAUTION
The night viewer will be
The driver's night vision viewer is a passive damaged if exposed to sunlight
device that only requires ambient light for opera or other bright light with or
tion. Since it does not generate any light for view without power. Keep the
ing, its operation is undetectable. The viewer con entrance window cover and the
sists of three major assemblies: an eyepiece assem viewing screen cap in place and
bly, a 25-mm image intensifier tube assembly, and only remove when necessary for
an objective assembly. It can be operated from maintenance. Perform
vehicle power or removed from the tank for out maintenance in a normal
side surveillance. overhead light environment
15-13. Removal. Refer to TM 9-2350-253-10. where there is no danger of
exposing the instrument to a
15-14. Disassembly (Fig 15-4). spotlight, table lamp, or to
NOTE direct sunlight.
Disassemble only as necessary a. Remove receptacle cover from
to repair the viewer. flange.
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

b. Remove flange nut and receptacle 15-16. Assembly (Fig 15-4).

cover and chain assembly. a. Install eyepiece cushioning pad and
c. Remove battery cap and gasket. secure to viewer with two screws, washers,
Remove battery cap retainer from housing. and lockwashers.
d. Remove entrance window cover. b. Install eyepiece protective cap.
e. Remove eyepiece protective cap. c. Install entrance window cover.
f. Remove two screws, washers, and d. Install battery cap retainer on
lockwashers securing eyepiece cushioning pad housing. Install battery cap and gasket.
to viewer. e. Install receptacle cover chain
15-15. Repair. Repair of the driver's night assembly and secure with flange nut.
viewer consists of replacing the eyepiece f. Install receptacle cover on flange.
cushioning pad, battery compartment cap, 15-17. Installation. Refer to TM 9-2350-253-
gasket and retainer, power receptacle
cover and chain assembly, entrance
window cover, and eyepiece protective
cap.

ENTRANCE

Alt702708

Figure 15-4. Disassembly and assembly of driver's night viewer.

15-6
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section V. MAINTENANCE OF FIRE CONTROL (ELEVATION)

QUADRANT M13A3 AND LIGHT SOURCE CONTROL 8620860
15-18. Description. b. Loosen setscrew securing control
knob of light source control 8620860 and
The fire control quadrant M13A3, remove knob.
mounted on the gunner's guard of the main c. Remove screw and lockwasher
gun, is part of the indirect fire control securing cable clamp.
system and is used to indicate the elevation d. Remove two screws and lockwashers
of the main gun. It consists of an elevation securing elevation quadrant to light source
knob and worm, elevation micrometer, level control and remove light source controL I
vial tube, reflector, and elevation scale. It is
illuminated by light source control 8620860 15-20. Inspection.
which is mounted just above it on the gunner's
guard. The light source operates from Check mounting surfaces of fire control
vehicle power and allows the gunner to (elevation) quadrant for paint chips or other
change illumination of the fire control foreign matter.
quadrant scale as desired.
15-21. Installation (Fig. 15-5).
15-19. Removal (Fig. 15-5)
a. Position light source control to fire
a. Disconnect electrical connector and control quadrant and secure with nut and
remove three screws and lockwashers secur lockwasher.
ing light source control to gunner's guard and b. Install control knob on light source
remove light source. control and tighten setscrew.
c. Position light source control on
I

AR702709

» Figure 15-5. Removal and installation of elevation quadrant M13A3 and light source control
8620860.

Change 1 15-7
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2
a. Adjust micrometer knob on M13A3 1UC fire
gunner's guard and secure with three lock - control (elevation) quadrant until bubble
washers. Tighten to 26-30 lb-in (2.6 - 3 N»m) centered. Loosen three screws on knob
d. Connect electrical connector. slip scale to zero. Tighten screws. "4
e. Adjust fire control quadrant (para. 15- b. Adjust elevation scale, if necessary, by
22). loosening two screws and supping scale to
zero. Tighten screws.
15-22. Adjustment.

NOTE
Ensure that tank is on level
ground. Level the gun using
M1A1 gunner's quadrant (para
2-12).
Section VI. MAINTENANCE OF M30 AND M50 INSTRUMENT LIGHTS

15-23. Description.
The M30 and M50 instrument lights are
battery operated devices used as secondary
or emergency sources of reticle illumination
of the M105D telescope, M35E1 periscope,
and M36E1 periscope reticles. The M50 light
includes a bulb. The M30 light provides
battery power only and is used for passive
I elbows of the periscopes.
15-24. Removal (Fig 15-6).

Remove instrument lights by disconnecting

electrical connector and loosening wing nut or ELECTRICAL
clamp. CONNECTOR
(HIDDEN)
15-25. Installation (Fig 15-6).

Position instrument lamp in clamp, tighten Figure 15-6. Removal and installation of M30
wing nut, and connect electrical connector. or M50 instrument lights (M50
shown, M30 similar).
Section VII. MAINTENANCE OF COMMANDER'S M36E1 PERISCOPE

15-26. Description. machined, cast aluminum housing with two

I a. The M36E1 periscope is the covers. It houses a prism attached to an
commander's sighting device. It is elevation drive mechanism, a mounting plate
mounted in the Ml 19 mount and mechanically assembly, entrance window, and an observer's
coupled to the caliber .50 machine gun by an window. The prism, hermetically sealed in
adjustable link which causes the machine gun the upper part of the housing between the
to follow the periscope line of sight. The entrance window and the observer's window
periscope is composed of a head assembly, a and between the machine matched covers of
body assembly, and an elbow assembly. It the housing, is connected through the
provides three optical systems: a unity power elevation drive mechanism to an elevation
system for wide angle, close-in viewing, a arm assembly. A valve assembly and purging
seven power daylight system, and a 7.1 power screw are provided for purging and charging
nighttime system. the head assembly. The assembly weighs
b. The head assembly is a light approximately 25 pounds.
gathering instrument that serves as the input c. The body assembly consists of a
light source for both the body and elbow body housing and the daylight body assembly.
assemblies of the periscope. It is a precision- The body assembly is optically alined to the

15-8 Change 1
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

body housing so that lines of sight are on light source control body. Position lead so
t parallel. The daylight body assembly and a it will not interfere with passive elbow re
passage joining the inner chambers of the moval (view A). Disconnect wire from M30 |
body assembly and body housing enable instrument light at bottom of passive elbow.
purging and charging with dry nitrogen. The
body assembly weighs approximately 11 CAUTION
Ensure passive elbow is not
pounds.
exposed to direct sunlight or
(1) Body Housing. The body intensified light as damage can
housing is a one-piece, machined casting con result.
taining an entrance window, a unity power CAUTION
mirror, and an exit window. The unity-power Be sure all hanging leads are
I mirror is hermetically sealed between the positioned away from elbow
entrance and exit window and eyepiece as removal area. Do not drop
semblies. passive elbow. Support elbow
(2) Daylight Body Assembly. The with one hand on bottom and
daylight body assembly contains an objective release latches with other hand.
lens, a prism assembly, and etched machine Passive elbow weighs
gun reticle positioned between the elevation approximately 24 pounds.
and deflection boresight knobs, and an e. Support passive elbow and release
eyepiece assembly. The eyepiece assembly front and rear latches securing elbow in body ■
provides a 7 power daylight viewing assembly (view B). |
f. Carefully lower passive elbow from
capability.
d. The passive elbow or image intensi housing in body assembly. |
fication assembly is the nighttime counter 9' Disconnect two daylight body
part of the daylight body assembly. The night assembly lead connectors at rear of periscope
viewing optical system amplifies the light from harness lead connectors (view A).
gathered by the head assembly by means of CAUTION
an image intensifier tube, making objects In next step, arm assembly is
visible without the aid of a searchlight or spring-loaded. Stop from
other active light source. The elbow has a snapping to limit when coupling
7.1 power monocular sight with built in is disconnected.
reticle projection system, boresight knobs, an
adjustable eyepiece,a power switch, and two CAUTION
body latches with strikes. Operating power is Periscope link assembly must
obtained from vehicle power or 3.2 volt be disconnected from periscope
power from an M30 instrument light. The and attached to storage hanger
elbow assembly weighs approximately 24 whenever the M36E1 periscope
pounds. is installed or removed. Dam
1 15-27. Removal (Fig 15-7 and 15-8). age and misalignment of link
assembly may result.
WARMING1
h. Disconnect quick-disconrtect
Ensure caliber .50 machinegun coupling from elevation arm. Place elevation
is clear of am munition. arm all the way back toward rear of turret.
Connect quick-disconnect coupling to storage
| a. Place CUPOLA POWER switch in hanger (view D).
OFF position. CAUTION
b. Elevate caliber .50 machinegun to Do not drop daylight body
limit. assembly. Support body
_ c. Rotate headrests to upper limit (Fig assembly with one hand on
1 15-8). bottom and release latches with
i <L Disconnect lamp housing from dove other hand. Body assembly
tail slot in daylight body assembly and store weighs approximately 11 pounds.

Change 1 15-9
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

DAYLIGHT BODY
ASSEMBLY

Figure 15-7. Removal and installation of periscope M36E1 (1 of 2).

15-10 Change 1
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

EXHAUST PORT

ENTRANCE PORT

CAP

REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW

HEAD ASSEMBLY

GASKET

EXHAUST PORT

CATCH

ENTRANCE PORT

DAYLIGHT BODY ASSEMBLY

SCREW
> (8-32 UNC,3/8 LG)

BODY ASSEMBLY (SHOWN OUT OF POSITION) ARR80-2020

I
Figure 15-7. Removal and installation of periscope M36E1 (2 of 2).

Change 1 15-11
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

i. Support daylight body assembly and CAUTION

release the left and right latches securing Protect elevation arm so it is
body assembly in head assembly (view C). not bumped and snapped to 'I
/. Carefully lower daylight body opposite extreme.
| assembly. d. Carefully slide head assembly into
k. Lower headrest assemblies. mount.
I. Loosen two wing nuts securing head e. Press head assembly upward into
assembly in periscope mount to limit; this stowed position, lower headrest assemblies,
allows wings to be positioned vertically (view and tighten wing nuts to snug.
E). NOTE
Face of head assembly should
CAUTION be flat against wall of mount
Do not drop head assembly. with no voids between the two
Support head assembly with one surfaces; head assembly should
hand on bottom and release not be cocked with respect to
catches with other hand. Head mount. If walls are flush and
assembly weighs approximately straight, pins on head assembly
25 pounds are properly engaged in slots in
mount and wing nuts can be
I CAUTION
tightened.
Exercise cafe to protect eleva
tion arm so it is not bumped and f. Inspect head assembly through slots
snapped to opposite extreme of mount.
position. g. If voids are evident or if head
assembly is cocked in mount, loosen wing nuts
I NOTE
It may be necessary to move and repeat, step (c).
head assembly back and forth h. Tighten wing nuts securely.
i. Place headrest in the up position. I
to loosen from mount,
NOTE I
m. Support head assembly and push Ensure mating surfaces of guide
wing nut bolts inward. Head assembly will be pins of head assembly and day
felt to disengage from mount and will be free light body are free of dirt and
to move downward. debris.
n. Push handle of catch to the right /• Carefully slide daylight body
(view E) and carefully slide head assembly out assembly into head assembly. Press upward
of mount. and engage left and right latches (view C).
k. Connect two daylight body
15-28. Installation (Fig 15-7).
assembly lead connectors to harness lead
CAUTION connectors (view A).
Periscope link assembly must
CAUTION
be attached to stowage hanger
Do not allow elevation arm to
when not connected to peri
swing freely as damage to peri
scope elevation arm. Damage
scope could result.
and misalignment of linkage as
I. Connect quick-disconnect coupling
sembly may result.
to elevation arm. Be sure both pins of
o. a. Connect link assembly quick- coupling are seated in holes in arm (view D).
disconnect clamp to stowage hanger. m. Place storage hanger in stowage
a. Place CUPOLA POWER switch clip on ceiling of cupola.
in OFF position. n. Carefully slide passive elbow into
b. Place headrests in the up position, daylight body assembly. Press upward and
c Loosen wing nuts on head assembly engage front and rear latches (view B).
to limit that allows wings to be positioned o. Depress machine gun to horizontal
vertically. position. |

15-12 Change 1
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

p. Attach lamp housing of light source follows (Fig. 15-7.3): Insert spring into
control to side of daylight body assembly recessed holes, one end in clamp and one end
(view A). Connect wire from instrument in lever. Aline lever hole with clamp hole,
light if desired. insert pin and secure with retaining ring.
q. Rotate headrests downward to (2) Screw clamp assembly (Fig. 15-
operating position. 7.2) on the left-hand thread end of stud and
r. Boresight caliber .50 machine gun finger tighten screw.
(TM 9-2350T253-10). (3) Screw rod on stud and finger
15-29. Service. Refer to purging (para 2-24). tighten screw.
(4) Screw nut down to shank of rod.
15-29.1 Removal of Periscope Link
(5) Screw rod end onto rod until
Assembly (Fig. 15-7.1).
pinhole in rod end and rod are alined. Secure
NOTE rod end to rod with pin. Tighten nut firmly
Elevate caliber .50 machine gun
against rod end.
to limit.
a. Compress quick-disconnect clamp 115-29.3 Installation of Periscope Link
and disconnect periscope link assembly Assembly (Fig. 15-7.1).
from periscope elevation arm.
b. Remove nut and washer securing a. Install spacer and cradle end of
cradle end of periscope link assembly on periscope link assembly on cradle and screw-
cradle and screwjace mounting screw. jack mounting screw and secure with washer
c. Remove periscope link assembly and nut.
and spacer from mounting screw. b. Compress quick-disconnect clamp
and connect periscope link assembly to peris
15-29.2 Repair of Periscope Link Assembly. cope elevation adjusting arm assembly.

a. Disassembly (Fig. 15-7.2). CAUTION

(1) Remove pin, rod end, and nut Periscope link assembly must be
from rod. disconnected from periscope and
(2) Cut lockwire and remove. attached to stowage hanger
(3) Loosen screw and lockwasher of whenever the caliber .50
rod and unscrew rod from stud. machinegun is removed from
(4) Loosen screw of clamp cradle, installed in cradle, or
assembly and unscrew clamp assembly from disassembled while in cradle.
stud. Damage and misalinement of
(5) Remove retaining ring and pin linkage assembly may result.
of clamp assembly (Fig. 15-7.3).
c. Boresight caliber .50 machine gun
b. Inspection (Fig. 15-7.2).
(1) Check threads on rod and stud (TM 9-2350-253-10).
d. If boresight is successfully accom
for damage and replace if necessary.
plished, adjustment of periscope link
(2) Check components for damage,
assembly is not necessary.
replace if necessary.
e. If boresight cannot be accomplished,
then adjustment of periscope link assembly is
c. Assembly.
(1) Assemble clamp assembly as necessary.

Change 1 15-12.1
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 15-7.1. Removal and installation of periscope link assembly.

15-12.2 Change 1
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

LEFT-HAND
THREAD

PIN
ARR80-2028 |

Figure 15-7.2 Repair of periscope link assembly.

CLAMP

PIN
CLAMP
HOLE
LEVER

RETAINING
RING
LEVER
HOLE
ARR80-2029 |

Figure 15-7.3 Repair of periscope clamp assembly.

Change 1 15-12.3
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

15-29.4 Adjustment of Periscope Link e". Remove lockwire from stud in

Assembly. center of link assembly and loosen two
clamping screws (Fig. 15-7.4).
a. Remove lockwire and seal from f. Sight through periscope daylight
screw (Fig. 15-7.1). body and turn stud (Fig. 15-7.4) clockwise or
b. Loosen screw and aline the zeros on counterclockwise until boresight cross of
the eccentric and ring of the double reticle is on target aiming point (Fig. 15-7.5).
eccentric with the scribe line (Fig. 15-7.1). g. Tighten two clamping screws and
c. Tighten screw and install lockwire install lockwire to link and stud (Fig. 15-7.4).
and seal (Fig. 15-7.1). h. Complete boresighting procedure
d. Set the periscope reticle at center (TM 9-2350-253-10).
of travel and slip the scales on the elevation
and deflection boresight knobs to the mean
position of 4 (Fig. 15-7.1).

XRR80-2022 |

Figure 15-7.4. Adjustment of periscope link assembly.

15-12.4 Change 1
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 15-7.5. Periscope reticle.

Section VIII. MAINTENANCE OF COMMANDER'S M119 PERISCOPE MOUNT

15-30. Description. surface for light control source 8619159.

The light source control serves as a light
The M119 periscope mount is used to hold source for the etched reticle in the left
the head assembly of the commander's M36E1 eyepiece assembly of the M36E1 periscope.
periscope. The mount provides two headrests The control is mounted on the periscope
for periscope operation and a mounting mount M119. It contains a lamp that is

Change 1 15-12.5/(15-12.6 blank)

v
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 15-8. Removal, inspection, repair, and installation of commander's periscope headrests
an MU9 mount.

K Figure 15-9. Adjustment of gunner's periscope mount M118E1 or commander's periscope mount
I Ml 19 shield operating handle.

15-13
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

installed in a housing designed for insertion b. Disconnect light source control

into the dovetail slots located adjacent to the electrical leads.
reticle window of the eyepiece assembly. A c. Support light source control and
rheostat varies the intensity of the light and remove two screws, lockwashers, and cable
also serves as an on/off control for the light. clamp.

15-31. Removal of Headrest (Fig 15-8). 15-36. Installation of Light Source Control
(Fig 15-10).
a. , Loosen two setscrews which lock
the pivot screws of the right or left headrest a. Position light source control on right
assembly (View A). side of Ml 19 periscope mount and secure in
b. Remove both inner and outer pivot place with two screws. Tighten to 19-21 lb-in
screws and washers from either assembly and (1.9-2.1 N.m).
remove the assembly (view B). b. Connect electrical leads of vehicle
wiring to electrical leads on light source
1 15-32. Inspection and Repair of Headrest
control.
(Fig 15-8).
c. Attach grounding lug of light source
Inspect headrest, bracket adjusting knobs, control to cupola by means of an adjacent
and locking levers for damage, deformities, mounting screw fastening a wire clamp to the
and wear (view B). Maintenance of the M119 cupola ceiling.
periscope mount is limited to replacement of
the commander's periscope headrests.

| 15-33. Installation of Headrest (Fig 15-8).

a. Position headrest assembly and secure

in place with flat washers and pivot screws
(view B).
b. Tighten two setscrews to lock pivot
screws in position (view A).

15-34. Adjustment of Ballistic Shield

Operating Handle.

The following procedures apply to both

the commander's and the gunner's periscope
ballistic mount shield operating handle.
a. Place shield operating handle in the
closed position (view A, fig 15-9).
b. Adjust nuts on connecting shaft
until handle lock plunger engages in both the
fully open and fully closed positions of the
shield. Tighten nuts. Check that when
handle is in the upper locked detent position AR702718
the shield does not obstruct the field of
vision.

15-35. Removal of Light Source Control (Fig Figure 15-10. Removal and installation of light
15-10). source control from Ml 19
commander's periscope mount.
a. Remove screw securing light source
control grounding lug and cable clamp to
cupola ceiling.

15-14 Change 1
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section IX. MAINTENANCE OF GUNNER'S M35E1 PERISCOPE

(On Tanks Equipped with M35E1 Periscope)
15-37. Description. lever on daylight filter until lever is pointing
to rear of turret.
The M35E1 periscope is used in CAUTION
conjunction with the M118E1 mount and Ensure passive elbow is not
reticle projector and is part of the primary exposed to direct sunlight or
direct fire control system. The periscope is a intensified light as damage can
monocular instrument consisting of three result.
separate and independently colli mated units: CAUTION
the head assembly, body assembly, and elbow Do not drop passive elbow.
assembly. It contains a unity power optical Support passive elbow with one
system for wide angle, close in viewing and hand on bottom and release
two eight power systems for far away latches with other hand.
viewing. One eight power system is used for Passive elbow weighs
daylight viewing and the other for night approximately 24 pounds.
viewing. The periscope assembly weighs b. Support passive elbow and release
approximately 52 pounds. front and rear latches securing passive elbow
a. Head assembly. The head assembly in head assembly.
is fastened to the M118E1 periscope mount c. Carefully lower passive elbow from
and has provisions for attaching the body housing in head assembly.
assembly and the elbow assembly. It also d. Release ballistics drive shaft coupling
contains the unity power optical system by pulling back on latch. Release button on
which consists of a rotatable head mirror. periscope clamping lever and rotate clamping
The unity power system has 30 degree lever upward.
horizontal and 5 degree vertical field of view. CAUTION
The head assembly weighs approximately 24 Do not drop head assembly.
9 pounds. Support head assembly with one
b. Body assembly. The body assembly hand on bottom and release
is a monocular telescope that mounts in the latch with other hand. Head
left opening of the head assembly to provide assembly weighs approximately
an 8-power daylight viewing capability. The 25 pounds.
body assembly operates in conjunction with e. Support head assembly and pull
the reticle projector which provides boresight periscope release grip outward to limit. Head
capability and a projected reticle image. The assembly will release and be free to fall out
body assembly weighs approximately 5 of mount as grip is pulled.
pounds. f. Carefully slide head assembly out of
c. Elbow assembly. The elbow mount.
assembly is a monocular elbow telescope that g. While supporting head assembly and
mounts in the right opening of the head daylight body assembly, remove front and
assembly to provide an 8-power nighttime rear latch screws using a 9/64-inch socket
viewing capability. It amplifies visible light head screw key (item 8, table 1-1).
by means of an image intensifier so that h. Carefully withdraw daylight body
objects are visible without a searchlight. assembly from body housing in head
Since active illumination is not required, its assembly.
operation is undetectable. Power for the 13-39. mstallation.
elbow is supplied by vehicle power or from NOTE
the 3.2 volt M30 instrument light. The elbow Ensure optics and mounting
assembly weighs approximately 23 pounds. bosses are free of smudges,
paint, dirt, and debris, prior to
installing periscope.
15-38. Removal (Fig 15-11). a. Carefully slide daylight body
assembly into body assembly (view B). Press
a. Rotate headrests to upper limits. upward and secure front and rear latch
Disconnect wire from instrument light at screws using a 9/64-inch socket head screw
bottom of passive elbow. Rotate filter select key (item 8, table 1-1).
Change 2 15-15
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

a. l Inspect mount to insure that peri e. Rotate filter select lever on daylight
scope rails are clean and that the locking filter until lever is pointed to rear of turret.
bar springs out freely when the periscope f. Push latch on ballistics drive shaft
release grip is pulled and released. coupling forward until spring-loaded locking
b. Check that clamping lever on pin is engaged (view A).
periscope mount is rotated fully upward, g. Carefully slide passive elbow into
and that headrests are rotated to upper head assembly. Press upward and engage
limit; front and rear latches (view A).
c. Position head assembly in line with h. Rotate headrests downward to oper
mount and press head assembly into mount ating position. Connect wire from M30
until locking bar snaps indicating that head instrument light.
assembly is latched into mount. i. Boresight main gun (TM 9-2350-253-
c. l Shake the periscope side to side 10). If head assembly is replaced, perform
while pulling downward on the periscope to synchronization and aline ment check (para
assure that both periscope stops are seated 2-15).
on the locking bar. 15-40. Service.
d. Rotate clamping lever downward
a. Refer to purging (para 2-24).
until spring-loaded lock is engaged. Check
lock by attempting to rotate lever upward b. Refer to cleaning (para 4- 2b).
without depressing release (view A).

Figure 15-11. Removal and installation of periscope M35E1 (1 of 2).

15-16 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

AR7027I6

Figure 15-11. Removal and installation of Periscope M3SE1 (2 of 2).

15-17
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section X. MAINTENANCE OF GUNNER'S M118E1 PERISCOPE MOUNT

15-41. Description (Fig 15-12). 15-43. Inspection and Repair of Headrest.

The M118E1 periscope mount is used to a. Inspect headrest, for damage,

hold the head assembly of the M35E1 gunner's deformities, and wear.
periscope and provide a mounting surface for b. Replace defective parts as required.
the reticle projector. The mount has two
adjustable headrests and a ballistics shield 15-44. Installation of Headrest (Fig. 15-12).
which are used during operation of the »
periscope. Position headrest on slide and secure with
two screws and lockwashers.
15-42. Removal of Headrest (Fig. 15-12).
15-45. Adjustment of Shield Operating
Loosen and remove two screws and Handle.
lockwashers securing headrest to slide and
remove headrest. Refer to paragraph 15-34.

Figure 15-12. Removal, inspection, repair, and Installation of gunner's periscope headrests on
M118E1 mount.

15-18
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section XL MAINTENANCE OF M105D ARTICULATED TELESCOPE

15-46. Description. lock washers and remove eyepiece hanger
Articulated telescope M105D incorporates (view C).
an eight power optical system and is mounted 15-48. Service.
to the main gun mount. A hanger assembly Purge and charge replacement telescope
maintains the eyepiece relatively stationary before installation. Refer to paragraph 2-24
when the main gun is elevated or depressed. on use of purging kit (item 9, table 1-1), and |
Along with mount M114, the telescope is a dry nitrogen tank (item 12, table 1-1).
component of the secondary direct fire con 15-49. Installation (Fig 15-13).
trol system. The telescope reticle is illumi a. Position telescope through opening
nated by light source control 8619165-1. The of holder and into opening in gun shield (view
light source control contains a lamp that is D).
installed in a housing designed for insertion b. Aline pin on telescope with slot in
into the dovetail slots on the telescope. A holder (view D).
rheostat varies the illumination of the lamp. c. Ensure telescope rear clamping
Instrument light M50 may be used as a surface (gimbal) is seated properly in holder
battery powered source of reticle illumina (view D). Proper seating is accomplished
tion for emergency conditions. Two separate when locating pin of telescope is positioned in
reticle patterns provide aiming data for slot of holder. Telescope rear clamping
ammunition used with the M60A3 tank. The surface will rest in spherical clamping
desired pattern can be set into the telescope surfaces of holder.
optical line of sight with the selector lever. d. If telescope hanger is being
A filter box containing six filters is mounted replaced, secure eyepiece hanger to telescope
on the M114 mount. Three of the filters are with four screws and lock washers (view C).
for normal telescope operation. The remain Install partial hanger on quick-disconnect pin
ing three green filters are for eye protection in eyepiece hanger (view C). Tighten to 26-
during lasing operations. A green filter is 34 lb-ft (35-46 N-m).
used on the telescope, M35E1 periscope, and e. Install lamp housing into dovetail
M36E1 periscope. slot on telescope (view B).
15-47. Removal (Fig 15-13). f. Tighten socket head screw on right
NOTE side of holder (view B). Screw must hold
A bolt and wedge, located approx telescope firmly to prevent movement due to
imately 16 inches inside gun vibration and gun firing shock, but loose
shield cover, hold telescope firm enough to permit telescope to move without
ly during vehicle operation and binding when boresight knobs are operated.
gun firing (outside of vehicle) g. Tighten ballistic shield strap (view
(view A). B)* CAUTION

a. Deleted. Torquing will cause damage to

b. Loosen strap on ballistics shield wedge assembly screw during
(view B). operations.
c. Loosen socket head screw on right h. Tighten wedge assembly screw
side of holder to allow holder to open (view to a snug fit only (view A).
B). NOTE
d. Disconnect lamp housing from Adjust wedge assembly to elimi
dovetail slot on telescope (view B). nate radial play in forward gimbal
NOTE of telescope, and yet allow tele
scope to be removed without loos
I If telescope cannot be removed
ening wedge assembly screw.
easily in step e, and feels like it is
held back at front gimbal, use i. Perform M105D telescope bore-
socket wrench to slightly loosen sight procedures (TM 9-2350-253-10).
bolt and wedge. 15-50. Removal of Headrest (Fig 15-14).
e. While supporting eyepiece hanger, a. Remove adjusting knob securing
press quick-disconnect pin plunger and slide headrest bracket to telescope and remove
partial hanger from pin (view C). Remove bracket with attached headrest. I
telescope from mount. If telescope is to be 6. Deleted. |
replaced, remove four screws and
Change 2 15_19
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

D
Figure 15-13. Removal and installation of articulated telescope M105D (1 of 2).

15-20
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

15-51. Installation of Headrest (Fig 15-14).

a. Deleted.
6. Position headrest bracket on
telescope and secure with adjusting knob.
15-52. Removal of Eyepiece Hanger Assembly
(Fig 15-13).
a. While holding eyepiece and eye
piece hanger, press quick-disconnect pin plun
ger and remove partial hanger from quick-
disconnect pin. Lower telescope eyepiece
and eyepiece hanger. Remove four screws
and lock washers and remove eyepiece hanger
(view C).
b. Remove two screws, lockwashers,
washers, and nuts securing partial hanger to
bracket (view C). Remove partial bracket.
c. Check for proper operation of quick
disconnect, freedom of movement, damaged or
broken parts. If eye piece hanger assembly is defec
tive return to higher maintenance.
15-53. Installation of Eyepiece Hanger As
sembly (Fig 15-13).
a. Aline partial hanger mounting holes
to bracket and secure with two screws,
lockwashers, washers, and nuts (view C).
Tighten to 24-32 lb-ft (33-43 N-m).
b. Secure telescope eyepiece to eye
piece hanger using four screws and lock
washers. Lift telescope eyepiece and eye
piece hanger and install partial hanger on
quick-disconnect pin (view C).
15-54. Removal of Filter Box (Fig 15-15).
a. Remove two screws, washers, and
lockwashers securing filter box mounting bra
cket to Ml 14 telescope mount. Remove
bracket and filter box.
b. Remove three screws, lock
washers, and washers holding filter box to
bracket.
15-55. Installation of Filter Box (Fig 15-15).
a. Position filter box on mounting
bracket and secure with three screws,
lockwashers, and washers.
b. Position bracket on M114 telescope
mount and secure with two screws, washers,
and lockwashers. Tighten screws to 45-60 lb-
ft (61-81 N«m).
G 15-56. Removal of Mount Ml 14 (Fig 15-16).
a. Remove articulated telescope
Figure 15-13. Removal and installation of M105D (para 15-47) and filter box (para 15-
articulated telescope M105D (2 of 2). 54).

Change 2 15-21
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 15-14. Removal and installation of M105D articulated telescope headrest.

MOUNTING
BRACKET

>V7i

Figure 15- IS. Removal and installation of M105D articulated telescope filter box.

b. Remove light source control (para til telescope Ml 14 mount is moved clear of the
15-35) . mounting boss and locating pins on the combina
tion gun mount (view B).
c. Remove three screws and CAUTION
lockwashers that secure telescope M114 Exercise care to avoid bending
mount to mounting surface of main gun the dowel pins during removal
mount (view A). procedure
e. Remove light source control
d. Insert two jack screws and tighten
8619159 (para 15-35). •
alternately while supporting Ml 14 mount, un

15-22 Change 2
Figure 15-18, Removal and installation of articulated telescope mount Ml 14.
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 15-17. Removal and installation of M105D articulated telescope light source controh

15-57. Installation of Mount M114 (Fig 15-16). a. Place MASTER BATTERY switch
in OFF position.
a. Aline telescope mount Ml 14 on the b. Remove lamp assembly from
dovetail slot on M105 telescope.
locating pins (view B).
b. Install three bottom screws and c. Disconnect electrical cable connector
and ground lead from gun mount.
lockwashers that secure mount to mounting
surface. Tighten with fingers (view A). d. Support light source control and
c. Position filter box on telescope remove two screws and washers that secure clamp
mount and secure with two upper screws, and light source control to telescope mount Ml 14.
lockwashers, and flat washers. Tighten with
fingers.
d. Alternately tighten five screws to 15-59. Installation of Light Source Control
(Fig 15-17).
draw mount evenly to mounting surface (view
A). a. Position light source control and clamp
e. Tighten screws to 43-63 lb-ft (58- on right side of telescope mount Ml 14. Secure
85 N m). with two screws and washers. Tighten to 20 lb-in
f. Install light source control (para 15-59). (3 N m).
g- Install articulated telescope M105D b. Connect electrical cable connector to
(para 15-49). vehicle lead and attach ground lead to gun mount.
c. Insert lamp assembly into dovetail
slot on M 10 5 telescope, or slot on light source
15-58. Removal of Light Source (Fig 15-17). control as desired.

15-24
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section XII. MAINTENANCE OF M10A3 BALLISTICS DRIVE AND BOOT

15-60. Description (Fig 15-18). the rangefinder. A temperature compensat

ing rod with a rod mounting bracket is bolted
The ballistics drive mechanically connects to a pad inside the turret wall. The drive is
the gunner's periscope and rangefinder to the also equipped with a superelevation box
gun mount, so they remain synchronized with assembly and level vial. The ballistics drive
the main gun as it is moved in elevation or boot is a rubber device designed to prevent
depression. Superelevation is also introduced contamination of the periscope coupling.
into the drive from the computer output unit. Two clamps secure the boot to the adapter.
In addition, the drive acts to change the The entire ballistics drive assembly weighs
lines-of-sight of the rangefinder and gunner's approximately 150 pounds.
periscopes in accordance with superelevation
data transmitted to the drive from the 15-61. Inspection.
computer output unit. When the line of sight
is again brought on target, the main gun is a. Check the drive for completeness. See
then elevated above the line of sight by the that all hardware is present and secure.
correct number of mils of superelevation. Check that level assembly is secure and not
The drive is bolted to pads on the turret damaged.
roof, and is equipped with an 11-inch trunnion b. Check the exterior surface of materiel
connecting link assembly for connection to and components for dents, bent or broken
the gun trunnion and a 5-inch rangefinder parts, missing parts, chipped or loose paint,
connecting link assembly for connection to moisture, and corrosion.

TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATING LINK SUPERELEVATION
BOX ASSY.

BOOT

COUPLING TO
GUNNER'S
PERISCOPE

11 -INCH ARM (FINE) SUPERELEVATION

ADJUSTMENT INPUT FROM
ECCENTRICS BALLISTICS
COMPUTER
OUTPUT UNIT

ELEVATION INPUT
FROM GUN MOUNT

LINK TO 5-INCH ARM (FINE)

RANGEFINDER ADJUSTMENT
ECCENTRICS
AR702725
Figure 15-18. M 10 A3 ballistics drive.

15-25
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

c. Inspect all rubber boots for tears or f. Check that cross-shaft assembly
rot. Boots should be flexible, not hard. rotates freely in the left and right support
d. Ensure that the qualification plate assemblies, and that the superelevation box
markings are legible. rotates freely about the cross-shaft when the
e. Check all painted surfaces for bare input drive shaft is turned. Signs of binding
spots, deep scratches that penetrate to the or rough operation indicate need for repair.
metal surface, or loose paint which could lead
to corrosion.

TOOL & CLAMP INTERFACE

Figure 15-19. Removal and installation of M10A3 ballistics drive boot.

15-26
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

1 5-62. Adjustment and Test. c. Work boot over periscope coupling

and remove boot.
The ballistic drive is tested and adjusted using
the synchronization and alinement procedure when
15-64. Inspection of Boot.
defects are suspected (para 2-15). Perform synchro
nization and alinement and backlash checks (paras Inspect area covered by rubber boot for
2-15 thru 2-18).The drive should function smoothly dirt or contamination. Clean and grease
and evenly over the entire operating range. Any (item 14, App. C) if necessary.
signs of sticking or binding, erratic operation, or
excessive backlash indicates an unserviceable ballis
15-65. Installation of Boot (Fig 15-19).
tics drive. Notify support maintenance.
a. Work boot over gunner's periscope
15-63. Removal of Boot (Fig 15-19).
coupling and position on adapter.
a. Remove gunner's periscope (para b. Secure boot with two clamps using
15-38 or TTS gunner's display (para 15-111). clamp removal and installation tool (13, table 1-1).
b. Remove two clamps securing boot Do not overtighten.
to adapter using clamp removal and installa
tion tool (13, table 1-1). c. Install gunner's periscope or TTS.

Section XIII. MAINTENANCE OF AZIMUTH INDICATOR M28E2

15-66. Description. scales graduated in mils, the position of the

main gun in relation to a given point. The
The azimuth indicator M28E2 is mounted azimuth and micrometer scales are fixed
on the right side of the turret with gears in while the gunner's aid may be rotated to any
mesh with the turret ring gear. It consists of position. The azimuth pointer and micro-
a housing, bracket, micrometer scale, mic- meter pointer can be rotated by means of the
rometer pointer, azimuth scale, azimuth resetter knob. The directional pointer is
pointer, directional pointer, gunner's aid dial, zeroed in relation to the longitudinal axis of
resetter knob and illumination lamps. The the tank at installation,
indicator is used to indicate, by means of the

CAP SCREW (4)

LOCKWASHER (4)
figure 15-20. Removal and installation of azimuth indicator, M28E2:

Change 5 15-27
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

15-67. Removal (Fig 15-20). e. Tighten hexagon nut in position and

WARMING retest.
Be sure thai hydraulic system is
15-70. Accuracy Test.
relieved of pressure before
To test the accuracy of the azimuth
attempting to remove azimuth
indicator and bracket. indicator, proceed as follows:
a. Look through eyepiece of gunner's
O.a. Perform zero pressure check (para periscope and lay the reticle aiming cross on a
2-10a). definite aiming point.
a. Disconnect electrical connec NOTE
tor on azimuth indicator. Either the rangefinder or
b. Remove capscrews and lock- telescope may be used instead
washers securing azimuth indicator and of gunner's periscope.
bracket (if present) to the turret and b. Depress resetter knob of azimuth
remove azimuth indicator. indicator and rotate knob until micrometer
15-68. Installation. and azimuth pointers are at zero.
a. Turn drive gear until directional c. Being careful not to overtravel,
pointer is at 32. traverse turret manually through a complete
b. Rotate turret until gun is alined circle until periscope reticle aiming cross is
with gun travel lock. Lock gun in lock laid on original aiming point.
position. d. Ensure azimuth indicator
c. Apply light coat of grease (item 15, micrometer and azimuth pointers are at zero.
Appendix C) to azimuth indicator drive gear. If both pointers are not at zero (+ 0.5 mils),
d. Position azimuth indicator in replace azimuth indicator.
turret and mesh drive gear with turret ring 15-71. Slippage Test.
gear. To check for slippage of the azimuth
e. Secure azimuth indicator and indicator, proceed as follows:
bracket with capscrews and lockwashers. a. Perform steps (a) and (b) of para
Tighten to 80-110 lb-ft (108-149 N«m). graph 15-69. Traverse the turret rapidly in
f- Connect electrical connector to power and stop suddenly. Repeat this operation
azimuth indicator. two or more times in the same direction. Turn
15-69. Backlash Adjustment. off turret power.
a. Traverse the gun and sight on a b. Manually traverse turret in
definite point. opposite direction until periscope reticle
b. Set the micrometer pointer and aiming cross is laid on original aiming point.
azimuth pointer on zero. c. Ensure azimuth indicator
c. Manually traverse the gun in direc micrometer and azimuth pointers are at zero.
tion opposite to direction of traversing in If both pointers are not at zero (+ 0.5 mils),
step (a). replace azimuth indicator.
d. To remove excessive backlash, d. If both pointers indicate zero,
loosen hexagon nut (fig 15-20). Turn adjus repeat steps (a) through (c) in opposite
ting screw until 0.5 mil or less is obtained. direction.

Section XIV. MAINTENANCE OF M21 BALLISTICS COMPUTER SYSTEM

15-72. Description. system cables. The commander's and gunner's

ammo select units are identical and inter
The M21 computer system (fig 15-1) is changeable. All components are mounted
composed of a computer unit, gunner's con within the turret except the crosswind sensor
trol unit, gunner's and commander's ammo mast and crosswind sensor probe which are
select units, rate tachometer, cant angle mounted on the exterior surface of the tank.
sensor, crosswind sensor mast, EMI filter, All internally mounted units are sealed to
crosswind sensor probe, output unit, and three permit pressurization. Utilizing target range,

15-28 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

ammunition selection, gun trunnion cant, al gun. As the turret turns, a voltage generator
titude air temperature, lateral target motion, in the tachometer produces a voltage pro
gun tube wear and crosswind, the M21 com portional to the turret speed. This voltage is
puter system is able to determine and control applied to the computer unit where it is
the amount of superelevation and deflection summed with other correction factors to pro
correction applied to the gunner's periscope vide a net azimuth correction.
and laser range finder. Superelevation and
deflection requirements are computed auto e. Cant Unit. The cant unit is mounted
matically and are based on the above inputs. in the center of the turret roof and provides
a correction signal to the computer to com
a. Computer Unit. The computer unit of pensate for the slant of the tank when not on
the ballistics computer system performs all level ground. Output of the unit, when
calculations necessary to provide a single net selected by the STATIONARY/MOVING
superelevation and azimuth correction for switch of either ammo select unit, is applied
the primary direct fire control system. The to the computer unit as a factor for cor
unit mounts on the turret wall below the rection. The cant unit output is applied when
cupola and receives fire control data inputs the tank is in the stationary mode only.
from the gunner's control unit, cant unit, f. Cross-wind Sensor Mast and EMI Filter
ammo select units, rate tachometer, and lead Connector. The crosswind sensor mast .
lock and stabilization system. It then alge is mounted externally on the left rear portion
braically sums the fire control data from all of the turret and provides a mechanical
sources. The sum of all elevation data is support for the crosswind sensor probe.
applied to the output unit. The sum of all Signals generated in the probe pass through
azimuth data is applied to the reticle pro the center of the mast and are applied, via
jector and laser rangefinder azimuth mirror. the EMI filter, to the computer unit.
g. Crosswind Sensor Probe. The
b. Gunner's Control Unit. The gunner's
crosswind sensor probe is the hot wire
control unit is the gunner's major access to
anemometer type that measures the rate of
operation of the ballistics computer system.
neat loss to the surrounding air. Dual
With the unit's controls, the gunner can lock
out all external corrections to perform a elements are used to determine direction of
the wind. The probe mounts on top of the
boresight, select manual or laser range fin
ding, correct for gun tube wear, air tempera crosswind sensor mast. Signals to and from
the probe are routed through the sensor mast.
ture and altitude, and make individual correc
tions in elevation and azimuth for each type h. Crosswind Sensor EMI Filter. The EMI
of ammo in use. The unit also provides a filter is housed below the crosswind sensor
system self test capability. Seldom used mast and filters electromagnetic radiation, if
controls are protected behind a hinged cover. present, from the electrical wires of the
crosswind sensor system.
c. Ammo Select Units. The commander's
and gunner's ammo select units are identical i. Output unit. The output unit provides
and connected electrically in parallel by the superelevation corrections by mechanical
system cables. Operation is such that the rotation of its two output shafts. One shaft
last ammo select pushbutton depressed delivers mechnical input to the ballistics
controls the input to the computer. The last drive for superelevation correction of the
selection is indicated on both units as an gunner's periscope. The other shaft delivers
indicator that is brighter than the remaining elevation corrections to the main gun super
three. Thus, both the commander and gunner elevation actuator of the hydraulic system.
can tell the ammo selected at a glance. A counter installed on the front surface reads
superelevation directly in mils.
d. Rate Tachometer. The rate tach j. Reticle Projector Unit. The reticle
ometer unit provides a voltage to the com projector is associated with the M21
puter unit to indicate the angular velocity of ballistics computer system but is not a part
the tank turret with respect to the hull. The of the system. From its location on the
rate tachometer is mounted to the inner race M118E1 mount, the reticle projector provides
of the turret bearing, to the left of the main the electrical power and optical functions

15-29
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

necessary for normal operation of the M35E1 gunner's control unit and the MASTER
periscope. It is a self-contained, sealed unit BATTERY switch are in the OFF position.
that projects the images of two different b. Disconnect the three system cable
reticle patterns into the visible light optical connectors from the computer unit
systems of the M35E1 periscope, one pattern connectors 1J1 through 1J3.
image into the eight-power system and one c. Remove four screws, washers, and
into the unit-power system. The reticle lock washers and remove the computer unit.
projector also automatically sets the lateral
position of the reticle pattern projected into 15-7 4.1ns tallation of Computer Unit (Fig 15-1
the eight-power optical system. The pattern and 15-21).
position is set according to the values of
a. Verify that the cable and unit connec
electrical inputs for deflection corrections
produced by the computer unit. Boresight tor pins are straight.
knobs for both visible light systems of the 6. Install computer unit and secure with
four screws, four flat washers, and four lockwash-
M35E1 periscope are located on the reticle
ers. Tighten to 86-124 lb-ft (117-168 N-m).
projector unit housing. A reticle illumination
control knob and a reticle lamp switch are CAUTION
also mounted on the housing. The gunner's display Use care when installing cable.
of the TTS also provides these same functions. Connector pins are bent easily.
k. Computer System Cables. 3W1, 3W2, c. Connect the three system cable con
and 3W3 provide the system electrical nectors to the computer unit connectors 1J1
interface. The system cables are watertight through 1J3. Refer to fig 15-21 for proper
and secured to the tank interior. connections.
d. Perform computer self-test (para 2-20) •
15-73. Removal of Computer Unit (Fig 15-
21).
e. Perform Ballistic Computer System
a. Verify that the POWER switch on the Solution Tests (para 2-22a, d-k) and the
lead circuit test (para 2-23).

Figure 15-21. Removal and installation of computer unit.

15-30 Change 5
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

15-75. Removal of Gunner's Control (NAS 1081-C04-D3P). Install LAMP/-

Unit (View A, Fig 15-22). NORMAL/SYSTEM knob on shaft and secure
with two setscrews (one each of NAS 1081-
a. Verify that the POWER switch on the C08-D12P and NAS 1081-C08-D3P).
gunner's control unit and the MASTER
15-78. Removal of Ammo Select Units (Fig
BATTERY switch are in the OFF position.
15-23).
b. Record all settings of the controls.
c. Disconnect one system cable con The commander's and gunner's ammo
nector and one tank power cable connector select units are removed and repaired in
from the gunner's control unit connectors 2J1 identical -manner. To remove either ammo
and 2J2. select unit, proceed as follows:
d. Remove four screws and four lockwa- a. Verify that the POWER switch on
shers and remove the gunner's control unit. the gunner's control unit and the MASTER
BATTERY switch are in the OFF position.
15-76. Installation of Gunner's Control Unit b. Disconnect the system cable
(Fig 15-22). connector from connector 3J1 of ammo
a. Install gunner's control unit and secure select unit.
with four screws and four lockwashers. c. Remove four screws and lock-
b. Be sure that the cable and unit con washers securing ammo select unit and
nector pins are straight. remove unit.
CAUTION 15-79. Installation of Ammo Select Units
(Fig 15-23).
Use care when installing cable.
Connector pins are bent easily. a. Install ammo select unit and secure
c. Connect one system cable connector with four screws and four lockwashers.
and one tank power cable connector to the b. Connect system cable connector to
gunner's control unit connectors 2J1 and 2J2. connector 3J1 of ammo select unit.
Refer to Fig 15-22 for proper connections. c. Perform computer self-test (para
d. Set controls to the indications recor 2-20).
ded in removal step (b). 15-80. Repair of Ammo Select Unit.
e. Perform computer self-test (para
2-20). Repair of the ammo select unit is
limited to replacement of defective cap,
15-77. Repair of Gunner's Control Unit.
lens, or lamp (TM 9-2350-253-10).
Repair of the gunner's control unit is
15-81. Ammo Select Unit Checkout Pro
limited to replacement of defective cap lens
or lamps and LAMP/NORMAL/SYSTEM, cedure (Fig 15-23).
LIGHTS, APDS or HEAT knobs.
a. Repair of defective cap lens or lamp a. Set MASTER BATTERY switch to
(view B. fig 15-22). OFF.
(1) Unscrew and remove cap b. Remove test cable W42 from cable
assembly. test set (CTS).
(2) Grasp flange at base of lamp and c. Disconnect system cable from con
remove lamp from cap. nector 3J1 of ammunition select unit to be
(3) Install replacement lens cap and tested (view A, fig 15-23).
lamp as required. di Connect test cable connector
b. Repair of LAMP/NORMAL/SYSTEM, W42P1 to connector 3J1 on ASU (view B, fig
LIGHTS, APDS or HEAT knobs (view C, fig 15-23).
15-22). e. Remove tank power cable connector
(1) Loosen two setscrews and remove 1W2P13 from Gunner's Control Unit con
knob. nector 2J2, and connect 1W2P13 to test cable
(2) Remove and discard two set- connector W42P2 (view B, fig 15-23).
screws supplied with knob. f. Turn MASTER BATTERY switch
(3) Install LIGHTS, APDS or HEAT ON.
knob on shaft and secure with two setscrews g. Operate the bright/dim control on

Change 2 15-31
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

the ammo select unit and verify that the four does not.
ammo select indicators can be illuminated. f. Operate the moving/stationary
Replace lamp if an indicator does not illumi toggle switch on the ASU and verify that the
nate. Replace ammo select unit if indicator MOVING and STATIONARY indicators illumi
still does not illuminate. nate alternately. Replace lamp if an indi
h. Press ammo indicators one at a cator does not illuminate. Replace ammo
time, and verify that the pressed indicator select unit if indicator still does not illumi
brightens. Replace ammo select unit if it nate.

GUNNER'S
CONTROL
UNIT

LENS CAP

SET SCREW (2)

KNOB

Figure 15-22. Removal, installation, and repair of gunner's control unit.

15-32 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

A (GUNNER'S AMMO SELECT UNIT

IS IDENTICAL)

TURRET
POWER
CABLE
1W2 COMMANDER'S
OR GUNNER'S
AMMO SELECT
UNIT

3J1
PI

PI 3 P2
W42

2J2
GUNNER'S
CONTROL

AR702730
Figure 15-23. Removal, installation, and checkout of ammo select unit.

15-33
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

c. Perform computer system lead circuits

test (para 2-23).

15-84. Removal of Cant Unit (Fig 15-25).

a. Verify that the POWER switch on the

gunner's control unit and the MASTER BAT
TERY switch are in the OFF position.
6. Disconnect the system cable connector
from 6J1 of the cant unit.
c. Remove three nuts and three lock
washers, and take down cant unit from tank
turret roof.

15-85. Installation of Cant Unit (Fig 15-25).

a. Position cant unit on tank turret roof.

Secure with three nuts and three lockwashers.
Tighten to 29-37 lb-in (3.3-4.18 N.m).
b. Connect the system cable connector to
connector 6J1 of the cant unit.
Figure 15-24. Removal and installation of c. Perform computer self-test (para 2-20). |
rate tachometer unit.

j. Turn MASTER BATTERY switch OFF. 15-86. Removal of Crosswind Sensor Mast and
Disconnect test cable W42 (view B, fig 15-23) EMI Filter Connector.
and stow in CTS cover. Reconnect system
cable to ASU (view A, fig 15-23), and connect cu Verify that POWER switch on the
tank power cable to gunner's control unit gunner's control unit and MASTER BATTERY
(view B, fig 15-23). switch are in OFF position.

15-82. Removal of Rate Tachometer (Fig 15-

24).

a. Verify that the POWER switch on the

gunner's control unit and the MASTER BAT
TERY switch are in the OFF position.
b. Disconnect the system cable connector
from connector 5J1 of the rate tachometer
unit.
c. Remove four screws, lockwashers, and flat
washers, and remove the rate tachometer
unit, drawing it away from the ring gear (an
integral part of the outer race of the hull-
turret bearing).

15-83. Installation of Rate Tachometer.

a. Aline the gears of the rate tachometer

unit with the ring gear of the outer race of
the hull-turret bearing, and secure the unit
with four screws, four washers, and four Figure 15-25. Removal and installation
lockwashers. Tighten to 80-100 lb-ft (108-
of cant unit.
136 N.m).
b. Connect the system cable connector to
connector 5J1 of the rate tachometer unit.

15-34 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CROSSWIND
SENSOR
PROBE

CROSSWINDI
SENSOR
MAST

EMI FILTER AND

EMI FILTER
CONNECTOR 8JI
(HIDDEN) SCREW (3)
CJSI LOCKWASHER (3)

Figure 15-26. Removal and installation of crosswind sensor mast, and EMI filter connector.

b. Remove three screws and lockwashers, d. Perform wind sensor test (TM 9-
securing the crosswind sensor mast to the 2350-253-10).
turret. Remove crosswind sensor mast (fig
15-26). 15-88. Removal of Crosswind Sensor Probe
c. Disconnect connector 8J1 on crosswind (Fig 15-27).
sensor mast from EMI filter connector (fig
CAUTION
15-27).
Inside surface of cap must
d. Disconnect EMI filter connector from
connector P2 of electrical harness system be clean and dry before
removing probe.
cable 3W2.
CAUTION
15-87. Installation of Crosswind Sensor Mast Keep electrical connectors
and EMI Filter Connector on probe and mast clean
CAUTION and dry. Shield connectors
Crosswind sensor must face with body when removing
correctly on vehicle or false probe in rain:
reading will result.
CAUTION
NOTE Do not remove probe while
Arrow on top of mast cup must ballistic computer POWER
point toward front of turret. is ON. Sensor can be
a. Connect EMI filter connector to con damaged.
nector P2 of electrical harness (system cable
3W2) and to connector 8J1 on crosswind a. Set POWER switch on gunner's
sensor mast (fig 15-27). control unit to OFF.
b. Position crosswind sensor mast on b. Unscrew connector outer ring and
turret and secure with three screws and remove probe from connector at end of
lockwashers (fig 15-26). Tighten to 55-75 mast.
Ib-ft (75-102 N.m). c. Make sure spring-loaded cap snaps
c. Perform computer self-test (para 2-20). over connector.

Change 2 15-35
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 15-27. Removal and installation of crosswind sensor EMI filter.

15-36 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

15-89. Cleaning of Crosswind Sensor Probe. Shield connectors with body

when installing probe in rain.
CAUTION Remove water droplets from
Handle probe carefully. Do connector cavities by blowing
not remove protective cage. or gently shaking if necessary
Do not brush the caged probe before installing probe.
elements.
CAUTION
a. Clean probe by gently agitating in Do not install sensor while
clean water or a mixture of water and ballistic computer POWER is
methanol (item 17.1, App. C). ON. Probe can be damaged.
b. If probe does not clean
satisfactorily soak probe elements overnight. NOTE
Do not soak the electrical connector. Key slot in connector and arrow
c. Remove water droplets from on top of mast cup must point
connector cavity by blowing or gently toward front of turret.
shaking. Wipe exterior of probe dry with a
clean rag. When time permits air dry probe a. Set POWER switch on gunner's
to remove remaining moisture. control unit to OFF.
d. Inspect probe for damage to probe b. Remove probe from stowage box
elements or electrical connector. and check for damages.
c. Open spring loaded cap and inspect
connector at end of mast for damage or
15-90. Installation of Crosswind Sensor water.
Probe (Fig 15-27). d. Connect probe to mast and hand
tighten connector outer ring.
CAUTION e. Perform computer self-test (para 2-
Keep electrical connectors 20), and wind sensor test (TM 9-2350-253-10).
on probe and mast clean and
dry.

Change 2 15-36.1
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

15-90.1 Removal of Cap Assembly From Wind 15-90.2 Installation of Cap Assembly on Wind
Sensor Mast (Fig. 15-27.1). Sensor Mast (Fig. 15-27.1).

a. Remove four screws, lockwashers, a. Install cap assembly on mast so that

and flat washers securing cap assembly to hinge is toward front of turret.
receptable connector. b. Install four flat washers, lock-
6. Remove cap assembly from mast. washers, and screws.

SCREW (4) CROSS WIND

SENSOR MAST

LOCK WAS HER (4)

HINGE FLATWASHER (4)

CAP ASSEMBLY

RECEPTACLE CONNECTOR

AMC 833169

Figure 15-27.1. Removal and installation of wind sensor mast cap assembly.

15-36.2 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

15-91. Removal of Crosswind Sensor EMI Fil a. Partially install one screw, lockwasher
ter (Fig 15-27). and flat washer in upper right mounting hole
(when facing rear of unit) of output unit, then
a. Remove three screws and lockwashers insert screw in slot in mounting bracket.
holding crosswind sensor mast to turret body. Ensure that lockwasher and flat washer are
on outside of mounting bracket (opposite side
6. Lift mast out of turret bringing with of output unit).
it EMI. filter (inside tube), and electrical
b. Position remaining holes in the unit
harness.
over holes in the bracket, and insert three
screws and three lockwashers. Tighten
c Disconnect electrical connector from screws securely.
EMI filter and remove tube and small P2
washer from filter. c. Rotate output shaft universal on unit
for a zero indication on counter (view B).
d. Disconnect EMI filter from crosswind
d. Rotate telescoping shaft of ballistics
sensor mast connector 8J1. drive on left side of gunner's station fully
counterclockwise to the stop. Aline qualifi
15-92. Installation of Crosswind Sensor EMI cation mark on shaft with mark on shaft.
Filter (Fig 15-27). Rotate shaft clockwise to the number of
turns stamped on qualifying plate (view A).
a. Connect EMI filter to crosswind sensor
e. Place end of telescoping shaft of the
mast. universal on the ballistics drive against
b. Position small tube washer and tube output unit (view B).
onto the EMI filter and connect electrical f. Install four screws and lockwashers
connector P2 to filter. through holes in the universal and into tapped
NOTE holes in telescoping shaft.
Arrow on top of crosswind sen g. If holes in the telescoping shaft and
sor probe must point toward those in the universal are out of alinement
front of turret. preventing insertion of attaching screws, one
c. Position tube and mast in place and <~ section of shaft assembly must be rotated
secure with three screws and lockwashers. slightly. Loosen rubber boot on the shaft by
Tighten screws to 55-75 lb-ft (75-102 N.m). loosening the self-locking clamp. Carefully
d. Perform computer self-test (para 2-20) and pull out the splined free end of the shaft,
wind sensor test (TM 9-2350-253-10). rotate as required, and reinstall. Recheck
the settings of the output unit and the
15-93. Removal of Output Unit (Fig 15-28.) qualification scribe lines and perform steps
(f) and (g).
a. Verify that POWER switch on the h. With the superelevation actuator
gunner's control unit and MASTER BATTERY flexible drive shaft connected to the super
switch are in OFF POSITION. elevation actuator, rotate square end drive of
6. Disconnect system cable connector shaft clockwise until stop is reached. Then
from connector 9J1 of the output unit. back off three turns. Manually rotate the
c. Remove four slotted-head screws and output shaft of the output unit in the
lockwashers from output shaft universal. direction which increases the mil indication
Disengage output shaft universal from of the output unit until a stop is reached
telescoping shaft (of ballistics drive). (approximately 85 mils). Connect flexible
d Unscrew coupling and disconnect drive shaft of superelevation actuator to
superelevation actuator flexible drive shaft output unit. The drive dog of the flexible
from output unit. shaft may have to be rotated slightly to mate
e. Loosen top left screw and remove with connnector on output unit. Secure with
remaining three screws and lockwashers. knurled nut and replace lockwire.
Slide output unit to right and remove unit by i. Connect system cable connector to
pulling outward. 9J1 of output unit.
/. Boresight the system as described in
15-94. Installation of Output Unit (Fig 15-28). TM 9-2350-253-10.

15-37
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 15-28. Removal and installation of output unit

15-38
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

| k. Perform computer self-test (para 2-20). (1) Computer unit connector 1J2 (color
coded red).
(2) Commander's ammo select unit
15-95. Removal of Reticle Projector Unit connector 3J1.
(Fig 15-29). (3) Gunner's ammo select unit
a. Remove M35E1 periscope 'para 15-38). connector 3J1.
b. Remove three screws, lockwashers, (4) Rate tachometer connector 5J1.
flatwashers and two electrical connectors. (5) EMI filter at base of crosswind
Remove reticle projector unit from periscope sensor mast connector 8J1.
mount. (6) Stabilization and lead-lock system
interface connector (1W3J).
15-96. Service and Repair of Reticle Projec e. Remove cable 3W3 from the following
tor Unit. unit connectors:
(1) Computer unit connector 1J3 (color
Repair is limited to replacement of knobs, coded green).
receptacle assemblies, lamps, and the purging (2) Output unit connector 9J1.
valve and components (para 2-24). (3) Reticle projector connectors 12J1
and 12J3.
15-97. Installation of Reticle Projector Unit (4) Cant unit connector 6J1.
(Fig 15-29). (5) Laser system interface connector
a. Start right mounting screw (with lock- A31J6.
washer and washer) through reticle projector.
b. Position alinement key on reticle pro 15-100. Installation of Computer System
jector unit so that it fits alinement key slot Cables (Fig 15-30).
on the M35E1 periscope.
c. Secure reticle projector unit in place with a. Install system cable 3W2 to the
remaining screws, lockwashers, and washers. following connectors:
I Tighten to 160-180 lb-in (18-20 N-m). (1) Computer unit connector 1J2 (color
d. Connect system cables to reticle pro coded red).
jector unit connectors 12J1 and 12J3. (2) Commander's ammo select unit con
e. Install periscope M35E1 (para 15-39). nector 3J1.
Perform the boresight and illumination
adjustments on the reticle projector unit in
accordance with TM 9-2350-253-10.

15-98. Test of Reticle Projector Unit.

| Perform computer self-test (para 2-20).

15-99. Removal of Computer System Cables

(Fig 15-30).

a. Verify that POWER switch on gunner's

control unit and MASTER BATTERY switch
are in OFF position before disconnecting any
connectors.
b. Remove appropriate screws and cable
clamps.
c. Remove system cable 3W1 from gun
ner's control unit connector 2Jl and computer
unit connector 1J1 (color coded brown).
d Remove system cable 3W2 from the
following connectors:
Figure 15-29. Removal and installation of
reticle projector unit.

Change 2 15-39
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(3) Gunner's ammo select unit (3) Reticle projector connectors 12J1
connector 3J1. and 12J3.
(4) Rate tachometer connector 5J1. (4) Cant unit connector 6J1.
(5) Crosswind sensor mast and probe (5) Laser system interface connector
connector 8J1. A31J6.
(6) Stabilization and lead-lock system c. Install system cable 3W1 to gunner's
interface connector 1W3J1. control unit connector 2J1 and computer unit
b. Install cable 3W3 to the following unit connector 1J1 (color coded brown).
connectors: d. Secure cables with appropriate clamps
(1) Computer unit connector 1J3 (color and screws.
coded green). e. Perform computer self-test (para 2-20) and
(2) Output unit connector 9J1. computer system solution test (para 2-22).

COMPUTER
UNIT
I3A1)
+24VDC I 1 1J1 1J2 1J3 T335J
POWER ' 1 PI PI PI

1W2
SYSTEM
CABLE
GUNNER'S SYSTEM 3W3
CONTROL 2J2 | P13
CABLE P2 | 9J1 OUTPUT
UNIT 3W1 UNIT
(3A2) 2J1 I P2 I3A9I
SYSTEM
CABLE
3W2 j, p3 RETICLE GUNNER S
PROJECTOR DISPLAY
UNIT 2J3 I TTS
(PASSIVE) (3-\12>j <

COMMANDER'S
AMMO SELECT ■o- CANT
UNIT 3J1 | P3 1 H P4 |6J1 UNIT
(3A3CI (3A6)

GUNNER'S
AMMO SELECT 3J1 1 P4 |
UNIT STAB
I3A3G) SYSTEM
RATE 1W3
TACHOMETER 5J1 I P5
UNIT THUMB
(3A5) SWITCHES

_ T« (KdSSWINI) i'k«h&<wind
MX SKNSOK MAST SKNSOK
I 'MIT
-~ CI AMI I.IA13I
AR 702705

Figure 15-30. M21 ballistics computer system-cable interconnection diagram.

15-40 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2
Section XV. MAINTENANCE OF LASER | RANGEFINDER SYSTEM

15-101. Description. R/T to be bores ighted with the gunner's

periscope and main gun. In operation, azi
The laser rangefinder (LRF) system is part muth leads for moving targets are developed
of the primary direct fire control system. It by the ballistics computer system. This lead
consists of the receiver-transmitter (R/T), information is applied to an azimuth mirror in
electronics unit (EU), center bearing support the right end housing, shifting the mirror's
assembly, outer bearing support assembly, position. This makes the target image shift
and three cables (fig 15-2). Two additional left or right by the desired amount of lead.
cables (not part of the LRF system) interface When the sight is again laid on target, the gun
with the electronics unit. One cable (part of is positioned off target but with the proper
the XM21 computer system) controls the amount of target lead. This same lead
application of vehicle power to the LRF information is also applied to the reticle
system. The second cable (part of the tank projector attached to the gunner's periscope.
battery power system) provides the prime Thus, the gunner's periscope and R/T have the
power, to the LRF system. The in-turret same azimuth line of sight even when target
mounting of the two LRF system units is lead circuits are in operation. Output from
arranged to provide the tank crew convenient the R/T is a video pulse(s) developed from the
operation and permit maintenance access. light reflected from each target. These
Target sighting and range measurement oper pulses are applied to the electronics unit for
ations of the tank commander are con processing into target range data. The R/T is
centrated in a single unit, the receiver- matched to a specific electronics unit. Do
transmitter unit, so they can be simply and not attempt substitution of either unit to
rapidly accomplished. repair a defective system.
Laser operation is accomplished by aiming
NOTE
at the target and triggering a range
Matched EU and R/T must be
measurement. Ranging can be performed by
replaced as a unit.
the gunner or commander. The laser system
then responds by transmitting a pulse of light b. Electronics Unit. The electronics unit
to the target. Reflected light from all (EU) is a rectangular casting mounted below
targets intercepting laser beam is returned and to the left of the gunner's footrest. The
and detected by the laser receiver. Round- unit (1) supplies system voltages, (2) pro
trip time for this laser pulse transmission and cesses video pulses from the R/T into target
reception is converted by electronics unit range and reply data, (3) monitors system
into an accurate digital range to the selected operation using internal malfunction
target. If the range data satisfies the system detection circuitry, (4) Provides the interface
operational range and returns requirements, between the laser rangefinder system and
it is automatically fed to the XM21 computer ballistics computer system, and (5) provides
system. the circuitry for a self-test capability. Each
a. Receiver-Transmitter Unit. The re EU is matched to a specific R/T. Do not
ceiver-transmitter (R/T) of the laser range- attempt substitution of either unit to repair a
finder is the commander's sighting device for defective system.
the primary direct fire control system. It is NOTE
located in the right half of the turret and is Matched EU and R/T must be
supported from the turret ceiling and turret replaced as a unit. \
sidewall by two bearing assemblies. A mech
anical link connects it to the ballistics drive CAUTION
so that its elevation line of sight is the same The R/T unit weighs approxi
as the gunner's periscope. A control panel on mately 95 pounds. Removal and
the left side of the R/T contains all the installation will require three
controls required for ranging. A selective persons. Two persons are re
(6X or 12X) optical sighting system with quired inside the tank to re
reticle near the center of the unit is used for move unit from its bearings. A
sighting the target. Boresight controls third person is required outside
located on the right side of the unit allow the the tank to remove unit.
15-41
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

15-102. Removal of Receiver-Transmitter

Unit (Fig 15-31).

a. Verify the MASTER BATTERY switch,

gunner's control unit POWER ON-OFF switch,
and electronics unit EMER POWER switches
are set to OFF. Elevate the main gun to
maximum elevation.
CAUTION
Do not allow weight of R/T to
be supported by azimuth mirror
housing as it could be damaged.
A T-slot key on top of center
bearing support assists in sup
porting weight of R/T while
sliding unit to left. However,
R/T leaves T-slot track before
azimuth mirror housing is clear
of turret wall and must be
supported.
NOTE
Insure R/T is held in place
during bearing cap removal.
b. Remove the ballistics drive bearing
cap, fig 15-31, view B, by removing four
screws and washers and lower ballistics drive
assembly support from R/T. Reinstall
bearing cap on R/T with four lockwashers and
screws.
c. Disconnect three system cable con
nectors from R/T connectors A30J1 through
A30J3 (view A).
d Remove three screws and cable clamps
securing system cables to back of R/T.
c. Loosen locknut, view B, securing R/T
to center bearing support, using spanner
wrench (19, table 1-1). Do not rotate more than
one turn.
/. Remove four socket head caps crews
and lockwashers securing center bearing
support to top of turret (view B).
CAUTION
Do not allow weight of R/T to
be supported by azimuth mirror
housing as it could be damaged.
A T-slot key on top of center
bearing support assists in sup
porting weight of R/T while
sliding unit to the left.
However, R/T will leave T-slot
track before azimuth mirror
housing is clear of turret wall
and must be supported.
g. While supporting the weight of the
Figure 15-31. Removal and installation of R/T, apply steady pressure to move it to left
receiver-transmitter unit. until it clears the outboard bearing support
located on right wall of turret (view C).
15-42 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CAUTION
Rotate R/T unit as necessary to 15-103. Installation of Receiver-Trans
prevent unit from striking com mitter Unit (Fig 15-31).
mander's TTS display. NOTE
CAUTION Purge optical and transmitter cavity
If center bearing support does of R/T (para 2-24d).
not slide off the R/T shaft O.o. Install ESSLR device. |
easily, do not force it. Simply a. Protect azimuth mirror window by
push center bearing support back covering with protective cloth.
onto its original position on the b. Verify the MASTER BATTERY switch,
shaft, and then use crocus cloth gunner's control unit POWER ON-OFF switch,
or emery paper to dress shaft and laser EU EMER POWER switch are in
threads. OFF positions. Lower R/T through the
If you force bearing off when loader's hatch.
it is hanging up on the threads, it NOTE
usually comes apart, leaving If rope was installed to protect 5-
inner race on R/T shaft and inch arm during R/T removal pro
allowing ball bearings to fall cedure, remove in step c. below.
all over turret floor. c. Clean center bearing support shaft and
h. Remove center bearing support from
locknut threads. Verify there are no pieces
the R/T by removing locknut (view B). Do of nylon on locknut threads.
not loosen screws on the center bearing NOTE
support as this will affect R/T alinement. Ensure that center bearing
Replace locknut on R/T unit shaft after retaining screws face away
removing center bearing. from R/T assembly.
NOTE d. Slide center bearing support on the
Ensure that center bearing locknut R/T shaft and thread locknut (view B) on
taper points toward the R/T unit. shaft until locknut is even with end of shaft.
»• Remove R/T from turret by raising it CAUTION
through loader's hatch. Retain center bearing Do not loosen six screws on
support (view B) in the turret for R/T center bearing retainer. This
installation. will affect alinement of R/T
CAUTION axis with gun trunnion.
The ballistic drive link support e. Lift R/T in its normal position and
assembly will be damaged if link apply steady pressure to move the center
assembly is allowed to hang loose bearing into the T-slot while the right bearing
and the main gun is moved (view moves into turret bearing support.
B). If a replacement R/T will not CAUTION
be immediately installed, perform Do not allow weight of R/T to
steps j through n. be supported by azimuth mirror
Remove Eye Safe System Laser housing as it could be damaged.
Rangefinder (ESSLR) device and stow in a* A T-slot key on top of center
safe place. Do not forward with R/T. bearing support assists in sup
j. Secure center bearing support to porting weight of R/T while
turret roof with four screws and lockwashers sliding unit to the right.
(view B). f. Secure center bearing support to top of
k. Fully depress main gun while turret with four screws and lockwashers (view
supporting the link assembly. B). Tighten to 24-32 lb-ft (33-43 N.m).
L Tie a rope around 5-inch arm ballistics g. Remove center bearing locknut from
drive link assembly directly to rear of bearing shaft.
housing. h. Ensure locknut and shaft are free of
m. Loop the rope through the bearing bore grease, nylon particles, and dirt. Measure the
of the center bearing support and tie it so free running torque required to turn the
link assembly just clears the gunner's guard locknut on the shaft using spanner wrench
by no more than one-half inch. (19, table 1-1), a torque wrench and 3/8-1/2 inch
n. Fully elevate main gun while observing adapter. Do not tighten locknut. If torque reading
that link assembly moves freely without is below 1 lb-ft, replace locknut.
pulling the rope taut. Change 2 15-43
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

t. Tighten locknut to 35-40 lb-ft (47-54 headrest assembly (refer to fig 15-32).
N.m) above the free running torque. a. Removal of Lamp, Lens, or Seal.
j. Secure three system cables to back of (1) Remove pushbutton switch boot
R/T with three cable clamps and three seal by unscrewing seal counterclockwise.
screws. Do not tighten screws securely until (2) Remove switch lens by pulling lens
following step is complete. straight out from switch.
k. Aline key and keyway of connectors (3) Remove lamp from switch lens.
b. Installation of Lamp, Lens, or Seal.
and connect three system cable connectors to
unit connectors A30J1 through A30J3, view (1) Install new lamp in switch lens.
A. Do not twist or turn harness connectors. (2) Aline keyway on stem of switch
Hand tighten cable coupling nuts. lens with slot in switch and install switch lens
in switch.
L Remove four screws and lockwashers
(3) Apply a thin uniform film of silicone
securing ballistics drive bearing cap. Secure
lubricant, (item 11, App. C) to threads and inside
ballistic drive link assembly and bearing cap
of pushbutton switch boot seal and screw into
to R/T.
place.
m. Install matched electronic unit (para's
15-101 and 15-106. c. Removal of Headrest Assembly (Fig
n. Perform laser rangefinder self-test 15-32).
(para 2-21). (1) Release the headrest assembly sup
o. Perform LRF boresight and synchroni port bracket from securing latch by pulling
zation in accordance with paras 2-14 and outward on trigger knob.
2-15. (2) Pull headrest assembly forward to
15-104. Repair of Receiver Transmitter remove assembly from mounting.
Unit (Fig 15-32) d. Disassembly of Headrest. Remove two
screws to separate headrest from support
Repair of R/T is limited to replacement
bracket.
of defective lamps, lenses, or seals on the
e. Cleaning of Headrest. Clean molded
pushbutton lamps of the LRF commander's
headrest material using a cloth soaked in a
control panel and to replacement of the
mild detergent and water solution.
SWITCH

BOOT SEAL

HEADREST

AR702739
Figure 15-32. Removal and installation of optical instrument lens and headrest assembly.

15-44 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

NOTE securing unit to support. Remove electronics

If temperature is below freezing, unit. Remove bottom screws and washers
use only clean dry cloth (item 22, from support.
App. C) to remove foreign material.
f. Inspection and Repair of Headrest. 15-106. Installation of Electronics Unit.
(1) Inspect metal parts for damage.
(2) Inspect molded headrest for wear, a. Ensure that computer POWER ON-
tears, or cracks. OFF, MASTER BATTERY, and electronics
(3) Replace molded headrest or unit EMER POWER switches are OFF.
support bracket if defective. Replace head b. Install two bottom screws, lockwa-
rest assembly if damaged. shers, and flat washers, but do not tighten.
g. Assembly of Headrest. NOTE
(1) Assemble molded headrest to Make sure washers rest against
support bracket using two screws. screw heads.
(2) Seal screws by applying sealing com c. Lower electronics unit onto bottom
pound (item 25, App. C) to threads. rear screw and pivot onto bottom front
h. Installation of Headrest. screw.
(1) Pull outward on support bracket d. Install two top screws, lockwashers, and
mounting latch trigger knob and insert head flat washers.
rest support bracket in mounting. e. Refer to figure 15-33 for reference for
(2) Rotate headrest assembly to the connecting system cables to the units. Install
left or right until latch trigger knob engages. gunner's foot guard (para 5-27i). Install matched
i. Removal of Optical Instrument Eye R/T (para 15-103). Perform laser rangefinder self-
Guard (Fig 15-32). Grasp edge of eye guard test (para 2-21). Torque two top screws and
and peel it off the eyepiece. bottom rear screw to 3446 lb-ft. (46-52 N m).
/. Cleaning of Optical Instrument Eye Securely tighten bottom front screw.
Guard.
(1) Clean eyepiece shield using a soft
lintless cloth soaked in a solution of mild
detergent and water.
(2) Rinse eye guard and dry thoroughly
with soft lintless cloth.
Jc. Inspection of Optical Instrument Eye
Guard. Inspect eye guard for wear or
damage. Replace guard if damaged.
Inspect eyepiece for cleanliness and
serviceability. If dirty, clean (refer to para.
4-2b-2), if damaged, notify direct support.
I. Installation of Optical Instrument Eye
Guard (Fig 15-32). Install eye guard by
working lip of guard over eyepiece.
15-105. Removal of Electronics Unit (Fig
15-33).
a. Depress gun tube as required to gain
access to electronics unit.
b. Ensure the gunner's control unit
POWER ON-OFF switch is OFF, the EU
EMER POWER switch is OFF, and the
MASTER BATTERY switch is OFF.
c. Remove gunner's foot plate (para 5-
25b).
d. Disconnect five cable connectors from
unit connectors.
e. Loosen two bottom screws, lock-
washers, and flat washers. Figure 15-33. Removal and installation
f. Support electronics unit and remove of electronics unit.
two top screws, lock washers, and flat washers

Change 1 15-45
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

15-107. Removal of LRF System Cables 15-108. Installation of LRF System Cables
3W33, 3W34, and 3W36 (Fig 15-34). 3W33, 3W34, and 3W36.

a. Verify the gunner's control unit (M21 a. Connect system cable assemblies.
computer system) POWER ON-OFF switch is Refer to figure 15-34 for connecting system
set to OFF and the electronics unit EMER cables of the units.
POWER switch is set to OFF. b. Secure cables with screws and cable
b. Disconnect system cables to be re clamps.
placed from corresponding unit connectors. c. Perform laser rangefinder and
c. Remove appropriate screws and cable computer self-tests (paras 2-20 and 2-21).
clamps.
d. Remove system cable assemblies.

RECEIVER

AR702741

Figure 15-34. Removal and installation of LRF system cables.

15-46 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section XVI. MAINTENANCE OF TTS (TANK THERMAL SIGHT AN/VSG-2)

WARNING

RADIATION HAZARD

The TTS infrared optics contains an anti-reflective coating (thorium fluoride) which is slightly
radioactive. The only potential hazard involves swallowing or inhaling this material. Dispose* of
broken lenses, etc., in accordance with AR 755-15.

15-109. Description (Fig 15-35). allows either the commander or gunner to

control the brightness or contrast of the
a. General. The Tank Thermal Sight thermal scene. A polarity switch is provided
(TTS) AN/VSG-2 is an integrated day/night to select the best thermal display.
periscope designed to be used by the d. Gunner's Display. The gunner's display
commander and the gunner of the M60A3 attaches to the bottom of the head assembly.
tank. The components of the TTS are; head Viewing of the eight-power daylight channel
assembly, gunner's display, power converter, and the narrow field of view thermal channel
commander's display, mount assembly and is at the gunner's display. Electrical inter
system interconnect cable. The TTS has face with the ballistics computer system is
three viewing channels; an eight power made at the gunner's display by means of
daylight channel, a unity power daylight cable 3W3.
channel and a far infrared thermal channel. e. Head Assembly. The head assembly
The TTS has a ballistic shield that mounts mounts in the opening in the turret and
externally to the vehicle and provides provides optical access to external scenes
armored protection to that portion of the TTS from inside the tank. The head assembly is
which protrudes through the turret. The TTS mounted to the TTS mount assembly and
provides a long range, passive, full solution contains the optical and electronic com
fire control capability for the M60A3 tank ponents that perform the surveillance and
during daytime and nighttime operations and fire control functions of the TTS in con
during periods of adverse weather. junction with the gunner's display. Mechan
b. interface. The TTS is installed in the ical interface with the ballistic drive unit of
turret of the M60A3 tank through the use of a the tank is accomplished by an oldham
mount and a system interconnect cable. The coupling on the head assembly.
commander's display relays the thermal /. Power Converter. The power
image from the gunner's display to command converter converts tank power to the
er's station so the image can be simulta voltages necessary for operation of the TTS.
neously viewed at both stations. The power The power converter is connected to the tank
converter converts tank power to all the power source by cable 1W5, and to the
voltages necessary for TTS operation. remaining TTS components by interconnect
Mechanical interface between the TTS and cable assembly 3W4. The power converter
the tank is made by the mount, the command contains electronic circuits and protective
er's display mounting bracket, and the devices necessary to power the TTS.
Oldham coupling which mates with the ballis g. Ballistic Shield. The ballistic shield is
tic drive assembly. Electrical interface fitted with a ballistic cover. The cover is
between the TTS and the tank is made by the opened or closed by means of a control
tank power cable 1W5 and the computer-to- cable. The cable passes through the mount
gunner's display interconnect cable 3W3. and connects to a control handle mounted on
c. Commander's Display. The command top of the gunner's handle assembly.
er's display attaches to the turret wall and to
the no-bak unit. The commander's display
optically relays the image from the gunner's 15-110. Commander's Display.
station to the commander's station, allowing
the external scene to be viewed simulta a. Removal (Fig 15-36).
neously by both the commander and the (1) Place MASTER BATTERY switch
gunner. A 3witch on the display control panel in the OFF position.

15-47
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

BALLISTIC

Figure 15-35. Tank thermal sight AN/VSG-2.

15-48 Change 3
 TM 0-2350-253-20-2

Figure 15-36. Removal or installation of TTS commander's display.

(2) Remove three screws and lock- (7) Loosen two captive front mounting I
washers securing manual traverse drive to screws with a second person holding the unit in
mount. Remove drive and shaft. position.
(3) Disconnect cable connector 3W3P2 CAUTION
from connector Jl on output unit. Do not bump or scratch the
(3.1) Disconnect flexible shaft from out optical window during removal.
(8) Remove commander's display.
put unit.
b. Installation (Fig 15-36).
(4) Disconnect cable connector 3W4P5 (1) Place MASTER BATTERY switch
from connector 3J1 on the back of to OFF position.
commander's display. CAUTION
I (5) Loosen 3/4-inch nut below display on The weight of the commander's
the rear mount. display is 35 pounds. Handle it
(6) Remove two screws, lockwashers carefully during installation.
and flatwashers securing rear mount to no- (2) Install two captive commander's
bak assembly. display front mounting screws while having
second person holding the display in position.
CAUTION
(3) Loosen large nut securing mounting
The weight of the commander's
ball and loosen two 1/4-inch bolts securing ■
display is 35 pounds. Handle it
mounting ball clamp. Line up rear mount to
carefully during removal.

Change 3 15-49
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

holes, and attach rear mount to no-bak assembly (11) Tighten focus setscrew on lens cell
with two screws, lockwashers and flatwashers. assembly.
Push rear mount all the way up and tighten two (12) Replace focus adjust access cap.
mounting screws to 200-250 lb-in (23-28 N.m). (13) Install manual traverse drive (b (7)
(4) Tighten two screws on mounting ball above).
clamp to 5-7 lb-ft (6-10 N.m). (14) Place TTS gunner's display MODE
(4.1) Reconnect flexible shaft to output unit. switch and MASTER BATTERY switch to
(5) Tighten large nut below display on rear OFF position.
mount to 35-45 lb-ft (47-60 N.m). (15) Purge and charge the commander's
(6) Connect cable connector 3W4P5 to display at 8 psi (55.2 kPa) for 5 minutes as
connector 3J1 on rear of commander's dis described in paragraph 2-24.
play.
15-111. Gunner's Display.
(7) Install turret manual traverse drive
and shaft using three attaching screws and a. Removal (Fig 15-37).
lockwashers. (1) Place MASTER BATTERY switch
(8) Connect cable connector 3W3P2 to in OFF position.
connector Jl on output unit. (2) Lower the M105D telescope head
c. Test. Check TTS operation (TM 9- at hangar. (Refer to para 15-52).
2350-253-10). (3) Elevate main gun to maximum ele
d. Service. vation.
(1) Purging and pressurization of the
(4) Disconnect cable 3VV4P4 connector
commander's display may be done with the
from connector 2J1, cable 3W3P5 connector
unit installed.
from connector 2J3, and cable 3W3P3 con
(2) Place MASTER BATTERY switch
nector from 2J2 connector on rear of gun
to ON position.
ner's display (see fig 15-39).
(3) Make sure that power converter
(5) Remove three screws and lock
circuit breaker 4CB1 is in ON.
washers securing manual traverse to mount
NOTE and remove drive and shaft (fig 15-36).
The TTS cooler and cooler fan
(6) Remove gunner's ammo select unit.
should begin running and the
(Refer to paragraph 15-78).
COOL BITE indicator lamp
CAUTION
should illuminate. Allow a
The weight of the gunner's display
minimum of 10 minutes for
is 35 pounds. Handle it carefully
cooldown and for the COOL
during removal. Loosen left and
BITE lamp to extinguish.
right captive screws first and
(4) Place TTS gunners display MODE then bottom captive screw.
switch to STANDBY position. (7) Loosen three captive mounting
(5) When COOL BITE lamp screws securing gunner's display to head
extinguishes, set gunner's display MODE assembly with a second person holding the
switch to ON position. display in position (view A).
(6) Place GUNNER'S/CMDR switch in (8) Free two gunner's display guide
CMDR position and adjust for good brightness pins from head assembly and remove gunner's
contrast and range focus of the thermal display(view B).
scene. b. Lamp Replacement (Fig 15-38). If the
(7) Remove manual traverse drive and 8X or IR reticle lamp is defective replace it
shaft (a (2) above). as follows.
(8) Remove focus adjust cap near ( 1 ) Loosen five captive mounting screws
elbow of optical relay, (fig 15-36). in access covers (view A).
(9) Loosen focus setscrew of lens cell (2) Remove access cover from gunner's
assembly. display.
(10) Move lens cell by moving the focus CAUTION
setscrew longitudinally until the best focus IR and 8X lamps are inter
definition is obtained in the commander's changeable, but do not sub
display. stitute other lamps.

15-50 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

B
AR702753

Figure 15-37. Removal or installation of TTS gunner's display.

Change 3 15-51
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

PROJECTOR SCREW

AR 702 754

Figure 15-38. Replacement of TTS 8X and IR reticle lamps.

15-52
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

NOTE CAUTION
Spare lamps for IR and 8X The weight of the gunner's dis
reticle are located behind an play is 35 pounds. Handle it
access plate (secured with two carefully during installation.
phillips-head screws) at the (4) Have a second person mate the
bottom of rear cover of gunner's display to the head assembly. Verify
gunner's display. that the two guide pins are alined (view B).
(3) Loosen screw securing 8X (top) lamp (5) With the second person holding
holder to reticle projector (view B). the gunner's display in place, tighten three
mounting screws (view A) to 500-550 lb-in. I
(4) Slide 8X lamp holder from lamp (57-60 N.m). 1
receptacle. (6) Connect M105D telescope head (re
CAUTION fer to para 15-52).
Do not damage lamp holder (7) Install turret manual traverse drive
wiring. and shaft using three attaching screws and
(5) Remove 8X lamp holder from lockwashers (Fisr 15-36, view A).
inside of gunner's display. (8) Install gunner's ammo select unit
(6) Loosen screw securing IR (bottom) (para 15-78).
lamp holder to reticle projector (view B). d. Test.
(7) Slide IR lamp holder from lamp (1) Perform TTS operation check (TM 9-
receptacle. 2350-253-10).
(8) Remove defective lamp from NOTE
holder and discard. Perform synchronization and aline-
(9) Place a new lamp in holder. ment only if unit is replaced.
(10) Position contact in holder. (2) Perform boresight, synchronization and
CAUTION alinement (para 2-14 and 2-15).
Do not drop screw inside of (3) Perform computer self-test (para 2-20)
gunner's display when installing and computer system solution tests (para 2-22a, f,
screw in lamp contact. g and k).
(11) Tighten phillips-head screw e. Service. Purge and charge the gunner's
securing lamp contact to holder. display as described in paragraph 2-24. Purge
CAUTION at 8 psi (55.2 kPa) for 5 minutes.
Do not damage lamp holder 15-112. Head Assembly.
wiring. a. Removal (Fig. 15-39).
(12) Place 8X and IR lamp holder inside
WARNING
gunner's display.
Do not attempt to remove head
(13) Slide lamp holder on lamp assembly without first removing
receptacle on projector.
gunner's display. The combined
(14) Tighten screw securing 8X (top)
weight of the Two units is 95
and IR (bottom) lamp holder to reticle
pounds.
projector (view B).
(1) Place MASTER BATTERY switch
(15) Replace spare lamp and spare lamp
in OFF position.
access cover using two screws.
(2) Remove gunner's display (para
(16) Install access cover and tighten
five captive screws (view A). 15-111).
c. Installation (Fig 15-37). (3) Disconnect cable 3W4P2 connector
from connector 1J2 and cable 3W4P3
(1) Place MASTER BATTERY switch connector from connector 1J1 on rear of head
in the OFF position. assembly (view A).
(2) Elevate main gun to maximum (4) Disconnect cable assembly from
elevation. ballistic shield handle assembly (para 15-115).
(3) Connect cable 3W4P4 connector to Position cable forward to prevent
connector 2J1 on gunner's display. Connect interference with removal of head assembly.
cable 3W3P5 connector to connector 2J3 and CAUTION
cable 3W3P3 connector to connector 2J2 on The head assembly weighs 60
the display. pounds. Handle it carefully
during removal.
Change 2 15-53
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

VIEW B

Figure 15-39. Removal or installation of TTS head assembly.

15-54 Change 3
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(5) Unlock ballistic drive coupling arm (2) Elevate the main gun to its
by moving handle back until it disengages maximum elevation.
(view B).
(6) Loosen four captive mounting CAUTION
screws securing head assembly to mount until The weight of the head
threads are completely disengaged. Have a sec assembly is 60 pounds. Handle
ond person support head assembly. it carefully during installation.
(7) Depress button on safety latch
handle assembly. Push handle assembly NOTE
forward to disengage safety latches from Make sure ballistic shield cable is
head assembly. Using a second person to help positioned forward to preclude
support head assembly, remove head assembly interference during insertion of
head assembly.
from mount.
b. Installation (Fig 15-39). (3) Insert head assembly into mount
(1) Place MASTER BATTERY switch with ballistic drive triangles alined. Verify
in OFF position. that safety latches capture head assembly.

Figure 15-40. Removal or installation of TTS browpads.

Change 3 15-55
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(6) Depress browpad adjustment lever.

(4) Tighten four captive mounting
screws to secure head assembly to mount Insert 8X daylight channel and secure with
(view B) to 500-550 lb-in (57-60 N.m). retaining ring.
(5) Lock ballistic drive coupling arm (7) Test: Perform TTS operation and bore-
by moving handle forward until it engages. sight procedures (TM 9-2350-253-10). Perform
(6) Connect ballistics shield cable to computer self-test (para 2-20).
ballistic shield handle assembly (para 15-115). (8) Purge at 8 psi (55.2 kPa) for 5
(7) Connect cable connector 3W4P2 to minutes and charge the TTS head assembly as
connector 1J2 and cable connector 3W4P3 to described in paragraph 2-24.
connector 1J1 on rear of head assembly (view
A).
15-113. Power Converter.
(8) Install gunner's display assembly
(para 15-111).
(9) If head assembly was replaced, a. Removal (Fig 15-41).
perform synchronization and alinement (para (1) Place MASTER BATTERY switch
2-15). in OFF position.
c. Service. All services of the TTS head (2) Place circuit breaker 4CB1 in OFF
assembly can be performed in the tank. position.
(1) Check the browpads (fig 15-40) for (3) Disconnect cable 1W5 connector
serviceability. Replace if defective. from connector 4J1 and cable 3W4 connector
(2) Remove two screws releasing the from connector 4J2 on power converter (view
thermal channel browpad from TTS cover. A).
(3) Remove retaining ring from 8X (4) Loosen three turns, but do not
daylight channel browpad assembly pin. remove, left front and right rear mounting
(4) Depress browpad adjustment lever screws in slotted mounting feet on power
and slide 8X daylight channel browpad from converter (view B).
the TTS cover. (5) Remove right front and left rear
(5) Secure thermal channel browpad to captive mounting screws from mounting pads
TTS cover with two screws. for the power converter.

SLOTTED MOUNTING
FEET

LEFT FRONT
MOUNTING SCREW

LEFT REAR
MOUNTING SCREW
''CONNECTOR
4J2
CIRCUIT BREAKER CONNECTOR
4CB1 4J1
VIEW A VIEW B AR 702757

Figure 15-41. Removal or installation of TTS power converter.

15-56 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CAVTION (1) Remove the TTS head assembly

The weight of the power con (para 15-112).
verter is 35 pounds. Handle it (2) Remove four screws, lockwashers
carefully upon removal. and flatwashers securing the latch bar assem
(6) Slide the power converter slotted bly to the mount head assembly (fig 15-42).
mounting feet clear of two remaining bolts in
the mounting pads. Remove the power (3) Remove six screws, lockwashers
converter. and flatwashers releasing three support
brackets from latch bar support (fig 15-43).
b. Installation (Fig 15-41).
(4) Remove drift pin releasing handle
(1) Place MASTER BATTERY switch
in OFF position. assembly from rod.
(5) Remove six screws, lockwashers
(2) Place circuit breaker 4CB1 in OFF
and flatwashers securing three support
position.
brackets to latch bar support.
(3) Be sure there are two captive
screws in the right front and left rear non- (6) Remove two screws, lockwashers
slotted power converter mounting feet. If and flatwashers securing support cover to
latch bar support.
not, install screws and rotate only a few turns
(view B). (7) Remove support brackets, support
cover, releases, springs, and rod from latch
CAUTION
bar support.
The weight of the power
(8) Remove two latch pins, releasing
converter is 35 pounds. Handle
latches from latch bar support.
it carefully during installation.
(9) Remove two drift pins. Slide
(4) Aline slotted mounting feet on
releases, springs, support brackets and
power converter over two partially removed
support cover from rod.
mounting screws in mounting pads (left front
and right rear) and slip converter into (10) Remove pin releasing handle
assembly from rod.
position. The two screws should support the
weight of the unit. (11) Unscrew latch assembly pushbutton
from plunger. Remove spring and plunger
(5) Aline and tighten two captive screws in
from handle assembly.
non-slotted mounting feet to 16-20 lb-ft (21-27
Nm). c. Cleaning. Clean all parts or assem
(6) Tighten the other two mounting screws blies in accordance with paragraph 4-2.
in slotted mounting feet to 16-20 lb-ft (21-27 N m). d. Inspection and Repair.
(7) Install cable 1W5 connector to (1) Inspect all parts of assembly in accor
connector 4J1 and cable 3W4 connector to dance with paragraphs 4-3, 4-4 and 4-5.
connector 4J2 on power converter (view A). (2) Repair latch bar assembly by replacing
(8) Place circuit breaker 4CB1 in ON latch handle if pushbutton does not lock and un
position. lock latch. Repair latch bar assembly by replacing
c. Service. All services of the TTS power broken, or damaged parts, or springs if latch does
converter can be performed in the tank. not securely hold TTS head assembly in mount
(1) Test TTS operation (TM 9-2350- during installation and removal.
253-10). e. Assembly (Fig. 15-43).
(2) Deleted. (1) Insert spring and plunger in latch
15-114. TTS Mount Assembly. handle assembly. Retain with pushbutton.
(2) Position handle assembly on rod.
a. Removal. Installation of the TTS Secure with.pin.
mount assembly (fig 15-35) requires special (3) Position spring, three support brack
alinement fixtures. The complex installation ets and two releases on rod.
procedures are reserved for higher level (4) Install two drift pins into releases.
maintenance activities. Do not attempt to
(5) Position two latches and latch pins
remove the mount assembly.
in slots in support.
b. Disassembly.

NOTE
Disassemble only to the extent
necessary to inspect or repair

Change 3 15-57
TM 9-2350-2531-20-2

Figure 15-42. TTS mount assembly and ballistic shield.

15-58
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

SUPPORT COVER

Figure 15-43. TTS mount latch bar assembly - exploded view.

NOTE spring in proper position over support bracket

When assembling mount latches and latch.
and springs, ensure that the (10) Position latch bar assembly . on
springs engage the supports and mount head assembly (fig. 15-42).
the latches as shown in figure (11) Tighten four screws, lockwashers,
15-43. Ensure that the protru and flat washers securing the latch bar
sions on release are under the assembly to the mount head assembly.
latches. (12) Install head assembly (para 15-112).
(6) Position three support brackets, f. Test. Check latch bar assembly for
support cover, two springs, two releases and proper operation.
rod assembly on support bracket.
(7) Partially tighten six screws to hold 15-115. Ballistic Shield Control Handle
spring in place over support bracket and to
apply partial spring tension to latch. Allow a. Test.
sufficient movement of rod assembly to allow (1) Raise and lower the ballistic cover.
positioning of support cover and spring. Check for freedom of movement and for
(8) Tighten two screws with spring in proper operation.
place next to support cover and over latch so (2) Make sure pushbutton actuator on
that spring tension is applied to latch as handle assembly locks the handle and cover in
support cover is tightened in place. both OPEN and CLOSE positions.
(9) Tighten six screws securing three (3) Check that the ballistic cover has
support brackets to latch bar support with equal free play in open and closed positions.

15-59
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

b. Adjustment. (1) Remove three screws, lockwashers

(1) Loosen the two nuts that secure and flatwashers securing the top plate. Lift
the threaded cable connector to the ballistic the plate.
control handle. (2) Remove button and spring from top
(2) Manually open and close the ballis plate.
tic cover and observe the stroke of the (3) Remove handle and pin from bot
control cable at the control handle. tom plate.
(3) Adjust the position of the two nuts f. Cleaning. Clean all parts in accord
so that the control handle travel is centered ance with paragraph 4-2.
in the cable stroke. g. Inspection. Inspect all parts in accor
(4) Retest ballistic shield and handle (a dance with paragraphs 4-3, 4-4 and 4-5.
above). NOTE
c. Control Cable Inspection. Inspect the Any part sufficiently worn as to
ballistic shield control cable for smooth cause play or shake of 0.010
operation. If any cuts, kinks, frayed or inch, must be repaired or rep
abraded sections of the cable are noted, laced.
replace the cable.
d. Removal (Figure 15-44). h. Assembly (Figure 15-45).
(1) Unscrew four captive screws re NOTE
leasing the handle assembly from the gunner's Apply two drops of semifluid lubri
control handle top cover. cating oil (item 19, App. C) to
(2) Remove nut lockwasher and flat rotating or sliding parts during
washer from the CLOSE side of the handle. assembly.
Remove two nuts, lockwashers and flat (1) Position pin in bottom plate.
washers, along with U-bolt releasing control (2) Position handle on pin.
cable from handle assembly. (3) Position spring and button in top
e. Disassembly (Figure 15-45) plate.

n
NUTS (2)
OCKWASHERS (2)
FLATWASHERS (2)

CAPTIVE
SCREW (4)

HANDLE
LOCKWASHERS (2)'
FLATWASHERS (2)

BUTTON
AR702760

Figure 15-44. Removal or installation of ballistic shield control handle.

15-60
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(4) Hold button and spring in place CAUTION

while installing top cover on bottom plate and Handle ballistic shield and cable
handle. carefully to avoid kinking or
(5) Install three screws, lockwashers scraping control cable.
and flat washers, securing the top cover to the (5) Unhook the cable from the mount
bottom cover. assembly. Guide the cable through the
i. Installation (Figure 15-44). clearance hole. Lift the ballistic shield and
(1) Position control cable in control attached cable straight up from the turret.
handle. Secure with U-bolt and two flat b. Disassembly (Figure 15-46).
washers, lockwashers and nuts.
(2) Install flatwasher, lockwasher and WARNING
nut on CLOSE side of the control cable and Ballistic cover is spring loaded.
control handle. Clamp or block cover firmly in
(3) Adjust handle stroke to cable position to avoid injury.
stroke (b above). NOTE
Disassemble ballistic shield only to
15-116. Ballistic Shield. extent necessary to perform
inspection and repair.
a. Removal. (1) Clamp ballistic cover halfway
(1) Rotate commander's cupola so open.
machine gun mount is clear of ballistic shield (2) Remove nut, lockwasher and flat
area. washer from upper end of control cable.
(2) Remove ballistic shield control (3) Remove two nuts, lockwashers and
handle. (Refer to paragraph 15-115.) flatwashers from U-bolt releasing control
(3) Remove TTS head assembly. (Refer 1 cable from ballistic shield.
to paragraph 15-112.) (4) Remove clamp or brace (from step
(4) Remove four bolts and 1 above). Allow cover to come to rest in full
lockwashers releasing the shield from the open position. This will relieve some tension
| turret (fig 15-46). from spring.

Figure 15-45. Maintenance of ballistic shield handle.

Change 2 15-61
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 15-46. Maintenance of Ballistic Shield.

15-62 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(5) Remove nut, lockwasher, and socket head capscrews and new lockwashers.
flatwasher from capscrew securing ballistic (9) Aline link with coupling and
spring. install straight headed pin. Install new cotter
pin to secure straight headed pin.
CAUTION
Ballistic spring is under (10) Position ballistic cover to full
tension. open position and hook ballistic spring onto
spring retainer pin.
(6) Remove capscrew and flatwasher (11) Position looped end of ballistic
securing ballistic spring. Let ballistic spring spring to housing and install hexagon head
lay loose. capscrew and flatwasher through looped end of
(7) Remove and discard cotter pin ballistic spring and into housing.
securing straight headed pin to coupling. (12) Install flatwasher, new
Remove straight headed pin. lockwasher, and nut to secure hexagon head
(8) Remove socket head cap screws capscrew.
and lockwashers securing right and left studs. WARNING
Discard lockwashers. Ballistic spring will fall Securely brace or clamp
loose. cover into half open
(9) Remove ballistic cover from position. Cover is spring
housing. loaded and could cause
(10) Remove link from end of serious injury if it slips.
connector pin and remove connector pin from
ballistic cover. (13) Clamp ballistic cover in half
(11) Remove spring retainer pin from open position.
ballistic cover. (14) Insert control cable under U-
(12) Remove socket head capscrew, bolt and through coupling so that U-bolt nests
machine screw, and lockwashers securing in radial undercut. Secure U-bolt with two
guide pin cap. flatwashers, lockwashers and nuts.
(13) Remove guide pin cap, guide (15) Install flatwasher, lockwasher
pin, and coupling from housing. and nut at upper end of control cable.
c. Assembly (Figure 15-46),
(1) Install coupling and guide pin into NOTE
housing. Make sure that lengths of
(2) Position guide pin cap onto end of exposed threads above and
guide pin and secure with socket head below nuts are approx
capscrew, machine screw and two new imately equal.
lockwashers.
(3) Install spring retainer pin into d. Installation (Figure 15-46).
ballistic cover.
(4) Install connector pin into ballistic CAUTION
cover and position link onto end of connector Handle ballistic shield and
pin. control cable carefully to
(5) Position ballistic cover into avoid kinking or scraping
housing. cable assembly.
(6) Position ballistic spring between
right side of ballistic cover and housing. (1) Carefully lower the ballistic shield
(7) Install right and left studs assembly into place. Have help from inside
through housing and into ballistic cover. Be turret to make sure cable feeds through pro
sure right stud is through ballistic spring. perly and is secured in hook on right side of
(8) Secure each stud with three mount flange.

Change 2 15-63
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

NOTE connector from connector 4J2 on the front

Position cable forward to of the TTS power converter.
prevent interference when (7) Remove all cable retaining
installing TTS head assembly. hardware.
(2) Install four bolts and lockwashers (8) Remove cable from turret
securing ballistic shield assembly to turret. observing cable routing.
Torque to 96-124 lb-ft (130-168 N m). c. Installation.
(3) Install TTS head assembly. (Refer (1) Place MASTER BATTERY switch
to paragraph 15-112.) to OFF position.
(4) Install ballistic shield control (2) Fully elevate the main gun.
handle. (Refer to paragraph 15-115). (3) Install cable into turret using the
same cable routing as was observed during
15-117. TTS Interconnecting Cable 3W4.
cable removal.
a. Testing., Cable 3W4 will be tested in (4) Connect cable 1W5P1 connector to
the tank using the cable test set (CTS) (Item connector 4J1 and cable 3W4P1 connector to
15, table 1-1). Follow the procedure detailed in connector 4J2 on the front of the power
paragraph 3-11. converter.
b. Removal. (5) Connect cable 3W4P2 connector to
NOTE connector 1J2 and cable 3W4P3 connector to
Removal of cable 3W4 is not connector 1J1 on the rear of the head
necessary unless testing assembly.
determines cable is defective. (6) Connect cable 3W4P4 connector to
(1) Place MASTER BATTERY switch connector 2J1 on the rear of the gunner's
to OFF position. display.
(2) Fully elevate the main gun. (7) Connect cable 3W4P5 connector to
(3) Disconnect cable 3W4P5 connector connector 3J1 on the commander's display.
from 3J1 on the commander's display. (8) Install and secure cable with
(4) Disconnect cable 3W4P4 connector retaining hardware.
from connector 2J1 on the rear of the d. Test.
gunner's display. (1) After installing or servicing TTS
(5) Disconnect 3W4P4 connector from interconnection cable 3W4, test it using the
connector 1J2 and cable 3W4P3 connector Cable Test Set (CTS) for open circuits and
from connector 1J1 on the rear of the TTS short circuits following the procedure in para
head assembly. 3-11.
(6) Disconnect cable 1W5P1 connector (2) Test TTS operation (TM9-2350-253-
from connector 4J1 and cable 3W4P1 10).

15-64 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CHAPTER 16

MAINTENANCE OF SEARCHLIGHT
EQUIPMENT
(PASSIVE)

Section L MAINTENANCE OF SEARCHLIGHT, SEARCHLIGHT MASTER

CONTROL UNIT, DUMMY CONNECTORS, AND MOUNTING PARTS

16-1. Description. c. Dummy Connector and Mounting Parts

(Fig. 16-2).
a. Searchlight AN/VSS-3A. The search (1) Remove four screws and lock-
light AN/VSS-3A is a 1.0-kilowatt, 23-inch washers securing searchlight remote control
unit using a xenon tube as a light source. The receptacle connector (view B).
searchlight will provide a narrow or wide (2) Remove connector and gasket.
beam of high intensity visible or infrared (IR) (3) Remove four screws and lock-
light. The unit operates in conjunction with the washers securing searchlight control' and
turret power and searchlight relay box which pro power connector (view B).
vides up to 200 amperes. For additional informa (4) Remove connector and gasket.
tion on the searchlight, refer to TM 11-5855-217-
12. 16-3. Installation
b. Searchlight Master Control. The
searchlight master control is centrally a. Searchlight and Cable Assembly (Fig
located in the turret bustle under the odd- 16-1).
ment tray. (1) Place MASTER BATTERY switch
in OFF position.
(2) Using two persons, position
searchlight on mount and secure by placing
16-2. Removal hitch handles in down position.
(3) Insert lock pins in handles.
a. Searchlight and Cable Assembly (Fig. (4) Connect searchlight cable assem
16-1). bly to searchlight and, if disconnected, to
(1) Place MASTER BATTERY switch turret receptacle.
in OFF position. b. Dummy Connector and Mounting
(2) Disconnect searchlight cable Parts (Fig. 16-2).
from searchlight and, if cable assembly is to (1) Install searchlight control and
be replaced, from turret receptacle. power connector and gasket. Secure with
(3) Remove three lock pins from four screws and lockwashers (view B).
hitch handles. (2) Install searchlight remote control
(4) Raise each of three hitch handles receptacle connector and gasket. Secure
and, using two persons, remove searchlight. with four screws and lockwashers (view B).
6. Searchlight Master Control (Fig. 16-1.1). c. Searchlight Master Control Unit (Fig. 26-
2).
(1) Turn MASTER BATTERY switch (1) Install searchlight master control
OFF. unit and secure with four screws, lockwash
(2) Disconnect all cables attached to ers, and nuts (view B).
the searchlight master control unit (view A). (2) Connect cables to control unit con
(3) Remove four screws, lockwashers, nectors (view A).
and nuts and remove searchlight master (3) Check operation of searchlight (TM
control unit (view B). 11-5855-217-12).

16-1
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure 16-1. Removal or installation of searchlight AN/VSS-3A.

16-2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

SEARCHLIGHT
GASKET REMOTE CONTROL
RECEPTACLE
CONNECTOR
LOCKWASHER (4)
/ /SCREW (4)

SEARCHLIGHT
MASTER
CONTROL UNIT

GASKET LOCKWASHER (4)

SEARCHLIGHT
CONTROL AND SCREW <4)
POWER CONNECTOR SCREW (4)
LOCKWASHER (4)
B AX702742
Figure 16-2. Removal and installation of searchlight master control unit, dummy connectors,
and mounting parts.

10-3
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section II. MAINTENANCE OF SEARCHLIGHT REMOTE CONTROL BOX,

DUMMY CONNECTOR, EXTERNAL CABLE CONNECTOR, AND MOUNTING PARTS

16-4 . Description (Fig 16-3). (2) Remove four screws and lockwashers
securing adapter plate and gasket. Remove adapter
The searchlight remote control box is plate and gasket.
located on the right turret wall. It provides
indicators and controls for operation of the 16-6. Installation (Fig 16-3).
searchlight. a. External Searchlight Receptacle (view
1,6-5. Removal (Fig 16-3). B).
(1) Position round gasket and adapter
a. Searchlight Remote Control Box. plate on housing and secure with four screws
(1) Ensure that power switch on the and lockwashers.
searchlight master control panel is OFF and (2) Position square gasket and search
control switch is in LOCAL position. light electrical power receptacle on adapter
(2) Disconnect control cable from plate and secure with four screws and lock
remote control box (view A). washers.
(3) Remove four screws, flat washers, (3) Install receptacle cover.
and lockwashers securing remote control box b. Dummy Connector and Mounting Parts
to mounting bracket and remove box (view B). (view B).
b. Dummy Connector and Mounting (1) Position dummy receptacle con
Parts. nector and gasket on mounting bracket.
(1) Remove four screws and lockwash (2) Install four lockwashers and screws
ers securing searchlight remote dummy re to secure dummy receptacle connector to
ceptacle connector to mounting bracket. mounting bracket.
(2) Remove dummy receptacle con c. Searchlight Remote Control Box.
nector and gasket. (1) Position remote control box on
c. External Searchlight Receptacle. mounting bracket. Secure with four screws
and lockwashers (view B).
W Remove four screws and lockwash
ers securing searchlight electrical power re (2) Connect cable connector to search
ceptacle and gasket to adapter plate. Re light remote control box (view A).
move receptacle cover, searchlight electrical (3) Check operation of searchlight
power receptacle, and gasket. from remote control box (TM 11-5855-12).

16-4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figurt 16-3. Removal and installation of searchlight remote control box, dummy connector,
external cable connector, and mounting parts.

16-5/16-6 Blank
i
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CHAPTER 17

MAINTENANCE OF CBR EQUIPMENT

17-1. Description. 17-2. Gas Particulate Installation Com

ponents.
Refer to TM 9-2350-253-20-1 for a a. Commander's Electric Air Filter
complete description of chemical, biological Heater Unit (Fig 17-1, View A).
and radiological equipment. The loader's, (1) Removal.
gunner's, and commander's M3 heater units (a) Remove radio guard screen
and hoses are located in the turret (figure 17- (para 11-3).
1); each of these units has a provision for (b) Loosen clamps and disconnect
attaching the M25A1 tank protective mask inlet and outlet hoses.
directly into the hose breakaway socket (c) Disconnect electrical connec
(figure 17-1). tor.

HEATER MOUNTING
PLATE

CLAMP

AR702745
Figure 17-1. Removal and installation of 20 CFM gas particulate installation components
(1 of 3).

17-1
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(d) Remove four screws and (e) Connect inlet and outlet hoses
lockwashers securing commander's heater and tighten clamps.
unit and plate to radio box. c. Loader's Electric Air Filter Heater
(e) Remove four screws, lock- Unit (Fig 17-1, View D).
washers, and nuts securing commander's (1) Removal.
heater unit with mounting bracket to mount (a) Loosen two clamps and discon
ing bracket plate. nect two hoses (view C).
(f) Remove two screws securing (b) Disconnect two electrical con
mounting bracket to commander's heater unit nectors (view C).
control and remove bracket. (c) Remove four screws, lockwash
(g) Remove adapters from inlet and ers, washers, and nuts (view C).
outlet ports (view D). (d) Remove loader's heater.
(2) Installation. (e) Remove adapters from inlet and
(a) Install adapters in inlet and outlet ports (view D).
outlet ports (view D). (2) Installation.
(b) Position mounting bracket onto (a) Connect adapters to inlet and
commander's heater unit and secure with two outlet ports (view D).
screws. (b) Attach loader's '" heater and
(c) Position commander's heater secure with four screws, lockwashers, wash
unit and mounting bracket onto mounting ers, and nuts (view C).
bracket plate and secure with four screws, (c) Connect electrical connector
eight lockwashers, and four nuts. Install (view C).
lockwashers on both sides of mounting (d) Connect hoses and tighten
bracket. clamps (view C).
(d) Install four screws and lock d. Removal of Hoses and Elbows (Fig. 17-
washers securing commander's heater unit 1).
and mounting bracket plate to radio box. (1) Loosen clamps on hoses (gunner's,
(e) Connect electrical connector. commander's, or loader's views A, B, and C).
(f) Connect inlet and outlet hoses (2) Remove hoses and clamps (views A,
and tighten clamps. B, and C).
(g) Install radio guard screen (para . (3) Remove elbows (views A, B, and C)
11-3). by using a suitable wrench to loosen and
b. Gunner's Electric Air Filter Unit (Fig unscrew elbows from threaded fittings.
17-1, View B). e. Installation of Hoses and Elbows (Fig. 17
(1) Removal. -1).
(a) Loosen clamps and disconnect (1) Attach elbows (views A, B, and C)
inlet and outlet hoses. and tighten with a suitable wrench.
(b) Disconnect electrical con (2) Attach gunner's, commander's, or
nector. loader's hoses and clamps (views A, B, and C).
(c) Remove four screws, lockwash (3) Tighten clamps on hoses (views A,
ers, and washers and remove gunner's knee- B, and C).
rest. f. Gas Particulate Orifice and Hose
(d) Remove four capscrews and Assembly (Fig 17-2).
lockwashers, and remove gunner's heater and (1) Removal and disassembly.
bracket.
(e) Remove adapter from outlet (a) Separate hose assembly from
port, and elbow from inlet port of heater. orifice assembly by pulling breakaway socket
(2) Installation. from orifice connector.
(a) Connect adapter to outlet port (b) Loosen ratchet clamps and re
and elbow to inlet port of neater. move hose from heater outlet adapter and
(b) Install gunner's heater and breakaway socket.
bracket and secure with four capscrews and (c) Disassemble orifice assembly
lockwashers. k connector.
(c) Install gunner's kneerest and
secure it with four screws, lockwashers, and
washers.
(d) Connect electrical connector.

17-2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

AR702744

Figure 17-1. Removed and installation of 20 CFM gas particulate installation components
(2 of 3).

17-3
 AR702747
Figure 17-1. Removal and installation of 20 CFM gas particulate installation components
(3 of 3).

17-4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(2) Cleaning and inspection. in work area. Solvents and

(a) Clean hose and orifice assembly bonding adhesives are toxic and
connector with warm water and mild deter flammable.
gent solution. Wipe or air dry. (a) Apply a thin coat of sealing
(b) Inspect components for damage adhesive (item 2, App. C) to the inside surface of
or wear, replace if necessary. the ends of the hose. Before adhesive dries, insert
(c) Inspect hose and outlet valve hose and clamp on air heater outlet adapter and on
disc for damage or deterioration. Look breakaway socket. Tighten clamp.
closely for dry rot. Check disc for flexibility.
Replace if necessary. (b) Assemble orifice assembly con
(3) Assembly and installation. nector. Apply a thin coat of sealing adhesive
at junction of outlet valve seat to orifice
connector.
Work area should be well venti
lated to reduce toxicity caused (c) Connect hose assembly to
by solvents. Allow no smoking orifice assembly connector.

OUTLET
VALVE
COVER

BREAKAWAY
SOCKET
OUTLET
VALVE
DISC
ORIFICE
ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR
HOSE
OUTLET ASSEMBLY
VALVE
SEAT

ORIFICE
CONNECTOR

BRACKET

CLAMP
RETAINING
RING

AR702748
Figure 17-2. Removal, disassembly, cleaning, inspection, assembly, and installation
of gas particulate orifice an* ***** «<wemMy.

17-5 (17-6 blank)

i
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

CHAPTER 18

PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER

AND MOUNTING BRACKET

|l8-l. Description.
6. Remove fire extinguisher mount
The portable fire extinguisher and ing bracket from ammunition box by
mounting bracket are attached horizontally removing four screws and lock washers (view
on the 7.62-mm machine gun ammunition B).
box. The fire extinguisher consists of a 18-3. Installation (Fig 18-1).
cylinder, valve, horn, grip, and safety pin
lock with wire seaL A fully charged exting NOTE
uisher weighs no more than 7.7 pounds with The mounting bracket and fire
out the mounting bracket. The extinguisher extinguisher are issued together
is charged with 2.7 to 2.9 pounds of halon as one item. If a new fire
1301 extinguishing agent. The mounting extinguisher bottle is installed,
backet consists of a clamp with spring lock also, install the new mounting
which permits quick, easy removal of the bracket supplied with the bottle.
fire extinguisher.
a. Position fire extinguisher mount
18-2. Removal (Fig 18-1). ing bracket on ammunition box and secure
a. Remove fire extinguisher bottle with four screws and lockwashers (view B).
|from mounting bracket by unclamping strap b. Position fire extinguisher bottle in
(view A). bracket with strap and clamp (view A).

MOUNTING
BRACKET

STRAP SCREW (4)

WASHER (4)
7.62-MM MACHINE GUN AMMO BOX 7.62-MM MACHINE GUN AMMO BOX

A B AMC 833075

Figure 18-1. Removal and installation of portable fire extinguisher

and mounting bracket.

Change 2 18-1/(18-2 blank)

 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

APPENDIX A
REFERENCES

A-l. Publication Index

The following indexes should be consulted frequently for latest changes or revisions of references given in this
appendix and for new publications relating to material covered in this manual:
AR 310-25 Dictionary of United States Army Terms
AR 310-50 Authorized Abbreviations and Brevity Codes
DA PAM 310-1 Consolidated Index of Army Publications and Blank Forms

A-2. Publication References

The following is a list of publications and forms referenced in this manual and/or likely to be required by the
manual user.
AR310-20 Allied Communications Publications (ACP'S)
AR 385-40 Accident Reporting and Records
AR 385-63 Regulation for. Firing Ammunition for Training, Target Practice, and Combat
AR 385-65 Identification of Inert Ammunition and Ammunition Components
AR 702-7 Reporting of Quality Deficiency Data
AR 725-50 Requisitioning, Receipt, and Issue System
AR 755-15 Disposal of Unwanted Radioactive Material
DA Form 2765 Request for Issue or Turn-in
DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms
TM 3-220 Chemical, Biological and Radiological (CBR) Decontamination
TM 3-1040-266-20&P Organizational Maintenance Manual (Including Repair Parts and Special Tools
Lists) Launcher, Grendade, Smoke: Screening, RP, M239 (NSN 1040-01-015-
0874)
TM 3-^1240-255-14 Operator's, Organizational Direct and General Support Maintenance Manual
(Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List): Mask, Chemical Biological,
Tank, M25A1 and Accessories
TM 3-4240-280-10 Operator's Manual Mask, Chemical-Biological: Tank and Accessories and Mask,
Chemical-Biological: Tank M25/M25A1 and Accessories
TM 3-4240-280-23&P Organizational and DS Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and
Special Tools Lists: Mask, Chemical-Biological: Aircraft, ABC-M24 and
Accessories and Mask, Chemical-Biological: Tank M25/M25A1 and
Accessories
TM 3-6680-316-10 Operator's Manual for Tester, Airflow, Gas-Particulate Filter Unit: M39 |
TM 9-2350-253-10 Operator's Manual: Tank, Combat, Full Tmcked: 105mm Gun, M60A3 W/E
TM 9-2350-253-20P-2 Organizational Repair Parts Manual: Tank, Combat, Full-Tracked: 105mm
Gun, M60A3 W/E (To be published)
TM 9-4931-360-14&P Operation, Organizational, Direct and General Support Maintenance Manual
for Cable Test Set
TM 9-4931-361-14&P Operator's, Organizational, Direct and General Support Maintenance Manual
with Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Field Test Set
TM 9-4931-362-14&P Operator's, Organizational, Direct and General Support Maintenance Manual
with Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Laser Test Set
DA PAM 738-750 The Army Maintenance Management Systems (TAMMS)

Change 4 A-l
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

L0 9-2350-253-12 Lubrication Order for Tank, Combat, Full Tracked: 105mm Gun, M60A3 W/E
TM 9-207 Operation and Maintenance of Army Materiel in Cold Weather 0° to -65°
TM 9-1005-313-10 Operator's Manual for Machine Gun: 7.62mm, M240 (1005-01-025-8095)
TM 9-1005-313-23 Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Machine
Gun, 7.62-MM, M240 (NSN 1005-01-025-8095) and M240C
(1005-01-085-4758)
TM 9-1005-313-24P Organizational, Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Repair Parts
and Special Tools List for Machine Gun 7.62mm, M240
TM 9-1005-231-10 Operator's Manual: M85 Machine Gun
TM 9-1005-231-25 Organizational, Direct Support, General Support, and Depot Maintenance
Manual (Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List) for Machine Gun
Caliber 50 M85
TM 43-0139 Painting Instructions for Field Use
TM 9-237 Operator's Manual: Welding Theory and Application (TO 34W4-1-5)
TM 9-238 Deep Water Fording of Ordnance Materiel
TM 9-243 Use and Care of Hand Tools and Measuring Tools
TM 9-254 General Maintenance Procedures for Fire Control Materiel
TM 9-500 Ordnance Corps Equipment Data Sheets
TM 9-1290-200-14&P Operator's, Organizational, DS and GS Maintenance Manual Including Repair
Parts and Special Tools Lists (Includes Depot Maintenance Repair Parts and
Special Tools) for Quadrant, Fire Control (Gunner's) M1A1 W/E, and
M1A2 (Radioactive) W/E
TM 9-1300-206 Ammunition and Explosives Standards
TM 9-6650-215-12 Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Binocular, I/R M18 W/E
TM 11-5820-498-12 Operator's Organizational Maintenance Manual, Including Repair Parts and
Special Tools List, Radio Sets AN/VRC-53 and AN/GRC-125 and Amplifier
Power Supply Group OA-3633/GRC
TM 11-5855-217-12-2 Operator's and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Searchlight Set, In
frared, AN/VSS-3 and AN/VSS-3A
TM 11-5915-224-14 Operator's, Organizational, Direct Support and General Support Maintenance
Manual for Suppressor, Electrical Transient MX-7778A/GRC
TM 1 1-6230-219-12 Operator, Organizational Maintenance Manual for Searchlight D.C. 28 volt, 100
Amp Xenon Type Infrared and Visible
TM 740-90-1 Administrative Storage of Equipment
TM 750-116 General Procedures for Purging and Charging of Fire Control
Instruments
TM 750-244- 6 Procedures for Destruction of Tank-Automotive Equipment to Prevent Enemy
Use (US Army Tank-Automotive Command)
TM 750-244-7 Procedures for Destruction of Equipment in Federal Supply Classifications
1000, 1005, 1010, 1015, 1020, 1025, 1030, 1055, 1090 and 1095 to Prevent
Enemy Use
A-3. Miscellaneous Manuals
FM 21-30 Military Symbols
FM 31-70 Basic Cold Weather Manual
FM 31-71 Northern Operations
FM 31-72 Mountain Operations
SC-1305/30-IL Ammunition and Explosives
SC-4931-95-CL-J54 Purging Kit, Fire Control: Organization, Direct and General Support
Maintenance
TB 43-0209 Color, Marking and Camouflage Painting of Military Vehicles, Construction
Equipment, and Materials Handling Equipment
TB ORD 548 All Combat Vehicles: Failure of Azimuth Indicators

A-2 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

APPENDIX B
MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART

Section I. INTRODUCTION

B-1. General. module (component or assembly) for an unser

viceable counterpart.
This maintenance allocation chart designates f. Repair. The application of main
overall responsibility for the performance of tenance services or other maintenance
maintenance functions on the M60A3 Tank actions to restore serviceability to an item by
Turret and its components. correcting specific damage, fault, mal
function, or failure of a part, subassembly,
B-2. Maintenance Functions. module (component or assembly), end item, or
system.
Maintenance Functions will be limited to and /. Overhaul. That maintenance effort
defined as follows: (service/action) necessary to restore an item
a. Inspect. To determine the service to a completely serviceable/operational con
ability of an item by comparing its physical, dition as prescribed by maintenance standards
mechanical, or electrical characteristics with (i.e., DMWR) in appropriate technical publi
established standards through examination. cation. Overhaul is normally the highest
b. Test. To verify serviceability and degree of maintenance performed by the
detect incipient failure by measuring the Army. Overhaul does not normally return an
mechanical or electrical characteristics of an item to like new condition.
item and comparing those characteristics k. Rebuild. Consists of services/actions
with prescribed standards. necessary for the restoration of unserviceable
c. Service. Operations required period equipment to a like new condition in ac
ically to keep an item in proper operating cordance with original manufacturing
condition, i.e., to clean (decontaminate), to standards. Rebuild is the highest degree of
preserve, to drain, to paint, or to replenish materiel maintenance applied to Army equip
fuel, lubricants, hydraulic fluids, or compres ment. The rebuild operation includes the act
sed air supplies. of returning to zero those age measurements
d. Adjust. To maintain, within prescribed (hours/miles, etc.) considered in classifying
limits, by bringing into proper or exact Army equipments/components.
position, or by setting the operating char
acteristics to specified parameters. B-3. Column Entries.
e. Aline. To adjust specified variable
elements of an item to bring about optimum Columns used in the maintenance allocation
or desired performance. chart are explained below:
f. Calibrate. To determine and cause a. Column 1, Group Number. Column 1
corrections to be made or to be adjusted on lists group numbers, the purpose of which is
instruments or test, measuring, and diag to identify components, assemblies, subas
nostic equipments used in precision measure semblies, and modules with the next higher
ment. Consists of comparisons of two instru assembly.
ments, one of which is a certified standard of b. Column 2, Component/Assembly. Col
known accuracy, to detect and adjust any umn 2 contains the noun names of com
discrepancy in the accuracy of the instrument ponents, assemblies, subassemblies, and mod
being compared. ules for which maintenance is authorized.
g. Install. The act of emplacing, seating, c. Column 3, Maintenance Functions.
or fixing into position an item, part, or Column 3 lists the functions to be performed
module ( component or assembly ) in a man on the item listed in Column 2.
ner to allow the proper functioning of an d. Column 4, Maintenance Category.
equipment or system. (1) Column 4 specifies, by the listing
h. Replace. The act of substituting a of a Work Time figure in the appropriate
serviceable-like type part, sub-assembly, or subcolumn(s), the lowest level of maintenance

B-1
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

authorized to perform the function listed in for the maintenance functions authorized in
Column 3. This figure represents the active the maintenance allocation chart.
time required to perform that maintenance (2) The subcolumn categories under
function at the indicated category of main Column 4 are as follows:
tenance. If the number or complexity of the C Operator/Crew
tasks within the listed maintenance function O Organizational Maintenance
vary at different maintenance categories, F Direct Support Maintenance
appropriate Work Time figures will be shown H General Support Maintenance
for each category. The number of man-hours D Depot Maintenance
specified by the Work Time figure represents e. Column 5, Tools and Equipment.
the average time required to restore an item Column 5 specifies by code those common
(assembly, subassembly, component, module, tool sets (not individual tools) and special
end item or system) to a serviceable con tools, test, and support equipment required to
dition under typical field operating condi perform the designated function. This
tions. This time includes preparation time, equipment is listed in Section HI.
troubleshooting time, and quality assurance/- f. Columns, Remarks. Column six (6)
quality control time in addition to the time contains an alphabetic code (see remarks in
required to perform specific tasks identified Section IV) which is pertinent to the item
opposite the particular code.

Section II. MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Group Maintenance Maintenance category Tools and Re
No. Component/Assembly function C 0 P H D equipment marks

00 Box, Stowage, Grenade Inspect 0.1 G

Smoke Replace 0.7 94
00 Filter Assembly, Stab Service 0.5 94
ilization system Repair 0.8 94 i
00 Interconnecting Cables, Inspect 0.1
LRF Test 0.5 70
Replace 0.6
00 Interface Cables, XM21 Inspect 0.1
(Numbers 1, 2 and 3) Test 0.5 70
Replace 0.2 94
00 Periscope, M37 Inspect 0.1
Replace 0.1 94
00 Platform, Turret Inspect 0.1
Repair 0.& 6.0 94,96
00 Heater, M3, Gas Inspect 0.1
Particulate Replace 0.2 94
Repair 0.1 0.1 0.7 94, 96,97
Overhaul 1.2
00 Shroud Assembly, Inspect 0.1
Thermal Service 0.1
Replace 0.2 94
00 Tank Thermal Sight Inspect 0.3 L
AN/VSG-2 Test 0.1
Service 0.3 0.5
Adjust 0.5
Replace 0.5 94
Repair 0.3 40.0
Overhaul 160.0

B-2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section II. MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART - Continued

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Group Maintenance Maintenance categ ory Tools and Re
No. Component/Assembly function C 0 F H D equipment marks

00 • Indicator, Azimuth Inspect 0.2

M28A2 Test 0.1
Replace 0.5 94
Adjust 0.1
Repair 0.1 2.0 96,98
Overhaul 3.0
00 Drive, Ballistic, Inspect 0.1
M10A3 Test 0.1
Adjust 0.1 87 F
Replace 2.0 68,96,41
Repair 1.0 96, 98, 68
Overhaul 4.0 54, 57, 63
81, 85
00 Mount, Telescope Inspect 0.1
M114 Service 0.3
Replace 1.0 94
Repair 2.0 96,98
Overhaul 4.0
00 Mount, Periscope Inspect 0.1
M119 Adjust 0.1 94
Service 0.3
Replace 1.0 96
Repair 0.1 2.0 96
Overhaul 4.0
00 Mount, Periscope, Inspect 0.1
M118E1 (On Tanks Adjust 0.1 94
equipped with Service 0.3
M35E1) Replace 1.0 96
Repair 0.1 2.0 96, 98
Overhaul 4.0
00 Pushbutton Unit, Repair 0.4 94
Grenade Replace 0.1 94
00 Brackets, Grenade Inspect 0.2 0.4
Discharger Mounting, Replace 3.0 96
Left Repair 0.5
00 Discharger, Grenade, Inspect 0.1
Smoke, Left Test 0.5 95
Repair 1.5 94
Replace 0.3 94
00 Harness, Electrical, Test 0.5
Grenade Discharger, Replace 2.0 94
Power
00 Harness, Electrical, Test 0.5 95
Grenade Discharger Replace 2.0 94
Left *
00 Brackets, Grenade Inspect 0.2 0.4
Discharger Mounting Replace 3.0 94
Right Repair 0.5

B-3
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section II. MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART - Continued

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Group Maintenance Maintenance category Tools and Re
No. Component/Assembly function C 0 P H D equipment marks

00 Discharger, Grenade, Inspect 0.1

Smoke, Right Test 0.5 95
Replace 0.3 94
00 Harness, Electrical, Test 0.5 95
Grenade Discharger, Replace 2.0 94
Right
00 Cover, Mantlet, Inspect 0.5
Gun Shield Service 0.8 94
01 Ring Assembly, Turret, Inspect 0.2 B
Electrical Contact Test 0.5 95,99
Adjust 0.3 M
Replace 2.0 94
Repair 4.5 96
04 Harness, Wiring, Inspect 0.2
Turret Control Test 0.8 20
Replace 3.0
Repair 1.8 1.0 16,95,96
97
05 Harness, Wiring, Inspect 0.2
Turret Electromagnetic Test 0.8 20
Interference and Gun Replace 3.0
Control Repair 1.8 1.0 16, 95, 96,
97
06 Distribution Box Inspect 0.2
Assembly, Vent Replace 0.5
Blower Repair 2.0
07 Domelights Inspect 0.1
Replace 0.7 94
Repair 0.2 1.5 94, 95
08 Box, Turret Power Inspect 0.1
Relay and Circuit Test 0.5 99
Breaker Replace 0.4 94
Repair 1.0 96
0801 Lead, Relay Blower Inspect 0.2
Motor Test 0.5
Replace 0.8 3.0 94
Repair 1.8 1.0 94, 95, 97
0802 Lead, Turret Power Inspect 0.2
Relay Test 0.5 95
Replace 0.8 3.0 94
Repair 1.8 1.0 94,95,97
0805 Harness, Turret Power Inspect 0.2
and Searchlight Relay Test 0.5 95
Replace 0.8 3.0 94
Repair 1.8 1.0 94,95,97
0806 Lead, Turret Power Inspect 0.2
and Searchlight Relay Test 0.5 95
Replace 0.8 3.0 94

B-4
 TM 9-2360-253-20-2

Section II. MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART - Continued

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) .(6)

Group Maintenance Maintenance category Tools and Re
No. Component/Assembly function C 0 F H D equipment marks

Repair 1.8 1.0 94, 95, 97

09 Control Box, Gunners Inspect 0.1
Test 1.0 95
Replace 0.5 94
Repair 0.1 0.6 94, 95
09A Wiring Harness, Replace *
Vehicle TTS Interface Repair * 94, 95
0901 Harness, Gunners Inspect 0.2
Control Box, Wiring Test 0.2 94, 95
Replace 1.0 94, 95
Repair 0.5 94, 95
10 Blower Assembly, Inspect 0.1
Turret Ventilator Test 0.2 99
Replace 1.0 94
Repair 2.5 96
11 Clamp, Elevation Inspect 0.1
Interference Switch Adjust 0.3 94
Replace 0.3 94
Repair 0.5 94
12 Switch Assembly, Inspect 0.1 0.1
Loaders Safety Test 0.1 95
Service 0.1
Adjust 0.3 8,94
Replace 1.5 8,94
Repair 1.0 8,94
13 Machine, Blasting Inspect 0.1 94
Replace 0.3 94
Repair 0.4 94
15 Box Assembly, Net Inspect 0.1
work Test 0.5 95
Replace 0.7 94
Repair 0.1 0.1 2.0 94, 95, 96
99
16 Cupola Electrical Inspect 0.5
Terminal Board Replace 6.0 97, 98
Components Repair 5.0 97, 98
18 Panel Assembly, Inspect 0.1
Cupola Test 0.5 98
Replace 0.7 94
Repair 0.1 0.1 2.0 94, 95, 96,
99
22 Seat Assembly, Inspect 0.1
Gunners Service 0.2
Repair 0.5 94
33 Seat Assembly, Inspect 0.1
Commanders, Swing Service 0.2
Repair 0.5 94
37 Seat Assembly, Inspect 0.1
Commanders Service 0.2
Repair 0.5 94
TM 9-2350-253-20-2
Section U. MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART - Continued

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Group Maintenance Maintenance category Tools and Re- "
No. Component/Assembly function C 0 P H D equipment marks
38 Seat Assembly, Inspect 0.1
Loaders Service 0.2
Repair 0.5 94
40 Hatch Assembly, Inspect 0.1
Loaders Service 0.3
Repair 1.0 94
42 Gun Mount, Combination Inspect 3.0 A
M140A1 Test 2.0 100
Repair 30.0 3, 7,9,10,
12 A
Overhaul * 12, 23
4201 Cannon, 105MM Gun, Inspect 0.5 1.0
M68 Service 2.0
Replace 2.0 94, 96, 100
420101 Breech Mechanism Inspect 0.1 0.5
Service 0.5
Adjust 0.1
Replace 57.0 21,94
Repair 2.5 94
420101 Breech Black Inspect 0.3
Components Service 0.8
Repair 1.5 * 94 A
420101 Breech Ring Inspect 0.1
01 Service 0.5
Repair 3.0 94
420101 Operating Components Inspect 0.1
02 Breech Repair 0.3 94
Replace 0.5 94
420101 Closing Components Inspect 0.4
03 Breech Repair 0.5 94
Replace 1.5 94
4202 Cam, Gun Mount Inspect 0.2
Adjust 0.3 94
Replace 1.0 94
Repair 1.0 94
4203 Replenisher Assembly Inspect 0.1
Service 0.2
Replace 0.7 94
Repair 2.5 4.0 94
Repair 0.1 0.1 94
43 Mount, Machine Gun Inspect 0.1
7.62MM, M240 Service 1.0
Replace 0.4 94
Repair 94
44 Cupola, Assembly, Inspect 0.3 N
(Includes Race Ring) Service 0.5
Repair 8.0 14,94
4401 Lock Assembly, Cupola Inspect 0.1 0.1
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2
Section H. MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART - Continued

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Group Maintenance Maintenance category Tools and Re
No. Component/Assembly function C 0 P H D equipment marks

Service 0.4
Adjust 0.4
Repair 2.0 94
4402 Hatch Assembly, Inspect 0.1
Cupola Service 0.2
Repair 1.0 94
4405 Cradle Assembly, Inspect 0.1 0,1
Cupola Service 0.2
Adjust 0.4
Replace 2.7 94
Repair 4.0 94
4406 Gearbox Assembly, Inspect 0.1
Azimuth, Cupola Adjust 0.5 94
Service 1.0
Replace 0.5 94
Repair 0.5 7.5 94,96
4407 Screw Jack Assembly, Inspect 0.1
Cupola Elevating Service 0.1 0.2
Replace 0.8 96
Repair 0.5 4.6 94, 96
4408 Boxes, Ammunition Inspect 0.1
and Feed System Service 0.1
Replace 0.3 94
Repair 0.4 94
440801 Switch Assembly, Inspect 0.1
Last Round Adjust 0.2 94
Replace 0.5 94
Repair 0.1 0.1 94
45 Power Pack, Control Inspect 0.1
Assembly Service 0.1 0.5 c
Repair 4.0 * 94, 96, 100
Overhaul 24.0
45 Motor, Electric Inspect 0.2
Power Pack 10 HP Replace 4.0 94 K
4502 Pump Assembly, Inspect 0.1
Manual Elevation Test 1.0 100
Replace 1.0 96
Repair 0.3 3.0 24
4503 Control Assembly, Inspect 0.1
Gunners Test 2.0 100
Adjust 0.5 0.5 94,96 I
Replace 2.0 94
Repair 1.0 8.0 94, 96
Overhaul 16.0
4506 Accumulator Assembly, Inspect 0.1
Manual Elevation Test 1.0 100
Service 0.5 13, 100
Replace 1.0 13, 94, 100
Repair 0.2 2.0 25,94,96

B-7
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section II. MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART - Continued

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Group Maintenance Maintenance category Tools and Re
No. Component/Assembly function C 0 P H D equipment marks

46 Control Handle, Inspect 0.1

Commanders, Manual Adjust 0.5 0.5 94,96 I
Replace 2.0 94
Repair 8.0 97,96
Overhaul 16.0
47 Elevating Mechanism Inspect 0.3
Assembly Test 2.0 100
Replace 4.0 94
Repair 6.0 96
Overhaul
4704 Elevation Manifold Inspect 0.1
Assembly, Stabilizer Replace 1.0 19,96
Repair 0.8 * 94,96
48 Accumulator Assembly, Inspect 0.1
Main Test 0.1 100
Service 0.3 2, 5, 13, 100
Replace 2.0 94
Repair 0.5 2.0 94
96, 100
49 Valve, Deck Clearance, Test 0.3
Elevation, Shutoff Replace 1.0 94
Repair 0.7 94
50 Actuator Assembly, Inspect 0.1
Superelevation Test 1.0 100
Replace 2.0 94
Repair 2.0 8.0 94,96 N
51 Ring, Race Inspect 0.3
Assembly, Turret Service 0.5 94
Replace 16.0 4, 16,96
Repair 16.0 4, 16,96
Overhaul 24.0
52 Gearbox, Traversing Inspect 0.1
Turret Adjust 0.2 6, 94
Test 0.2
Service 0.5
Replace 8.0 1, 6, 15, 96
Repair 32.0 96
5201 Motor, Hydraulic Inspect 0.5
Gearbox Test 0.1 100
Replace 1.0 96
Repair 8.0 96
Overhaul 24.0
520201 Backlash Assembly, Inspect 0.1
Traverse Adjust 0.5 6, 94
Replace 0.5 94
Repair 0.7 94
5203 Lock Assembly, Inspect 0.1
Traverse Gearbox Replace 0.3 94
Repair 0.5 94
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section II. MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART - Continued

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Group Maintenance Maintenance category Tools and Re
No. Component/Assembly function C 0 E H D equipment marks

5205 NO-BAK Assembly, Inspect 0.1

Traverse Gearbox Test 0.1 17
Replace 0.5 94
Repair 2.0 4.9 17, 18, 94
96
53 Lock, Turret Inspect 0.1
Traverse Replace 0.4 94
Repair 0.5 2.0 94,96
54 Drive, Turret Inspect 0.1
Manual Traverse Replace 0.5 94
Repair 1.0 2.0 94,96
55 Rate Sensor Inspect 0.1
Assembly, Stabilization Replace 0.4 19,94
Repair * A
56 Manifold, Traverse Inspect 0.1
Assembly, Stabilize Replace 0.8 94
Repair 0.3 0.5 94, 100 A,E
57 Box, Distribution, Inspect 0.1
Control Selector, Test 0.3 19, 99
Stabilization Replace 0.5 94
Repair 0.1 0.2 0.5 19, 94, 95
96
58 Controller Unit, Inspect 1.0
Electronics Adjust 0.1 19, 94
Replace 0.3 18,94
Repair * A
59 Box Assembly, Inspect 0.1
Shutoff Stabilization Test 0.5 19, 99
Replace 0.3 94
Repair 0.1 0.1 0.5 19, 94, 95
96
60 Blower Assembly, Inspect 0.1
Powerpack Test 0.2
Replace 2.0 94
Repair 1.0 94

6201 Computer, Ballistics Inspect 0.1

M21 Test 0.1 0.2 48,71

Replace 0.2 94
Repair 1.0 64, 69, 96
97

Change 4 B-9
TM 9-2350-253-20-2
Section II. MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART - Continued

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Group Maintenance Maintenance category Tools and Re
No. Component/Assembly function C 0 F H D equipment marks

Overhaul 8.0
6202 Control Unit, Inspect 0.1
Gunner's M21 Test 0.1 0.2 71
Replace 0.2 94
Repair 0.1 0.1 1.0 64, 69, 96
97
Overhaul 4.0
6203 Ammo Select, Inspect 0.1
Commander's and Test 0.1 0.3 70
Gunner's, M21 Replace 0.2 94
Repair 0.1 0.1 1.0 94, 95, 97
Overhaul 2.0
6204 Rate Tachometer, Inspect 0.1
M21 Test 0.1
Replace 0.2 94
Repair 1.0 64,69
Overhaul 2.0
6205 Cant Unit, M21 Inspect 0.1
Test 0.1 47
Replace 0.2 94
Repair 2.0 64,69
Overhaul 4.0
6206 Output Unit, M21 Inspect 0.1
Test 0.1
Replace 0.5 94
Repair 1.0 64,69
Overhaul 4.0
6207 Crosswind Sensor, Inspect 0.1
M21 and Mast Test 0.1
Replace 0.2 94
Repair 2.0
6301 Electronics Unit, LRF Inspect 0.1
Test 0.1 0.5 72, 77
Replace 0.3 47, 73, 94
Repair 1.0 47, 64, 69
87, 72, 96
97
Overhaul 4.0 73, 74, 86
87
630201 Receiver-Transmitter, Inspect 1.0
Laser Rangefinder Test 0.1 0.5 72
Service 0.3 47, 64, 69
73
Replace 0.5 84, 88, 94
Repair 0.1 0.1 1.0 47, 64, 69
72, 94, 95
97,98
Overhaul 4.0 73, 74, 86
87,82

B-10
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section II. MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART - Continued

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Group Maintenance Maintenance category Tools and Re- "
No. Component/Assembly function C 0 F H D equipment marks

630211 Center Bearing, LRF Inspect 0.1

Adjust 0.7 76, 78
Replace 0.5 67, 96
68 Light Control Source, Inspect 0.1
M105D Telescope Replace 0.2 94
Repair 0.1 0.2 96
69 Light Control Source, Inspect 0.1
Elevation Quadrant Replace 0.2 94
Repair 0.1 0.2 96
70 Hanger Assembly, Inspect 0.1
M105D Telescope Replace 0.1 94
Repair 0.1 1.0 94
71 Telescope, Inspect 0.1
Articulated, M105D Service 0.3
Replace 0.2 64, 69, 94
Repair 1.0 27, 28, 45
61, 62, 80
94, 96, 98
Overhaul 8.0 38, 39, 41
44, 53, 65
82,84
76 Light Control Source Inspect 0.1
M36E1 Periscope Replace 0.2 94
Repair 0.1 0.2 96
7701 Head Assembly, Inspect 0.2
M36E1 Periscope Service 0.2 64, 69
Replace 0.2 94
Repair 1.0 27-30, 63
64, 80, 96
98
Overhaul 4.0 34, 37, 43
44, 46, 49
53, 74, 83
7702 Body Assembly, Inspect 0.2
(Daylight) M36E1 Service 0.2 64,69
Periscope Replace 0.2 94
Repair 0.1 2.0 27-30, 61
62, 80, 96
98
Overhaul 4.0 37, 43, 44
46, 52, 53
56, 74, 84
7703 Body Assembly, Inspect 0.2
(Passtive) M36E1 Service 0.2 64, 69
Periscope (on tanks Replace 0.2 94
equipped with M36E1 Repair 0.1 2.0 27-30, 45
61,62,80
96, 98

B-11
HI 9-2350-253-20-2

Section II. MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART - Continued

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Group Maintenance Maintenance category Tools and Re-
No. Component/Assembly function C 0 P H D marks

Overhaul 4.0 34, 42

44, 52, 53
66, 74, 77
82
7901 Head Assembly, Inspect 0.2
M35E1 (on tanks Service 0.6 64, 69
equipped with M35E1) Replace 0.6 94
Repair 1.0 27-30, 45
61, 62, 80
96, 98
Overhaul 4.0 36,40,44
53, 74
7902 Body Assembly, Inspect 0.2
(Daylight) Service 0.2 64, 69
Periscope (on tanks Replace 0.2 83,94
equipped with M35E1) Repair 0.1 2.0 27-30,45
96, 98
61,62,80
Overhaul 4.0 27, 34, 36
42,44, 52
53, 55, 74
82
7903 Body Assembly, Inspect 0.2
(Passive) M35E1, Service 0.2 0.1 64,69
M35E1 Periscope Replace 0.1 94
Repair 0.1 2.0 27-30, 61
62, 96, 98
Overhaul 4.0 35,43
44,46, 53
54,66,74
77,84
80 Quadrant, Fire Inspect 0.1
Control, M13A3 Adjust 0.1
Replace 0.3 94
Repair 0.1 1.0 96,98
Overhaul 3.0 49
81 Reticle, Projector Inspect 0.1
(on tanks equipped Test 0.1
with M35E1) Service 0.3 64,69
Replace 0.2 94
Repair 0.1 2.0 94
Overhaul 4,0
83 Hose Assemblies Inspect 0.1 0.1
Gas Particulate Replace 0.4 94
Heater Outlet Repair 0.4 94
84 Connector, Gas Inspect 0.1 0.1
Particulate Outlet Replace 0.4

B-12
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section II. MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART - Continued

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Group Maintenance Maintenance category Tools and Re
No. Component/Assembly function C 0 F H D equipment marks

Hose Repair 0.4 94

8401 Hose, Heater Inspect 0.1 0.1
Outlet Replace 0.4 94
86 Box, Grenade Test 0.1
Discharger Power Repair 0.1 0.1 0.5 94,96
Replace 0.1 94
95 Test Set Assembly, Inspect 0.1
Stabilization Test 0.3
Repair 0.1 * A
95 Test Set, Turret Inspect 0.1
Electrical System Test 0.2 A
Repair 0.1 *
Boxes, Racks Inspect. 0.2
and Straps, Service 0.2
Turret Replace 1.0 94

B-13
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section III. TOOL AND TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

NOTE
Section III. TOOL AND TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS is replaced in its entirety
with no change symbols.

Tool or test
equipment
reference Maintenance National/NATO
code category Nomenclature stock number Tool number

TURRET AND ARMAMENT

TOOLS

1 F. H,D Adapter, Installing: Traversing 5120-00-5884986 8708442

Mechanism Lower Housing
Over Output Shaft
2 0, F, H, D Adapter Assy., Compressed Gas 4933-00-103 2802 11658921
Cylinder Valve Connection
3 F.H.D Adapter, Torque Wrench 5120-00-348-8409 8449228
4 F.H.D Bolt, Eye, Lifting: Turret Race 5306-00-699-1282 8708807
Assy.
5 O, F, H, D Box Assy., Accumulator 2540-00-213-6749 10924313
Charging Device
6 O, F, H, D Clamp, V-Blocks: Adjusting 5120-00-672-2609 8762133
Traversing Mechanism Output
Pinions Backlash
7 F. H,D Clamp, Puller and Lifting 4933-00-039-5025 8390439
8 O, F, H,D Crowfoot, Adapter: To torque 6120-01-028-5277 11655447
nut that locks adjustable stop
to loader's safety switch
9 F, H,D Fixture, Test, Recoil Mechanism 4933-00-830-5637 10893684
10 F.H.D Fixture Assy., Recoil Spring 4933-00-393-0240 8390072
Compressor (for Assembly
and Disassembly of Concen
tric Recoil Mechanism)
11 F, H,D Pliers, Retaining Ring, External 5120-00-595-9552 7083704
12 F.H.D Protector Assembly, Concentric: 4933-00-039-5028 8708628
(to protect threaded end of
recoil mechanism piston when
disassembled)
13 0, F, H, D Regulator Assy., Charging, 4910-00-861-2068 11615420
Accumulator
14 F.H.D Sling, Cupola Lifting 4933-00-480-5662 11658914
15 F.H.D Sling, Lifting: Traversing Mech 4910-00-708-3778 7083778
anism Gearbox Assy.
16 F.H.D Sling, Turret Lifting 4933-00-938-3008 11615469
17 0, F, H, D Socket, Socket Wrench: 5120-00-627-8018 7383534
NO-BAK Testing Input Shaft
18 F.H.D Socket, Socket Wrench: 5120-00-627-8019 7383535
NO-BAK Testing Output Shaft
19 0, F, H, D Test Set, Stabilization 4933-01-046-7893 12252405
20 0, F, H, D Test Set, Turret Electrical System 4933-00-489-7398 11676011
21 F, H,D Tool Assembly, Breech Lifting 4933-00-775-3742 10870403
22 D Tube Assembly, Stabilization Test 4710-00-478-3041 11654032
23 F.H.D Wrench, Spanner: Adapter Nut 5120-00-986-3129 10924472
24 F, H,D Wrench, Spanner: Hand Elevating 5120-00-555-9031 7010376
Bearing Retainer

B-14 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section III. TOOL AND TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS • Continued

Tool or test
equipment
reference Maintenance National/NATO
code category Nomenclature stock number Tool number

TURRET AND ARMAMENT TOOLS - Continued

25 F.H.D Wrench, Spanner: Removing and 5120-00-902-5536 10952096

Replacing End Ring of Turret
and Gun Control Accumulator

FIRE CONTROL INSTRUMENT

TOOLS
26 H,D Adapter, Body, Daylight: used 4931-00-065-2010 8289189
w/Fixture 4931-00-508-5434
27 F.H.D Adapter, Gun, Sealing (No. 5-44NF) 4930-00-764-8128 7648128
28 F.H.D Adapter, Gun, Sealing (No. 8-36NF) 4930-00-764-8129 7648129
29 F.H.D Adapter, Gun, Sealing (No. 10- 4930-00-764-8130 7648130
32NF)
30 F.H.D Adapter, Gun, Sealing ('4-20NC) 4930-00-764-8131 7648131
31 D Adapter, Tube Tester: used 4931-00-909-3144 8566741
w/Tube Tester 4931-00-053-
3644
32 D Adapter, Torque, for Coupling 4931-00-045-4360 10549918
33 D Adapter, Torque, Elevation Input 4931-00-916-8140 8591108
Shaft: used w/Wrench, Torque
5120-00-529-2552
34 D Adapter, Torque, for Daylight 4931-00-916-7864 8591107
Diopter: used w/Wrench,
Torque 5120-00-529-2552
35 D Adapter, Torque IF/IR Body Diop 4931-00-916-8099 8591106
ter (Used w/Wrench Torque
5120-529-2552) for IR Body
Assy., diopter scale
36 D Adapter, Vibration: used w/Fixture 4931-00-930-9030 8575736
Vibration Machine (lg)
4931-00-929-8387
37 D Adapter, Vibration: used 4931-00-998-0034 8575658
w/Fixture Vibration Machine
(lg) 4931-00-939-8387
38 D Adapter, Vibration: used to 4931-00-948-1556 8246094
Secure Telescope M105E1
During Shock Test
39 D Adapters, Test Assy., Fixture: 4931-00-863-5656 8213889
used w/Fixture 4931-00-601-
2241
40 F.H.D Carrying Case Assembly: Aline- 4931-00-628-1332 11738863
ment Special Tools and Test
Equipment
41 0,F, H,D Tool Clamp, Installation and 4931-00-348-8435 11727430
Removal

Change 4 B-15
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section III. TOOL AND TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS • Continued

Tool or test
equipment
reference Maintenance National/NATO
code category Nomenclature stock number Tool number

FIRE CONTROL INSTRUMENT TOOLS - Continued

42 D Collimator, Auxiliary 4931-00-554-9108 5549108

43 D Collimator, Light Assembly 4931-00-010-4506 10540493
44 D Collimator, Projector: used w/ 4931-00-757-3291 7573291
Fixture 4931-00-066-8879
and/or 4931-00-947-3045
46 F.H.D Dioptometer 4931-00-536-5557 7680631
46 D Fixture, Auto-Collimating: Used
Prior to Final Inspection on
Body and Head Assembly
(M36E1)
47 F.H.D Electronics Unit: System Simula- 5120-00-116-2829 11743131
lation
48 0, F, H, D Fixture, Test Cant Angle Sensor 4931-00-051-0839 17747415
49 H,D Fixture, Cross Leveling, Elevation: 4931-00452-3553 6523553
Used for Final Inspection of
Elevation Quadrant M13A3
50 D Fixture IR Body Assy. (Used 4931-00-914-5164 10540492
w/4931-601-2241)
51 D Fixture, Final Inspection (M36E1) 4931-00-066-8879 8565964
52 D Fixture, Final Inspection: used 4931-00-947-3045 10527438
w/Collimator, Projector
4931-00-757-3291 (M35E1)
53 D Fixture, Pressure Test w/Adapters 4931-00-065-2018 8565556
54 D Fixture, Synchronization: used to 4931-00-1974462 0000090
Synchronize M85 Machine Gun
and M36E1 Periscope
55 H,D Fixture, Telescope Test 4931-00-508-5434 7573980
56 D Fixture, Test and Adjustment 4931-00-948-1555 8565537
Inspect. w/Equipment: To
Inspect and Qualify Ballistic
Drive Assembly
57 D Fixture, Holding: For Lead Screw 4931-00-839-6670 10549897
Assembly on Ballistic Drive
58 D Future, Vibration: Used to Sim 4931-00-535-7843 7661921
ulate Operating Condition of
Telescope
59 D Fork Coupling: Used as Spring 4931-00-065-0536 8566245
Depressor for Coupling Assembly
on Ballistic Drive
60 D Gage, Height, Vernier: Using 5210-00-2224566 GGG-C-
During Final Inspection 111
w/Fixture 4931-00-948-1555
61 F.H.D Gun, Hydraulic, Sealing 4931-00-764-8134 7648134
62 F.H.D Gun, Sealing Hand 4930-00-764-8117 7648117
63 D Indicator, Dial: Used w/Gage 5210-00-277-8840 MIL-I-
5120-00-222-4566 18422D

B-16 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section III. TOOL AND TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS • Continued

Tool or teat
equipment
reference Maintenance National/NATO
code category Nomenclature stock number Tool number

FIRE CONTROL INSTRUMENT TOOLS • Continued

64 0, F.H.D Kit, Purging 4931-00-065-1110 SC4931-

95CLJ54
65 H,D Level, Precision, 5-second: Used to 5120-00-5466362 7686087
Set Up a Horizontal Plane for
Test Fixtures and Surface Plate
66 D Power Supply: Used w/Tube Tester 4931-00-536-5556 7561204
4931-00-053-3644, Supplies volt
age to inspect M35E1 and M36E1
periscopes image intensifier tubes
prior to installation
67 0, F. H, D Wrench Socket Face Spanner to 5120-01-044-5870 11674380
Remove Bearing of LRF
Receiver/Transmitter
68 F.H.D Spacer, Gage, .719: Used w/ 4931-00-065-0538 8566947
M118E1 Periscope and Ballistic
Drive Coupling
69 O.F, H,D Tank, Nitrogen, Dry: Used w/Purg- BB-N-411,
ingKit 4931-00-065-1110 6830-00-782-2641 Type.I
Class I,
Grade B
70 0,F,H,D Test Set, Cable 4931-00-629-3539 11733300
71 F.H.D Test Set, Field: For Computer 4931-00-629-3541 11733200
XM21
72 F. H,D Test Set, Laser Rangefinder No NSN 11745900
73 F.H.D Tester, Laser Receiver/Transmitter 4931-00-169-0114 10559600
74 F.H.D Receiver-Transmitter, LRF for No NSN 11748121
System Simulation
75 D Tester, Vibration 4931-00-536-5555 7560085
76 F.H.D Telescope, Line of Sight w/Case 6625-00-253-9195 712062
77 D Tester, Tube (Check Image Intensi 4931-00-053-3644 8566309
fier Tube M35E1 and M36E1)
78 F.H.D Tool Set, LRF Center Bearing 4931-01-044-6914 11674388
Alining
79 F.H.D Wrench, Clip: To Remove Retain 5120-00-763-1861 7631861
ing Clips on Head Assembly
80 F.H.D Wrench, Set, Tubular Type 4831-00-580-0012 5800012
81 D Wrench, Torque, Vi Inch Sq. Drive 5120-00-580-2949 GGG-W-
0-25 inch-pounds: To Check 686b
Torque of Output Shaft of Table II,
Ballistic Drive Table I,
Class 2
Style A,
Size 1
82 H,D Wrench, Torque, lA inch Sq. 5120-00-116-2829 GGG-W-
Drive 0-60 inch-pounds 686b

Change 4 B-17
HI 9-2350-253-20-2

Section III. TOOL AND TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS • Continued

Tool or test
equipment
reference Maintenance National/NATO
code category Nomenclature stock number Tool number

FIRE CONTROL INSTRUMENT TOOLS - Continued

88 O, F, H, D Key, Hexagon Socket Head Screw, 512040489-2163 GGG-K-

L Type (Allen Wrench 9/64 inch) 275
84 D Fixture, Test Assembly: Used w/ 4931-00-601-2241 7660243
Adapter 4931-00-863-5656 and
Collimator 493140-767-3191
85 O, F, H, D Wrench Spanner (used to Adjust 512041446-1128 12257212
the 5 in Arm Eccentric)
86 F,H,D Meter, Pulse Forming Network 4931-00428-1820 11737824
Charge
87 F.H.D Fixture, Holding and Handling No NSN 11747384
(LRF - Receiver • Transmitter)
VIEWER, DRIVERS NIGHT
VISION TOOLS
88 F.H.D Plate Assy., Torque Viewer NoNSN SMD771391-
ii
89 F.H.D Adapter Assy., Viewer Torque No NSN SMD771392-
Wrench 1
90 F.H.D Test Target No NSN SMD771396
91 F.H.D Wrench Assy., Spanner Focusing No NSN SMD771387-

92 F.H.D Wrench and Adapter Assy., No NSN SMD771384-

Purging 1
93 F.H.D Cable Assy., Special Purpose No NSN SMD771395-
1

COMMON TOOL SETS

94 O, F,H Tool Kit, Turret 5180404954139
95 0 Shop Equipment, Automotive 491040-7544650
Maint., and Repair, OM,
Common No. 2
96 F,D Shop Equipment, Instrument and 493140-9474243
Fire Control Instrument Repair,
FM
97 F.H.D Tool Kit, Electronic Equipment 5180404104177
TK105G
98 F.H.D Shop Set, Instrument and Fire 493140-7544740
Control, Field Maintenance,
Basic
99 F,H Shop Equip., Automotive 491040-7544705
Maintenance
100 F,H Shop Equipment, Artillery Main 493340-7544704
tenance

B-18 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section IV. REMARKS

Reference Code Remarks

A ♦Work Time/Man Hours required.

B The TURRET SLIP RING is a part of the turret electrical contact assembly.
The turret electrical contact assembly consists of the slip ring assembly, the
traverse safety limit switch' assembly, the switch actuating bell crank, the
safety actuating control cam, and the mounting parts.
C Only the filter element serviced at organizational level.
D Only the power switch is repaired at organizational level.
E Only the manifold is repaired at direct support.
F Adjustment of the eccentrics only at organizational level.
G Relocating and welding brackets.
H Repair dummy connector only at organizational level.
I Adjust linkage at organizational level only and adjust switch screws at direct
support level only.
J Adjust variable resistor and trigger and palm switches at organizational level.
Adjust handle travel at direct support level.
K 10 Hp electric motor. No authorized repair. Replace at organizational level
only.
L *TTS System, Line Replaceable Units, Assemblies, Sub-Assembly and Compon
ents, Maintenance Allocation Chart, Work Time/Hours Required, Tools and
Equipment Requirements are Listed TM 11-5855-258-24.
M Interference Switch Adjustment.
N Organizational Maintenance Repair consists of replacing linkage.

Change 4 B-19/IB-20 blank)

 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

APPENDIX C
EXPENDABLE/DURABLEi SUPPLIES
AND MATERIALS LIST

Section I. INTRODUCTION
C-1. Scope.
C — Operator/Crew
This appendix lists expendable supplies and O — Organizational Maintenance
materials you will need to operate and maintain
the M60A3 turret. This listing is for informa c. Column 3 - National Stock Number.
tional purposes only and is not authority to reThis is the National stock number assigned to
quisition the listed items. These items are the item; use it to request or requisition the
authorized to you by CTA 50-970, Expend item.
able/Durable Items (Except Medical, Class V, d. Column 4 - Description. Indicates
Repair Parts, and Heraldic Items), or CTA 8-100,
the Federal item name and, if required, a
Army Medical Department Expendable/Durable description to identify the item. The last
Items. line for each item indicates the part number
C-2. Explanation of Columns. followed by the Federal Supply Code for
Manufacturer (FSCM) in parentheses if appli
a. Column 1 - Item Number. This cable.
number is assigned to the entry in the listing e. Column 5 - Unit of Measure (U/M).
and is referenced in the narrative instruc Indicates the measure used in performing the
tions to identify the material (e.g., Use actual maintenance function. This measure
sealer compound, item 15, appendix C). is expressed by a two-character alphabetical
b. Column 2 - Level. This column abbreviation (e.g., ea., in., pr.). If the unit of
identifies the lowest level of maintenance measure differs from the unit of issue, requi
that requires the listed item. sition the lowest unit of issue that will sat
isfy your requirements.
Section II. EXPENDABLE/DURABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

NATIONAL STOCK
ITEM LEVEL NUMBER DESCRIPTION U/M

1 0 8040-00-543-3722 Adhesive, Class I or II, MMM-A-189, 1 Pt PT

0 8040-00-264-5840 Adhesive, Class I or II, MMM-A-189, 1 Gal GL
2 C 8040-00-262-9025 Adhesive, General Purpose, 4 Oz Tube TU
C 8040-00-262-9028 Adhesive, General Purpose, 1 Pt Can Pt CN
3 0 8040-00-893-1882 Adhesive, Rubber, MMM-A-1617, Type II, 3 Oz OZ
0 8040-01-036-5432 Adhesive, Rubber, MMM-A-1617, Type II. 1 Gal GL
4 C 8040-01-123-0082 Adhesive, 11669677, 4 Oz Tube TU
4.1 O 9150-01-054-6453 Cleaner, Lubricant, Preservative (CLP), PT
1 Pt Trigger Sprayer, MIL-L-63460
O 9150-01-053-6688 Cleaner, Lubricant, Preservative (CLP), GL
1 Gal Bottle, MIL-L-63460
5 c 5350-00-221-0872 Cloth, Abrasive, Crocus, CA, 50 Sheets PKG
6 0 Coating, Gray, Undercoat, Solar Heat Reflecting,
•
(MIL-C-46127) GL
7 0 8030-00-163-5792 Coating Compound, Plastic Fastener Threads EA
8 0 8030-00-597-5387 Compound, Antiseize, MIL-A-907, 2.5 lb Can CN
9 c 6850-00-227-1887 Compound, Cleaning, Lens, 1 Qt Can CN
10 c . 6850-00-224-6656 Compound, Cleaning, Rifle Bore, 2 Oz Plastic
Bottle (MIL-C-372) BT
c 6850-00-224-6657 Compound, Cleaning, Rifle Bore, 6 Oz Can
(MIL-C-372) " CN

Change 2 C-1
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section II. EXPENDABLE/DURABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST - Continued

I

NATIONAL STOCK
ITEM LEVEL NUMBER DESCRIPTION U/M

10.1 0 8030-00-275-8114 Compound, Sealing, 1 Pt Can, CN

Semisolid, Type I, MILS11030
11 C 6850-00-880-7616 Compound, Silicone, 8 Oz Tube TU
12 0 8010-00-133-5905 Enamel, Lusterless, Quick Drying Styrenated CN
Alkyd Type, OD, Solar Heat Reflecting,
MIL-E-46096, 6 Oz Can
0 8010-00-133-5904 Enamel, Lusterless, Quick Drying, Stryneated
Alkyd Type, OD, Solar Heat Reflecting,
MIL-E-46096, 1 Gal Can CN
13 C 9150-00-111-6256 Fluid, Hydraulic, FRH, MIL-H^16170, Amend. 1
(81349) CN
14 C 9150-00-985-7244 Grease, Aircraft and Instrument, 4 Oz Tube
(MIL-G-23827) TU
15 C 9150-00-190-0904 Grease, Automotive and Artillery, GAA, 1 Lb Can
(MIL-G-10924) CN
C 9150-00-935-1017 Grease, Automotive and Artillery, GAA, 14 Oz OZ
Cartridge (MIL-G-10924)
C 9150-00-190-0905 Grease, Automotive and Artillery, GAA, 5 Lb Can
(MIL-G-10924) CN
16 C 915O-00-754-2595 Grease, Molybdenum Disulfide, GMD, 1 Lb Can
(MIL-G-21164) CN
17 0 5970-00-184-2002 Insulation, Rubber Tape, 2 In-W, 30-Ft Roll RO
17.1 C 6810-00-292-9676 Methanol Tech 1 Qt. Can QT
18 C 9150-00-271-8427 Oil, Lubricating, Medium, PL, GP, 4 Oz Can
(MIL-L-3150) CN
c 9150-00-231-2361 Oil, Lubricating, Medium, PL, SP, 1 Qt Can
(MIL-L-3150) CN
19 0 9150-00-889-3522 Oil, Lubricating, Semifluid, LSA, 4 Oz Tube TU
0 9150-00-940-0323 Oil, Lubricating, Semifluid, 8 Oz Plastic Bottle BT
20 0 9150-00-598-7123 Oil, Pentrating, W-P-216, Oz OZ
0 9150-00-261-7899 Oil, Pentrating, W-P-216, Pt PT
0 9150-00-223-4119 Oil, Pentrating, W-P-216, Qt QT
21 0 8030-00-281-2726 Primer, Wash, Pretreatment, Blue, MIL-P-15328,
Kit EA
0 8030-00-535-9780 Primer, Wash, Pretreatment, Blue, MIL-P-15328,
Kit EA
22 c 7920-00-205-1711 Rag, Wiping, Cotton, 50 Lb Bale BL
23 0 8030-00-275-8114 Sealing Compound, MIL-S-11030, 1 Pt Can CN
0 8030-00-242-3194 Sealing Compound, MIL-S-11030, 1 Qt Can CN
24 0 8030-00-275-8110 Sealing Compound, MIL-S-11031, Kit EA
0 8030-00-537-7925 Sealing Compound, MIL-S-11031, Kit EA
0 8030-00-656-1042 Sealing Compound, MIL-S-11031, Kit EA
25 0 8030-01-013-9306 Sealing Compound, MIHS-22473, 8 Oz Bottle BT
25.1 0 5330-01-137-6964 Sealing Compound, 50 cc CC

C-2 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Section II. EXPENDABLE/DURABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST - Continued I

NATIONAL STOCK
ITEM LEVEL NUMBER DESCRIPTION U/M

26 0 8030-01-025-1692 Sealing Compound, MIL-S-46163, Type n, Grade V BT

250 cc Bottle
26.1 0 8030-01-088-8140 Sealing Compound, MIL-S-46163, BT
Type 1, Grade L
26.2 0 8030-00-560-8759 Sealing Compound, MIL-S-83430, BT
Class B-l/2
26.3 0 8030-00-434-4162 Sealing Compound, MIL-S-46163, BT
Type H, Grade N
26.4 0 8030-00-243-3284 Antiseize Compound, MIL-T-5542 OZ
27 0 3439-00-003-8601 Solder, Lead-Tin Alloy, SN-50, SN-60, QQ-S-571, CN
1 Lb Can CN
0 3439-00-163-4351 Solder, Lead-Tin Alloy, SN-50, SN-60, QQ-S-571,
5 Lb Can CN
28 c 6850-00-664-5685 Solvent, Dry Cleaning, SD, 1 Qt Can (P-D-680) CN
6850-00-281-1985 Solvent, Dry Cleaning, SD, 1 Gal Can (P-D-680) CN
29 c 6640-00-285-4694 Paper, Lens, 100 Sheets (NNN-P-40) BX
30 0 9505-00-248-9849 Wire, Locking, MS20995-F41, 2 Lb Roll LB

Change 2 C-3/(C-4 blank)

i
 A 9-2350-253-20-2

APPENDIX D

MAINTENANCE OF GUNNER'S CONTROL HANDLE ASSEMBLY

(WITHOUT LOGIC MODULE)

D-l.
Some combat tanks are equipped with a gunner's control handle (logic) module.
This logic module simplifies the procedure for the gunner's ranging and target
lead correction functions. This configuration is in addition to the standard
gunner's control handle assembly. As kits become available the standard gunner's
control handle assembly will be changed to include the logic module.
D-2.
This Appendix contains maintenance procedure for the standard gunner's control
handle assembly (without logic module). Maintenance data for standard gunner's
control handle assembly (with module), are covered on pages 2-40 through 10-29.
The data for standard gunner's control handle assembly (without logic module)
are covered on pages D-l through D-ll.

D-l
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

D-3. Computer System Lead Circuits Test lock thumb switch or the rate tachometer unit it
(For Vehicles Without Gunner's Logic defective.
Module). g. Stop turret motion and continue to hold
a. Select HEAT ammunition on the gunner's thumb switch. Reticle should remain stationary for
or commander's ammo select unit. at least 30 seconds after lead-lock thumb switch is
b. Set MANUAL/RANGEFINDER switch on pressed (step f), even though turret motion has
the gunner's control unit to MANUAL and set stopped. If reticle moves before thumb switch is
METERS x 100 control to 20. released, computer unit is defective.
c. Set CROSSWIND AUTO-MANUAL switch h. Release lead-lock thumb switch. Reticle
to MANUAL, and CROSSWIND MPH control to should return to center of field-of-view.
zero. Set MOVING/STATIONARY switch on i. Repeat steps d. through g. slewing turret
ammo select unit to illuminate STATIONARY counterclockwise (to the left). Reticle should jump
indicator. Set ELEV/TRAV POWER switch to ON. right when thumb switch is depressed and left when
d. With the turret stationary, press lead-lock thumb switch is released.
thumb switch on the gunner's control handle. j. Repeat steps d. through g. from the com
Reticle should not move in field of view. If reticle mander's control.
does not move, the rate tachometer and computer k. Reset REMAINING TUBE LIFE control to
circuits are operative. If the reticle moves, the rate its original reading (refer to para 2-22, a., step (7g).
tachometer or computer unit is defective. Continue I. Reset ZEROING and COMMON ZERO
to hold lead-lock thumb switch, and slew the turret controls to original settings (refer to para 2-22, a.,
clockwise (to the right) at medium speed (approxi step (If).
mately 5 mils per second). Reticle should not move. m. Place CROSSWIND AUTO/MANUAL
If reticle moves, computer unit is defective. switch to AUTO position.
e. Release lead-lock thumb switch and slew n. Close and latch front cover on gunner's
the turret clockwise (to the right) at medium speed control unit.
(approximately 5 mils per second). o. Place POWER switch on gunner's control
f. Press lead-lock thumb switch while the tur unit in OFF position.
ret is still moving and note that the reticle goes to p. Set ELEV/TRAV POWER switch to OFF
the left. If the reticle does not move, either lead- position.
q. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in OFF
position.
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

3. NUMBERS INDICATE LAMPS ON THE

TESTS.

I_ CMDITSHANDLE_ I ^
OVERRIDE
SOL.
AR702550

Figure D-l. Stabilization system - computer system interface.

D-3
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Table D-l. Troubleshooting

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM

D102 LASER" WILL' NOT RANGE FROM GUNNER'S LASE THUMB SWITCH. BUT RANGES FROM
R/T CONTROL PANEL. (For vehicles without gunner's logic module.)
Step 1. Place computer POWER and MASTER BATTERY switches in OFF positions. Remove
connector P6 of cable 3W2- from connector Jl of cable 1W3. Connect multimeter be
tween pin Jl-K of cable 1W3 and ground. Place computer POWER, MASTER BATTERY
and ELEV/TRAV POWER switches in ON position. Depress and hold gunner's lase
thumb switch. Multimeter should indicate 5.0 to 10.5 vdc when thumb switch is de
pressed.
a. If proper voltage is present from lase thumb switch, proceed to step 2.
b. If 5.0 to 10.5 vdc is not present from lase thumb switch, proceed to step 5.
Step 2. Perform test of computer system cable 3W2 using cable test set (para 3-6).
a. If cable is good, proceed to step 3.
b. If cable is defective, replace cable 3W2.
Step 3. Perform test of computer system cable 3W3 (para 3-6).
a. If cable is good, proceed to step 4.
b. If cable is defective, replace cable 3W3.
Step 4. Connect 3W3P1 to computer. Connect multimeter between 3W3P6-B and ground. Depress
and hold gunner's lase thumb switch. Multimeter should indicate approximately 15 vdc.
a. If present, replace R/T (para 15-102) and EU (para 15-105).
b. If not present, replace computer unit (para 15-73).
Step 5. Disconnect 1W3P7 from Jl at gunner's handles. Check continuity between P7-K and Jl-K
of 1W3 cable.
a. If continuity is not present, notify support maintenance that cable 1W3 is
defective.
b. If continuity is present, replace gunner's control handle (para 10-41).

D-4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Description. in the gunner's control assembly to permit

control .of the hydraulic system to be shifted
The gunner can fire both the main gun and to the commander's control. This permits the
the 7.62-mm machine gun, power elevate or tank commander to override the gunner's
depress the main gun, and traverse the turret controls and to take control of gun elevating
through the use of the gunner's control and depressing, turret traversing, and firing
handles. By operating the gunner's control, of the main gun and the 7.62-mm machine
various internal hydraulic valves are gun. The adjustable resistor assembly is
actuated, thereby permitting flow of located in the gunner's control assembly and
hydraulic fluid under pressure to actuate is connected electrically to the stabilization
either the main gun elevating cylinder or the controller unit. The adjustable resistor
hydraulic gearbox motor in the turret assembly sends cancelling signals to the
traversing gearbox, or both. The elevating stabilization controller unit to prevent sta
cylinder will either elevate or depress the bilization correction signals from being intro
main gun, depending on direction of flow of duced into the system as a result of turret
hydraulic • fluid. Similarly, the hydraulic and gun movement commanded by gunner's or
gearbox motor in the traversing mechanism commander's controls.
will traverse the turret in either direction,
depending on the direction of flow of the D-5. Removal of Gunner's Control
hydraulic fluid. The gunner's control Assembly (Figs D-2 and
assembly contains a magnetic brake switch D-3 ).
which is actuated by the normally closed
palm switch on the gunner's control handle. a. If vehicle is TTS equipped, remove TTS
Actuation of the magnetic brake switch opens ballistic shield handle assembly from gunner's
the magnetic brake electric circuit which control assembly (para 15-115) and position
releases a magnetic brake in the traversing ballistic shield handle assembly and cable to
mechanism, thereby enabling the traversing prevent interference during removal of gun
mechanism to operate. Provisions are made ner's control assembly.

D-5
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

Figure D-2# Gunner's control assembly.

WARNING k. Remove four preformed packings and
Fluid in the main accumulator discard,
will be under pressure.
b. Perform zero pressure check (para 2-
10a).
c. Remove two screws and lockwasners
and remove connecting rod levers (fig D-2 X
d. Place MASTER BATTERY switch in
OFF position.
e. Disconnect seven hydraulic lines from
hydraulic power valve assembly(flg d-3 )
and plug open lines and ports.
f. Install suitable plugs in the open lines
and ports of the hydraulic power valve assem
bly (fig D-3 ).
g. Remove two capscrews and lock-
washers securing deck clearance valve
mounting bracket to hydraulic power valve
assembly and remove deck clearance valve
(fig D-3).
h. Disconnect wiring harness from recep
tacle (fig D-3 ).
I. Disconnect two hand elevating pump
assembly electrical connectors (fig D-3 ) .
/• Remove four capscrews and lock- Figure D-3 . Removal and installation
washers securing hydraulic power valve of gunner's control assembly,
assembly to riser and remove the gunner's
control assembly from the riser (fig D-3 ).

D-6
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

D-6. Installation of Gunner's Control select unit (para 15-78).

Assembly (fig D-3 ). (4) Disconnect commander's rod ends
and remove elevation and traverse levers
a. Coat four new preformed packings (para 10-35).
with hydraulic fluid (FRH) (item 25, Appendix (5) Disconnect cable connector from
C) and install with replacement gunner's gunner's control assembly cover (view A).
control assembly hydraulic power valve (6) Remove six screws and lockwashers
assembly on riser. Secure the assembly to securing resistor adjustment cover plate and
the riser with four capscrews and washers (fig gasket to the gunner's control assembly
D-2 ). cover, and remove cover plate (view B).
b. Connect two hand elevating pump (7) Hold traverse adjusting nut and
assembly electrical connectors. loosen locknut; turn adjusting nut until it is
c. Connect wiring harness electrical con released from traverse control bracket
nector to receptacle. assembly (view B).
cL Install deck clearance valve and (8) Repeat step (7) for the elevation
mounting bracket to the hydraulic power adjusting nut (view B).
valve assembly using two capscrews and (9) Remove four screws securing gun
lockwashers. ner's control assembly cover and remove
e. Remove plugs from lines and ports as cover (view B).
required and install hydraulic lines, previously (10) Remove locknut and electrical con
tagged, to the hydraulic power valve assem nector (view C).
bly. (11) Remove two screws and washers
f. Install connecting rod levers and rod securing clamp to cover; remove clamp (view
ends and secure with two screws and lock- C).
washers (fig D-2 ) . (12) Remove screw, lockwasher, and
g. If vehicle is TTS equipped, install TTS washer securing adjustable resistor assembly
ballistic shield handle assembly to gunner's to gunner's control assembly cover and
control assembly (para 15-115). remove resistor assembly (view C).
h. Place MASTER BATTERY and ELEV/ b. Installation.
TRAV POWER switches in ON positions and (1) Position adjustable resistor assem
check for hydraulic leaks. bly on gunner's control assembly cover, and
(. Bleed the hydraulic system (para 2- secure with screw, lockwasher, and washer
lOd). (view C).
j. Check operation of turret and gun (2) Secure wiring, using two screws,
control in both power and stabilized mode. and clamp (view C).
Refer to TM 9-2350-253-10 for power and (3) Install new packing on electrical
stabilized mode operating instructions. connector; secure connector to gunner's con
trol assembly cover with locknut (view C).
D-7. Replacement and Adjustment of (4) Position cover on gunner's control
Adjustable Resistor Assembly of assembly and secure with four screws (view
Gunner's Control Assembly (Fig B).
D-4 ). (5) Attach adjustable resistor slider
shafts, to the traverse and elevation control
a. Removal. bracket assemblies by screwing the adjusting
(1) Place ELEV/TRAV POWER and nuts to the control ends. Do not tighten
MASTER BATTERY switches in OFF posi locknut at this time.
tions. (6) Perform adjustment of resistor
(2) If vehicle is TTS equipped, remove assembly and complete installation by per
TTS ballistic shield handle assembly from forming steps c(6) through (10) below.
gunner's control assembly (para 15-115) and c. Adjustment of Adjustable Resistors
position ballistic shield handle assembly and (Fig d-4 ).
cable to prevent interference during removal (1) Place MASTER BATTERY switch
of adjustable resistor cover.. in OFF position.
(3) Remove XM21 gunner's ammo

D-7
TM 9-2350-253-20-2
ADJUSTMENT
, GUNNER'S CONTROL] COVER PLATE
ASSEMBLY COVER

TRAVERSE
ADJUSTING
NUT
TRAVERSE CONTROL
BRACKET ASSY
ELEVATION CONTROL
BRACKET ASSY GUNNER'S
CONTROL
ASSEMBLY
COVER

ELEVATION
ADJUSTING NUT

ADJUSTABLE LOCKNUT
RESISTOR
ASSEMBLY

WASHER
LOCKWASHER
MOUNTING SCREW
CLAMP, WASHER (2)
RESISTOR ADJUSTING NUTS SCREW (2)

AR702641

Figure D-4. Removal, adjustment, and installation of

adjustable resistor assembly.
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(2) Ensure ELEV/TRAV POWER switch (11) Repeat steps (7) through (10) for
is in OFF position also. the elevation adjustment, except that the
(3) Remove six screws and washers test set selector switch should be placed in
securing adjustable resistor adjustment cover position 7 (elevation adjustment).
plate and gasket and remove the plate and (12) Install the adjustment cover plate,
gasket (view B). gasket, screws, and washers.
(4) Using a 1/4-inch open-end wrench (13) If vehicle is TTS equipped, install
(automotive electric wrench set from number TTS ballistic shield handle assembly to gun
2 common tool set), loosen the traverse ner's control handle assembly (para 15-115).
adjusting jam nut while holding the adjusting (l*4) Install gunner's ammo select unit
nut (view B). (para 15-79).
(5) Remove stabilization test set cable D-8. Gunner's Control Handle Switches.
from test set cover and connect as follows:
(a) Disconnect connector PI of WARNING
cable 1W3 from stabilization controller unit. •Visually check to ensure all
(b) Connect connector PI of cable guns are unloaded.
1W3 to test cable connector marked CABLE. NOTE
(c) Connect test cable connector Both right and left gunner's
marked CONTROLLER UNIT to controller control handle switches are re
unit. moved, installed, and adjusted
(d) Place test set test selector in the same manner.
switch in OFF position and mode switch in a. Removal (Figs D-5 and D-6 ).
position ON. (1) Place MASTER BATTERY switch,
(e) Connect the connector marked MAIN GUN switch, MACHINE GUN switch,
TEST SET to test set. and ELEV/TRAV POWER switch in OFF
(6) Engage turret traverse lock and positions and engage turret traverse lock.
gun travel lock. Place MASTER BATTERY (2) Remove four screws and lock-
switch in ON position. Place ELEV/TRAV washers securing cover plate to gunner's
POWER switch in ON position. control box housing (view A, fig D-5 ) .
NOTE (3) Remove two socket head screws
Place test set test selector and lockwashers securing handle cover to
switch in position 6 (reverse gunner's control handle (view A).
handle). Place stabilization (4) Remove handle cover from gunner's
POWER and STAB switches in control handle (view B).
ON positions. Push POWER (5) Remove waterproofing material
switch ON if button is not from nuts and inserts securing switch leads in
illuminated. gunner's control box (view B).
(7) Verify that test set mode switch is (6) Remove screw and nut from each
in position ON. Rotate traverse adjustment insert (view B).
nut on adjustable resistor assembly in either (7) Remove switch leads from each
direction, as required, to obtain minimum insert (view B).
reading on test set meter. (8) Remove gunner's control firing
(8) Place test set mode selector switch trigger switch and gunner's control palm
in position S. Rotate adjusting nut slowly in switch from gunner's control handle
either direction as required to obtain a meter b. Installation (Figs D-5 and D-6 )•
indication of 0. (1) Using adhesive (item 1, App. C),
(9) Tighten the traverse adjusting nut bond enough shims to replacement palm and
jam nut while holding the adjusting nut. trigger switches to provide an interference fit of
(10) Rotate handles in both directions, .001 to .017 inches between the switches and the
allowing handles to return slowly to center handle (fig D-6 view B). Apply adhesive
from each direction. If meter needle does with brush as follows:
not return to 0, or if meter indication from Number of coats: 2 or 3
one direction is different from the other, Drying time between
repeat steps (7) through (9). coats: 30 to 60 minutes

D-9
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

UNNER'S CONTROL
A5SEM8LY SOX

RIGHT HANDLE
I COMMANDER'S GUNNER'S
• OVERRIDE POWER
j SOLENOID SOLENOID
LEAD _ _. . _i|
THUMB
SWITCH

9!/ BRAKE
PALM
SWITCH TRIGGER

LASE
THUMB
SWITCH
BRAKE
PALM
>4 SWITCH
TRIGGER (3M

LEFT HANDLE
I MANUAL ELEVATING |
» PUMP HANDLE I
FIRING SWITCH _ 1
AR702642

Figure d-5 • Removal and installation of gunner's control handle switches.

D-10
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

(2) After bonding shim(s) to switch(es), NOTE

allow adhesive to dry 2 to 6 minutes before The following procedures apply
installing switch(es) into handle. to both gunner's handles.
NOTE (1) Turn MASTER BATTERY and
The palm switch is normally ELEV/TRAV POWER switches to ON position.
closed, and the trigger switch is (2) Slowly rotate trigger adjustment
normally open. Check markings setscrew in a clockwise direction (as viewed
on switch to determine position from head of screw) until trigger switch is no
6f contacts for installation. longer actuated by the trigger (no audible
(3) Trim leads on replacement click) (fig D-6 , view A) .
switches to proper length. Position switch (3) While maintaining a light pressure
leads, gunner's control firing trigger switch, on the trigger, slowly rotate the trigger
and gunner's control palm switch in gunner's adjustment setscrew in counterclockwise
control handle (fig D-6. > view A). direction until the switch actuates (a click is
(4) Insert palm and trigger switch heard). Continue to rotate setscrew in
leads through handle shaft and connect leads counterclockwise direction until approxi
(fig D-5 -, view C) . mately 1/3 turn past the point where audible
(5) Install nut inserts onto switch leads click occurred (view A).
(fig D-5 , view B). (4) Adjust palm switch adjustment set-
(6) Adjust trigger and palm switches in screw, using same procedures as in steps (1)
accordance with paragraph c before installing and (2) for trigger adjustment setscrew (view
handle cover. B).
c. Adjustment of Gunner's Control (5) Position handle cover on gunner's
Handle Trigger and Palm Switches (Fig control handle and secure with two lock-
D-6 )• washers and socket head screws (view A).
(6) Position cover plate on gunner's
Ensure that all guns are un control box and secure with four lockwashers
loaded. Place MACHINE GUN and screws (view A).
and MAIN GUN switches in OFF (7) Check operation of firing circuits
position. (TM 9-2350-253-10).
GUN FIRING
SWITCH
PIVOT THUMB
PIN SWITCH
SHIMS AS REQUIRED
(.Ml TO .017 INCH
CLEARANCE) TO BE FLUSH
WITHIN AND
SETSCREW ~ NOT EXTEND
BEYOND EDGE
OF SWITCH

SETSCREW- 'SHIM (REF)

-SWITCH (REF)

AR70264C
Figure D-6 Adjustment of gunner's control handle trigger
switch and palm switches.

D-11(D-12 blank)
i
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX

A Paragraph Page

Access door. (Battery access door)

Accumulator. (Main accumulator)
(Manual elevation accumulator)
Actuator. (Superelevation actuator)
Actuator drive shaft. (Superelevation actuator drive shaft)
Adjustable resistor assembly, gunner's control assembly:
Adjustment 10-40 10-26
Description 10-37 10-22
Installation 10-40 10-26
Removal 1040 10-24
Administrative storage ." 1-3 1-1
Air filter heater unit, electric:
Commander's 17-2 17-1
Gunner's 17-2 17-2
Loader's 17-2 17-2
Ammo select units:
Checkout procedure 15-81 15-31
Description 15-72 15-28
Installation 15-79 15-31
Removal 15-78 15-31
Repair '. 15-80 15-31
Ammunition box. (Caliber .50 ammunition box and feed system)
Ammunition stowage boxes and racks:
Assembly of retainer handle 11-2 11-1
Disassembly of retainer handle 11-2 11-1
Installation 11-2 11-1
Repair 11-2 11-1
Removal 11-2 11-1
Ammunition stowage boxes, racks, and miscellaneous stowage boxes
and components:
Ammunition stowage boxes and racks 11-2 11-1
Description 11-1 11-1
Driver's night viewer stowage box, rations box, and oddment
stowage box 11-4 11-4
Miscellaneous stowage boxes, racks, brackets, trays and screens 11-3 11-4
Antifriction bearings, inspection, care and maintenance 4-10 4-2
AN/VVS/2 driver's night viewer:
Assembly 15-16 15-6
Description 15-12 15-5
Disassembly 15-14 15-5
Installation 15-17 15-6
Removal 15-13 15-5
Repair 15-15 15-6
Articulated telescope. (Telescope M105D)
Articulated telescope eyepiece hanger:
Installation 15-53 15-21

Index l
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

A - Continued Paragraph Page

Removal 15-52 15-21

Articulated telescope headrest:
Installation 15-51 15-21
Removal 15-50 15-19
Articulated telescope M105D. (Telescope M105D)
Articulated telescope mount Ml 14:
Installation 15-57 15-24
Removal 15-56 15-21
Azimuth gearbox, cupola:
Description 9-7 9-3
Installation and adjustment 9-8 9-3
Removal 9-8 9-3
Azimuth gearbox crank components:
Cleaning, inspection and repair 9-9 9-3
Installation 9-9 9-3
Removal 9-9 9-3
Azimuth indicator M28E2:
Accuracy test 15-70 15-28
Backlash adjustment 15-69 15-28
Description 15-66 15-27
Installation 15-68 15-28
Removal 15-67 15-28
Slippage test 15-71 15-28
Azimuth lock assembly. (See Cupola azimuth lock assembly)

Backlash check, elevation 2-18 2-30

Backlash cylinder assembly. (Traverse backlash cylinder assembly)
Ballistics computer. (XM21 ballistics computer)
Ballistic cover, TTS. (Tank thermal sight (TTS) AN/VSG-2)
Ballistic shield, TTS. (Tank thermal sight (TTS) AN/VSG-2)
Ballistics drive, M10A3:
Description 15-60 15-25
Inspection 15-61 15-25
Test 15-62 15-27
Ballistics drive boot, M10A3:
Description 15-60 15-25
Inspection 15-64 15-27
Installation 15-65 15-27
Removal 15-63 15-27
Ballistics shield and deflector:
Description 1348 13-29
Installation 13-50 13-29
Removal 13-49 13-29
Ballistic solutions test, computer system 2-22 2-33
Barrel stowage box, 7.62-mm machine gun 13-36 13-17
Basic solutions T2-4 2-35

Index 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

B - Continued Paragraph Page

Battery access door:

Description 6-36 6-21
Installation 6-38 6-21
Removal 6-37 6-21
Bearings, antifriction, inspection, care and maintenance 4-10 4-2
Bearings, bushing type, inspection 4-11 4-2
Blasting machine:
Description 540 5-21
Installation 5-43 5-21
Removal 5-41 5-21
Bleeding hydraulic system 2-10 2-20
Blisters, turret 6-29 6-20
Blocks, vision 14-6 14-3
Blower assembly motor. (See Power pack blower assembly)
(See Turret ventilator blower)
Blower switch, turret ventilator 5-86 5-38
Boot, M10 A3 ballistics drive. 15-60 15-25
Boresighting M68 105-mm gun 2-14 2-26
Box, ammunition, caliber .50 14-3 14-1
Bracket assembly, caliber .50 machine gun front interrupter 11-9 11-12
Bracket, water canteen 11-10 11-12
Breech operating mechanism:
Assembly of components 13-10 13-4
Description 13-5 13-1
Disassembly of components 13-7 13-1
Inspection and cleaning 13-9 13-2
Installation 13-11 13-4
Removal 13-6 13-1
Breechblock group, description 13-4 13-1
Breechring group:
Assembly 13-16 13-8
Cleaning 13-14 13-6
Description 13-12 13-6
Disassembly 13-13 13-6
Inspection and repair 13-15 13-6
Broken wire strand limits T4-1 4-5
Browpad assembly, 8X daylight channel, TTS 15-112 15-56
Bushing type bearings, inspection 4-11 4-2

Cable, TTS. (Tank thermal sight (TTS) AN/VSG-2: Interconnecting cable 3W4)
Cable connector cross reference 3-9 3-31
Cable test set:
Computer system cables 3W1, 3W2, and 3W3 checkout procedure .... 3-6 3-17
Description 12-1 12-1
Diagrams for use with 3-3 3-5
General 12-2 12-1

Change 2 Index 3
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

C - Continued Paragraph Page

Laser rangefinder system cable 3W33 and 3W34 checkout procedure . . 3-7 3-23
Preliminary steps - LRF 3-7 3-23
Cables. (System cables)
Cables and wiring harnesses:
General 4-15 4-2
Cabling diagrams and electrical schematics 3-3 3-5
Caliber .50 ammunition box and feed system:
Cleaning 14-4 14-3
Description 14-3 14-1
Inspection 14-4 14-3
Installation 14-4 14-3
Removal 14-4 14-1
Repair 14-4 14-3
Caliber .50 machine gun front interrupter and bracket assembly:
Assembly 11-9 11-12
Disassembly 11-9 11-12
Installation 11-9 11-12
Removal 11-9 11-12
Caliber .50 machine gun, fire control system 15-3 15-2
Calibration, gunner's quadrant M1A1 error 2-12 2-26
Cant unit solutions test 2-22 2-36
Cant unit:
Description 15-72 15-29
Fixture (fig. 2-10) 2-22 2-33
Installation 15-85 15-34
Removal 15-84 15-34
Canteen, mounting bracket 11-10 11-12
Carbon monoxide poisoning Inside Cover
Cargo stowage straps:
Installation 11-11 11-12
Removal 11-11 11-12
Cast parts and machined surfaces, inspection and repair 4-3 4-1
CBR equipment, description 17-1 17-1
Charging accumulator:
Main 2-10 2-22
Manual 2-10 2-25
Charging and purging 2-24 241
Check valves, pilot. (Elevation pilot check valves or Traverse
pilot check valves)
Chemical, biological, radiological 17-1 17-1
Circuit breaker, turret ventilator blower distribution box assembly 5-86 5-38
Cleaning:
Agents 4-2 4-1
General 4-2 4-1
Methods 4-2 4-1
Clearance valve, deck 10-10 10-9
Coaxial machine gun, 7.62-mm 13-28 13-13
Combination gun mount, 105-mm gun, description 13-3 13-1

Index 4 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

C - Continued Paragraph Page

Commander's ammo select unit (Ammo select units)
Commander's and gunner's stabilization shut-off switchbox assembly:
Description 5-83 5-37
Installation 5-85 5-37
Removal 5-84 5-37
Commander's control assembly and linkage.
Description 10-33 10-20
Installation 10-36 10-21
Linkage adjustment 10-34 10-20
Removal 10-35 10-21
Commander's control panel:
Description 548 5-24
Installation 5-51 5-24
Removal 549 5-24
Repair 5-50 5-24
Commander's display assembly, TTS. (Tank thermal sight (TTS) AN/VSG-2)
Commander's electric air filter heater unit:
Installation 17-2 17-2
Removal 17-2 17-1
Commander's hatch 7-13 7-7
Commander's M36E1 periscope, description 15-26 15-8
Commander's panel assembly:
Description 548 5-24
Installation 5-51 5-24
Removal 549 5-24
Repair 5-50 5-24
Commander's periscope. (Periscope M36E1)
Commander's periscope mount, Ml 19:
Adjustment of ballistic shield operating handle 15-34 15-14
Description 15-30 15-12
Inspection and repair of headrest 15-32 15-14
Installation of headrest 15-33 15-14
Light source 8619159:
Description 15-30 15-12
Installation 15-36 15-14
Removal 15-35 15-14
Removal of headrest 15-31 15-14
Commander's seat:
Assembly 6-5 6-3
Cleaning, inspection, and repair ,. 6-4 6-3
Description 6-1 6-1
Disassembly 6-3 6-3
Installation 6-6 6-7
Removal 6-2 6-1
Commander's stabilization shut-off switch box assembly:
Description 5-83 5-37
Installation 5-85 5-37
Removal 5-84 5-37

Index 5
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

C - Continued Paragraph Page

Commander's swing seat:

Assembly 6-11 6-7
Cleaning, inspection, and repair 6-10 6-7
Description 6-7 6-7
Disassembly 6-9 6-7
Installation 6-12 6-7
Removal 6-8 6-7
Communication equipment, service upon receipt of 2-2 2-1
Computer. (XM21 ballistics computer)
Computer system ballistic solutions test 2-22 2-33
Computer system. (XM21 ballistics computer)
Computer system lead circuits test 2-23 2-40
Computer system self test 2-20 2-80
Computer system, XM21:
System cables 3W1, 3W2 and 3W3 test procedure 3-6 3-17
Troubleshooting 3-4 3-5
Computer unit, XM21:
Description 15-72 15-28
Installation 15-74 15-30
Removal 15-73 15-30
Control assembly. (See Commander's control assembly or Gunner's
control assembly)
Control assembly, power pack 10-2 10-1
Control box assembly, gunner's 5-29 5-16
Control handle switches, gunner's 1041 10-26
Control panel, commander's 548 5-24
Control selector, stabilization 544 5-22
Control unit, gunner's:
Description 15-72 15-29
Installation 15-76 15-31
Removal 15-75 15-31
Repair 15-77 15-31
Controller unit, stabilization. (Stabilization electronics controller unit)
Correction solutions:
Air temperature T2-5 2-37
Altitude T2-5 2-37
Cant T2-6 2-87
Wind T2-5 2-87
Cover. (Cradle assembly and cover)
Cover, gun shield 11-12 11-12
Cradle assembly and cover (cupola; caliber .50 machine gun):
Assembly 14-16 14-8
Cleaning 14-15 14-8
Description 14-10 14-5
Disassembly 14-13 14-5
Inspection 14-14 14-8
Installation 14-17 14-8
Removal 14-12 14-5

Index 6
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

C - Continued Paragraph Page

Service 14-11 14-5

Crosswind sensor:
EMI filter 15-72 15-29
Mast and filter connector 15-72 15-29
Probe 15-72 15-29
Crosswind sensor EMI filter:
Description 15-72 15-29
Installation 15-92 15-37
Removal 15-91 15-37
Crosswind sensor mast and EMI filter connection:
Description 15-72 15-29
Installation 15-87 15-35
Installation of cap assembly 15-90.2 15-36.2
Removal 15-86 15-34
Removal of cap assembly 15-90.1 15-36.2
Crosswind sensor probe:
Cleaning 15-89 15-36.1
Description 15-72 15-29
Installation 15-90 15-36.1
Removal 15-88 15-35
CTS. (Cable test set)
Cupola armament:
Scope 14-1 14-1
Description 14-2 14-1
Cupola assembly. (Cupola hatch assembly)
Cupola azimuth gearbox:
Adjustment 9-8 9-3
Crank components 9-9 9-3
Installation 9-8 9-3
Removal 9-8 9-3
Cupola azimuth gearbox grip handle:
Cleaning, inspection, repair 9-9 9-3
Installation 9-9 9-3
Removal 9-9 9-3
Cupola azimuth lock assembly:
Assembly 9-15 9-8
Cleaning 9-13 9-6
Description 9-10 9-6
Disassembly 9-12 9-6
Inspection 9-14 9-8
Installation 9-16 9-8
Removal 9-11 9-6
Cupola data 1-9 1-4
Cupola elevation screwjack assembly:
Description 9-2 9-1
Replacement of gun firing trigger switch 9-5 9-1
Service 9-3 9-1
Cupola hatch assembly:

Change 2 Index 7
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

C - Continued Paragraph Page

Description 7-13 7-7

Inspection 7-16 7-7
Installation of hatch 7-22 7-9
Removal 7-15 7-7
Replacement:
Bearing 7-20 7-7
Door open handle clip 7-19 7-7
Hold-open mechanism 7-21 7-7
Protective pad 7-18 7-7
Seal 7-17 7-7
Service 7-14 7-7
Cupola manual elevating and traversing components:
Description 9-1 9-2
Cupola elevation screwjack 9-1 9-1
Cupola azimuth gearbox 9_2 9-3
Cupola azimuth lock assembly 9-1 9-6
Cupola traverse lock. (Cupola azimuth lock assembly)
Cushioning material, inspection and replacement 4-12 4-2

Data, tabulated 1-9 1-3

Deck clearance valve:
Description 10-10 10-9
Installation 10-12 10-9
Removal 10-11 10-9
Deflector, ballistic shield and cover 13-35 13-17
Deflector plate:
Installation 13-35 13-18
Removal 13-35 13-18
Deprocessing. (Service upon receipt of material.)
Description (turret) 1-8 1-3
Destruction of Army materiel to prevent enemy use 1-4 1-2
Diagnostic equipment (TMDE), special test, and maintenance 1-11 1-10
Dipstick, oil level gage 10-52 10-32
Discharger harness, smoke grenade launcher:
Installation 1344 13-24
Removal 1344 13-23
Discharger power box, smoke grenade launcher:
Installation 1342 13-21
Removal 1342 13-21
Discharger, smoke grenade 1341 13-21
Domelights:
Description 5-5 5-2
Installation 5-7 5-2
Removal 5-6 5-2
Replacement of components 5-9 5-2
Door gasket 5-9 5-2

Index 8 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

D - Continued Paragraph Page

Lamps 5-9 5-4

Lens 5-9 5-4
Red lamp socket 5-9 5-4
Rheostat 5-8 5-2
White lamp socket 5-9 5-4
Door. (Battery access door; Loader's escape hatch; and
Cupola hatch assembly)
Double eccentric adjustment:
Eleven-inch arm 2-16 2-28
Five-inch arm 2-17 2-29
Dowel pins, inspection and removal 4-7 4-2
Drain cock, reservoir 10-51 10-32
Draining hydraulic system 2-10 2-20
Drive, M10A3 ballistics 15-60 15-25
Drive motor, electric 10-55 10-34
Drive shaft, superelevating actuator 10-46 10-31
Driven member test - no-bak 10-25 10-17
Driver's M27 periscope seal:
Description 15-6 15-5
Installation 15-8 15-5
Removal 15-7 15-5
Driver's night viewer AN-VSS/2:
Assembly 15-16 15-6
Description 15-12 15-5
Disassembly 15-14 15-5
Installation 15-17 15-6
Removal 15-13 15-5
Repair 15-15 15-6
Driver's night viewer stowage box, rations box, oddment stowage box:
Installation 11-4 11-8
Removal 11-4 11-4.1 ■
Repair:
Driver's night viewer stowage box 11-4 11-7
Rations box 11-4 11-7
Dummy Receptacle 13-39 13-21

Eccentric adjustment (Double eccentric adjustment)

EIR 1-6 1-2
Elbows and hoses, gas particulate:
Installation 17-2 17-2
Removal 17-2 17-2
Electric air filter heater unit:
Commander's 17-2 17-1
Gunner's 17-2 17-2
Loader's 17-2 17-2
Electric drive motor, power pack 10-55 10-34

Change 2 Index 9
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

E - Continued Paragraph Page

Electric motor, hydraulic system 5-4 5-1

Electrical and hydraulic schematics and cabling diagrams 3-3 3-5
Electrical system data 1~9 1-4
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) filter 5-83 5-34
Electronics controller unit (ECU):
Adjustment (gain) 5-60 5-27
Description 5-56 5-27
Inspection 5-58 5-27
Installation 5-59 5-27
Removal 5-57 5-27
Electronics unit:
Description 15-101 15-41
Installation 15-106 15-45
Removal 15-105 15-45
Elevating and traversing components, manual:
Description 8-1 8-1
Elevating mechanism assembly:
Description 10-58 10-38
Installation 10-60 10-40
Removal 10-59 10-40
Elevation accumulator, manual 8-11 8-6
Elevation interference switch:
Adjustment 5-20 5-11
Description 5-17 5-11
Installation 5-19 5-11
Removal 5-18 5-11
Elevation quadrant M13A3:
Adjustment 15-22 15-8
Description 15-18 15-7
Inspection 15-20 15-7
Installation 15-21 15-7
Light source control 15-19 15-7
Removal 15-19 15-7
Elevation screwjack assembly:
Description 9-2 9-1
Installation 9-6 9-3
Removal 9-4 9-1
Replacement of switch 9-5 9-1
Service 9-3 9-1
Elevation servo valve:
Description 10-65 10-41
Installation 10-65 10-43
Removal 10-65 10-41
Elevation shut-off valve assembly:
Description 10-61 10-40
Installation 10-63 10-40
Removal 10-62 10-40
Repair 10-64 10-41
Eleven-inch arm double eccentric (ballistics drive) adjustment 2-16 2-28
Emergency shut-off switchbox assembly 5-73 5-33

Index 10 Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

E - Continued Paragraph Page

EMI filter assembly:

Description 5-80 5-35
Installation 5-82 5-36
Removal 5-81 5-36
EMI filter, crosswind sensor:
Description 15-72 15-29
Installation 15-92 15-37
Removal 15-91 15-37
End-for-end test, M1A1 gunner's quadrant 2-12 2-26
English and Metric system units, use of 1-7 1-2
Equipment improvement recommendations (EIR), reporting of 1-6 1-2
Escape hatch, loader's 7-1 7-1
EU. (Electronics unit)
Evacuation group (main gun), replacement 13-20 13-8.2
Expendable supplies and materials list CI C-l
Eyeguard, R/T unit 15-104 15-45
Eyepiece hanger assembly, M105D telescope; removal 15-52 15-21

Feed system, caliber .50 14-3 14-1

Fifty caliber ammunition box and feed system:
Description 14-3 14-1
.50 caliber ammunition box and feed system 14-4 14-1
Last round stop switch assembly 14-5 14-3
Filling valve, hose and replacement 13-25 13-11
Filter. (EMI filter; Hydraulic valves and filters)
Filter, air, electric heater unit:
Commander's 17-2 17-1
Gunner's 17-2 17-2
Loader's 17-2 17-2
Filter assembly, stabilization system 10-72 1047
Filter box, M105D telescope:
Installation 15-55 15-21
Removal 15-54 15-21
Filter, EMI 5-80 5-35
Fire control and sighting system checks:
Alinement procedure, synchronization and 2-15 2-27
Boresighting M68 105-mm gun 2-14 2-26
Elevation backlash check 2-18 2-30
Fire control system tests 2-19 2-30
General 2-11 2-26
Gunner's quadrant Ml Al end-for-end test 2-12 2-26
Sighting equipment parallax check 2-13 2-26
Synchronization and alinement procedure 2-15 2-27
Fire control (elevation) quadrant M13A3:
Adjustment 15-22 15-8
Description 15-18 15-7

Change 2 Index 11
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

F - Continued Paragraph Page

Inspection 15-20 15-7

Installation 15-21 15-7
Light source control 15-19 15-7
Removal 15-19 15-7
Fire control system:
Ballistic computer system solutions test 2-22 2-33
Inspection 2-2 2-1
Installation 2-2 2-1
Purging 2-24 2-41
Fire extinguisher, portable
Description 18-1 18-1
Installation 18-3 18-1
Removal 18-2 18-1
Firing relay assembly. (Gun firing relay assembly)
Firing switch, hand elevating pump assembly handle:
General 8-8 8-4
Installation 8-10 8-4
Removal 8-9 8-4
Fittings, hydraulic 2-9 2-18
Five gallon water canteen mounting bracket:
Installation 11-10 11-12
Removal 11-10 11-12
Five-inch arm double eccentric (ballistic drive) adjustment 2-17 2-29
Foot plate, gunner's:
Installation 5-27 5-14
Removal 5-25 5-14
Forms and records, maintenance ' 1-2 1-1

G
Gage, liquid level sight 10-53 10-32
Gage, oil level dipstick 10-52 10-32
Gage, pressure. (Hydraulic system pressure gage)
Gain adjustment, stabilization controller unit 5-60 5-27
Gas particulate installation components:
Commander's electric air filter heater unit 17-2 17-2
Gunner's electric air filter heater unit 17-2 17-2
Hoses and elbows:
Installation 17-2 17-2
Removal 17-2 17-2
Loader's electric air filter heater unit 17-2 17-2
Orifice and hose assembly 17-2 17-5
Gas particulate orifice and hose assembly:
Assembly and installation 17-2 17-5
Cleaning and inspection 17-2 17-5
Removal and disassembly 17-2 17-2
Gearbox grip handle, cupola azimuth 9-9 9-3
Gearbox pinlock assembly:
Cleaning, inspection and repair 10-16 10-12
Description 10-13 10-10
Installation:
Assembly or housing 10-18 10-12

Index 12 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

G - Continued Paragraph Page

Components 10-17 10-12

Removal:
Assembly or housing 10-14 10-12
Components 10-15 10-12
Gears, inspection and repair 4-13 4-2.1 I
Grenade discharger 13-41 13-21
Grenade harness assembly 13-45 13-25
Grenade launcher functional test 1346 13-25
Grenade launcher M239, smoke 13-37 13-19
Grenade pushbutton unit 1343 13-22
Grenade stowage boxes 1347 13-27
Grip handle, cupola azimuth gearbox 9-9 9-3
Gun control system with stabilization (Fig 1-4) 1-9 1-6
Gun elevating and turret traversing system:
Data 1-9 1-3
Inspection 2-2 2-1
Gun elevation interference switch:
Adjustment 5-20 5-11
Description 5-17 5-11
Installation 5-19 5-11
Removal 5-18 5-11
Gun elevation and turret traversing hydraulic schematic (Fig 1-3) 1-9 1-5
Gun evacuator group 13-19 13-9
Gun firing relay assembly:
Description 5-77 5-35
Installation 5-79 5-35
Removal 5-78 5-35
Gun firing trigger switch, replacement 9-5 9-1
Gun interference switch. (Slip ring gun interference switch)
Gun, main 13-2 13-1
Gun mount, 105-mm gun 13-3 13-1
Gun, 105-mm combination gun mount 13-3 13-1
Gun safety relay 13-17 13-8.2 ■
Gun, 7.62-mm coaxial machine 13-28 13-13
Gun shield cover:
Installation 11-12 11-12
Removal 11-12 11-12
Gun, thermal shroud:
Installation 13-21 13-9 I
Removal 13-21 13-9
Gun tube assembly, main gun 13-22 13-9 I
Description 13-18 13-8.2 1
Installation 13-23 13-10
Removal 13-19 13-8.2 1
Gunner's ammo select unit. (Ammo select units)
Gunner's control adjustable resistor, replacement and
adjustment 10-40 10-24
Gunner's control assembly:

Change 2 Index 13
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

G - Continued Paragraph Page

Adjustable resistor assembly 1040 10-24

Description 10-37 10-22
Installation 10-39 10-24
Logic module:
Description 10-37 10-22
Installation 1041 10-28
Removal 1041 10-26
Removal 10-38 10-24
Gunner's control box assembly:
Assembly 5-35 5-18
Cleaning 5-33 5-18
Cover:
Assembly 5-35 5-18
Disassembly 5-32 5-18
Description 5-29 5-16
Electrical tests 5-31 5-16
Indicator lights:
Assembly 5-35 5-18
Disassembly 5-32 5-18
Installation 5-36 5-19
Removal 5-30 5-16
Repair 5-34 5-18
Switches:
Assembly 5-35 5-18
Disassembly 5-32 5-18
Tests 5-31 5-16
5-35 5-17
Wiring harness:
Assembly 5-35 5-18
Disassembly 5-32 5-18
Wiring leads:
Assembly 5-35 5-18
Disassembly 5-32 5-18
Gunner's control handle switches:
Adjustment 1041 10-28
Installation 1041 10-28
Logic module. (Gunner's control assembly)
Removal 1041 10-26
Gunner's control unit, M21:
Description 15-72 15-29
Installation 15-76 15-31
Removal 15-75 15-31
Repair 15-77 15-31
Gunner's display assembly, TTS. (Tank thermal sight (TTS) AN/VSG-2)
Gunner's electric air filter heater unit:
Installation 17-2 17-2
Removal 17-2 17-2
Gunner's foot plate:

Index 14
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

G - Continued Paragraph Page

Installation 5-27 5-14

Removal 5-25 5-14
Gunner's M118E1 periscope mount:
Adjustment of shield operating handle 15-45 15-18
Description 15-41 15-18
Inspection and repair of headrest 15-43 15-18
Installation of headrest 15-44 15-18
Removal of headrest 15-42 15-18
Gunner's periscope, M35E1:
Description 15-37 15-15
Installation 15-39 15-15
Removal 15-38 15-15
Service 15-40 15-16
Gunner's quadrant M1A1 end-for-end test 2-12 2-26
Gunner's seat and pedestal assembly:
Assembly 6-17 6-13
Cleaning, inspection, and repair 6-16 6-13
Description 6-13 6-9
Disassembly 6-15 6-9
Installation 6-18 6-15
Removal 6-14 6-9
Gunner's stabilization control selector:
Description 544 5-22
Installation 546 5-22
Removal 545 5-22
Repair 547 5-22
Gunner's stabilization shut-off switchbox assembly 5-83 5-37

Hand elevating 8-1 8-1

Hand elevating pump assembly handle firing switch:
Description 8-8 8-4
Installation 8-10 8-4
Removal 8-9 8-4
Hand elevation. (Manual elevation)
Hand traversing drive:
Assembly 8-6 8-2
Cleaning, inspection and repair 8-5 8-2
Disassembly 8-4 8-1
General 8-2 8-1
Installation 8-7 8-4
Removal 8-3 8-1
Handle firing switch. (Hand elevating pump assembly handle
firing switch)
Handle, retainer; 105-mm ammunition 11-2 11-1
Handle, shield operating. (Commander's periscope mount. Gunner's
periscope mount)
Handle switches, gunner's control 1041 10-26

Index 15
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

H - Continued Paragraph Page

Hanger assembly, eyepiece:

Installation 15-53 15-21
Removal 15-52 15-21
Harness discharger 13-44 13-23
Harness assembly:
Installation 13-45 13-25
Removal 13-45 13-25
Hatch assembly, cupola 7-13 7-7
Hatch, loader's assembly 7-1 7-1
Head assembly, TTS. (Tank thermal sight (TTS) AN/VSG-2)
Headrest, M105D articulated telescope:
Installation 15-51 15-21
Removal 15-50 15-19
Headrest, periscope mount M118E1:
Adjustment 15-45 15-18
Inspection and repair 15-43 15-18
Installation 15-44 15-18
Removal 15-42 15-18
Headrest, R/T unit 15-104 15-44
Headrest, telescope; removal 15-50 15-19
Headrest, thermal channel, TTS. (Tank thermal sight (TTS) AN/VSG-2 )
Heat shield and collar (nylon ballistic shield)
Heater unit, electric air filter:
Commander's 17-2 17-1
Gunner's 17-2 17-2
Loader's 17-2 17-2
Hose assembly and orifice 17-2 17-2
Hoses and elbows, gas particulate:
Installation 17-2 17-2
Removal 17-2 17-2
Hose and filling valve, replenisher replacement 13-25 13-11
Hydraulic lines and fittings 2-9 2-18
Hydraulic oil level sight gage 10-53 10-32
Hydraulic power solenoid or override solenoid:
Description 10-69 10-44
Installation 10-69 10-44
Removal 10-69 10-44
Hydraulic pressure switch:
Description 10-67 10-43
Installation 10-67 10-44
Removal 10-67 10-43
Hydraulic relief valve:
Description 10-66 10-43
Installation 10-66 10-43
Removal 10-66 10-43
Hydraulic system electric motor radio interference suppression 5-4 5-1
Hydraulic system filter assembly:

Index 16
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued
I

H - Continued Paragraph Page

Installation 10-72 1047

Removal 10-72 1047
Service 10-72 1047
Hydraulic system pressure gage:
Installation 10-68 10-44
Removal 10-68 10-44
Hydraulic system services:
General 2-8 2-18
Hydraulic lines and fittings 2-9 2-18
Turret hydraulic system service 2-10 2-20
Bleeding 2-10 2-20
Charging:
Main accumulator 2-10 2-22
Manual elevation accumulator 2-10 2-25
Draining 2-10 2-20
Zero pressure check 2-10 2-20
Hydraulic valves and filters:
Elevation servovalve 10-65 10-41
Hydraulic relief valve 10-66 10-43
Hydraulic pressure switch 10-67 10-43
Hydraulic system filter assembly 10-72 1047
Hydraulic system pressure gage 10-68 10-44
Hydraulic power solenoid 10-69 10-44
Hydraulic override solenoid > 10-69 10-44
Selector valve 10-73 1048
Stabilization power solenoid valve 10-70 10-45
Traverse stabilizer manifold covers 10-71 1047

Identification plates 1-9 1-3

Indicator, M28E2 azimuth 15-66 15-27
Inspecting, servicing, installing and setting-up instructions 2-2 2-1
Inspection. (Specific item)
Instrument lights, M30 and M50:
Description 15-23 15-8
Installation 15-25 15-8
Removal 15-24 15-8
Interconnecting cables, LRF 15-107 15-46
Interference filter, EMI 5-80 5-35
Interference suppressors. (Radio interference suppressors)
Interference switches:
(Gun elevation interference switch)
(Traverse safety limit (interference) switch)
Interrupter, caliber .50 machine gun . . . . 11-9 11-12

Lamps, dome 5-5 5-2

Index 17
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

L - Continued Paragraph Page

Lamps, R/T unit 15-104 15-44

Laser light warning Inside Cover
Laser rangefinder self test 2-21 2-31
Laser rangefinder system:
Cable diagram 15-2 15-4
Cable 3W33 and 3W34 checkout procedure (with cable test set) 3-7 3-23
Cable 3W36 checkout procedure 3-8 3-31
Data 1-9 1-3
Description 15-101 15-41
Electronics unit, description 15-101 15-41
Receiver-transmitter unit, description 15-101 15-41
System cables 3W33, 3W34, and 3W36, removal and installation 15-107 15-46
Troubleshooting 3-5 3-17
Self test 2-21 2-31
Components (Fig 1-7) 1-9 1-11
Last round stop switch:
Installation 14-5 14-3
Removal 14-5 14-3
Launcher, smoke grenade 13-37 13-19
Lead circuits test, computer system 2-23 2-40
Lens R/T unit 15-104 15-44
Light source 8619159 on M119 commander's periscope mount:
Description 15-30 15-12
Installation 15-36 15-14
Removal 15-35 15-14
Light source control 8620860:
Description 15-18 15-7
Installation 15-21 15-7
Removal 15-19 15-7
Light source control on M114 articulated telescope mount:
Installation 15-59 15-24
Removal 15-58 15-24
Lights, dome 5-5 5-2
Lights, M30 and M50 instrument 15-23 15-8
Lines and fittings, hydraulic 2-9 2-18
Linkage. (Commander's control assembly)
Loader's electric air filter heater unit:
Installation 17-2 17-2
Removal 17-2 17-2
Loader's hatch assembly:
Description 7-1 7-1
Inspection 7-5 7-2
Installation:
Hatch components 7-12 7-4
Hatch door 7-10 7-4
Seal 7-3 7-1
Removal:
Hatch components 7-11 7-4

Index 18
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

L - Continued Paragraph Page

Hatch door 7-4 7-2

Seal 7-2 7-1
Replacement:
Bearings 7-8 7-2
Door opening mechanism 7-6 7-2
Hold-open mechanism 7-9 7-2
Periscope mount assembly 7-7 7-2
Loader's M37 periscope:
Description 15-9 15-5
Installation 15-11 15-5
Removal 15-10 15-5
Loader's safety switch:
Assembly 5-69 5-30
Adjustment 5-71 5-31
Description 5-65 5-28
Disassembly 5-67 5-28
Installation 5-70 5-31
Removal 5-66 5-28
Repair and service 5-68 5-30
Test 5-72 5-33 ■
Loader's seat:
Assembly 6-23 6-15
Cleaning, inspection, service, and repair 6-22 6-15
Description 6-19 6-15
Disassembly 6-21 6-15
Installation 6-24 6-15
Removal 6-20 6-15
Loader's stabilization emergency shut-off switch box:
Description 5-73 5-33
Installation 5-76 5-33
Removal 5-74 5-33
Repair 5-75 5-33
Locational diagrams, schematics 3-3 3-5
Lock assembly, cupola azimuth 9-10 9-6
Lock assembly, traversing gearbox 10-13 10-9
Lock assembly, turret traverse 6-25 6-18
Logic module. (Gunner's control assembly)
LRF firing test T2-3 2-33
LRF system cables 3W33 and 3W34 checkout procedure (Table 3-3) 3-7 3-23
LRF system components (Fig 1-7) 1-9 1-11
Lubricating instructions:
General 2-3 2-6
Service intervals 2-4 2-6

M1A1 gunner's quadrant end-for-end test 2-12 2-26

M10A3 ballistics drive:

Change 2 Index 19
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

M - Continued Paragraph Page

Description 15-60 15-25

Inspection 15-61 15-25
Test 15-62 15-27
M10A3 ballistics drive boot:
Description 15-60 15-25
Inspection 15-64 15-27
Installation 15-65 15-27
Removal 15-63 15-27
M13 A3 elevation quadrant 15-18 15-7
M27 periscope seal:
Description 15-6 15-5
Installation 15-8 15-5
Removal 15-7 15-5
M28E2 azimuth indicator 15-66 15-27
M30 and M50 instrument lights:
Description 15-23 15-8
Installation 15-25 15-8
Removal 15-24 15-8
M35E1 periscope, gunner's:
Description 15-37 15-15
Installation 15-39 15-15
Removal 15-38 15-15
Service 15-40 15-16
M36E1 periscope, commander's:
Description 15-26 15-8
Installation 15-28 15-12
Removal 15-27 15-9
Service 15-29 15-12
M37 periscope 15-9 15-5
M68 105-mm gun:
Boresighting 2-14 2-26
Description 13-2 13-1
M105D articulated telescope:
Description 15-46 15-19
Filter box removal 15-54 15-21
Eyepiece hanger removal 15-52 15-21
Headrest removal 15-50 15-19
Installation 15-49 15-19
Light source 15-58 15-24
Mount M114 15-56 15-21
Removal 15-47 15-19
Service 15-48 15-19
M105D articulated telescope eyepiece hanger assembly:
Installation 15-53 15-21
Removal 15-52 15-21
M105D articulated telescope filter box:
Installation 15-55 15-21
Removal 15-54 15-21

Index 20
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

M - Continued Paragraph Page

M105D articulated telescope headrest:

Installation 15-51 15-21
Removal 15-50 15-19
M114 articulated telescope mount, description 15-46 15-19
Ml 14 telescope mount:
Installation 15-57 15-24
Light source control, description 15-46 15-19
Removal 15-56 15-21
Ml 18 El periscope mount, gunner's:
Adjustment of shield actuating handle 15-45 15-18
Description 15-41 15-18
Inspection and repair of headrest 15-43 15-18
Installation of headrest 15-44 15-18
Removal of headrest 15-42 15-18
M119 commander's periscope mount:
Description 15-30 15-12
Inspection and repair of headrest 15-32 15-14
Installation of headrest 15-33 15-14
Light source 8619159 15-30 15-12
Removal of headrest 15-31 15-12
M140 gun mount. (Combination gun mount)
M239 smoke grenade launcher 13-36 13-19
Machine gun, caliber .50, fire control system 15-3 15-2
Machine gun, 7.62-mm coaxial (and related parts):
Adjustment 13-34 13-17
Assembly 13-32 13-13
Deflector plate 13-35 13-17
Description 13-28 13-13
Disassembly 13-30 13-13
Installation 13-33 13-16
Removal 13-29 13-13
Repair 10-31 10-13
Spare barrel stowage box 13-36 13-17
Trigger adjustment 13-34 13-17
Machined surface inspection and repair 4-3 4-1
Main accumulator:
Charging 2-10 2-22
Description 10-28 10-18
Inspection 10-31 10-18
Installation 10-32 10-20
Removal 10-30 10-18
Repair 10-29 10-18
Main gun:
Boresighting 2-14 2-26
Description 13-2 13-1
Main gun elevating mechanism assembly:
Description 10-58 10-38
Installation 10-60 10-40
Removal 10-59 10-40

Index 21
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

M - Continued Paragraph Page

Main gun evacuator group 13-20 13-9

Main gun thermal shroud
Installation 13-22 13-10
Removal 13-21 13-9
Main gun tube assembly:
Description 13-18 13-9
Installation 13-23 13-11
Removal 13-19 13-9
Maintenance:
Cleaning 4-2 4-1
General 4-1 4-1
Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC) B-l B-l
Maintenance forms and records 1-2 1-1
Malfunction index (Table 3-5) . 3-1 3-49
Manual elevating 8-1 8-1
Manual elevating and traversing components description 8-1 8-1
Manual elevation accumulator:
Description 8-11 8-6
Inspection, service and repair . . . . 8-13 8-7
Installation 8-14 8-7
Removal 8-12 8-6
Manual pressure drain valve (selector valve)
Manual traversing. (Hand traversing)
Manual traversing of turret (Fig 1-6) 1-9 1-7
Manual wind/altitude/air temperature correction solution (Table 2-5) .... 2-22 2-37
Mast, crosswind sensor:
Description 15-72 15-29
Installation 15-87 15-35
Removal 15-86 15-34
Mechanism, elevating 10-58 10-38
Mechanism, turret traversing 10-1 10-1
Metric system units, use of English and 1-7 1-2
Miscellaneous racks, brackets, trays, boxes and screens:
Installation 11-3 11-4
Removal 11-3 11-4
Motor, power pack control electric drive 10-2 10-1
Motor, hydraulic system electric 5-4 5-1
Mount, 105-mm gun 13-3 13-1
Mount assembly, TTS. (Tank thermal sight (TTS) AN/VSG-2)
Mounting bracket, water canteen 11-10 11-12
Multimeters, general instruction for use of in troubleshooting 3-2 3-3

Networks box assembly:

Description 5-52 5-26
Installation 5-54 5-26

Index 22
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

N - Continued Paragraph Page

Removal 5-53 5-26

Repair 5-55 5-26
Night viewer, driver's:
Assembly 15-16 15-6
Description 15-12 15-5
Disassembly 15-14 15-5
Installation 15-17 15-6
Removal 15-13 15-5
Repair 15-15 15-6
Nitrogen purging procedures:
Fire control instruments 2-24 2-43
General 2-24 2-41
Periscopes M35E1 and M36E1 2-24 2-43
Receiver/transmitter unit 2-24 2-46
Reticle projector unit 2-24 2-46
Set up of equipment 2-24 2-41
Tank thermal sight AN/VSG-2 2-24 2-48
Telescope M105D 2-24 2-46
Typical procedure 2-24 2-41
No-bak assembly:
Assembly 10-24 10-17
Cleaning 10-22 10-17
Description 10-19 10-13
Disassembly 10-21 10-13
Inspection and repair 10-23 10-17
Installation 10-26 10-17
Removal 10-20 10-13
Test 10-25 10-17
10-27 10-17
No-bak torque test 10-25 10-17
Nylon ballistics shield 13-48 13-29

Oil level gage dipstick 10-52 10-32

Oil level sight gage, hydraulic 10-53 10-32
Oil strainer 10-54 10-32
105-mm gun combination gun mount, description 13-3 13-1
Operating mechanism, breech 13-5 13-1
Optical instrument, R/T unit 15-101 15-41
Organizational Services, PMCS 2-6 2-6
Orifice and hose assembly, gas particulate:
Assembly and installation 17-2 17-5
Cleaning and inspection 17-2 17-5
Removal and disassembly 17-2 17-2
Output pinion adjustment for traverse backlash assembly 10-9 10-6
Output unit:
Description 15-72 15-29

Change 1 Index 23
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

O - Continued Paragraph Page

Installation 15-94 15-37

Removal 15-93 15-37
Override solenoid, hydraulic power solenoid or 10-69 10-44

Pads, protection 11-5 11-10

Palm switches, gunner's 1041 10-26
Parallax check 2-13 2-26
Particulate, gas 17-2 17-1
Passive elbow. (Commander's M36E1 periscope)
Pedestal assembly, gunner's seat 6-13 6-9
Periscope. (M36E1 commander's periscope)
(M35E1 gunner's periscope)
Periscope, M27 seal:
Description 15-6 15-5
Installation 15-8 15-5
Removal 15-7 15-5
Periscope, M35E1 2-16 242
M36E1 2-17 243
Periscope, M35E1:
Description 15-37 15-15
Installation 15-39 15-15
Removal 15-38 15-15
Service 15-40 15-16
Periscope, M36E1:
Description 15-26 15-8
Installation 15-28 15-12
Removal 15-27 15-9
Service 15-29 15-12
Link Assembly:
Removal 15-29.1 15-12.1
Repair 15-29.2 15-12.1
Installation 15-29.3 15-12.1
Adjustment 15-29.4 15-12.4
Periscope, M37:
Description 15-9 15-5
Installation 15-11 15-5
Removal 15-10 15-5
Periscope mount. (Ml 19 commander's periscope)
(M118E1, gunner's periscope)
Periscope stowage boxes:
Installation 11-3 11-4
Removal 11-3 11-4
Pinion adjustment, traverse backlash assembly output (Table 10-1) 10-9 10-8
Pinlock assembly, gearbox 10-13 10-10
Platform battery access door 6-36 6-21
PMCS (Table 2-1) 2-6 2-8
Power box, discharger 1342 13-21
Power converter, TTS. (Tank thermal sight (TTS) AN/VSG-2)
Power pack blower assembly:
Description 5-24 5-14

Index 24 Change 1
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

P - Continued Paragraph Page

Installation 5-27 5-14

Radio interference suppression 5-4 5-1
Inspection and repair 5-26 5-14
Removal 5-25 5-14
Test 5-28 5-14
Power pack control assembly, description 10-2 10-1
Power pack electric drive motor:
Description 10-55 10-34
Installation 10-57 10-34
Removal 10-56 10-34
Power pack reservoir:
Description 10-50 10-32
Drain cock:
Installation 10-51 10-32
Removal 10-51 10-32
Oil level gage dipstick, removal or installation 10-52 10-32
Oil strainer, removal, cleaning, inspection and installation 10-54 10-32
Reservoir liquid level sight gage 10-53 10-32
Power relay box. (Turret power and searchlight relay box)
Power solenoid valve. (Stabilization power solenoid valve)
(Hydraulic power solenoid)
Power traversing of turret (fig 1-5) 1-9 1-7
Pressure gage, hydraulic system 10-68 10-44
Pressure switch, hydraulic 10-67 10-43
Preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS) (Table 2-1) 2-6 2-8
General 2-5 2-6
Organizational services 2-6 2-6
Record of services performed 2-7 2-7
Primary direct fire control system 15-3 15-1
Probe, crosswind sensor:
Cleaning 15-89 15-36.1 I
Description 15-72 15-29
Installation 15-90 15-35
Removal 15-88 15-35
Projector unit, reticle 15-72 15-29
Protection pads:
Description 11-5 11-10
Removal of protection pads 11-6 11-10
General 11-6 11-10
Bonded pads 11-6 11-10
Screw-mounted pads 11-6 11-10
Inspection 11-6 11-10
Installation:
Bonded pads 11-7 11-10
Screw-mounted pads 11-7 11-10
Pump assembly handle firing switch 8-8 8-4
Purging, fire control instruments 2-24 2-43 I
Purging and charging:

Change 1 Index 25
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

P - Continued Paragraph Page

Equipment set up 2-24 241

Procedure 2-24 241
Pushbutton unit, smoke grenade 1343 13-22

Quadrant, gunner's (fig 2-8) 2-12 2-26

Quadrant M13A3, fire control (elevation) 15-18 15-7
Quality assurance/quality control (QA/QC) 1-5 1-2

Racks. (Ammunition stowage boxes.)

Radio interference suppressors:
Capacitors location (Fig 5-1) 5-4 5-1
Causes 5-3 5-1
Description 5-2 5-1
Methods 5-4 5-1
Hydraulic system electric motor 5-4 5-1
Power pack blower assembly motor 5-4 5-1
Turret ventilating blower assembly motor 5-4 5-1
Rangefinder self test 2-21 2-31
Rangefinder system, laser, ^troubleshooting 3-5 3-17
Rate sensor assembly:
Description 5-61 5-28
Installation 5-64 5-28
Removal 5-62 5-28
Rate tachometer:
Description 15-72 15-29
Installation 15-83 15-34
Removal 15-82 15-34
Test 2-23 240
Rear thermal shroud (main gun):
Installation 13-22 13-10
Removal 13-21 13-9
Receiver/transmitter unit:
Description 15-101 15-41
Installation 15-103 15-43
■ Purging 2-24 2-46
Removal 15-102 15-42
Repair 15-104 15-44
Headrest 15-104 15-44
Lamps, lens, seal 15-104 15-44
Optical instrument eye guard 15-104 1545
Record of services performed. 2-7 2-7
Records, maintenance forms and 1-2 1-1
References A-l A-l
Relay assembly (Gun firing relay assembly)

Mas 26 Change 1
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

R - Continued Paragraph Page

Relay box (Turret power and searchlight relay box)

Relay, gun safety 13-17 13-9
Relief valve, hydraulic 10-66 10-43
Repair (See special item)
Repair parts and special tools 1-11 1-10
Replenisher assembly:
Description 13-24 13-11
Installation 13-27 13-11
Removal 13-26 13-11
Replacement of replenisher, hose and filling valve 13-25 13-11
Reporting of equipment improvement recommendations 1-6 1-2
Reservoir drain cock:
Installation t 10-52 10-32
Removal ) 10-51 10-32
Reservoir (hydraulic) liquid level sight gage 10-53 10-32
Reservoir (hydraulic) oil level gage dipstick 10-52 10-32
Reservoir (hydraulic) oil strainer 10-54 10-32
Reservoir, power pack 10-50 10-32
Resistor assembly, adjustable 10-40 10-24
Retainer handle:
Assembly 11-2 11-1
Disassembly 11-2 11-1
Retaining rings, inspection 4-6 4-1
Reticle projector unit:
Description 15-72 15-29
Installation 15-97 15-39
Purging 2-24 245
Removal 15-95 15-39
Service and Repair 15-96 15-39
Test 15-98 15-39
Troubleshooting (Table 3-6) 3-1 3-54
R/T (See Receiver/transmitter unit)

Safety relay, gun 13-17 13-9

Safety, switch, loader's 5-65 5-29
Scope (of manual) 1-1 1-1
Schematic diagrams, electrical and hydraulic : 3-3 3-5
Screwjack assembly, elevation 9-2 9-1
Seal, M27 periscope:
Description 15-6 15-5
Installation 15-8 15-5
Removal 15-7 15-5
Seal, R/T unit 15-104 1544
Searchlight AN/VSS-3A, description 16-1 16-1
Searchlight master control unit, dummy connectors, and mounting parts:
Description 16-1 16-1

Index 27
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

S - Continued Paragraph Page

Installation 16-3 16-1

Removal 16-2 16-1
Searchlight relay box (turret power relay)
Searchlight remote control box, dummy connector, external cable
connector, and mounting parts:
Description 16-4 16-3
Installation 16-6 16-3
Removal 16-5 16-3
Seat (See Commander's observation seat; Commander's seat;
Gunner's seat; and Loader's seat)
Secondary direct sighting and fire control system 15-3 15-1
I Selector valve 10-73 10-50
Self test, ballistics computer 2-20 2-30
Self test, laser rangefinder 2-21 2-31
Sensor (See Crosswind sensor)
Service upon receipt of material:
Deprocessing - equipment 2-2 2-1
- turret 2-2 2-1
Inspection - Fire control 2-2 2-1
- General 2-2 2-1
- Gun elevating 2-2 2-1
- Turret traversing 2-2 2-1
Installation - Equipment 2-2 2-1
- Fire control 2-2 2-1
- Turret equipment (Fig 2-2) 2-2 2-2
Servicing 2-2 2-1
Setting up 2-2 2-1
Servicing instructions 2-2 2-1
Servovalve, traverse covers 10-71 1047
Servovalve, elevation 10-65 10-41
7.62-mm coaxial machine gun 13-28 13-13
7.62-mm coax machine gun fire control system 15-3 15-1
Shaft, drive (See Superelevation actuator)
Shafts and splines, inspection and repair 4-4 4-1
Shield operating handle (Commander's periscope mount Gunner's
periscope mount)
Shield, ballistics 1348 13-29
Shorting connectors used in open test of system cables (Table 3-1) 3-6 3-21
Shroud, rear thermal 13-20 13-9
Shut-off switchbox assembly(See Commander's and gunner's
stabilization shut-off switchbox assembly or Loader's stabilization
emergency shut-off switchbox assembly)
Shut-off valve assembly 10-61 10-40
Sighting and fire control equipment:
General 15-1 15-1
Systems 15-2 15-1
Sighting and fire control systems:
Auxiliary 15-3 15-1 i
Caliber .50 machine gun 15-3 15-2 I

Index 28 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

S - Continued Paragraph Page

Primary direct 15-3 15-1

Secondary direct 15-3 15-1
7.62-mm coax machine gun 15-3 15-1
Slippage test, azimuth indicator 15-71 15-28
Slip ring; turret (Turret electrical contact assembly)
Smoke grenade discharger repair and disassembly 1341 13-21
Smoke grenade harness assembly (6W1):
Installation 1345 13-25
Removal 1345 13-25
Smoke grenade launcher M239:
Description 13-37 13-19
Functional test 1346 13-25
Installation 1340 13-21
Removal 13-38 13-19
Smoke grenade pushbutton unit:
Assembly 1343 13-23
Disassembly. 1343 13-23
Installation 1343 13-23
Removal 1343 13-22
Repair 1343 13-23
Smoke grenade stowage boxes:
Installation 1347 13-27
Removal 1347 13-27
Solenoid (See Hydraulic power solenoid or Override solenoid)
Solenoid valve (See Stabilization power solenoid valve)
Solutions (See Basic solutions or Correction solutions)
Spare barrel stowage box, 7.62-mm coaxial machine gun:
Installation 13-36 13-18
Removal 13-36 13-17
Spares, repair parts and special tools, special test, maintenance, and
diagnostic equipment (TMDE), and other special support equipment .... 1-11 1-10
Special test, maintenance and diagnostic equipment (TMDE) 1-11 1-10
Special tools, repair parts and 1-11 1-10
Special tools, test and support equipment (Table 1-1) 1-11 1-10
Splines, shafts and, inspection and repair 4-4 4-1
Stabilization control selector:
Description 544 5-22
Inspection and repair 547 5-22
Installation 546 5-22
Removal 545 5-22

Change 4 Index 29
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

S - Continued _ .
Paragraph Page
Stabilization emergency shut-off switchbox assembly 5-73 5-33
Stabilization filter element, replacement 10-72.1 10-48
Stabilization power solenoid valve:
Description 10-70 10-45
Installation 10-70 10-45
Removal 10-70 10-45
Stabilization rate sensor assembly:
Description 5-61 5-28
Inspection 5-63 5-28
Installation 5-64 5-28
Removal 5-62 5-28
Stabilization shut-off switchbox assembly 5-83 5-37
Stabilization test set:
Description 12-10 12-11
Lens and lamp replacement 12-11 12-13
Operational Check - STS 12-12 12-13
Stop switch, last round 14-5 14-3
Storage, administrative 1-3 1-1
Stowage boxes, smoke grenade:
Installation 1347 13-27
Removal 1347 13-27
Stowage box, spare barrel, 7.62-mm coaxial machine gun 13-36 13-17
Stowage boxes:
Ammunition 11-2 11-1
Periscope 11-3 11-4
Stowage straps, cargo 11-11 11-12
Strainer, oil 10-54 10-32
Straps, cargo stowage 11-11 11-12
STS (Stabilization test set)
Studs, removal of 4-8 4-2
Superelevating actuator (Superelevation actuator)
Superelevation actuator:
Description 1042 10-30
Installation 1044 10-30
Removal 1043 10-30
Test 1045 10-31
Superelevation actuator drive linkage (Superelevation actuator
drive shaft)
Superelevation actuator drive shaft:
Description 1046 10-31
Inspection 1048 10-32
Installation 1049 10-32
Removal 1047 10-31
Suppressors (Radio interference suppressors)
Switch, gun firing trigger 9-5 9-1
Switchbox assembly (Commander's and gunner's stabilization
shut-off switchbox assembly or Loader's stabilization emergency
shut-off switch box assembly)
Switch:

Index 30 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

S - Continued Paragraph Page

Gunner's control handle 10-41 10-26

Hand elevating pump assembly hand firing 8-8 8-4
Hydraulic pressure switch 10-67 10-43
Last round stop switch 14-5 14-3
Loader's safety switch 5-65 5-29
Switch, interference (Gun elevation interference switch)
Switch, interference (Traverse safety limit (interference) switch)
Synchronization and alinement procedure 2-15 2-27
System cable diagrams
Laser range finder 15-2 15-4
Troubleshooting 3-3 3-5
Turret FO-1
M21 Ballistics Computer System (Fig 15-30) 15-99 15-40
System cables - LRF 15-5 15-2
System cables - M21 ballistics computer system 15-4 15-2 I
System cables test procedure for M21 computer system 3-6 3-17 I
System cables 3W1, 3W2, 3W3:
Description 15-72 15-30
Installation 15-100 15-39
Removal 15-99 15-39
Table T3-2 3-21
Test procedure 3-6 3-17
System cables 3W33, 3W34, 3W36 LRF:
Installation 15-108 15-46
Removal 15-107 15-46
Table T3-3 3-30
Troubleshooting (3W33 and 3W34) 3-7 3-23
Troubleshooting (3W36) 3-8 3-31

Tables: (See List of Tables at front of manual)

Output pinion adjustment 10-1 10-8
PMCS 2-1 2-8
Shorting connectors 3-1 3-21
Special tools TM 1-12
System cables 3-2 3-21
Troubleshooting 3-6 3-54
Turret cable and connectors 3-4 3-34
Tabulated data 1-9 1-3
Tachometer, rate:
Description 15-72 15-29
Installation 15-83 15-34
Removal 15-82 15-34
Test 2-23 2-40
Tank thermal sight (TTS) AN/VSG-2:
Ballistic shield:
Assembly 15-116 15-63 g

Change 2 Index 31
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

T - Continued Paragraph Page

15-47
15-61
15-63
15-61
Ballistic shield control handle:
15-60
15-60
15-60
15-60
15-60
15-60
15-61
15-60
15-59
Cables: (Interconnecting cable 3W4)
(System cable)
Commander's display:
15-47
15-49
15-47
15-50
15-50
Gunner's display:
15-109 15-47
15-53
15-50
15-111 15-50
15-53
15-53
Head assembly:
15-47
15-55
15-53
Interconnecting cable 3W4:
15-64
15-64
15-64
15-47
Mount assembly:
15-57
15-57
15-47
15-57
15-57
15-57
15-59
Power converter:
15-47 .

Index 32 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

T - Continued Paragraph Page

Installation 15-113 15-57

Removal 15-113 15-56
Service 15-113 15-57
Purging procedure 2-24 241
System cable:
1W5 15-109 15-47
3W3 15-109 15-47
3W4 15-109 15-47
Troubleshooting 3-10 3-31
Telescope eyepiece hanger:
Installation 15-53 15-21
Removal 15-52 15-21
Telescope filter box, M105D telescope:
Installation 15-55 15-21
Removal 15-54 15-21
Telescope headrest:
Installation 15-51 15-21
Removal 15-50 15-21
Telescope, M105D:
Description 15-46 15-19
Eyepiece hanger 15-52 15-21
Filter box 15-46 15-19
Headrest, removal 15-50 15-19
Light source 15-46 15-19
Mount Ml 14 15-46 15-19
Removal 15-47 15-19
Service 15-48 15-19
Telescope mount, Ml 14:
Installation 15-57 15-24
Light source control, removal 15-58 15-24
Removal 15-56 15-21
Test:
Azimuth indicator accuracy 15-70 15-28
Ballistics computer system solutions 2-22 2-33
Driven member - no-bak 10-25 10-17
Eleven-inch arm adjustment 2-16 2-28
Five-inch arm adjustment 2-17 2-29
Laser range finder 2-21 2-31
Rate tachometer 2-23 240
Torque, no-bak 10-25 10-17
Turret traversing 10-27 10-17
Test set (See Cable test set; Stabilization test set; Turret electrical
system test set)
TESTS (Turret electrical system test set)
Thermal shroud, rear (main gun) 13-21 13-9
Threaded parts, inspection and repair 4-5 4-1
TMDE 1-11 1-10
Tool and test equipment rquirements B-3 B-2

Index 33
TM 9-2350-253-20-2
INDEX - Continued

T - Continued Paragraph Page

Torque specifications 4-14 4-2

Torque test, no-bak 10-25 10-17
Torque transmission diagram:
Power traversing (Fig. 1-5) 1-9 1-7
Manual traversing (Fig. 1-6) 1-9 1-7
Transmission diagram (See Torque transmission diagram)
Transmitter/receiver unit 15-101 15-41
Traverse backlash cylinder assembly:
Adjustment 10-9 10-6.2
Antibacklash mechanism tests 10-4.1 10-4
Assembly 10-7 10-6.2
Description 10-3 10-4
Disassembly 10-5 . 10-6.2
Inspection 10-6 10-6.2
Installation 10-8 10-6.2
Output pinion adjustment (table 10-1) 10-9 10-8
Removal 10-4 10-4
Traverse safety limit (interference) switch:
Adjustment 5-16 5-11
Description 5-13 5-9
Installation 5-15 5-10
Removal 5-14 5-10
Traverse lock, cupola 9-10 9-6
Traverse lock assembly:
Description 6-25 6-18
Installation 6-27 6-19
Removal 6-26 6-18
Repair 6-28 6-19
Traverse stabilizer valve covers 10-71 10-46
Traversing components (See Manual elevating and traversing components)
Traversing drive 6-2 8-1
Traversing gearbox pin lock assembly: -
Cleaning 10-16 10-12
Description • 10-13 10-10
Inspection 10-16 10-12
Installation 10-18 10-12
Installation of components 10-17 10-12
Removal 10-14 10-12
Removal of components 10-15 10-12
Repair 10-16 10-12
Testing pin lock assembly 10-17.1 10-12
Trigger adjustment (Machine gun, 7.62-mm)
Trigger and palm switches, gunner's 10-41 10-26
Trigger switch, gun firing, caliber .50 machinegun 9-5 9-1
Troubleshooting (Table 3-6) 3-1 3-54
Computer system, XM21 3-4 3-5
Laser rangefinder system 3-5 3-17
Multimeters used in 3-2 3-3
Reticle projector unit (Malfunction 96, table 3-6)

Index 34 Change 2
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

T - Continued Paragraph Page

Scope 3-1 3-1

System cable 3W36 3-8 3-31
System cables 3W33 and 3W34 3-7 3-23
System cable 3W4 3-11 3-31
Tank thermal sight 3-10 3-31
Tube assembly, main gun 13-18 13-8.2 ■
Turret and gun control system with stab (Fig. 1-4) 1-9 1-6
Turret armament:
Breechblock group 13-4 13-1
Combination gun mount, 105-mm gun 13-3 13-1
General 13-1 13-1
Main gun 13-2 13-1
Turret blisters:
Description 6-29 6-20
Installation:
Left blister 6-35 6-21
Right blister 6-34 6-21
Removal:
Left blister 6-32 6-20
Right blister 6-30 6-20
Repair:
Left blister 6-33 6-21
Right blister 6-31 6-20
Turret cable and connector cross reference (Table 3-4) 3-9 3-34
Turret electrical contact assembly (slip ring):
Description 5-10 5-6
General 5-1 5-1
Installation 5-12 5-7
Removal 5-11 5-6
Turret electrical system data 1-9 1-4
Turret electrical system test set (TESTS)
Description 12-3 12-1
Electrical schematics for use with 3-3 3-5
Maintenance 12-7 12-11
Operating instructions 12-4 12-1
Preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS) 12-5 12-1
Self test 12-6 12-2
Troubleshooting 12-8 12-11
Turret equipment:
Deprocessing 2-2 2-1
Installation (Fig. 2-2) 2-2 2-1
Turret exterior stowage brackets, straps, machine gun interrupter,
and gun shield cover:
Description 11-8 11-12
.50 caliber machine gun interrupter 11-9 11-12
Gun shield cover 11-12 11-12
Replacement of brackets and straps 11-10 11-12

Change 2 Index 35
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

T - Continued Paragraph Page

Turret hydraulic system service 2-10 2-20

Turret hydraulic system services, general 2-8 2-18
Turret platform battery access door:
Description 6-36 6-21
Installation - hinge and catch 6-38 6-21
Removal - hinge and catch 6-37 6-21
Turret power relay and circuit breaker box:
Description 5-37 5-20
Installation 5-39 5-20
Removal 5-38 5-20
Turret radio interference suppressors 5-2 5-1
Turret traverse lock assembly:
Description 6-25 6-18
Installation 6-27 6-19
Removal 6-26 6-18
Repair 6-28 6-19
Turret traversing mechanism, general 10-1 10-1
Turret traversing system:
Data 1-9 1-3
Hydraulic schematic (Fig. 1-3) 1-9 1-5
Inspection 2-2 2-1
Turret ventilator blower:
Description 5-21 5-12
Installation 5-23 5-13
Radio interference suppression 5-3 5-1
Removal - 5-22 5-12
Turret ventilator blower distribution box assembly:
Assembly 5-90 5-38
Description 5-86 5-38
Disassembly 5-88 5-38
Installation.^ 5-91 5-39
Removal 5-87 5-38
Repair 5-89 5-38
Turret ventilator blower switch 5-86 5-38

Use of English and Metric system units 1-7 1-2

Utility outlet 5-86 5-3«

Valve (Deck clearance valve; Elevation servovalve; Elevation shut-off

valve assembly; Hydraulic relief valve; Hydraulic valves and filters;
and Traverse servovalve)
Valve, deck clearance 10-10 10-9
Valve, pilot (Elevation pilot check valves or Traverse pilot check
valves)
Valve, power solenoid 10-70 10-45
Valve, selector 10-73 10-48

Index 36
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

V - Continued Paragraph Page

Valves, traverse stabilization, covers 10-71 10-46

Variable resistor (Adjustable resistor assembly, gunner's control
assembly)
Ventilator blower, turret 5-21 5-12
Ventilator blower assembly:
Description 5-21 5-12
Installation 5-23 5-13
Removal 5-22 5-12
Ventilator blower distribution box assembly (Turret ventilator
blower distribution box assembly)
Ventilator blower switch 5-86 5-38
Viewer, driver's night vision 15-12 15-5
Vision blocks:
Description 14-6 14-3
Installation 14-9 14-4
Removal 14-8 14-4
Service 14-7 14-4

Warning:
Carbon monoxide Inside cover
Laser light Inside cover
Water canteen mounting bracket:
Installation 11-10 11-12
Removal 11-10 11-12
Welds, inspection and repair 4-9 4-2
Wire strand limits (Table 4-1) 4-15 4-5
Wiring harnesses and cables:
Broken wire strand limits (Table 4-1) 4-15 4-5
General inspection and repair 4-15 4-2
Installation, jumper wires 4-15 4-3
Repair of bent connector pins 4-15 4-5
Repair of insulation 4-15 4-3
Replacement of connectors 4-15 4-3
Replacement of plugs and receptacles 4-15 4-3
Replacement of terminals 4-15 4-3
Soldering 4-15 4-2

XM21 ballistics computer system:

Ammo select units 15-72 15-29
Ballistic solutions test 2-22 2-33
Cable diagram (Fig. 15-30) 15-72 15-40
Cant unit 15-72 15-29
Computer unit 15-72 15-29
Crosswind sensor EMI filter 15-72 15-29

Index 37
TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INDEX - Continued

X - Continued Paragraph Page

Crosswind sensor mast 15-72 15-29

Crosswind sensor probe 15-72 15-29
Description 15-72 15-28
Gunner's control unit 15-72 15-29
Output unit 15-72 15-29
Rate tachometer unit 15-72 15-29
Reticle projector unit 15-72 15-29
Self test 2-20 2-30
System cables 15-72 15-30
System cables test procedure 3-6 3-17
System description 15-72 15-28
Tests (See specific tests)
Ballistics computer system self test 2-20 2-30
Ballistic computer system solutions test 2-22 2-33
Computer system cables 3W1, 3W2, and 3W3 3-6 3-17
Computer system lead circuits test 2-23 2-40
Fire control system tests 2-19 2-30
Laser rangefinder (LRF) self test 2-21 2-31
LRF system cable 3W36 3-8 3-31
LRF system cables 3W33 and 3W34 3-7 3-23
Troubleshooting 3-4 3-5
XM21 Ballistic computer solutions tests 2-22 2-33
XM21 computer unit:
Description 15-72 15-29
Installation 15-74 15-30
Removal 15-73 15-30
XM21 gunner's control unit:
Description 15-72 15-29
Installation 15-76 15-31
Removal 15-75 15-31
Repair 15-77 15-31

Zero pressure check, hydraulic 2-10 2-20

Index 38
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

E. C. MEYER
General, United State* Army
Official: Chief of Staff

J. C. PENNINGTON
Major General, United State* Army
The Adjutant General

Distribution:

To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-37, Organizational

Maintenance requirements for M60A3 Tank Turret*
*
 SiOjMiElTlHIIINIGlWjRONG WITH THIS PUBLICATION?
FROM: (PMNTVOUn UMTS COMPUTE
THEN. . JOT DOWN THE
DOPE ABOUT IT ON THIS (Your Mailing Address)
FORM, CAREFULLY TEAR IT
OUT. FOLD IT AND DROF IT
IN THE MAIL' j DATE SENT

PUBLICATION DATE PUBLICATION TITVE

TM 9-XXXX-XXX-XX (date) (Insert title)
EXACT PIN-POINT WHERE IT IS
TABU IT:

3 Item 10. Change illustration Reason: Tube end

shown assembled on wrong side of lever cam

109 51 Item 3. The NSN and P/N are not listed on the
AMDF nor the MCRL Request correct NSN and P/N
be furnished*

2-8 2-1 Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services.

Item 7. under "Items to be inspected" should
be changed to read as follows: Firing linkage and
firing mechanism pawl.
12 l-6a Since there are both 20- and 30- round magazines for
this rifle, data on both should be listed.

SA m PL£

OA TITLt «*

JOHN DOE SP/3 XX-XXXX

PREVIOUS t DITI ONI P S -IF YOUR OUTFIT WANTS TO ABOUT VOUR
DAi'STt. 2028-2 /RECOMMENDATION MAKE A COPY Of THIS
I QlVt IT TO YOUR
 V

FILL IN YOUR
UNIT'S ADDRESS
FOLD BACK
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

POSTAGE AND FEES PAID

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
DOD 314
OFFICIAL BUSINESS
PENALTY FOR PRIVATE USE $300

Commander
US Army Armament Materiel Readiness Command
ATTN: DRSAR-MAS
Rock Island, IL 61299
 RECOMMENDED CHANGE8TO EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS

SIMM® WIM W.TH THIS PUBLICATION?

FROM: (PRINT YOUR UNIT'S COMPLETE ADDRESS)
THEN. . JOT DOWN THE 1
DOPE ABOUT IT ON THIS
FORM, CAREFULLY TEAR IT
OUT. FOLD IT AND DROP IT
IN THE MAIL' A DATE SENT

PUBLICATION NUMBER PUBLICATION DATE PUBLICATION TITLE

Tank, Combat, Full Tracked:
TM 9-2350-253-20-2 15 Apr 80 105- MM Gun, M60A3, (Turret)
BE EXACT. .PIN-POINT WHERE IT 18 IN THIS SPACE TILL WHAT It 1
PAOI FKHMC TABLI AND WHAT SHOULD BE DONE ABOUT IT:
NO NO NO

NAM. OKAOC ON TITLE AMD

P S -IF YOUR OUTFIT WANTS TO KNOW ABOUT YOUR

RECOMMENDATION MAKE A CARBON COPY OF THIS
AND GIVE IT TO YOUR HEADQUARTERS
1

<
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

t£TL BLOWER

HJTLET
2
TURRET
BLOWER SW
,A BOX IA3
IW8
I
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

D CONNECTOR

TBI-7

J
<

I
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

II3C

LOADERS
<^ FIRING R, SAFETY
J SQUIB A IS2

■4/ f
VV CO-AX M/G
. FIRING
<^ -±r SOL
■> IK2

GROUNO

IT EST* (TEST)

P22
TEST}
I J4AJLg&jL

OX IAS
AR 703858
ja electrical schematic diagram (4 of 13)
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

INTERCOM
INTERFACE

AR 703859
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

1/ \^ s^s \i/ >4/ V V V

L M N 0 P R S U V W X
V V V V V V V V V V V SEARCHLIGHT
ROOF
DISCONNECT
IJ I

1
IWI6EI

SHIELD TO
CONNECTOR

AR 703860

upola electrical schematic diagram (6 of 13)

 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

62 63 64 65 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 84 85
VV V VVYV YYYYYYYY YYYY Y

62 636465 69 TO 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 84 85

AR 703861

>la electrical schematic diagram (7 of 13)

 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

AR 703862

electrical schematic diagram (8 of 13)

 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

AR 703863

ola electrical schematic diagram (9 of 13)

 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

E FF S6 HH
V V V

/■, \i/ si/ HH

FF GG \1/
I \/ \/ \/
1JI PI + I600V p2 j|
COIL
".III RETURN <B<
SHIELD RTN I I <C<
INTERLOCK
3 W36

AR 703864 ,
pola electrical schematic diagram (10 of 13) J
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2

AR 703865
trical schematic diagram (11 of 13)
M - PASSIVE SYSTEM TM 9-2350-253-20-2

ROUND 50 CAL. WIND

SING MACHINE CUN SKNSOR
ITCH 1K6 UNIT
S6 3A13
V
I

TO CUPOLA TERMINAL BOARD 1SR2

L.H
CONTACT
BOARD
cz

>31J2

p< CANT
— << UNIT
6J1 3A6

P3 RETICLE
-<< PROJECTOR
12J1 UNiT
uk< 3A12
12J3
RADIO
POWER
INTERFACE
Jl

INTERCOM
INTERFACE

cal schematic diagram (12 of 13)

Change 4
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2
RAM - TANK THERMAL SIGHT (TTS)
f KOUND 50 ( AL WIND
INSINO MACHINE GUN SENSOR
priTUI 1K6 UNIT
1S6 3A13
-*7~
V
"1
P5 V H2 WIND
SENSOR
MAST
3AS
|T TO CUPOLA TERMINAL BOARD 1SR2
V
L.H. R.H "1
1W1 EMI
CONTACT CONTACT 1091123R
!36 l| FILTER
BOARD BOARD 3A14
WANDER'S CUPOLA
KNIll.K INTERCONNECTING
IA10 BOX
1674136 1A7
10873488
Jl v

2J2 TTS
GUNNER'S
DISPLAY

■ 3W4
f-
4J1
TTS POWER
CONVERTER
4J2
HEAD ASSY
IJ2 U
COMMANDER S n n
DISPLAY
3JI
INTERCOM n
INTERFACE

trical schematic diagram (13 of 13)

Change 4
 PIN LOCK
SHOWN IN
OIS ENGAGED
POSITION

POWER SOLENOID solenoid electrically

CONTROLLED FROM GUNNER'S POWER CONTROL SWITCH,
SOLENOID SHOWN IN ENERGIZED POSITION

SERVO VALVE
PILOT CHECK
VALVES

. T sSSSSVItb
TRAVE
STABILIZER
MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY
COMMANDER'S OVERRIDE PISTON
TRAVERSING SPOOL
STABILIZATION SOLENOID VALVE

GUNNERS
CONTROL
ASSEMBLY
NEUTRAL POSITION
ELEVATING SPOOL BACK LASH CYLINDER

FILTER

u] /MAIN ACCUMULATOR
/ NITROGEN PRECHARGE
PRESSURE 525 - 25 PSI

PRESSURE SWITCH
CONTROLS THE TURRET
POWER RELAY
PRESSURE GAGE

AR702749

Figure FO-2 Hydraulic system oil flow with gunner's and commander's control handles in
neutral position, power mode
 MOlVniOV NOIlVA313a3dnS

z-oz-egg-oscz-6 wx
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2
C5

CHANGE HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
NO. 5 Washington, DC, 12 April 1988

ORGANIZATIONAL
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FOR

TANK, COMBAT, FULL TRACKED;

105-MM GUN, M60A3
(2350-00-148-6548)
(2350-01-061-2306) TTS
TURRET

TM 9-2350-253-20-2, 15 April 1980, is changed as follows:

1. Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below.

2. New or changed material is indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to the

material.

3. New or changed illustrations are indicated by a miniature pointing hand

highlighting the change.

Remove Pages Insert Pages

2- 13 and 2-14 2- 13 and 2-14
3-51 through 3-54 3- 51 through 3-54
3-59 and 3-60 3-59 and 3-60
3-133 through 3-138 3-133 through 3-138
15-27 through 15-30 15-27 through 15-30

4. File this change sheet in the back of the publication for reference purposes.
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

CARL E. VUONO
General. United States Army
Chief of Staff

Official:

R. L DILWORTH
Brigadier General, United States Army
The Adjutant General

DISTRIBUTION:

To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-37, Unit Maintenance

requirements for Tank, Combat, Full-Tracked, 105-MM, M60A3 and ITS.
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2
C4

CHANGE HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
No. 4 Washington, DC 23 December 1987

ORGANIZATIONAL
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FOR

TANK, COMBAT, FULL TRACKED:

105-MM GUN, M60A3
(2350-00-148-6548)
(2350-01-061-2306) TTS
TURRET

TM 9-2350-253-20-2, 15 April 1980, is changed as follows:

1. Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below.

2. New or changed material is indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to the material.

3. New or changed illustrations are indicated by a miniature pointing hand highlighting the change.

Remove Pages Insert Pages Remove Pages Insert Pages

i and ii i and ii 3-126.1 and 3-126.2 3-126.1 and 3-126.2

v and vi v and vi 3-131 and 3-132 3-131 and 3-132
1-5 and 1-6 1-5 and 1-6 5-27 and 5-28 5-27 and 5-28
2-9 through 2-14 2-9 through 2-14 10-25 and 10-26 10-25 and 10-26
2-27 through 2-34 2-27 through 2-34 10-41 and 10-42 10-41 and 10-42
3-19 and 3-20 3- 19 and 3-20 10-45 and 10-46 10-45 and 10-46
3-31 and 3-32 3-31 and 3-32 12-9 and 12-10 12-9 and 12-10
(3-33 blank)/3-34 (3-33 blank)/3-34 15-49 and 15-50 15-49 and 15-50
3-37 through 3-40 3-37 through 3-40 A-l and A-2 A-l and A-2
3-45 through 3-48 3-45 through 3-48 B-9 and B-10 B-9 and B-10
3-57 and 3-58 3-57 and 3-58 B-13 through B-28 B-13 through
3-61 and 3-62 3-61 and 3-62 B-19/(B-20 blank)
3-69 through 3-82 3-69 through 3-82 Index 9 and Index 10 Index 9 and Index 10
3-85 and 3-86 3-85 and 3-86 Index 29 and Index 30 Index 29 and Index 30
3-89 and 3-90 3-89 and 3-90 FO-1 (12 of 13) FO-1 (12 of 13)
3-93 through 3-96 3-93 through 3-96 FO-1 (13 of 13) FO-1 (13 of 13)
3-98.1(3-98.2 blank) 3-98.1 and 3-98.2
3-99 through 3-104 3-99 through 3-104
3-104.1/(3-104.2 blank) 3-104.1/(3-104.2 blank)

File this change sheet in the back of the publication for reference purposes.
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

CARL E. VUONO
General. United States Army
Chief of Staff

Official:

R. L. DILWORTH
Brigadier General, United States Army
The Adjutant General

DISTRIBUTION:

To be distributed in accordnance with DA Form 12-37, Unit Maintenance

requirements for Tank, Combat, Full-Tracked, 105-MM, M60A3 and TTS.
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2
C3

CHANGE HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
No. 3 Washington, DC, 3 September 1987

ORGANIZATIONAL
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FOR

TANK, COMBAT, FULL TRACKED:

105-MM GUN, M60A3
(2350-00-148-6548)
(2350-01-061-2306) TTS
TURRET

TM 9-2350-253-20-2, 15 April 1980, is changed as follows:

1. Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below.

2. New or changed material is indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to the material.

3. New or changed illustrations are indicated by a miniature pointing hand highlighting the
change.

Remove Pages Insert Pages

v and vi v and vi
2-3 and 2-4 2-3 and 2-4
2- 15 and 2-16 2- 15 and 2-16
3- 77 and 3-78 3- 77 and 3-78
15-35 and 15-36 15-35 and 15-36
15-47 through 15-58 15-47 through 15-58

4. File this change sheet in the back of the publication for reference purposes.
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

CARL E. VUONO
General. United States Army
Chief of Staff

Official:

R. L. DILWORTH
Brigadier General, United States Army
The Adjutant General

DISTRIBUTION:

To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-37, Unit Maintenance Require

ments for Tank, Combat, Full Tracked, 105-MM, M60A3 and TTS.
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2
C2

CHANGE HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
No. 2 Washington, DC 17 March 1987

ORGANIZATIONAL
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FOR

TANK, COMBAT, FULL TRACKED:

105-MM GUN, M60A3
(2350-00-148-6548)
(2350-01-061-2306) TTS
TURRET

TM 9-2350-253-20-2, 15 April 1980, is changed as follows:

1. Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below.

2. New or changed material is indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to the material.

3. New or changed illustrations are indicated by a miniature pointing hand highlighting the
change.

Remove Pages Insert Pages Remove Pages Insert Pages

Warning pages a and b 3-93 through 3-98 3-93 through 3-98

i through x i through x None 3-98.1/(3-98.2 blank)
xMxii blank) xi/(xii blank) 3-99 through 3-104 3-99 through 3-104
1-1 and 1-2 1-1 and 1-2 None 3-104.1/(3-104.2 blank)
1-5 and 1-6 1-5 and 1-6 3-107 through 3-122 3-107 through 3-122
1-11 through 1-14 1- 11 through 1-14 3-125 and 3-126 3-125 and 3-126
21 and 2-2 2- 1 and 2-2 3-126.1 and 3-126.2 3-126.1 and 3-126.2
2-5 and 2-6 2-5 and 2-6 3-127/(3-128 blank) 3-127 and 3-128
2-9 through 2-12 2-9 through 2-12 3-129 through 3-138 3-129 through 3-138
None 2-12.1/(2-12.2 blank) 3- 139/(3-140 blank) 3- 139/(3-140 blank)
2-13 and 2-14 2-13 and 2-14 4-2.1/(4-2.2 blank) 4-2.1/(4-2.2 blank)
2-17 through 2-26 2-17 through 2-26 5- 1 through 5-6 5- 1 through 5-6
None 2-26.1/(2-26.2 blank) 5-9 through 5-22 5-9 through 5-22
2-27 through 2-34 2-27 through 2-34 5-29 through 5-36 5-29 through 5-36
2-39 through 2-50 2-39 and 2-40 6- 1 and 6-2 6- 1 and 6-2
3-17 through 3-20 3- 17 through 3-20 6-7 and 6-8 6-7 and 6-8
None 3-20.1/(3-20.2 blank) 6- 19 through 6-22 6- 19 through 6-22
3-21 through 3-24 3-21 through 3-24 7- 1 through 7-10 7- 1 through 7-10
3-27 and 3-28 3-27 and 3-28 9- 1 through 9-4 9- 1 through 9-4
3-31 and 3-32 3-31 and 3-32 10-3 through 10-6 10-3 through 10-6
None 3-32.1 through 3-32.4 None (10-6.1 blank)/10-6.2
3-33 and 3-34 (3-33 blank)/3-34 10-7 and 10-8 10-7 and 10-8
3-37 through 3-40 3-37 through 3-40 10-11 and 10-12 10-11 and 10-12
3-43 and 3-44 3-43 and 3-44 10-17 through 10-28 10-17 through 10-28
3-47 through 3-64 3-47 through 3-64 10-31 and 10-32 10-31 and 10-32
>None 3-64.1/(3-64.2 blank) 10-35 and 10-36 10-35 and 10-36
3-65 through 3-86 3-65 through 3-86 10-39 through 10-48 10-39 through 10-50
Remove Pages Insert Pages Remove Pages Insert Pages
11-1 through 11-4 11-1 through 11-4 15-61 and 15-62 15-61 and 15-62
None 11-4.1/(11-4.2 blank) 15-63/(15-64 blank) 15-63 and 15-64
11-5 and 11-6 11-5 and 11-6 None 18-1/(18-2 blank)
11-9 through 11-12 11-9 through 11-12 A-l and A-2 A-l and A-2
12- 1 and 12-2 12- 1 and 12-2 B-13 through B-18 B-13 through B-18
12-11 and 12-12 12-11 and 12-12 B-19/(B-20 blank) B-19 and B-20
12- 13/(12-14 blank) 12- 13/(12-14 blank) None B-21 through B-28
13- 1 through 13-8 13- 1 through 13-8 C-l and C-2 C-l and C-2
None 13-8.1 and 13-8.2 None C-3/(C-4 blank)
13-9 through 13-12 13-9 through 13-12 Index 3 and Index 4 Index 3 and Index 4
13- 15 through 13-28 13- 15 through 13-28 Index 7 through Index 7 through
14-7 and 14-8 14-7 and 14-8 Index 14 Index 14
15- 1 through 15-4 15- 1 through 15-4 Index 19 and Index 19 and
15-15 and 15-16 15-15 and 15-16 Index 20 Index 20
15-19 through 15-22 15-19 through 15-22 Index 27 through Index 27 through
15-27 through 15-36 15-27 through 15-36 Index 36 Index 36
15-36.1/(15-36.2 blank) 15-36.1 and 15-36.2 FO-1 (3 of 13) FO-1 (3 of 13)
15-37 through 15-46 15-37 through 15-46 FO-1 (12 of 13) FO-1 (12 of 13)
15-49 and 15-50 15-49 and 15-50 FO-1 (13 of 13) FO-1 (13 of 13)
15-53 through 15-58 15-53 through 15-58

File this change sheet in the back of the publication for reference purposes.

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

JOHN A. WICKHAM, JR
General, United States Ar,
Chief of Staff

Official:

R. L. DILWORTH
Brigadier General, United States Army
The Adjutant General

DISTRIBUTION:

To be distributed in accordance vith DA Form 12-37, Unit Maintenance requirements

for Tank, Combat, Full-Tracked, 105-MM, M60A3 and TTS.
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2
CI

CHANGE
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
NO. 1 Washington, DC, 30 June 1983

ORGANIZATIONAL
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FOR

TANK, COMBAT, FULL TRACKED:

105-MM GUN, M60A3
(2350-00-148-6548)
(2350-01-061-2306) TTS
TURRET

TM 9-2350-253-20-2, 15 April 1980 is changed as follows:

1. Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below. New or changed material
is indicated by a vertical bar in the margin of the page. New or revised illustrations
are indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to the illustration identification number.

Remove Pages Insert Pages

iii thru vi iii thru vi

ix and x ix and x
None 2-34.1/(2-34.2 blank)
2-35 and 2-36 2-35 and 2-36
2-41 thru 2-48 2-41 thru 2-50
3-51 and 3-52 3-51 and 3-52
None 3-126.1 and 3-126.2
3-127 and 3-128 3-127/(3-128 blank)
4-1 and 4-2 4-1 and 4-2
None 4-2.1/(4-2.2 blank)
15-7 thru 15-12 15-7 thru 15-12
None 15-12.1 thru 15-12.5/(15-12.6 blank)
15-13 thru 15-16 15-13 thru 15-16
15-31 and 15-32 15-31 and 15-32
15-35 and 15-36 15-35 and 15-36
None 15-36.1/(15-36.2 blank)
15-45 and 15-46 15-45 and 15-46
A-l and A-2 A-l and A-2
C-l and C-2 C-l and C-2
Index 7 and Index 8 Index 7 and Index 8
Index 23 thru Index 26 Index 23 thru Index 26

2. File this change sheet in front of the publication for reference purposes.
 TM 9-2350-253-20-2
C 1

By Older of the Secretary of the Army:

E. C. MEYER
General, United States Army
Official: Chief of Staff

ROBERT M. JOYCE
Major General, United States Army
The Adjutant General

Distribution:

To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-37, Organizational Maintenance

requirements for M60A3 Tank Turret.
it U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE : 1989 O - 242-451 (5152)
 THE METRIC SYSTEM AND EQUIVALENTS

LINEAR MEASURE SQUARE MEASURE

1 Centimeter - 10 Millimeters = 0.01 Meters - 0.3937 Inches 1 Sq Centimeter' 100 Sq Millimeters- 0.155 Sq Inches
1 Meter= 100 Centimeters ■ 1 000 Mi 1 1 .meters = 39.37 Inches 1 Sq Meter- 10,000 Sq Centimeters- 10.76 Sq Feet
1 Kilometer= 1000 Meters- 0.621 Miles 1 Sq Kilometer^ 1,000,000 Sq Meters- 0.386 Sq Miles
WEIGHTS CUBIC MEASURE
1 Gram = 0.001 Kilograms = 1000 Milligrams =0.035 Ounces 1 Cu Centimeter =-1 000 Cu Millimeters =0.06 Cu Inches
1 Kilogram—1000 Grams =2.2 Lb 1 Cu Meter =1,000,000 Cu Centimeters =35.31 Cu Feet
1 Metric Ton =1000 Kilograms =1 Megagram =1 .1 Short Tons
TEMPERATURE
LIQUID MEASURE
5/9 (°F - 32) -PC
1 Milliliter =0.001 L,te-s= 0.0338 Fluid Ounces 212" Fahrenheit is equivalent to 100° Celsius
1 Liter= 1000 Mill, I, ters = 33.82 Fluid Ounces 90° Fahrenheit is equivalent to 32.2" Celsius
32" Fahrenheit is equivalent to 0° Celsius
9/5 C" +32= Fe

APPROXIMATE CONVERSION FACTORS

TO CHANGE TO MULTIPLY BY
. 2.540
Feet . 0.305
Yards . Meters , 0.914
Miles . 1.609
. Square Centimeters . . . 6.451
. 0.093
0.836
. Square Kilometers. . . . 2.590
Acres . Square Hectometers . . . 0.405
0.028
, 0.765
. Milliliters , 29.573
. 0.473
. 0.946
. 3.785
, 28.349
0.454
, 0.907
. 1.356
Pounds per Square Inch. 6.895
. Kilometers per Liter . . 0.425
. Kilometers per Hour. . . 1.609

TO CHANGE TO MULTIPLY BY
Centimeters . Inches 0.394
Meters . . . . Feet 3.280
Meters . . . . Yards 1.094
Kilometers. . Miles 0.621
Square Centimeters. . Square Inches 0.155
Square Meters Square Feet 10.764
Square Meters Square Yards 1.196
Square Kilometers .... Square Miles 0.386
Square Hectometers. . . . Acres 2.471
Cubic Meters Cubic Feet 35.315
Cubic Meters Cubic Yards 1.308
Milliliters Fluid Ounces 0.034
Liters Pints 2.113
Liters Quarts 1.057
Liters Gallons 0.264
Grams Ounces 0.035
Kilograms Pounds 2.205
Metric Tons Short Tons 1.102
Newton-Meters Pound-Feet 0.738
Kilopascals Pounds per Square Inch . 0.145
Kilometers per Liter. . . Miles per Gallon .... 2.354
Kilometers per Hour . . . Miles per Hour 0.621 TA070591
I ■>